[latexrefman-commits] [SCM] latexrefman updated: r679 - trunk

[jimhefferon at gnu.org.ua]

Author: jimhefferon
Date: 2018-07-03 18:04:05 +0300 (Tue, 03 Jul 2018)
New Revision: 679

Modified:
   trunk/CTAN
   trunk/ChangeLog
   trunk/NEWS
   trunk/latex2e.dbk
   trunk/latex2e.dvi
   trunk/latex2e.html
   trunk/latex2e.info
   trunk/latex2e.pdf
   trunk/latex2e.texi
   trunk/latex2e.txt
   trunk/latex2e.xml
Log:
CTAN upload

Modified: trunk/CTAN
===================================================================
--- trunk/CTAN	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/CTAN	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -14,11 +14,11 @@
 
 4) Check that the README is current.
 
-5) Commit the svn.
-
-6) Get the english and spanish stuff by running
+5) Get the english and spanish stuff by running
     make dist
 CTAN wants a .zip that is in a subdir, so this puts everything in the .zip
 inside latex2e-help-texinfo/ .
 
+6) Commit the svn.
+
 7) Upload.  It all goes to CTAN://info/latex2e-help-texinfo

Modified: trunk/ChangeLog
===================================================================
--- trunk/ChangeLog	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/ChangeLog	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -1,3 +1,8 @@
+2018-07-03  Jim Hefferon  <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+	* latex2e.texi Do a CTAN release following the checklist in the
+	file CTAN.  Zip file contents from "make dist" looks OK to me.
+
 2018-07-02  Karl Berry  <karl at freefriends.org>
 
 	* latex2e.texi: typos, underfull boxes, mirror wording.

Modified: trunk/NEWS
===================================================================
--- trunk/NEWS	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/NEWS	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -4,6 +4,25 @@
 Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained).
 French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche.
 
+Changes in July 2018 release:
+
+We have gone through the two documents latex-info and
+latex2e-reference and checked that any information in those documents
+is in this one.
+
+There have also been other changes, including switching to a single
+unified index, a more uniform entry format, and many more examples and
+error messages.  There are a number of entirely new entries such as
+ones on \strut, caligraphic math fonts, \boldmath, and blackboard
+bold.  There have also been adjustments to the organization such as
+having separate sections for \part, \chapter, etc., and some
+combinations such as that of \clearpage and \cleardoublepage.
+
+In addition, there were many bug fixes, including greatly shrinking
+the size of one of the graphics.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
 Changes in April 2018 release:
 
 There is a new chapter on color and a new chapter on graphics
@@ -12,6 +31,7 @@
 diagram of the parameters, and a description of the tabbing
 environment.
 
+
 ----------------------------------------------------------------
 Changes in Aug 2017 release:
 

Modified: trunk/latex2e.dbk
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.dbk	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.dbk	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -4,26 +4,35 @@
   <!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
 ]>
 <book id="latex2e.dbk" lang="en">
+<!-- $Id$ -->
+<!-- Public domain. -->
         
 
-<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (March 2018)</title>
+<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (July 2018)</title>
 <!-- %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
 
 <!-- latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
 <!-- xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
 <!-- xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
 <!-- -->
-<!-- xx ending a run with errors -->
 <!-- xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
 <!-- xx classes and packages - required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
 <!-- -->
-<!-- xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (CTAN package latex-info) -->
-<!-- xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex2e-reference -->
 <!-- xx merge permuted-index -->
 <!-- xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
 <!-- xx merge display style math -->
-<!-- xx vertical mode, horizontal mode -->
-<!-- xx JH Discuss restricted execution -->
+<!-- xx JH explain nfss somewhere -->
+<!-- xx JH expand BiBTeX -->
+<!-- xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
+<!-- xx JH something on code listings -->
+<!-- xx JH ligatures -->
+<!-- xx JH \xspace -->
+<!-- xx JH \stretch -->
+<!-- xx JH \mathstrut -->
+<!-- xx JH \phantom https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/4519/how-do-i-create-an-invisible-character -->
+<!-- xx JH \baselineskip https://texfaq.org/FAQ-baselinepar -->
+<!-- xx JH \contentsline, \@@dottedtocline? -->
+<!-- xx JH more on \write18, beyond what's mentioned in Command line. -->
 <!-- -->
 <!-- xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
 <!-- xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
@@ -31,7 +40,7 @@
 <!-- xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -->
 
 <bookinfo><legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of March 2018.
+document preparation system, version of July 2018.
 </para>
 <para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in
 the VMS Help Library.  The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -67,10 +76,12 @@
 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
 <!-- end of License -->
 </para></legalnotice></bookinfo>
+<!-- Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). -->
 
 
+
 <para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of March 2018.
+document preparation system, version of July 2018.
 </para>
 <para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in
 the VMS Help Library.  The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -115,7 +126,7 @@
 <title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
 
 <para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-March 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+July 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
 </para>
 
 
@@ -123,11 +134,11 @@
 <chapter label="1" id="About-this-document">
 <title>About this document</title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary><ulink url="http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</ulink> home page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>home page for manual</primary></indexterm>
 <para>This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document
 preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex;
 typesetting program (see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>).  This document’s home page is
-<ulink url="http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</ulink>.  That page has links to the
+<ulink url="puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman">puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</ulink>.  That page has links to the
 current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
 subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
 </para>
@@ -223,17 +234,20 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>hello, world</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
-and ending.  Here is a “hello, world” example:
+and ending.  This is a small example.
 </para>
 <screen>\documentclass{article}
 \begin{document}
 Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
 \end{document}
 </screen>
+<para>Every &latex; document has a <literal>\begin{document}</literal> line and an
+<literal>\end{document}</literal> line.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>document class, defined</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Here, the ‘<literal>article</literal>’ is the so-called <firstterm>document class</firstterm>,
-implemented in a file <filename>article.cls</filename>.  Any document class can be
-used.  A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
+<para>Here, the ‘<literal>article</literal>’ is the <firstterm>document class</firstterm>.  It is implemented
+in a file <filename>article.cls</filename>.  You can use any document class on your
+system.  A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
 array of others are widely available.  See <link linkend="Document-classes">Document classes</link>.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>preamble, defined</primary></indexterm>
@@ -241,12 +255,13 @@
 <literal>\documentclass</literal> and the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> commands.
 This area is called the <firstterm>preamble</firstterm>.
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</literal> is a so-called
+<para>The <literal>\begin{document}</literal>, <literal>\end{document}</literal> pair defines an
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment</primary></indexterm>
 <firstterm>environment</firstterm>; the ‘<literal>document</literal>’ environment (and no others) is
-required in all &latex; documents (see <link linkend="document">document</link>).  &latex;
-provides many environments itself, and many more are defined separately.
-See <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link>.
+required in all &latex; documents (see <link linkend="document">document</link>).  &latex; make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(see <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link>).  Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <link linkend="CTAN">CTAN</link>).
 </para>
 <para>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
 a &latex; input file.
@@ -256,7 +271,7 @@
 <sect1 label="2.2" id="Output-files">
 <title>Output files</title>
 
-<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two accessory files.
+<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
 The main output file’s name ends in either <filename>.dvi</filename> or <filename>.pdf</filename>.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>.dvi</literal>
@@ -266,7 +281,7 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvips command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvipdfmx command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvitype command</primary></indexterm>
-<para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>latex</command> then it
+<anchor id="output-files-dvi"/><para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>latex</command> then it
 produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <filename>.dvi</filename>.  You
 can view this file with a command such as <command>xdvi</command>, or convert
 it to a PostScript <literal>.ps</literal> file with <command>dvips</command> or to a
@@ -279,7 +294,7 @@
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.pdf file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>pdf&tex;</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>pdflatex command</primary></indexterm>
-<para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>pdflatex</command>,
+<anchor id="output-files-pdf"/><para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>pdflatex</command>,
 among other commands (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>), then the main output is
 a Portable Document Format (PDF) file.  Typically this is a
 self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
@@ -291,7 +306,7 @@
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>transcript file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>log file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>.log file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+<anchor id="output-files-log"/><para>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
 loaded packages.  It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
 additional information for any errors.
 </para>
@@ -301,7 +316,7 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross references, resolving</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>forward references, resolving</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>references, resolving forward</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as
+<anchor id="output-files-aux"/><para>Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as
 cross references.  For example, the first time that &latex; finds a
 forward reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet
 appeared in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled
@@ -321,10 +336,11 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>contents file</primary></indexterm>
 <para>&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
-ending.  These include a <literal>.lof</literal> file that is used to make a list
-of figures, a <literal>.lot</literal> file used to make a list of tables, and a
-<literal>.toc</literal> file used to make a table of contents.  A particular class
-may create others; the list is open-ended.
+ending.  These include a <literal>.lof</literal> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <literal>.lot</literal> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<literal>.toc</literal> file used to make a table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
+contents etc.</link>).  A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -340,14 +356,14 @@
 
 <para>&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex;
 implementation (see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>).  This section gives a terse
-overview of the main programs.
+overview of the main programs (see also <link linkend="Command-line">Command line</link>).
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>latex</literal>
 </term><term><literal>pdflatex</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pdf&tex; engine</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>etex command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>e-&tex;</primary></indexterm>
-<para>In &tex; Live (<ulink url="http://tug.org/texlive">http://tug.org/texlive</ulink>), if &latex; is invoked
+<anchor id="tex-engines-latex"/><para>In &tex; Live (<ulink url="http://tug.org/texlive">http://tug.org/texlive</ulink>), if &latex; is invoked
 via either the system command <command>latex</command> or <command>pdflatex</command>,
 then the pdf&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex">http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</ulink>).
 When invoked as <command>latex</command>, the main output is a <filename>.dvi</filename>
@@ -367,7 +383,7 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lualatex</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lualatex command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lua&tex;</primary></indexterm>
-<para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>lualatex</command>, the
+<anchor id="tex-engines-lualatex"/><para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>lualatex</command>, the
 Lua&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</ulink>).  This
 program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
 (<ulink url="http://luatex.org">http://luatex.org</ulink>) to interact with &tex;’s typesetting.
@@ -381,7 +397,7 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Xe&tex;</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>.xdv file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>xdvipdfmx</primary></indexterm>
-<para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>xelatex</command>, the
+<anchor id="tex-engines-xelatex"/><para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>xelatex</command>, the
 Xe&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://tug.org/xetex">http://tug.org/xetex</ulink>).  Like Lua&tex;,
 Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
 fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
@@ -458,7 +474,7 @@
   ...
 \end{verse}
 </screen>
-<para>See <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link> for a list of environments. 
+<para>See <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link> for a list of environments. 
 </para>
 <para>The <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> at the beginning must exactly match that at
 the end.  This includes the case where <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> ends in a
@@ -485,8 +501,8 @@
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="2.4.3" id="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">
-<title><literal>\makeatletter</literal> and <literal>\makeatother</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="2.4.3" id="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">
+<title><literal>\makeatletter</literal> & <literal>\makeatother</literal></title>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -531,9 +547,9 @@
 in their names see <ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e">http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</ulink>. These macros are
 mainly intended to package or class authors.
 </para>
-<para>The example below is typical.  In the user’s class file is a command
-<literal>\thesis at universityname</literal>.  The user wants to change the
-definition.  These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<para>In this example the class file has a command
+<literal>\thesis at universityname</literal> that the user wants to change.  These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
 <literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
 </para>
 <screen>\makeatletter
@@ -552,8 +568,8 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd at star}{\mycmd at nostar}}
-\newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[<replaceable>non-starred command number of args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>body of non-starred command</replaceable>} 
-\newcommand{\mycmd at star}[<replaceable>starred command number of args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>body of starred command</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[<replaceable>nostar-num-args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>nostar-body</replaceable>} 
+\newcommand{\mycmd at star}[<replaceable>star-num-args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>star-body</replaceable>}
 </screen>
 <para>Many standard &latex; environments or commands have a variant with the
 same name but ending with a star character <literal>*</literal>, an asterisk.
@@ -573,7 +589,7 @@
 same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
 As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign <literal>@</literal>
 must be enclosed inside a <literal>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</literal> block
-(see <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</link>).
+(see <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</link>).
 </para>
 <para>This example of <literal>\@ifstar</literal> defines the command <literal>\ciel</literal> and a
 variant <literal>\ciel*</literal>.  Both have one required argument.  A call to
@@ -585,14 +601,15 @@
 \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel at starred}{\ciel at unstarred}}
 </screen>
 <para>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
-arguments than does the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent
-007’s <literal>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
-\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</literal> is equivalent to <literal>``My name is
-\textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</literal>
+arguments than the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent 007’s
+<literal>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
+\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</literal> is equivalent to entering the commands
+<literal>``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</literal>
 </para>
 <screen>\newcommand*{\agentsecret at unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
 \newcommand*{\agentsecret at starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+  \@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
 </screen>
 <para>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
 <literal>\@ifstar</literal>.  The <filename>suffix</filename> package allows the construct
@@ -609,6 +626,39 @@
 </sect3>
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.5" id="CTAN">
+<title>CTAN: Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>CTAN</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network, CTAN, is the &tex; and
+&latex; community’s repository of free material.  It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to &latex;
+for download.  Visit CTAN on the web at <ulink url="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people.  For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s
+specifications.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>DANTE e.V.</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mirrors of CTAN</primary></indexterm>
+<para>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <ulink url="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="3" id="Document-classes">
 <title>Document classes</title>
@@ -632,23 +682,23 @@
 see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>.)
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>article</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-article"/><para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>book</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-book"/><para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
 matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
 (see <link linkend="Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>letter</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels 
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-letter"/><para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels 
 (see <link linkend="Letters">Letters</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>report</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For documents of length between an <literal>article</literal> and a <literal>book</literal>,
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-report"/><para>For documents of length between an <literal>article</literal> and a <literal>book</literal>,
 such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>slides</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For slide presentations—rarely used today.  In its place the
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-slides"/><para>For slide presentations—rarely used today.  In its place the
 <literal>beamer</literal> package is perhaps the most prevalent (see <link linkend="beamer-template">beamer
 template</link>).
 </para>
@@ -665,9 +715,9 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>global options</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>You can specify so-called <firstterm>global options</firstterm> or <firstterm>class options</firstterm> to
-the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command by enclosing them in square brackets.
-To specify more than one <replaceable>option</replaceable>, separate them with a comma, as in:
+<para>You can specify <firstterm>global options</firstterm> or <firstterm>class options</firstterm> to the
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> command by enclosing them in square brackets.  To
+specify more than one <replaceable>option</replaceable>, separate them with a comma.
 </para>
 <screen>\documentclass[<replaceable>option1</replaceable>,<replaceable>option2</replaceable>,...]{<replaceable>class</replaceable>}
 </screen>
@@ -854,7 +904,7 @@
 <para>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <literal>@</literal> as a
 character in command names without having to surround the code
 containing that command with <literal>\makeatletter</literal> and
-<literal>\makeatother</literal>.  See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</link>. This allow
+<literal>\makeatother</literal>.  See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</link>. This allow
 you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
 Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
 some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
@@ -897,7 +947,6 @@
 most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
 loading other files.
 </para></listitem></orderedlist>
-
 <para>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <filename>stub.cls</filename>
 where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the
 <filename>.tex</filename> file.
@@ -919,6 +968,7 @@
 of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
 <ulink url="https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf">https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</ulink>.
 </para>
+
 </sect2>
 <sect2 label="3.3.2" id="Class-and-package-commands">
 <title>Class and package commands</title>
@@ -1010,10 +1060,10 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package options</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, class</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+<para>Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
 <literal>\documentclass</literal> command.  For example, the <literal>smcmemo</literal> class
-could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
-first page with <literal>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</literal>.  The class file
+could have an option <literal>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</literal> allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page.  The class file
 must contain <literal>\DeclareOption{logo}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal> (and later,
 <literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>).
 </para>
@@ -1058,14 +1108,14 @@
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>etoolbox</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>etoolbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
- 
-<para>The <literal>etoolbox</literal> package offers commands <literal>\newrobustcmd</literal>,
-<literal>\newrobustcmd*</literal>, <literal>\renewrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\renewrobustcmd*</literal>,
-<literal>\providerobustcmd</literal>, and <literal>\providerobustcmd*</literal> which are similar
-to <literal>\newcommand</literal>, <literal>\newcommand*</literal>, <literal>\renewcommand</literal>,
-<literal>\renewcommand*</literal>, <literal>\providecommand</literal>, and
-<literal>\providecommand*</literal>, but define a robust <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> with two advantages
-as compared to <literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal>:
+<para>The <filename>etoolbox</filename> package offers the commands
+<literal>\newrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\newrobustcmd*</literal>, as well as the commands
+<literal>\renewrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\renewrobustcmd*</literal>, and the commands
+<literal>\providerobustcmd</literal>, and <literal>\providerobustcmd*</literal>.  These are
+similar to <literal>\newcommand</literal>, <literal>\newcommand*</literal>,
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, <literal>\renewcommand*</literal>, <literal>\providecommand</literal>, and
+<literal>\providecommand*</literal>, but define a robust <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> with two
+advantages as compared to <literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal>:
 </para><orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>They use the low-level e-&tex; protection mechanism rather than the
 higher level &latex; <literal>\protect</literal> mechanism, so they do not incur
 the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
@@ -1080,13 +1130,16 @@
 </term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\InputIfFileExists{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\InputIfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Execute <replaceable>true code</replaceable> if &latex; can find the file <filename><replaceable>file
-name</replaceable></filename> and <replaceable>false code</replaceable> otherwise.  In the second case it inputs the
-file immediately after executing <replaceable>true code</replaceable>.  Thus
-<literal>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
-img.pdf not found}}</literal> will include the graphic <filename>img.pdf</filename> if it is
-found but otherwise just give a warning.
+<para>Execute <replaceable>true code</replaceable> if &latex; finds the file <filename><replaceable>file
+name</replaceable></filename> or <replaceable>false code</replaceable> otherwise.  In the first case it executing
+<replaceable>true code</replaceable> and then inputs the file.  Thus the command
 </para>
+<screen>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+  \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+</screen>
+<para>will include the graphic <filename>img.pdf</filename> if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+</para>
 <para>This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses,
 not only in the current directory.  To look only in the current
 directory do something like <literal>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<replaceable>true
@@ -1110,12 +1163,14 @@
 <!-- and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some -->
 <!-- date. -->
 </para>
-<para>If you request a <replaceable>release date</replaceable> and the date of
-the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning
-on the screen and in the log like <literal>You have requested, on input
-line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
-`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.</literal>
+<para>If you request a <replaceable>release date</replaceable> and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
 </para>
+<screen>You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+</screen>
 <para>The command version <literal>\LoadClassWithOptions</literal> uses the list of
 options for the current class.  This means it ignores any options passed
 to it via <literal>\PassOptionsToClass</literal>.  This is a convenience command
@@ -1147,10 +1202,11 @@
 features, include the optional <replaceable>format date</replaceable> on which those features
 were implemented.  If present it must be in the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>.
 If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
-<replaceable>format date</replaceable> then you get a warning like ‘<literal>You have requested
-release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is
-available.</literal>’
+<replaceable>format date</replaceable> then you get a warning like this.
 </para>
+<screen>You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+</screen>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\OptionNotUsed</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\OptionNotUsed</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Adds the current option to the list of unused options.  Can only be used
@@ -1180,18 +1236,21 @@
 </para>
 <para>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
 that to once, for example replacing the two
-<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>
-with the single
-<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>.  But if you
-are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need
-to queue up the options you desire for this other package.  For
-instance, suppose the package <literal>foo</literal> loads the package
-<literal>geometry</literal>.  Instead of
-<literal>\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}</literal> you must
-write <literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
-\RequirePackage{foo}</literal>.  (If <literal>foo.sty</literal> loads an option in conflict
-with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.)
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}</literal> and
+<literal>\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</literal> with the single command
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>However, imagine that you are loading <filename>firstpkg</filename> and inside that
+package it loads <filename>secondpkg</filename>, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option <literal>draft</literal>.  Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+</para>
+<screen>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+\RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+</screen>
+<para>(If <literal>firstpkg.sty</literal> loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+</para>
 <para>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
 writers.  For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <literal>graphicx</literal>
 package with the option <literal>draft</literal> and also wants to use a class
@@ -1238,41 +1297,42 @@
 the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
 means that the global options are processed first.
 </para>
-
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesClass</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesPackage</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.
+<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
 </para>
-<para>When a user writes <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> then &latex; loads
-the file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename>.  Similarly, a user writing
-<literal>\usepackage{test}</literal> prompts &latex; to load the file
-<literal>test.sty</literal>.  If the name of the file does not match the declared
-class or package name then you get a warning.  Thus, if you invoke
+<para>When you load a class or package, for example with
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> or <literal>\usepackage{test}</literal>, &latex;
+inputs a file.  If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning.  Thus, if you invoke
 <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal>, and the file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename> has
 the statement <literal>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</literal> then you get a warning like
 <literal>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
 class provides 'xxx'.</literal>  This warning does not prevent &latex; from
 processing the rest of the class file normally.
 </para>
-<para>If you include the optional argument, then you must include the date, before
-the first space if any, and it must have the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>. The rest
-of the optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies
-the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the
-log file.  Thus, if your file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename> contains the line
-<literal>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</literal> and your
-document’s first line is <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> then you will
-see <literal>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</literal>.
+<para>If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file.  Thus, if your file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename> contains the line
+<literal>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</literal> and
+your document’s first line is <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> then you
+will see <literal>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
-to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their
-system is earlier than <replaceable>release date</replaceable>, by using the optional arguments
-such as <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</literal> or
-<literal>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</literal>.  (Note that package users only
-rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable>.  For instance, a user could enter
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</literal> or
+<literal>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</literal> to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date.  (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesFile{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesFile</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1287,11 +1347,11 @@
 </term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackageWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Load a package, like the document author command <literal>\usepackage</literal>.
-See <link linkend="Additional-packages">Additional packages</link>. An example is
-<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</literal>.  Note that the
-&latex; development team strongly recommends use of these commands over
-Plain &tex;’s <literal>\input</literal>; see the Class Guide.
+<para>Load a package, like the command <literal>\usepackage</literal> (see <link linkend="Additional-packages">Additional
+packages</link>). The &latex; development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain &tex;’s <literal>\input</literal>; see the Class
+Guide.  An example is
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>The <replaceable>option list</replaceable>, if present, is a comma-separated list.  The
 <replaceable>release date</replaceable>, if present, must have the form <replaceable>YYYY/MM/DD</replaceable>.  If
@@ -1338,30 +1398,28 @@
 
 <para>The following type style commands are supported by &latex;.
 </para>
-<para>This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as in
-<literal>\textit{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>.  In the table below, the corresponding
-command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no
-arguments, as in <literal>{\itshape <replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>.  The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group.
+<para>In the table below the listed commands, the <literal>\text...</literal>  commands,
+is used with an argument, as in <literal>\textit{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>.  This is
+the preferred form.  But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful.  This form
+takes no arguments, as in <literal>{\itshape <replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>.  The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group.  In addition, each has an environment form such as
+<literal>\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
-are cumulative; e.g., you can say either <literal>\sffamily\bfseries</literal> or
-<literal>\bfseries\sffamily</literal> to get bold sans serif.
+<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+<literal>\sffamily\bfseries</literal> or <literal>\bfseries\sffamily</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for
-instance, <literal>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</literal>.
-</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorrlist</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorr</primary></indexterm>
-<para>These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections
-if needed.  (See <link linkend="_005c_002f">\/</link>, for the details of italic corrections.)
-Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following
-character is in the list <literal>\nocorrlist</literal>, which by default consists
-of a period and a comma.  To suppress the automatic insertion of
-italic correction, use <literal>\nocorr</literal> at the start or end of the
-command argument, such as <literal>\textit{\nocorr text}</literal> or
-<literal>\textsc{text \nocorr}</literal>.
+<para>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (see <link linkend="_005c_002f">\/</link>).  Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+<literal>\nocorrlist</literal>, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+<literal>\nocorr</literal> at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+<literal>\textit{\nocorr text}</literal> or <literal>\textsc{text \nocorr}</literal>.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\textrm (\rmfamily)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrm</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1424,11 +1482,15 @@
 will be in roman.
 </para>
 <para>&latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
-switch to the given style, that is, are <emphasis>not</emphasis> cumulative.  Also,
-they are used differently than the above commands:
-<literal>{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>...}</literal> instead of <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>{...}</literal>.  These
-are two unrelated constructs.
+switch to the given style, that is, are <emphasis>not</emphasis> cumulative.  They are
+used as declarations: <literal>{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>...}</literal> instead of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>{...}</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bf</primary></indexterm><literal>\bf</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold font</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Switch to bold face.
@@ -1468,13 +1530,6 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>The <literal>\em</literal> command is the unconditional version of <literal>\emph</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>(Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
-as <literal>\tt</literal>, obsolete and that only the cumulative commands
-(<literal>\texttt</literal>) should be used.  Others think that both sets of
-commands have their place and sometimes an unconditional font switch
-is precisely what you want; for one example,
-see <link linkend="description"><literal>description</literal></link>.)
-</para>
 <para>The following commands are for use in math mode.  They are not
 cumulative, so <literal>\mathbf{\mathit{<replaceable>symbol</replaceable>}}</literal> does not
 create a boldface and italic <replaceable>symbol</replaceable>; instead, it will just be in
@@ -1561,7 +1616,7 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\huge</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Huge</primary></indexterm>
 
-<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="21*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Command  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>10pt</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>11pt</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>12pt</literal>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="23*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="7*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="7*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Command  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>10pt</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>11pt</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>12pt</literal>
 </para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>\tiny</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>5          </para></entry><entry><para>6          </para></entry><entry><para>6
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\scriptsize</literal>
@@ -1583,11 +1638,20 @@
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\Huge</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88      </para></entry><entry><para>24.88      </para></entry><entry><para>24.88
 </para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
-<para>The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of
-the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the
-end of the current group.  You can also use the environment form of
-these commands; for instance, <literal>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</literal>.
+<para>The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
 </para>
+<screen>\begin{quotation} \small
+  The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end{quotation}
+</screen>
+<para>The scope of the <literal>\small</literal> lasts until the end of the
+<literal>quotation</literal> environment.  It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces <literal>{\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!}</literal>.  You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, <literal>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="4.3" id="Low_002dlevel-font-commands">
@@ -1602,7 +1666,7 @@
 <!-- xx but it should be complete -->
 <!-- xx something about ultimately reading ENCFAM.fd? -->
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontencoding{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding"/><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontencoding{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontencoding</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
 large number of valid encodings.  The most common are <literal>OT1</literal>,
@@ -1613,16 +1677,16 @@
 hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
 <ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide">https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</ulink>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontfamily{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontfamily{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontfamily</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>families, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>font catalogue</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Select the font family.  The web page
 <ulink url="http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/">http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/</ulink> provides one way to browse
 through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;.  Here are
-examples of some common families:
+examples of some common families.
 </para>
-<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="4*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="31*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>pag</literal>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="4*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="37*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>pag</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Avant Garde
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>fvs</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Bitstream Vera Sans
@@ -1664,7 +1728,7 @@
 </para></entry><entry><para>Zapf Chancery
 </para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontseries{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontseries"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontseries{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontseries</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>series, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Select the font series.  A <firstterm>series</firstterm> combines a <firstterm>weight</firstterm> and a
@@ -1708,7 +1772,6 @@
 <para>The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
 relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
 </para>
-
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="15*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>uc</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Ultra condensed
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ec</literal>
@@ -1728,7 +1791,6 @@
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ux</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Ultra expanded
 </para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
-
 <para>When forming the <replaceable>series</replaceable> string from the weight and width, drop the
 <literal>m</literal> that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
 weight and width are <literal>m</literal>, in which case use just one
@@ -1737,7 +1799,7 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontshape{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontshape</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>shapes, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"/><para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
 </para>
 <informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="19*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>n</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Upright (normal)
@@ -1752,11 +1814,10 @@
 </para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ol</literal>
 </para></entry><entry><para>Outline
 </para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
-
 <para>The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
 small caps are often missing as well.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontsize{<replaceable>size</replaceable>}{<replaceable>skip</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontsize"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontsize{<replaceable>size</replaceable>}{<replaceable>skip</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontsize</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>font size</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselineskip</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1768,7 +1829,7 @@
 Changing <literal>\baselineskip</literal> directly is inadvisable since its value is
 reset every time a size change happens; see <literal>\baselinestretch</literal>, next.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\baselinestretch</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-baselinestretch"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\baselinestretch</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselinestretch</primary></indexterm>
 <para>&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
 <literal>\baselinestretch</literal> parameter; the default factor is 1.  A change
@@ -1787,7 +1848,7 @@
 where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
 captions.  See the package documentation.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-linespread"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linespread</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Equivalent to
 <literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>, and
@@ -1795,7 +1856,7 @@
 Best specified in the preamble, or use the <literal>setspace</literal> package, as
 just described.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\selectfont</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-selectfont"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\selectfont</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\selectfont</primary></indexterm>
 <para>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
 <literal>\selectfont</literal> is called, as in
@@ -1806,7 +1867,7 @@
 
 (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>).
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\usefont{<replaceable>enc</replaceable>}{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-usefont"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\usefont{<replaceable>enc</replaceable>}{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usefont</primary></indexterm>
 <para>The same as invoking <literal>\fontencoding</literal>, <literal>\fontfamily</literal>,
 <literal>\fontseries</literal> and <literal>\fontshape</literal> with the given parameters,
@@ -1833,12 +1894,15 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\onecolumn</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>one-column output</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\onecolumn
+</screen>
 <para>Start a new page and produce single-column output.  If the document is
 given the class option <literal>onecolumn</literal> then this is the default
-behavior (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+behavior (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
-</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="5.2" id="_005ctwocolumn">
@@ -1855,31 +1919,30 @@
 </screen>
 <para>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
 the class option <literal>twocolumn</literal> then this is the default
-(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
 <para>If the optional <replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable> argument
 is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
 typesetting starts.
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
-</para>
 <para>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt.  Change it with a
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnsep"/><para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt.  Change it with a
 command such as <literal>\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}</literal> You must change
 it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
 place.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnseprule</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnseprule"/><para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
 the two columns.  The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
 Change it with a command such as
 <literal>\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}</literal>, before the two-column
 environment starts.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnwidth</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The width of a single column.  In one-column mode this is equal to
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnwidth"/><para>The width of a single column.  In one-column mode this is equal to
 <literal>\textwidth</literal>.  In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the
 width of each of the two columns to be half of <literal>\textwidth</literal> minus
 <literal>\columnsep</literal>.
@@ -1891,7 +1954,7 @@
 and see <link linkend="table">table</link>). &latex; places starred floats at the top of a page.
 The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopfraction</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="twocolumn-dbltopfraction"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopfraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
 occupied by two-column wide floats.  The default is 0.7, meaning that
 the height of a <literal>table*</literal> or <literal>figure*</literal> environment must not
@@ -1908,27 +1971,27 @@
 </listitem><listitem><para>Increase the value of <literal>\dbltopfraction</literal> to a suitably large number,
 to avoid going to float pages so soon.
 </para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-<para>You can redefine it, for instance with
+<para>You can redefine it, as with
 <literal>\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatpagefraction</literal>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatpagefraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
 that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
 &latex;’s default is <literal>0.5</literal>.  Change it with <literal>\renewcommand</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatsep</literal>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dblfloatsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
 between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.  The default is
 <literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal> for a document set at <literal>10pt</literal> or
 <literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>14pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal> for a document set at
 <literal>12pt</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltextfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltextfloatsep</literal>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltextfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltextfloatsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
 bottom of a page and the main text.  The default is <literal>20pt plus2pt
 minus4pt</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopnumber</literal>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dbltopnumber"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopnumber</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
 maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page.  The &latex;
 default is <literal>2</literal>.
@@ -2015,20 +2078,20 @@
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnsep"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth"/><para>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
 columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
 <literal>twocolumn</literal> is in effect (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
 See <link linkend="_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</link>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\headheight</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headheight</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Height of the box that contains the running head.  The default in the
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-headheight"/><para>Height of the box that contains the running head.  The default in the
 <literal>article</literal>, <literal>report</literal>, and <literal>book</literal> classes is ‘<literal>12pt</literal>’,
 at all type sizes.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\headsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-headsep"/><para>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
 the main text.  The default in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal>
 classes is ‘<literal>25pt</literal>’.  In the <literal>book</literal> class the default is: if the
 document is set at 10pt then it is ‘<literal>0.25in</literal>’, and at 11pt and 12pt
@@ -2036,7 +2099,7 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\footskip</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footskip</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-footskip"/><para>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
 the page footer.  The default in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal>
 classes is ‘<literal>30pt</literal>’.  In the <literal>book</literal> class the default is: when
 the type size is 10pt the default is ‘<literal>0.35in</literal>’, while at 11pt it is
@@ -2044,7 +2107,7 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\linewidth</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linewidth</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <literal>list</literal>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-linewidth"/><para>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <literal>list</literal>
 (see <link linkend="list">list</link>).  That is, the nominal value for <literal>\linewidth</literal> is to
 equal <literal>\textwidth</literal> but for each nested list the <literal>\linewidth</literal>
 is decreased by the sum of that list’s <literal>\leftmargin</literal> and
@@ -2059,7 +2122,7 @@
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginsep</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginparpush"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginsep"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginparwidth"/><para>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
 space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
 width of the notes.
 </para>
@@ -2087,7 +2150,7 @@
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\evensidemargin</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oddsidemargin</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\oddsidemargin</literal> is the extra distance between the left side of
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin"/><para>The <literal>\oddsidemargin</literal> is the extra distance between the left side of
 the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
 document class option <literal>twoside</literal> is chosen and on all pages when
 <literal>oneside</literal> is in effect.  When <literal>twoside</literal> is in effect, on
@@ -2100,21 +2163,21 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\paperheight</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperheight</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
-It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-paperheight"/><para>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
 <literal>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</literal> (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
 options</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\paperwidth</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperwidth</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
-It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth"/><para>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
 <literal>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</literal> (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
 options</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\textheight</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textheight</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The normal vertical height of the page body.  If the document is set at
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-textheight"/><para>The normal vertical height of the page body.  If the document is set at
 a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <literal>article</literal> or <literal>report</literal>
 the default is ‘<literal>43\baselineskip</literal>’, while for a <literal>book</literal> it is
 ‘<literal>41\baselineskip</literal>’.  At a type size of 11pt the default is
@@ -2123,7 +2186,7 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\textwidth</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textwidth</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The full horizontal width of the entire page body.  For an
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-textwidth"/><para>The full horizontal width of the entire page body.  For an
 <literal>article</literal> or <literal>report</literal> document, the default is ‘<literal>345pt</literal>’
 when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is ‘<literal>360pt</literal>’ at 11pt,
 and it is ‘<literal>390pt</literal>’ at 12pt.  For a <literal>book</literal> document, the default
@@ -2143,14 +2206,14 @@
 <literal>minipage</literal> or <literal>\parbox</literal>.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hsize</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hsize</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This entry is included for completeness: <literal>\hsize</literal> is the &tex;
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-hsize"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hsize</primary></indexterm><literal>\hsize</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>This entry is included for completeness: <literal>\hsize</literal> is the &tex;
 primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines.  It should not
 be used in normal &latex; documents.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\topmargin</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topmargin</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-topmargin"/><para>Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
 paper, by default) and the top of the header.  The value is computed
 based on many other parameters: <literal>\paperheight − 2in −
 \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip</literal>,
@@ -2158,7 +2221,7 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\topskip</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topskip</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-topskip"/><para>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
 the first line of text.  For the standard classes, the default is the
 same as the font size, e.g., ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’ at a type size of 10pt.
 </para>
@@ -2272,65 +2335,67 @@
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\bottomfraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
+<anchor id="floats-bottomfraction"/><para>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
 the bottom; default ‘<literal>.3</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatpagefraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatpagefraction</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+<anchor id="floats-floatpagefraction"/><para>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
 default ‘<literal>.5</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfraction</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+<anchor id="floats-textfraction"/><para>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
 much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
 different page.  The default is ‘<literal>.2</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\topfraction</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topfraction</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+<anchor id="floats-topfraction"/><para>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
 floats; default ‘<literal>.7</literal>’.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
-<literal>\setlength{<replaceable>parameter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>length expression</replaceable>}</literal>):
+<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form <literal>\setlength{<replaceable>parameter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>length
+expression</replaceable>}</literal>):
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+<anchor id="floats-floatsep"/><para>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
 ‘<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\intextsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\intextsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\intextsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+<anchor id="floats-intextsep"/><para>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
 ‘<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>’ for 10 point and 11 point documents,
 and ‘<literal>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</literal>’ for 12 point documents.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfloatsep</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfloatsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+<anchor id="floats-textfloatsep"/><para>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
 default ‘<literal>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>’.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
-<literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>ctrname</replaceable>}{<replaceable>natural number</replaceable>}</literal>):
+<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form <literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>ctrname</replaceable>}{<replaceable>natural
+number</replaceable>}</literal>):
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bottomnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>bottomnumber</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bottomnumber</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+<anchor id="floats-bottomnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
 default 1.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>dbltopnumber</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+<anchor id="floats-dbltopnumber"/><para>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
 two-column page; default 2.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>topnumber</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topnumber</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+<anchor id="floats-topnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
 default 2.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>totalnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>totalnumber</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>totalnumber</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+<anchor id="floats-totalnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats
 <ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</ulink> contains
@@ -2348,67 +2413,624 @@
 <title>Sectioning</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>sectioning commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
+<para>Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc.  All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm><literal>\part</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm><literal>\chapter</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>(<literal>report</literal> and <literal>book</literal> class only)
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm><literal>\section</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\subsection</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\subsubsection</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\paragraph</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\subparagraph</literal>
-</term></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
-</para>
-<screen>\chapter[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+<screen><replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>In addition to providing the heading <replaceable>title</replaceable> in the main text, the
-section title can appear in two other places:
+<para>For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+<literal>\subsection{Motivation}</literal>.
 </para>
-<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>The table of contents.
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>The running head at the top of the page.
-</para></listitem></orderedlist>
-<para>You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
-To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
-<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable> that, when given, specifies the text for these other
-places.
+<para>The table has each <replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable> in &latex;.  All are
+available in all of &latex;’s standard document classes <literal>book</literal>,
+<literal>report</literal>, and <literal>article</literal>, except that <literal>\chapter</literal> is
+not available in <literal>article</literal>.
 </para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="3"><colspec colwidth="25*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="25*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="40*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Sectioning unit  </para></entry><entry><para>Command  </para></entry><entry><para>Level 
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>Part
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\part</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para>-1 (<literal>book</literal>, <literal>report</literal>), 0 (<literal>article</literal>)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Chapter
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\chapter</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>0
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Section
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\section</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>1 
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subsection
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subsection</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>2 
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subsubsection
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subsubsection</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>3  
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Paragraph
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\paragraph</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>4  
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subparagraph
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subparagraph</literal>   </para></entry><entry><para>5  
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>*</literal>-form of sectioning commands</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Also, all sectioning commands have <literal>*</literal>-forms that print
-<replaceable>title</replaceable> as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an
-entry in the table of contents.  For instance:
+<para>All these commands have a <literal>*</literal>-form that prints <replaceable>title</replaceable> as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an <literal>article</literal> .  The
+input <literal>\appendix\section{Appendix}</literal> gives the output ‘<literal>A
+Appendix</literal>’ (see <link linkend="_005cappendix">\appendix</link>).  You can lose the numbering ‘<literal>A</literal>’
+by instead entering <literal>\section*{Appendix}</literal> (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the <literal>\section</literal> command may not matter).
 </para>
-<screen>\section*{Preamble}
+<para>The section title <replaceable>title</replaceable> provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).  You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text.  All of these commands have an optional
+argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> for these other places.
+</para>
+<para>The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents.  If the sectioning
+command’s <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link>).  And, if <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter <literal>tocdepth</literal> then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; expects that before you have a <literal>\subsection</literal> you will have
+a <literal>\section</literal> and, in a book, that before a <literal>\section</literal> you will
+have a <literal>\chapter</literal>.  Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered ‘<literal>3.0.1</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>secnumdepth</primary></indexterm><literal>secnumdepth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>secnumdepth counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section numbers, printing</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="sectioning-secnumdepth"/><anchor id="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"/><para>Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered.  Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+<replaceable>level</replaceable> <literal>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>).  See the above table for the level numbers.  For
+instance, if the <literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 1 in an <literal>article</literal> then a
+<literal>\section{Introduction}</literal> command will produce output like ‘<literal>1
+Introduction</literal>’ while <literal>\subsection{Discussion}</literal> will produce output
+like ‘<literal>Discussion</literal>’, without the number. &latex;’s default
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 3 in <filename>article</filename> class and  2 in the
+<filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename> classes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>tocdepth</primary></indexterm><literal>tocdepth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>tocdepth counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, sectioning numbers printed</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="sectioning-tocdepth"/><anchor id="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"/><para>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting <literal>\setcounter{tocdepth}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}</literal> makes the
+sectioning units at <replaceable>level</replaceable> be the smallest ones listed
+(see <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>).  See the above table for the level numbers.  For
+instance, if <literal>tocdepth</literal> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.  &latex;’s default
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 3 in <filename>article</filename> class and  2 in the
+<filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename> classes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+
+<sect1 label="6.1" id="_005cpart">
+<title><literal>\part</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sectioning, part</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\part{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\part*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\part[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
 </screen>
+<para>Start a document part.  The standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal>,
+<literal>report</literal>, and <literal>article</literal>, all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a document part, in a book.
+</para>
+<screen>\part{VOLUME I \\
+       PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF  U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+\chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+</screen>
+<para>In each standard class the <literal>\part</literal> command outputs a part number
+such as ‘<literal>Part I</literal>’, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type.  Then &latex; outputs <replaceable>title</replaceable>, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type.  In class <literal>book</literal>, the &latex;
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then &latex; will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page.  In <literal>report</literal> it is again alone on a page, but
+&latex; won’t force it onto an odd-numbered page.  In an <literal>article</literal>
+&latex; does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal> form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable> 
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+<literal>part</literal> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in running
+headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).  If it is not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable>
+will be there.  This example puts a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+</para>
+<screen>\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In the class <literal>article</literal>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented.  To get an indent you can use the package
+<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>One package to change the behavior of <literal>\part</literal> is <filename>titlesec</filename>.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.2" id="_005cchapter">
+<title><literal>\chapter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>chapter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\chapter*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\chapter[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a chapter.  The standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and
+<literal>report</literal> have this command but <literal>article</literal> does not.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a chapter.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{Loomings}
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
+</screen>
+<para>The &latex; default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided.  It produces a chapter
+number such as ‘<literal>Chapter 1</literal>’ in large boldface type (the size is
+<literal>\huge</literal>).  It then puts <replaceable>title</replaceable> on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size <literal>\Huge</literal>).  It also increments the
+<literal>chapter</literal> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>), and sets the running header
+information (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal> form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable> on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+<literal>chapter</literal> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header.  (If you use the page style
+<literal>headings</literal> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.)  This example illustrates.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter*{Preamble}
+</screen>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in
+running headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).  If it is not present then
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there.  This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+</screen>
+<para>but only ‘<literal>Weyl</literal>’ on the contents page.  This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  To get an indent use the package
+<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>You can change what is shown for the chapter number.  To change it to
+something like ‘<literal>Lecture 1</literal>’, put in the preamble either
+<literal>\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}</literal> or this
+(see <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package <filename>babel</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers.  To make that page completely blank,
+see <link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</link>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the behavior of the <literal>\chapter</literal> command, you can copy its
+definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments.  But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this.  One is
+<filename>titlesec</filename>.  See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\chapter}
+  {\Huge\bfseries}  % format of title
+  {}                % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+  {0pt}             % length of separation between label and title
+  {}                % before-code hook
+</screen>
+<para>This omits the chapter number ‘<literal>Chapter 1</literal>’ from the page but unlike
+<literal>\chapter*</literal> it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.3" id="_005csection">
+<title><literal>\section</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\section{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\section*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\section[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a section.  The standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>,
+<literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a section.
+</para>
+<screen>In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section{Turing machines}
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+</screen>
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> the
+default output is like ‘<literal>1.2 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>’ (for chapter 1,
+section 2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is <literal>\Large</literal>).  The same holds in
+<literal>article</literal> except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like ‘<literal>2 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal> form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<literal>section</literal> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header.  (If you use the page style
+<literal>headings</literal> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in
+running headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).  If it is not present then
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there.  This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+  by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+  Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+  Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+</screen>
+<para>but only ‘<literal>Elizabeth II</literal>’ on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+  I cheated\\my life story}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In general, to change the behavior of the <literal>\section</literal> command, there
+are a number of options.  One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>).  There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>.  See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4 -->
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\section}
+  {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}  % format of title
+  {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+  {0pt}                   % length of separation between label and title
+  {}                      % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*{\section}
+  {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+</screen>
+<para>That puts the section number in the margin.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.4" id="_005csubsection">
+<title><literal>\subsection</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsection</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subsection{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsection*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsection[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a subsection.  The standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>,
+<literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsection.
+</para>
+<screen>We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+</screen>
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> the
+default output is like ‘<literal>1.2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>’ (for chapter 1,
+section 2, subsection 3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is <literal>\large</literal>).  The same
+holds in <literal>article</literal> except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like ‘<literal>2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal> form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<literal>section</literal> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).  If it is
+not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there.  This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+</para>
+<screen>\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+  Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+</screen>
+<para>but only ‘<literal>&#x03B1;,&#x03B2;,&#x03B3;
+paper</literal>’ on the contents page.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+<literal>\subsection</literal> command.  One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>).  There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>.  See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+  {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}  % format of the title
+  {\thesubsection}                   % label
+  {0.6em}                            % space between label and title
+  {}                                 % before-code hook
+</screen>
+<para>That puts the subsection number and <replaceable>title</replaceable> in the first line of
+text.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.5" id="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">
+<title><literal>\subsubsection</literal>, <literal>\paragraph</literal>, <literal>\subparagraph</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subsubsection{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsubsection*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsubsection[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\paragraph{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\paragraph*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\paragraph[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subparagraph{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subparagraph*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subparagraph[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph.  The standard
+&latex; classes <literal>article</literal>, <literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsubsection.
+</para>
+<screen>\subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from 
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+</screen>
+<para>The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>, <literal>book</literal>, and
+<literal>report</literal>.  For <literal>\subsubsection</literal> the <replaceable>title</replaceable> is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type.  For <literal>\paragraph</literal> the
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type.  For <literal>\subparagraph</literal> the <replaceable>title</replaceable> is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an <literal>article</literal> has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like ‘<literal>1.2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>’, for
+section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3.  The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal> form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>.  But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for <literal>\subsubsection</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).  If it is
+not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of
+a paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+<filename>titlesec</filename>.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.6" id="_005cappendix">
+<title><literal>\appendix</literal></title>
+
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\appendix</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendix, creating</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\appendix</literal> command changes the way following sectional units
-are numbered.  The <literal>\appendix</literal> command itself generates no text
-and does not affect the numbering of parts.  The normal use of this
-command is something like
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendix</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendices</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\chapter{A Chapter}
-…
+<screen>\appendix
+</screen>
+<para>This does not directly produce any output.  But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent <literal>\chapter</literal> commands start an appendix.  In
+an article it does the same, for <literal>\section</literal> commands.  It also
+resets the <literal>chapter</literal> and <literal>section</literal> counters to 0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the <literal>section</literal> and
+<literal>subsection</literal> counters.
+</para>
+<para>In this book
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{One}  ...
+\chapter{Two}  ...
+ ...
 \appendix
-\chapter{The First Appendix}
+\chapter{Three}  ...
+\chapter{Four}  ...
 </screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>secnumdepth counter</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section numbers, printing</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"/><para>The <literal>secnumdepth</literal> counter controls printing of section numbers.
-The setting
+<para>the first two will generate output numbered ‘<literal>Chapter 1</literal>’ and
+‘<literal>Chapter 2</literal>’.  After the <literal>\appendix</literal> the numbering will be
+‘<literal>Appendix A</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Appendix B</literal>’.  See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link>
+for another example.
 </para>
-<screen>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>appendix</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>appendix</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <filename>appendix</filename> package adds the command
+<literal>\appendixpage</literal> to put a separate ‘<literal>Appendices</literal>’ in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command <literal>\addappheadtotoc</literal>
+to do the same in the table of contents.  You can reset the name
+‘<literal>Appendix</literal>’ with a command like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}</literal>, as well as a
+number of other features.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.7" id="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">
+<title><literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, <literal>\backmatter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frontmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, front matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mainmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, main matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, back matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, end matter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
 </screen>
-<para>suppresses heading numbers at any depth <inlineequation><mathphrase>> <replaceable>level</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation>, where
-<literal>chapter</literal> is level zero.  The default <literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 3 in
-&latex;’s <filename>article</filename> class and 2 in the <filename>book</filename> and
-<filename>report</filename> classes.  (See <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>.)
+<para>Format a <literal>book</literal> class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced.  All three commands are optional.
 </para>
+<para>Traditionally, a book’s front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables.  (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.)  The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\frontmatter</literal> declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter’s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the <literal>*</literal>-version (see <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link>).
+The <literal>\mainmatter</literal> changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number.  The <literal>\backmatter</literal> leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered.  See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for an example using the three.
+</para>
 
-
-<sect1 label="6.1" id="_005c_0040startsection">
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.8" id="_005c_0040startsection">
 <title><literal>\@startsection</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@startsection</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2430,10 +3052,24 @@
 <!-- xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef. -->
 </para>
 <para>Technically, <literal>\@startsection</literal> has the form
-</para><screen>\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}{<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}{<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}*[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
-</screen><para>(the star <literal>*</literal> is optional), so that issuing
-</para><screen>\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}{<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}{<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}}
-</screen><para>redefines <literal>\section</literal> to have the form
+</para>
+<screen>\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>level</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>style</replaceable>}*[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>so that issuing
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>level</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}
+  {<replaceable>style</replaceable>}}
+</screen>
+<para>redefines <literal>\section</literal> to have the form
 <literal>\section*[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal> (here too, the
 star <literal>*</literal> is optional).  See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link>.  This implies that
 when you write a command like <literal>\renewcommand{section}{...}</literal>,
@@ -2442,55 +3078,48 @@
 </para>
 <variablelist>
 <varlistentry><term><replaceable>name</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"/><para>Name of the counter used to number the
-sectioning header.  This counter must be defined separately.  Most
-commonly this is either <literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, or
-<literal>paragraph</literal>.  Although in those three cases the counter name is the
-same as the sectioning command itself, using the same name is not
-required.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-name"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"/><para>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header.  This counter
+must be defined separately.  Most commonly this is either
+<literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, or <literal>paragraph</literal>.  Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don’t have to use the same name.
 </para>
 <para>Then <literal>\the</literal><replaceable>name</replaceable> displays the title number and
 <literal>\</literal><replaceable>name</replaceable><literal>mark</literal> is for the page headers.  See the third
 example below.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>level</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"/><para>An integer giving the depth of the
-sectioning command: 0 for <literal>chapter</literal> (only applies to the standard
-<literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> classes), 1 for <literal>section</literal>, 2 for
-<literal>subsection</literal>, 3 for <literal>subsubsection</literal>, 4 for <literal>paragraph</literal>,
-and 5 for <literal>subparagraph</literal>.  In the <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal>
-classes <literal>part</literal> has level -1, while in the <literal>article</literal> class
-<literal>part</literal> has level 0.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-level"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"/><para>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link> for the list of standard level numbers.
 </para>
-<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of <literal>secnumdepth</literal>
-then the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered.  For
-instance, in an <literal>article</literal>, if <literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 1 then a
-<literal>\section{Introduction}</literal> command will produce output like “1
+<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link>).  For instance, if
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 1 in an <literal>article</literal> then the command
+<literal>\section{Introduction}</literal> will produce output like “1
 Introduction” while <literal>\subsection{Discussion}</literal> will produce
 output like “Discussion”, without the number prefix.
-See <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link>.
 </para>
-<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of <replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> then
-the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit.
-For instance, in an <literal>article</literal>, if <replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> is 1 then the table of
-contents will list sections but not subsections.
-<!-- xx add, and cross reference to, tocdepth -->
+<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).  For instance, in an
+<literal>article</literal>, if <replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>indent</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"/><para>A length giving the indentation of all
-of the title lines with respect to the left margin.  To have the title
-flush with the margin use <literal>0pt</literal>.  A negative indentation such as
-<literal>-\parindent</literal> will move the title into the left margin.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-indent"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"/><para>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin.  To have the title flush with the margin use
+<literal>0pt</literal>.  A negative indentation such as <literal>-\parindent</literal> will move
+the title into the left margin.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"/><para>The absolute value of this length is
-the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning
-unit’s title.  This space will be discarded if the sectioning unit
-happens to start at the top of a fresh page.  If this number is negative
-then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
-non-negative then the first paragraph is indented.  (Note that the
-negative of <literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal> is <literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus
--3pt</literal>.)
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-beforeskip"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"/><para>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title.  This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page.  If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented.  (Note that the negative of <literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal>
+is <literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</literal>.)
 </para>
 <para>For example, if <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>
 then to start the new sectioning unit, &latex; will add about 3.5 times
@@ -2510,14 +3139,13 @@
 page.)
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"/><para>This is a length.  If <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>
-is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the
-sectioning unit’s title header.  If it is negative then the title header
-becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph.
-In this case the absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space
-between the end of the title and the beginning of the following
-paragraph.  (Note that the negative of <literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal> is
-<literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</literal>.)
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-afterskip"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"/><para>This is a length.  If <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header.  If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph.  In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph.  (Note that the negative of
+<literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal> is <literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</literal>.)
 </para>
 <para>As with <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>, using a rubber length, with <literal>plus</literal> and
 <literal>minus</literal> components, is good practice here since it gives &latex;
@@ -2534,45 +3162,36 @@
 <literal>afterskip</literal> to cancel part of the <literal>\parskip</literal>.)
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>style</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"/><para>Controls the styling of the title.  See
-the examples below.  Typical commands to use here are <literal>\centering</literal>,
-<literal>\raggedright</literal>, <literal>\normalfont</literal>, <literal>\hrule</literal>, or
-<literal>\newpage</literal>.  The last command in <replaceable>style</replaceable> may be one such as
-<literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> or <literal>\fbox</literal> that takes one argument. The
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-style"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"/><para>Controls the styling of the title.  See the examples below.  Typical
+commands to use here are <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>,
+<literal>\normalfont</literal>, <literal>\hrule</literal>, or <literal>\newpage</literal>.  The last command
+in <replaceable>style</replaceable> may be one that takes one argument, such as
+<literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> or <literal>\fbox</literal> that takes one argument.  The
 section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
 instance, setting <replaceable>style</replaceable> to <literal>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</literal> would
-produce titles that are bold and upper case.
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>These are &latex;’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
 are defined with <literal>\@startsection</literal>, for the <filename>article</filename>,
-<filename>book</filename>, and <filename>report</filename> classes.
+<filename>book</filename>, and <filename>report</filename> classes.  For section, the <replaceable>level</replaceable> is
+1, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is <literal>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</literal>,
+and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is <literal>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</literal>.  For
+subsection, the <replaceable>level</replaceable> is 2, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the
+<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the
+<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is <literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>, and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is
+<literal>\normalfont\large\bfseries</literal>.  For subsubsection, the <replaceable>level</replaceable>
+is 3, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is
+<literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is
+<literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>, and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is
+<literal>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</literal>.
 </para>
-<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="10*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><thead><row><entry></entry><entry><para><literal>section</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>subsection</literal>  </para></entry><entry><para><literal>subsubsection</literal>
-</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><replaceable>name</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para>section          </para></entry><entry><para>subsection          </para></entry><entry><para>subsubsection
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><replaceable>level</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para>1          </para></entry><entry><para>2          </para></entry><entry><para>3
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><replaceable>indent</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>0pt</literal>          </para></entry><entry><para><literal>0pt</literal>          </para></entry><entry><para><literal>0pt</literal>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><replaceable>afterskip</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><replaceable>style</replaceable></link>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\normalfont\large\bfseries</literal>
-</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</literal>
-</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 <para>Here are examples.  They go either in a package or class file or in the
 preamble of a &latex; document.  If you put them in the preamble they
 must go between a <literal>\makeatletter</literal> command and a
 <literal>\makeatother</literal>.  (Probably the error message <literal>You can't use
 `\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</literal>  means that you forgot this.)
-See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</link>.
+See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</link>.
 </para>
 <para>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.  It says
 <literal>\renewcommand</literal> because &latex;’s standard classes have already
@@ -2600,7 +3219,9 @@
     {\scshape}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><replaceable>style</replaceable></link>
   }
 </screen>
-<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.  This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to display that counter.
+<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
 </para>
 <!-- From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ -->
 <screen>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
@@ -2625,39 +3246,49 @@
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross references</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
-refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure~3 for more details.”
-</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>label</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that
-number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update
-this reference by hand.  Instead, &latex; has you write a <firstterm>label</firstterm>
-like <literal>\label{eq:GreensThm}</literal> and refer to it with <literal>See
-equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</literal>.
+<para>We often want something like ‘<literal>See Theorem~31</literal>’.  But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice.  Instead you should write a <firstterm>label</firstterm> such as
+<literal>\label{eq:GreensThm}</literal> and then <firstterm>reference</firstterm> it, as with
+<literal>See equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</literal>.  &latex; will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
 </para>
-<para>&latex; writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
-name as the file containing the <literal>\label{...}</literal> but with an
-<filename>.aux</filename> extension.  (The information has the format
-<literal>\newlabel{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{{<replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pagenumber</replaceable>}}</literal>
-where <replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable> is the current value of the macro
-<literal>\@currentlabel</literal> that is usually updated whenever you call
-<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>.)
+<screen>We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+...
+\begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+  ...
+\end{theorem}
+...
+See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension <filename>.aux</filename> and with the same base name as the file containing
+the <literal>\label</literal>.  So if <literal>\label</literal> is in <filename>calculus.tex</filename> then
+the information is in <filename>calculus.aux</filename>.  &latex; puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a <literal>\label</literal>.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>forward reference</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>reference, forward</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
-document has a <firstterm>forward reference</firstterm>, a <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> that
-appears earlier than the associated <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal>; see the
-example in the <literal>\pageref{...}</literal> description.  &latex; gets the
-information for references from the <filename>.aux</filename> file.  If this is the
-first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message
-<literal>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
-cross references right.</literal> and in the output the reference will appear as
-two question marks ‘<literal>??</literal>’, in boldface.  Or, if you change some
-things so the references change then you get the same warning and the
-output contains the old reference information.  The solution in either
-case is just to compile the document a second time.
+<para>The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a <firstterm>forward reference</firstterm>, a <literal>\ref</literal>
+that appears before the associated <literal>\label</literal>.  If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get ‘<literal>LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right</literal>’
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks ‘<literal>??</literal>’, in boldface.  A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information.  In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>cleveref</literal> package enhances &latex;’s
+cross referencing features.  You can arrange that if you enter
+<literal>\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}</literal> then
+<literal>\cref{th:Nerode}</literal> will output ‘<literal>Theorem 3.21</literal>’, without you
+having to enter the “Theorem.”
+</para>
 
 
 <sect1 label="7.1" id="_005clabel">
@@ -2682,28 +3313,37 @@
 distinguished, as usual.
 </para>
 <para>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
-separated by a colon or period.  This helps to avoid accidentally
-creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
-readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
+separated by a colon or period.  Thus, <literal>\label{fig:Post}</literal> is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post.  This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>ch</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>for chapters
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sec</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sec</literal>
+</term><term><literal>subsec</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>for lower-level sectioning commands
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fig</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fig</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>for figures
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>tab</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>tab</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>for tables
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>eq</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>eq</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>for equations
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>Thus, <literal>\label{fig:Euler}</literal> is a label for a figure with a portrait
-of the great man.
+<para>In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+<literal>\newlabel{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{{<replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pagenumber</replaceable>}}</literal>.
+Here <replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable> is the current value of the macro
+<literal>\@currentlabel</literal> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>In this example below the key <literal>sec:test</literal> will get the number of the
-current section and the key <literal>fig:test</literal> will get the number of the
-figure.  (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
-tables.)
+<para>Below, the key <literal>sec:test</literal> will get the number of the current
+section and the key <literal>fig:test</literal> will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
 </para>
 <screen>\section{section name}
 \label{sec:test}
@@ -2718,7 +3358,7 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="7.2" id="_005cpageref">
-<title><literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\pageref</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pageref</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross referencing with page number</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2731,11 +3371,15 @@
 <para>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
 <literal>\label</literal>{<replaceable>key</replaceable>} command appears.
 </para>
-<para>In this example the <literal>\label{eq:main}</literal> is used both for the
-formula number and for the page number.  (Note that the two references
-are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice
-to resolve those.)
+<para>If there is no <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> then you get something like
+‘<literal>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</literal>’
 </para>
+<para>Below, the <literal>\label{eq:main}</literal> is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number.  (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+</para>
 <screen>The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
   ...
 \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
@@ -2745,7 +3389,7 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="7.3" id="_005cref">
-<title><literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\ref</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ref</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross referencing, symbolic</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2763,10 +3407,14 @@
 <literal>\label</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005clabel">\label</link>).  It does not produce any text,
 such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself.
 </para>
-<para>In this example, the <literal>\ref{popular}</literal> produces ‘<literal>2</literal>’.  Note
-that it is a forward reference since it comes before
-<literal>\label{popular}</literal>.
+<para>If there is no <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> then you get something like
+‘<literal>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</literal>’
 </para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>\ref{popular}</literal> produces ‘<literal>2</literal>’.  Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before <literal>\label{popular}</literal>
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+</para>
 <screen>The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
 \begin{enumerate}
 \item Plain \TeX
@@ -2774,7 +3422,13 @@
 \item Con\TeX t
 \end{enumerate}
 </screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The <filename>cleveref</filename> package includes text such as ‘<literal>Theorem</literal>’ in the
+reference.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="8" id="Environments">
@@ -2872,7 +3526,7 @@
   ...
 \end{array}
 </screen>
-<para>or
+<para>or:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{array}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
   <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
@@ -2881,26 +3535,42 @@
 </screen>
 <para>Produce a mathematical array.  This environment can only be used in math
 mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
-such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).  Column entries are
-separated by an ampersand (<literal>&</literal>).  Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).  
+such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).  Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<literal>&</literal>).  Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
 </para>
+<para>This example shows a three by three array.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation*}
+  \chi(x) =
+  \left|              % vertical bar fence
+    \begin{array}{ccc}
+      x-a  &-b  &-c  \\
+      -d   &x-e &-f  \\
+      -g   &-h  &x-i
+    \end{array}
+ \right|
+\end{equation*}
+</screen>
 <para>The required argument <replaceable>cols</replaceable> describes the number of columns, their
-alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  See
-<link linkend="tabular">tabular</link> for the complete description of <replaceable>cols</replaceable>, and of the
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  For instance,
+<literal>\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}</literal> gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left.  See
+<link linkend="tabular">tabular</link> for the complete description of <replaceable>cols</replaceable> and of the
 other common features of the two environments, including the optional
 <replaceable>pos</replaceable> argument.
 </para>
 <para>There are two ways that <literal>array</literal> diverges from <literal>tabular</literal>.  The
 first is that <literal>array</literal> entries are typeset in math mode, in
-textstyle (except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies the column with
-<literal>p{...}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
-The second is that, instead of <literal>tabular</literal>’s parameter
-<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an <literal>array</literal> is governed
-by
+textstyle (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies
+the column with <literal>p{...}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode.  The second is that, instead of <literal>tabular</literal>’s parameter
+<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an <literal>array</literal> is
+governed by
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraycolsep</primary></indexterm>
 <literal>\arraycolsep</literal>, which gives half the width between columns. The
-default for this is ‘<literal>5pt</literal>’.
+default for this is ‘<literal>5pt</literal>’ so that between two columns comes
+10pt of space.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2914,26 +3584,32 @@
 <literal>Vmatrix</literal> for an array surrounded by double vertical
 bars <literal>||...||</literal>, along with a number of other array constructs.
 </para>
-<para>Here is an example of an array:
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The next example uses the <filename>amsmath</filename> package.
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{equation}
-  \begin{array}{cr}
-    \sqrt{y}  &12.3 \\
-    x^2       &3.4       
-  \end{array}
-\end{equation}
-</screen>
-<para>The next example works if <literal>\usepackage{amsmath}</literal> is in the
-preamble:
-</para>
-<screen>\begin{equation}
-  \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+<screen>\usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
+
+\begin{equation}    
+  \begin{vmatrix}{cc}  % array with vert lines
     a  &b \\
     c  &d       
   \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
 \end{equation}
 </screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>array (package)</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>array (package)</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>dcolumn</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>dcolumn</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many packages concerning arrays.  The <filename>array</filename> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types.  The <filename>dcolumn</filename>
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point.  For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="8.3" id="center">
 <title><literal>center</literal></title>
@@ -2946,16 +3622,18 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{center}
-  ... text ...
+  <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+  <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+  ...
 \end{center}
 </screen>
 <para>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
-centered within the left and right margins on the current page.  Use
-double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+centered within the left and right margins.  Use
+double-backslash, <literal>\\</literal>, to get a line break (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>center</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
-If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, &latex;
-will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
-shrinking any interword space.
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
 </para>
 <para>This environment inserts space above and below the text body.  See
 <link linkend="_005ccentering">\centering</link> to avoid such space, for example inside a <literal>figure</literal>
@@ -2982,8 +3660,12 @@
   I grew up in that belief.  --Richard Burton 
 \end{center}
 </screen>
-<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional.
+<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional.  If present it
+doesn’t add any vertical space.
 </para>
+<para>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+</para>
 
 
 <sect2 label="8.3.1" id="_005ccentering">
@@ -2992,12 +3674,34 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\centering</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, declaration for</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered.  It is
-most often used inside an environment such as <literal>figure</literal>, or in a
-<literal>parbox</literal>.
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>{\centering ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{group}
+  \centering ...
+\end{group}
+</screen>
+<para>Center the material in its scope.  It is most often used inside an
+environment such as <literal>figure</literal>, or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This example’s <literal>\centering</literal> declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}
+  \centering
+  \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+  \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>The scope of this <literal>\centering</literal> ends with the <literal>\end{figure}</literal>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <literal>center</literal> environment, the <literal>\centering</literal> command does
-not add vertical space above and below the text.
+not add vertical space above and below the text.  That’s its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
 </para>
 <para>It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  If <literal>ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz</literal> is
@@ -3009,19 +3713,8 @@
 paragraph unit.  Thus, if <literal>{\centering xx \\ yy\par} zz</literal> is
 surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
 centered lines ‘<literal>xx</literal>’ and ‘<literal>yy</literal>’, followed by a new paragraph with
-‘<literal>zz</literal>’ that is formatted as usual.  See also the following example.
+‘<literal>zz</literal>’ that is formatted as usual.
 </para>
-<para>This example’s <literal>\centering</literal> causes the graphic to be horizontally
-centered.  
-</para>
-<screen>\begin{figure}
-  \centering
-  \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
-  \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
-\end{figure}
-</screen>
-<para>The scope of the <literal>\centering</literal> ends with the <literal>\end{figure}</literal>.
-</para>
 
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
@@ -3037,26 +3730,27 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{description}
-\item[<replaceable>label of first item</replaceable>] text of first item
-\item[<replaceable>label of second item</replaceable>] text of second item
-  ...
+  \item[<replaceable>label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+  \item[<replaceable>label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+   ...
 \end{description}
 </screen>
-<para>Environment to make a labeled list of items.  Each item’s <replaceable>label</replaceable> is
-typeset in bold, and is flush left so that long labels continue into the
+<para>Environment to make a list of labeled items.  Each item’s <replaceable>label</replaceable> is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
 first line of the item text.  There must be at least one item; having
 none causes the &latex; error ‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a
 missing \item</literal>’.
 </para>
 <para>This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
-The labels ‘<literal>lama</literal>’ and ‘<literal>llama</literal>’ come out in boldface with their
-left edges aligned on the left margin.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{definition}
   \item[lama] A priest.
   \item[llama] A beast.
 \end{definition}
 </screen>
+<para>The labels ‘<literal>lama</literal>’ and ‘<literal>llama</literal>’ are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Start list items with the <literal>\item</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>).  Use the
 optional labels, as in <literal>\item[Main point]</literal>, because there is
@@ -3069,10 +3763,10 @@
 change given in argument style (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>) then it will come
 out bold.  For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
 <literal>\item[\texttt{label text}]</literal> then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
-typewriter is to use declarative style: <literal>\item[{\tt label
-text}]</literal>.  Similarly, get the standard roman font with <literal>\item[{\rm
-label text}]</literal>.
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+<literal>\item[{\tt label text}]</literal>.  Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with <literal>\item[{\rm label text}]</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>
 and <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>.  Unlike those environments, nesting
@@ -3102,7 +3796,7 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{displaymath}
-<replaceable>math text</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>mathematical text</replaceable>
 \end{displaymath}
 </screen>
 <para>Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
@@ -3136,10 +3830,12 @@
 environment honors the <literal>fleqn</literal> option.)
 </para>
 <para>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line. 
-</para><screen>\begin{displaymath}
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
   \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
 \end{displaymath}
-</screen><para>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version  
+</screen>
+<para>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version  
 <literal>\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)</literal> produces.
 </para>
 
@@ -3211,9 +3907,9 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{enumerate}
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] text of first item
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+  ...
 \end{enumerate}
 </screen>
 <para>Environment to produce a numbered list of items.  The format of the
@@ -3248,15 +3944,15 @@
 the outermost level.
 </para>
 <orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>arabic number followed by a period: ‘<literal>1.</literal>’, ‘<literal>2.</literal>’, …
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>lower case letter inside parentheses: ‘<literal>(a)</literal>’, ‘<literal>(b)</literal>’ …
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>lower case roman numeral followed by a period: ‘<literal>i.</literal>’, ‘<literal>ii.</literal>’, …
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>upper case letter followed by a period: ‘<literal>A.</literal>’, ‘<literal>B.</literal>’, …
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>lowercase letter inside parentheses: ‘<literal>(a)</literal>’, ‘<literal>(b)</literal>’ …
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: ‘<literal>i.</literal>’, ‘<literal>ii.</literal>’, …
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>uppercase letter followed by a period: ‘<literal>A.</literal>’, ‘<literal>B.</literal>’, …
 </para></listitem></orderedlist>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumi</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiv</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>enumerate</literal> environment uses the counters <literal>\enumi</literal> through
+<anchor id="enumerate-enumi"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumii"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumiii"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumiv"/><para>The <literal>enumerate</literal> environment uses the counters <literal>\enumi</literal> through
 <literal>\enumiv</literal> (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
 </para>
 <para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
@@ -3269,7 +3965,7 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiv</primary></indexterm>
-<para>To change the format of the label use <literal>\renewcommand</literal>
+<anchor id="enumerate-labelenumi"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumii"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumiii"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumiv"/><para>To change the format of the label use <literal>\renewcommand</literal>
 (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>) on the commands <literal>\labelenumi</literal>
 through <literal>\labelenumiv</literal>. For instance, this first level list will be
 labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
@@ -3299,17 +3995,16 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>align environment, from <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>amsmath package, replacing <literal>eqnarray</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Madsen, Lars</primary></indexterm>
-<para>First, a caveat: the <literal>eqnarray</literal> environment is depreciated.  It has
-infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
-inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article “Avoid
-eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
+<para>The <literal>eqnarray</literal> environment is obsolete.  It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
 <ulink url="http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf">http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</ulink>).  New documents
 should include the <filename>amsmath</filename> package and use the displayed
 mathematics environments provided there, such as the <literal>align</literal>
-environment.
+environment.  We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
 </para>
-<para>Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with old
-documents, a synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{eqnarray} 
   <replaceable>first formula left</replaceable>  &<replaceable>first formula middle</replaceable>  &<replaceable>first formula right</replaceable> \\
@@ -3370,21 +4065,22 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{equation}
-  math text
+  <replaceable>mathematical text</replaceable>
 \end{equation}
 </screen>
-<para>Make a <literal>displaymath</literal> environment (see <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>) with an
-equation number in the right margin.
+<para>The same as a <literal>displaymath</literal> environment (see <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>)
+except that &latex; puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the <literal>equation</literal> counter.
 </para>
-<para>The equation number is generated using the <literal>equation</literal> counter.
-</para>
 <para>You should have no blank lines between <literal>\begin{equation}</literal> and
 <literal>\begin{equation}</literal>, or &latex; will tell you that there is a
-missing dollar sign, $<literal>$</literal>.
+missing dollar sign.
 </para>
-<para>Note that the <filename>amsmath</filename> package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities.  Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <filename>amsmath</filename> package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities.  New documents should include this package.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -3400,50 +4096,55 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{figure}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
-  figure body
-\caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
-\label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>figure body</replaceable>
+  \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}  % optional
+  \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>              % optional
 \end{figure}
 </screen>
-<para>or
+<para>or:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{figure*}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
-  figure body
-\caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
-\label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>figure body</replaceable>
+  \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}  % optional
+  \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>              % optional  
 \end{figure*}
 </screen>
-<para>A class of floats (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).  Because they cannot be split across
-pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
-are “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a following
-page.
+<para>Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text.  An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic.  Because of this, &latex; does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead “floats” them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).
 </para>
-<para>For the possible values of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> and their effect on the 
-float placement algorithm, see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
+<para>The <replaceable>figure body</replaceable> can consist of imported graphics
+(see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>), or text, &latex; commands, etc.  It is typeset in a
+<literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>The possible values of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> are <literal>h</literal> for ‘<literal>here</literal>’,
+<literal>t</literal> for ‘<literal>top</literal>’, <literal>b</literal> for ‘<literal>bottom</literal>’, and <literal>p</literal> for
+‘<literal>on a separate page of floats</literal>’.  For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
+</para>
 <para>The starred form <literal>figure*</literal> is used when a document is in
 double-column mode (see <link linkend="_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</link>).  It produces a figure that
 spans both columns, at the top of the page.  To add the possibility of
 placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> <literal>b</literal>
 in <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
 </para>
-<para>The figure body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>
-and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
-</para>
 <para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
 references</link>).
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
 The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
 figure.  By default it is numbered.  If <replaceable>loftitle</replaceable> is present, it is
-used in the list of figures instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Tables-of-contents">Tables of
-contents</link>).
+used in the list of figures instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
+contents etc.</link>).
 </para>
-<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  It requires one of the
-packages <filename>graphics</filename> or <filename>graphicx</filename>.  The graphic, with its
-caption, will be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  &latex; will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
 end of the document, on a page of floats.
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{figure}[t]
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{figure}[t]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
   \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
@@ -3522,19 +4223,36 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged right text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
 <screen>\begin{flushleft}
-<replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
-<replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
-...
+  <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+  <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+  ...
 \end{flushleft}
 </screen>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>flushleft</literal> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right. Each line must be terminated with the string <literal>\\</literal>.
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new line use a double
+backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  For the declaration form
+see <link linkend="_005craggedright">\raggedright</link>.
 </para>
+<para>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+\begin{flushleft}
+  A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+    at a convenient spot. \\
+  And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
 
 
+
 <sect2 label="8.12.1" id="_005craggedright">
 <title><literal>\raggedright</literal></title>
 
@@ -3543,16 +4261,38 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-justifying text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>justification, ragged right</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\raggedright</literal> declaration corresponds to the
-<literal>flushleft</literal> environment.  This declaration can be used inside an
-environment such as <literal>quote</literal> or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
+<screen>{\raggedright  ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>} \raggedright
+  ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as <literal>quote</literal>
+or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.  For the environment form
+see <link linkend="flushleft">flushleft</link>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <literal>flushleft</literal> environment, the <literal>\raggedright</literal>
 command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the
 scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <literal>\end</literal>
 command that ends the paragraph unit.
 </para>
+<para>Here <literal>\raggedright</literal> in each second column keeps &latex; from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column.  Note
+that <literal>\raggedright</literal> is inside the curly braces <literal>{...}</literal> to
+delimit its effect.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+  Team alpha  &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+  Team beta   &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+                cooler is never empty.}                         \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
 
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
@@ -3566,16 +4306,21 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
 
 <screen>\begin{flushright}
-<replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
-<replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
-...
+  <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+  <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+  ...
 \end{flushright}
 </screen>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>flushright</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>flushright</literal> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left.  Each line must be terminated with the control sequence <literal>\\</literal>.
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new
+line use a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  For the declaration form
+see <link linkend="_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</link>.
 </para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see <link linkend="flushleft">flushleft</link>.
+</para>
 
 
 <sect2 label="8.13.1" id="_005craggedleft">
@@ -3586,16 +4331,29 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>justification, ragged left</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-justifying text</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\raggedleft</literal> declaration corresponds to the
-<literal>flushright</literal> environment.  This declaration can be used inside an
-environment such as <literal>quote</literal> or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
+<screen>{\raggedleft  ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>} \raggedleft
+  ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as <literal>quote</literal>
+or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.  For the environment form
+see <link linkend="flushright">flushright</link>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <literal>flushright</literal> environment, the <literal>\raggedleft</literal>
 command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the
 scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <literal>\end</literal>
 command that ends the paragraph unit.
 </para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see <link linkend="_005craggedright">\raggedright</link>.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
@@ -3609,29 +4367,30 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>unordered lists</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>bulleted lists</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet lists</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{itemize}
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] text of first item
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+  ...
 \end{itemize}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>itemize</literal> environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted”
-list.  The format of the label numbering depends on the nesting level of
-this environment; see below.  Each <literal>itemize</literal> list environment must
-have at least one item; having none causes the &latex; error
-‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>’.
+<para>Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.  The
+environment must have at least one <literal>\item</literal>; having none causes the
+&latex; error ‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>’.
 </para>
-<para>This example gives a two-item list.  As a top-level list each label
-would come out as a bullet, •.
+<para>This gives a two-item list.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{itemize}
  \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
  \item Rice portrait 
 \end{itemize}
 </screen>
+<para>As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, •.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Start list items with the <literal>\item</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>).  If you
 give <literal>\item</literal> an optional argument by following it with square
@@ -3645,11 +4404,11 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiii</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiv</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+<anchor id="itemize-labelitemi"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemii"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemiii"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemiv"/><para>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
 They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
 as <literal>enumerate</literal> (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).  The <literal>itemize</literal> environment
 uses the commands <literal>\labelitemi</literal> through <literal>\labelitemiv</literal> to
-produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lower case
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
 roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
 level).  These are the default marks at each level.
 </para>
@@ -3670,10 +4429,10 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginiv</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginv</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginvi</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+<anchor id="itemize-leftmargin"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmargini"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginii"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginiii"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginiv"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginv"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginvi"/><para>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
 the left margin of the <literal>itemize</literal> list is determined by the
 parameters <literal>\leftmargini</literal> through <literal>\leftmarginvi</literal>.  (Note the
-convention of using lower case roman numerals a the end of the command
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
 name to denote the nesting level.)  The defaults are: <literal>2.5em</literal> in
 level 1 (<literal>2em</literal> in two-column mode), <literal>2.2em</literal> in level 2,
 <literal>1.87em</literal> in level 3, and <literal>1.7em</literal> in level 4, with smaller
@@ -3695,7 +4454,7 @@
 space between items.  Here is an example defining an <literal>itemize*</literal>
 environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
 within a single item (<literal>\parskip</literal> is not list-specific,
-see <link linkend="_005cparskip">\parskip</link>):
+see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</link>):
 </para>
 <screen>\newenvironment{itemize*}%
   {\begin{itemize}%
@@ -3728,34 +4487,33 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{list}{<replaceable>labeling</replaceable>}{<replaceable>spacing</replaceable>}
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] text of first item
-\item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+  \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+  ...
 \end{list}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>list</literal> environment is a generic environment for constructing
-more specialized lists.  It is most often used to create lists via the
-<literal>description</literal>, <literal>enumerate</literal>, and <literal>itemize</literal> environments
-(see <link linkend="description">description</link>, <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>, and <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>).
+<para>An environment for constructing lists.
 </para>
-<para>Also, many standard &latex; environments that are not visually lists
-are constructed using <literal>list</literal>, including <literal>quotation</literal>,
-<literal>quote</literal>, <literal>center</literal>, <literal>verbatim</literal>, and plenty more
-(see <link linkend="quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</link>, see <link linkend="center">center</link>, see <link linkend="flushright">flushright</link>).
+<para>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body.  Most lists created by &latex; authors are the ones that come
+standard: the <literal>description</literal>, <literal>enumerate</literal>, and <literal>itemize</literal>
+environments (see <link linkend="description">description</link>, <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>, and <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>).
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>enumitem</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>enumitem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>The third-party package <literal>enumitem</literal> is useful for customizing lists.
-Here, we describe the <literal>list</literal> environment by defining a new custom
+<para>Instead, the <literal>list</literal> environment is most often used in macros.  For
+example, many standard &latex; environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <literal>list</literal>, including
+<literal>quotation</literal>, <literal>quote</literal>, and <literal>center</literal> (see <link linkend="quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &
+quote</link>, see <link linkend="center">center</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This uses the <literal>list</literal> environment to define a new custom
 environment.
 </para>
 <screen>\newcounter{namedlistcounter}  % number the items
 \newenvironment{named}
   {\begin{list}
-     {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling argument
-     {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % spacing argument
-      \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % still spacing arg
+     {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling 
+     {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % set counter
+      \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing 
   }
   {\end{list}}
 
@@ -3765,54 +4523,55 @@
   \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
 \end{named}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>list</literal> environment’s mandatory first argument,
-<replaceable>labeling</replaceable>, specifies the default labeling of list items.  It can
-contain text and &latex; commands, as above where it contains both
-‘<literal>Item</literal>’ and ‘<literal>\Roman{...}</literal>’.  &latex; forms the label by
-putting the <replaceable>labeling</replaceable> argument in a box of width
-<literal>\labelwidth</literal>.  If the label is wider than that, the additional
-material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a list you
-can override the default labeling by giving <literal>\item</literal> an optional
-argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above
-<literal>\item[Special label.]</literal>; see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>.
+<para>The mandatory first argument <replaceable>labeling</replaceable> specifies the default
+labeling of list items.  It can contain text and &latex; commands, as
+above where it contains both ‘<literal>Item</literal>’ and ‘<literal>\Roman{...}</literal>’.
+&latex; forms the label by putting the <replaceable>labeling</replaceable> argument in a box
+of width <literal>\labelwidth</literal>.  If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving <literal>\item</literal> an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above <literal>\item[Special label.]</literal>; see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>.
 </para>
+<para>The mandatory second argument <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty.  A command that can go in here is
+<literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cusecounter">\usecounter</link>).  Use this
+to tell &latex; to number the items using the given counter.  The
+counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an
+<literal>\item</literal> that does not have an optional argument.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makelabel</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The label box is constructed by the command <literal>\makelabel</literal>.  By
-default it positions the contents flush right.  It takes one argument,
-the label.  It typesets the contents in LR mode. An example of changing
-its definition is that to the above example before the definition of the
-<literal>named</literal> environment add
+<anchor id="list-makelabel"/><para>Another command that can go in <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> is
+<literal>\makelabel</literal>, which constructs the label box.  By default it puts
+the contents flush right.  Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above <literal>named</literal> example, before the
+definition of the environment add
 <literal>\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}</literal>, and between
 the <literal>\setlength</literal> command and the parenthesis that closes the
 <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> argument also add <literal>\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel</literal>.
 Then the items will be typeset in small caps.  Similarly, changing the
 second code line to <literal>\let\makelabel\fbox</literal> puts the labels inside a
-framed box.  Another example is at the bottom of this entry.
+framed box.  Another example of the <literal>\makelabel</literal> command is below,
+in the definition of the <literal>redlabel</literal> environment.
 </para>
-<para>The mandatory second argument <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> can have a list of
-commands to redefine the spacing parameters for the list, such as
-<literal>\setlength{\labelwidth}{2em}</literal>.  If this argument is empty,
-i.e., <literal>{}</literal>, then the list will have the default spacing given
-below.  To number the items using a counter, put
-<literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}</literal> in this argument
-(see <link linkend="_005cusecounter">\usecounter</link>).
+<para>Also often in <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list.  Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as <literal>itemize</literal> can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list.  Each is a length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with <literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal> components,
+to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page.  Change each with a
+command such as <literal>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}</literal>.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
 </para>
-<para>Below are the spacing parameters for list formatting.  See also the
-figure below.  Each is a length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  The vertical
-spaces are normally rubber lengths, with <literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal>
-components, to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page.  Change
-each with a command such as <literal>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt
-minus1pt}</literal>.  For some effects these lengths should be zero or
-negative.  Default values for derived environments such as
-<literal>itemize</literal> can be changed from the values shown here for the basic
-<literal>list</literal>.
-</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemindent</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <literal>leftmargin</literal>, of the
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itemindent"/><para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <literal>leftmargin</literal>, of the
 first line each item.  Its default value is <literal>0pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <literal>\parsep</literal>.  The defaults
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itemsep"/><para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <literal>\parsep</literal>.  The defaults
 for the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘<literal>article</literal>’, ‘<literal>book</literal>’,
 and ‘<literal>report</literal>’ classes at 10 point size are: <literal>4pt plus2pt
 minus1pt</literal>, <literal>\parsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>), and
@@ -3824,12 +4583,12 @@
 <literal>\topsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-labelsep"/><para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
 The default for &latex;’s ‘<literal>article</literal>’, ‘<literal>book</literal>’,
 and ‘<literal>report</literal>’ classes is <literal>0.5em</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelwidth</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal width.  The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-labelwidth"/><para>Horizontal width.  The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
 If <literal>\makelabel</literal> returns text that is wider than this then the first
 line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
 If <literal>\makelabel</literal> returns text of width less than or equal to
@@ -3850,7 +4609,7 @@
 environment.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftmargin</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-leftmargin"/><para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
 (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
 left margin of this list.  It must be non-negative.
 </para>
@@ -3867,13 +4626,13 @@
 <literal>2.2em</literal>, and <literal>\leftmarginiii</literal> is <literal>1.87em</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listparindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\listparindent</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-listparindent"/><para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
 <literal>\leftmargin</literal>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
 item.  A negative value makes this an “outdent”.  Its default value
 is <literal>0pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\parsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.  In the ‘<literal>book</literal>’
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-parsep"/><para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.  In the ‘<literal>book</literal>’
 and ‘<literal>article</literal>’ classes The defaults for the first three levels in
 &latex;’s ‘<literal>article</literal>’, ‘<literal>book</literal>’, and ‘<literal>report</literal>’ classes at 10
 point size are: <literal>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2pt plus1pt
@@ -3883,7 +4642,7 @@
 minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>0pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\partopsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\partopsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Vertical space added, beyond <literal>\topsep</literal>+<literal>\parskip</literal>, to the top
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-partopsep"/><para>Vertical space added, beyond <literal>\topsep</literal>+<literal>\parskip</literal>, to the top
 and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
 a blank line.  (A blank line in the &latex; source before the list
 changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
@@ -3898,20 +4657,20 @@
 minus2pt</literal>, and <literal>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightmargin</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-rightmargin"/><para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
 margin of the enclosing environment.  Its default value is <literal>0pt</literal>.
 It must be non-negative.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\topsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
-to <literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparskip">\parskip</link>).  The defaults for the first three
-levels in &latex;’s ‘<literal>article</literal>’, ‘<literal>book</literal>’, and ‘<literal>report</literal>’
-classes at 10 point size are: <literal>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>, <literal>4pt
-plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.  The defaults at 11
-point are: <literal>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</literal>, <literal>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>,
-and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.  The defaults at 12 point are:
-<literal>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</literal>, <literal>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</literal>, and
-<literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-topsep"/><para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to <literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</link>).  The defaults for
+the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘<literal>article</literal>’, ‘<literal>book</literal>’, and
+‘<literal>report</literal>’ classes at 10 point size are: <literal>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>,
+<literal>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.  The
+defaults at 11 point are: <literal>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</literal>, <literal>4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.  The defaults at 12
+point are: <literal>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</literal>, <literal>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</literal>,
+and <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
@@ -3992,17 +4751,23 @@
 page break.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@beginparpenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@beginparpenalty</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-beginparpenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@itempenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@itempenalty</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itempenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <literal>-51</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@endparpenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@endparpenalty</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-endparpenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>enumitem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>enumitem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <literal>enumitem</literal> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
 <para>This example has the labels in red.  They are numbered, and the left
 edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+See <link linkend="_005cusecounter">\usecounter</link>.
 </para>
 <screen>\usepackage{color}
 \newcounter{cnt}  
@@ -4030,7 +4795,8 @@
 <screen>\item text of item
 </screen>
 <para>or
-</para><screen>\item[<replaceable>optional-label</replaceable>] text of item
+</para>
+<screen>\item[<replaceable>optional-label</replaceable>] text of item
 </screen>
 <para>An entry in a list.  The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default
 depends on the list type.
@@ -4133,24 +4899,114 @@
         
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>minipage, creating a</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}
+  <replaceable>contents</replaceable>
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
 <screen>\begin{minipage}[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}
-<replaceable>text</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>contents</replaceable>
 \end{minipage}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>minipage</literal> environment typesets its body <replaceable>text</replaceable> in a
-block that will not be broken across pages.  This is similar to the
-<literal>\parbox</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>), but unlike <literal>\parbox</literal>,
-other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage.
+<para>Put <replaceable>contents</replaceable> into a box that is <replaceable>width</replaceable> wide.  This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.)  This box will not be broken across pages.  So <literal>minipage</literal>
+is similar to <literal>\parbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
 </para>
-<!-- (xxref positions) -->
-<para>The arguments are the same as for <literal>\parbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>).
+<para>This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
 </para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{3in}
+  Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+  He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+  was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+  and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+<literal>minipage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The required argument <replaceable>width</replaceable> is a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+It gives the width of the box into which <replaceable>contents</replaceable> are typeset.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <replaceable>position</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and
+<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>.  You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default <replaceable>position</replaceable> and set the <replaceable>height</replaceable> with
+<literal>\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] <replaceable>contents</replaceable> \end{minipage}</literal>.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, <literal>[]</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> governs how the <literal>minipage</literal>
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(synonym <literal>m</literal>) Default.  Positions the <literal>minipage</literal> so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain &tex; calls <literal>\vcenter</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Match the top line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s <literal>\vtop</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Match the bottom line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s <literal>\vbox</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+</para>
+<screen>---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+  first\\ second\\ third
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>with the results of changing <literal>c</literal> to <literal>b</literal> or <literal>t</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>height</replaceable> is a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+It sets the height of the <literal>minipage</literal>.  You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the <literal>minipage</literal>’s natural
+height and &latex; will not give an error or warning.  You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+</para>
+<para>The final optional argument <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> controls the placement of
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of <replaceable>position</replaceable>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place <replaceable>content</replaceable> at the top of the box.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place it in the vertical center.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place it at the box bottom.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stretch <replaceable>contents</replaceable> out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> argument makes sense when the <replaceable>height</replaceable> options
+is set to a value larger than the <literal>minipage</literal>’s natural height.  To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of <literal>b</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>Text before
+\begin{center}
+  ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+       first\\ second\\ third
+  \end{minipage}              
+\end{center}
+Text after  
+</screen>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentation, in minipage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>By default, paragraphs are not indented in the <literal>minipage</literal>
-environment.  You can restore indentation with a command such as
-<literal>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</literal> command.
+<para>By default paragraphs are not indented in a <literal>minipage</literal>.  Change
+that with a command such as <literal>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</literal> at
+the start of <replaceable>contents</replaceable>.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes in figures</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>figures, footnotes in</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4161,9 +5017,46 @@
 uses the <literal>\mpfootnote</literal> counter instead of the ordinary
 <literal>footnote</literal> counter (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
 </para>
-<para>However, don’t put one minipage inside another if you are using
-footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
+<para>This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
 </para>
+<screen>\begin{center}           % center the minipage on the line
+\begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+  \begin{center}         % center the table inside the minipage
+    \begin{tabular}{ll}
+      \textsc{Monarch}  &\textsc{Reign}             \\ \hline
+      Elizabeth II      &63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+      Victoria          &63 years                   \\
+      George III        &59 years
+    \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}  
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+<literal>\end{minipage}</literal> which may not be their logical place.
+</para>
+<para>This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.  They
+are vertically centered.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+  \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+  \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+    \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million)  \\ \hline
+      The Bronx      &$1.5$  \\
+      Brooklyn       &$2.6$  \\
+      Manhattan      &$1.6$  \\
+      Queens         &$2.3$  \\
+      Staten Island  &$0.5$  
+    \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}              
+\end{center}
+</screen>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="8.19" id="picture">
@@ -4175,356 +5068,643 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>creating pictures</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>pictures, creating</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>Synopses: 
+</para><screen>\begin{picture}(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)
+   <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable> 
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
 <screen>\begin{picture}(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)(<replaceable>xoffset</replaceable>,<replaceable>yoffset</replaceable>)
-… <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable> …
+  <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable>
 \end{picture}
 </screen>
+<para>An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text.  Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as <literal>TikZ</literal>, <literal>PSTricks</literal>, <literal>MetaPost</literal>,
+or <literal>Asymptote</literal>.  These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unitlength</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment allows you to create just about any
-kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles.
-You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying
-their coordinates.  A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal
-point and a minus sign—a number like <literal>5</literal>, <literal>0.3</literal> or
-<literal>-3.1416</literal>.  A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the
-unit length <literal>\unitlength</literal>, so if <literal>\unitlength</literal> has been set
-to <literal>1cm</literal>, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
-centimeters.
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(6,6)      % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+  \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}}  % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+    \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+  \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+    \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}  
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+    \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}  
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
 </para>
-<para>You should only change the value of <literal>\unitlength</literal>, using the
-<literal>\setlength</literal> command, outside of a <literal>picture</literal> environment.
-The default value is <literal>1pt</literal>.
+<screen>\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
+\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>The red X will be precisely a quarter of the <literal>\linewidth</literal> from
+the left margin, and <literal>0.35\linewidth</literal> up from the bottom.  Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document’s pages.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>picture</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>picture</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> package redefine the <literal>picture</literal> environment so
-that everywhere a number is used in a <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable> to specify
-a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
-this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>).  Multiply these by the value
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+&latex; reserves on the output page.  This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture’s box.
 </para>
-
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>position, in picture</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A <firstterm>position</firstterm> is a pair of coordinates, such as <literal>(2.4,-5)</literal>, specifying
-the point with x-coordinate <literal>2.4</literal> and y-coordinate <literal>-5</literal>.
-Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin,
-which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that
-when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces;
-the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
+<para>This environment also has an optional argument
+(<replaceable>xoffset</replaceable>,<replaceable>yoffset</replaceable>).  It is used to shift the origin.  Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by <literal>\unitlength</literal> to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has one mandatory argument which is a
-position (<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>), which specifies the size of the
-picture.  The environment produces a rectangular box with these
-<replaceable>width</replaceable> and <replaceable>height</replaceable>.
+<para>For example, if <literal>\unitlength</literal> has been set to <literal>1mm</literal>, the
+command
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment also has an optional position argument
-(<replaceable>xoffset</replaceable>,<replaceable>yoffset</replaceable>), following the size argument, that can
-change the origin.  (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument
-is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
-coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
-(thereby determining the origin).  For example, if <literal>\unitlength</literal>
-has been set to <literal>1mm</literal>, the command
-</para>
 <screen>\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
 </screen>
-<para>produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
-millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
-upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220).  When you first
-draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the
-origin at the lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your
+<para>produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters.  The
+picture’s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm).  When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your
 picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
 optional argument.
 </para>
-<para>The environment’s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
-picture.  This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
-&latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even
-off the page.  The picture’s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining
-how much room to leave for it.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>position, in picture</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Each <replaceable>picture command</replaceable> tells &latex; where to put something by
+naming its position.  A <firstterm>position</firstterm> is a pair such as <literal>(2.4,-5)</literal>
+giving the x- and y-coordinates.  A <firstterm>coordinate</firstterm> is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign).  It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length <literal>\unitlength</literal>,
+so if <literal>\unitlength</literal> has been set to <literal>1cm</literal>, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
 </para>
-<para>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <literal>\put</literal>
-command. The command
+<para>&latex;’s default for <literal>\unitlength</literal> is <literal>1pt</literal>.  it is a rigid
+length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  Change it with the <literal>\setlength</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>).  Make this change only outside of a <literal>picture</literal>
+environment.
 </para>
-<screen>\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+<para>Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with <literal>\put(1,2){...}</literal>, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.  Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+</para>
+<para>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <literal>\put</literal>,
+<literal>\multiput</literal>, <literal>\qbezier</literal>, and <literal>\graphpaper</literal>.  The most
+often used is <literal>\put</literal>. This
+</para>
+<screen>\put(11.3,-0.3){...}
 </screen>
-<para>puts the object specified by <literal>...</literal> in the
-picture, with its reference point at coordinates <inlineequation><mathphrase>(11.3,-.3)</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
-The reference points for various objects will be described below.
+<para>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>(11.3,-0.3)</mathphrase></inlineequation>.  The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>LR box</primary></indexterm>
+The <literal>\put</literal> command creates an <firstterm>LR box</firstterm> (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+Anything that can go in an <literal>\mbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>) can
+go in the text argument of the <literal>\put</literal> command.  The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box.  In this picture
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lR box</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\put</literal> command creates an <firstterm>LR box</firstterm>.  You can put anything
-that can go in an <literal>\mbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox">\mbox</link>) in the text argument of
-the <literal>\put</literal> command.  When you do this, the reference point will
-be the lower left corner of the box.
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines.  (Also, <literal>\line(1,1){1}</literal> does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>picture</literal> commands are described in the following sections.
+<para>The <literal>\multiput</literal>, <literal>qbezier</literal>, and <literal>graphpaper</literal> commands are
+described below.
 </para>
+<para>This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using <literal>\qbezier</literal> for
+that curve.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
+  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
+  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side rectangle
+  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
+  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
+  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
 
 
-<sect2 label="8.19.1" id="_005ccircle">
-<title><literal>\circle</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.1" id="_005cput">
+<title><literal>\put</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\put</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\circle[*]{<replaceable>diameter</replaceable>}
+<screen>\put(<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>){<replaceable>content</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\circle</literal> command produces a circle with a diameter as close
-to the specified one as possible.  The <literal>*</literal>-form of the command
-draws a solid circle.
+<para>Place <replaceable>content</replaceable> at the coordinate (<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>).  See
+the discussion of coordinates and <literal>\unitlength</literal> in <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+The <replaceable>content</replaceable> is processed in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
 </para>
-<para>Circles up to 40pt can be drawn.
+<para>This includes the text into the <literal>picture</literal>.
 </para>
+<screen>\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+</screen>
+<para>The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the ‘<literal>A</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.2" id="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">
-<title><literal>\makebox</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.2" id="_005cmultiput">
+<title><literal>\multiput</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox (for <literal>picture</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multiput</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\makebox(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\multiput(<replaceable>x</replaceable>,<replaceable>y</replaceable>)(<replaceable>delta_x</replaceable>,<replaceable>delta_y</replaceable>){<replaceable>num-copies</replaceable>}{<replaceable>obj</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\makebox</literal> command for the picture environment is similar to
-the normal <literal>\makebox</literal> command except that you must specify a
-<replaceable>width</replaceable> and <replaceable>height</replaceable> in multiples of <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+<para>Copy <replaceable>obj</replaceable> a total of <replaceable>num-copies</replaceable> times, with an increment of
+<replaceable>delta_x,delta_y</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>obj</replaceable> first appears at position
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>(x,y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, then at <inlineequation><mathphrase>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, and so on.
 </para>
-<para>The optional argument, <literal>[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]</literal>, specifies the quadrant that
-your <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears in.  You may select up to two of the following:
+<para>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+<link linkend="_005cgraphpaper">\graphpaper</link>).
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Moves the item to the bottom.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Moves the item to the left.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Moves the item to the right.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>See <link linkend="_005cmakebox">\makebox</link>.
-</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(10,10)
+  \linethickness{0.05mm}
+  \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}} 
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+  \linethickness{0.5mm}
+  \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.3" id="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">
-<title><literal>\framebox</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.3" id="_005cqbezier">
+<title><literal>\qbezier</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qbezier</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\framebox(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{...}
+<screen>\qbezier(<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)
+\qbezier[<replaceable>num</replaceable>](<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\framebox</literal> command is like <literal>\makebox</literal> (see previous
-section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
-that it creates.
+<para>Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments <literal>(<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)</literal>,
+<literal>(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)</literal>, and <literal>(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)</literal>.  That is,
+the curve runs from <replaceable>(x1,y1)</replaceable> to <replaceable>(x3,y3)</replaceable>, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at <replaceable>(x1,y1)</replaceable> passes through
+<replaceable>(x2,y2)</replaceable>, as does the tangent line at <replaceable>(x3,y3)</replaceable>.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\framebox</literal> command produces a rule of thickness
-<literal>\fboxrule</literal>, and leaves a space <literal>\fboxsep</literal> between the rule
-and the contents of the box.
+<para>This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
 </para>
-
-</sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.4" id="_005cdashbox">
-<title><literal>\dashbox</literal></title>
-
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashbox</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>Draws a box with a dashed line.  Synopsis:
-</para>
-<screen>\dashbox{<replaceable>dlen</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rwidth</replaceable>,<replaceable>rheight</replaceable>)[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)  
 </screen>
-<para><literal>\dashbox</literal> creates a dashed rectangle around <replaceable>text</replaceable> in a
-<literal>picture</literal> environment.  Dashes are <replaceable>dlen</replaceable> units long, and the
-rectangle has overall width <replaceable>rwidth</replaceable> and height <replaceable>rheight</replaceable>.
-The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is positioned at optional <replaceable>pos</replaceable>.  <!-- xxref positions. -->
+<para>The curve’s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve’s tangent line at (1,0).
 </para>
-<para>A dashed box looks best when the <replaceable>rwidth</replaceable> and <replaceable>rheight</replaceable> are
-multiples of the <replaceable>dlen</replaceable>.
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>num</replaceable> gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points.  The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is <literal>\qbeziermax</literal> (change this value with
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>).
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.5" id="_005cframe">
-<title><literal>\frame</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.4" id="_005cgraphpaper">
+<title><literal>\graphpaper</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frame</primary></indexterm>
-
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\graphpaper</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\frame{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\graphpaper(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable>)
+\graphpaper[<replaceable>spacing</replaceable>](<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable>)
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\frame</literal> command puts a rectangular frame around <replaceable>text</replaceable>.
-The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame.  No extra
-space is put between the frame and the object.
+<para>Draw a coordinate grid.  Requires the <literal>graphpap</literal> package.
+The grid’s origin is <literal>(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)</literal>.
+Grid lines come every <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends <replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable> units to the right and <replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable> units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
 </para>
+<para>This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphpap}    % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{picture}(6,20)    % in document body
+  \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>The lines are numbered every ten units.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.6" id="_005cline">
+<sect2 label="8.19.5" id="_005cline">
 <title><literal>\line</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\line</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\line(<replaceable>xslope</replaceable>,<replaceable>yslope</replaceable>){<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+<screen>\line(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\line</literal> command draws a line with the given <replaceable>length</replaceable> and
-slope <replaceable>xslope</replaceable>/<replaceable>yslope</replaceable>.
+<para>Draw a line.  It slopes such that it vertically rises <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> for
+every horizontal <replaceable>x_run</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>travel</replaceable> is the total horizontal
+change — it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>.  In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>)=(0,1), the <replaceable>travel</replaceable> gives the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
 </para>
+<para>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+</para>
+<screen>\put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+</screen>
+<para>For every over 2, this line will go up 5.  Because <replaceable>travel</replaceable>
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up 10.  Thus its
+endpoint is <inlineequation><mathphrase>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</mathphrase></inlineequation>.  In particular, note that
+<inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>travel</replaceable>=4</mathphrase></inlineequation> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+<para>The arguments <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then &latex; treats the
+second as 1.)  With
+<literal>\put(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>){\line(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}}</literal>,
+if <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> is negative then the line’s ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than <replaceable>x_init</replaceable>.  If <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> is negative
+then the line’s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>travel</replaceable> is negative then you get <literal>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.</literal>
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics packages</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with <inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>slope</replaceable> = x/y</mathphrase></inlineequation>,
-where <inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation> and <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> have integer values from −6
-through 6.  For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes,
-see <literal>pict2e</literal> and many other packages on CTAN.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>pict2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>PSTricks</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>PSTricks</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>MetaPost</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>MetaPost</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts.  The two numbers <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> must have
+integer values from −6 through 6.  Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that <replaceable>(x_run,y_rise)</replaceable> can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former).  To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+<literal>picture</literal>, see the package <filename>pict2e</filename> on CTAN.  Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as <filename>TikZ</filename>, or
+<filename>PSTricks</filename>, or <filename>MetaPost</filename>, or <filename>Asymptote</filename>
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.7" id="_005clinethickness">
+<sect2 label="8.19.6" id="_005clinethickness">
 <title><literal>\linethickness</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linethickness</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\linethickness{<replaceable>dim</replaceable>}</literal> command declares the thickness
-of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be
-<replaceable>dim</replaceable>, which must be a positive length.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para><literal>\linethickness</literal> does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
-circles, or the quarter circles drawn by <literal>\oval</literal>.
+<screen>\linethickness{<replaceable>dim</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be <replaceable>dim</replaceable>, which must be a positive length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  It differs from <literal>\thinlines</literal> and
+<literal>\thicklines</literal> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.8" id="_005cthicklines">
-<title><literal>\thicklines</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.7" id="_005cthinlines">
+<title><literal>\thinlines</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thicklines</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinlines</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\thicklines</literal> command is an alternate line thickness for
-horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. <link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> and <link linkend="_005cthinlines">\thinlines</link>.
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt.  This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either <link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> or <link linkend="_005cthicklines">\thicklines</link>.
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.9" id="_005cthinlines">
-<title><literal>\thinlines</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.8" id="_005cthicklines">
+<title><literal>\thicklines</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinlines</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thicklines</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\thinlines</literal> command is the default line thickness for
-horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. <link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> and <link linkend="_005cthicklines">\thicklines</link>.
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt.  See also
+<link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> and <link linkend="_005cthinlines">\thinlines</link>.  This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.10" id="_005cmultiput">
-<title><literal>\multiput</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="8.19.9" id="_005ccircle">
+<title><literal>\circle</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multiput</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circle</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\multiput(<replaceable>x</replaceable>,<replaceable>y</replaceable>)(<replaceable>delta_x</replaceable>,<replaceable>delta_y</replaceable>){<replaceable>n</replaceable>}{<replaceable>obj</replaceable>}
+<screen>\circle{<replaceable>diameter</replaceable>}
+\circle*{<replaceable>diameter</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\multiput</literal> command copies the object <replaceable>obj</replaceable> in a regular
-pattern across a picture.  <replaceable>obj</replaceable> is first placed at position
-<inlineequation><mathphrase>(x,y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, then at <inlineequation><mathphrase>(x+\delta x,y+\delta y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, and so on,
-<replaceable>n</replaceable> times.
+<para>Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one.  The <literal>*</literal> form produces a filled-in circle.
 </para>
+<para>This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at <literal>(5,7)</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+</screen>
+<para>The available radii for <literal>circle</literal> are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive.  For <literal>circle*</literal> they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.11" id="_005coval">
+<sect2 label="8.19.10" id="_005coval">
 <title><literal>\oval</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oval</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>portion</replaceable>]
+<screen>\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)
+\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>portion</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\oval</literal> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.  The
-optional argument <replaceable>portion</replaceable> allows you to produce only half of the
-oval via the following:
+<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners.  The optional argument
+<replaceable>portion</replaceable> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take <replaceable>portion</replaceable> to be one of these.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>selects the top half;
+</term><listitem><para>top half
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>selects the bottom half;
+</term><listitem><para>bottom half
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>selects the right half;
+</term><listitem><para>right half
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>selects the left half.
+</term><listitem><para>left half
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by setting
-<replaceable>portion</replaceable> to <literal>tr</literal>, <literal>br</literal>, <literal>bl</literal>, or <literal>tl</literal>.
+<para>Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting <replaceable>portion</replaceable> to
+<literal>tr</literal>, <literal>br</literal>, <literal>bl</literal>, or <literal>tl</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
-maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like
-boxes with rounded corners.
+<para>This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.  
 </para>
-
-</sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.12" id="_005cput">
-<title><literal>\put</literal></title>
-
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\put</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>Synopsis:
-</para>
-<screen>\put(<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>){ ... }
+<screen>\put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\put</literal> command places the material specified by the
-(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate,
-(<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>).
+<para>The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
 </para>
+<para>These shapes are not ellipses.  They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles.  These circles have a maximum radius of
+20pt (see <link linkend="_005ccircle">\circle</link> for the sizes).  Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.13" id="_005cshortstack">
+<sect2 label="8.19.11" id="_005cshortstack">
 <title><literal>\shortstack</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\shortstack</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\shortstack[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{...\\...\\...}
+<screen>\shortstack[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>line 1</replaceable> \\ ... }
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\shortstack</literal> command produces a stack of objects.  The valid
-positions are:
+<para>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
 </para>
+<para>This labels the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}}   % x axis
+\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}}   % y
+\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+</screen>
+<para>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link> puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
+</para>
+<para>The valid positions are:
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Move the objects to the right of the stack.
+</term><listitem><para>Make objects flush right
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Move the objects to the left of the stack
+</term><listitem><para>Make objects flush left
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+</term><listitem><para>Center objects (default)
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>\shortstack</literal> objects)</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Objects are separated with <literal>\\</literal>.
+<para>Separate objects into lines with <literal>\\</literal>.  These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights.  Thus, in
+<literal>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</literal> the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two.  You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with <literal>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</literal>,
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <literal>\shortstack{X \\
+\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</literal> or by using <literal>\\</literal>’s optional
+argument <literal>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>The <literal>\shortstack</literal> command is also available outside the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="8.19.14" id="_005cvector">
+<sect2 label="8.19.12" id="_005cvector">
 <title><literal>\vector</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vector</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\vector(<replaceable>xslope</replaceable>,<replaceable>yslope</replaceable>){<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+<screen>\vector(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\vector</literal> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope.  The <inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>xslope</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation> and <inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>yslope</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation>
-values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive.
+<para>Draw a line ending in an arrow.  The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> for every horizontal <replaceable>x_run</replaceable>.  The
+<replaceable>travel</replaceable> is the total horizontal change — it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in <inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>.  In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>)=(0,1), then
+<replaceable>travel</replaceable> gives the change in <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
 </para>
+<para>For an example see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+</para>
+<para>For elaboration on <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> see <link linkend="_005cline">\line</link>.  As
+there, the values of <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> are limited.  For
+<literal>\vector</literal> you must chooses integers between −4 and 4,
+inclusive.  Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime.  Thus,
+<literal>\vector(2,1){4}</literal> is acceptable but <literal>\vector(4,2){4}</literal> is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.13" id="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\makebox</literal> (picture)</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox (for <literal>picture</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Make a box to hold <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because <replaceable>rec-width</replaceable> and <replaceable>rec-height</replaceable> are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the <literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>).  This
+command is similar to the normal <literal>\makebox</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &
+\makebox</link>) except here that you must specify the width and height.  This
+command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <literal>\unitlength</literal> and height 4
+times <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+</screen>
+<para>The optional argument <literal><replaceable>position</replaceable></literal> specifies where in the box
+the <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears.  The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically.  To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Puts <replaceable>text</replaceable> the top of the box.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> on the left.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> on the right.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.14" id="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\framebox</literal> (picture)</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\framebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>This is the same as <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates.  The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame.  This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>).  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+\framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+</screen>
+<para>The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> units and height <replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> specifies the position of
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>; see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The rule has thickness <literal>\fboxrule</literal> and there is a blank space
+<literal>\fboxsep</literal> between the frame and the contents of the box.
+</para>
+<para>For this command, you must specify the <replaceable>width</replaceable> and <replaceable>height</replaceable>.  If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use <literal>\fbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox
+& \framebox</link>) or <literal>\frame</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframe">\frame</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.15" id="_005cframe">
+<title><literal>\frame</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frame</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\frame{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <replaceable>contents</replaceable>.  The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame.  In contrast to <literal>\framebox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object.  It is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.16" id="_005cdashbox">
+<title><literal>\dashbox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\dashbox{<replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\dashbox{<replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a dashed rectangle around <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The required arguments are: dashes are <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable> units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> units and height <replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> specifies the position of
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>; see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<para>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+</screen>
+<para>Each dash will be <literal>0.1\unitlength</literal> long, the box’s width is
+<literal>5\unitlength</literal> and its height is <literal>0.5\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>As in that example, a dashed box looks best when <replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> are multiples of the <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="8.20" id="quotation-and-quote">
-<title><literal>quotation</literal> and <literal>quote</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="8.20" id="quotation-_0026-quote">
+<title><literal>quotation</literal> & <literal>quote</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quotation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4542,35 +5722,28 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{quotation}
-<replaceable>text</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>text</replaceable>
 \end{quotation}
 </screen>
 <para>or 
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{quote}
-<replaceable>text</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>text</replaceable>
 \end{quote}
 </screen>
-<para>Include a quotation. 
+<para>Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+<literal>\leftmargin</literal> and the text is right-justified.
 </para>
-<para>In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
-<literal>\leftmargin</literal> and the text is justified at both.  As with the main
-text, leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.
+<para>They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the <literal>quotation</literal>
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space
+between paragraphs is small, <literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal>.  In the <literal>quote</literal>
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length <literal>\parsep</literal>).
 </para>
-<para>To compare the two: in the <literal>quotation</literal> environment, paragraphs are
-indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small,
-<literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal>.  In the <literal>quote</literal> environment, paragraphs are
-not indented and there is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the
-rubber length <literal>\parsep</literal>).  Thus, the <literal>quotation</literal> environment
-may be more suitable for documents where new paragraphs are marked by an
-indent rather than by a vertical separation.  In addition, <literal>quote</literal>
-may be more suitable for a short quotation or a sequence of short
-quotations.
-</para>
-<screen>\begin{quotation}
-\it Four score and seven years ago
+<screen>\begin{quotation} \small\it
+  Four score and seven years ago
   ... shall not perish from the earth.
-\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+  \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
 \end{quotation}
 </screen>
 
@@ -4593,10 +5766,11 @@
 ...
 \end{tabbing}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>tabbing</literal> environment aligns text in columns.  It works by
-setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on a typewriter.
-It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
-and known in advance.
+<para>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter.  This is less often used than the environments
+<literal>tabular</literal> (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>) or <literal>array</literal> (see <link linkend="array">array</link>) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
 </para>
 <para>This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
 widths, ended by a <literal>\kill</literal> command (which is described below):
@@ -4727,8 +5901,9 @@
             end;\\
 \end{tabbing}
 </screen>
-<para>The output looks like this:
-</para><screen>function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+<para>The output looks like this.
+</para>
+<screen>function fact(n : integer) : integer;
          begin
                if n > 1 then
                   fact := n * fact(n-1);
@@ -4746,13 +5921,11 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyvrb</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyvrb</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-
-<para>(The above example is just for illustration of the environment.  To
-actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim
-environment (see <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link>) would normally suffice.  For
-pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including
-<literal>algorithm2e</literal>, <literal>fancyvrb</literal>, <literal>listings</literal>, and
-<literal>minted</literal>.)
+<para>This example is just for illustration of the environment.  To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(see <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link>) would normally be best.  For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including <literal>algorithm2e</literal>,
+<literal>fancyvrb</literal>, <literal>listings</literal>, and <literal>minted</literal>.
 </para>
         
 </sect1>
@@ -4768,29 +5941,46 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{table}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
-  table body
-\caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
-\label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>table body</replaceable>
+  \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}  % optional
+  \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable>              % also optional
 \end{table}
 </screen>
-<para>A class of floats (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).  Because they cannot be split across
-pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
-are “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a following
-page.
+<para>A class of floats (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).  They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
 </para>
+<para>This example <literal>table</literal> environment contains a <literal>tabular</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{table}
+  \centering\small
+  \begin{tabular}{ll}
+    \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+      &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}}  \\ \hline
+    Bach            &Cello Suite Number 1  \\
+    Beethoven       &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+    Brahms          &Cello Sonata Number 1
+  \end{tabular}
+  \caption{Top cello pieces}
+  \label{tab:cello}
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>but you can put many different kinds of content in a <literal>table</literal>,
+including text, &latex; commands, etc.
+</para>
 <para>For the possible values of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> and their effect on the 
 float placement algorithm, see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
 </para>
-<para>The table body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>
-and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
+<para>The table body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
 </para>
 <para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
 references</link>).  
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
-The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
-table.  By default it is numbered.  If <replaceable>lottitle</replaceable> is present, it is
-used in the list of tables instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Tables-of-contents">Tables of
-contents</link>).
+The <literal>\caption</literal> command is also optional.  It specifies caption text
+for the table.  By default it is numbered.  If its optional
+<replaceable>lottitle</replaceable> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).
 </para>
 <para>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
 unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -4820,20 +6010,20 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
-column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+  <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable>  &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable>  ...  &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
   ...
 \end{tabular}
 </screen>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular*}{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
-column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+  <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable>  &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable>  ...  &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
   ...
 \end{tabular*}
 </screen>
-<para>These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
-horizontal rows.  Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
-in columns.  This illustrates many of the features.
+<para>Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns.  This
+illustrates many of the features.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular}{l|l}
   \textit{Player name}  &\textit{Career home runs}  \\ 
@@ -4842,27 +6032,21 @@
   Babe Ruth   &714
 \end{tabular}
 </screen>
-<para>The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
-between them, is specified in <literal>tabular</literal>’s argument <literal>{l|l}</literal>.
+<para>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them.  This is specified in <literal>tabular</literal>’s argument
+<literal>{l|l}</literal>.
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>&</primary></indexterm>
-Columns are separated with an ampersand <literal>&</literal>.  A horizontal rule
-between two rows is created with <literal>\hline</literal>.
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, <literal>&</literal>.  The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with <literal>\hline</literal>.
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
-The end of each row is marked with a double backslash <literal>\\</literal>.
 This <literal>\\</literal> is optional after the last row unless an <literal>\hline</literal>
 command follows, to put a rule below the table.
 </para>
 <para>The required and optional arguments to <literal>tabular</literal> consist of:
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>width</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Required for <literal>tabular*</literal>, not allowed for <literal>tabular</literal>. Specifies
-the width of the <literal>tabular*</literal> environment.  The space between columns
-should be rubber, as with <literal>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</literal>, to allow
-the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
-are likely to get the <literal>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-...</literal> warning.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>pos</replaceable>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>pos</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Optional.  Specifies the table’s vertical position.  The default is to
 align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
 surrounding text.  There are two other possible alignments: <literal>t</literal>
@@ -4891,25 +6075,28 @@
 </term><listitem><para>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>@{<replaceable>text or space</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>This inserts <replaceable>text or space</replaceable> at this location in every row.  The
-<replaceable>text or space</replaceable> material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is
-fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</term><listitem><para>Insert <replaceable>text or space</replaceable> at this location in every row.  The <replaceable>text
+or space</replaceable> material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, &latex;’s
+<para>If between two columns there is no @-expression then &latex;’s
 <literal>book</literal>, <literal>article</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> classes will put on
-either side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which
-by default is ‘<literal>6pt</literal>’.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
-separated by 12pt (so <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> is misleadingly-named since it
-is not the separation between tabular columns).  By implication, a
-space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final
-column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal> or <literal>|</literal> there.
+either side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which by
+default is 6pt.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12pt (so <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).  In
+addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal> or <literal>|</literal>
+there.
 </para>
-<para>If you override the default and use an @-expression then you must
-insert any desired space yourself, as in <literal>@{\hspace{1em}}</literal>.
+<para>If you override the default and use an @-expression then &latex; does
+not insert <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in <literal>@{\hspace{1em}}</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>An empty expression <literal>@{}</literal> will eliminate the space, including
-the space at the start or end, as in the example below where the tabular
-lines need to lie on the left margin.
+<para>An empty expression <literal>@{}</literal> will eliminate the space.  In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the the space before the
+first column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{flushleft}
   \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
@@ -4917,8 +6104,8 @@
   \end{tabular}
 \end{flushleft}
 </screen>
-<para>This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns, arranged
-so the numbers in the table are aligned on that decimal point.
+<para>The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
   $3$ &$14$  \\
@@ -4928,19 +6115,17 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\extracolsep</primary></indexterm>
 <para>An <literal>\extracolsep{<replaceable>wd</replaceable>}</literal> command in an @-expression causes an
 extra space of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable> to appear to the left of all subsequent
-columns, until countermanded by another <literal>\extracolsep</literal> command.
-Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by
-an @-expression.  An <literal>\extracolsep</literal> command can be used only in an
+columns, until countermanded by another <literal>\extracolsep</literal>.  Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+ at -expression.  An <literal>\extracolsep</literal> command can be used only in an
 @-expression in the <literal>cols</literal> argument.  Below, &latex; inserts the
 right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
 wide.
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{center}
-  \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
-    Seven times down, eight times up 
-    &such is life!
-  \end{tabular*}
-\end{center}
+<screen>\begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+  Seven times down, eight times up \ldots 
+  &such is life!
+\end{tabular*}
 </screen>
 <para>To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
 column, load the <literal>array</literal> package and use the <literal>>{...}</literal>
@@ -4948,45 +6133,56 @@
 <!-- xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages... -->
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>p{<replaceable>wd</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable>.
+</term><listitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable>, as if
+it were the argument of a <literal>\parbox[t]{wd}{...}</literal> command.
 </para>
-<para>Note that a line break double backslash <literal>\\</literal> may not appear in the
-item, except inside an environment like <literal>minipage</literal>, <literal>array</literal>,
-or <literal>tabular</literal>, or inside an explicit <literal>\parbox</literal>, or in the scope
-of a <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>, or <literal>\raggedleft</literal>
+<para>A line break double backslash <literal>\\</literal> may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like <literal>minipage</literal>, <literal>array</literal>, or
+<literal>tabular</literal>, or inside an explicit <literal>\parbox</literal>, or in the scope of
+a <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>, or <literal>\raggedleft</literal>
 declaration (when used in a <literal>p</literal>-column element these declarations
 must appear inside braces, as with <literal>{\centering .. \\
 ..}</literal>). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as
-ending the row.
+ending the row.  Instead, to get a line break in there use
+<literal>\newline</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>*{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Equivalent to <replaceable>num</replaceable> copies of <replaceable>cols</replaceable>, where <replaceable>num</replaceable> is a
-positive integer and <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is a list of specifiers.  Thus
-<literal>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</literal> is equivalent to
-<literal>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</literal>.  Note that <replaceable>cols</replaceable> may
-contain another <literal>*</literal>-expression.
+positive integer and <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is a list of specifiers.  Thus the
+specifier <literal>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</literal> is equivalent to
+the specifier <literal>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</literal>.  Note that
+<replaceable>cols</replaceable> may contain another <literal>*</literal>-expression.
 </para> 
-</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>width</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required for <literal>tabular*</literal>, not allowed for <literal>tabular</literal>. Specifies
+the width of the <literal>tabular*</literal> environment.  The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with <literal>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</literal>, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the <literal>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...</literal> warning.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>Parameters that control formatting:
 <!-- xx defaults, own node (xref from array)? -->
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arrayrulewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\arrayrulewidth</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <literal>|</literal>,
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-arrayrulewidth"/><para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <literal>|</literal>,
 <literal>\hline</literal>, and <literal>\vline</literal> in the <literal>tabular</literal> and <literal>array</literal>
 environments.  The default is ‘<literal>.4pt</literal>’. Change it as in
 <literal>\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraystretch</primary></indexterm><literal>\arraystretch</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <literal>tabular</literal> and
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-arraystrech"/><para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <literal>tabular</literal> and
 <literal>array</literal> environments is multiplied.  The default is ‘<literal>1</literal>’, for
 no scaling.  Change it as <literal>\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\doublerulesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\doublerulesep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-doublerulesep"/><para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
 <literal>||</literal> specifier.  The default is ‘<literal>2pt</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tabcolsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\tabcolsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-tabcolsep"/><para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
 ‘<literal>6pt</literal>’.  Change it with <literal>\setlength</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
@@ -5016,8 +6212,9 @@
 spanned by the single heading ‘<literal>Name</literal>’.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular}{lccl} 
-  \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one 
-  978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\        % row two 
+  \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
+  \hline  
+  978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\
     ...
 \end{tabular}
 </screen>
@@ -5095,23 +6292,23 @@
 bar <literal>|</literal> is more common.  This command is rarely used in the
 body of a table; typically a table’s vertical lines are specified in
 <literal>tabular</literal>’s <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument and overridden as needed with
-<literal>\multicolumn</literal>.
+<literal>\multicolumn</literal> (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
 </para>
-<para>This example illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first line’s second
+<para>The example below illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first row’s second
 entry the <literal>\hfill</literal> moves the <literal>\vline</literal> to the left edge of the
 cell.  But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
-columns, so in that row between the first and second columns there are
-two vertical rules, with the one from the <literal>{c|cc}</literal> specifier
-coming before the one produced by the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal>.  In contrast,
-the first line’s third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar
-between two columns.  In the second line, the <literal>ghi</literal> is the widest
-entry in its column so in the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal> the <literal>\hfill</literal> has
-no effect and the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next
-to the <literal>g</literal>, with no whitespace.
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the <literal>{c|cc}</literal> specifier coming before the
+one produced by the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal>.  In contrast, the first row’s
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns.  In the second row, the <literal>ghi</literal> is the widest entry in its
+column so in the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal> the <literal>\hfill</literal> has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+<literal>g</literal>, with no whitespace.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{tabular}{c|cc}
-  x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\  
-  abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi 
+  x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1  
+  abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi                       % row 2  
 \end{tabular}
 </screen>
 
@@ -5125,10 +6322,10 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\cline{<replaceable>i</replaceable>-<replaceable>j</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Draw a horizontal rule in an <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal> environment
-beginning in column <replaceable>i</replaceable> and ending in column <replaceable>j</replaceable>. The
-dash <literal>-</literal> must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a
-single column use the number twice.
+<para>In an <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal> environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column <replaceable>i</replaceable> and ending in column <replaceable>j</replaceable>. The
+dash, <literal>-</literal>, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with <literal>\cline{2-2}</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
 rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
@@ -5147,7 +6344,7 @@
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hline</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <literal>tabular</literal> or
+<para>Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <literal>tabular</literal> or
 <literal>array</literal> environment.  It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the
 top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
 </para>
@@ -5176,42 +6373,58 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{thebibliography}{<replaceable>widest-label</replaceable>}
-\bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key}</replaceable>
-...
+  \bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key}</replaceable>
+  ...
 \end{thebibliography}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>thebibliography</literal> environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list.
+<para>Produce a bibliography or reference list.  There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists.  This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand.  See <link linkend="Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</link>
+for a more sophisticated approach.
 </para>
-<para>In the <literal>article</literal> class, this reference list is labelled
-‘<literal>References</literal>’ and the label is stored in macro <literal>\refname</literal>; in
-the <literal>report</literal> class, it is labelled ‘<literal>Bibliography</literal>’ and the
-label is stored in macro <literal>\bibname</literal>.
+<para>This shows the environment with two entries.
 </para>
-<para>You can change the label by redefining the command <literal>\refname</literal> or
-<literal>\bibname</literal>, whichever is applicable depending on the class:
+<screen>This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+  ...
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+\bibitem{latexdps} 
+  Leslie Lamport. 
+  \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>This styles the first reference as ‘<literal>[1] Leslie ...</literal>’, and so that
+<literal>\cite{latexdps}</literal> produces the matching ‘<literal>... based on [1]</literal>’.
+The second <literal>\cite</literal> produces ‘<literal>[1, 2]</literal>’.  You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
 </para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibname</primary></indexterm>
-<para>For standard classes whose top level sectioning is <literal>\chapter</literal>
-(such as <filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename>), the label is in the macro
-<literal>\bibname</literal>;
+<para>The mandatory argument <replaceable>widest-label</replaceable> is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the <literal>\bibitem</literal>
+commands.  The tradition is to use <literal>9</literal> for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, <literal>99</literal> for ones with less than 100, etc.
 </para>
-</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\refname</primary></indexterm>
-<para>For standard classes whose the top level sectioning is <literal>\section</literal>
-(such as <filename>article</filename>), the label is in macro <literal>\refname</literal>.
-</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as ‘<literal>Bibliography</literal>’.
+To change it there are two cases.  In the <filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename>
+classes, where the top level sectioning is <literal>\chapter</literal> and the
+default title is ‘<literal>Bibliography</literal>’, that title is in the macro
+<literal>\bibname</literal>.  For <filename>article</filename>, where the class’s top level
+sectioning is <literal>\section</literal> and the default is ‘<literal>References</literal>’, the
+title is in macro <literal>\refname</literal>.  Change it by redefining the command,
+as with <literal>\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}</literal> after
+<literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Typically it is neither necessary nor desirable to directly redefine
-<literal>\refname</literal> or <literal>\bibname</literal>; language support packages like
-<filename>babel</filename> do this.
+<para>Language support packages such as <filename>babel</filename> will automatically
+redefine <literal>\refname</literal> or <literal>\bibname</literal> to fit the selected
+language.
 </para>
-<para>The mandatory <replaceable>widest-label</replaceable> argument is text that, when typeset,
-is as wide as the widest item label produced by the <literal>\bibitem</literal>
-commands.  It is typically given as <literal>9</literal> for bibliographies with
-less than 10 references, <literal>99</literal> for ones with less than 100, etc.
-</para>
 
 
 <sect2 label="8.24.1" id="_005cbibitem">
@@ -5221,22 +6434,63 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\bibitem{<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
 <screen>\bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\bibitem</literal> command generates an entry labelled by <replaceable>label</replaceable>.
-If the <replaceable>label</replaceable> argument is missing, a number is automatically
-generated using the <literal>enumi</literal> counter.  The <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> is a
+<para>Generate an entry labeled by <replaceable>label</replaceable>.  The default is for &latex; to
+generates a number using the <literal>enumi</literal> counter.  The <firstterm>citation key</firstterm> 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>citation key</primary></indexterm>
-<firstterm>citation key</firstterm> consisting in any sequence of
-letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
+<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
 </para>
-<para>This command writes an entry to the <filename>.aux</filename> file containing the
-item’s <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> and <replaceable>label</replaceable>.  When the <filename>.aux</filename> file is
-read by the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> command, the item’s <replaceable>label</replaceable> is
-associated with <literal>cite_key</literal>, causing references to <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>
-with a <literal>\cite</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005ccite">\cite</link>) to produce the associated
-<replaceable>label</replaceable>.
+<para>See <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link> for an example.
 </para>
+<para>The optional <replaceable>label</replaceable> changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string.  With this
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps} 
+  Leslie Lamport. 
+  \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>the first entry will be styled as ‘<literal>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</literal>’  (The
+amount of horizontal space that &latex; leaves for the label depends on
+the <replaceable>widest-label</replaceable> argument of the <literal>thebibliography</literal>
+environment; see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>.)  Similarly, <literal>... based on
+\cite{latexdps}</literal> will produce ‘<literal>... based on [Lamport 1994]</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If you mix <literal>\bibitem</literal> entries having a <replaceable>label</replaceable> with those that
+do not then &latex; will number the unlabelled ones sequentially.  In
+the example above the <literal>texbook</literal> entry will appear as ‘<literal>[1]
+Donald ...</literal>’, despite that it is the second entry.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the same <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> twice then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>Under the hood, &latex; remembers the <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> and <replaceable>label</replaceable>
+information because <literal>\bibitem</literal> writes it to the auxiliary file
+<filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>.  For instance, the above example causes
+<literal>\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}</literal> and
+<literal>\bibcite{texbook}{1}</literal> to appear in that file.  The <filename>.aux</filename>
+file is read by the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> command and then the
+information is available for <literal>\cite</literal> commands.  This explains why
+you need to run &latex; twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+</para>
+<para>Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a <literal>\bibitem</literal> or
+change its <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> you may get ‘<literal>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right</literal>’.  Fix it by
+recompiling.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 <sect2 label="8.24.2" id="_005ccite">
@@ -5246,17 +6500,49 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\cite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
 <screen>\cite[<replaceable>subcite</replaceable>]{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <replaceable>keys</replaceable> argument is a list of one or more citation keys
-(see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>), separated by commas.  This command generates an
-in-text citation to the references associated with <replaceable>keys</replaceable> by entries
-in the <filename>.aux</filename> file.
+<para>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+<replaceable>keys</replaceable>.  The mandatory <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>).
 </para>
-<para>The text of the optional <replaceable>subcite</replaceable> argument appears after the
-citation.  For example, <literal>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</literal> might produce
-‘<literal>[Knuth, p. 314]</literal>’.
+<para>This 
 </para>
+<screen>The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+  ...
+\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>produces the output ‘<literal>... source is [1]</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>subcite</replaceable> is appended to the citation.  For
+example, <literal>See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}</literal> might produce
+‘<literal>See 14.3 in [1, p. 314]</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is not in your bibliography information then you get
+‘<literal>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</literal>’, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes.  If you have mistyped something, as in
+<literal>\cite{texbok}</literal> then you need to correct the spelling.  On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the <filename>.aux</filename> file (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>) then
+the fix may be to just run &latex; again.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to what appears in the output, <literal>\cite</literal> writes
+information to the auxiliary file <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>.  For
+instance, <literal>\cite{latexdps}</literal> writes ‘<literal>\citation{latexdps}</literal>’
+to that file.  This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+<link linkend="_005cnocite">\nocite</link> also.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 <sect2 label="8.24.3" id="_005cnocite">
@@ -5268,9 +6554,14 @@
 </para>
 <screen><literal>\nocite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}</literal>
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\nocite</literal> command produces no text, but writes <replaceable>keys</replaceable>,
-which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the <filename>.aux</filename> file.
+<para>Produces no output but writes <replaceable>keys</replaceable> to the auxiliary file
+<filename><replaceable>doc-filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>.
 </para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>).  This information is used by
+Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (see <link linkend="_005ccite">\cite</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 <sect2 label="8.24.4" id="Using-BibTeX">
@@ -5282,42 +6573,63 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliographystyle</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliography</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly
-recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
-titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don’t use the
-<literal>thebibliography</literal> environment (see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). Instead,
-you include the lines
+<para>As described in <literal>thebibliography</literal> (see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+Bib&tex; program.  This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
 </para>
+<para>With Bib&tex;, you don’t use <literal>thebibliography</literal>
+(see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). Instead, include these lines.
+</para>
 <screen>\bibliographystyle{<replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>}
-\bibliography{<replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>,<replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>}
+\bibliography{<replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>, <replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>, ...}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\bibliographystyle</literal> command does not produce any output of
-its own.  Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
-be produced: <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> refers to a file
-<replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable><filename>.bst</filename>, which defines how your citations will look.
-The standard <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> names distributed with Bib&tex; are:
+<para>The <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> refers to a file <filename><replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>.bst</filename>, which
+defines how your citations will look.  The standard <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>’s
+distributed with Bib&tex; are:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>alpha</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
-publication.
+</term><listitem><para>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+</term><listitem><para>Labels are integers.
+Sort the  bibliographic items alphabetically.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>unsrt</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Like <literal>plain</literal>, but entries are in order of citation.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>abbrv</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Like <literal>plain</literal>, but more compact labels.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to
-the demands of various publications.  See
+<para>Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications.  See CTAN’s listing
 <ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</ulink>.
 </para>
 <para>The <literal>\bibliography</literal> command is what actually produces the
-bibliography.  The argument to <literal>\bibliography</literal> refers to files
-named <filename><replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>.bib</filename>, <filename><replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>.bib</filename>, …,
-which should contain your database in
-Bib&tex; format.  Only the entries referred to via <literal>\cite</literal> and
-<literal>\nocite</literal> will be listed in the bibliography.
+bibliography.  Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named <filename><replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>.bib</filename>, <filename><replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>.bib</filename>,
+… These contain your database in Bib&tex; format.  This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
 </para>
+<screen>@book{texbook,
+  title     = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+  author    = {D.E. Knuth},
+  isbn      = {0201134489},
+  series    = {Computers \& typesetting},
+  year      = {1983},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+}
+ at book{sexbook,
+    author    = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+    title     = {Human Sexual Response},
+    year      = {1966},
+    publisher = {Bantam Books}
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Only the bibliographic entries referred to via <literal>\cite</literal> and
+<literal>\nocite</literal> will be listed in the document’s bibliography.  Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
@@ -5332,15 +6644,37 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{theorem}
-<replaceable>theorem-text</replaceable>
+  <replaceable>theorem body</replaceable>
 \end{theorem}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>theorem</literal> environment produces “Theorem <replaceable>n</replaceable>” in
-boldface followed by <replaceable>theorem-text</replaceable>, where the numbering
-possibilities for <replaceable>n</replaceable> are described under <literal>\newtheorem</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</link>).
+<para>Produces ‘<literal>Theorem <replaceable>n</replaceable></literal>’ in boldface followed by <replaceable>theorem
+body</replaceable> in italics.  The numbering possibilities for <replaceable>n</replaceable> are described under
+<literal>\newtheorem</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</link>).
 </para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma}      % in preamble
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}    
+  ...
+\begin{lem}                  % in  document body
+  text of lemma
+\end{lem}
 
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin{thm}[Gauss]   %  put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+  text of theorem
+\end{thm}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsthm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsthm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Most new documents use the packages <literal>amsthm</literal> and <literal>amsmath</literal>
+from the American Mathematical Society.  Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="8.26" id="titlepage">
 <title><literal>titlepage</literal></title>
@@ -5357,15 +6691,12 @@
   ... text and spacing ...
 \end{titlepage}
 </screen>
-<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading.  The
-following page will be numbered page one.
+<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
 </para>
-<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <literal>titlepage</literal>
-environment you can use <literal>\maketitle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>).
+<para>In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
 </para>
-<para>Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing,
-is left to the author.
-</para>
 <screen>\begin{titlepage}
 \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
 \begin{center}
@@ -5387,6 +6718,9 @@
 \vspace{\stretch{2}}
 \end{titlepage}
 </screen>
+<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <literal>titlepage</literal>
+environment, use <literal>\maketitle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="8.27" id="verbatim">
@@ -5407,16 +6741,53 @@
 <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
 \end{verbatim}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>verbatim</literal> environment is a paragraph-making environment in
-which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the
-<literal>\</literal> character produces a printed ‘<literal>\</literal>’.  It turns &latex;
-into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same
-effect that they would on a typewriter.
-</para>
-<para>The <literal>verbatim</literal> environment uses a monospaced typewriter-like font
+<para>A paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces as output
+exactly what you type as input.  For instance inside <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
+the backslash <literal>\</literal> character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed ‘<literal>\</literal>’, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally.  The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
 (<literal>\tt</literal>).
 </para>
+<screen>\begin{verbatim}
+Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.
+\end{verbatim}
+</screen>
+<para>The only restriction on <literal>literal-text</literal> is that it cannot include
+the string <literal>\end{verbatim}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cprotect</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cprotect</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a <literal>\section</literal>.  This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the <literal>cprotect</literal> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>listings</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>listings</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>minted</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code.  There are
+packages that are an improvement the <literal>verbatim</literal> environment.  For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files.  Such packages include <literal>listings</literal>,
+and <literal>minted</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyvrb</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyvrb</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>verbatimbox</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>verbatimbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+<literal>fancyvrb</literal>.  Another is <literal>verbatimbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
 <sect2 label="8.27.1" id="_005cverb">
 <title><literal>\verb</literal></title>
 
@@ -5425,20 +6796,63 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\verb<replaceable>char</replaceable><replaceable>literal-text</replaceable><replaceable>char</replaceable>
-\verb*<replaceable>char</replaceable><replaceable>literal-text</replaceable><replaceable>char</replaceable>
+<screen>\verb <replaceable>char</replaceable> <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> <replaceable>char</replaceable>
+\verb* <replaceable>char</replaceable> <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> <replaceable>char</replaceable>
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\verb</literal> command typesets <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> as it is input,
-including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter
-(<literal>\tt</literal>) font.  No spaces are allowed between <literal>\verb</literal> or
-<literal>\verb*</literal> and the delimiter <replaceable>char</replaceable>, which begins and ends the
-verbatim text.  The delimiter must not appear in <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>.
+<para>Typeset <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (<literal>\tt</literal>) font.
 </para>
+<para>This example shows two different invocations of <literal>\verb</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+</screen>
+<para>The first <literal>\verb</literal> has its <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> surrounded with
+exclamation point, <literal>!</literal>.  The second instead uses plus, <literal>+</literal>,
+because the exclamation point is part of <literal>literal-text</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The single-character delimiter <replaceable>char</replaceable> surrounds
+<replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> — it must be the same character before and
+after.  No spaces come between <literal>\verb</literal> or <literal>\verb*</literal> and
+<replaceable>char</replaceable>, or between <replaceable>char</replaceable> and <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>, or between
+<replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> and the second occurrence of <replaceable>char</replaceable> (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other).  The
+delimiter must not appear in <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>. The <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
+cannot include a line break.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>visible space</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a
-“visible space” character.
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
 </para>
+<para>The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+</para>
+<screen>The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>url</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>url</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package <literal>url</literal>
+provides an option that is better than the <literal>\verb</literal> command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>listings</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>listings</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>minted</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+<literal>\verb</literal>.  One is <filename>listings</filename>, another is <filename>minted</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cprotect</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cprotect</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You cannot use <literal>\verb</literal> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a <literal>\section</literal>.  It is not a question of <literal>\verb</literal>
+being fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the <literal>cprotect</literal> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="8.28" id="verse">
@@ -5452,20 +6866,37 @@
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{verse}
-<replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
-<replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
-...
+  <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+  <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+  ...
 \end{verse}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>verse</literal> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
+<para>An environment for poetry.
 </para>
+<para>Here are two lines from Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet.
+</para>
+<screen>Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+</screen>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<para>The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not
-indented, and the text is not justified.  Separate the lines of each
-stanza with <literal>\\</literal>, and use one or more blank lines to separate the
-stanzas.
+<para>Separate the lines of each stanza with <literal>\\</literal>, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
 </para>
+<screen>\begin{verse}
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+  \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries,                  \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring,                             \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made,            \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing,  \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end{verse}
+</screen>
+<para>The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -5483,6 +6914,12 @@
 <para>&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
 you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
 </para>
+<para>A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks).  This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it.  Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+</para>
 
 
 <sect1 label="9.1" id="_005c_005c">
@@ -5492,35 +6929,71 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>line break, forcing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\\[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
+<screen>\\
+\\[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>or 
+<para>or one of: 
 </para>
-<screen>\\*[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
+<screen>\\*
+\\*[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>Start a new line.  The optional argument <replaceable>morespace</replaceable> specifies extra
-vertical space to be insert before the next line.  This can be a
-negative length.  The text before the break is set at its normal length,
-that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.
+<para>End the current line.  The optional argument <replaceable>morespace</replaceable> specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line.  This is a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) and can be negative.  The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width.  This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in &latex;.  In
-particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line.  This
-command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in
-a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment.
+<para>The starred form, <literal>\\*</literal>, tells &latex; not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <literal>\nobreak</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <literal>p{...}</literal> column
-in a <literal>tabular</literal> environment) the <literal>\newline</literal> command is a synonym for
-<literal>\\</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>).
-</para>
-<para>In addition to starting a new line, the starred form <literal>\\*</literal> tells
-&latex; not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
-<literal>\nobreak</literal>.
-</para>
 <screen>\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
        a tale of woe}
 </screen>
+<para>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;.  In
+particular, don’t start new paragraphs with <literal>\\</literal>.  Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs.  And don’t put in a sequence of
+<literal>\\</literal>’s to make vertical space. Instead use
+<literal>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal>, or
+<literal>\leavevmode\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal>, or
+<literal>\vspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (see <link linkend="_005cvspace">\vspace</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment or in an
+equation environment.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is a synonym for <literal>\newline</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the <literal>p{...}</literal> column in a <literal>tabular</literal>
+environment; see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
+</para>
+<!-- credit: David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/82666 -->
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a <literal>center</literal> environment, a
+<literal>flushleft</literal> environment, and a <literal>tabular</literal> are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for <literal>\newline</literal>.  It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+</para>
+<para>You get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end</literal>’ if you use
+<literal>\\</literal> to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have <literal>\begin{document}\\</literal> or, more likely,
+something like this.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+  \\
+  In that vertical space put your mark.
+  \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+<literal>\vspace{\baselineskip}</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="9.2" id="_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">
@@ -5530,14 +7003,44 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restorecr</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, output as input</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\obeycr</literal> command makes a return in the input file
-(‘<literal>^^M</literal>’, internally) the same as <literal>\\</literal> (followed by
-<literal>\relax</literal>).  So each new line in the input will also be a new line
-in the output.
+<para>The <literal>\obeycr</literal> command makes a return in the input file (‘<literal>^^M</literal>’,
+internally) the same as <literal>\\</literal>, followed by <literal>\relax</literal>.  So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output.  The
+<literal>\restorecr</literal> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
 </para>
-<para><literal>\restorecr</literal> restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+<para>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+See <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link> instead.
 </para>
+<para>With &latex;’s usual defaults, this
+</para>
+<screen>aaa
+bbb
 
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+   eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+</screen>
+<para>produces output like this.
+</para>
+<screen>  aaa bbb
+  ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+  hhh iii
+</screen>
+<para>The indents are paragraph indents.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="9.3" id="_005cnewline">
 <title><literal>\newline</literal></title>
@@ -5545,14 +7048,18 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newline</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting (paragraph mode)</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>); it
-breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
+<para>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>), the <literal>\newline</literal> command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>Inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <literal>p{...}</literal>,
-<literal>\newline</literal> will insert a line break inside of the column, that is,
-it does not break the entire row.  To break the entire row use <literal>\\</literal>
-or its equivalent <literal>\tabularnewline</literal>.
+<para>However, the two commands are different inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or
+<literal>array</literal> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically <literal>p{...}</literal>, <literal>\newline</literal> will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row.  To break the entire row use <literal>\\</literal> or its
+equivalent <literal>\tabularnewline</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>This will print ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Address:</literal>’ as two lines in a
 single cell of the table.
@@ -5571,16 +7078,39 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\- (hyphenation)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, forcing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\-</literal> command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at
-that point.  &latex; is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds
-most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an
-incorrect one.  The <literal>\-</literal> command is used for the exceptional
-cases.
+<para>Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point.  When you
+insert <literal>\-</literal> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex;
+might otherwise have chosen.  This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>When you insert <literal>\-</literal> commands in a word, the word will only be
-hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
-that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
+<para>&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one.  The
+<literal>\-</literal> command is for exceptional cases.
 </para>
+<para>For example, &latex; does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen.  Below, the long and hyphenated word means &latex; has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+  Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+               anti-intellectualism
+               % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+               has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+               political and cultural life, nurtured by
+               the false notion that democracy means that
+               `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\-</literal> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
+require that it break there.  You can insist on a split with something
+like <literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>.  Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="9.5" id="_005cdiscretionary">
 <title><literal>\discretionary</literal> (generalized hyphenation point)</title>
@@ -5589,39 +7119,82 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\discretionary{<replaceable>pre-break-text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>post-break-text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-break-text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\discretionary{<replaceable>pre-break</replaceable>}{<replaceable>post-break</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-break</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<!-- xxx TODO, complete this node, see LaTeX-fr -->
+<para>Handle word changes around hyphens.  This command is not often used in
+&latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>If a line break occurs at the point where <literal>\discretionary</literal> appears
+then &tex; puts <replaceable>pre-break</replaceable> at the end of the current line and puts
+<replaceable>post-break</replaceable> at the start of the next line.  If there is no line
+break here then &tex; puts <replaceable>no-break</replaceable>
+</para>
+<para>In ‘<literal>difficult</literal>’ the three letters <literal>ffi</literal> form a ligature.  But
+&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f’s with this.
+</para>
+<screen>di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+</screen>
+<para>Note that users do not have to do this.  It is typically handled
+automatically by &tex;’s hyphenation algorithm.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy">
-<title><literal>\fussy</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">
+<title><literal>\fussy</literal> & <literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sloppy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, changing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The declaration <literal>\fussy</literal> (which is the default) makes &tex;
-picky about line breaking.  This usually avoids too much space between
-words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
+<para>Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line
+breaking.  Declaring <literal>\fussy</literal> usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.  Conversely,
+<literal>\sloppy</literal> avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
 </para>
-<para>This command cancels the effect of a previous <literal>\sloppy</literal> command
-(see <link linkend="_005csloppy">\sloppy</link>).
+<para>The default is <literal>\fussy</literal>.  Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+<literal>\par</literal>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph.  So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
 </para>
 
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.7" id="_005csloppy">
-<title><literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sloppy</primary></indexterm>
+<sect2 label="9.6.1" id="sloppypar">
+<title><literal>sloppypar</literal></title>
 
-<para>The declaration <literal>\sloppy</literal> makes &tex; less fussy about line
-breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose
-interword spacing.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>sloppypar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sloppypar environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Lasts until a <literal>\fussy</literal> command is issued (see <link linkend="_005cfussy">\fussy</link>).
+<screen>\begin{sloppypar}
+  ... paragraphs ...
+\end{sloppypar}
+</screen>
+<para>Typeset the paragraphs with <literal>\sloppy</literal> in effect (see <link linkend="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &
+\sloppy</link>).  Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+‘<literal>Overfull box</literal>’ or ‘<literal>Underfull box</literal>’ errors.
 </para>
+<para>The example is simple.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{sloppypar}
+  Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+  book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+  same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+  little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+  whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+  as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+  silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+  needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+  or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+  there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end{sloppypar}
+</screen>
 
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005chyphenation">
+<sect1 label="9.7" id="_005chyphenation">
 <title><literal>\hyphenation</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
@@ -5629,20 +7202,22 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\hyphenation{<replaceable>word-one</replaceable> <replaceable>word-two</replaceable>}
+<screen>\hyphenation{<replaceable>word1</replaceable> ...}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\hyphenation</literal> command declares allowed hyphenation points
-with a <literal>-</literal> character in the given words.  The words are separated
-by spaces.  &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no
-inflections are tried.  Multiple <literal>\hyphenation</literal> commands
-accumulate.  Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns
-misses the hyphenations in these words):
+<para>Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.  The
+words in that list are separated by spaces.  Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, <literal>-</literal>.
 </para>
-<screen>\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+<para>Here is an example:
+</para>
+<screen>\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
 </screen>
+<para>Use lowercase letters.  &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly.  Multiple <literal>\hyphenation</literal> commands accumulate.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.9" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
+<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
 <title><literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
@@ -5650,21 +7225,37 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, forcing</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, preventing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\linebreak[<replaceable>priority</replaceable>]
-\nolinebreak[<replaceable>priority</replaceable>]
+<screen>\linebreak
+\linebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>By default, the <literal>\linebreak</literal> (<literal>\nolinebreak</literal>) command forces
-(prevents) a line break at the current position.  For
-<literal>\linebreak</literal>, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it
-extends to the right margin as usual.
+<para>or one of these.
 </para>
-<para>With the optional argument <replaceable>priority</replaceable>, you can convert the command
-from a demand to a request.  The <replaceable>priority</replaceable> must be a number from
-0 to 4.  The higher the number, the more insistent the request.
+<screen>\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Encourage or discourage a line break.  The optional <replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction.  The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break.  But for instance, <literal>\nolinebreak[1]</literal> is a
+suggestion that another place may be better.  The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
+<para>Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+</para>
+<screen>\boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+</screen>
+<para>When you issue <literal>\linebreak</literal>, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin.  See <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>
+and <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link> to have the spaces not stretched out.
+</para>
 
+
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="10" id="Page-breaking">
@@ -5673,72 +7264,160 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>page breaking</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>breaking pages</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
-accumulated to fill up a page.  Usually this happens automatically,
-but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
+<para>Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb.  But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
 </para>
+<!-- credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563 -->
+<para>&latex;’s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result.  Instead, &latex; typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; &latex; can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where &latex; uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex; does not optimize over the entire document’s set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn’t look as
+far ahead as the next page break.  So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Layout">Layout</link> for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+</para>
 
 
-<sect1 label="10.1" id="_005ccleardoublepage">
-<title><literal>\cleardoublepage</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="10.1" id="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">
+<title><literal>\clearpage</literal> & <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flushing floats and starting a page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page and clearing floats</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cleardoublepage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting on a right-hand page</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> command ends the current page and causes all
-the pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.  In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
-next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
-necessary.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\clearpage
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\cleardoublepage
+</screen>
+<para>End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).  If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then &latex; will put in extra pages containing only floats.  In
+two-sided printing, <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page.  The <literal>\clearpage</literal> command is robust while
+<literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: https://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-reallyblank.html -->
+<para>The <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers.  To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+</para>
+<screen>\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+  \clearpage
+  {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>If you want &latex;’s standard <literal>\chapter</literal> command to do this then
+add the line <literal>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The command <literal>\newpage</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link>) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats.  And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <literal>\newpage</literal> ends the current column while
+<literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> end the current page.
+</para>
 
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="10.2" id="_005cclearpage">
-<title><literal>\clearpage</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flushing floats and starting a page</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page and clearing floats</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>The <literal>\clearpage</literal> command ends the current page and causes all the
-pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.
-</para>
-
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="10.3" id="_005cnewpage">
+<sect1 label="10.2" id="_005cnewpage">
 <title><literal>\newpage</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newpage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new page, starting</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\newpage</literal> command ends the current page, but does not clear
-floats (see <link linkend="_005cclearpage">\clearpage</link>).
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\newpage
+</screen>
+<para>End the current page.  This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>While the commands <literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(see <link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</link>).  And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+<literal>\newpage</literal> only ends the current column.
+</para>
+<para>In contrast with <literal>\pagebreak</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</link>),
+the <literal>\newpage</literal> command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested.  This
+</para>
+<screen>Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+</screen>
+<para>makes a new page start after ‘<literal>continent,</literal>’ and the cut-off line is
+not right justified.  In addition, <literal>\newpage</literal> does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as <literal>\pagebreak</literal> does.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="10.4" id="_005cenlargethispage">
+<sect1 label="10.3" id="_005cenlargethispage">
 <title><literal>\enlargethispage</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enlargethispage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>enlarge current page</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para><literal>\enlargethispage{size}</literal>
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para><literal>\enlargethispage*{size}</literal>
+<screen>\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+</screen>
+<para>Enlarge the <literal>\textheight</literal> for the current page.  The required
+argument <replaceable>size</replaceable> must be a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  It may be
+positive or negative.  This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>Enlarge the <literal>\textheight</literal> for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g., <literal>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</literal> will allow one
-additional line.
+<para>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks.  This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
 </para>
-<para>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as
-much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-<literal>\pagebreak</literal>.
+<para>This will allow one extra line on the current page.
 </para>
+<screen>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+</screen>
+<para>The starred form <literal>\enlargesthispage*</literal> tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit <literal>\pagebreak</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="10.5" id="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">
+<sect1 label="10.4" id="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">
 <title><literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagebreak</primary></indexterm>
@@ -5748,19 +7427,44 @@
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
-<screen>\pagebreak[<replaceable>priority</replaceable>]
-\nopagebreak[<replaceable>priority</replaceable>]
+<screen>\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>By default, the <literal>\pagebreak</literal> (<literal>\nopagebreak</literal>) command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position.  With
-<literal>\pagebreak</literal>, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
-where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.
+<para>or
 </para>
-<para>With the optional argument <replaceable>priority</replaceable>, you can convert the
-<literal>\pagebreak</literal> command from a demand to a request.  The number must
-be a number from 0 to 4.  The higher the number, the more
-insistent the request is.
+<screen>\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Encourage or discourage a page break.  The optional <replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break.  But for instance <literal>\nopagebreak[1]</literal> suggests to
+&latex; that another spot might be preferable.  The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
+<para>&latex;’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear.  So this
+</para>
+<screen>Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+</screen>
+<para>does not give a page break at ‘<literal>continent,</literal>’ but instead at
+‘<literal>nation,</literal>’ since that is where &latex; breaks that line.  In
+addition, with <literal>\pagebreak</literal> the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin.  This can look strange, and if <literal>\flushbottom</literal> is in effect
+this can cause you to get ‘<literal>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</literal>’.  See <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link> for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -5769,21 +7473,22 @@
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, creating</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+<para>Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
 </para>
 <screen>Noël Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
 to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
-love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+love.\footnote{%
+  I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
 </screen>
-<para>You can place multiple footnotes on a page. If the text becomes too long
-it will flow to the next page.
+<para>You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
 </para>
 <para>You can also produce footnotes by combining the <literal>\footnotemark</literal> and
 the <literal>\footnotetext</literal> commands, which is useful in special
 circumstances.
 </para>
 <para>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
-include a bibliographic style with that behavior.
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see <link linkend="Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</link>).
 </para>
 
 
@@ -5792,47 +7497,77 @@
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnote</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\footnote[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\footnote{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\footnote[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Place a numbered footnote <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the current page.
+<para>Place a footnote <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the current page.
 </para>
 <screen>There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's 
-\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
-reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, 
-``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method 
-of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed 
-at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+  After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, 
+  ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method 
+  of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed 
+  at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
 </screen>
-<para>The optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> allows you to specify the footnote
-number.  If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
-incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote.  If you use this then &latex; does not increment the
+<literal>footnote</literal> counter.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol, and footnotes</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@fnsymbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Change how &latex; shows the footnote counter with something like
+<para>By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers.  Change
+this with something like
 <literal>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}</literal>, which
 uses a sequence of symbols (see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
 \fnsymbol</link>).  To make this change global put that in the preamble.  If
 you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
-<literal>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</literal>.  By default &latex; uses arabic
-numbers.
+<literal>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>&latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote parameters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parameters, for footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnoterule</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnoterule</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnoterule"/><para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s
+footnotes.  Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+<literal>slides</literal>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+<literal>0.4pt</literal>, and horizontal size of <literal>0.4\columnwidth</literal> long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+</para>
+<!-- Credit egreg: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/21917 -->
+<screen>\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+  \kern -3pt                         % This -3 is negative
+  \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+  \kern 2pt}                         % and this 2
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnotesep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnotesep"/><para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>).  By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<literal>\footnotesize</literal> fonts (see <link linkend="Font-sizes">Font sizes</link>), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes.  This is ‘<literal>6.65pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’,
+‘<literal>7.7pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>11pt</literal>’, and ‘<literal>8.4pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>12pt</literal>’.  Change
+it as with <literal>\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <literal>\footnote</literal> command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
 <para>&latex;’s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
 <literal>\footnote</literal>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
 sectioning command such as <literal>\chapter</literal> (it can only be used in outer
-paragraph mode).  There are some workarounds; see following sections.
-<!-- xx mention packages that fix this -->
+paragraph mode; see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Footnotes, in a minipage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>mpfootnote counter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>In a <literal>minipage</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal>
-command uses the <literal>mpfootnote</literal> counter instead of the
-<literal>footnote</literal> counter, so they are numbered independently.  They are
-shown at the bottom of the environment, not at the bottom of the page.
-And by default they are shown alphabetically. See <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>.
+<para>In a <literal>minipage</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal> command uses the
+<literal>mpfootnote</literal> counter instead of the <literal>footnote</literal> counter, so
+they are numbered independently.  They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page.  And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. See <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link> and <link linkend="Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</link>.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -5846,15 +7581,26 @@
 <screen>\footnotemark
 \footnotemark[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>Put the current footnote number in the
-text. (See <link linkend="_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</link> for giving the text of the footnote
-separately.)  The version with the optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> uses
-that number to determine the mark printed. This command can be used in
-inner paragraph mode.
+<para>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see <link linkend="_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</link>.  The optional argument
+<replaceable>number</replaceable> causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
 </para>
-<para>This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the first
-and third authors (<literal>\thanks</literal> is a version of <literal>footnote</literal>).
+<para>If you use <literal>\footnotemark</literal> without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <replaceable>number</replaceable>
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
 </para>
+<screen>The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} 
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] 
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</screen>
+<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark.  This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (<literal>\thanks</literal> is a version of
+<literal>footnote</literal>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+</para>
 <screen>\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
 \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds} 
   \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University} 
@@ -5862,16 +7608,39 @@
 \begin{document}
 \maketitle
 </screen>
-<para>If you use <literal>\footnotemark</literal> without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <replaceable>number</replaceable>
-then it does not. This produces several consecutive footnote markers
-referring to the same footnote.
+<para>This uses a counter to remember the footnote number.  The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
 </para>
-<screen>The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} 
-and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] 
-and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+<screen>\newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+  Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+  Captain Hook.}
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
 </screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <filename>cleveref</filename>.
+</para>
+<!-- from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
+<screen>\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % in preamble 
+\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It will work with the package <filename>hyperref</filename>.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="11.3" id="_005cfootnotetext">
 <title><literal>\footnotetext</literal></title>
@@ -5883,158 +7652,138 @@
 <screen>\footnotetext{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 \footnotetext[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Place <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  This command
-can come anywhere after the <literal>\footnotemark</literal> command.  The optional
-argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> changes the displayed footnote number.  The
-<literal>\footnotetext</literal> command must appear in outer paragraph mode.
+<para>Place <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  It pairs with
+<literal>\footnotemark</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link>) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+The optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
 </para>
+<para>See <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link> and <link linkend="Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</link> for usage
+examples.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="11.4" id="Footnotes-in-a-table">
+<sect1 label="11.4" id="Footnotes-in-section-headings">
+<title>Footnotes in section headings</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, in section headings</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, avoiding footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+</para>
+<screen>\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+</screen>
+<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to <literal>\section</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+  Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+</screen>
+<para>No <literal>\protect</literal> is needed in front of <literal>\footnote</literal> here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.5" id="Footnotes-in-a-table">
 <title>Footnotes in a table</title>
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Footnotes, in a table</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, in a table</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Inside a <literal>table</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal> command does not
-work.  For instance, if the code below appears on its own then the
-footnote simply disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell
-but nothing is set at the bottom of the page.
+<para>Inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal>
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear.  The solution is to use a
+<literal>minipage</literal> environment as here (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
      \begin{tabular}{l|l}
-     \textsc{Ship}  &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline 
-     \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\ 
-     \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\  
-     \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
-     \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
-                                HMS Surprise.}
+       \textsc{Ship}           &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline 
+       \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\ 
+       \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\  
+       \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
+       \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{%
+                                  Starting with HMS Surprise.}
      \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}                              
 \end{center}
 </screen>
-<para>The solution is to surround the <literal>tabular</literal> environment with a
-<literal>minipage</literal> environment, as here (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+<para>Inside a <literal>minipage</literal>, footnote marks are lowercase letters.  Change
+that with something like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>).
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{center}
-  \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
-    ... tabular material ...
-  \end{minipage}
+<para>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+<literal>minipage</literal>.  To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the <literal>\footnotemark</literal> and
+<literal>\footnotetext</literal> pair and make a new counter.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+    \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+     \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+       \textsc{Woman}             &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline 
+       Mona                       &Attached\footnotemark  \\ 
+       Diana Villiers             &Eventual wife  \\  
+       Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark 
+     \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}%  percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+  \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+    \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+      Little is known other than her death.}%
+  \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+    \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+      Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
 \end{center}
 </screen>
-<para>The same technique will work inside a floating <literal>table</literal> environment
-(see <link linkend="table">table</link>).  To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
-<filename>tablefootnote</filename> package, as illustrated in this example.  If you
-put <literal>\usepackage{tablefootnote}</literal> in the preamble and use the code
-shown then the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in
-sequence with other footnotes.
+<para>For a floating <literal>table</literal> environment (see <link linkend="table">table</link>), use the
+<filename>tablefootnote</filename> package.
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{table}
+<screen>\usepackage{tablefootnote}  % in preamble
+   ...
+\begin{table}
   \centering
      \begin{tabular}{l|l}
      \textsc{Date}  &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline 
      1862           &Fort Donelson \\ 
      1863           &Vicksburg     \\  
-     1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
+     1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+                      Ending the war.}
      \end{tabular}
     \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
 \end{table}
 </screen>
-
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="11.5" id="Footnotes-in-section-headings">
-<title>Footnotes in section headings</title>
-
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, in section headings</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, avoiding footnotes</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+<para>The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
 </para>
-<screen>\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-</screen>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>footmisc</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>footmisc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>stable</literal> option to <literal>footmisc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
-contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  To have it not appear
-on the table of contents use the package <filename>footmisc</filename> with the
-<literal>stable</literal> option.
-</para>
-<screen>\usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
-...
-\begin{document}
-...
-\section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-</screen>
-<para>Note that the <literal>\protect</literal> is gone; including it would cause the
-footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
-</para>
-
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="11.6" id="Footnotes-of-footnotes">
 <title>Footnotes of footnotes</title>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, of a footnote</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>bigfoot</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bigfoot</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
 <para>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
 footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes.  The package
 <filename>bigfoot</filename> extends &latex;’s default footnote mechanism in many
 ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
 </para>
-<screen>\usepackage{bigfoot}
+<screen>\usepackage{bigfoot}    % in preamble
 \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
 \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph]   % create class \footnotefrom{}
  ...
-\begin{document}
-...
 The third theorem is a partial converse of the 
-second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
-...
+second.\footnotefrom{%
+  First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
 </screen>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="11.7" id="Multiple-reference-to-footnotes">
-<title>Multiple references to footnotes</title>
-
-<para>You can refer to a single footnote more than once.  This example
-uses the package <filename>cleverref</filename>.
-</para>
-<!-- from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
-<screen>\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % this version of package or later 
-\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
-...
-\begin{document}
-...
-The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
-The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
-But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
-...
-</screen>
-<para>This solution will work with the package <filename>hyperref</filename>.
-See <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link> for a simpler solution in the common case
-of multiple authors with the same affiliation.
-</para>
-
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="11.8" id="Footnote-parameters">
-<title>Footnote parameters</title>
-
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote parameters</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parameters, for footnotes</primary></indexterm>
-
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnoterule</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnoterule</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s
-footnotes.  Default dimensions: <literal>0.4pt</literal> thick (or wide), and
-<literal>0.4\columnwidth</literal> long in the standard document classes (except
-<literal>slides</literal>, where it does not appear).
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnotesep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.  By
-default, this is set to the normal strut for <literal>\footnotesize</literal>
-fonts (see <link linkend="Font-sizes">Font sizes</link>), therefore there is no extra space between
-footnotes.  This is ‘<literal>6.65pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’, ‘<literal>7.7pt</literal>’ for
-‘<literal>11pt</literal>’, and ‘<literal>8.4pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>12pt</literal>’.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-
-</sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="12" id="Definitions">
 <title>Definitions</title>
@@ -6043,11 +7792,8 @@
 
 <para>&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
 </para>
-<!-- xx everything in this chapter needs examples. -->
-<!-- xx Add DeclareRobustCommand (see clsguide.pdf) -->
 
 
-
 <sect1 label="12.1" id="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">
 <title><literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal></title>
 
@@ -6057,101 +7803,136 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining a new command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new commands, defining</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para><literal>\newcommand</literal> and <literal>\renewcommand</literal> define and redefine a
-command, respectively.  Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>  \newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-  \newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
 \renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
 \renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
 </screen>
+<para>Define or redefine a command.  See also the discussion of
+<literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal> in <link linkend="Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</link>.
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>starred form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>*-form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <literal>\long</literal>, in plain &tex;
-terms).
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be
+<literal>\long</literal>).
 </para>
+<para>These are the parameters:
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cmd</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Required; <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is the command name.  For <literal>\newcommand</literal>, it
-must not be already defined and must not begin with <literal>\end</literal>.  For
-<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, it must already be defined.
+</term><listitem>
+<para>Required; the command name.  It must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>,
+and must not begin with the four letter string <literal>\end</literal>.  For
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined.  For
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, this name must already be defined.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
-that the command can take, including any optional argument.  If this
-argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no
-arguments.  When redefining a command, the new version can have a
+that the command takes, including any optional argument.  Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments.  If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
 different number of arguments than the old version.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined
-command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
 (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is not present then
 <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not take an optional argument.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>positional parameter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is used with square brackets following,
-as in <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the first
-<firstterm>positional parameter</firstterm> <literal>#1</literal> expands <replaceable>myval</replaceable>.  On the
-other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without square brackets
-following, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the positional parameter <literal>#1</literal>
-expands to the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>.  In either case, any
-required arguments will be referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
+<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is used with square brackets, as in
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...}...</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the
+parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable>.  On the
+other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without the square brackets
+then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of
+<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>.  In either case, the required arguments start with
+<literal>#2</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in a call is different from having the
-square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>.  The former results
-in <literal>#1</literal> expanding to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter results in
-<literal>#1</literal> expanding to the empty string.
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>.  The former sets
+<literal>#1</literal> to the value of <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter sets <literal>#1</literal>
+to the empty string.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>defn</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>; the
-positional parameter <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> in <replaceable>defn</replaceable> is replaced by
-the text of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>. The parameters <literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>,
+... <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal> are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don’t exercise the option).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
 sequence, as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’.  If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command (‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’;
+solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command (‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’, and
 another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘<literal>\cmd\ </literal>’).
 </para>
 <para>A simple example of defining a new command:
-<literal>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</literal> results in
-<literal>\RS</literal> being replaced by the longer text.
-</para>
-<para>Redefining an existing command is similar:
+<literal>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</literal> results in <literal>\RS</literal> being
+replaced by the longer text.  Redefining an existing command is similar:
 <literal>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>Here’s a command definition with one required argument:
+<para>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.  If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</literal>’.
 </para>
-<screen>\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+<para>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
 </screen>
-<para>Then, <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
-<literal>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</literal>, which will ultimately expand to
+<para>Use the first as in <literal>I highly recommend \student{} to you</literal>.  The
+second has a variable, so that <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
+<literal>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</literal>, which ultimately expands to
 something like ‘<literal>Definition~3.14</literal>’.
 </para>
-<para>An example with two required arguments:
+<para>Similarly, but with two required arguments:
 <literal>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</literal> is invoked as
 <literal>\nbym{2}{k}</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>An example with an optional argument:
+<para>This example has an optional argument.
 </para>
 <screen>\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
 </screen>
-<para>Then, <literal>\salutation</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear Sir or Madam:</literal>’ while
+<para>Then <literal>\salutation</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear Sir or Madam:</literal>’ while
 <literal>\salutation[John]</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear John:</literal>’.  And
 <literal>\salutation[]</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear :</literal>’.
 </para>
-<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not define a group, that is, they do
-not delimit the scope of the result of expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>.  So
-<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</literal> is problematic; in this
-sentence,
+<para>This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
 </para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+</screen>
+<para>The output is ‘<literal>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</literal>’.  The optional
+argument, the <literal>Howe</literal>, is associated with <literal>#1</literal>, while
+<literal>Dewey</literal> and <literal>Cheatem</literal> are associated with <literal>#2</literal>
+and <literal>#3</literal>.  Because of the optional argument,
+<literal>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</literal> will give the output ‘<literal>I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>.  For example,
+with <literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</literal>, in this sentence,
+</para>
 <screen>The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
 </screen>
-<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’ would incorrectly be in italics.  Another
-pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this:
-<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.  Those braces are
-part of the definition and thus do define a group.
+<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’ would incorrectly be in italics.  The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -6163,18 +7944,31 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining a new command</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>new commands, defining</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
-Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
 \providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
-as <literal>\newcommand</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>).  If a
-command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
-This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
-loaded more than once.
+<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as <literal>\newcommand</literal>.  If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing.  This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+See <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link> for the description of the arguments.
 </para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<screen>\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+From \myaffiliation.
+</screen>
+<para>outputs ‘<literal>From Saint Michael's College</literal>’.  Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal>,
+the repeated use of <literal>\providecommand</literal> does not give an error.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="12.3" id="_005cnewcounter">
@@ -6188,27 +7982,46 @@
 <screen>\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}
 \newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]
 </screen>
-<para>Globally defines a new counter named <replaceable>countername</replaceable> and initialize
-the new counter to zero.
+<para>Globally defines a new counter named <replaceable>countername</replaceable> and initialize it
+to zero (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
 </para>
-<para>The name <replaceable>countername</replaceable> must consists of letters only, and does not
+<para>The name <replaceable>countername</replaceable> must consist of letters only. It does not
 begin with a backslash.  This name must not already be in use by another
 counter.
 </para>
-<para>When you use the optional argument <literal>[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]</literal> then
-<replaceable>countername</replaceable> will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the
-existing counter <replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>.  For example, ordinarily
-<literal>subsection</literal> is numbered within <literal>section</literal> so that any time
-<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable> is incremented with <literal>\stepcounter</literal>
+<para>When you use the optional argument <literal>[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]</literal> then the
+counter <replaceable>countername</replaceable> will be reset to zero whenever
+<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable> is incremented.  For example, ordinarily
+<literal>subsection</literal> is numbered within <literal>section</literal> so that any time you
+increment <replaceable>section</replaceable>, either with <literal>\stepcounter</literal>
 (see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>) or <literal>\refstepcounter</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>) then <replaceable>countername</replaceable> is reset to zero.
+(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>), then &latex; will reset <replaceable>subsection</replaceable> to
+zero.
 </para>
-<para>See <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>, for more information about counters.
+<para>This example
 </para>
+<screen>\newcounter{asuper}  \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+\newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3}   % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+\stepcounter{asuper}
+Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+</screen>
+<para>produces ‘<literal>The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3</literal>’ and
+‘<literal>Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If the counter already exists, for instance by entering <literal>asuper</literal>
+twice, then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \c at asuper
+already defined.  Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering <literal>\newcounter{jh}[lh]</literal> when <literal>lh</literal> is not a
+defined counter will get you ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.</literal>’
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="12.4" id="_005cnewlength">
-<title><literal>\newlength</literal>: Allocating a length</title>
+<title><literal>\newlength</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newlength</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, allocating new</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6216,40 +8029,58 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>skip register, plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>glue register, plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Allocate a new <firstterm>length</firstterm> register.  Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\newlength{\<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+<screen>\newlength{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
-backslash (‘<literal>\</literal>’).  It creates a new length register named
-<literal>\<replaceable>arg</replaceable></literal>, which is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as
-<literal>1in plus.2in minus.1in</literal> (what plain &tex; calls a <literal>skip</literal>
-register).  The register gets an initial value of zero.  The control
-sequence <literal>\<replaceable>arg</replaceable></literal> must not already be defined.
+<para>Allocate a new length register (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  The required argument
+<replaceable>arg</replaceable> must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.  The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as <literal>72.27pt</literal> or <literal>1in plus.2in minus.1in</literal>
+(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a <literal>skip</literal>
+register).  The initial value is zero.  The control sequence
+<literal>\<replaceable>arg</replaceable></literal> must not be already defined.
 </para>
-<para>See <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>, for more about lengths.
+<para>An example:
 </para>
+<screen>\newlength{\graphichgt}
+</screen>
+<para>If you forget the backslash then you get ‘<literal>Missing control sequence
+inserted</literal>’.  If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="12.5" id="_005cnewsavebox">
-<title><literal>\newsavebox</literal>: Allocating a box</title>
+<title><literal>\newsavebox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newsavebox</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, allocating new</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Allocate a “bin” for holding a box.  Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\newsavebox{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+<screen>\newsavebox{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Defines <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
-Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times
-(see <link linkend="Boxes">Boxes</link>) or to measure or manipulate.  The name
-<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> must start with a backslash (‘<literal>\</literal>’), and must not
-be already defined.
+<para>Define <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> to refer to a new “bin” for storing boxes.
+Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times or to
+measure or manipulate (see <link linkend="Boxes">Boxes</link>).  The required bin name
+<literal><replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> must start with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>, and must not
+already be defined.  This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>The allocation of a box is global.  This command is fragile
-(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<para>The first line here sets you up to save the material for later use. 
 </para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\logobox}
+\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}. 
+</screen>
+<para>The output is ‘<literal>Our logo is LoGo</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The allocation of a box is global.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="12.6" id="_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">
@@ -6261,23 +8092,36 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new environments</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>redefining environments</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>These commands define or redefine an environment <replaceable>env</replaceable>, that is,
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>} <replaceable>body</replaceable> \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.  Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>   \newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
-  \newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
- \renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
-\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
 </screen>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define or redefine the environment <replaceable>env</replaceable>, that is, create the
+construct <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>} ... <replaceable>body</replaceable> ... \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>*</literal>-form of environment commands</primary></indexterm>
 <para>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text.  The body of these environments can
-still contain multiple paragraphs.
+contain multiple paragraphs of text.  However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>env</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Required; the environment name.  It consists only of letters or the
-<literal>*</literal> character, and thus does not begin with backslash
-(<literal>\</literal>).  It must not begin with the string <literal>end</literal>.  For
+<literal>*</literal> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+It must not begin with the string <literal>end</literal>.  For
 <literal>\newenvironment</literal>, the name <replaceable>env</replaceable> must not be the name of an
 already existing environment, and also the command <literal>\<replaceable>env</replaceable></literal>
 must be undefined.  For <literal>\renewenvironment</literal>, <replaceable>env</replaceable> must be the
@@ -6285,54 +8129,60 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-that the environment will take.  When the environment is used these
+that the environment takes.  When you use the environment these
 arguments appear after the <literal>\begin</literal>, as in
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg1</replaceable>}…{<replaceable>argn</replaceable>}</literal>.  If this
-argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have
-no arguments.  When redefining an environment, the new version can have
-a different number of arguments than the old version.
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg1</replaceable>} ... {<replaceable>argn</replaceable>}</literal>.  Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments.  When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of the
-defined environment is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
-(which may be the empty string).  If this argument is not present then
-the environment does not take an optional argument.
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> (which
+may be the empty string).  If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
 </para>
-<para>That is, when <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is present in the
-environment definition, if <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is used with
-square brackets following, as in
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then, within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>,
-the positional parameter <literal>#1</literal> expands to <replaceable>myval</replaceable>.  If
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is called without square brackets
-following, then, within within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>, the positional parameter
-<literal>#1</literal> expands to the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>.  In either case,
-any required arguments will be referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
+<para>That is, when <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...} ... \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.
+In this case, within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the
+value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable>.  If you call <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> without
+square brackets, then within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is
+set to the value of the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>.  In either case,
+any required arguments start with <literal>#2</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in the call is different from having the
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in the call is different than having the
 square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>.  The former results
 in <literal>#1</literal> expanding to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter results in
 <literal>#1</literal> expanding to the empty string.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>begdef</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.  Within <replaceable>begdef</replaceable>, the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th
-positional parameter (i.e., <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal>) is replaced by the text
-of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.  Within <replaceable>begdef</replaceable>, the parameters
+<literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>, ... <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal>, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>enddef</replaceable>
 </term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<literal>\end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.  This may not contain any positional
-parameters, so <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> cannot be used here (but see the final
+<literal>\end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.  This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use <literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>, etc., here (but see the final
 example below).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>All environments, that is to say the <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> code, the environment
-body and the <replaceable>enddefn</replaceable> code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in
+<para>All environments, that is to say the <replaceable>begdef</replaceable> code, the environment
+body, and the <replaceable>enddef</replaceable> code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in
 the first example below, the effect of the <literal>\small</literal> is limited to
 the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
 </para>
+<para>If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.  If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.</literal>’.
+</para>
 <para>This example gives an environment like &latex;’s <literal>quotation</literal>
-except that it will be set in smaller type:
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
 </para>
 <screen>\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
   \small\begin{quotation}
@@ -6340,9 +8190,17 @@
   \end{quotation}
 }
 </screen>
-<para>This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
-that cites the author:
+<para>This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
 </para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+  \noindent\textbf{#1}
+}{%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+</para>
 <screen>\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
   \begin{quotation}
   \noindent\textit{#1}: 
@@ -6350,15 +8208,15 @@
   \end{quotation}
 }
 </screen>
-<para>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘<literal>Shakespeare</literal>’.
-In the document, use the environment like this:
+<para>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘<literal>Shakespeare</literal>’.  In
+the document, use the environment like this.
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
   ...
 \end{citequote}
 </screen>
 <para>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in 
-<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>, in this case in a box (see <link linkend="_005csbox">\sbox</link>):
+<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>, in this case in a box (see <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox & \savebox</link>).
 </para>
 <screen>\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
 \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
@@ -6380,32 +8238,31 @@
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorem-like environment</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment, theorem-like</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Define a new theorem-like environment.  Synopses:
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
 <screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
 \newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]
 \newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Using the first form, <literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>
-creates an environment that will be labelled with <replaceable>title</replaceable>.  See the
-first example below.
+<para>Define a new theorem-like environment.  You can specify one of
+<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> and <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>, or neither, but not both.
 </para>
-<para>The second form
-<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]</literal>
+<para>The first form, <literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with <replaceable>title</replaceable>; see the first
+example below.
+</para>
+<para>The second form,
+<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]</literal>,
 creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
-counter <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> (its counter will be reset when
-<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is reset).
+counter <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>, so this counter will be reset when
+<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is reset.  See the second example below.
 </para>
-
 <para>The third form
 <literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>,
-with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create
-an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
-<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>.
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>.  See the third example.
 </para>
-<para>You can specify one of <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> and <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>,
-or neither, but not both.
-</para>
 <para>This command creates a counter named <replaceable>name</replaceable>.  In addition, unless
 the optional argument <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable> is used, inside of the
 theorem-like environment the current <literal>\ref</literal> value will be that of
@@ -6416,12 +8273,13 @@
 <para>Arguments:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>name</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The name of the environment.  It must not begin with a backslash
-(‘<literal>\</literal>’).  It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
-the command name <literal>\<replaceable>name</replaceable></literal> must not already be defined as anything.
+</term><listitem><para>The name of the environment.  It is a string of letters.  It must not
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.  It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name <literal>\<replaceable>name</replaceable></literal> must not
+already be defined.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>title</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+</term><listitem><para>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
 number. For example, ‘<literal>Theorem</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>
@@ -6455,10 +8313,10 @@
   Second def
 \end{defn}
 </screen>
-<para>Because the next example specifies the optional argument
-<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> to <literal>\newtheorem</literal> as <literal>section</literal>, the
-example, with the same document body, gives ‘<literal>Definition 1.1</literal>’
-and ‘<literal>Definition 2.1</literal>’.
+<para>This example has the same document body as the prior one.  But here
+<literal>\newtheorem</literal>’s optional argument <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is given as
+<literal>section</literal>, so the output is like ‘<literal>Definition 1.1</literal>’ and
+‘<literal>Definition 2.1</literal>’.
 </para>
 <screen>\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
 \begin{document}
@@ -6497,43 +8355,41 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="12.8" id="_005cnewfont">
-<title><literal>\newfont</literal>: Define a new font (obsolete)</title>
+<title><literal>\newfont</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newfont</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>fonts, new commands for</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new fonts</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para><literal>\newfont</literal>, now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
-Synopsis:
+<!-- @findex .fd @r{file} -->
+<para>This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents.  New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (see <link linkend="Fonts">Fonts</link>).
+<!-- This is done either by using -->
+<!-- @file{.fd} files or through the use of an engine that can access system -->
+<!-- fonts such as Xe at LaTeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}). -->
 </para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
 <screen>\newfont{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>font description</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>This defines a control sequence <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> that will change the
-current font.  &latex; will look on your system for a file named
-<filename><replaceable>fontname</replaceable>.tfm</filename>.  The control sequence must must not already
-be defined.  It must begin with a backslash (‘<literal>\</literal>’).
+<para>Define a command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must must not already be defined.  It must begin
+with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.fd file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This command is obsolete.  It is a low-level command for setting up an
-individual font.  Today fonts are almost always defined in families
-(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
-through the so-called “New Font Selection Scheme”, either by using
-<filename>.fd</filename> files or through the use of an engine that can access
-system fonts such as Xe&latex; (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>).
-<!-- xx explain nfss somewhere -->
-</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>at clause, in font definitions</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>design size, in font definitions</primary></indexterm>
-<para>But since it is part of &latex;, here is an explanation: the
-<replaceable>font description</replaceable> consists of a <replaceable>fontname</replaceable> and an optional
-<firstterm>at clause</firstterm>; this can have the form either <literal>at <replaceable>dimen</replaceable></literal>
-or <literal>scaled <replaceable>factor</replaceable></literal>, where a <replaceable>factor</replaceable> of ‘<literal>1000</literal>’
-means no scaling.  For &latex;’s purposes, all this does is scale all
-the character and other font dimensions relative to the font’s design
-size, which is a value defined in the <filename>.tfm</filename> file.
+<para>The <replaceable>font description</replaceable> consists of a <replaceable>fontname</replaceable> and an optional
+<firstterm>at clause</firstterm>.  &latex; will look on your system for a file named
+<filename><replaceable>fontname</replaceable>.tfm</filename>.  The at clause can have the form either
+<literal>at <replaceable>dimen</replaceable></literal> or <literal>scaled <replaceable>factor</replaceable></literal>, where a
+<replaceable>factor</replaceable> of ‘<literal>1000</literal>’ means no scaling.  For &latex;’s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font’s design size, which is a value defined in the
+<filename>.tfm</filename> file.
 </para>
-<para>This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
-characters in each:
+<para>This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
 </para>
 <screen>\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
 \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
@@ -6634,12 +8490,14 @@
 <screen>\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
 \begin{enumerate} 
   \item\points{10}no extra space output here
-  \item\points{15} extra space output between the number and the word `extra'
+  \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
 \end{enumerate} 
 </screen>
-<para>The solution is to change to
-<literal>\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}</literal>.
+<para>The solution is to change to this.
 </para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+  \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+</screen>
 <para>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.  The
 commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.  But,
 as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
@@ -6647,7 +8505,7 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\makeatletter
 \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
-\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % recall title; put before name
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % put title before name
 \makeatother
 \begin{tabular}{|l|}
 \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
@@ -6713,6 +8571,8 @@
 through <literal>enumiv</literal> are used in the <literal>enumerate</literal> environment, for
 up to four levels of nesting (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
 </para>
+<para>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+</para>
 <para>New counters are created with <literal>\newcounter</literal>.  See <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.
 </para>
 
@@ -6725,7 +8585,7 @@
 
 <para>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style.  For instance, if
 the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable> has the value 1 then a
-<literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> in your source will result in a lower case
+<literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> in your source will result in a lowercase
 letter a appearing in the output.
 </para>
 <para>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
@@ -6733,46 +8593,54 @@
 start with a backslash.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Print the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ...
+</term><listitem><para>Print the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’,
+... If the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</literal>’
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ...
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... If the counter’s value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.</literal>’
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ...
+</term><listitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘<literal>5</literal>’ or ‘<literal>-2</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ...
+</term><listitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... If the
+counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ...
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... If the
+counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Prints the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in a specific sequence of nine
-symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes).  The value of
-<replaceable>counter</replaceable> must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
+</term><listitem><para>Prints the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes.  The value of
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable> should be between 1 and 9, inclusive.  If the
+counter’s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large</literal>’, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but &latex; does not output anything.
 </para>
 <para>Here are the symbols:
 </para>
-<informaltable><tgroup cols="3"><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Equivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point<!--
- -->
-</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>*<!--
- -->
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\S</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00A7;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\P</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00B6;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\parallel</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2016;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>**<!--
- -->
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;&#x2020;
-</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;&#x2021;
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="10*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Number</para></entry><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Symbol
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>1</para></entry><entry><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>*<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>2</para></entry><entry><para>dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>3</para></entry><entry><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>4</para></entry><entry><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\S</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00A7;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>5</para></entry><entry><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\P</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00B6;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>6</para></entry><entry><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\parallel</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2016;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>7</para></entry><entry><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>**<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>8</para></entry><entry><para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;&#x2020;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>9</para></entry><entry><para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;&#x2021;
 </para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.2" id="_005cusecounter">
-<title><literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\usecounter</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usecounter</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>list items, specifying counter</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6782,15 +8650,16 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>In the <literal>list</literal> environment, when used in the second argument, this
-command sets up <replaceable>counter</replaceable> to number the list items.  It initializes
-<replaceable>counter</replaceable> to zero, and arranges that when <literal>\item</literal> is called
-without its optional argument then <replaceable>counter</replaceable> is incremented by
-<literal>\refstepcounter</literal>, making its value be the current <literal>ref</literal>
-value.  This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<para>Used in the second argument of the <literal>list</literal> environment
+(see <link linkend="list">list</link>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable>.  It initializes <replaceable>counter</replaceable> to zero, and arranges that
+when <literal>\item</literal> is called without its optional argument then
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable> is incremented by <literal>\refstepcounter</literal>, making its value
+be the current <literal>ref</literal> value (see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated with
-<replaceable>testcounter</replaceable>:
+<para>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with <replaceable>testcounter</replaceable>:
 </para>
 <screen>\newcounter{testcounter}
 \newenvironment{test}{%
@@ -6804,7 +8673,7 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.3" id="_005cvalue">
-<title><literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\value</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\value</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, getting value of</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6813,14 +8682,9 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>This command expands to the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable>.  It is often used
-in <literal>\setcounter</literal> or <literal>\addtocounter</literal>, but <literal>\value</literal> can
-be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number.  It must not be
-preceded by <literal>\protect</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<para>Expands to the value of the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable>. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>\value</literal> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
-counter.  See <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>.
-</para>
 <para>This example outputs ‘<literal>Test counter is 6. Other counter
 is 5.</literal>’.
 </para>
@@ -6831,6 +8695,14 @@
 Test counter is \arabic{test}.
 Other counter is \arabic{other}.
 </screen>
+<para>The <literal>\value</literal> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter.  For that, see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>.
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in <literal>\setcounter</literal> or <literal>\addtocounter</literal> but
+<literal>\value</literal> can be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number, such
+as in <literal>\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}</literal>.  It must not be
+preceded by <literal>\protect</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
 <para>This example inserts <literal>\hspace{4\parindent}</literal>.
 </para>
 <screen>\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
@@ -6839,7 +8711,7 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.4" id="_005csetcounter">
-<title><literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\setcounter</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setcounter</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, setting</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6849,25 +8721,30 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\setcounter</literal> command globally sets the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable>
-to the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument.  Note that the counter name does not start
-with a backslash.
+<para>Globally set the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable> to have the value of the
+<replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which must be an integer.  Thus, you can set a
+counter’s value as <literal>\setcounter{section}{5}</literal>.  Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
 </para>
-<para>In this example the section value appears as ‘<literal>V</literal>’.
+<para>In this example if the counter <literal>theorem</literal> has value 12 then the
+second line will print ‘<literal>XII</literal>’.
 </para>
-<screen>\setcounter{section}{5}
-Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+<screen>\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
 </screen>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.5" id="_005caddtocounter">
-<title><literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\addtocounter</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocounter</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\addtocounter</literal> command globally increments <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by
-the amount specified by the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which may be negative.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable> </screen>
+<para>Globally increment <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by the amount specified by the
+<replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which may be negative.
+</para>
 <para>In this example the section value appears as ‘<literal>VII</literal>’.
 </para>
 <screen>\setcounter{section}{5}
@@ -6877,16 +8754,19 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.6" id="_005crefstepcounter">
-<title><literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\refstepcounter</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\refstepcounter</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\refstepcounter</literal> command works in the same way as
-<literal>\stepcounter</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>): it globally increments the
-value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by one and resets the value of any counter
-numbered within it.  (For the definition of “counters numbered
-within”, see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Globally increments the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by one, as does
+<literal>\stepcounter</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>).  The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it.  (For the
+definition of “counters numbered within”, see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+</para>
 <para>In addition, this command also defines the current <literal>\ref</literal> value
 to be the result of <literal>\thecounter</literal>.
 </para>
@@ -6896,32 +8776,48 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="13.7" id="_005cstepcounter">
-<title><literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\stepcounter</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stepcounter</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\stepcounter</literal> command globally adds one to <replaceable>counter</replaceable> and
-resets all counters numbered within it.  (For the definition of
-“counters numbered within”, see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Globally adds one to <replaceable>counter</replaceable> and resets all counters numbered
+within it.  (For the definition of “counters numbered within”,
+see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>This command differs from <literal>\refstepcounter</literal> in that this one does
+not influence references — it does not define the current
+<literal>\ref</literal> value to be the result of <literal>\thecounter</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="13.8" id="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">
-<title><literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters</title>
+<sect1 label="13.8" id="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">
+<title><literal>\day</literal> & <literal>\month</literal> & <literal>\year</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\day</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\month</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\year</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (<literal>\day</literal>,
-1–31), month of the year (<literal>\month</literal>, 1–12), and year
-(<literal>\year</literal>, Common Era).  When &tex; starts up, they are
-set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running.  They
-are not updated as the job progresses.
+<para>&latex; defines the counter <literal>\day</literal> for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <literal>\month</literal> for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <literal>\year</literal>.
+When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system.  The related command <literal>\today</literal> produces a string
+representing the current day (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
 </para>
-<para>The related command <literal>\today</literal> produces a string representing the
-current day (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+<para>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end.  In addition, &tex; does no sanity
+check:
 </para>
+<screen>\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+</screen>
+<para>gives no error or warning and results in the output ‘<literal>-2, -4</literal>’ (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -6933,32 +8829,99 @@
 <para>A <firstterm>length</firstterm> is a measure of distance.  Many &latex; commands take a
 length as an argument.
 </para>
+<para>This shows a box of the given length.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}   % make a bar 
+\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}} % box it
+XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>It produces a black bar 100 points long between ‘<literal>XXX</literal>’ and
+‘<literal>YYY</literal>’.
+</para>
 <para>Lengths come in two types.  A <firstterm>rigid length</firstterm> (what Plain &tex;
-calls a <firstterm>dimen</firstterm>) such as <literal>10pt</literal> cannot contain a <literal>plus</literal> or
-<literal>minus</literal> component.  A <firstterm>rubber length</firstterm> (what Plain &tex; calls
-a <firstterm>skip</firstterm>) can contain those, as with <literal>1cm plus0.05cm
-minus0.01cm</literal>.  These give the ability to stretch or shrink; the length
-in the prior sentence could appear in the output as long as 1.05 cm
-or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what &tex;’s typesetting
-algorithm finds optimum.
+calls a <firstterm>dimen</firstterm>) such as <literal>10pt</literal> does not contain a <literal>plus</literal>
+or <literal>minus</literal> component.  The above example shows a rigid length. A
+<firstterm>rubber length</firstterm> (what Plain &tex; calls a <firstterm>skip</firstterm>) can contain
+those components, as with <literal>1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm</literal>.  Here the
+<literal>1cm</literal> is the <firstterm>natural length</firstterm> while the other two, the
+<literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal> components, allow the length to stretch or
+shrink.
 </para>
+<para>Shrinking is simpler: with <literal>1cm minus 0.05cm</literal>, the natural length
+is 1cm but if smaller is needed then &tex; can shrink it down as
+far as 0.95cm.  Beyond that, &tex; refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98 points between the two bars.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>But the second one gets a warning like ‘<literal>Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17</literal>’.  In the output the first ‘<literal>Y</literal>’ is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box’s material is
+wider than the 300pt allocated, as &tex; has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309 points.
+</para>
+<para>Stretching is like shrinking except that if &tex; is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it won’t refuse.  Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>In the second line &tex; needs a stretch of 10 points and only
+1 point was specified.  In this situation, &tex; stretches the
+space to the required length, but it complains with a warning like
+‘<literal>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line 22</literal>’.  (We won’t
+discuss badness; the point is that the system was not given as much
+stretch as needed.)
+</para>
+<para>You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+<literal>1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{\blackbar{100pt}%  left
+  \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}%  middle
+  \blackbar{100pt}}YYY  % right
+</screen>
+<para>The outside bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
+100.  In the middle the bar takes up 80 points, so the two
+<literal>\hspace</literal>’s must stretch 20 points.  Because the two say
+<literal>plus 50pt</literal> and <literal>plus 10pt</literal>, &tex; gets 5/6 of the
+stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+</para>
 <para>The <literal>plus</literal> or <literal>minus</literal> component of a rubber length can contain
 a <firstterm>fill</firstterm> component, as in <literal>1in plus2fill</literal>.  This gives the
-length infinite stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in
-the prior sentence can be set by &tex; to any distance greater than or
-equal to 1 inch.  &tex; actually provides three infinite glue
-components <literal>fil</literal>, <literal>fill</literal>, and <literal>filll</literal>, such that the
-later ones overcome the earlier ones, but only the middle value is
-ordinarily used.  See <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link>, See <link linkend="_005cvfill">\vfill</link>.
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that &tex; could set
+it to any distance.  Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
 </para>
-<para>Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
-length, so that after <literal>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</literal>
-and <literal>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</literal> then the value of
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>&tex; actually has three infinite glue components <literal>fil</literal>,
+<literal>fill</literal>, and <literal>filll</literal>.  The later ones are more infinite than
+the earlier ones.  Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one
+(see <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link> and see <link linkend="_005cvfill">\vfill</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after <literal>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</literal> and
+<literal>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</literal> then the value of
 <literal>\zlength</literal> is <literal>3in</literal>.
 </para>
 
 
-
 <sect1 label="14.1" id="Units-of-length">
 <title>Units of length</title>
 
@@ -6970,49 +8933,49 @@
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>pt</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>pt</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Point</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Point 1/72.27 inch.  The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+<anchor id="units-of-length-pt"/><para>Point 1/72.27 inch.  The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
 places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. 
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pc</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pica</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>pc</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Pica, 12 pt
+<anchor id="units-of-length-pc"/><para>Pica, 12 pt
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>in</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>in</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>inch</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Inch,  72.27 pt
+<anchor id="units-of-length-in"/><para>Inch,  72.27 pt
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bp</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bp</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Big point</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Big point, 1/72 inch.  This length is the definition of a point in
+<anchor id="units-of-length-bp"/><para>Big point, 1/72 inch.  This length is the definition of a point in
 PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cm</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Centimeter</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>cm</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Centimeter
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>mm</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Millimeter</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>mm</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Millimeter
+<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>dd</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Didot point</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>dd</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
+<anchor id="units-of-length-dd"/><para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cc</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Cicero</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>cc</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Cicero, 12 dd
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cc"/><para>Cicero, 12 dd
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sp</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Scaled point</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>sp</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+<anchor id="units-of-length-sp"/><para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7021,9 +8984,9 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>m-width</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
+<anchor id="Lengths_002fem"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fen"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fex"/><anchor id="units-of-length-em"/><anchor id="units-of-length-en"/><anchor id="units-of-length-ex"/><para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
 the font.  The x-height of the current font <firstterm>ex</firstterm>, traditionally the
-height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
 lengths. Similarly <firstterm>em</firstterm>, traditionally the width of the capital
 letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
 <literal>\enspace</literal>, which is <literal>0.5em</literal>).  Use of these can help make a
@@ -7049,15 +9012,26 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\setlength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+<screen>\setlength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\setlength</literal> sets the value of <firstterm>length command</firstterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>length command</primary></indexterm>
-<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> to the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument which can be expressed in any
-units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (<literal>in</literal>), millimeters
-(<literal>mm</literal>), points (<literal>pt</literal>), big points (<literal>bp</literal>), etc.
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to <replaceable>amount</replaceable>.  The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable>
+must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.  The <literal>amount</literal> can be a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
+length</link>).
 </para>
+<para>Below, with &latex;’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+</para>
+<screen>I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
 
+\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+He said stop going to those places.
+</screen>
+<para>If there is no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</literal>’.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="14.3" id="_005caddtolength">
 <title><literal>\addtolength</literal></title>
@@ -7067,13 +9041,29 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+<screen>\addtolength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
 </screen>
+<para>Increment the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> by <replaceable>amount</replaceable>.  The length name
+<replaceable>len</replaceable> begins with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.  The <literal>amount</literal> is a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
+length</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, if <literal>\parskip</literal> starts with the value <literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal> 
+</para>
+<screen>\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
 
-<para>The <literal>\addtolength</literal> command increments a length command <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
-by the amount specified in the <replaceable>amount</replaceable> argument, which may be
-negative.
+Nurse: no change.
+</screen>
+<para>then it has the value <literal>1pt plus 1pt</literal> for the second paragraph.
 </para>
+<para>If there is no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</literal>’.  If you leave
+off the backslash at the start of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</literal>, then you get something like
+‘<literal>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="14.4" id="_005csettodepth">
@@ -7083,11 +9073,24 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\settodepth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\settodepth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\settodepth</literal> command sets the value of a length command
-<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> equal to the depth of the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.  The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetdepth
+</screen>
+<para>If there is no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetdepth</literal>’.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="14.5" id="_005csettoheight">
@@ -7097,55 +9100,81 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\settoheight{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
+<screen>\settoheight{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\settoheight</literal> command sets the value of a length command <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
-equal to the height of the <literal>text</literal> argument.
+<para>Sets the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <literal>text</literal> argument.  The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>This will show how high the characters go.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetheight}
+\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetheight
+</screen>
+<para>If there is no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight</literal>’.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
+</para>
 
-
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="14.6" id="_005csettowidth">
-<title><literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\settowidth</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settowidth</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\settowidth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\settowidth</literal> command sets the value of the command <replaceable>\len</replaceable>
-to the width of the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.  The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetwidth
+</screen>
+<para>If there is no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetwidth</literal>’.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+‘<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</literal>’.
+</para>
 
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="14.7" id="Predefined-lengths">
-<title>Predefined lengths</title>
+<!-- @node Predefined lengths -->
+<!-- @section Predefined lengths -->
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, predefined</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>predefined lengths</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- @cindex lengths, predefined -->
+<!-- @cindex predefined lengths -->
 
-<para><literal>\width</literal>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\width</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
-<para><literal>\height</literal>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\height</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
-<para><literal>\depth</literal>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\depth</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
-<para><literal>\totalheight</literal>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\totalheight</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
-<para>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands (see <link linkend="Boxes">Boxes</link>).  They specify the natural width, etc., of
-the text in the box. <literal>\totalheight</literal> equals <inlineequation><mathphrase><literal>\height</literal> +
-<literal>\depth</literal></mathphrase></inlineequation>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
-natural size, e.g., say
-</para>
-<screen>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
-</screen>
+<!-- @code{\width} -->
+<!-- @findex \width -->
 
+<!-- @code{\height} -->
+<!-- @findex \height -->
+
+<!-- @code{\depth} -->
+<!-- @findex \depth -->
+
+<!-- @code{\totalheight} -->
+<!-- @findex \totalheight -->
+
+<!-- These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -->
+<!-- commands (@pxref{Boxes}).  They specify the natural width, etc., of the -->
+<!-- text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals -->
+<!-- @math{@code{@backslashchar{}height} + @code{@backslashchar{}depth}}. To -->
+<!-- make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say -->
+
+<!-- @example -->
+<!-- \makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@} -->
+<!-- @end example -->
+
+
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="15" id="Making-paragraphs">
@@ -7154,59 +9183,193 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>making paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not
-containing even a <literal>%</literal>.  A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
+<para>Once &latex; has all of a paragraph’s contents it divides it into
+lines, in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph (see <link linkend="Line-breaking">Line
+breaking</link>).  To end the current paragraph, put an empty line.
 </para>
+<screen>It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
 
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
 
-<sect1 label="15.1" id="_005cindent">
-<title><literal>\indent</literal></title>
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+</screen>
+<para>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, <literal>%</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted.  Don’t put a
+blank line in math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>); here the line before the
+<literal>\end{equation}</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+  2^{|S|} > |S|
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indent, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>will get you the error ‘<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>’.  Similarly, the blank
+line in this <literal>section</literal> argument
+</para>
+<screen>\section{aaa
 
-<para><literal>\indent</literal> produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
-<literal>\parindent</literal> length, the normal paragraph indentation.  It is used
-to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+bbb}
+</screen>
+<para>gets ‘<literal>Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete</literal>’.
 </para>
-<para>The default value for <literal>\parindent</literal> is <literal>1em</literal> in two-column
-mode, otherwise <literal>15pt</literal> for <literal>10pt</literal> documents, <literal>17pt</literal> for
-<literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>1.5em</literal> for <literal>12pt</literal>.
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="15.1" id="_005cpar">
+<title><literal>\par</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\par</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph, ending</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex;, converts two
+consecutive newlines to a <literal>\par</literal>):
 </para>
+<screen>\par
+</screen>
+<para>End the current paragraph.  The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the <literal>\par</literal> command is entirely equivalent.  This
+command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example uses <literal>\par</literal> rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+  \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command does nothing in LR mode or a vertical mode but
+it terminates paragraph mode, bringing &latex; to vertical mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>You cannot use the <literal>\par</literal> command in math mode or in the argument
+of many commands, such as the <literal>\section</literal> command (see <link linkend="Making-paragraphs">Making
+paragraphs</link> and see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command differs from the <literal>\paragraph</literal> command in
+that the latter is, like <literal>\section</literal> or <literal>\subsection</literal>, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command differs from <literal>\newline</literal> and the line break
+double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>, in that \par ends the paragraph not just
+the line.  It also triggers the addition of the between-paragraph
+vertical space <literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example
+</para>
+<screen>xyz
 
+\setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+\setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2 
+</screen>
+<para>is: after ‘<literal>xyz</literal>’ there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then
+‘<literal>test</literal>’ appears, aligned with the left margin.  On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then
+‘<literal>test1</literal>’ appears.  Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3 inches, and then &latex; puts the text ‘<literal>test2</literal>’.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="15.2" id="_005cnoindent">
-<title><literal>\noindent</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="15.2" id="_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">
+<title><literal>\indent</literal> & <literal>\noindent</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\noindent</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indent, suppressing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indent, forcing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
-paragraph indentation, as in this example.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\indent
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent
+</screen>
+<para>Go into horizontal mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  The <literal>\indent</literal> command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is <literal>\parindent</literal>.  These
+commands are robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+See <link linkend="_005cpar">\par</link> for the difference between this command and <literal>\par</literal>.  To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use <literal>\noindent</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>In the middle of a paragraph the <literal>\noindent</literal> command has no effect,
+because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there.  The
+<literal>\indent</literal> command’s only effect is to output a space.
+</para>
+<para>This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+</para>
 <screen>... end of the prior paragraph.
 
 \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
 </screen>
-<para>It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
+<para>and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
 </para>
-<para>To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
-<literal>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</literal> in the preamble.
+<screen>The data 
+
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+</screen>
+<para>To omit indentation in the entire document put
+<literal>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</literal> in the preamble.  If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+<literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent & \parskip</link>).
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English.  To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package <literal>indentfirst</literal>.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="15.3" id="_005cparskip">
-<title><literal>\parskip</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="15.3" id="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">
+<title><literal>\parindent</literal> & <literal>\parskip</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space before paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para><literal>\parskip</literal> is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added
-before each paragraph.  The default is <literal>0pt plus1pt</literal>.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\setlength{\parskip}{<replaceable>horizontal len</replaceable>}
+\setlength{\parinden}{<replaceable>vertical len</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Both are a rubber lengths (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This, put in the preamble,
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+</screen>
+<para>arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+‘<literal>x</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>In standard &latex; documents, the default value for <literal>\parindent</literal>
+in one-column documents is <literal>15pt</literal> when the default text size is
+<literal>10pt</literal> , <literal>17pt</literal> for <literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>1.5em</literal> for
+<literal>12pt</literal>.  In two-column documents it is <literal>1em</literal>.  The default
+value for <literal>\parskip</literal> in &latex;’s standard document styles is
+<literal>0pt plus1pt</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="15.4" id="Marginal-notes">
@@ -7217,45 +9380,50 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>remarks in the margin</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginpar</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\marginpar[<replaceable>left</replaceable>]{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}
+<screen>\marginpar{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}
+\marginpar[<replaceable>left</replaceable>]{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\marginpar</literal> command creates a note in the margin.  The first
-line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
-where the <literal>\marginpar</literal> occurs.
+<para>Create a note in the margin.  The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the <literal>\marginpar</literal>
+occurs.
 </para>
-<para>When you only specify the mandatory argument <replaceable>right</replaceable>, the text
-will be placed
+<para>The margin that &latex; uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>) and also on <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal>
+(see below).  If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+<literal>oneside</literal>) then it goes in the right margin.  If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option <literal>twoside</literal>) then it goes in the
+outside margin.  If you are in two-column layout (document option
+<literal>twocolumn</literal>) then it goes in the nearest margin.
 </para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>in the right margin for one-sided layout (option <literal>oneside</literal>, see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>);
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option <literal>twoside</literal>, see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>);
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option <literal>twocolumn</literal>, see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
-</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\reversemarginpar</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalmarginpar</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal> places subsequent marginal notes
-in the opposite (inside) margin.  <literal>\normalmarginpar</literal> places them
-in the default position.
+<para>If you declare <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal> then &latex; will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph.  Revert that to the default position with
+<literal>\normalmarginpar</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>When you specify both arguments, <replaceable>left</replaceable> is used for the left
-margin, and <replaceable>right</replaceable> is used for the right margin.
+<para>When you specify the optional argument <replaceable>left</replaceable> then it is used for a
+note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument <replaceable>right</replaceable> is
+used for a note in the the right margin.
 </para>
-<para>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning the node with <literal>\hspace{0pt}</literal>.
+<para>Normally, a note’s first word will not be hyphenated.  You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning <replaceable>left</replaceable> or <replaceable>right</replaceable> with
+<literal>\hspace{0pt}</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparpush</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘<literal>7pt</literal>’ for
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparpush"/><para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘<literal>7pt</literal>’ for
 ‘<literal>12pt</literal>’ documents, ‘<literal>5pt</literal>’ else.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparsep</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparsep"/><para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
 ‘<literal>11pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’ documents, ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’ else.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparwidth</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’ document
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparwidth"/><para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘<literal>10pt</literal>’ document
 is ‘<literal>90pt</literal>’, ‘<literal>83pt</literal>’ for ‘<literal>11pt</literal>’, and ‘<literal>68pt</literal>’ for
 ‘<literal>12pt</literal>’; ‘<literal>17pt</literal>’ more in each case for a two-sided document.
 In two column mode, the default is ‘<literal>48pt</literal>’.
@@ -7286,53 +9454,107 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
         
 
-<para>There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
+<para>Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display
+math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  This example shows both.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>math</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For formulas that appear right in the text.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>displaymath</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For formulas that appear on their own line.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>equation</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
-number in the right margin.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\(</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\)</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\[</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\]</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>math</literal> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
-but the <literal>displaymath</literal> and <literal>equation</literal> environments can be used
-only in paragraph mode.  The <literal>math</literal> and <literal>displaymath</literal>
-environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:
+<screen>The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin{displaymath}
+  \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end{displaymath}
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+</screen>
+<para>Math mode is for inline mathematics.  In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting <literal>\(</literal> and finished by the matching ending <literal>\)</literal>.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+<literal>displaymath</literal> environment.  Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
 </para>
-<screen>\(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
-\[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+<para>When in math mode or display math mode, &latex; handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes.  For example,
+</para>
+<screen>contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
 </screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>$</primary></indexterm>
-<para>In fact, the <literal>math</literal> environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
+<para>in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
 </para>
-<screen>$ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
+<para>There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put &latex; in math
+mode.
+</para>
+<screen>\( <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> \)
+$ <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> $
+\begin{math} <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> \end{math}
 </screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\boldmath</literal> command changes math letters and symbols to be in
-a bold font.  It is used <emphasis>outside</emphasis> of math mode.  Conversely, the
-<literal>\unboldmath</literal> command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font;
-it too is used <emphasis>outside</emphasis> of math mode.
+<para>The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used.  You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in <literal>\(x\) and $y$</literal>.  You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
 </para>
-<!-- xx own section? Math fonts? -->
+<para>To make displayed formulas, put &latex; into display math mode with
+either:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+  <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+  <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable>
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>(see <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>, see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).  The only difference is that
+with the <literal>equation</literal> environment, &latex; puts a formula number
+alongside the formula.  The construct <literal>\[ <replaceable>math</replaceable> \]</literal> is
+equivalent to <literal>\begin{displaymath} <replaceable>math</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}</literal>.  These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\displaystyle</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declaration forces the size and style of the
-formula to be that of <literal>displaymath</literal>, e.g., with limits above and
-below summations.  For example:
+<para>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
 </para>
-<screen>$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+<para>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode.  For this, the <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+<literal>displaymath</literal>.  Thus <literal>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
+x_n\)</literal> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it.  Another example is that
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+  \textsc{Name}  &\textsc{Series}  &\textsc{Sum}  \\  \hline
+  Arithmetic     &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+                   &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\)  \\
+  Geometric      &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+                   &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\)  \\
+\end{tabular}
 </screen>
-<!-- xx see also \cal, \mathcal -->
+<para>because it has no <literal>\displaystyle</literal>, the ‘<literal>Arithmetic</literal>’ line’s
+fraction will be scrunched.  But, because of its <literal>\displaystyle</literal>,
+the ‘<literal>Geometric</literal>’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsfonts</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsfonts</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+<filename>amsmath</filename> and <filename>amssymb</filename> (also be aware of the <filename>mathtools</filename>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <filename>amsmath</filename>).  New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
 <sect1 label="16.1" id="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">
 <title>Subscripts & superscripts</title>
 
@@ -7342,40 +9564,71 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>_</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>^</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>In math mode, use the caret character <literal>^</literal> to make the
-<replaceable>exp</replaceable> appear as a superscript: <literal>^{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}</literal>.
-Similarly, in math mode, underscore <literal>_{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}</literal> makes a
-subscript out of <replaceable>exp</replaceable>.
+<para>Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
 </para>
-<para>In this example the <literal>0</literal> and <literal>1</literal> appear as subscripts while the
-<literal>2</literal> is a superscript.
+<screen><replaceable>base</replaceable>^<replaceable>exp</replaceable>
+<replaceable>base</replaceable>^{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)
+<screen><replaceable>base</replaceable>_<replaceable>exp</replaceable>
+<replaceable>base</replaceable>_{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>To have more than one character in <replaceable>exp</replaceable> use curly braces as in
-<literal>e^{-2x}</literal>.
+<para>Make <replaceable>exp</replaceable> appear as a superscript of <replaceable>base</replaceable> (with the caret
+character, <literal>^</literal>) or a subscript (with
+underscore, <literal>_</literal>).
 </para>
-<para>&latex; handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
-the natural way, so expressions such as <literal>e^{x^2}</literal> and
-<literal>x_{a_0}</literal> will look right.  It also does the right thing when
-something has both a subscript and a superscript.  In this example the
-<literal>0</literal> appears at the bottom of the integral sign while the <literal>10</literal>
-appears at the top.
-</para> 
-<screen>\int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx
+<para>In this example the <literal>0</literal>’s and <literal>1</literal>’s are subscripts while the
+<literal>2</literal>’s are superscripts.
+</para>
+<screen>\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
 </screen>
-<para>You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a construct
-such as <literal>{}_t K^2</literal> in math mode (the initial <literal>{}</literal> prevents
-the prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
-expression).
+<para>To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in <literal>e^{-2x}</literal>.
+This example’s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
 </para>
-<para>Outside of math mode, a construct like <literal>A
-test$_\textnormal{subscript}$</literal> will produce a subscript typeset in
-text mode, not math mode.  Note that there are packages specialized for
-writing Chemical formulas such as <filename>mhchem</filename>.
-<!-- xx display mode -->
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+  (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+  \qquad
+  3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers.  So,
+expressions such as <literal>e^{x^2}</literal> and <literal>x_{i_0}</literal> give correct
+output.  Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+<replaceable>base</replaceable> a determined <replaceable>exp</replaceable>.  If you enter <literal>\(3^3^3\)</literal> then
+you get ‘<literal>Double superscript</literal>’.
 </para>
+<para>&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript.  In this example the integral has both.  They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+  \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>Note the parentheses around <literal>x=a</literal> to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+</para>
+<para>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+<literal>{}_t K^2</literal>.  The empty curly braces <literal>{}</literal> give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+</para>
+<para>Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in <literal>the expression x^2</literal>, will get you
+the error ‘<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>’.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mhchem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mhchem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas.  There are packages for that such as
+<filename>mhchem</filename>; see CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="16.2" id="Math-symbols">
 <title>Math symbols</title>
@@ -7384,20 +9637,23 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, math</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>greek letters</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you’re likely to need.
-For example, if you include <literal>$\pi$</literal> in your source, you will get
-the pi symbol &#x03C0;.
-</para> 
-<para>Below is a list of commonly-available symbols.  It is by no means an
-exhaustive list.  Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
-its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis.  Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
-be used only in math mode.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>symbols</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>symbols</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses.  For example, if you include <literal>$\pi$</literal> in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol &#x03C0;.  See the <filename>Comprehensive
+&latex; Symbol List</filename> at
+<ulink url="https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/">https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/</ulink>.
 </para>
-<para>To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode,
-see <link linkend="_005censuremath">\ensuremath</link>.
+<para>Here is a list of commonly-used symbols.  It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis.  Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode.  To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see <link linkend="_005censuremath">\ensuremath</link>.
 </para>
-
 <!-- xx Add Negation: @code{} for negations of relevant symbols -->
 <!-- Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html -->
 
@@ -7408,7 +9664,7 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2135; Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alpha</primary></indexterm><literal>\alpha</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B1; Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B1; Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\amalg</primary></indexterm><literal>\amalg</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2A3F; Disjoint union (binary)
@@ -7435,7 +9691,7 @@
 <literal>\textbackslash</literal> for backslash outside of math mode.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\beta</primary></indexterm><literal>\beta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B2; Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B2; Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcap</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x22C2; Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
@@ -7505,7 +9761,7 @@
 dot <literal>\bullet</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chi</primary></indexterm><literal>\chi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C7; Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C7; Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circ</primary></indexterm><literal>\circ</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2218; Function composition, ring operator (binary).  Similar:
@@ -7516,8 +9772,8 @@
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\complement</primary></indexterm><literal>\complement</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2201; Set complement, used as a superscript as in
-<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also
-used: <literal>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</literal> or <literal>$\bar{S}$</literal>.
+<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also used:
+<literal>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</literal> or <literal>$\bar{S}$</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cong</primary></indexterm><literal>\cong</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2245; Congruent (relation).
@@ -7540,17 +9796,16 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2021; Double dagger relation (binary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\Delta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x0394; Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x0394; Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\delta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B4; Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B4; Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\Diamond</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x25C7; Large diamond operator (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
-<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamond</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x22C4; Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary).  Similar: large
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C4; Diamond operator (binary).  Similar: large
 diamond <literal>\Diamond</literal>, circle bullet <literal>\bullet</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamondsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamondsuit</literal>
@@ -7564,12 +9819,12 @@
 to <literal>\Doteq</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\downarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2193; Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar: double line down
-arrow <literal>\Downarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2193; Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar:
+<literal>\Downarrow</literal> double line down arrow.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Downarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21D3; Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar: single line down
-arrow <literal>\downarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D3; Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar:
+<literal>\downarrow</literal> single line down arrow.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ell</primary></indexterm><literal>\ell</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2113; Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
@@ -7580,7 +9835,7 @@
 <!-- bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset? -->
 </para>	
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\epsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\epsilon</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03F5; Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03F5; Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
 Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
 letter epsilon <literal>\varepsilon</literal> &#x03B5;. Related:
 the set membership relation <literal>\in</literal> &#x2208;.
@@ -7591,7 +9846,7 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2261; Equivalence (relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\eta</primary></indexterm><literal>\eta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B7; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B7; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exists</primary></indexterm><literal>\exists</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2203; Existential quantifier (ordinary).
@@ -7606,10 +9861,10 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2322; Downward curving arc (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Gamma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x0393; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x0393; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\gamma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B3; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ge</primary></indexterm><literal>\ge</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2265; Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
@@ -7646,8 +9901,13 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Im</primary></indexterm><literal>\Im</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2111; Imaginary part (ordinary).  See: real part <literal>\Re</literal>.
 </para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\imath</primary></indexterm><literal>\imath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\in</primary></indexterm><literal>\in</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2208; Set element (relation).  See also: lower case lunate
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2208; Set element (relation).  See also: lowercase lunate
 epsilon <literal>\epsilon</literal>&#x03F5; and small letter script
 epsilon <literal>\varepsilon</literal>.
 </para>
@@ -7658,20 +9918,25 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x222B; Integral (operator).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\iota</primary></indexterm><literal>\iota</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B9; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Join</primary></indexterm><literal>\Join</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2A1D; Condensed bowtie symbol (relation).  Not available in Plain
 &tex;.
 </para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\jmath</primary></indexterm><literal>\jmath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\kappa</primary></indexterm><literal>\kappa</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03BA; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BA; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\Lambda</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x039B; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x039B; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\lambda</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03BB; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BB; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\land</primary></indexterm><literal>\land</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2227; Logical and (binary).  This is a synonym for <literal>\wedge</literal>.
@@ -7792,7 +10057,7 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2213; Minus or plus (relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mu</primary></indexterm><literal>\mu</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03BC; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BC; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nabla</primary></indexterm><literal>\nabla</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2207; Hamilton’s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
@@ -7820,20 +10085,20 @@
 of <literal>\in</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\not</primary></indexterm><literal>\not</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x0020;&#x00A0;&#x0338; Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+</term><listitem><!-- the "@ "s put in spaces so the not slash doesn't hit the next char. -->
+<para>&#x0020;    Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
 following operator (relation).
-<!-- Need blank space for it to overstrike -->
 </para>
-<para>Many negated operators that don’t require <literal>\not</literal> are available,
+<para>Many negated operators are available that don’t require <literal>\not</literal>,
 particularly with the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For example, <literal>\notin</literal>
-is probably typographically preferable to <literal>\not\in</literal>.
+is typographically preferable to <literal>\not\in</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\notin</primary></indexterm><literal>\notin</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2209; Not an element of (relation).  Similar: not subset
 of <literal>\nsubseteq</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nu</primary></indexterm><literal>\nu</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03BD; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BD; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nwarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\nwarrow</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2196; North-west arrow (relation).
@@ -7843,13 +10108,14 @@
 operator <literal>\bigodot</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oint</primary></indexterm><literal>\oint</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x222E; Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x222E; Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\Omega</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03A9; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A9; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\omega</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C9; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ominus</primary></indexterm><literal>\ominus</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2296; Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
@@ -7882,14 +10148,14 @@
 ordinary.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\phi</primary></indexterm><literal>\phi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03D5; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <literal>\varphi</literal> &#x03C6;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03A0; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A0; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\pi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C0; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C0; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <literal>\varpi</literal> &#x03D6;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pm</primary></indexterm><literal>\pm</literal>
@@ -7919,14 +10185,14 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x221D; Is proportional to (relation)
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Psi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03A8; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A8; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\psi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C8; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\rangle</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x27E9; Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
-than <literal>></literal>.  Matches:<literal>\langle</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27E9; Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than <literal>></literal>. Matches:<literal>\langle</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrace</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x007D; Right curly brace
@@ -7945,8 +10211,8 @@
 this, load the <filename>amsfonts</filename> package.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restriction</primary></indexterm><literal>\restriction</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21BE; Restriction of a function
-(relation). Synonym: <literal>\upharpoonright</literal>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21BE; Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+<literal>\upharpoonright</literal>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\revemptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\revemptyset</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x29B0; Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary).  Related:
@@ -7959,45 +10225,50 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\rhd</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x25C1; Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
 Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
-load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which
-is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rho</primary></indexterm><literal>\rho</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C1; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C1; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <literal>\varrho</literal> &#x03F1;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Rightarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21D2; Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar:
-right single-line arrow <literal>\rightarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D2; Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow <literal>\rightarrow</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: <literal>\to</literal>. Similar: right double line arrow <literal>\Rightarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym: <literal>\to</literal>. Similar: right double line
+arrow <literal>\Rightarrow</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoondown</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoondown</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21C1; Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21C1; Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation). 
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoonup</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoonup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21C0; Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21C0; Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightleftharpoons</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightleftharpoons</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x21CC; Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21CC; Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\searrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\searrow</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2198; Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setminus</primary></indexterm><literal>\setminus</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x29F5; Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \
-(binary). Similar: backslash <literal>\backslash</literal> and also
+</term><listitem><para>&#x29F5; Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash <literal>\backslash</literal> and also
 <literal>\textbackslash</literal> outside of math mode.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sharp</primary></indexterm><literal>\sharp</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x266F; Musical sharp (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Sigma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03A3; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A3; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\sigma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C3; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
 <literal>\varsigma</literal> &#x03C2;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sim</primary></indexterm><literal>\sim</literal>
@@ -8038,15 +10309,15 @@
 superset <literal>\supset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupseteq</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2292; Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
-equal <literal>\supseteq</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2292; Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal <literal>\supseteq</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\star</primary></indexterm><literal>\star</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x22C6; Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation
-but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar: the
-synonyms asterisk <literal>*</literal> and <literal>\ast</literal>, which are six-pointed,
-and more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene
-star.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C6; Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk <literal>*</literal> and <literal>\ast</literal>, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subset</primary></indexterm><literal>\subset</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2282; Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
@@ -8081,10 +10352,10 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2199; Southwest-pointing  arrow (relation).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tau</primary></indexterm><literal>\tau</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C4; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C4; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\theta</primary></indexterm><literal>\theta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B8; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
 <literal>\vartheta</literal> &#x03D1;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\times</primary></indexterm><literal>\times</literal>
@@ -8115,16 +10386,16 @@
 relation and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unlhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unlhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x22B4; Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
-is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.  For
-the normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22B4; Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
 use <literal>\vartrianglelefteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
 better spacing).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unrhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unrhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x22B5; Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
-is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.  For
-the normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22B5; Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
 use <literal>\vartrianglerighteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
 better spacing).
 </para>
@@ -8144,12 +10415,14 @@
 arrow <literal>\updownarrow</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\updownarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2195; Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow <literal>\Updownarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2195; Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow <literal>\Updownarrow</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upharpoonright</primary></indexterm><literal>\upharpoonright</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x21BE; Up harpoon, with barb on right side
-(relation). Synonym: <literal>\restriction</literal>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <literal>\restriction</literal>.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\uplus</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x228E; Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
@@ -8157,10 +10430,10 @@
 variable-sized operator <literal>\biguplus</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\Upsilon</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03A5; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A5; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\upsilon</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C5; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varepsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\varepsilon</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x03B5; Small letter script epsilon (ordinary).  This is
@@ -8169,28 +10442,28 @@
 membership <literal>\in</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vanothing</primary></indexterm><literal>\vanothing</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x2205; Empty set symbol. Similar:
-<literal>\emptyset</literal>. Related: <literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2205; Empty set symbol. Similar: <literal>\emptyset</literal>. Related:
+<literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varphi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varphi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C6; Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <literal>\phi</literal> &#x03D5;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varpi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varpi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03D6; Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <literal>\pi</literal> &#x03C0;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varrho</primary></indexterm><literal>\varrho</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03F1; Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03F1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <literal>\rho</literal> &#x03C1;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varsigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\varsigma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03C2; Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C2; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
 (ordinary).  The non-variant form is
 <literal>\sigma</literal> &#x03C3;.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vartheta</primary></indexterm><literal>\vartheta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03D1; Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
 (ordinary).  The non-variant form is
 <literal>\theta</literal> &#x03B8;.
 </para>
@@ -8208,34 +10481,35 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2016; Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
 bar <literal>\vert</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and add
-<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</literal> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line
-vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the
-document body you write the starred version <literal>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</literal>
-then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the
-argument, whereas with <literal>\norm{M^\perp}</literal> the bars do not grow
-with the height of the argument but instead are the default height,
-and <literal>\norm[<replaceable>size command</replaceable>]{M^\perp}</literal> also gives bars that
-do not grow but are set to the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>,
-e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
+<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and put in
+your preamble
+<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</literal>. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <literal>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</literal> then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<literal>\norm{M^\perp}</literal> the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and <literal>\norm[<replaceable>size
+command</replaceable>]{M^\perp}</literal> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>, e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\vert</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x007C; Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
 vertical bar <literal>\Vert</literal>. For such that, as in the definition of a 
 set, use <literal>\mid</literal> because it is a relation.  
 </para>
-<para>For absolute value you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and add
-<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</literal> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical
-bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
-write the starred version <literal>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</literal> then the
-height of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument,
-whereas with <literal>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> the bars do not grow with
-the height of the argument but instead are the default height, and
-<literal>\abs[<replaceable>size command</replaceable>]{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> also gives bars
-that do not grow but are set to the size given in the <replaceable>size
-command</replaceable>, e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
+<para>For absolute value you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and in your
+preamble put
+<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</literal>. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <literal>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</literal> then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<literal>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+<literal>\abs[<replaceable>size command</replaceable>]{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>,
+e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\wedge</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2227; Logical and (binary).  Synonym: <literal>\land</literal>.  See also
@@ -8249,16 +10523,214 @@
 </term><listitem><para>&#x2240; Wreath product (binary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Xi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x039E; Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x039E; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\xi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03BE; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BE; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\zeta</primary></indexterm><literal>\zeta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>&#x03B6; Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B6; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The following symbols are most often used in plain text but &latex;
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathdollar</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathdollar</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathparagraph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, &#x00B6;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsection</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode &#x00A7;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsterling</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathunderscore</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
+
+<sect2 label="16.2.1" id="Blackboard-bold">
+<title>Blackboard bold</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>blackboard bold</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>doublestruck</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{amssymb}   % in preamble
+  ... 
+\mathbb{<replaceable>uppercase-letter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here 
+</para>
+<screen>\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+</screen>
+<para>the <literal>\mathbb{N}</literal> gives blackboard bold symbol &#x2115;
+representing the natural numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+</para>
+<para>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.2" id="Calligraphic">
+<title>Calligraphic</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>calligraphic fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>script fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fonts, script</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\mathcal{<replaceable>uppercase-letters</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Use a script-like font.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+</para>
+<screen>Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+</screen>
+<para>If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error.  Instead you get unexpected output.  For instance,
+<literal>\mathcal{g}</literal> outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+<literal>\mathcal{+}</literal> outputs a plus sign.  
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.3" id="_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">
+<title><literal>\boldmath</literal> & <literal>\unboldmath</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>boldface mathematics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, boldface</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+</para>
+<screen>\boldmath \( <replaceable>math</replaceable> \)
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\unboldmath \( <replaceable>math</replaceable> \)
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <replaceable>math</replaceable> to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example each <literal>\boldmath</literal> command takes place inside an
+<literal>\mbox</literal>,
+</para>
+<screen>we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+</screen>
+<para>which means <literal>\boldmath</literal> is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set <literal>v</literal>
+and <literal>u</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <literal>Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)</literal>, then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</literal>’ and ‘<literal>LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11</literal>’.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>bm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many issues with <literal>\boldmath</literal>.  New documents should use
+the <filename>bm</filename> package provided by the &latex; Project team.  A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+</screen>
+<para>shows that it is an improvement over <literal>\boldmath</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.4" id="Dots">
+<title>Dots, horizontal or vertical</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dots</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{array}{cccc}
+  a_{0,0}    &a_{0,1}   &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\
+  a_{1,0}    &\ddots                     \\
+  \vdots
+\end{array}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; provides these.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="ellipses-cdots"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in &#x22EF;.  Used as: <literal>\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1}
+\)</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-ddots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Diagonal ellipsis, &#x22F1;.  See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-ldots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, &#x2026;.  Used as: <literal>\(
+x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</literal>.  Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is <literal>\mathellipsis</literal>.  A synonym from the <filename>amsmath</filename>
+package is <literal>\hdots</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+<literal>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</literal>.  (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for <literal>\ldots</literal> is <literal>\dots</literal>.)
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-vdots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Vertical ellipsis, &#x22EE;.  See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package has the command <literal>\dots</literal> to semantically
+mark up ellipses.  This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the <literal>\dots</literal> command.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
+  ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+  multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+</screen>
+<para>In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following <literal>\dots</literal> to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline.  The second
+line has a <literal>\cdot</literal> following <literal>\dots</literal> so &latex; outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered.  However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell &latex; what
+to do.  You can use one of the commands: <literal>\dotsc</literal> if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, <literal>\dotsb</literal> if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, <literal>\dotsi</literal> for dots with integrals, or
+<literal>\dotso</literal> for others.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="16.3" id="Math-functions">
 <title>Math functions</title>
@@ -8270,112 +10742,123 @@
 spacing.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arccos</primary></indexterm><literal>\arccos</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arccos</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse cosine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arcsin</primary></indexterm><literal>\arcsin</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arcsin</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse sine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arctan</primary></indexterm><literal>\arctan</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arctan</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse tangent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arg</primary></indexterm><literal>\arg</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\bmod</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Binary modulo operator (<inlineequation><mathphrase>x \bmod y</mathphrase></inlineequation>)
+</term><listitem><para>Binary modulo operator, used as in <literal>\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)</literal>
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cos</primary></indexterm><literal>\cos</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cos</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Cosine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cosh</primary></indexterm><literal>\cosh</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cosh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic cosine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cot</primary></indexterm><literal>\cot</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cot</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Cotangent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\coth</primary></indexterm><literal>\coth</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\coth</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic cotangent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\csc</primary></indexterm><literal>\csc</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\csc</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Cosecant
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\deg</primary></indexterm><literal>\deg</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\deg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Degrees
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\det</primary></indexterm><literal>\det</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\det</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Determinant
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dim</primary></indexterm><literal>\dim</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\dim</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Dimension
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exp</primary></indexterm><literal>\exp</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\exp</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Exponential
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gcd</primary></indexterm><literal>\gcd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\gcd</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Greatest common divisor
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hom</primary></indexterm><literal>\hom</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\hom</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Homomorphism
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\inf</primary></indexterm><literal>\inf</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\inf</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Infinum
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ker</primary></indexterm><literal>\ker</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ker</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Kernel
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lg</primary></indexterm><literal>\lg</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Base 2 logarithm
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lim</primary></indexterm><literal>\lim</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lim</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\liminf</primary></indexterm><literal>\liminf</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\liminf</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit inferior
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\limsup</primary></indexterm><literal>\limsup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\limsup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit superior
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ln</primary></indexterm><literal>\ln</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ln</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Natural logarithm
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\log</primary></indexterm><literal>\log</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\log</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Logarithm
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\max</primary></indexterm><literal>\max</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\max</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Maximum
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\min</primary></indexterm><literal>\min</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\min</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Minimum
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\pmod</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>parenthesized modulus, as in (<inlineequation><mathphrase>\pmod 2^n - 1</mathphrase></inlineequation>)
+</term><listitem><para>Parenthesized modulus, as used in <literal>\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)</literal>
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pr</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pr</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Pr</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Probability
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sec</primary></indexterm><literal>\sec</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sec</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Secant
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sin</primary></indexterm><literal>\sin</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sin</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Sine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sinh</primary></indexterm><literal>\sinh</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sinh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic sine
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>sup
 <!-- don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
 <!-- Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
 <!-- when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tan</primary></indexterm><literal>\tan</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tan</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Tangent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tanh</primary></indexterm><literal>\tanh</literal>
-</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tanh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic tangent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own.  The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<literal>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</literal> that is like the ones
+above but prints as ‘<literal>id</literal>’.  The starred form
+<literal>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</literal> sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with <literal>\lim</literal>, <literal>\sup</literal>, or <literal>\max</literal>.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="16.4" id="Math-accents">
 <title>Math accents</title>
@@ -8389,277 +10872,438 @@
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\acute</primary></indexterm><literal>\acute</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acute accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math acute accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\acute{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math acute accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bar</primary></indexterm><literal>\bar</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-over accent, math</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>macron accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math bar-over accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\bar{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math bar-over accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\breve</primary></indexterm><literal>\breve</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>breve accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math breve accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\breve{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math breve accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\check</primary></indexterm><literal>\check</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>check accent, math</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>háček accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math háček (check) accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\check{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math háček (check) accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddot</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddot</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dot accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math dieresis accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddot{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math dieresis accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dot</primary></indexterm><literal>\dot</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>overdot accent, math</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot over accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math dot accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\dot{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math dot accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\grave</primary></indexterm><literal>\grave</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>grave accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math grave accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\grave{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math grave accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hat</primary></indexterm><literal>\hat</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>hat accent, math</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\hat{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\imath</primary></indexterm><literal>\imath</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math dotless i.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\jmath</primary></indexterm><literal>\jmath</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math dotless j.
-</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathring</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathring</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>ring accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math ring accent: x*.  <!-- don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
+<para>Math ring accent  <!-- don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\tilde</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math tilde accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\tilde{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math tilde accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vec</primary></indexterm><literal>\vec</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vector symbol, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math vector symbol: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\vec{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math vector symbol
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widehat</primary></indexterm><literal>\widehat</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>wide hat accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math wide hat accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\widehat{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math wide hat accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widetilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\widetilde</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>wide tilde accent, math</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Math wide tilde accent: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\widetilde{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Math wide tilde accent
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, <literal>\imath</literal> or <literal>jmath</literal> (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="16.5" id="Spacing-in-math-mode">
+<sect1 label="16.5" id="Over_002d-and-Underlining">
+<title>Over- and Underlining</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>overlining</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underlining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Underline <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  Works inside math mode, and outside.
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in <literal>\(\underline{y}\)</literal> the line is lower than in
+<literal>\(\underline{x}\)</literal>.  This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>ulem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>ulem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Note that the package <filename>ulem</filename> does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features.  See the
+documentation on CTAN.  See also <link linkend="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill & \dotfill</link> for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+</para>        
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a horizontal line over <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  Works inside math mode, and
+outside.  For example, <literal>\overline{x+y}</literal>.
+Note that this differs from the command <literal>\bar</literal> (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a brace under <replaceable>math</replaceable>. For example, this
+<literal>(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)</literal> emphasizes the telescoping part.
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <literal>_</literal>, or superscript,
+<literal>^</literal>, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+  1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
+       \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a brace over <replaceable>math</replaceable>, as with
+<literal>\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}</literal>.  See also
+<literal>\underbrace</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <filename>mathtools</filename> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.6" id="Spacing-in-math-mode">
 <title>Spacing in math mode</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing within math mode</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, spacing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>In a <literal>math</literal> environment, &latex; ignores the spaces that you use
-in the source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal
-rules for mathematics texts.  
+<para>When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts.  If you enter <literal>y=m x</literal> then
+&latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as <inlineequation><mathphrase>y=mx</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
 </para>
-<para>Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
-<firstterm>mu</firstterm> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>).
-&latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode:
+<para>But &latex;’s rules sometimes need tweaking.  For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+<literal>f(x)</literal> and the <literal>dx</literal>, here done with the <literal>\,</literal> command.
 </para>
+<screen>\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; provides the commands that follow for use in math mode.  Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<firstterm>mu</firstterm>.  It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>).  Thus, a
+<literal>\thickspace</literal> is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a ‘<literal>M</literal>’.
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\;</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\;</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thickspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Normally <literal>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</literal>.  The longer name is
-<literal>\thickspace</literal>.  Math mode only.
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\thickspace</literal>.  Normally <literal>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</literal>.  Math
+mode only.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\:</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\></literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\:</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Normally <literal>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.  The longer name is
-<literal>\medspace</literal>.  Math mode only.
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\medspace</literal>.  Normally <literal>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.
+Math mode only.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\,</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\,</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Normally <literal>3mu</literal>.  The longer name is <literal>\thinspace</literal>.  This can
-be used in both math mode and text mode. See <link linkend="_005cthinspace">\thinspace</link>.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace"/><anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thinspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\thinspace</literal>.  Normally <literal>3mu</literal>, which is 1/6em.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &
+\negthinspace</link>).
 </para>
+<para>This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral <literal>\int f(x)\,dx</literal> and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+</para>
+<screen>The antiderivative is
+\begin{equation}
+  3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\!</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\!</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A negative thin space. Normally <literal>-3mu</literal>.  Math mode only.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space, negative</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace"/><para>A negative thin space. Normally <literal>-3mu</literal>.  The <literal>\!</literal> command is
+math mode only but the <literal>\negthinspace</literal> command is available for
+text mode (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace & \negthinspace</link>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\quad</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quad</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quad</primary></indexterm>
-<para>This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-quad"/><para>This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
 surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
 two equations inside a <literal>displaymath</literal> environment.  It is available
 in both text and math mode.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\qquad</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qquad</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em.  It is available in
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-qquad"/><para>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em.  It is available in
 both text and math mode.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
-infinitesimal.
-</para>
-<screen>\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
-</screen>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="16.6" id="Math-miscellany">
+<sect1 label="16.7" id="Math-miscellany">
 <title>Math miscellany</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>math miscellany</primary></indexterm>
 
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\*</primary></indexterm><literal>\*</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary multiplication</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplication symbol, discretionary line break</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A <firstterm>discretionary</firstterm> multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a
-space, while in the case of a break a &#x00D7; symbol is
-printed immediately before the break. So
+<para>&latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities.  Here are
+some that don’t fit into other categories.
 </para>
-<screen>\documentclass{article}
-\begin{document}
-Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\) 
-through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is 
-equal to zero.
-\end{document}
+
+
+<sect2 label="16.7.1" id="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">
+<title>Colon character <literal>:</literal> & <literal>\colon</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colon character</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\colon</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>:
+\colon
 </screen>
-<para>will make that sort of output<!-- -->
- <!-- /@w -->(the ellipsis ‘<literal>[…]</literal>’ is here to show the line break at
-the same place as in a &tex; output)<!-- -->
-:
+<para>In mathematics, the colon character, <literal>:</literal>, is a relation.
 </para>
-<para>Now <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_3 = 0</mathphrase></inlineequation>,
-[…]
-<inlineequation><mathphrase>A_1</mathphrase></inlineequation>
-through <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_4</mathphrase></inlineequation>, that is <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_1 A_2 \times</mathphrase></inlineequation>
-<inlineequation><mathphrase>A_3 A_4</mathphrase></inlineequation>, is
-equal to zero.
+<screen>With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Ordinary &latex; defines <literal>\colon</literal> to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+<literal>\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdots</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>But the widely-used <filename>amsmath</filename> package defines <literal>\colon</literal> for use
+in the definition of functions <literal>f\colon D\to C</literal>.  So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use <literal>\mathpunct{:}</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddots</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>A diagonal ellipsis: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddots</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.2" id="_005c_002a">
+<title><literal>\*</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplication, discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breaks, multiplication discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, multiplication discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary breaks, multiplication</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\*</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>den</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\frac{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>den</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces the fraction <replaceable>num</replaceable> divided by <replaceable>den</replaceable>.
+<screen>\*
+</screen>
+<para>A multiplication symbol that allows a line break.  If there is a break
+then &latex; puts a <literal>\times</literal> symbol, &#x00D7;, before
+that break.
 </para>
+<para>In <literal>\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)</literal>, if there is no line break then
+&latex; outputs it as though it were <literal>\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)</literal>.  If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+&latex; sets it like <literal>\( A_1 A_2 \times \)</literal>, followed by the
+break, followed by <literal>\( A_3 A_4 \)</literal>.
+</para>
 
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left <replaceable>delim1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delim2</replaceable></primary></indexterm><literal>\left <replaceable>delim1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delim2</replaceable></literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>null delimiter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The two delimiters need not match; ‘<literal>.</literal>’ acts as a <firstterm>null delimiter</firstterm>,
-producing no output.  The delimiters are sized according to the math
-in between.  Example: <literal>\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]</literal>.
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.3" id="_005cfrac">
+<title><literal>\frac</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fraction</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathdollar</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathdollar</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+<screen>\frac{<replaceable>numerator</replaceable>}{<replaceable>denominator</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produces the fraction.  Used as: <literal>\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}</literal>.  In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of <literal>\displaystyle</literal>
+(see <link linkend="Math-formulas">Math formulas</link>).
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathellipsis</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ….
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.4" id="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">
+<title><literal>\left</literal> & <literal>\right</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>delimiters, paired</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paired delimiters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching parentheses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching brackets</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>null delimiter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathparagraph</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: &#x00B6;.
+<screen>\left <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters.  The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose.  This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsection</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode.
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+  \left(\begin{array}{c}
+    1   \\
+    0   \\
+  \end{array}\right)
+</screen>
+<para>Every <literal>\left</literal> must have a matching <literal>\right</literal>.  Leaving out the
+<literal>\left(</literal> in the above gets ‘<literal>Extra \right</literal>’.  Leaving off the
+<literal>\right)</literal> gets ‘<literal>You can't use `\eqno' in math mode</literal>’.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsterling</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+<para>However, the two delimiters <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> and <replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable> need
+not match.  A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, ‘<literal>.</literal>’, as a null delimiter.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathunderscore</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
+       \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, <literal>\{</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Generates a brace over <replaceable>math</replaceable>.
-For example, <literal>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}</literal>.
-</para>        
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Generates a horizontal line over <replaceable>tex</replaceable>.
-For example, <literal>\overline{x+y}</literal>.
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.5" id="_005csqrt">
+<title><literal>\sqrt</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>square root</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>roots</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>radical</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Produces the representation of the square root of <replaceable>arg</replaceable>.  The
-optional argument <replaceable>root</replaceable> determines what root to produce.  For
-example, the cube root of <literal>x+y</literal> would be typed as
-<literal>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</literal>.
+<screen>\sqrt{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+\sqrt[<replaceable>root-number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <replaceable>arg</replaceable>.  The optional
+argument <replaceable>root-number</replaceable> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+<literal>x+y</literal> as <literal>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</literal>.
+The radical grows with the size of <replaceable>arg</replaceable> (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough <literal>arg</literal>, it is vertical).
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Puts <replaceable>text</replaceable> above <replaceable>relation</replaceable>.  For example,
-<literal>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</literal>.
+<para>&latex; has a separate <literal>\surd</literal> character (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Generates <replaceable>math</replaceable> with a brace underneath. For example, <literal>\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}</literal>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.6" id="_005cstackrel">
+<title><literal>\stackrel</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stack math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>relation, text above</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Causes <replaceable>text</replaceable>, which may be either math mode or not, to be
-underlined.  The line is always below the text, taking account of
-descenders.
+<screen>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> above <replaceable>relation</replaceable>.  To put a function name above an
+arrow enter <literal>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="17" id="Modes">
 <title>Modes</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>modes</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes.  They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><anchor id="modes-paragraph-mode"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>Paragraph mode</firstterm> is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary
+text.  It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages.  This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-to-right mode</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>LR mode</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
+<anchor id="modes-lr-mode"/><para><firstterm>LR mode</firstterm> (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called
+<firstterm>restricted horizontal mode</firstterm>) is in effect when &latex; starts
+making a box with an <literal>\mbox</literal> command.  As in paragraph mode,
+&latex;’s output is a string of words with spaces between them.  Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right.  (Although &latex; will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won’t fit there.)
 </para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Paragraph mode
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>Math mode
-</para></listitem><listitem><para>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
-<para>Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
-&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-math-mode"/><para><firstterm>Math mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
 </para>
-<para><firstterm>Paragraph mode</firstterm> is the most common; it’s the one &latex; is in
-when processing ordinary text.  In this mode, &latex; breaks the
-input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>display math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>Display math mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula.  (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones.  One example is that the placement of the subscript on <literal>\int</literal>
+differs in the two situations.)
 </para>
-<para>&latex; is in <firstterm>math mode</firstterm> when it’s generating a mathematical
-formula, either displayed math or within a line.
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Vertical mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page.  This is the mode &latex; is in
+when it starts a document.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox, and LR mode</primary></indexterm>
-<para>In <firstterm>LR mode</firstterm>, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output
-that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them.
-However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to
-right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.  Even if you put a
-hundred words into an <literal>\mbox</literal>, &latex; would keep typesetting
-them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely
-complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line).
-&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
-<literal>\mbox</literal> command.  You can get it to enter a different mode inside
-the box—for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
-formula in the box.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>internal vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-internal-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Internal vertical mode</firstterm> is in effect when &latex; starts making a
+<literal>\vbox</literal>.  This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
 </para>
-<para>There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put &latex; into paragraph mode.  The box made by
-one of these commands or environments will be called a <literal>parbox</literal>.
-When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to
-be in “inner paragraph mode” (no page breaks).  Its normal paragraph
-mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with ‘<literal>Let \( x \) be
+...</literal>’ then these are the modes: first &latex; starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the ‘<literal>L</literal>’ and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the ‘<literal>\(</literal>’ where &latex;
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>inner paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>outer paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-inner-paragraph-mode"/><anchor id="modes-outer-paragraph-mode"/><para>Paragraph mode has two subcases.  If you use a <literal>\parbox</literal> command or
+or a <literal>minipage</literal> then &latex; is put into paragraph mode.  But it
+will not put a page break here.  Inside one of these boxes, called a
+<firstterm>parbox</firstterm>, &latex; is in <firstterm>inner paragraph mode</firstterm>.  Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is <firstterm>outer paragraph mode</firstterm>
+(see <link linkend="Page-breaking">Page breaking</link>).
+</para>
 
 <sect1 label="17.1" id="_005censuremath">
 <title><literal>\ensuremath</literal></title>
@@ -8668,33 +11312,22 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\ensuremath{<replaceable>formula</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\ensuremath</literal> command ensures that <replaceable>formula</replaceable> is typeset in
-math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+<para>Ensure that <replaceable>formula</replaceable> is typeset in math mode.
 </para>
-<para>For instance:
+<para>For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
 </para>
-<screen>\documentclass{report}
-\newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
-\begin{document}
-Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
-\end{document}
+<screen>\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
 </screen>
-<para>One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
-they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
-<literal>\leadsto</literal>:
+<para>Caution: the <literal>\ensuremath</literal> command is useful but not a panacea.
 </para>
-<!-- Vincent 2 Karl : "Tous les chemins mènent à Rome" is a French saying -->
-<!-- meaning that there are many different ways to get the same result. I -->
-<!-- am not sure whether in English the given example is also funny. -->
-<screen>\documentclass{report}
-\usepackage{amssymb}
-\newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
-\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
-\renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
-\begin{document}
-All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
-\end{document}
+<screen>\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
 </screen>
+<para>Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -8704,50 +11337,103 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>styles, page</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>page styles</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\documentclass</literal> command determines the size and position of
-the page’s head and foot.  The page style determines what goes in them.
+<para>The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body.  This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The package <filename>fancyhdr</filename> is very helpful for constructing page
+styles.  See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
 
+
 <sect1 label="18.1" id="_005cmaketitle">
 <title><literal>\maketitle</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>titles, making</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\maketitle</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\maketitle</literal> command generates a title on a separate title
-page—except in the <literal>article</literal> class, where the title is placed
-at the top of the first page.  Information used to produce the title
-is obtained from the following declarations:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\author{<replaceable>name</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\author{<replaceable>name</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable>}</literal>
+<screen>\maketitle
+</screen>
+<para>Generate a title.  In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the <literal>article</literal> class where it is at the top
+of the first page.  (See <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link> for information about
+the <literal>titlepage</literal> document class option.)
+</para>
+<para>This example shows <literal>\maketitle</literal> appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after <literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+\author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+    With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+  Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+  \and
+  Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+    Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+    and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.}           \\
+  Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+  }
+\date{1964-Sep-26}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>You tell &latex; the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations.  These must come before the
+<literal>\maketitle</literal>, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</primary></indexterm><literal>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>author, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\and for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\author</literal> command declares the document author(s), where the
-argument is a list of authors separated by <literal>\and</literal> commands.  Use
-<literal>\\</literal> to separate lines within a single author’s entry—for
-example, to give the author’s institution or address.
+<para>Required.  Declare the document author or authors.  The argument is a
+list of authors separated by <literal>\and</literal> commands.  To separate lines
+within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s
+institution or address, use a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  If you omit
+the <literal>\author</literal> declaration then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\date{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\date{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>date, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\date</literal> command declares <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the document’s
-date.  With no <literal>\date</literal> command, the current date (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>)
-is used.
+<para>Optional.  Declare <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the document’s date.  The <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+doesn’t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all.  If you
+omit <literal>\date</literal> then &latex; uses the current date (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+To have no date, instead use <literal>\date{}</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thanks{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\thanks{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>thanks, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>credit footnote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\thanks</literal> command produces a <literal>\footnote</literal> to the title,
-usually used for credit acknowledgements.
+<para>Optional.  Produce a footnote.  You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements, as illustrated below, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense.  It can be any text so
+you can use it to print an email address, or for any purpose.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\title</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\title</literal> command declares <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the title of the
-document.  Use <literal>\\</literal> to force a line break, as usual.
+<para>Required.  Declare <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the title of the document.  Get line
+breaks inside <replaceable>text</replaceable> with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  If you
+omit the <literal>\title</literal> declaration then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: No
+\title given</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Many publishers will provide a class to use in place of <literal>article</literal>
+in that example, that formats the title according to their house
+requirements.  To make your own, see <link linkend="titlepage">titlepage</link>. You can
+either create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a
+renewed <literal>\maketitle</literal> command.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="18.2" id="_005cpagenumbering">
@@ -8758,27 +11444,62 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\pagenumbering{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
+<screen>\pagenumbering{<replaceable>number-style</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, according to <replaceable>style</replaceable>; also
-resets the page number to 1.  The <replaceable>style</replaceable> argument is one of
-the following:
+<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number.  The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references.  This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
 </para>
+<para>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc.  Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered ‘<literal>1</literal>’, etc.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+  ...
+\section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>The argument <replaceable>number-style</replaceable> is one of the following (see
+also <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>).
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>arabic</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>arabic numerals
+</term><listitem><para>arabic numerals: 1, 2, … 
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>roman</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals
+</term><listitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, …
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Roman</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals
+</term><listitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, …
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>alph</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>lowercase letters
+</term><listitem><para>lowercase letters: a, b, … If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</literal>’.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Alph</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uppercase letters
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</term><listitem><para>uppercase letters: A, B, … If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</literal>’.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>gobble</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset.  References to that page also are blank.  (This does not
+work with the popular package <filename>hyperref</filename> so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use <literal>\pagestyle{empty}</literal> or
+<literal>\thispagestyle{empty}</literal>.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Traditionally, if a document has front matter—preface, table of
+contents, etc.—then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic.  See <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see <link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>.  If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the <literal>page</literal> counter
+(see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="18.3" id="_005cpagestyle">
@@ -8793,49 +11514,125 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\pagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\pagestyle</literal> command specifies how the headers and footers
-are typeset from the current page onwards.  Values for <replaceable>style</replaceable>:
+<para>Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A discussion with an example is below.  Note first that the package
+<filename>fancyhdr</filename> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers.  New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package.  See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>Values for <replaceable>style</replaceable>:
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Just a plain page number.
+</term><listitem><para>The header is empty.  The footer contains only a page number, centered.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>empty</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
+</term><listitem><para>The header and footer is empty.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>headings</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Put running headers on each page.  The document style specifies what
-goes in the headers.
+</term><listitem><para>Put running headers and footers on each page.  The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>myheadings</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Custom headers, specified via the <literal>\markboth</literal> or the
 <literal>\markright</literal> commands.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Some discussion of the motivation for &latex;’s mechanism will help you
+work with the options <literal>headings</literal> or <literal>myheadings</literal>.  The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+<literal>headings</literal>.  On this document’s left hand pages, &latex; wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section.  On its
+right hand pages &latex; wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, &latex; gets this information from the
+commands <literal>\leftmark</literal> and <literal>\rightmark</literal>.  So it is up to
+<literal>\section</literal> and <literal>\subsection</literal> to store that information there.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[twoside]{article}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+  ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+\section{Section 2}
+  ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+  ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>Suppose that the second section falls on a left page.  Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, &latex; will put
+‘<literal>Section 2</literal>’ in the left page header.  As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then &latex;
+blanks the right hand header.  If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases.  If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then &latex; will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page.  If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, …, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then &latex; puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+</para>
+<para>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has <literal>\section</literal>
+issue a command <literal>\markboth</literal>, setting <literal>\leftmark</literal>
+to ‘<literal>Section 2</literal>’ and setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to blank.
+And, &latex; has <literal>\subsection</literal> issue a command <literal>\markright</literal>,
+setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to ‘<literal>Subsection 2.1</literal>’, etc.
+</para>
 <para>Here are the descriptions of <literal>\markboth</literal> and <literal>\markright</literal>:
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markboth{<replaceable>left</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markboth{<replaceable>left</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Sets both the left and the right heading.  A “left-hand heading”
-(<replaceable>left</replaceable>) is generated by the last <literal>\markboth</literal> command before
-the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (<replaceable>right</replaceable>) is
-generated by the first <literal>\markboth</literal> or <literal>\markright</literal> that
-comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before
-the page.
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markboth{<replaceable>left-head</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markboth{<replaceable>left-head</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of <literal>headings</literal> or <literal>myheadings</literal>.  A left hand page
+heading <replaceable>left-head</replaceable> is generated by the last <literal>\markboth</literal>
+command before the end of the page.  A right hand page heading
+<replaceable>right-head</replaceable> is generated by the first <literal>\markboth</literal> or
+<literal>\markright</literal> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+</term><listitem><para>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="18.4" id="_005cthispagestyle">
-<title><literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\thispagestyle</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thispagestyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page style, this page</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\thispagestyle</literal> command works in the same manner as the
-<literal>\pagestyle</literal> command (see previous section) except that it
-changes to <replaceable>style</replaceable> for the current page only.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Works in the same way as the <literal>\pagestyle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>),
+except that it changes to <replaceable>style</replaceable> for the current page only.  This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+</para>
+<para>Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.  For
+example, this &latex; book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in in <literal>plain</literal> style, as is the default (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page
+styles</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{First chapter}
+  ...
+\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>plain</literal> style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+<literal>\thispagestyle{empty}</literal> immediately follows the second
+<literal>\chapter</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -8845,60 +11642,169 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>white space</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
+<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.  Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in
+math mode</link>.  Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
 </para>
 
 
-<sect1 label="19.1" id="_005chspace">
+<sect1 label="19.1" id="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">
+<title><literal>\enspace</literal> & <literal>\quad</literal> & <literal>\qquad</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quad</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qquad</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+</screen>
+<para>Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital M.  One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (see <link linkend="Lengths_002fem">Lengths/em</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+  \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+  \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>See <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link> for <literal>\quad</literal> and <literal>\qquad</literal>.  These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+<literal>\hspace</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.2" id="_005chspace">
 <title><literal>\hspace</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hspace</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <screen>\hspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
 \hspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Add the horizontal space given by <replaceable>length</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>length</replaceable> is a
-rubber length, that is, it may contain a <literal>plus</literal> or <literal>minus</literal>
-component, in any unit that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+<para>Insert the horizontal space <replaceable>length</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <literal>plus</literal> or
+<literal>minus</literal> component, or both (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <firstterm>glue</firstterm>.
 </para>
-<para>This command can add both positive and negative space; adding negative
-space is like backspacing.
+<para>This makes a line with ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ an inch from the right margin.
 </para>
-<para>Normally when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
-space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
-get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This
-command’s starred version <literal>\hspace*{...}</literal> puts a non-discardable
-invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
-output.
+<screen>\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space—glues and kerns—that come at a line break are discarded.  The
+<literal>*</literal>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
 </para>
-<para>This example make a one-line paragraph that puts ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ an inch
-from the right margin.
+<para>In this example
 </para>
-<screen>\noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}
+<screen>\parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+  Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+  fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+  conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+  that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
 </screen>
+<para>the 1 inch blank following ‘<literal>conceived in</literal>’ falls at the start
+of a line.  If you erase the <literal>*</literal> then &latex; discards the blank.
+</para>
+<para>Here, the <literal>\hspace</literal> separates the three graphics.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+  \includegraphics{lion.png}%   comment keeps out extra space
+  \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+  \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Because the argument to each <literal>\hspace</literal> has <literal>minus 0.25cm</literal>,
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide.  But each
+space won’t shrink more than 0.25cm (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.2" id="_005chfill">
+<sect1 label="19.3" id="_005chfill">
 <title><literal>\hfill</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hfill</primary></indexterm>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, infinite horizontal</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>infinite horizontal stretch</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produce a rubber length which has
-no natural space but can stretch horizontally as far as
-needed (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\hfill
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This creates a one-line paragraph with ‘<literal>Name:</literal>’ on the left side
+of the page and ‘<literal>Quiz One</literal>’ on the right.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+</screen>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fill</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\hfill</literal> is equivalent to <literal>\hspace{\fill}</literal>.  For
-space that does not disappear at line breaks use
-<literal>\hspace*{\fill}</literal> instead (see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>).
+<para>The <literal>\hfill</literal> command is equivalent to <literal>\hspace{\fill}</literal> and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks.  To avoid that instead use
+<literal>\hspace*{\fill}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>).
 </para>
+<para>Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+  ...
+\begin{figure}
+  \hspace*{\fill}%
+  \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+    \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+  \hspace*{\fill}%
+  \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>Note the <literal>\hspace*</literal>’s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.3" id="_005cspacefactor">
+<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005chss">
+<title><literal>\hss</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hss</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal space, stretchable</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, inserting horizontal</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hss
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a &tex; primitive).  &latex;
+authors should reach first for the <literal>\makebox</literal> command to get the
+effects of <literal>\hss</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here, the first line’s <literal>\hss</literal> makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y.  In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+</para>
+<screen>X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+</screen>
+<para>Without the <literal>\hss</literal> you get something like ‘<literal>Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20</literal>’.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.5" id="_005cspacefactor">
 <title><literal>\spacefactor</literal></title>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
@@ -8906,25 +11812,27 @@
 <screen>\spacefactor=<replaceable>integer</replaceable>
 </screen>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\spacefactor</primary></indexterm>
-<para>While &latex; is making the page, to give the lines the best appearance
-it may stretch or shrink the gaps between words.  The
-<literal>\spacefactor</literal> command (from Plain &tex;) allows you to
-change the &latex;’s default behavior.
+<para>Influence &latex;’s glue stretch and shrink behavior.  Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
 </para>
+<para>While &latex; is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words.  (This space is not a character; it is called the
+<firstterm>interword glue</firstterm>; see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>).  The <literal>\spacefactor</literal> command
+(from Plain &tex;) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+</para>
 <para>After &latex; places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
 parameter called the <firstterm>space factor</firstterm>.  If the next thing in the input
-is a space then this parameter affects how much of a horizontal gap
-&latex; will have it span.  (This gap is not a character; it is called
-<firstterm>interword glue</firstterm>.)  A larger space factor means that the glue gap
-can stretch more and shrink less.
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen.  A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less.  Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula.  But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.  Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
 </para>
-<para>Normally, the space factor is 1000; this value is in effect following
-most characters, and any non-character box or math formula.  But it is
-3000 after a period, exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000
-after a colon, 1500 after a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a
-right parenthesis or bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.
-Finally, it is 999 after a capital letter.
-</para>
 <para>If the space factor <replaceable>f</replaceable> is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
 font’s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
 3.3333 points).  Otherwise, if the space factor <replaceable>f</replaceable> is greater
@@ -8932,304 +11840,606 @@
 Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font’s
 normal stretch value is multiplied by <inlineequation><mathphrase>f /1000</mathphrase></inlineequation> and the normal
 shrink value is multiplied by <inlineequation><mathphrase>1000/f</mathphrase></inlineequation> (for Computer Modern Roman
-10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points).  In short, compared
-to a normal space, such as the space following a word ending in a
-lowercase letter, inter-sentence spacing has a fixed extra space added
-and then the space can stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much.
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points).
 </para>
-<para>The rules for how &tex; uses space factors are even more complex
-because they play two more roles.  In practice, there are two
-consequences.  First, if a period or other punctuation is followed by a
-close parenthesis or close double quote then its effect is still in
-place, that is, the following glue will have increased stretch and
-shrink.  Second, conversely, if punctuation comes after a capital letter
-then its effect is not in place so you get an ordinary space.  For how
-to adjust to this second case, for instance if an abbreviation does not
-end in a capital letter, see <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</link>.
+<para>For example, consider the period ending <literal>A man's best friend is his
+dog.</literal>  After it, &tex; puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after <literal>friend</literal>, which does not end in a period.
 </para>
+<para>The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles.  In practice, there are two consequences.  First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink).  Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space.  This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>You can only use <literal>\spacefactor</literal> in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  You can see the current value with
+<literal>\the\spacefactor</literal> or <literal>\showthe\spacefactor</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>(Comment, not really related to <literal>\spacefactor</literal>: if you get errors
+like ‘<literal>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode</literal>’, or ‘<literal>You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.</literal>’, or ‘<literal>Improper \spacefactor</literal>’
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter & \makeatother</link>.)
+</para>
 
 
 
-<sect2 label="19.3.1" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">
-<title><literal>\(SPACE)</literal> and <literal>\@</literal></title>
+<sect2 label="19.5.1" id="_005c_0040">
+<title><literal>\@</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\(SPACE)</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TAB</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NEWLINE</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>at-sign</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, sentence-ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, abbreviation-ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, spacing after</primary></indexterm>
 <anchor id="_005cAT"/><!-- old name -->
 
-<para>Here, <literal>\(SPACE)</literal> means a backslash followed by a space.  These
-commands mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either
-ending a sentence or as ending an abbreviation.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>By default, in justifying a line &latex; adjusts the space after a
-sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
-colon) more than the space between words.  See <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>. As
-described there, &latex; assumes that the period ends a sentence unless
-it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it takes that period
-for part of an abbreviation.  Note that if a sentence-ending period is
-immediately followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single
-or double quote, then the space effect of that period follows through
-that parenthesis or quote.
+<screen><replaceable>capital-letter</replaceable>\@.    
+</screen>
+<para>Treat a period as sentence-ending, where &latex; would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation.  &latex; thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence.  By default, in justifying a line
+&latex; adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
 </para>
-<para>So: if you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not
-a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
-sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space (<literal>\ </literal>) or
-a tie (<literal>~</literal>) or a <literal>\@</literal>.  Examples are <literal>Nat.\ Acad.\
-Science</literal>, and <literal>Mr.~Bean</literal>, and <literal>(manure, etc.\@) for sale</literal>
-(note that in the last the <literal>\@</literal> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+<para>This example shows the two cases to remember.
 </para>
-<para>In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that does end the sentence, then put <literal>\@</literal> before the
-period.  For example, <literal>book by the MAA\@.</literal> will have correct
-inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+<screen>The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+</screen>
+<para>The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital.  We tell &latex; that it ends the sentence by putting
+<literal>\@</literal> before it.  The first period ends the abbreviation
+‘<literal>etc.</literal>’ but not the sentence.  The backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal>,
+produces a mid-sentence space.
 </para>
-<para>For another use of <literal>\(SPACE)</literal>, see <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">\(SPACE) after control sequence</link>.
+<para>So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put <literal>\@</literal> before the period.  This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters.  For example, this
 </para>
+<screen>Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+(a book by the MAA)\@.
+</screen>
+<para>will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\@</literal> command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get ‘<literal>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode</literal>’ (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence.  For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (<literal>\ </literal>), or a tie, (<literal>~</literal>), or <literal>\@</literal>.
+Examples are <literal>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</literal>, and <literal>Mr.~Bean</literal>, and
+<literal>(manure, etc.\@) for sale</literal> (note in the last one that the
+<literal>\@</literal> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="19.3.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing">
+<sect2 label="19.5.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing">
 <title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonfrenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>This declaration (from Plain &tex;) causes &latex; to treat
-inter-sentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions, including
-English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or after other
-punctuation marks) more than the space between words.  Following this
-declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.
+<screen>\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+</screen>
+<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>); this is the default.
 </para>
-<para>Revert to the default behavior by declaring <literal>\nonfrenchspacing</literal>.
+<para>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence.  Declaring <literal>\frenchspacing</literal>
+(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
 </para>
 
 </sect2>
-<sect2 label="19.3.3" id="_005cnormalsfcodes">
+<sect2 label="19.5.3" id="_005cnormalsfcodes">
 <title><literal>\normalsfcodes</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalsfcodes</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\normalsfcodes
+</screen>
+<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default
+(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">
-<title><literal>\ </literal> after control sequence</title>
+<sect1 label="19.6" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">
+<title>Backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal></title>
 
-<para>The <literal>\ </literal> command is often used after control sequences to keep
-them from gobbling the space that follows, as in ‘<literal>\TeX\ is nice</literal>’.
-And, under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and
-<literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap> are equivalent to <literal>\ </literal>. For another use of
-<literal>\ </literal>, see also <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</link>.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\NEWLINE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\SPACE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\TAB</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Some people prefer to use <literal>{}</literal> for the same purpose, as in
-<literal>\TeX{} is nice</literal>. This has the advantage that you can always
-write it the same way, namely <literal>\TeX{}</literal>, whether it is followed
-by a space or by a punctuation mark. Compare:
+<screen>\    
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
 </para>
-<screen>\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
+<para>A blank is not a space.  When you type a blank between words, &latex;
+produces white space.  That’s different from an explicit space.  This
+illustrates.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{l}
+Three blanks:   in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>On the first line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace (it would be the same with a single blank or, for instance,
+with a blank and an tab and a blank, or a blank and a newline and a
+blank). But the second line asks for three spaces so the white area is
+wider.  Thus, the backslash-space command will create some horizontal
+space.  (But the best way to create horizontal space is with
+<literal>\hspace</literal>; See <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>The backslash-space command has two main uses.  First, it is often used
+after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
+follows, as in <literal>\TeX\ is nice</literal>.  (But the approach of using curly
+parentheses, as in <literal>\TeX{} is nice</literal>, has the advantage of still
+working if the next character is a period.)
+</para>
+<para>The second common use is that
+it mark  a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending
+a sentence, as in <literal>So says Prof.\ Smith</literal> (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and <literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap>
+are equivalent to backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal>.
+</para>
+<!-- @PkgIndex{xspace} -->
+<!-- Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace}, -->
+<!-- package do not follow the standard behavior. -->
 
-\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.7" id="_007e">
+<title><literal>~</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>~</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, hard</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, unbreakable</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>NBSP</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>before</replaceable>~<replaceable>after</replaceable>
 </screen>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>xspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The tie character, <literal>~</literal>, produces a space between <replaceable>before</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>after</replaceable> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus
+1.11111pt (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words.
+</para>
+<screen>Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+</screen>
+<para>In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce &latex;’s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book.
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<literal>Chapter~12</literal>, or <literal>Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}</literal>, or
+<literal>Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}</literal>. When cases are enumerated inline:
+<literal>(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>siunitx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>siunitx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Some individual commands, notably those defined with the <literal>xspace</literal>,
-package do not follow the standard behavior.
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between a number and its unit: <literal>$745.7.8$~watts</literal> (the
+<filename>siunitx</filename> package has a special facility for this) or
+<literal>144~eggs</literal>. This includes between a month and a date:
+<literal>October~12</literal> or <literal>12~Oct</literal>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<literal>AD~565</literal>, or <literal>2:50~pm</literal>, or <literal>Boeing~747</literal>, or
+<literal>268~Plains Road</literal>, or <literal>\$$1.4$~billion</literal>.
 </para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: <literal>equals~$n$</literal>, or
+<literal>less than~$\epsilon$</literal>, or <literal>given~$X$</literal>, or <literal>modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$</literal> (but compare <literal>is~$15$</literal> with <literal>is $15$~times
+the height</literal>). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+<literal>dimension~$d$</literal> or <literal>function~$f(x)$</literal> (but compare <literal>with
+length $l$~or more</literal>). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: <literal>of~$x$</literal>, or <literal>from $0$ to~$1$</literal>, or <literal>in
+common with~$m$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between symbols in series: <literal>$1$,~$2$, or~$3$</literal> or <literal>$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between a person’s forenames and between multiple surnames:
+<literal>Donald~E. Knuth</literal>, or <literal>Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo</literal>, or
+<literal>Charles~XII</literal> (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do <literal>Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Before a dash: <literal>pages 12~--14</literal> or <literal>it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.5" id="_005cthinspace">
-<title><literal>\thinspace</literal>: Insert 1/6em</title>
+<sect1 label="19.8" id="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">
+<title><literal>\thinspace</literal> & <literal>\negthinspace</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, thin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space, negative</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, negative thin</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para><literal>\thinspace</literal> produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that
-is 1/6 of an em.  This is the proper space to use between nested
-quotes, as in ’”.<!-- Abuse @dmn, which is a thin space in Texinfo. -->
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
+<screen>\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and
+-1/6em.  These are the text mode equivalents of <literal>\,</literal> and
+<literal>\!</literal> (see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace">Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</link>).  You can use
+<literal>\,</literal> as a synonym for <literal>\thinspace</literal> in text mode.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\negthinspace</literal> command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces.  One common use of <literal>\thinspace</literal> is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+</para>
+<screen>Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+</screen>
+<para>Another use is that some style guides call for a <literal>\thinspace</literal>
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already).  Still another
+use is between initials, as in <literal>D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.6" id="_005c_002f">
-<title><literal>\/</literal>: Insert italic correction</title>
+<sect1 label="19.9" id="_005c_002f">
+<title><literal>\/</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\/</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>italic correction</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\/</literal> command produces an <firstterm>italic correction</firstterm>.  This is a
-small space defined by the font designer for a given character,
-to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows.  The italic
-<emphasis>f</emphasis> character typically has a large italic correction value.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>If the following character is a period or comma, it’s not necessary to
-insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
-very small height.  However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
-normal letters, it can help. Compare
-<emphasis>f: f;</emphasis> (in the &tex; output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated)
-with <emphasis>f: f;</emphasis>.
+<screen><replaceable>before-character</replaceable>\/<replaceable>after-character</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Insert an <firstterm>italic correction</firstterm>, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use <literal>\/</literal>, &latex; takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
 </para>
-<para>When changing fonts with commands such as <literal>\textit{italic
-text}</literal> or <literal>{\itshape italic text}</literal>, &latex; will
-automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font
-styles</link>).
+<para>Here, were it not for the <literal>\/</literal>, the <replaceable>before-character</replaceable>
+italic f would hit the <replaceable>after-character</replaceable> roman H
 </para>
-<para>Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
-correction.  Compare
-pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the ‘f’)
-with pdf&tex;.
+<screen>\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+</screen>
+<para>because the italic letter leans far to the right.
 </para>
+<para>If <replaceable>after-character</replaceable> is a period or comma then don’t insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height.  However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+</para>
+<para>When you use commands such as <literal>\textit</literal> or <literal>\itshape</literal> to
+change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Roman characters can also have an italic correction.  An example is in
+the name <literal>pdf\/\TeX</literal>.
+</para>
 <para>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
 in a different way.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.7" id="_005chrulefill-_005cdotfill">
-<title><literal>\hrulefill \dotfill</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="19.10" id="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">
+<title><literal>\hrulefill</literal> & <literal>\dotfill</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hrulefill</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotfill</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Produce an infinite rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) filled with a
-horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
-space.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that is
-left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled with
-evenly spaced dots.
+<screen>\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) that
+&latex; fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
 </para>
-<screen>\noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge
+<para>This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+</para>
+<screen>Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
 </screen>
+<para>This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+</screen>
 <para>To make the rule or dots go to the line’s end use <literal>\null</literal> at the
 start or end.  
 </para>
 <para>To change the rule’s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
-with <literal>\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
-1pt\hfill\kern\z@}</literal>, which changes the default thickness of
-0.4pt to 1pt.  Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
-<literal>\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@
-1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}</literal>, which changes the default
-length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+here
 </para>
-
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.8" id="_005caddvspace">
-<title><literal>\addvspace</literal></title>
-
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addvspace</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, inserting vertical</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para><literal>\addvspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+</screen>
+<para>which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
 </para>
-<para>Add a vertical space of height <replaceable>length</replaceable>, which is a rubber length
-(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  However, if vertical space has already been added to
-the same point in the output by a previous <literal>\addvspace</literal> command
-then this command will not add more space than what is needed to make
-the natural length of the total vertical space equal to <replaceable>length</replaceable>.
+<screen>\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+  \leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+</screen>
+<para>which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
 </para>
-<para>Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end with <literal>\addvspace{...}</literal>
-so that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space,
-not two.
+<para>This example produces a line for a signature.
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{4cm}
+  \centering
+  \hrulefill\\
+  Signed
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>The line is 4cm long.
 </para>
-<para>The error ‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>’ means that
-you were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
-change that is to precede this command with a <literal>\par</literal> command.
-</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.9" id="_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">
-<title><literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="19.11" id="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">
+<title><literal>\bigskip</literal> & <literal>\medskip</literal> & <literal>\smallskip</literal></title>
 
-<para>These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the
-document class.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigskip</literal>
+<screen>\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from <emphasis>The Golden Ocean</emphasis> by
+O’Brian).
+</para>
+<screen>Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+</screen>
+<para>Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="bigskip"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigskip</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskipamount</primary></indexterm>
 <para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about one line
-space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <literal>book</literal> and
-<literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</literal>).
+space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the <literal>book</literal> and
+<literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\medskip</literal>
+<anchor id="medskip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\medskip</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskipamount</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\medskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about half of
-a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <literal>book</literal>
-and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</literal>).
+<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\medskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the <literal>book</literal>
+and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallskip</literal>
+<anchor id="smallskip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallskip</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskipamount</primary></indexterm>
 <para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about a
-quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
-<literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>3pt plus 1pt minus
-1pt</literal>).
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the
+<literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Because each command is a <literal>\vspace</literal>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it.  So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <literal>\bigbreak</literal>, <literal>\medbreak</literal>, and <literal>\smallbreak</literal>
+are similar but also suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to
+put a page break (see <link linkend="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</link>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.10" id="_005cvfill">
-<title><literal>\vfill</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="19.12" id="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">
+<title><literal>\bigbreak</literal> & <literal>\medbreak</literal> & <literal>\smallbreak</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vfill</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page.  (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</link>, for more.  These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with <literal>\addvspace</literal>).  In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+</para>
+<screen>abc\bigbreak def ghi
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, infinite vertical</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>infinite vertical stretch</primary></indexterm>
+jkl mno pqr
+</screen>
+<para>will output three paragraphs, the first ending in ‘<literal>abc</literal>’ and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with ‘<literal>def</literal>’.
+</para>
 
-<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length
-(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far
-as needed.
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.13" id="_005cstrut">
+<title><literal>\strut</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\strut</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>strut</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>It is often used in the same way as <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal>, except that
-<literal>\vfill</literal> ends the current paragraph, whereas
-<literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal> adds the infinite vertical space below its line
-irrespective of the paragraph structure.  In both cases that space will
-disappear at a page boundary; to circumvent this see <link linkend="_005cvspace">\vspace</link>.
+<screen>\strut
+</screen>
+<para>Ensure that the current line has height at least <literal>0.7\baselineskip</literal>
+and depth at least <literal>0.3\baselineskip</literal>.  Essentially, &latex;
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+<literal>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005crule">\rule</link>).
+The <literal>\baselineskip</literal> changes with the current font and fontsize.
 </para>
-<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
-the text ‘<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>’ and the third ‘<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>’ is exactly
-halfway between them.
-</para> 
-<screen>\begin{document}
-Lost Dog!
-\vfill
-Lost Dog!
-\vfill
-Lost Dog!
-\end{document}
+<para>In this example the <literal>\strut</literal> keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
 </screen>
+<para>This example has four lists.  In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2.
+The second list fixes that with a <literal>\strut</literal> at the end of its first
+item’s second line.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+  \item test
+  \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+  \item test
+  \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+</screen>
+<para>The final two lists use <literal>fbox</literal> to show what’s happening.  The third
+list’s <literal>\parbox</literal> goes only to the bottom of its second ‘<literal>test</literal>’,
+which happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline.
+The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra
+below-baseline space.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+<filename>TikZ</filename> or <filename>Asymptote</filename>.  For instance, you may have a command
+such as <literal>\graphnode{<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>}</literal> that fits a circle around
+<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>.  However, unless you are careful the <replaceable>node-name</replaceable>’s
+‘<literal>x</literal>’ and ‘<literal>y</literal>’ will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes.  A careful <literal>\graphnode</literal> might
+insert a <literal>\strut</literal>, then <replaceable>node-name</replaceable>, and then draw the circle.
+</para>
+<para>The general approach of using a zero width <literal>\rule</literal> is useful in
+many circumstances.  In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the <literal>\hline</literal>.  Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rl}
+  \textsc{Integral}   &\textsc{Value}           \\
+  \hline
+  $\int_0^x t\, dt$   &$x^2/2$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\  
+  $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won’t work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like <literal>\\[2.5ex]</literal>
+will put the room between the header line and the <literal>\hline</literal>, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.11" id="_005cvspace">
-<title><literal>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="19.14" id="_005cvspace">
+<title><literal>\vspace</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vspace</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, vertical</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis, one of these two:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <screen>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
 \vspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Add the vertical space <replaceable>length</replaceable>.  This can be negative or positive,
-and is a rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+<para>Add the vertical space <replaceable>length</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can be positive,
+negative, or zero.  It is a rubber length—it may contain a <literal>plus</literal>
+or <literal>minus</literal> component (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
 </para>
-<para>&latex; removes the vertical space from <literal>\vspace</literal> at a page
-break, that is, at the top or bottom of a page.  The starred version
-<literal>\vspace*{...}</literal> causes the space to stay.
+<para>This puts space between the two paragraphs.
 </para>
-<para>If <literal>\vspace</literal> is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
-horizontal mode), the space is inserted <emphasis>after</emphasis> the line with
-the <literal>\vspace</literal> command.  A new paragraph is not started.
+<screen>And I slept.
+
+\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+The new day dawned cold.
+</screen>
+<para>(See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</link> for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
 </para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable.  More
+precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the
+<literal>*</literal>-version causes the space to stay.  This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+</para>
+<screen>Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+</screen>
+<para>That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+</para>
+<para>If you use <literal>\vspace</literal> in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the <literal>\vspace</literal> command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+<literal>\vspace</literal> command.
+</para>
 <para>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
 the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
 </para>
@@ -9243,222 +12453,548 @@
 </screen>
 
 </sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.15" id="_005cvfill">
+<title><literal>\vfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, infinite vertical</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>infinite vertical stretch</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\vfill
+</screen>
+<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in the same way as <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal>, except that
+<literal>\vfill</literal> ends the current paragraph whereas <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal>
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure.  In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in <link linkend="_005cvspace">\vspace</link>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text ‘<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>’ and the second ‘<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>’ is exactly
+halfway between them.
+</para> 
+<screen>\begin{document}
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!  % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.16" id="_005caddvspace">
+<title><literal>\addvspace</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addvspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, inserting vertical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addvspace{<replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add a vertical space of <replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>.  However, if there are two or
+more <literal>\addvspace</literal>’s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+<replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>’s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).  The <replaceable>vert-length</replaceable> is a rubber length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates.  The <literal>picture</literal> draws a scale.  In a
+standard &latex; article the length <literal>\baselineskip</literal> is 12pt.
+The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the
+<literal>\baselineskip</literal> and the 10pt from the first <literal>addvspace</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{color}
+\begin{document}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+\noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+\end{picture}%
+\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}% 
+\par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Now uncomment the second <literal>\addvspace</literal>.  It does not make the gap
+20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
+and 20pt.  So <literal>\addvspace</literal> in a sense does the opposite of
+its name — it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a
+<literal>theorem</literal> environment begins and ends with <literal>\addvspace</literal> so
+that two consecutive <literal>theorem</literal>’s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+</para>
+<para>A error ‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>’ pointing to an
+<literal>\addvspace</literal> means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede <literal>\addvspace</literal>
+with a <literal>\par</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cpar">\par</link>), as in the above example.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="20" id="Boxes">
 <title>Boxes</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>boxes</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>All the predefined length parameters (see <link linkend="Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</link>) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
+<para>At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page.  So these commands are central.
 </para>
+<para>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <filename>adjustbox</filename>.
+</para>
 
 
-<sect1 label="20.1" id="_005cmbox">
-<title><literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal></title>
+<sect1 label="20.1" id="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">
+<title><literal>\mbox</literal> & <literal>\makebox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>make a box</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, preventing</primary></indexterm>
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, preventing</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\mbox</literal> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
-text created by its argument.  The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is not broken into
-lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
+<screen>\mbox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a box, a container for material.  The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is is typeset in
+LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so it is not broken into lines.  The
+<literal>\mbox</literal> command is robust, while <literal>\makebox</literal> is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Because <literal>text</literal> is not broken into lines, you can use <literal>\mbox</literal>
+to prevent hyphenation.  In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate
+the table name, ‘<literal>T-4</literal>’.
+</para>
+<screen>See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+</screen>
+<para>The first two command versions, <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal>, are
+roughly equivalent.  They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>.  (They are like plain &tex;’s <literal>\hbox</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>In the third version the optional argument <replaceable>width</replaceable> specifies the
+width of the box.  Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box.  For one thing, <replaceable>text</replaceable> can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+</screen>
+<para>with ‘<literal>Chapter Exam</literal>’ centered.  But <replaceable>text</replaceable> can also be too wide
+for <replaceable>width</replaceable>.  See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+</para>
+<anchor id="mbox-makebox-depth"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-height"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-width"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-totalheight"/><para>In the <replaceable>width</replaceable> argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that &latex; gets on typesetting
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>: <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>, <literal>\width</literal>,
+<literal>\totalheight</literal> (this is the box’s height plus its depth).  For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+</screen>
+<para>For the fourth command version the optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable>
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is centered (default).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is flush left.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Flush right.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stretch the interword space in <replaceable>text</replaceable> across the entire <replaceable>width</replaceable>.
+The <replaceable>text</replaceable> must contain stretchable space for this to work.  For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+<literal>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil}</literal>
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>A common use of <literal>\makebox</literal> is to make zero-width text boxes.  This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+\pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
 
+\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+</screen>
+<para><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The right edge of the output ‘<literal>10 points </literal>’ (note the ending space)
+will be just before the ‘<literal>What</literal>’ (note the space after
+‘<literal>points</literal>’).  You can use <literal>\makebox</literal> similarly when making
+graphics, such as in <filename>TikZ</filename> or <filename>Asymptote</filename>, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+</para>
+<para>For boxes with frames see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox & \framebox</link>. For colors
+see <link linkend="Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</link>.
+</para>
+<para>There is a related version of <literal>\makebox</literal> that is used within the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, where the length is given in terms of
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you put a double-backslash into <replaceable>text</replaceable> then &latex; will not
+give you a new line; for instance <literal>\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}</literal>
+outputs ‘<literal>abc defghi</literal>’ while <literal>\makebox{abc def \par ghi}</literal>
+outputs ‘<literal>abc def ghi</literal>’, but neither go to a second line.  To get
+multiple lines see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link> and <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.2" id="_005cfbox-and-_005cframebox">
-<title><literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="20.2" id="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">
+<title><literal>\fbox</literal> & <literal>\framebox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fbox</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <screen>\fbox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 \framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> commands are like <literal>\mbox</literal>,
-except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
+<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal> except
+for the frame (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>). The <literal>\fbox</literal> command is
+robust, the <literal>\framebox</literal> command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para>In addition, the <literal>\framebox</literal> command allows for explicit
-specification of the box width with the optional <replaceable>width</replaceable> argument
-(a dimension), and positioning with the optional <replaceable>position</replaceable>
-argument. <!-- xxref -->
+<screen>\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Both commands produce a rule of thickness <literal>\fboxrule</literal> (default
-<literal>0.4pt</literal>), and leave a space of <literal>\fboxsep</literal> (default <literal>3pt</literal>)
-between the rule and the contents of the box.
+<para>The first two command invocations, <literal>\fbox{...}</literal> and
+<literal>\framebox{...}</literal>, are roughly the same.  As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as <replaceable>width</replaceable> and the position of the text inside that box as
+<replaceable>position</replaceable>.  See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link> for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide.
 </para>
-<para>See <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>, for the <literal>\framebox</literal> command in the
-<literal>picture</literal> environment.
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> inserts a vertical height of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>).
 </para>
-
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.3" id="lrbox">
-<title><literal>lrbox</literal></title>
-
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lrbox</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>These parameters determine the frame layout.
 </para>
-<screen>\begin{lrbox}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>} 
-  <replaceable>text </replaceable>
-\end{lrbox}
+<variablelist><anchor id="fbox-framebox-fboxrule"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm><literal>\fboxrule</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame, line width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame rule width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box.  The default is
+0.2pt.  Change it with a command such as
+<literal>\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>).
+</para>
+<anchor id="fbox-framebox-fboxsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\fboxsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame, separation from contents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt.
+Change it with a command such as <literal>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>).  Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+</para>
+<screen>{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+   \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
 </screen>
-<para>This is the environment form of <link linkend="_005csbox"><literal>\sbox</literal></link>.
+<para>The extra curly braces keep the effect of the <literal>\setlength</literal> local.
 </para>
-<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> inside the environment is saved in the box <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>,
-which must have been declared with <literal>\newsavebox</literal>.
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>As with <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal>, &latex; will not break lines
+in <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  But this example has &latex; break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
 </para>
-
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.4" id="_005cmakebox">
-<title><literal>\makebox</literal></title>
-
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>Synopsis:
-</para>
-<screen>\makebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\framebox{%
+  \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+    My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+    And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+  \end{minipage}}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\makebox</literal> command creates a box just wide enough to contain
-the <replaceable>text</replaceable> specified.  The width of the box can be overridden by the
-optional <replaceable>width</replaceable> argument.  The position of the text within the box
-is determined by the optional <replaceable>position</replaceable> argument, which may take
-the following values:
+<para>See <link linkend="Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</link> for colors other than black and white.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Centered (default).
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Flush left.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Flush right.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Stretch (justify) across entire <replaceable>width</replaceable>; <replaceable>text</replaceable> must contain
-stretchable space for this to work.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para><literal>\makebox</literal> is also used within the <literal>picture</literal> environment
-see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link>.
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on <literal>picture</literal>’s <literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox
+(picture)</link>).
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.5" id="_005cparbox">
+<sect1 label="20.3" id="_005cparbox">
 <title><literal>\parbox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph, in a box</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\parbox{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\parbox</literal> command produces a box whose contents are created
-in <firstterm>paragraph mode</firstterm>.  It should be used to make a box small
-pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside.  In particular, you
-shouldn’t use any paragraph-making environments inside a
-<literal>\parbox</literal> argument.  For larger pieces of text, including ones
-containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a
-<literal>minipage</literal> environment (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+<para>Produce a box of text that is <replaceable>width</replaceable> wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph.  This command is
+fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
-<para><literal>\parbox</literal> has two mandatory arguments:
+<screen>\begin{picture}(0,0)
+  ...
+  \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+                         this semilog paper, the relationship is
+                         exponential.}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>contents</replaceable> are processed in a text mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so
+&latex; will break lines to make a paragraph.  But it won’t make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a <literal>minipage</literal> environment
+(see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>width</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>the width of the parbox;
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>the text that goes inside the parbox.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>By default &latex; will position vertically a parbox so its center
-lines up with the center of the surrounding text line.  When the
-optional <replaceable>position</replaceable> argument is present and equal either to ‘<literal>t</literal>’
-or ‘<literal>b</literal>’, this allows you respectively to align either the top or
-bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You
-may also specify ‘<literal>m</literal>’ for <replaceable>position</replaceable> to get the default
-behaviour.
+<para>The options for <literal>\parbox</literal> (except for <replaceable>contents</replaceable>) are the same
+as those for <literal>minipage</literal>.  For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link> for a complete description.
 </para>
-<para>The optional <replaceable>height</replaceable> argument overrides the natural height of the box.
+<para>There are two required arguments.  The <replaceable>width</replaceable> is a rigid length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  It sets the width of the box into which &latex;
+typesets <replaceable>contents</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>contents</replaceable> is the text that is placed
+in that box.  It should not have any paragraph-making components.
 </para>
-<para>The <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> argument controls the placement of the text inside
-the box, as follows; if it is not specified, <replaceable>position</replaceable> is used.
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <replaceable>position</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and
+<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>.  The <replaceable>position</replaceable> gives the vertical alignment of the
+<literal>parbox</literal> with respect to the surrounding material.  The possible
+values are <literal>c</literal> or <literal>m</literal> to make the vertical center of the
+<literal>parbox</literal> lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or <literal>t</literal> to match the top line of the <literal>parbox</literal> with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or <literal>b</literal> to match the
+bottom line.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>text is placed at the top of the box.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>text is centered in the box.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space
-for this to work.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>height</replaceable> overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> controls the placement of
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> inside the <literal>parbox</literal>. Its default is the value of
+<replaceable>position</replaceable>.  Its possible values are: <literal>t</literal> to put the
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> at the top of the box, <literal>c</literal> to put it in the vertical
+center, <literal>b</literal> to put it at the bottom of the box, and <literal>s</literal> to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+</para>
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.6" id="_005craisebox">
+<sect1 label="20.4" id="_005craisebox">
 <title><literal>\raisebox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raisebox</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>depth</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>depth</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\raisebox</literal> command raises or lowers <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  The first
-mandatory argument specifies how high <replaceable>text</replaceable> is to be raised (or
-lowered if it is a negative amount).  <replaceable>text</replaceable> itself is processed
-in LR mode.
+<para>Raise or lower <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
+<para>This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/278631/121234 -->
+<screen>\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+$f\restricted{A}$
+</screen>
+<para>The first mandatory argument <replaceable>distance</replaceable> specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This is a rigid length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  If it is negative then it lowers <replaceable>text</replaceable>.  The
+<replaceable>text</replaceable> is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
 <para>The optional arguments <replaceable>height</replaceable> and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> are dimensions.  If
-they are specified, &latex; treats <replaceable>text</replaceable> as extending a certain
-distance above the baseline (<replaceable>height</replaceable>) or below (<replaceable>depth</replaceable>),
-ignoring its natural height and depth.
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box &latex; gets by typesetting <replaceable>text</replaceable>.
 </para>
+<anchor id="raisebox-depth"/><anchor id="raisebox-height"/><anchor id="raisebox-width"/><anchor id="raisebox-totalheight"/><para>In the arguments <replaceable>distance</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+&latex; gets on typesetting <replaceable>text</replaceable>: <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>,
+<literal>\width</literal>, <literal>\totalheight</literal> (this is the box’s height plus its
+depth).
+</para>
+<para>This will align two graphics on their top (see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>).
+</para>
+<!-- credit: FAQ https://texfaq.org/FAQ-topgraph -->
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc}  % in preamble
+   ...
+\begin{center}
+  \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+    \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+  \qquad
+  \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+    \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>The first <literal>\height</literal> is the height of <filename>lion.png</filename> while the
+second is the height of <filename>meta.png</filename>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.7" id="_005csavebox">
-<title><literal>\savebox</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="20.5" id="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">
+<title><literal>\sbox</literal> & <literal>\savebox</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\savebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, save</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\savebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\sbox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>This command typeset <replaceable>text</replaceable> in a box just as with <literal>\makebox</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cmakebox">\makebox</link>), except that instead of printing the resulting box,
-it saves it in the box labeled <replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>, which must have been
-declared with <literal>\newsavebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).
+<para>Typeset <replaceable>text</replaceable> just as with <literal>\makebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &
+\makebox</link>) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>.  The bin name <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> begins
+with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.  You must have previously allocated the bin
+<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> with <literal>\newsavebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).The
+<literal>\sbox</literal> command is robust while <literal>\savebox</literal> is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
+<para>This creates and uses a bin.
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\fullname}
+\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+  ...
+\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
+</screen>
+<para>One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a <literal>\newcommand</literal> is
+efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations,
+<literal>\sbox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> and
+<literal>\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as <replaceable>width</replaceable>, and the position of the text inside that
+box as <replaceable>position</replaceable>.  See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link> for the full
+description.
+</para>
+<para>In the <literal>\sbox</literal> and <literal>\savebox</literal> commands the <replaceable>text</replaceable> is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  If
+you use these then &latex; doesn’t give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter <literal>\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}</literal> and
+<literal>\usebox{\newbin}</literal> then you get ‘<literal>testtest</literal>’, while if you
+enter <literal>\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}</literal> and
+<literal>\usebox{\newbin}</literal> then you get ‘<literal>test test</literal>’, but no error or
+warning.  To fix this use a <literal>\parbox</literal> or <literal>minipage</literal> as here.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234 -->
+<screen>\savebox{\abin}{%
+  \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+    \begin{enumerate}
+      \item First item
+      \item Second item
+    \end{enumerate}
+  \end{minipage}}
+  ...
+\usebox{\abin}
+</screen>
+<para>As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin’s contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header.  &latex; only typesets it once.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx}  % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox{\sealbin}
+\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+  \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+     \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+       \begin{tabular}{c}
+          \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+          Office of the President
+       \end{tabular}}
+  \end{picture}%
+}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+</para>
+<para>If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+‘<literal>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.8" id="_005csbox">
-<title><literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="20.6" id="lrbox">
+<title><literal>lrbox</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lrbox</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\begin{lrbox}{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>} 
+  <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{lrbox}
 </screen>
-<para><literal>\sbox</literal> types <replaceable>text</replaceable> in a box just as with <literal>\mbox</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cmbox">\mbox</link>) except that instead of the resulting box being
-included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled
-<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>.  <replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable> must have been previously declared with
-<literal>\newsavebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).
+<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> inside the environment is saved in the bin
+<literal><replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable></literal>.  The <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with <literal>\newsavebox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).  This is the environment form of the <literal>\sbox</literal>
+and <literal>\savebox</literal> commands, and is equivalent to them. See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &
+\savebox</link> for the full information.
 </para>
+<para>In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+<literal>tabular</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\jhbin}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+  \begin{tabular}{c}
+    \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+    Jim Hef{}feron
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{lrbox}    
+  ...
+\usebox{\jhbin}
+</screen>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="20.9" id="_005cusebox">
-<title><literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="20.7" id="_005cusebox">
+<title><literal>\usebox</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, use saved box</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}
+<screen>\usebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para><literal>\usebox</literal> produces the box most recently saved in the bin
-<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable> by a <literal>\savebox</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005csavebox">\savebox</link>).
+<para>Produce the box most recently saved in the bin <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> by the
+commands <literal>\sbox</literal> or <literal>\savebox</literal>, or the <literal>lrbox</literal>
+environment. See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox & \savebox</link> for more information and examples.
+(Note that <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> starts with a backslash.)  This command is
+robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -9483,7 +13019,7 @@
 
 
 <sect1 label="21.1" id="Color-package-options">
-<title>Color package options</title>
+<title><literal>color</literal> package options</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>color package options</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, color package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9547,25 +13083,25 @@
 such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
 and yellow makes black.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>cmyk</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="color-models-cmyk"/><varlistentry><term><literal>cmyk</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
 inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
 magenta, and the others are yellow and black.  A number value of 0 means
 minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity.  This model is often
 used in color printing.  It is a subtractive model.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>gray</literal>
+<anchor id="color-models-gray"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>gray</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive.  The colors are shades
 of grey.  The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>rgb</literal>
+<anchor id="color-models-rgb"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>rgb</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
 inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
 second is green, and the third the blue.  A number value of 0 means that
 none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
 This is an additive model.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>RGB</literal>
+<anchor id="color-models-RGB"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>RGB</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>(<filename>pdftex</filename>, <filename>xetex</filename>, <filename>luatex</filename> drivers) A comma-separated
 list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive.  This model is a
 convenience for using <literal>rgb</literal> since outside of &latex; colors are
@@ -9573,7 +13109,7 @@
 The values entered here are converted to the <literal>rgb</literal> model by
 dividing by 255.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>named</literal>
+<anchor id="color-models-named"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>named</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘<literal>PrussianBlue</literal>’.  The list of
 names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘<literal>black</literal>’,
 ‘<literal>blue</literal>’, ‘<literal>cyan</literal>’, ‘<literal>green</literal>’, ‘<literal>magenta</literal>’, ‘<literal>red</literal>’,
@@ -9603,10 +13139,13 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\definecolor{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>model</replaceable>}{<replaceable>specification</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Give the name <replaceable>name</replaceable> to the color.  For example, after
-<literal>\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}</literal> you can use that
-color name with <literal>Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</literal>.
+<para>Give the name <replaceable>name</replaceable> to the color.  For example, after this
 </para>
+<screen>\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+</screen>
+<para>you can use that color name with <literal>Hi ho,
+\textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</literal>.
+</para>
 <para>This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
 not be misleading.
 </para>
@@ -9636,7 +13175,8 @@
 </screen>
 <para>The affected text gets the color.  This line
 </para>
-<screen>\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+<screen>\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
 </screen>
 <para>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black.  You
 can use a color declared with <literal>\definecolor</literal> in exactly the same
@@ -9661,10 +13201,13 @@
   \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
 </screen>
-<para>You can use color in equations.  A document might have
-<literal>\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}</literal> in the
-preamble, and then contain this equation.
+<para>You can use color in equations.  A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
 </para>
+<screen>\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+</screen>
+<para>and then contain this equation.
+</para>
 <screen>\begin{equation}
   \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
 \end{equation}
@@ -9673,7 +13216,8 @@
 but sometimes you want a one-off.  Those are the second forms in the
 synopses.
 </para>
-<screen>Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team
+<screen>Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
 </screen>
 <para>The format of <replaceable>color specification </replaceable> depends on the color model
 (see <link linkend="Color-models">Color models</link>).  For instance, while <literal>rgb</literal> takes three
@@ -9701,12 +13245,12 @@
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
 <screen>\colorbox{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{...}
-\colorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>box background color specification</replaceable>}{...}
+\colorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
 </screen>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <screen>\fcolorbox{<replaceable>frame color</replaceable>}{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
-\fcolorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>frame color specification</replaceable>}{<replaceable>box background color specification</replaceable>}{...}
+\fcolorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>frame color</replaceable>}{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
 </screen>
 <para>Make a box with the stated background color.  The <literal>\fcolorbox</literal>
 command puts a frame around the box.  For instance this
@@ -9721,7 +13265,7 @@
 <screen>\colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
 </screen>
 <para>The <literal>\fcolorbox</literal> commands use the same parameters as <literal>\fbox</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cfbox-and-_005cframebox">\fbox and \framebox</link>), <literal>\fboxrule</literal> and <literal>\fboxsep</literal>, to
+(see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox & \framebox</link>), <literal>\fboxrule</literal> and <literal>\fboxsep</literal>, to
 set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
 and the surrounding rule.  &latex;’s defaults are <literal>0.4pt</literal> and
 <literal>3pt</literal>, respectively.
@@ -9804,12 +13348,12 @@
 commands of this chapter.  Two that use a programming language are
 Asymptote and MetaPost.  One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
 Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
-see their documentation.
+see their documentation on CTAN.
 </para>
 
 
 <sect1 label="22.1" id="Graphics-package-options">
-<title>Graphics package options</title>
+<title><literal>graphics</literal> package options</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package options</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, graphics package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9883,7 +13427,7 @@
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="22.2" id="Graphics-package-configuration">
-<title>Graphics package configuration</title>
+<title><literal>graphics</literal> package configuration</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9898,7 +13442,7 @@
 the graphic.
 </para>
 <para>The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
-dependent.  In this document we cover Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+dependent.  In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
 those systems are typically configured.  For other situations consult
 the documentation in <filename>grfguide.pdf</filename>, or the &latex; source, or your
 &tex; distribution’s documentation.
@@ -9962,9 +13506,9 @@
 portability by adjusting your &tex; system settings configuration file
 parameter <literal>TEXINPUTS</literal>; see the documentation of your system.)
 </para>
-<para>You can use <literal>\graphicspath</literal> in the preamble or in the document
-body.  You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value
-with <literal>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput at path}\makeatother</literal>.
+<para>You can use <literal>\graphicspath</literal> anywhere in the document.  You can use
+it more than once.  Show its value with
+<literal>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput at path}\makeatother</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>The directories are taken with respect to the base file.  That is,
 suppose that you are working on a document based on <filename>book/book.tex</filename>
@@ -10004,17 +13548,18 @@
 not found</literal>’.  Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
 extensions.
 </para>
-<para>Because Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+<para>Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
 file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms.  The Windows
 platform is not case sensitive.
 </para>
 <para>You are not required to include <literal>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</literal> in
 your document; the printer driver has a sensible default.  For example,
-the most recent <filename>pdftex.def</filename> has the extension list
-‘<literal><literal>.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2</literal></literal>’.
+the most recent <filename>pdftex.def</filename> has this extension list.
 </para>
-<para>You can use this command in the preamble or in the document body.  You
-can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
+<screen>.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+</screen>
+<para>You can use this command anywhere in the document.  You can use it more
+than once.  Show its value with
 <literal>\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin at extensions}\makeatother</literal>.
 </para>
 
@@ -10155,8 +13700,8 @@
 as with <literal>\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}</literal>.  To specify a list
 of locations to search for the file, see <link linkend="_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</link>.
 </para>
-<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes, as with
-<literal>\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}</literal>.
+<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is <literal>\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>The <literal>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}</literal> command decides on the
 type of graphic by splitting <replaceable>filename</replaceable> on the first dot.  You can
@@ -10191,14 +13736,13 @@
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
-  \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix}  % if you want a caption  
+  \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
 \end{center}
 </screen>
 <para>This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
 text, with the two vertically centered.
 </para>
-<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begingroup
-                                \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\parbox{\wd0}{\box0}\endgroup}
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
@@ -10246,7 +13790,7 @@
 page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
 graphic.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>width</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-width"/><varlistentry><term><literal>width</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width.  An example
 is <literal>\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}</literal>.  You can use the standard
 &tex; dimensions (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>) and also convenient is
@@ -10257,37 +13801,38 @@
 <literal>\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}</literal>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>height</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You can
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-height"/><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You can
 use the standard &tex; dimensions (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>), and also
 convenient are <literal>\pageheight</literal> and <literal>\textheight</literal> (see <link linkend="Page-layout-parameters">Page
-layout parameters</link>).  For instance,
+layout parameters</link>).  For instance, the command
 <literal>\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}</literal> will make the
-graphic be a quarter of the height of the text area.
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>totalheight</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-totalheght"/><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
 depth.  This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
 instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
 but a large depth.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>keepaspectratio</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as with
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</literal> and you give as
-options both <literal>width</literal> and <literal>height</literal> (or <literal>totalheight</literal>),
-then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as possible without
-distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither is the graphic
-wider than <literal>width</literal> nor taller than <literal>height</literal> (or
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-keepaspectratio"/><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<screen><literal>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</literal>
+</screen>
+<para>and you give as options both <literal>width</literal> and <literal>height</literal> (or
+<literal>totalheight</literal>), then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than <literal>width</literal> nor taller than <literal>height</literal> (or
 <literal>totalheight</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>scale</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic.  Specifying
-<literal>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</literal> makes the graphic twice its
-nominal size.  This number may be any value; a number between 1
-and 0 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect
-it.
+</term><listitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic.  To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter <literal>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</literal>.  This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>angle</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Rotate the picture.  The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+</term><listitem><para>Rotate the graphic.  The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
 The graphic is rotated about its <literal>origin</literal>; see that option.  For a
 complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
 see <link linkend="_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</link>.
@@ -10296,9 +13841,9 @@
 </term><listitem><para>The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.  Possible
 values are any string containing one or two of: <literal>l</literal> for left,
 <literal>r</literal> for right, <literal>b</literal> for bottom, <literal>c</literal> for center, <literal>t</literal>
-for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline.  Thus,
+for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline.  Thus, entering the command
 <literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</literal> will turn the
-picture upside down from the center, while
+picture upside down about that picture’s center, while the command
 <literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</literal> will turn its
 picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character <literal>c</literal>
 gives the horizontal center in <literal>bc</literal> or <literal>tc</literal>, but gives the
@@ -10309,7 +13854,7 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>These are lesser-used options.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>viewport</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-viewport"/><varlistentry><term><literal>viewport</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show.  Takes four arguments,
 separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with
 <literal>\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</literal>.  The
@@ -10317,7 +13862,7 @@
 relative to the origin specified by the bounding box.  See also the
 <literal>trim</literal> option.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>trim</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-trim"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>trim</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Gives parts of the graphic to not show.  Takes four arguments, separated
 by spaces, that are given in &tex; dimensions, as with
 <literal>\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}</literal>.
@@ -10326,18 +13871,20 @@
 the bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the
 top.  See also the <literal>viewport</literal> option.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>clip</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as with
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}</literal>, then the graphic is
-cropped to the bounding box.  You can get this effect by instead using
-the starred form of the command, as
+<anchor id="includegraphics-clip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>clip</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box.  This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
 <literal>\includegraphics*[...]{...}</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>page</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-page"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>page</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file.  The default is
 <literal>page=1</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pagebox</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-pagebox"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pagebox</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
 <literal>mediabox</literal>, <literal>cropbox</literal>, <literal>bleedbox</literal>, <literal>trimbox</literal>, or
 <literal>artbox</literal>.  PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript
@@ -10351,23 +13898,26 @@
 present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
 driver-defined order of preference.  MediaBox is always present.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>interpolate</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-interpolate"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>interpolate</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.  Can be
-set with <literal>interpolate=true</literal> or just specified as with
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}</literal>.
+set with <literal>interpolate=true</literal> or just specified as here.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>quiet</literal>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-quiet"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>quiet</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Do not write information to the log.  You can set it with
 <literal>quiet=true</literal> or just specified it with
 <literal>\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}</literal>,
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>draft</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>If you set it with <literal>draft=true</literal> or just specified it with
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}</literal>, then the graphic will not
-appear in the document, possibly saving color printer ink.  Instead,
-&latex; will put an empty box of the correct size with the filename
-printed in it.
+<anchor id="includegraphics-draft"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>draft</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If you set it with <literal>draft=true</literal> or just specify it with
 </para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink.  Instead, &latex; will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
 graphic files, which have a size specified with a line
@@ -10379,7 +13929,7 @@
 20 40 80</literal> then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
 60/72 inch tall.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>bb</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-bb"/><varlistentry><term><literal>bb</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specify the bounding box of the displayed region.  The argument is four
 dimensions separated by spaces, as with <literal>\includegraphics[.., bb=
 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</literal>.  Usually <literal>\includegraphics</literal> reads the
@@ -10387,24 +13937,28 @@
 only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
 to change it.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-bbllx"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bblly"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bburx"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bbury"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Set the bounding box.  These four are obsolete, but are retained for
 compatibility with old packages.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>natwidth, natheight</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-natwidth"/><anchor id="includegraphics-natheight"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>natwidth, natheight</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>An alternative for <literal>bb</literal>.  Setting
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}</literal>
-is the same as setting <literal>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>is the same as setting <literal>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</literal>.
 </para> 
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hiresbb</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-hiresbb"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hiresbb</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as with
-<literal>\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}</literal>, then &latex; will look
-for <literal>%%HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines instead of <literal>%%BoundingBox</literal>
-lines.  (The <literal>BoundingBox</literal> lines use only natural numbers while the
-<literal>HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines use decimals; both use units equivalent to
-&tex;’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a prior setting of
-<literal>true</literal>, you can set it to <literal>false</literal>.
 </para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then &latex; will look for <literal>%%HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines instead of
+<literal>%%BoundingBox</literal> lines.  (The <literal>BoundingBox</literal> lines use only
+natural numbers while the <literal>HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to &tex;’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To
+override a prior setting of <literal>true</literal>, you can set it to <literal>false</literal>.
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 <para>These following options allow a user to override &latex;’s method of
 choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension.  An example
@@ -10412,21 +13966,22 @@
 will read the file <filename>lion.xxx</filename> as though it were
 <filename>lion.png</filename>. For more on these, see <link linkend="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">\DeclareGraphicsRule</link>.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>type</literal>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-type"/><varlistentry><term><literal>type</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specify the graphics type.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>ext</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-ext"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>ext</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specify the graphics extension.
 Only use this in conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>read</literal>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-read"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>read</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specify the file extension of the read file.
 Only use this in conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>command</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file.
-Only use this in conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.
-<!-- write18 and restricted execution. -->
+<anchor id="includegraphics-command"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>command</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file.  Only use this in
+conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.  See <link linkend="Command-line-options">Command line options</link>
+for a discussion of enabling the <literal>\write18</literal> functionality to run
+external commands.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
@@ -10448,7 +14003,8 @@
 <screen>\rotatebox{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
 \rotatebox[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Put <replaceable>material</replaceable> in a box and rotate it <replaceable>angle</replaceable> degrees counterclockwise. 
+<para>Put <replaceable>material</replaceable> in a box and rotate it <replaceable>angle</replaceable> degrees
+counterclockwise.
 </para>
 <para>This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
 </para>
@@ -10480,16 +14036,19 @@
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>origin</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>The point of the <replaceable>material</replaceable>’s box about which the rotation happens.
-Possible values are any string containing one or two of: <literal>l</literal> for
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: <literal>l</literal> for
 left, <literal>r</literal> for right, <literal>b</literal> for bottom, <literal>c</literal> for center,
-<literal>t</literal> for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline.  Thus,
-<literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</literal> will turn the
-picture upside down from the center, while
-<literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</literal> will turn its
-picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character <literal>c</literal>
-gives the horizontal center in <literal>bc</literal> or <literal>tc</literal> but gives the
-vertical center in <literal>lc</literal> or <literal>rc</literal>.)  The default is <literal>lB</literal>.
+<literal>t</literal> for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline.  Thus, the first line here
 </para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}
+\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}
+</screen>
+<para>will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character
+<literal>c</literal> gives the horizontal center in <literal>bc</literal> or <literal>tc</literal> but gives
+the vertical center in <literal>lc</literal> or <literal>rc</literal>.)  The default is
+<literal>lB</literal>.
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>x, y</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
 <literal>\rotatebox[x=<replaceable>&tex; dimension</replaceable>,y=<replaceable>&tex;
@@ -10532,10 +14091,12 @@
 <para>If you do not specify the optional <replaceable>vertical factor</replaceable> then it
 defaults to the same value as the <replaceable>horizontal factor</replaceable>.
 </para>
-<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as with
-<literal>\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}</literal>.  If you use the
-<filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can accomplish the same thing with
-optional arguments to <literal>\includegraphics</literal>
+<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</screen>
+<para>If you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to <literal>\includegraphics</literal>
 (see <link linkend="_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</link>).
 </para>
 <para>The <literal>\reflectbox</literal> command abbreviates
@@ -10604,8 +14165,8 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, reserved</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>special characters</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, special</primary></indexterm>
-<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
-example, the percent sign <literal>%</literal> is for comments) so they are
+<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign <literal>%</literal> is for comments.  They are
 called <firstterm>reserved characters</firstterm> or <firstterm>special characters</firstterm>.
 </para>
 <screen># $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ 
@@ -10620,7 +14181,7 @@
 <para>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
 body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
 put a backslash <literal>\</literal> in front of the character.  Thus,
-<literal>\$1.23</literal> will produce <literal>$1.23</literal> in your output.
+typing <literal>\$1.23</literal> will produce <literal>$1.23</literal> in your output.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10628,28 +14189,26 @@
 <para>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
 use <literal>\~{}</literal> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
 character receiving a tilde accent).  Similarly, to get a get a text
-body font circumflex use <literal>\^{}</literal>.  A text body font backslash
-results from <literal>\textbackslash{}</literal>.
+body font circumflex use <literal>\^{}</literal>.  To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter <literal>\textbackslash{}</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
-<literal>\verb!!</literal>, as below.
+<literal>\verb!!</literal> as below (the double backslash <literal>\\</literal> is only
+there to split the lines).
 </para>
 <screen>\begin{center}
   \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
   \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
 \end{center}
 </screen>
-<para>In that example the double backslash <literal>\\</literal> is only there to
-split the lines.
-</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="23.2" id="Upper-and-lower-case">
 <title>Upper and lower case</title>
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Upper case</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lower case</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, case</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>uppercase</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lowercase</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, case of</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -10729,22 +14288,23 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, text</primary></indexterm>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>textcomp package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols
-in running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are
-not available in OT1; you may need to load the <literal>textcomp</literal> package.
+<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then
+you may need to load the <literal>textcomp</literal> package.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\copyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\copyright</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcopyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcopyright</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>copyright symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The copyright symbol, ©.
+<para>© The copyright symbol.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dag</primary></indexterm><literal>\dag</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The dagger symbol (in text).
+<para>&#x2020; The dagger symbol (in text).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddag</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddag</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The double dagger symbol (in text).
+<para>&#x2021; The double dagger symbol (in text).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LaTeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\LaTeX</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex; logo</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10768,50 +14328,50 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>single angle quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>French quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>quotation marks, French</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
-«, », ‹, ›.
+<para>«, », ‹, ›
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm><literal>\dots</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\textellipsis</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipsis</primary></indexterm>
-<para>An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): ‘…’.  <literal>\ldots</literal>
+<para>…  An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline):  <literal>\ldots</literal>
 and <literal>\dots</literal> also work in math mode.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lq</primary></indexterm><literal>\lq</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>opening quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Left (opening) quote: ‘.
+<para>‘ Left (opening) quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\P</primary></indexterm><literal>\P</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\textparagraph</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph symbol</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>pilcrow</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow): &#x00B6;.
+<para>&#x00B6; Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pounds</primary></indexterm><literal>\pounds</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsterling</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pounds symbol</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>sterling symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>English pounds sterling: £.
+<para>£ English pounds sterling.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotedblbase („)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotedblbase („)</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotesinglbase (‚)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotesinglbase (‚)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double low-9 quotation mark</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>single low-9 quotation mark</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>low-9 quotation marks, single and double</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double and single quotation marks on the baseline:
-„ and ‚.
+<para>„ and ‚
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rq</primary></indexterm><literal>\rq</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>closing quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Right (closing) quote: ’.
+<para>’ Right (closing) quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\S</primary></indexterm><literal>\S</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>\itemx \textsection
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section symbol</primary></indexterm>
-Section sign: &#x00A7;.
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsection</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>section symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x00A7; Section sign.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\TeX</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&tex; logo</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10821,55 +14381,55 @@
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciicircum</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciicircum</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex, ASCII, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ASCII circumflex, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>ASCII circumflex: ^.
+<para>^ ASCII circumflex.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciitilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciitilde</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde, ASCII, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ASCII tilde, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>ASCII tilde: ~.
+<para>~ ASCII tilde.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasteriskcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasteriskcentered</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>asterisk, centered, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered asterisk, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Centered asterisk: *.
+<para>* Centered asterisk.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbackslash</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>backslash, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Backslash: \.
+<para>\ Backslash.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbar</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical bar, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, vertical, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Vertical bar: |.
+<para>| Vertical bar.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbardbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbardbl</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical bar, double, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, double vertical, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>double vertical bar, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double vertical bar.
+<para>&#x23F8; Double vertical bar.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbigcircle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbigcircle</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>big circle symbols, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>circle symbol, big, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Big circle symbol.
+<para>&#x25EF; Big circle symbol.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceleft</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, left, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Left brace: {.
+<para>{ Left brace.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceright</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, right, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Right brace: }.
+<para>} Right brace.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbullet</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Bullet: •.
+<para>• Bullet.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcircled{<replaceable>letter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcircled{<replaceable>letter</replaceable>}</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>circled letter, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para><replaceable>letter</replaceable> in a circle, as in ®.
+<para>&#x24B6; Circle around <replaceable>letter</replaceable>.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcompwordmark</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcapitalcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcapitalcompwordmark</literal>
@@ -10877,53 +14437,62 @@
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>composite word mark, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cap height</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ascender height</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Composite word mark (invisible).  The <literal>\textcapital...</literal> form
-has the cap height of the font, while the <literal>\textascender...</literal> form
-has the ascender height.
+<para>Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+<literal>f\textcompwordmark i</literal> produces ‘<literal>fi</literal>’ without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages.  The
+<literal>\textcapitalcompwordmark</literal> form has the cap height of the font
+while the <literal>\textascendercompwordmark</literal> form has the ascender height.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdagger</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Dagger: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\dag</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>&#x2020; Dagger.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdaggerdbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdaggerdbl</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, double, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double dagger: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddag</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>&#x2021; Double dagger.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dollar sign</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>currency, dollar</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Dollar sign: $.
+<para>$ Dollar sign.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textemdash (or <literal>---</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textemdash (or <literal>---</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Em-dash: — (for punctuation).
+<para>— Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+<literal>The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textendash (or <literal>--</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textendash (or <literal>--</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>e-dash</primary></indexterm>
-<para>En-dash: – (for ranges).
+<para>– En-dash (used for ranges, as in <literal>See pages 12--14</literal>).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texteuro</primary></indexterm><literal>\texteuro</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>euro symbol</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>currency, euro</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The Euro symbol: €.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>eurosym</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>eurosym</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+<filename>eurosym</filename> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>exclamation point, upside-down</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Upside down exclamation point: ¡.
+<para>¡ Upside down exclamation point.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textgreater</primary></indexterm><literal>\textgreater</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>greater than symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Greater than: >.
+<para>> Greater than symbol.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textless</primary></indexterm><literal>\textless</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>less than symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Less than: <.
+<para>< Less than symbol.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textleftarrow</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrow, left, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>left arrow, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Left arrow.
+<para>&#x2190; Left arrow.   
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordfeminine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordfeminine</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordmasculine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordmasculine</literal>
@@ -10931,42 +14500,42 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>masculine ordinal symbol</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ordinals, feminine and masculine</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º.
+<para>ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textperiodcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textperiodcentered</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, centered, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered period, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Centered period: &#x00B7;.
+<para>&#x00B7; Centered period.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>question mark, upside-down</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Upside down question mark: ¿.
+<para>¿ Upside down question mark.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblleft (or <literal>``</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblleft (or <literal>``</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote, double</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>double left quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double left quote: “.
+<para>“ Double left quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote, double</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>double right quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Double right quote: ”.
+<para>” Double right quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteleft (or <literal>`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteleft (or <literal>`</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote, single</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>single left quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Single left quote: ‘.
+<para>‘ Single left quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteright (or <literal>'</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteright (or <literal>'</literal>)</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote, single</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>single right quote</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Single right quote: ’.
+<para>’ Single right quote.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotesingle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotesingle</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quote, single straight</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight single quote</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>single quote, straight</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)
+<para>&#x0027; Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)  
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightbase</literal>
 </term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightdblbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightdblbase</literal>
@@ -10974,38 +14543,40 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight quote, base</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>double quote, straight base</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight double quote, base</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- Unicode doesn't have these https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark -->
 <para>Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textregistered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textregistered</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>registered symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Registered symbol: ®.
+<para>® Registered symbol.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textrightarrow</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrow, right, in text</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>right arrow, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Right arrow.
+<para>&#x2192; Right arrow.  
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textthreequartersemdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textthreequartersemdash</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>three-quarters em-dash</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash, three-quarters</primary></indexterm>
-<para>“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+<para>&#xFE58; “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttrademark</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttrademark</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>trademark symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Trademark symbol: &#x2122;.
+<para>&#x2122; Trademark symbol.
 </para>
+<!-- ?? Diff from \textthreequartersemdash?  In Unicode? -->
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttwelveudash</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttwelveudash</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>two-thirds em-dash</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash, two-thirds</primary></indexterm>
-<para>“Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+<para>&#xFE58; “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.   
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\textunderscore</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>underscore, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Underscore: _.
+<para>_ Underscore.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textvisiblespace</primary></indexterm><literal>\textvisiblespace</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>visible space symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Visible space symbol.
+<para>&#x2423; Visible space symbol.  
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
@@ -11020,37 +14591,52 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>multilingual support</primary></indexterm>
-<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and
-languages, through the <literal>babel</literal> package and related support.  This
-section does not attempt to cover all that support.  It merely lists
-the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.
+<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages,
+through the <literal>babel</literal> package and related support if you are using
+pdf&latex;, or <filename>polyglossia</filename> if you are using Xe&latex; or
+Lua&latex;.  This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.  The
+<literal>\capital...</literal> commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.
 </para>
-<para>The <literal>\capital...</literal> commands produce alternative forms for use with
-capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.
+<para>Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase ‘<literal>o</literal>’.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\i (dotless i)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Note that <literal>\i</literal> produces a dotless i,
+<!-- @dotless{i}, -->
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\j (dotless j)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j</primary></indexterm>
+and <literal>\j</literal> produces a dotless j.
+<!-- @dotless{j}. -->
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\"</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitaldieresis</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\" (umlaut accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldieresis</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>umlaut accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>dieresis accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö.
+<para>ö Umlaut (dieresis).
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\'</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalacute</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\' (acute accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalacute</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>acute accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces an acute accent, as in ó.  In the <literal>tabbing</literal>
-environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column
-(see <link linkend="tabbing">tabbing</link>).
+<para>ó Acute accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\.</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\. (dot-over accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot-over accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a dot accent over the following, as in ȯ.
+<para>ȯ  Dot accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\=</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalmacron</literal>
@@ -11059,7 +14645,7 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>macron accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>overbar accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-over accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in ō.
+<para>ō Macron (overbar) accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\^</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalcircumflex</literal>
@@ -11067,75 +14653,69 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcircumflex</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>hat accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô.
+<para>ô Circumflex (hat) accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\`</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalgrave</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\` (grave accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalgrave</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>grave accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò.  In the
-<literal>tabbing</literal> environment, move following text to the right margin
-(see <link linkend="tabbing">tabbing</link>).
+<para>ò Grave accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\~</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitaltilde</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~ (tilde accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaltilde</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ.
+<para>ñ Tilde accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\b</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\b (bar-under accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-under accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. See
-also <literal>\underbar</literal> hereinafter.
+<para>o_ Bar accent underneath.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underbar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Related to this, <literal>\underbar{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> produces a bar under
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>.  The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).  The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders.  See also <literal>\underline</literal> in
+<link linkend="Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</link>.
+</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\c</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalcedilla</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\c (cedilla accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcedilla</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>cedilla accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç.
+<para>ç Cedilla accent underneath.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\d</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitaldotaccent</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\d (dot-under accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldotaccent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot-under accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a dot accent under the following, as in ọ.
+<para>ọ Dot accent underneath.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\H</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalhungarumlaut</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalhungarumlaut</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>hungarian umlaut accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in ő.
+<para>ő Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\i</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\i (dotless i)</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a dotless i, as in ‘i’.
-</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\j</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\j (dotless j)</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a dotless j, as in ‘j’.
-</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\k</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalogonek</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\k (ogonek)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalogonek</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ogonek</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a letter with ogonek, as in ‘ǫ’.  Not available in
-the OT1 encoding.
+<para>ǫ Ogonek.  Not available in the OT1 encoding.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\r</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalring</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\r (ring accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalring</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>ring accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a ring accent, as in ‘o*’.
+<para>o* Ring accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\t</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitaltie</literal>
@@ -11146,25 +14726,16 @@
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtie</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalnewtie</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>tie-after accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a tie-after accent, as in ‘oo[’.  The
-<literal>\newtie</literal> form is centered in its box.
+<para>oo[ Tie-after accent.  The <literal>\newtie</literal> form is centered in
+its box.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\u</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalbreve</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\u (breve accent)</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalbreve</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>breve accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a breve accent, as in ‘ŏ’.
+<para>ŏ Breve accent.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\underbar</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbar</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underbar</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
-The argument is always processed in horizontal mode.  The bar is
-always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
-descenders.  See also <literal>\underline</literal> in <link linkend="Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</link>.
-See also <literal>\b</literal> above.
-</para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\v</literal>
 </term><term><literal>\capitalcaron</literal>
 </term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\v (breve accent)</primary></indexterm>
@@ -11172,7 +14743,7 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>hacek accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>check accent</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>caron accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a háček (check, caron) accent, as in ‘ǒ’.
+<para>ǒ  Háček (check, caron) accent.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
@@ -11187,8 +14758,8 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>non-English characters</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, non-English</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters (beyond
-A–Z) extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond
+A–Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
 than English.
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\aa</literal>
@@ -11283,22 +14854,43 @@
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rule</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\rule[<replaceable>raise</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>thickness</replaceable>}
+<screen>\rule{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>thickness</replaceable>}
+\rule[<replaceable>raise</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>thickness</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\rule</literal> command produces <firstterm>rules</firstterm>, that is, lines or
-rectangles.  The arguments are:
+<para>Produce a <firstterm>rule</firstterm>, a filled-in rectangle.
 </para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>raise</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>How high to raise the rule (optional).
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Halmos symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tombstone</primary></indexterm>
+<para>This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>width</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The length of the rule (mandatory).
+<screen>\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsthm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsthm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>amsthm</filename> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
 </para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>thickness</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
-</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <replaceable>width</replaceable> and vertical
+<replaceable>thickness</replaceable> of the rectangle.  They are rigid lengths
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).  The optional argument <replaceable>raise</replaceable> is also a rigid
+length, and tells &latex; how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+</screen>
+<para>The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall.  This line
+thickness is common in &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it.
+See <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link> for examples.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="23.8" id="_005ctoday">
@@ -11306,17 +14898,26 @@
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\today</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>date, today’s</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>today’s date</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\today</literal> command produces today’s date, in the format
-‘<literal><replaceable>month</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>, <replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></literal>’; for example, ‘<literal>July 4, 1976</literal>’.
-It uses the predefined counters <literal>\day</literal>, <literal>\month</literal>, and
-<literal>\year</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</link>) to do this.  It is not
-updated as the program runs.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Multilingual packages like <filename>babel</filename> or classes like <filename>lettre</filename>,
-among others, will localize <literal>\today</literal>. For example, the following
-will output ‘<literal>4 juillet 1976</literal>’:
+<screen>\today
+</screen>
+<para>Produce today’s date in the format ‘<literal><replaceable>month</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>,
+<replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></literal>’.  An example of a date in that format is ‘<literal>July 4,
+1976</literal>’.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Multilingual packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>, or
+classes such as <filename>lettre</filename>, will localize <literal>\today</literal>. For example,
+the following will output ‘<literal>4 juillet 1976</literal>’:
+</para>
 <screen>\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
 \documentclass{minimal}
 \usepackage[french]{babel}
@@ -11324,12 +14925,18 @@
 \today
 \end{document}
 </screen>
+<para><literal>\today</literal> uses the counters <literal>\day</literal>, <literal>\month</literal>, and
+<literal>\year</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day & \month & \year</link>).
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>datetime</literal></primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>datetime</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>datetime</literal> package, among others, can produce a wide variety
-of other date formats.
+<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates.  One is <filename>datetime</filename> package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
 </para>
+<para>The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -11339,61 +14946,215 @@
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>splitting the input file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>input file</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>A large document requires a lot of input.  Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones.  Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the 
+<para>&latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document.  It can also speed processing.
+</para>
+<para>Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>root file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>file, root</primary></indexterm>
-<firstterm>root file</firstterm>; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run &latex;.
+<firstterm>root file</firstterm>, on which &latex; compilation starts.  This shows such
+a file with five included files.
 </para>
-<para>See <link linkend="filecontents">filecontents</link>, for an environment that allows bundling an
-external file to be created with the main document.
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{  % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+  pref,
+  chap1,
+  chap2,
+  append,
+  bib
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{pref} 
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1} 
+\include{chap2}
+\appendix
+\include{append}
+\backmatter
+\include{bib} 
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>This will bring in material from <filename>pref.tex</filename>, <filename>chap1.tex</filename>,
+<filename>chap2.tex</filename>, <filename>append.tex</filename>, and <filename>bib.tex</filename>.  If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+<literal>\includeonly{...}</literal> except for <literal>chap1,</literal> and compile again,
+then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the <literal>\includeonly</literal> command is that
+&latex; will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
 </para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for another example of <literal>\includeonly</literal>.
+</para>
 
 
-<sect1 label="24.1" id="_005cinclude">
-<title><literal>\include</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
+<sect1 label="24.1" id="_005cendinput">
+<title><literal>\endinput</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\endinput</primary></indexterm>
+
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\include{<replaceable>file</replaceable>}
+<screen>\endinput
 </screen>
-<para>If no <literal>\includeonly</literal> command is present, the <literal>\include</literal>
-command executes <literal>\clearpage</literal> to start a new page
-(see <link linkend="_005cclearpage">\clearpage</link>), then reads <replaceable>file</replaceable>, then does another
-<literal>\clearpage</literal>.
+<para>When you <literal>\include{filename}</literal>, inside <filename>filename.tex</filename> the
+material after <literal>\endinput</literal> will not be included.  This command is
+optional; if <filename>filename.tex</filename> has no <literal>\endinput</literal> then &latex;
+will read all of the file.
 </para>
-<para>Given an <literal>\includeonly</literal> command, the <literal>\include</literal> actions are
-only run if <replaceable>file</replaceable> is listed as an argument to
-<literal>\includeonly</literal>.  See <link linkend="_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</link>.
+<para>For example, suppose that a document’s root file has
+<literal>\input{chap1}</literal> and this is <filename>chap1.tex</filename>.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nested <literal>\include</literal>, not allowed</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another <literal>\include</literal> command.
+<screen>\chapter{One}
+This material will appear in the document. 
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+</screen>
+<para>This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put <literal>\endinput</literal> halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears.  Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+<literal>\endinput</literal> to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
 </para>
+<para>After reading <literal>\endinput</literal>, &latex; continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an <literal>\if...</literal> with a
+<literal>\fi</literal>.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="24.2" id="_005cincludeonly">
-<title><literal>\includeonly</literal></title>
+<sect1 label="24.2" id="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">
+<title><literal>\include</literal> & <literal>\includeonly</literal></title>
 
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includeonly</primary></indexterm>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\includeonly{<replaceable>file1</replaceable>,<replaceable>file2</replaceable>,...}
+<screen>\includeonly{  % in document preamble
+  ...
+  <replaceable>filename</replaceable>,
+  ...
+  }
+  ...
+\include{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}  % in document body 
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\includeonly</literal> command controls which files will be read by
-subsequent <literal>\include</literal> commands.  The list of filenames is
-comma-separated. Each element <replaceable>file1</replaceable>, <replaceable>file2</replaceable>, … must
-exactly match a filename specified in a <literal>\include</literal> command for the
-selection to be effective.
+<para>Bring material from the external file <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.tex</filename> into a
+&latex; document.
 </para>
-<para>This command can only appear in the preamble.
+<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command does three things: it executes
+<literal>\clearpage</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</link>), then it
+inputs the material from <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.tex</filename> into the document,
+and then it does another <literal>\clearpage</literal>.  This command can only
+appear in the document body.  The <literal>\includeonly</literal> command controls
+which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent <literal>\include</literal>
+commands.  Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
 </para>
+<para>This example root document, <filename>constitution.tex</filename>, brings in
+three files, <filename>preamble.tex</filename>, <filename>articles.tex</filename>, and
+<filename>amendments.tex</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  preamble,
+  articles,
+  amendments
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{preamble}
+\include{articles}
+\include{amendments}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>The file <filename>preamble.tex</filename> contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from <filename>consitution.tex</filename> and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{Preamble}
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+</screen>
+<para>Running &latex; on <filename>constitution.tex</filename> makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files <filename>preamble.aux</filename>, <filename>articles.aux</filename>, and
+<filename>amendments.tex</filename>. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross references</link>).  If you now comment out
+<literal>\includeonly</literal>’s lines with <literal>preamble</literal> and <literal>amendments</literal>
+and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from <filename>articles.tex</filename>, not the material from
+<filename>preamble.tex</filename> or <filename>amendments.tex</filename>.  Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+</para>
+<para>If the document preamble does not have <literal>\includeonly</literal> then
+&latex; will include all the files you call for with <literal>\include</literal>
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command makes a new page.  To avoid that, see
+<link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link> (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for another example using <literal>\include</literal>
+and <literal>\includeonly</literal>.  That example also uses <literal>\input</literal> for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+</para>
+<para>File names can involve paths.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  chapters/chap1,
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{chapters/chap1}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name ‘<literal>amo amas amat</literal>’,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  "amo\space amas\space amat"
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  {"amo amas amat"}
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{{"amo amas amat"}}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nested <literal>\include</literal>, not allowed</primary></indexterm>
+<para>You cannot use <literal>\include</literal> inside a file that is being included or
+you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.</literal>’  The
+<literal>\include</literal> command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Missing \begin{document}</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>If a file that you <literal>\include</literal> does not exist, for instance if you
+<literal>\include{athiesm}</literal> but you meant <literal>\include{atheism}</literal>,
+then &latex; does not give you an error but will warn you ‘<literal>No file
+athiesm.tex.</literal>’  (It will also create <filename>athiesm.aux</filename>.)
+</para>
+<para>If you <literal>\include</literal> the root file in itself then you first get
+‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.</literal>’  Later runs get
+‘<literal>TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]</literal>’.  To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion <literal>\include{root}</literal> but also
+delete the file <filename><replaceable>root</replaceable>.aux</filename> and rerun &latex;.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="24.3" id="_005cinput">
@@ -11403,17 +15164,38 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\input{<replaceable>file</replaceable>}
+<screen>\input{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\input</literal> command causes the specified <replaceable>file</replaceable> to be read
-and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current
-file at that point.
+<para>&latex; processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file.  For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+<link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include & \includeonly</link>.
 </para>
-<para>If <replaceable>file</replaceable> does not end in ‘<literal>.tex</literal>’ (e.g., ‘<literal>foo</literal>’ or
-‘<literal>foo.bar</literal>’), it is first tried with that extension (‘<literal>foo.tex</literal>’
-or ‘<literal>foo.bar.tex</literal>’).  If that is not found, the original <replaceable>file</replaceable>
-is tried (‘<literal>foo</literal>’ or ‘<literal>foo.bar</literal>’).
+<para>If <replaceable>filename</replaceable> does not end in ‘<literal>.tex</literal>’ then &latex; first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case.  If
+<replaceable>filename</replaceable> ends with ‘<literal>.tex</literal>’ then &latex; looks for the
+filename as it is.
 </para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>\input{macros}
+</screen>
+<para>will cause &latex; to first look for <filename>macros.tex</filename>. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in.  If there is no file of the name <filename>macros.tex</filename> then
+&latex; tries the name <filename>macros</filename>, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+</para>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name ‘<literal>amo amas amat</literal>’,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+</screen>
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{{"amo amas amat"}}
+</screen>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -11422,38 +15204,124 @@
 
 
 
-<sect1 label="25.1" id="Tables-of-contents">
-<title>Tables of contents</title>
+<sect1 label="25.1" id="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">
+<title>Table of contents etc.</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, creating</primary></indexterm>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tableofcontents</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>.toc file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A table of contents is produced with the <literal>\tableofcontents</literal>
-command.  You put the command right where you want the table of
-contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you.  A previous run must
-have generated a <filename>.toc</filename> file.
-</para>
-<para>The <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> command produces a heading, but it does
-not automatically start a new page.  If you want a new page after the
-table of contents, write a <literal>\newpage</literal> command after the
-<literal>\tableofcontents</literal> command.
-</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoffigures</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoftables</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lof file</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lot file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The analogous commands <literal>\listoffigures</literal> and <literal>\listoftables</literal>
-produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from <filename>.lof</filename> and
-<filename>.lot</filename> files), respectively.  Everything works exactly the same
-as for the table of contents.
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nofiles</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\nofiles</literal> overrides these commands, and
-<emphasis>prevents</emphasis> any of these lists from being generated.
+<screen>\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables.  Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands <literal>\chapter</literal>, etc.
 </para>
+<para>This example illustrates the first command, <literal>\tableofcontents</literal>.
+&latex; will produce a table of contents on the book’s first page.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+  ...
+\chapter{...}
+  ...
+\section{...}
+  ...
+\subsection{...}
+  ...
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+<literal>\section</literal> command has level 1.  See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link> for level
+numbers of the sectioning units.  For more on the <literal>tocdepth</literal>
+see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>.
+</para>
+<para>Another example of the use of <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> is in <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger
+book template</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+<literal>\newpage</literal> command after the <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> command, as
+above.
+</para>
+<para>To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named <filename><replaceable>root-file</replaceable>.toc</filename> (see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the
+input</link>).  For example, this &latex; file <filename>test.tex</filename>
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section{First section}
+\subsection{First subsection}
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>writes the following line to <filename>test.toc</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>section</literal> or <literal>subsection</literal> is the sectioning unit.  The
+hook <literal>\numberline</literal> lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents.  Of its two arguments, <literal>1</literal> or <literal>1.1</literal>
+is the sectioning unit number and <literal>First section</literal> or <literal>First
+subsection</literal> is the title.  Finally, <literal>2</literal> is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+</para>
+<para>One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it.  In particular, the first time that you
+run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its ‘<literal>Contents</literal>’ header.  Just run it again.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <literal>\listoffigures</literal> and <literal>\listoftables</literal> produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables.  They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+<filename>.lof</filename> and <filename>.lot</filename> files.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+</screen>
+<para>Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tocloft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocloft</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tocbibbind</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocbibbind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables.  One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is <filename>tocloft</filename>.  And, <filename>tocbibbind</filename>
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+
+
 <sect2 label="25.1.1" id="_005caddcontentsline">
 <title><literal>\addcontentsline</literal></title>
 
@@ -11464,151 +15332,711 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\addcontentsline{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command adds an entry to the specified list
-or table where:
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\contentsline</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Add an entry to the file specified by <replaceable>ext</replaceable>.  Usually <replaceable>ext</replaceable> is
+one of <literal>toc</literal> for the table of contents, <literal>lof</literal> for the list of
+figures, or <literal>lot</literal> for the list of tables.
 </para>
+<para>The following will result in an ‘<literal>Appendices</literal>’ line in the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</screen>
+<para>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command writes information to the file
+<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename>.  It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+<literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
+<literal><replaceable>num</replaceable></literal> is the current value of counter <literal><replaceable>unit</replaceable></literal>.  The
+most common case is the table of contents and there <replaceable>num</replaceable> is the
+page number of the first page of <replaceable>unit</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <literal>\chapter</literal>,
+etc., and also by <literal>\caption</literal> inside a float environment.  But it is
+also used by authors.  For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred <literal>\chapter*</literal>.  But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter*{Preface}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+</screen>
+<para>In the <filename>.toc</filename> file &latex; will put the line <literal>\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</literal>; note the page number
+‘<literal>3</literal>’.
+</para>
+<!-- xx how hardwired are these values?  other unit names? -->
+
+<para>All of the arguments for <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> are required.
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ext</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The filename extension of the file on which information is to be written,
-typically one of: <literal>toc</literal> (table of contents), <literal>lof</literal> (list of
-figures), or <literal>lot</literal> (list of tables).
+</term><listitem><para>Typically one of the strings <literal>toc</literal> for the table of contents,
+<literal>lof</literal> for the list of figures, or <literal>lot</literal> for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>unit</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
-following, matching the value of the <replaceable>ext</replaceable> argument:
+</term><listitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <replaceable>ext</replaceable> argument:
 </para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>toc</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>The name of the sectional unit: <literal>part</literal>, <literal>chapter</literal>,
-<literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, <literal>subsubsection</literal>.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lof</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+<literal>part</literal>, <literal>chapter</literal>, <literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lof</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>For the list of figures: <literal>figure</literal>.
-</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lot</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lot</literal>
 </term><listitem><para>For the list of tables: <literal>table</literal>.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry.
+</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry.  You must <literal>\protect</literal> any commands that are
+fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\contentsline</primary></indexterm>
-<para>What is written to the <filename>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename> file is the command
-<literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
-<literal><replaceable>num</replaceable></literal> is the current value of counter <literal><replaceable>unit</replaceable></literal>.
+<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command has an interaction with
+<literal>\include</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include & \includeonly</link>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<literal>\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}</literal> then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution
+is to move <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> into the file being included.
 </para>
-<!-- xx how hardwired are these values?  other unit names? -->
+<para>If you use a <replaceable>unit</replaceable> that &latex; does not recognize, as here
+</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</screen>
+<para>then you don’t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+</para>
 
-
 </sect2>
 <sect2 label="25.1.2" id="_005caddtocontents">
 <title><literal>\addtocontents</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocontents{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The <literal>\addtocontents</literal>{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>} command adds text
-(or formatting commands) directly to the <filename>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename> file that
-generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<screen>\addtocontents{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add <replaceable>text</replaceable>, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension <replaceable>ext</replaceable>.  This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+‘<literal>Contents</literal>’ header.
+</para>
+<screen>\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\addtocontents</literal> command has two arguments.  Both are
+required.
+</para>
 <variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ext</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
-typically one of: <filename>toc</filename> (table of contents), <filename>lof</filename> (list of
-figures), or <filename>lot</filename> (list of tables).
+</term><listitem><para>Typically one of: <filename>toc</filename> for the table of contents, <filename>lof</filename> for
+the list of figures, or <filename>lot</filename> for the list of tables.  The
+extension of the file holding the information.
 </para>
 </listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text to be written.
+</term><listitem><para>The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
 </para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The sectioning commands such as <literal>\chapter</literal> use the
+<literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command to store information.  This command
+creates lines in the <filename>.toc</filename> auxiliary file containing the
+<literal>\contentsline</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</link>).  In contrast,
+the command <literal>\addtocontents</literal> puts material directly in that file.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\addtocontents</literal> command has an interaction with
+<literal>\include</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include & \includeonly</link>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<literal>\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}</literal> then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution is to
+move <literal>\addtocontents</literal> into the file being included.
+</para>
 
 </sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 label="25.2" id="Glossaries">
-<title>Glossaries</title>
+<sect2 label="25.1.3" id="_005cnofiles">
+<title><literal>\nofiles</literal></title>
 
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossaries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nofiles</primary></indexterm>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\makeglossary</literal> enables creating glossaries.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\glossary</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.glo</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\glossary{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> writes a glossary entry for
-<replaceable>text</replaceable> to an auxiliary file with the <filename>.glo</filename> extension.
+<screen>\nofiles
+</screen>
+<para>Prevent &latex; from writing any auxiliary files.  The only output will
+be the <filename>.log</filename> and <filename>.pdf</filename> (or <filename>.dvi</filename>) files.  This command
+must go in the preamble.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\glossaryentry</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Specifically, what gets written is the command
-<literal>\glossaryentry{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pageno</replaceable>}</literal>, where
-<replaceable>pageno</replaceable> is the current <literal>\thepage</literal> value.
+<para>Because of the <literal>\nofiles</literal> command this example will not produce a
+<filename>.toc</filename> file.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>glossary</literal> package on CTAN provides support for fancier
-glossaries.
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\nofiles
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter{...}
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the <literal>\nofiles</literal> command after you have run the file and gotten
+a <filename>.toc</filename> then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
 </para>
 
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="25.3" id="Indexes">
+<sect1 label="25.2" id="Indexes">
 <title>Indexes</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>indexes</primary></indexterm>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeindex</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\makeindex</literal> enables creating indexes.  Put this in
-the preamble.
-</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The command <literal>\index{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> writes an index entry for
-<replaceable>text</replaceable> to an auxiliary file named with the <filename>.idx</filename> extension.
+
+<para>This document has an index.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexentry</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Specifically, what gets written is the command
-<literal>\indexentry{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pageno</replaceable>}</literal>, where <replaceable>pageno</replaceable>
-is the current <literal>\thepage</literal> value.
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+  ...
+\begin{document}
+  ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+  ...
+\printindex
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal> and <literal>\makeindex</literal> in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
 </para>
+<para>Producing an index is a three stage process.  First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the <literal>\index</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005cindex">\index</link>).  When you run &latex;, the <literal>\index</literal> writes its
+information to an auxiliary file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.idx</filename>.  Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically <command>makeindex</command> or <command>xindy</command> (see <link linkend="makeindex">makeindex</link>).
+These output a file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.ind</filename>.  Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+<literal>\printindex</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>showidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>multind</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>multind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many packages that apply to indexing commands.  The
+<literal>showidx</literal> package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in preparing
+the index.  The <literal>multind</literal> package supports multiple indexes.  See
+also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="25.2.1" id="_005cindex">
+<title><literal>\index</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entry</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\index{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare an entry in the index.  This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>For example, as described in <link linkend="Indexes">Indexes</link>, one way to get an index from
+what’s below is to compile the document with <literal>pdflatex test</literal>, then
+process the index entries with <literal>makeindex test</literal>, and then compile
+again with <literal>pdflatex test</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+  ...
+Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+  ...
+rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+</screen>
+<para>All three index entries will get a page number, such as ‘<literal>Ackermann,
+22</literal>’.  &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries.  (If you add
+<literal>\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}</literal> then
+<command>makeindex</command> says ‘<literal>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</literal>’ and nothing appears in the index).
+</para>
+<para>If you enter a second <literal>\index</literal> with the same
+<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page).  Thus,
+adding <literal>as for Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}</literal> later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like ‘<literal>Ackermann, 22,
+151</literal>’.  Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance <literal>\index{Ackermann!function}</literal> could come before
+<literal>\index{Ackermann}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, page range</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Get a page range in the output, like ‘<literal>Hilbert, 23--27</literal>’, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+  ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+  ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+</screen>
+<para>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+</para>
+<para>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+<literal>\index{Jones!program}</literal> and <literal>\index{Jones!results}</literal>, then
+the output is the item ‘<literal>Jones</literal>’ with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like ‘<literal>program, 50</literal>’ and ‘<literal>results,
+51</literal>’.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’</primary></indexterm>
-<para>To generate a index entry for ‘bar’ that says ‘See foo’, use a
-vertical bar: <literal>\index{bar|see{foo}}</literal>.  Use <literal>seealso</literal>
-instead of <literal>see</literal> to make a ‘See also’ entry.
-</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\seename</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alsoname</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The text ‘See’ is defined by the macro <literal>\seename</literal>, and ‘See also’
-by the macro <literal>\alsoname</literal>.  These can be redefined for other
-languages.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Generate a index entry that says ‘<literal>See</literal>’ by using a vertical bar
+character: <literal>\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's
+function}}</literal>.  You can instead get ‘<literal>See also</literal>’ with <literal>seealso</literal>.
+(The text ‘<literal>See</literal>’ is defined by <literal>\seename</literal>, and ‘<literal>See also</literal>’
+by <literal>\alsoname</literal>.  You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>,
+or directly as with <literal>\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}</literal>.)
 </para>
+<para>The ‘<literal>See</literal>’ feature is part of a more general functionality.  After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+<literal>\index{group|textit}</literal> (note the missing backslash on the
+<literal>\textit</literal> command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like <literal>\textit{7}</literal>.  You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+<literal>\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}</literal> and then
+<literal>\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}</literal> will give a blue page
+number (see <link linkend="Color">Color</link>).  Another, less practical, example is this,
+</para>
+<!-- credit Ian Thompson https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/272572/121234 -->
+<screen>\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+  ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+</screen>
+<para>which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+</para>
+<para>The two functions just described combine, as here
+</para>
+<screen>\index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+  ...
+\index{Ackermann!function|)}
+</screen>
+<para>which outputs an index entry like ‘<literal>function, 23--27</literal>’ where the page
+number range is in blue.
+</para>
+<para>Consider an index entry such as ‘<literal>&#x03B1;-ring</literal>’.  Entering
+it as <literal>$\alpha$-ring</literal> will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+<literal>\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}</literal>.  If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, <literal><replaceable>pos</replaceable>@<replaceable>text</replaceable></literal>,
+then <replaceable>pos</replaceable> gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+<replaceable>text</replaceable> produces the text of the entry.  Another example is that
+<literal>\index{Saint Michael's College at SMC}</literal> produces an index entry
+‘<literal>SMC</literal>’ alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+</para>
+<para>To put a <literal>!</literal>, or <literal>@</literal>, or <literal>|</literal> character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, <literal>"</literal>.  (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>index</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>index</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by <filename>makeidx</filename>.  One is <filename>index</filename>, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+<literal>\index*{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}</literal> that prints the
+<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> as well as indexing it.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexentry</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>idx file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>\index</literal> command writes the indexing information to the file
+<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.idx</filename> file.  Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+<literal>\indexentry{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}{<replaceable>page-num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
+where <replaceable>page-num</replaceable> is the value of the <literal>\thepage</literal> counter.  On
+occasion, when the <literal>\printindex</literal> command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+</para>
+<para>If you omit the closing brace of an <literal>\index</literal> command then you get a
+message like this.
+</para>
+<screen>Runaway argument?  {Ackermann!function
+!  Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.2.2" id="makeindex">
+<title><command>makeindex</command></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, processing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>makeindex</command> program</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>xindy</command> program</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.ind</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The generated <filename>.idx</filename> file is then sorted with an external
-command, usually either <command>makeindex</command>
-(<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex">http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex</ulink>) or (the
-multi-lingual) <command>xindy</command> (<ulink url="http://xindy.sourceforge.net">http://xindy.sourceforge.net</ulink>).
-This results in a <filename>.ind</filename> file, which can then be read to typeset
-the index.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
+<screen>makeindex <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+makeindex -s <replaceable>style-file</replaceable> <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+makeindex <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>filename0</replaceable> ...
+</screen>
+<para>Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+<replaceable>filename</replaceable>.  This is a command line program.  It takes one or more
+raw index files, <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.idx</filename> files, and produces the
+actual index file, the <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.ind</filename> file that is input by
+<literal>\printindex</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.isty</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>index, style file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex, style file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The first form of the command suffices for many uses.  The second allows
+you to format the index by using an <firstterm>index style file</firstterm>, a
+<filename>.isty</filename> file.  The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This is a simple <filename>.isty</filename> file.
+</para>
+<screen>% book.isty 
+%   $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page. 
+preamble
+"\\pagestyle{empty}
+\\small
+\\begin{theindex}
+\\thispagestyle{empty}"
+
+postamble
+"\n
+\\end{theindex}"
+</screen>
+<para>The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in <replaceable>style-file</replaceable>. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <replaceable>specifier</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>.  These can appear in the file in any order.  All of the
+<replaceable>attributes</replaceable> are strings, except where noted.  Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, <literal>"</literal>, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters.  The <literal>\n</literal> is for a newline and <literal>\t</literal>
+is for a tab.  Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+<literal>\\</literal>.  If a line begins with a percent sign, <literal>%</literal>, then it is a
+comment.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="makeindex-preamble"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>preamble</primary></indexterm><literal>preamble</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted.  Default: <literal>"\\begin{theindex}\n"</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-postamble"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>postamble</primary></indexterm><literal>postamble</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Postamble of the output file.  Default: <literal>"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-group-skip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>group_skip</primary></indexterm><literal>group_skip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with ‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc.  This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins.  Default: <literal>"\n\n \\indexspace\n"</literal>
+(<literal>\indexspace</literal> is a rubber length with default value <literal>10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt</literal>).
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-letheadflag"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_flag</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_flag</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>An integer.  It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.  If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than <literal>group_skip</literal> nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is is positive then at a new
+letter the <literal>lethead_prefix</literal> and <literal>lethead_suffix</literal> will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them.  If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.  The default
+is 0.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-lethead-prefix"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_prefix</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_prefix</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header.  Default: <literal>""</literal>
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-lethead-suffix"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_suffix</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_suffix</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header.  Default: <literal>""</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-0"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_0</primary></indexterm><literal>item_0</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between two level 0 items.  Default: <literal>"\n \\item
+"</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_1</primary></indexterm><literal>item_1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put between two level 1 items.  Default: <literal>"\n \\subitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_2</primary></indexterm><literal>item_2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>put between two level 2 items.  Default: <literal>"\n \\subsubitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-01"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_01</primary></indexterm><literal>item_01</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item.
+Default: <literal>"\n \\subitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-x1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_x1</primary></indexterm><literal>item_x1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the
+case that the level 0 item doesn’t have any page numbers (as in
+<literal>\index{aaa|see{bbb}}</literal>).  Default: <literal>"\n \\subitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-12"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_12</primary></indexterm><literal>item_12</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item.
+Default: <literal>"\n \\subsubitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-x2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_x2</primary></indexterm><literal>item_x2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
+level 1 item doesn’t have page numbers.  Default: <literal>"\n
+\\subsubitem "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-0"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_0</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_0</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>", "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_1</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>", "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_2</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, <literal>", "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-n"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_n</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_n</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>", "</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-r"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_r</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: <literal>"--"</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-line-max"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>line_max</primary></indexterm><literal>line_max</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>An integer.  Maximum length of an index entry’s line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps.  Default: <literal>72</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-indent-space"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>indent_space</primary></indexterm><literal>indent_space</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line.  Default:
+<literal>"\t\t"</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-indent-length"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>indent_length</primary></indexterm><literal>indent_length</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A number.  The length of the wrapped line indentation.  The default
+<literal>indent_space</literal> is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is <literal>16</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-page-precedence"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>page_precedence</primary></indexterm><literal>page_precedence</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A document may have pages numbered in different ways.  For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic.  This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index.  The <command>makeindex</command> command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman <literal>r</literal>, and numeric
+or arabic <literal>n</literal>, and lowercase alphabetic <literal>a</literal>, and uppercase
+roman <literal>R</literal>, and uppercase alphabetic <literal>A</literal>.  Default:
+<literal>"rnaRA"</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>xindy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>xindy</command> program</primary></indexterm>
+<para>There are a number of other programs that do the job <command>makeindex</command>
+does.  One is <command>xindy</command>, which does internationalization and can
+process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of
+other languages.  It is is highly configurable, both in markup terms and
+in terms of the collating order of the text.  See the documentation on
+CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.2.3" id="_005cprintindex">
+<title><command>\printindex</command></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, printing</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>makeidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>makeidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>The index is usually generated with the <literal>\printindex</literal> command.
-This is defined in the <literal>makeidx</literal> package, so
-<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal> needs to be in the preamble.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The rubber length <literal>\indexspace</literal> is inserted before each new
-letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘<literal>10pt plus5pt
-minus3pt</literal>’.
+<screen>\printindex
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Place the index into the output.
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>showidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>To get an index you must first include
+<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex</literal> in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command <command>makeindex</command>,
+and then compile the document again.  See <link linkend="Indexes">Indexes</link> for further
+discussion and an example of the use of <literal>\printindex</literal>.
+</para>
 
-<para>The <literal>showidx</literal> package causes each index entries to be shown in
-the margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in
-preparing the index.
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.3" id="Glossaries">
+<title>Glossaries</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossaries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acronyms, list of</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printglossaries</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>multind</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>multind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<screen>\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+  ...
+\newglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{<replaceable>settings</replaceable>}  
+  ...
+\gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}.  
+  ...
+\printglossaries
+</screen>
+<para>The <filename>glossaries</filename> package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+</para>
+<para>To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with <literal>pdflatex filename</literal>), then run the command line command
+<literal>makeglossaries filename</literal>, and then compile the document again.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{...}  
+\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+  name={Turing machine},
+  description={A model of a machine that computes.  The model is simple
+               but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+               It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+  }  
+\begin{document}  
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.  
+  ...
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>That gives two things.  In the main text it outputs ‘<literal>... definition
+of a Turing machine</literal>’.  In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+‘<literal>Glossary</literal>’ there appears a description list.  In boldface it says
+‘<literal>Turing machine</literal>’ and the rest of the item says in normal type
+‘<literal>A model of a machine … Computer Science</literal>’.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printglossaries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.glo</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The command <literal>\makeglossary</literal> opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, <filename><replaceable>root-file</replaceable>.glo</filename>.  Put the
+<literal>\printglossaries</literal> command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+</para>
+<para>The <filename>glossaries</filename> package is very powerful.  For instance, besides
+the commands <literal>\newglossaryentry</literal> and <literal>\gls</literal>, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms.  See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+</para>
 
-<para>The <literal>multind</literal> package supports multiple indexes.  See also the
-&tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
-<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</ulink>.
+
+<sect2 label="25.3.1" id="_005cnewglossaryentry">
+<title><literal>\newglossaryentry</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary, entries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newglossaryentry</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of: 
 </para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>} 
+{ 
+  name={<replaceable>name</replaceable>}, 
+  description={<replaceable>description</replaceable>}, 
+  <replaceable>other options</replaceable>, ... 
+}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\longnewglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>} 
+{ 
+  name={<replaceable>name</replaceable>}, 
+  <replaceable>other options</replaceable> ..., 
+} 
+{<replaceable>description</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare a new entry for a glossary.  The <replaceable>label</replaceable> must be unique for
+the document.  The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+<literal><replaceable>key</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable></literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers &#x211D; in the
+glossary.
+</para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{R}  
+{  
+  name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},  
+  description={the real numbers},  
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Use the second command form if the <replaceable>description</replaceable> spans more than one
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>For a full list of <replaceable>key</replaceable>s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>name</primary></indexterm><literal>name</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>description</primary></indexterm><literal>description</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>plural</primary></indexterm><literal>plural</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The plural form of <replaceable>name</replaceable>.  Refer to the plural form using
+<literal>\glspl</literal> or <literal>\Glspl</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cgls">\gls</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>sort</primary></indexterm><literal>sort</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>symbol</primary></indexterm><literal>symbol</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
 
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.3.2" id="_005cgls">
+<title><literal>\gls</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary, entry reference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gls</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of: 
+</para>
+<screen>\gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\Gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\Glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Refer to a glossary entry.  The entries are declared with
+<literal>\newglossaryentry</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{N}{%
+  name={the natural numbers},
+  description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+  symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+  }  
+  ...
+Consider \gls{N}.
+</screen>
+<para>gives the output ‘<literal>Consider the natural numbers</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The second command form <literal>\glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}</literal> produces the plural
+of <replaceable>name</replaceable> (by default it tries adding an ‘<literal>s</literal>’).  The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of <replaceable>name</replaceable>, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter label="26" id="Letters">
@@ -11620,7 +16048,7 @@
 <para>Synopsis: 
 </para>
 <screen>\documentclass{letter}
-\address{<replaceable>sender address</replaceable>}
+\address{<replaceable>senders address</replaceable>}   % return address
 \signature{<replaceable>sender name</replaceable>}
 \begin{document}
 \begin{letter}{<replaceable>recipient address</replaceable>}
@@ -11628,18 +16056,17 @@
   <replaceable>letter body</replaceable>
 \closing{<replaceable>closing text</replaceable>}
 \end{letter}
-...  more letters ...
+   ...
 \end{document}
 </screen>
 <para>Produce one or more letters.  
 </para>
 <para>Each letter is in a separate <literal>letter</literal> environment, whose argument
 <replaceable>recipient address</replaceable> often contains multiple lines separated with a
-double backslash (<literal>\\</literal>).  For example, you might have:
+double backslash, (<literal>\\</literal>).  For example, you might have:
 </para>
-<screen> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\ 
-      2345 Princess St. \\ 
-      Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+<screen> \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+                l'h\^otel Sagonne}
    ...
  \end{letter}
 </screen>
@@ -11652,15 +16079,15 @@
 contains multiple lines separated by a double
 backslash (<literal>\\</literal>).  &latex; will put the <replaceable>sender name</replaceable>
 under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
-hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
+hand-written signature.
 </para>
-<para>Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body begins with a required <literal>\opening</literal> command
-such as <literal>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</literal>.  The <replaceable>letter body</replaceable>
-text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain everything from
-enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands such as
-<literal>\chapter</literal> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.  Each
-<literal>letter</literal> environment body typically ends with a <literal>\closing</literal>
-command such as <literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
+<para>Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body begins with a required
+<literal>\opening</literal> command such as <literal>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</literal>.
+The <replaceable>letter body</replaceable> text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as <literal>\chapter</literal> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body typically ends with a
+<literal>\closing</literal> command such as <literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
 </para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for letters</primary></indexterm>
 <para>Additional material may come after the <literal>\closing</literal>.  You can say who
@@ -11668,13 +16095,13 @@
 Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}</literal>.  There’s a similar <literal>\encl</literal> command for
 a list of enclosures.  And, you can add a postscript with <literal>\ps</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>&latex;’s default is to indent the signature and the <literal>\closing</literal>
-above it by a length of <literal>\longindentation</literal>.  By default this is
+<para>&latex;’s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of <literal>\longindentation</literal>.  By default this is
 <literal>0.5\textwidth</literal>. To make them flush left, put
 <literal>\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}</literal> in your preamble.
 </para>
 <para>To set a fixed date use something like
-<literal>\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}</literal>.  If put in your preamble
+<literal>\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}</literal>.  If put in your preamble
 then it will apply to all the letters.
 </para>
 <para>This example shows only one <literal>letter</literal> environment.  The three lines
@@ -11707,19 +16134,18 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\address{<replaceable>senders address</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
+<para>Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
 envelope.  Separate multiple lines in <replaceable>senders address</replaceable> with a
-double backslash <literal>\\</literal>.
+double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.
 </para>
 <para>Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
 in the preamble.  However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
 individual <literal>letter</literal> environment.
 </para>
-<para>This command is optional: without the <literal>\address</literal> declaration the
-letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
-pre-printed letterhead paper.  (See <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>, for details on your
-local implementation.)  With the <literal>\address</literal> declaration, it is
-formatted as a personal letter.
+<para>This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper.  If you do use the <literal>\address</literal> declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
 </para>
 <para>Here is an example.
 </para>
@@ -11736,13 +16162,13 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\cc{<replaceable>first name</replaceable> \\ 
+<screen>\cc{<replaceable>name0</replaceable> \\ 
      ... }
 </screen>
 <para>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.  This
 command is optional.  If it appears then typically it comes after
-<literal>\closing</literal>.  Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <literal>\\</literal>, as in:
+<literal>\closing</literal>.  Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>, as in:
 </para>
 <screen>\cc{President \\
     Vice President}
@@ -11760,8 +16186,8 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\closing{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature, there
-is a <literal>\closing</literal> (although this command is optional).  For example,
+<para>Produce the letter’s closing.  This is optional, but usual.  It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature.  For example:
 </para>
 <screen>\closing{Regards,}
 </screen>
@@ -11780,10 +16206,10 @@
 </screen>
 <para>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
 optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <literal>\closing</literal>.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash <literal>\\</literal>.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.
 </para>
 <screen>\encl{License \\
-       Passport }
+      Passport}
 </screen>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -11796,7 +16222,7 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\location{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears centered at the bottom of the each page.  It only
+<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears centered at the bottom of the page.  It only
 appears if the page style is <literal>firstpage</literal>.
 </para>
 
@@ -11808,26 +16234,63 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\makelabels
+<screen>\makelabels   % in preamble
 </screen>
-<para>Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one for
-each letter. This sheet will be output before the letters, with the idea
-that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels.  This command goes
-in the preamble.
+<para>Optional, for a document that contains <literal>letter</literal> environments.  If
+you just put <literal>\makelabels</literal> in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
 </para>
 <para>Customize the labels by redefining the commands <literal>\startlabels</literal>,
-<literal>\mlabel</literal>, and <literal>\returnaddress</literal> in the preamble.  The command
-<literal>\startlabels</literal> sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of
-the page onto which the labels are printed.  The command
-<literal>\mlabel{<replaceable>sender address</replaceable>}{<replaceable>recipient address</replaceable>}</literal>
-produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the <replaceable>sender
-address</replaceable>). The <replaceable>sender address</replaceable> is the value returned by the macro
-<literal>\returnaddress</literal> while <replaceable>recipient address</replaceable> is the value passed
-in the argument to the <literal>letter</literal> environment.  By default
-<literal>\mlabel</literal> ignores the first argument, the <replaceable>sender address</replaceable>.
+<literal>\mlabel</literal>, and <literal>\returnaddress</literal> (and perhaps <literal>\name</literal>) in
+the preamble.  The command <literal>\startlabels</literal> sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command <literal>\mlabel{<replaceable>return address</replaceable>}{<replaceable>recipient
+address</replaceable>}</literal> produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+<replaceable>return address</replaceable>) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+<replaceable>return address</replaceable>, is the value returned by the macro
+<literal>\returnaddress</literal>.  The second argument, <replaceable>recipient address</replaceable>, is
+the value passed in the argument to the <literal>letter</literal> environment.  By
+default <literal>\mlabel</literal> ignores the first argument, the <replaceable>return
+address</replaceable>, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
 </para>
-<!-- xxx TODO, align on latex2e-fr.texi, see https://mail.gna.org/public/latexrefman-discuss/2015-10/msg00000.html -->
+<para>This illustrates customization.  Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{letter}
+\renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+                               Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+\makelabels
+  ...
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+               112 Mercer Street \\
+               Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+  ...
+\end{letter}
+\begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\
+               145 Linden Lane \\
+               Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+  ...
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>The first column contains the return address twice.  The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>envlab</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>envlab</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>The package <literal>envlab</literal> makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided.  The preamble lines
+<literal>\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}</literal> and <literal>\makelabels</literal>
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="26.7" id="_005cname">
 <title><literal>\name</literal></title>
@@ -11838,8 +16301,8 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\name{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
-return address.
+<para>Optional.  Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
@@ -11851,11 +16314,10 @@
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<screen>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+<screen>\opening{<replaceable>salutation</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>This command is required.  It starts a letter, following the
-<literal>\begin{letter}{...}</literal>. The mandatory argument <replaceable>text</replaceable> is the
-text that starts your letter.  For instance:
+<para>Required.  Follows the <literal>\begin{letter}{...}</literal>. The argument
+<replaceable>salutation</replaceable> is mandatory.  For instance:
 </para>
 <screen>\opening{Dear John:}
 </screen>
@@ -11890,27 +16352,32 @@
 <para>The sender’s name.  This command is optional, although its inclusion is
 usual.
 </para>
-<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
-and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written
+<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+&latex; leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
 signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <literal>\\</literal>.  For example:
+backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.  For example:
 </para>
 <screen>\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
            White House}
 </screen>
 <para>&latex;’s default for the vertical space from the <literal>\closing</literal> text
 down to the <literal>\signature</literal> text is <literal>6\medskipamount</literal>, which is
-six times 0.7em.
+six times <literal>\medskipamount</literal> (where <literal>\medskipamount</literal> is equal to
+a <literal>\parskip</literal>, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7em).
 </para>
 <para>This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
 the document.  To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
 <literal>letter</literal> environment and before the <literal>\closing</literal>.
 </para>
-<para>You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
-<literal>\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
-My name}</literal> (this requires writing <literal>\usepackage{graphicx}</literal> in the
-preamble).
+<para>You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
 </para>
+<screen>\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+             My name}
+</screen>
+<para>For this you must put <literal>\usepackage{graphicx}</literal> in the preamble
+(see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>).
+</para>
 
 <!-- I think this is not a user-level command; it is used to keep from breaking -->
 <!-- the page between the closing and the signature -->
@@ -11957,26 +16424,56 @@
 
 
 <sect1 label="27.1" id="_005ctypein">
-<title><literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\typein</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typein</primary></indexterm>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<screen>\typein[\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}
+<screen>\typein{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}
+\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para><literal>\typein</literal> prints <replaceable>msg</replaceable> on the terminal and causes &latex; to
-stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return.  If
-the optional <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> argument is omitted, the typed input is
-processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the
-<literal>\typein</literal> command.  If the <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> argument is present, it
-must be a command name.  This command name is then defined or
-redefined to be the typed input.
+<para>Print <replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable> on the terminal and cause &latex; to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input.  This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
 </para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+</screen>
+<para>coupled with this command line interaction
+</para>
+<screen>Enter student name:
 
+\@typein=Aphra Behn
+</screen>
+<para>gives the output ‘<literal>... never forget Aphra Behn</literal>’.
+</para>
+<para>The first command version, <literal>\typein{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}</literal>, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <literal>\typein</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>In the second command version the optional argument <literal><replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>
+argument must be a command name — it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed.  For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</screen>
+<para>gives this output on the command line,
+</para>
+<screen>Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+</screen>
+<para>where the user has entered ‘<literal>John Dee.</literal>’
+</para>
+
 </sect1>
 <sect1 label="27.2" id="_005ctypeout">
-<title><literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\typeout</literal></title>
 
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typeout</primary></indexterm>
 
@@ -11984,17 +16481,32 @@
 </para>
 <screen>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}
 </screen>
-<para>Prints <literal>msg</literal> on the terminal and in the <literal>log</literal> file.
-Commands in <literal>msg</literal> that are defined with <literal>\newcommand</literal> or
+<para>Print <literal>msg</literal> on the terminal and in the <literal>log</literal> file.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</screen>
+<para>outputs ‘<literal>Recommendation for John Dee</literal>’.  Like what happens here with
+<literal>\student</literal>, commands that are defined with <literal>\newcommand</literal> or
 <literal>\renewcommand</literal> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
 before being printed.
 </para>
 <para>&latex;’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <literal>msg</literal>.  A
-<literal>\space</literal> command in <literal>msg</literal> causes a single space to be
-printed, independent of surrounding spaces.  A <literal>^^J</literal> in
-<literal>msg</literal> prints a newline.
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <literal>msg</literal>.  As above,
+use the command <literal>\space</literal> to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces.  Use <literal>^^J</literal> to get a newline.  Get a percent
+character with <literal>\csname @percentchar\endcsname</literal>.
 </para>
+<para>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\jhlength}
+\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+</screen>
+<para>produces on the command line ‘<literal>The length is 5.0pt</literal>’.
+</para>
 
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -12003,31 +16515,257 @@
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>command line</primary></indexterm>
 
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.tex, default extension</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
-&tex; uses <filename>.tex</filename> as a default file extension.  If you omit the
-input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal.  You can
-also specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting with a backslash.
-For example, this processes <filename>foo.tex</filename> without pausing after every
-error:
+<para>Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
 </para>
-<screen>latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+<screen>pdflatex <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>argument</replaceable>
 </screen>
+<para>Run &latex; on <replaceable>argument</replaceable>.  In place of <command>pdflatex</command> you can
+also use <command>xelatex</command>, or <literal>lualatex</literal>, or <literal>dviluatex</literal>, or
+<literal>latex</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this will run &latex; on the file <filename>thesis.tex</filename>,
+creating the output <filename>thesis.pdf</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>pdflatex thesis
+</screen>
+<para><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.tex, default extension</primary></indexterm>
+Note that <filename>.tex</filename> is the default file extension.
+</para>
+<para>pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are
+Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>).  They are completely
+backward compatible.  But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF.  This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs.  In short, if you run <command>pdflatex</command> or
+<command>xelatex</command> or <command>lualatex</command> then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features.  If you run <command>latex</command>,
+or <literal>dvilualatex</literal>, then you will get DVI.  The description here
+assumes pdf&latex;.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Command-line-options">Command line options</link>, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to <replaceable>argument</replaceable>, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If <replaceable>argument</replaceable> begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of &latex;
+input, which can be used for special effects (see <link linkend="Command-line-input">Command line
+input</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you gave no arguments or options then <command>pdflatex</command> prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+<literal><control>-D</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it.  See <link linkend="Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</link> for an outline of what
+to do.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="28.1" id="Command-line-options">
+<title>Command line options</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, command line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running ‘<literal>latex --help</literal>’ from the
+command line.
+</para>
+<para>With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with ‘<literal>-</literal>’ or ‘<literal>--</literal>’.  This is the case for
+both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;.  We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+</para>
+<variablelist><indexterm role="fn"><primary>--version command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<varlistentry><term><literal>-version</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Show the current version, like ‘<literal>pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)</literal>’ along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>--help command-line option</primary></indexterm>
-<para>With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also
-be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with ‘<literal>-</literal>’ or
-‘<literal>--</literal>’.  For a list of those options, try ‘<literal>latex --help</literal>’.
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
 </para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--interaction command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-interaction=<replaceable>mode</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+<literal>batchmode</literal>, <literal>nonstopmode</literal>, <literal>scrollmode</literal>,
+<literal>errorstopmode</literal>. In <firstterm>errorstop mode</firstterm> (the default), &tex;
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In <firstterm>batch
+mode</firstterm> it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit <literal><return></literal> at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In <firstterm>nonstop mode</firstterm>, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+<firstterm>scroll mode</firstterm>, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, starting &latex; with this command line
+</para>
+<screen>pdflatex -interaction=batchmode <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>eliminates most terminal output.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--jobname command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-jobname=<replaceable>string</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Set the value of &tex;’s <literal>jobname</literal> to the string.  The log file
+and output file will then be named <filename><replaceable>string</replaceable>.log</filename> and
+<filename><replaceable>string</replaceable>.pdf</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>When you run <literal><command>pdflatex</command> <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>argument</replaceable></literal>, if
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable> does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+<literal>\input</literal> instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file.  This option
+overrides that process and directly specifies the name.  See <link linkend="Command-line-input">Command
+line input</link> for an example of its use.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--output-directory command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-output-directory=<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Write files in the directory <replaceable>directory</replaceable>.  It must already exist.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--shell-escape command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--no-shell-escape command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--enable-write18 command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--disable-write18 command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>shell-escape</literal>
+</term><term><literal>no-shell-escape</literal>
+</term><term><literal>enable-write18</literal>
+</term><term><literal>disable-write18</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Enable or disable <literal>\write18{<replaceable>shell command</replaceable>}</literal>.  The first two
+options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are
+for MiK&tex;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>sagetex</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>sagetex</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+&latex; file. For instance the package <filename>sagetex</filename> allows you to
+have the mathematics software system <emphasis>Sage</emphasis> do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document.  For this
+&tex; provides the <literal>\write18</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a &latex; file from the Internet.  By default <literal>\write18</literal>
+is disabled.  (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and
+MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+</para>
+<para>If you invoke &latex; with the option <literal>no-shell-escape</literal>, and in
+your document you call <literal>\write18{ls -l}</literal>, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says ‘<literal>runsystem(ls -l)...disabled</literal>’.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--halt-on-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-halt-on-error</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stop processing at the first error.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--file-line-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--no-file-line-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-file-line-error</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-no-file-line-error</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Enable or disable <literal><replaceable>filename</replaceable>:<replaceable>lineno</replaceable>:<replaceable>error</replaceable></literal>-style
+error messages.  These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="28.2" id="Command-line-input">
+<title>Command line input</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>input, on command line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>As part of the command line invocation <literal>pdflatex <replaceable>options</replaceable>
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable></literal> you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable> with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For example, this file (which uses the <filename>hyperref</filename> package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+</para>
+<screen>\ifdefined\paperversion        % in preamble
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+\else
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+  ...
+\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN}  % in body
+  ...
+</screen>
+<para>Compiling this document <filename>book.tex</filename> with the command line
+<literal>pdflatex test</literal> will give the ‘<literal>CTAN</literal>’ link in blue.  But
+compiling it with <literal>pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input test.tex"</literal>
+has the link in black.  (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+</para>
+<para>In a similar way, from the single file <filename>main.tex</filename> you can compile
+two different versions.
+</para>
+<!-- credit Paul Gaborit: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/220101/121234 -->
+<screen>pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>jobname</literal> option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called <filename>main.pdf</filename> and the second would overwrite the first.
+</para>
+<para>A final example.  This loads the package <filename>graphicx</filename> with the option
+<literal>draft</literal>
+</para>
+<!-- credit Herbert Voss: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/17236/121234 -->
+<screen>pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+</screen>
+<para>so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF.  (The <literal>jobname</literal> option is needed because
+otherwise the output file would be <filename>graphicx.pdf</filename>, as
+<literal>\RequirePackage</literal> does an <literal>\input</literal> of its own.)
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="28.3" id="Recovering-from-errors">
+<title>Recovering from errors</title>
+
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, <literal>?</literal>.  For instance,
+running &latex; on this file
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+</screen>
+<para>causes it show this, and wait for input.
+</para>
+<screen>! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+           {} problem is a million dollar one.
+? 
+</screen>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter ‘<literal>x</literal>’ and <literal><return></literal> and fix the
+typo.  You could instead enter ‘<literal>?</literal>’ and <literal><return></literal> to see other
+options.
+</para>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>‘<literal>*</literal>’ prompt</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>prompt, ‘<literal>*</literal>’</primary></indexterm>
 <indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stop</primary></indexterm>
-<para>If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a
-‘<literal>*</literal>’ prompt, it is waiting for input.  You can type <literal>\stop</literal>
-(and return) and it will prematurely end the document.
+<para>There are two other error scenarios.  The first is that you forgot to
+include the <literal>\end{document}</literal> or misspelled it.  In this case
+&latex; gives you a ‘<literal>*</literal>’ prompt.  You can get back to the command
+line by typing <literal>\stop</literal> and <literal><return></literal>.
 </para>
-<para>See <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>, for other system commands invoking &latex;.
+<para>The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name.  For instance,
+instead of <literal>pdflatex test</literal> you might type <literal>pdflatex tste</literal>.
 </para>
+<screen>! I can't find file `tste'.
+<*> tste
+        
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+</screen>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <literal><Contol></literal> and ‘<literal>d</literal>’ (holding
+them down at the same time), and just fix the command line.
+</para>
 
+</sect1>
 </chapter>
 <appendix label="A" id="Document-templates">
 <title>Document templates</title>
@@ -12077,11 +16815,38 @@
 </para>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="A.2" id="book-template">
+<sect1 label="A.2" id="article-template">
+<title><literal>article</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>article</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.3" id="book-template">
 <title><literal>book</literal> template</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>book</literal></primary></indexterm>
 
+<para>This is a straightforward template for a book.  See See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book
+template</link> for a more elaborate one.
+</para>
 <screen>\documentclass{book}
 \title{Book Class Template}
 \author{Alex Author}
@@ -12101,7 +16866,62 @@
 </screen>
 
 </sect1>
-<sect1 label="A.3" id="tugboat-template">
+<sect1 label="A.4" id="Larger-book-template">
+<title>Larger <literal>book</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>book</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This is a more elaborate template for a book.  It has
+<literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, and <literal>\backmatter</literal> to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(see <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</link>).  The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+</para>
+<para>Notable is that it uses <literal>\include</literal> and <literal>\includeonly</literal>
+(see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</link>).  While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+<literal>\includeonly</literal>.  That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references.  (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with <literal>\input</literal> instead of
+<literal>\include</literal>.  You don’t get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+  frontcover,
+  preface,
+  chap1,
+  ...
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+  % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.5" id="tugboat-template">
 <title><literal>tugboat</literal> template</title>
 
 <indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, TUGboat</primary></indexterm>
@@ -12194,17 +17014,12 @@
 
 </sect1>
 </appendix>
-<chapter label="" id="Concept-Index">
-<title>Concept Index</title>
+<chapter label="" id="Index">
+<title>Index</title>
 
+<!-- Keep `Command Index' working for ltx-help.el. -->
+<anchor id="Command-Index"/>
 <index role="cp"></index>
 
-<!-- The name of the `Command Index' node must NOT be altered for ltx-help.el. -->
 </chapter>
-<chapter label="" id="Command-Index">
-<title>Command Index</title>
-
-<index role="fn"></index>
-
-</chapter>
 </book>

Modified: trunk/latex2e.dvi
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)

Modified: trunk/latex2e.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.html	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.html	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@
         <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">2.4.3.1 <code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
       </ul></li>
     </ul></li>
-    <li><a name="toc-CTAN-1" href="#CTAN">2.5 CTAN</a></li>
+    <li><a name="toc-CTAN_003a-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network" href="#CTAN">2.5 CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a></li>
   </ul></li>
   <li><a name="toc-Document-classes-1" href="#Document-classes">3 Document classes</a>
   <ul class="no-bullet">
@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@
 <code>\documentclass</code> and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands.
 This area is called the <em>preamble</em>.
 </p>
-<p>The <code>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</code> pair makes an
+<p>The <code>\begin{document}</code>, <code>\end{document}</code> pair defines an
 <a name="index-environment"></a>
 <em>environment</em>; the ‘<samp>document</samp>’ environment (and no others) is
 required in all LaTeX documents (see <a href="#document">document</a>).  LaTeX make
@@ -1209,15 +1209,15 @@
 <p>
 Previous: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a>   [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
 </div>
-<a name="CTAN-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">2.5 CTAN</h3>
+<a name="CTAN_003a-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.5 CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</h3>
 
 <a name="index-CTAN"></a>
 
 <p>The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and
 LaTeX community’s repository of free material.  It is a set of
 Internet sites around the world that offer material related to LaTeX
-for download.  Visit CTAN on the web at <a href="https://www.ctan.org">https://www.ctan.org</a>.
+for download.  Visit CTAN on the web at <a href="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</a>.
 </p>
 <p>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
 typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
@@ -1228,14 +1228,17 @@
 <p>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
 as search by name or by functionality.
 </p>
-<p>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites.  One of the
+<a name="index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e"></a>
+<a name="index-mirrors-of-CTAN"></a>
+<p>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
 sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
-instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.  It is
-sponsored by the German TeX group DANTE and is managed by Rainer
-Schoepf.  Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, by
-automatically syncing their collections with the core site and then in
-turn making their copies publicly available. This gives users close to
-their location better access and relieves the core site of load.
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <a href="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</a>.
 </p>
 
 <hr>
@@ -2200,12 +2203,12 @@
 </p>
 <p>LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
 switch to the given style, that is, are <em>not</em> cumulative.  They are
-used declaratively: <code>{\<var>cmd</var>...}</code> instead of
+used as declarations: <code>{\<var>cmd</var>...}</code> instead of
 <code>\<var>cmd</var>{...}</code>.
 </p>
 <p>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
-switching.  The earlier commands are an nimprovement in most
-curcumstances.  But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
 what you want.)
 </p>
 <dl compact="compact">
@@ -7334,7 +7337,7 @@
 <p>Puts a rectangular frame around <var>contents</var>.  The reference point is
 the bottom left corner of the frame.  In contrast to <code>\framebox</code>
 (see <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>), this command puts no extra space is put
-between the frame and the object.  It is fragle (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+between the frame and the object.  It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
 </p>
 
 <hr>
@@ -9553,7 +9556,7 @@
 is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
 so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
 prevent the break.  But for instance <code>\nopagebreak[1]</code> suggests to
-LaTeX that another spot might be preferrable.  The higher the number,
+LaTeX that another spot might be preferable.  The higher the number,
 the more insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile
 (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
 </p>
@@ -10442,8 +10445,8 @@
 may be the empty string).  If this is not in the definition then the
 environment does not take an optional argument.
 </p>
-<p>That is, when <var>optargdefault</var> is present in the environment
-definition then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+<p>That is, when <var>optargdefault</var> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
 in <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>optval</var>]{...} ... \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.
 In this case, within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the
 value of <var>optval</var>.  If you call <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> without
@@ -23550,6 +23553,7 @@
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-double_002c-in-text">dagger, double, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-in-text">dagger, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-in-text-1">dagger, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e">DANTE e.V.</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-for-titlepage">date, for titlepage</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-today_0027s">date, today’s</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-datetime-package"><code>datetime</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
@@ -23991,6 +23995,7 @@
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package-1"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package-2"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mirrors-of-CTAN">mirrors of CTAN</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mm"><code>mm</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modes">modes</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
 <tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-monospace-font">monospace font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>

Modified: trunk/latex2e.info
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.info	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.info	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@
    You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
 the '\begin{document}' commands.  This area is called the "preamble".
 
-   The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' pair makes an
+   The '\begin{document}', '\end{document}' pair defines an
 "environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
 all LaTeX documents (*note document::).  LaTeX make available to you
 many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::).  Many
@@ -504,13 +504,13 @@
 
 File: latex2e.info,  Node: CTAN,  Prev: LaTeX command syntax,  Up: Overview
 
-2.5 CTAN
-========
+2.5 CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+===========================================
 
 The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
 community's repository of free material.  It is a set of Internet sites
 around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
-Visit CTAN on the web at <https://www.ctan.org>.
+Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
 
    This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
 typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
@@ -523,12 +523,12 @@
 
    CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites.  One of the
 sites is the core.  This site actively manages the material, for
-instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.  It is
-sponsored by the German TeX group DANTE and is managed by Rainer
-Schoepf.  Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, by
-automatically syncing their collections with the core site and then in
-turn making their copies publicly available.  This gives users close to
-their location better access and relieves the core site of load.
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.  It is hosted
+by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the world help out
+by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their collections with the
+core site and then in turn making their copies publicly available.  This
+gives users close to their location better access and relieves the load
+on the core site.  The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
 
 
 File: latex2e.info,  Node: Document classes,  Next: Fonts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
@@ -1202,11 +1202,11 @@
 
    LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
 switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative.  They are used
-declaratively: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
+as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
 
    (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
-switching.  The earlier commands are an nimprovement in most
-curcumstances.  But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+switching.  The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances.  But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
 what you want.)
 
 '\bf'
@@ -4864,7 +4864,7 @@
    Puts a rectangular frame around CONTENTS.  The reference point is the
 bottom left corner of the frame.  In contrast to '\framebox' (*note
 \framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space is put between
-the frame and the object.  It is fragle (*note \protect::).
+the frame and the object.  It is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
 
 File: latex2e.info,  Node: \dashbox,  Prev: \frame,  Up: picture
@@ -6462,7 +6462,7 @@
 an integer that allows you to soften the request.  The default is 4, so
 that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
 prevent the break.  But for instance '\nopagebreak[1]' suggests to LaTeX
-that another spot might be preferrable.  The higher the number, the more
+that another spot might be preferable.  The higher the number, the more
 insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
 
    LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
@@ -7112,14 +7112,14 @@
      may be the empty string).  If this is not in the definition then
      the environment does not take an optional argument.
 
-     That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the environment
-     definition then you can start the environment with square brackets,
-     as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'.  In this case,
-     within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of OPTVAL.
-     If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then within
-     BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the default
-     OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, any required arguments start with
-     '#2'.
+     That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the definition of the
+     environment then you can start the environment with square
+     brackets, as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'.  In this
+     case, within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of
+     OPTVAL.  If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then
+     within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the
+     default OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, any required arguments
+     start with '#2'.
 
      Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different than having the square
      brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former results in '#1'
@@ -16476,6 +16476,7 @@
 * dagger, double, in text:               Text symbols.        (line 111)
 * dagger, in text:                       Text symbols.        (line  16)
 * dagger, in text <1>:                   Text symbols.        (line 108)
+* DANTE e.V.:                            CTAN.                (line  20)
 * date, for titlepage:                   \maketitle.          (line  51)
 * date, today's:                         \today.              (line   6)
 * datetime package:                      \today.              (line  27)
@@ -16965,6 +16966,7 @@
 * minted package:                        tabbing.             (line 146)
 * minted package <1>:                    verbatim.            (line  31)
 * minted package <2>:                    \verb.               (line  42)
+* mirrors of CTAN:                       CTAN.                (line  20)
 * mm:                                    Units of length.     (line  27)
 * modes:                                 Modes.               (line   6)
 * monospace font:                        Font styles.         (line  96)
@@ -17567,499 +17569,499 @@
 Node: Overview5371
 Node: Starting and ending6920
 Ref: Starting & ending7055
-Node: Output files8231
-Ref: output files dvi8510
-Ref: output files pdf9021
-Ref: output files log9344
-Ref: output files aux9541
-Node: TeX engines10510
-Ref: tex engines latex10859
-Ref: tex engines lualatex11691
-Ref: tex engines xelatex12176
-Node: LaTeX command syntax12980
-Node: Environment14823
-Node: Declaration15892
-Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother16276
-Node: \@ifstar18428
-Node: CTAN21213
-Node: Document classes22517
-Ref: document classes article22957
-Ref: document classes book23045
-Ref: document classes letter23230
-Ref: document classes report23306
-Ref: document classes slides23458
-Node: Document class options23840
-Node: Additional packages26922
-Node: Class and package construction27553
-Node: Class and package structure29003
-Node: Class and package commands31294
-Node: Fonts48908
-Ref: Typefaces49011
-Node: Font styles49339
-Node: Font sizes53603
-Node: Low-level font commands55222
-Ref: low level font commands fontencoding55506
-Ref: low level font commands fontfamily56062
-Ref: low level font commands fontseries56827
-Ref: low level font commands fontshape57979
-Ref: low level font commands fontsize58276
-Ref: low level font commands baselinestretch58801
-Ref: low level font commands linespread59510
-Ref: low level font commands selectfont59760
-Ref: low level font commands usefont60086
-Node: Layout60329
-Node: \onecolumn60827
-Node: \twocolumn61186
-Ref: twocolumn columnsep61809
-Ref: twocolumn columnseprule62058
-Ref: twocolumn columnwidth62354
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction62920
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction63863
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep64110
-Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep64415
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber64598
-Node: \flushbottom65563
-Node: \raggedbottom66663
-Node: Page layout parameters67199
-Ref: page layout parameters columnsep67402
-Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule67402
-Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth67402
-Ref: page layout parameters headheight67656
-Ref: page layout parameters headsep67823
-Ref: page layout parameters footskip68136
-Ref: page layout parameters linewidth68470
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush68823
-Ref: page layout parameters marginsep68823
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth68823
-Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin69863
-Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin69863
-Ref: page layout parameters paperheight70400
-Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth70626
-Ref: page layout parameters textheight70850
-Ref: page layout parameters textwidth71239
-Ref: page layout parameters hsize72168
-Ref: page layout parameters topmargin72374
-Ref: page layout parameters topskip72678
-Node: Floats72894
-Ref: floats bottomfraction77262
-Ref: floats floatpagefraction77389
-Ref: floats textfraction77500
-Ref: floats topfraction77702
-Ref: floats floatsep77954
-Ref: floats intextsep78064
-Ref: floats textfloatsep78279
-Ref: floats bottomnumber78543
-Ref: floats dbltopnumber78651
-Ref: floats topnumber78770
-Ref: floats totalnumber78874
-Node: Sectioning79403
-Ref: sectioning secnumdepth82136
-Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth82136
-Ref: sectioning tocdepth82737
-Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth82737
-Node: \part83782
-Node: \chapter85958
-Node: \section89732
-Node: \subsection92999
-Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph95713
-Node: \appendix98370
-Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter99660
-Node: \@startsection101001
-Ref: startsection name102378
-Ref: \@startsection/name102378
-Ref: startsection level102832
-Ref: \@startsection/level102832
-Ref: startsection indent103712
-Ref: \@startsection/indent103712
-Ref: startsection beforeskip103975
-Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip103975
-Ref: startsection afterskip105496
-Ref: \@startsection/afterskip105496
-Ref: startsection style106807
-Ref: \@startsection/style106807
-Node: Cross references110513
-Node: \label112606
-Node: \pageref114426
-Node: \ref115216
-Node: Environments116192
-Node: abstract118194
-Node: array119783
-Node: center122675
-Node: \centering124427
-Node: description125924
-Node: displaymath128139
-Node: document129926
-Node: \AtBeginDocument130356
-Node: \AtEndDocument130980
-Node: enumerate131624
-Ref: enumerate enumi133487
-Ref: enumerate enumii133487
-Ref: enumerate enumiii133487
-Ref: enumerate enumiv133487
-Ref: enumerate labelenumi133885
-Ref: enumerate labelenumii133885
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiii133885
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiv133885
-Node: eqnarray134424
-Node: equation136419
-Node: figure137087
-Node: filecontents139241
-Node: flushleft140988
-Node: \raggedright142005
-Node: flushright143203
-Node: \raggedleft143939
-Node: itemize144729
-Ref: itemize labelitemi145951
-Ref: itemize labelitemii145951
-Ref: itemize labelitemiii145951
-Ref: itemize labelitemiv145951
-Ref: itemize leftmargin146793
-Ref: itemize leftmargini146793
-Ref: itemize leftmarginii146793
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiii146793
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiv146793
-Ref: itemize leftmarginv146793
-Ref: itemize leftmarginvi146793
-Node: letter148197
-Node: list148435
-Ref: list makelabel150880
-Ref: list itemindent152264
-Ref: list itemsep152401
-Ref: list labelsep153053
-Ref: list labelwidth153216
-Ref: list leftmargin154227
-Ref: list listparindent155080
-Ref: list parsep155311
-Ref: list partopsep155814
-Ref: list rightmargin156612
-Ref: list topsep156797
-Ref: list beginparpenalty160372
-Ref: list itempenalty160471
-Ref: list endparpenalty160575
-Node: \item161447
-Node: trivlist162698
-Node: math164226
-Node: minipage164532
-Node: picture169810
-Node: \put176279
-Node: \multiput176844
-Node: \qbezier177583
-Node: \graphpaper178508
-Node: \line179302
-Node: \linethickness181266
-Node: \thinlines181715
-Node: \thicklines182126
-Node: \circle182510
-Node: \oval183050
-Node: \shortstack184026
-Node: \vector185423
-Node: \makebox (picture)186339
-Node: \framebox (picture)187521
-Node: \frame188994
-Node: \dashbox189433
-Node: quotation & quote190568
-Node: tabbing191464
-Node: table197457
-Node: tabular199550
-Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth205894
-Ref: tabular arraystrech206134
-Ref: tabular doublerulesep206355
-Ref: tabular tabcolsep206491
-Node: \multicolumn207012
-Node: \vline210871
-Node: \cline212262
-Node: \hline212972
-Node: thebibliography213654
-Node: \bibitem216064
-Node: \cite218339
-Node: \nocite219989
-Node: Using BibTeX220473
-Node: theorem222628
-Node: titlepage223550
-Node: verbatim224833
-Node: \verb226343
-Node: verse228163
-Node: Line breaking229390
-Node: \\230756
-Node: \obeycr & \restorecr233189
-Node: \newline233983
-Node: \- (hyphenation)235012
-Node: \discretionary236650
-Node: \fussy & \sloppy237538
-Node: sloppypar238321
-Node: \hyphenation239467
-Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak240061
-Node: Page breaking241208
-Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage243237
-Node: \newpage244757
-Node: \enlargethispage246055
-Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak247011
-Node: Footnotes248678
-Node: \footnote249824
-Ref: footnote footnoterule251092
-Ref: footnote footnotesep251703
-Node: \footnotemark252769
-Node: \footnotetext255108
-Node: Footnotes in section headings255709
-Node: Footnotes in a table256542
-Node: Footnotes of footnotes259464
-Node: Definitions260168
-Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand261045
-Node: \providecommand266275
-Node: \newcounter267421
-Node: \newlength269148
-Node: \newsavebox269970
-Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment270886
-Node: \newtheorem276202
-Node: \newfont279774
-Node: \protect281010
-Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend283396
-Node: Counters286134
-Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol287835
-Node: \usecounter290489
-Node: \value291348
-Node: \setcounter292401
-Node: \addtocounter292997
-Node: \refstepcounter293451
-Node: \stepcounter294120
-Node: \day & \month & \year294666
-Node: Lengths295477
-Node: Units of length299830
-Ref: units of length pt300033
-Ref: units of length pc300155
-Ref: units of length in300178
-Ref: units of length bp300204
-Ref: units of length cm300335
-Ref: units of length mm300357
-Ref: units of length dd300379
-Ref: units of length cc300411
-Ref: units of length sp300436
-Ref: Lengths/em300467
-Ref: Lengths/en300467
-Ref: Lengths/ex300467
-Ref: units of length em300467
-Ref: units of length en300467
-Ref: units of length ex300467
-Node: \setlength301323
-Node: \addtolength302100
-Node: \settodepth303062
-Node: \settoheight303852
-Node: \settowidth304646
-Node: Making paragraphs305425
-Node: \par307074
-Node: \indent & \noindent308919
-Node: \parindent & \parskip310453
-Node: Marginal notes311488
-Ref: marginal notes marginparpush312888
-Ref: marginal notes marginparsep313001
-Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth313133
-Node: Math formulas313482
-Node: Subscripts & superscripts317650
-Node: Math symbols319808
-Node: Blackboard bold345975
-Node: Calligraphic346747
-Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath347319
-Node: Dots348833
-Ref: ellipses cdots349255
-Ref: ellipses ddots349402
-Ref: ellipses ldots349491
-Ref: ellipses vdots349912
-Node: Math functions351098
-Node: Math accents352742
-Node: Over- and Underlining353641
-Node: Spacing in math mode355468
-Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace356400
-Ref: spacing in math mode medspace356492
-Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace356588
-Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace356588
-Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace357069
-Ref: spacing in math mode quad357267
-Ref: spacing in math mode qquad357523
-Node: Math miscellany357621
-Node: Colon character & \colon358180
-Node: \*358873
-Node: \frac359457
-Node: \left & \right359837
-Node: \sqrt361011
-Node: \stackrel361606
-Node: Modes361879
-Ref: modes paragraph mode362329
-Ref: modes lr mode362525
-Ref: modes math mode363131
-Ref: modes vertical mode363466
-Ref: modes internal vertical mode363637
-Ref: modes inner paragraph mode364110
-Ref: modes outer paragraph mode364110
-Node: \ensuremath364526
-Node: Page styles365231
-Node: \maketitle365994
-Node: \pagenumbering369004
-Node: \pagestyle370992
-Node: \thispagestyle374494
-Node: Spaces375451
-Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad376892
-Node: \hspace377806
-Node: \hfill379644
-Node: \hss380708
-Node: \spacefactor381402
-Node: \@384789
-Ref: \AT384889
-Node: \frenchspacing386829
-Node: \normalsfcodes387664
-Node: \(SPACE)387911
-Node: ~389546
-Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace392016
-Node: \/392959
-Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill394265
-Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip395621
-Ref: bigskip396439
-Ref: medskip396643
-Ref: smallskip396852
-Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak397513
-Node: \strut398499
-Node: \vspace401693
-Node: \vfill403256
-Node: \addvspace404184
-Node: Boxes406182
-Node: \mbox & \makebox406888
-Ref: mbox makebox depth408103
-Ref: mbox makebox height408103
-Ref: mbox makebox width408103
-Ref: mbox makebox totalheight408103
-Node: \fbox & \framebox410197
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule411510
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep411700
-Node: \parbox412789
-Node: \raisebox415093
-Ref: raisebox depth416056
-Ref: raisebox height416056
-Ref: raisebox width416056
-Ref: raisebox totalheight416056
-Node: \sbox & \savebox416770
-Node: lrbox419736
-Node: \usebox420558
-Node: Color420964
-Node: Color package options421808
-Node: Color models423454
-Ref: color models cmyk424251
-Ref: color models gray424614
-Ref: color models rgb424763
-Ref: color models RGB425100
-Ref: color models named425475
-Node: Commands for color425763
-Node: Define colors426178
-Node: Colored text426903
-Node: Colored boxes429301
-Node: Colored pages430690
-Node: Graphics431383
-Node: Graphics package options433510
-Node: Graphics package configuration436263
-Node: \graphicspath437065
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions439956
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule441724
-Node: Commands for graphics444910
-Node: \includegraphics445415
-Ref: includegraphics width450465
-Ref: includegraphics height450996
-Ref: includegraphics totalheght451402
-Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio451666
-Ref: includegraphics viewport453352
-Ref: includegraphics trim453722
-Ref: includegraphics clip454178
-Ref: includegraphics page454438
-Ref: includegraphics pagebox454529
-Ref: includegraphics interpolate455394
-Ref: includegraphics quiet455599
-Ref: includegraphics draft455760
-Ref: includegraphics bb456565
-Ref: includegraphics bbllx456963
-Ref: includegraphics bblly456963
-Ref: includegraphics bburx456963
-Ref: includegraphics bbury456963
-Ref: includegraphics natwidth457105
-Ref: includegraphics natheight457105
-Ref: includegraphics hiresbb457291
-Ref: includegraphics type458053
-Ref: includegraphics ext458093
-Ref: includegraphics read458196
-Ref: includegraphics command458313
-Node: \rotatebox458558
-Node: \scalebox461389
-Node: \resizebox462445
-Node: Special insertions463637
-Node: Reserved characters464439
-Node: Upper and lower case465641
-Node: Symbols by font position467556
-Node: Text symbols468176
-Node: Accents472177
-Node: Additional Latin letters474192
-Ref: Non-English characters474363
-Node: \rule475380
-Node: \today476552
-Node: Splitting the input477488
-Node: \endinput479229
-Node: \include & \includeonly480496
-Node: \input484718
-Node: Front/back matter485933
-Node: Table of contents etc.486266
-Node: \addcontentsline490002
-Node: \addtocontents492844
-Node: \nofiles494435
-Node: Indexes495167
-Node: \index496795
-Node: makeindex501910
-Ref: makeindex preamble503578
-Ref: makeindex postamble503718
-Ref: makeindex group skip503803
-Ref: makeindex letheadflag504123
-Ref: makeindex lethead prefix504587
-Ref: makeindex lethead suffix504739
-Ref: makeindex item 0504887
-Ref: makeindex item 1504967
-Ref: makeindex item 2505042
-Ref: makeindex item 01505120
-Ref: makeindex item x1505225
-Ref: makeindex item 12505430
-Ref: makeindex item x2505538
-Ref: makeindex delim 0505698
-Ref: makeindex delim 1505828
-Ref: makeindex delim 2505958
-Ref: makeindex delim n506084
-Ref: makeindex delim r506219
-Ref: makeindex line max506327
-Ref: makeindex indent space506462
-Ref: makeindex indent length506557
-Ref: makeindex page precedence506742
-Node: \printindex507616
-Node: Glossaries508088
-Node: \newglossaryentry510055
-Node: \gls511524
-Node: Letters512318
-Node: \address515945
-Node: \cc516756
-Node: \closing517198
-Node: \encl517512
-Node: \location517926
-Node: \makelabels518190
-Node: \name520507
-Node: \opening520748
-Node: \ps521029
-Node: \signature521318
-Node: \telephone522546
-Node: Terminal input/output522911
-Node: \typein523176
-Node: \typeout524425
-Node: Command line525469
-Node: Command line options527527
-Node: Command line input531069
-Node: Recovering from errors532933
-Node: Document templates534267
-Node: beamer template534712
-Node: article template535366
-Node: book template535793
-Node: Larger book template536274
-Node: tugboat template537760
-Node: Index540131
-Ref: Command Index540217
+Node: Output files8232
+Ref: output files dvi8511
+Ref: output files pdf9022
+Ref: output files log9345
+Ref: output files aux9542
+Node: TeX engines10511
+Ref: tex engines latex10860
+Ref: tex engines lualatex11692
+Ref: tex engines xelatex12177
+Node: LaTeX command syntax12981
+Node: Environment14824
+Node: Declaration15893
+Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother16277
+Node: \@ifstar18429
+Node: CTAN21214
+Node: Document classes22616
+Ref: document classes article23056
+Ref: document classes book23144
+Ref: document classes letter23329
+Ref: document classes report23405
+Ref: document classes slides23557
+Node: Document class options23939
+Node: Additional packages27021
+Node: Class and package construction27652
+Node: Class and package structure29102
+Node: Class and package commands31393
+Node: Fonts49007
+Ref: Typefaces49110
+Node: Font styles49438
+Node: Font sizes53703
+Node: Low-level font commands55322
+Ref: low level font commands fontencoding55606
+Ref: low level font commands fontfamily56162
+Ref: low level font commands fontseries56927
+Ref: low level font commands fontshape58079
+Ref: low level font commands fontsize58376
+Ref: low level font commands baselinestretch58901
+Ref: low level font commands linespread59610
+Ref: low level font commands selectfont59860
+Ref: low level font commands usefont60186
+Node: Layout60429
+Node: \onecolumn60927
+Node: \twocolumn61286
+Ref: twocolumn columnsep61909
+Ref: twocolumn columnseprule62158
+Ref: twocolumn columnwidth62454
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction63020
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction63963
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep64210
+Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep64515
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber64698
+Node: \flushbottom65663
+Node: \raggedbottom66763
+Node: Page layout parameters67299
+Ref: page layout parameters columnsep67502
+Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule67502
+Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth67502
+Ref: page layout parameters headheight67756
+Ref: page layout parameters headsep67923
+Ref: page layout parameters footskip68236
+Ref: page layout parameters linewidth68570
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush68923
+Ref: page layout parameters marginsep68923
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth68923
+Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin69963
+Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin69963
+Ref: page layout parameters paperheight70500
+Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth70726
+Ref: page layout parameters textheight70950
+Ref: page layout parameters textwidth71339
+Ref: page layout parameters hsize72268
+Ref: page layout parameters topmargin72474
+Ref: page layout parameters topskip72778
+Node: Floats72994
+Ref: floats bottomfraction77362
+Ref: floats floatpagefraction77489
+Ref: floats textfraction77600
+Ref: floats topfraction77802
+Ref: floats floatsep78054
+Ref: floats intextsep78164
+Ref: floats textfloatsep78379
+Ref: floats bottomnumber78643
+Ref: floats dbltopnumber78751
+Ref: floats topnumber78870
+Ref: floats totalnumber78974
+Node: Sectioning79503
+Ref: sectioning secnumdepth82236
+Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth82236
+Ref: sectioning tocdepth82837
+Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth82837
+Node: \part83882
+Node: \chapter86058
+Node: \section89832
+Node: \subsection93099
+Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph95813
+Node: \appendix98470
+Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter99760
+Node: \@startsection101101
+Ref: startsection name102478
+Ref: \@startsection/name102478
+Ref: startsection level102932
+Ref: \@startsection/level102932
+Ref: startsection indent103812
+Ref: \@startsection/indent103812
+Ref: startsection beforeskip104075
+Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip104075
+Ref: startsection afterskip105596
+Ref: \@startsection/afterskip105596
+Ref: startsection style106907
+Ref: \@startsection/style106907
+Node: Cross references110613
+Node: \label112706
+Node: \pageref114526
+Node: \ref115316
+Node: Environments116292
+Node: abstract118294
+Node: array119883
+Node: center122775
+Node: \centering124527
+Node: description126024
+Node: displaymath128239
+Node: document130026
+Node: \AtBeginDocument130456
+Node: \AtEndDocument131080
+Node: enumerate131724
+Ref: enumerate enumi133587
+Ref: enumerate enumii133587
+Ref: enumerate enumiii133587
+Ref: enumerate enumiv133587
+Ref: enumerate labelenumi133985
+Ref: enumerate labelenumii133985
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiii133985
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiv133985
+Node: eqnarray134524
+Node: equation136519
+Node: figure137187
+Node: filecontents139341
+Node: flushleft141088
+Node: \raggedright142105
+Node: flushright143303
+Node: \raggedleft144039
+Node: itemize144829
+Ref: itemize labelitemi146051
+Ref: itemize labelitemii146051
+Ref: itemize labelitemiii146051
+Ref: itemize labelitemiv146051
+Ref: itemize leftmargin146893
+Ref: itemize leftmargini146893
+Ref: itemize leftmarginii146893
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiii146893
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiv146893
+Ref: itemize leftmarginv146893
+Ref: itemize leftmarginvi146893
+Node: letter148297
+Node: list148535
+Ref: list makelabel150980
+Ref: list itemindent152364
+Ref: list itemsep152501
+Ref: list labelsep153153
+Ref: list labelwidth153316
+Ref: list leftmargin154327
+Ref: list listparindent155180
+Ref: list parsep155411
+Ref: list partopsep155914
+Ref: list rightmargin156712
+Ref: list topsep156897
+Ref: list beginparpenalty160472
+Ref: list itempenalty160571
+Ref: list endparpenalty160675
+Node: \item161547
+Node: trivlist162798
+Node: math164326
+Node: minipage164632
+Node: picture169910
+Node: \put176379
+Node: \multiput176944
+Node: \qbezier177683
+Node: \graphpaper178608
+Node: \line179402
+Node: \linethickness181366
+Node: \thinlines181815
+Node: \thicklines182226
+Node: \circle182610
+Node: \oval183150
+Node: \shortstack184126
+Node: \vector185523
+Node: \makebox (picture)186439
+Node: \framebox (picture)187621
+Node: \frame189094
+Node: \dashbox189534
+Node: quotation & quote190669
+Node: tabbing191565
+Node: table197558
+Node: tabular199651
+Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth205995
+Ref: tabular arraystrech206235
+Ref: tabular doublerulesep206456
+Ref: tabular tabcolsep206592
+Node: \multicolumn207113
+Node: \vline210972
+Node: \cline212363
+Node: \hline213073
+Node: thebibliography213755
+Node: \bibitem216165
+Node: \cite218440
+Node: \nocite220090
+Node: Using BibTeX220574
+Node: theorem222729
+Node: titlepage223651
+Node: verbatim224934
+Node: \verb226444
+Node: verse228264
+Node: Line breaking229491
+Node: \\230857
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr233290
+Node: \newline234084
+Node: \- (hyphenation)235113
+Node: \discretionary236751
+Node: \fussy & \sloppy237639
+Node: sloppypar238422
+Node: \hyphenation239568
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak240162
+Node: Page breaking241309
+Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage243338
+Node: \newpage244858
+Node: \enlargethispage246156
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak247112
+Node: Footnotes248778
+Node: \footnote249924
+Ref: footnote footnoterule251192
+Ref: footnote footnotesep251803
+Node: \footnotemark252869
+Node: \footnotetext255208
+Node: Footnotes in section headings255809
+Node: Footnotes in a table256642
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes259564
+Node: Definitions260268
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand261145
+Node: \providecommand266375
+Node: \newcounter267521
+Node: \newlength269248
+Node: \newsavebox270070
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment270986
+Node: \newtheorem276310
+Node: \newfont279882
+Node: \protect281118
+Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend283504
+Node: Counters286242
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol287943
+Node: \usecounter290597
+Node: \value291456
+Node: \setcounter292509
+Node: \addtocounter293105
+Node: \refstepcounter293559
+Node: \stepcounter294228
+Node: \day & \month & \year294774
+Node: Lengths295585
+Node: Units of length299938
+Ref: units of length pt300141
+Ref: units of length pc300263
+Ref: units of length in300286
+Ref: units of length bp300312
+Ref: units of length cm300443
+Ref: units of length mm300465
+Ref: units of length dd300487
+Ref: units of length cc300519
+Ref: units of length sp300544
+Ref: Lengths/em300575
+Ref: Lengths/en300575
+Ref: Lengths/ex300575
+Ref: units of length em300575
+Ref: units of length en300575
+Ref: units of length ex300575
+Node: \setlength301431
+Node: \addtolength302208
+Node: \settodepth303170
+Node: \settoheight303960
+Node: \settowidth304754
+Node: Making paragraphs305533
+Node: \par307182
+Node: \indent & \noindent309027
+Node: \parindent & \parskip310561
+Node: Marginal notes311596
+Ref: marginal notes marginparpush312996
+Ref: marginal notes marginparsep313109
+Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth313241
+Node: Math formulas313590
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts317758
+Node: Math symbols319916
+Node: Blackboard bold346083
+Node: Calligraphic346855
+Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath347427
+Node: Dots348941
+Ref: ellipses cdots349363
+Ref: ellipses ddots349510
+Ref: ellipses ldots349599
+Ref: ellipses vdots350020
+Node: Math functions351206
+Node: Math accents352850
+Node: Over- and Underlining353749
+Node: Spacing in math mode355576
+Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace356508
+Ref: spacing in math mode medspace356600
+Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace356696
+Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace356696
+Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace357177
+Ref: spacing in math mode quad357375
+Ref: spacing in math mode qquad357631
+Node: Math miscellany357729
+Node: Colon character & \colon358288
+Node: \*358981
+Node: \frac359565
+Node: \left & \right359945
+Node: \sqrt361119
+Node: \stackrel361714
+Node: Modes361987
+Ref: modes paragraph mode362437
+Ref: modes lr mode362633
+Ref: modes math mode363239
+Ref: modes vertical mode363574
+Ref: modes internal vertical mode363745
+Ref: modes inner paragraph mode364218
+Ref: modes outer paragraph mode364218
+Node: \ensuremath364634
+Node: Page styles365339
+Node: \maketitle366102
+Node: \pagenumbering369112
+Node: \pagestyle371100
+Node: \thispagestyle374602
+Node: Spaces375559
+Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad377000
+Node: \hspace377914
+Node: \hfill379752
+Node: \hss380816
+Node: \spacefactor381510
+Node: \@384897
+Ref: \AT384997
+Node: \frenchspacing386937
+Node: \normalsfcodes387772
+Node: \(SPACE)388019
+Node: ~389654
+Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace392124
+Node: \/393067
+Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill394373
+Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip395729
+Ref: bigskip396547
+Ref: medskip396751
+Ref: smallskip396960
+Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak397621
+Node: \strut398607
+Node: \vspace401801
+Node: \vfill403364
+Node: \addvspace404292
+Node: Boxes406290
+Node: \mbox & \makebox406996
+Ref: mbox makebox depth408211
+Ref: mbox makebox height408211
+Ref: mbox makebox width408211
+Ref: mbox makebox totalheight408211
+Node: \fbox & \framebox410305
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule411618
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep411808
+Node: \parbox412897
+Node: \raisebox415201
+Ref: raisebox depth416164
+Ref: raisebox height416164
+Ref: raisebox width416164
+Ref: raisebox totalheight416164
+Node: \sbox & \savebox416878
+Node: lrbox419844
+Node: \usebox420666
+Node: Color421072
+Node: Color package options421916
+Node: Color models423562
+Ref: color models cmyk424359
+Ref: color models gray424722
+Ref: color models rgb424871
+Ref: color models RGB425208
+Ref: color models named425583
+Node: Commands for color425871
+Node: Define colors426286
+Node: Colored text427011
+Node: Colored boxes429409
+Node: Colored pages430798
+Node: Graphics431491
+Node: Graphics package options433618
+Node: Graphics package configuration436371
+Node: \graphicspath437173
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions440064
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule441832
+Node: Commands for graphics445018
+Node: \includegraphics445523
+Ref: includegraphics width450573
+Ref: includegraphics height451104
+Ref: includegraphics totalheght451510
+Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio451774
+Ref: includegraphics viewport453460
+Ref: includegraphics trim453830
+Ref: includegraphics clip454286
+Ref: includegraphics page454546
+Ref: includegraphics pagebox454637
+Ref: includegraphics interpolate455502
+Ref: includegraphics quiet455707
+Ref: includegraphics draft455868
+Ref: includegraphics bb456673
+Ref: includegraphics bbllx457071
+Ref: includegraphics bblly457071
+Ref: includegraphics bburx457071
+Ref: includegraphics bbury457071
+Ref: includegraphics natwidth457213
+Ref: includegraphics natheight457213
+Ref: includegraphics hiresbb457399
+Ref: includegraphics type458161
+Ref: includegraphics ext458201
+Ref: includegraphics read458304
+Ref: includegraphics command458421
+Node: \rotatebox458666
+Node: \scalebox461497
+Node: \resizebox462553
+Node: Special insertions463745
+Node: Reserved characters464547
+Node: Upper and lower case465749
+Node: Symbols by font position467664
+Node: Text symbols468284
+Node: Accents472285
+Node: Additional Latin letters474300
+Ref: Non-English characters474471
+Node: \rule475488
+Node: \today476660
+Node: Splitting the input477596
+Node: \endinput479337
+Node: \include & \includeonly480604
+Node: \input484826
+Node: Front/back matter486041
+Node: Table of contents etc.486374
+Node: \addcontentsline490110
+Node: \addtocontents492952
+Node: \nofiles494543
+Node: Indexes495275
+Node: \index496903
+Node: makeindex502018
+Ref: makeindex preamble503686
+Ref: makeindex postamble503826
+Ref: makeindex group skip503911
+Ref: makeindex letheadflag504231
+Ref: makeindex lethead prefix504695
+Ref: makeindex lethead suffix504847
+Ref: makeindex item 0504995
+Ref: makeindex item 1505075
+Ref: makeindex item 2505150
+Ref: makeindex item 01505228
+Ref: makeindex item x1505333
+Ref: makeindex item 12505538
+Ref: makeindex item x2505646
+Ref: makeindex delim 0505806
+Ref: makeindex delim 1505936
+Ref: makeindex delim 2506066
+Ref: makeindex delim n506192
+Ref: makeindex delim r506327
+Ref: makeindex line max506435
+Ref: makeindex indent space506570
+Ref: makeindex indent length506665
+Ref: makeindex page precedence506850
+Node: \printindex507724
+Node: Glossaries508196
+Node: \newglossaryentry510163
+Node: \gls511632
+Node: Letters512426
+Node: \address516053
+Node: \cc516864
+Node: \closing517306
+Node: \encl517620
+Node: \location518034
+Node: \makelabels518298
+Node: \name520615
+Node: \opening520856
+Node: \ps521137
+Node: \signature521426
+Node: \telephone522654
+Node: Terminal input/output523019
+Node: \typein523284
+Node: \typeout524533
+Node: Command line525577
+Node: Command line options527635
+Node: Command line input531177
+Node: Recovering from errors533041
+Node: Document templates534375
+Node: beamer template534820
+Node: article template535474
+Node: book template535901
+Node: Larger book template536382
+Node: tugboat template537868
+Node: Index540239
+Ref: Command Index540325
 
 End Tag Table

Modified: trunk/latex2e.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)

Modified: trunk/latex2e.texi
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.texi	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.texi	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -310,8 +310,8 @@
 @code{\documentclass} and the @code{\begin@{document@}} commands.
 This area is called the @dfn{preamble}.
 
- at cindex environment, document
-The @code{\begin@{document@} ... \end@{document@}} pair defines an
+The @code{\begin@{document@}}, @code{\end@{document@}} pair defines an
+ at cindex environment
 @dfn{environment}; the @samp{document} environment (and no others) is
 required in all @LaTeX{} documents (@pxref{document}).  @LaTeX{} make
 available to you many environments that are documented here

Modified: trunk/latex2e.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.txt	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.txt	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -28,8 +28,7 @@
 27 Terminal input/output
 28 Command line
 Appendix A Document templates
-Concept Index
-Command Index
+Index
 LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
 1 About this document
 2 Overview of LaTeX
@@ -39,8 +38,9 @@
   2.4 LaTeX command syntax
     2.4.1 Environments
     2.4.2 Command declarations
-    2.4.3 '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'
+    2.4.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
       2.4.3.1 '\@ifstar'
+  2.5 CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
 3 Document classes
   3.1 Document class options
   3.2 Additional packages
@@ -59,11 +59,18 @@
   5.5 Page layout parameters
   5.6 Floats
 6 Sectioning
-  6.1 '\@startsection'
+  6.1 '\part'
+  6.2 '\chapter'
+  6.3 '\section'
+  6.4 '\subsection'
+  6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+  6.6 '\appendix'
+  6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+  6.8 '\@startsection'
 7 Cross references
   7.1 '\label'
-  7.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
-  7.3 '\ref{KEY}'
+  7.2 '\pageref'
+  7.3 '\ref'
 8 Environments
   8.1 'abstract'
   8.2 'array'
@@ -91,21 +98,23 @@
   8.17 'math'
   8.18 'minipage'
   8.19 'picture'
-    8.19.1 '\circle'
-    8.19.2 '\makebox'
-    8.19.3 '\framebox'
-    8.19.4 '\dashbox'
-    8.19.5 '\frame'
-    8.19.6 '\line'
-    8.19.7 '\linethickness'
+    8.19.1 '\put'
+    8.19.2 '\multiput'
+    8.19.3 '\qbezier'
+    8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+    8.19.5 '\line'
+    8.19.6 '\linethickness'
+    8.19.7 '\thinlines'
     8.19.8 '\thicklines'
-    8.19.9 '\thinlines'
-    8.19.10 '\multiput'
-    8.19.11 '\oval'
-    8.19.12 '\put'
-    8.19.13 '\shortstack'
-    8.19.14 '\vector'
-  8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
+    8.19.9 '\circle'
+    8.19.10 '\oval'
+    8.19.11 '\shortstack'
+    8.19.12 '\vector'
+    8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+    8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+    8.19.15 '\frame'
+    8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+  8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
   8.21 'tabbing'
   8.22 'table'
   8.23 'tabular'
@@ -129,99 +138,109 @@
   9.3 '\newline'
   9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
   9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
-  9.6 '\fussy'
-  9.7 '\sloppy'
-  9.8 '\hyphenation'
-  9.9 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+  9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+    9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+  9.7 '\hyphenation'
+  9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
 10 Page breaking
-  10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
-  10.2 '\clearpage'
-  10.3 '\newpage'
-  10.4 '\enlargethispage'
-  10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+  10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+  10.2 '\newpage'
+  10.3 '\enlargethispage'
+  10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
 11 Footnotes
   11.1 '\footnote'
   11.2 '\footnotemark'
   11.3 '\footnotetext'
-  11.4 Footnotes in a table
-  11.5 Footnotes in section headings
+  11.4 Footnotes in section headings
+  11.5 Footnotes in a table
   11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
-  11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
-  11.8 Footnote parameters
 12 Definitions
   12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
   12.2 '\providecommand'
   12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
-  12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
-  12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
+  12.4 '\newlength'
+  12.5 '\newsavebox'
   12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
   12.7 '\newtheorem'
-  12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
+  12.8 '\newfont'
   12.9 '\protect'
   12.10 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
 13 Counters
   13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
-  13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
-  13.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
-  13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
-  13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
-  13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
-  13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
-  13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
+  13.2 '\usecounter'
+  13.3 '\value'
+  13.4 '\setcounter'
+  13.5 '\addtocounter'
+  13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+  13.7 '\stepcounter'
+  13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
 14 Lengths
   14.1 Units of length
   14.2 '\setlength'
   14.3 '\addtolength'
   14.4 '\settodepth'
   14.5 '\settoheight'
-  14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
-  14.7 Predefined lengths
+  14.6 '\settowidth'
 15 Making paragraphs
-  15.1 '\indent'
-  15.2 '\noindent'
-  15.3 '\parskip'
+  15.1 '\par'
+  15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+  15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
   15.4 Marginal notes
 16 Math formulas
   16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
   16.2 Math symbols
+    16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+    16.2.2 Calligraphic
+    16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+    16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
   16.3 Math functions
   16.4 Math accents
-  16.5 Spacing in math mode
-  16.6 Math miscellany
+  16.5 Over- and Underlining
+  16.6 Spacing in math mode
+  16.7 Math miscellany
+    16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+    16.7.2 '\*'
+    16.7.3 '\frac'
+    16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
+    16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+    16.7.6 '\stackrel'
 17 Modes
   17.1 '\ensuremath'
 18 Page styles
   18.1 '\maketitle'
   18.2 '\pagenumbering'
   18.3 '\pagestyle'
-  18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
+  18.4 '\thispagestyle'
 19 Spaces
-  19.1 '\hspace'
-  19.2 '\hfill'
-  19.3 '\spacefactor'
-    19.3.1 '\(SPACE)' and '\@'
-    19.3.2 '\frenchspacing'
-    19.3.3 '\normalsfcodes'
-  19.4 '\ ' after control sequence
-  19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
-  19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
-  19.7 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
-  19.8 '\addvspace'
-  19.9 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
-  19.10 '\vfill'
-  19.11 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
+  19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+  19.2 '\hspace'
+  19.3 '\hfill'
+  19.4 '\hss'
+  19.5 '\spacefactor'
+    19.5.1 '\@'
+    19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
+    19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+  19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+  19.7 '~'
+  19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
+  19.9 '\/'
+  19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+  19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+  19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+  19.13 '\strut'
+  19.14 '\vspace'
+  19.15 '\vfill'
+  19.16 '\addvspace'
 20 Boxes
-  20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
-  20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
-  20.3 'lrbox'
-  20.4 '\makebox'
-  20.5 '\parbox'
-  20.6 '\raisebox'
-  20.7 '\savebox'
-  20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
-  20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}'
+  20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+  20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+  20.3 '\parbox'
+  20.4 '\raisebox'
+  20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+  20.6 'lrbox'
+  20.7 '\usebox'
 21 Color
-  21.1 Color package options
+  21.1 'color' package options
   21.2 Color models
   21.3 Commands for color
     21.3.1 Define colors
@@ -229,8 +248,8 @@
     21.3.3 Colored boxes
     21.3.4 Colored pages
 22 Graphics
-  22.1 Graphics package options
-  22.2 Graphics package configuration
+  22.1 'graphics' package options
+  22.2 'graphics' package configuration
     22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
     22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
     22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
@@ -249,15 +268,21 @@
   23.7 '\rule'
   23.8 '\today'
 24 Splitting the input
-  24.1 '\include'
-  24.2 '\includeonly'
+  24.1 '\endinput'
+  24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
   24.3 '\input'
 25 Front/back matter
-  25.1 Tables of contents
+  25.1 Table of contents etc.
     25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
     25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
-  25.2 Glossaries
-  25.3 Indexes
+    25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+  25.2 Indexes
+    25.2.1 '\index'
+    25.2.2 'makeindex'
+    25.2.3 '\printindex'
+  25.3 Glossaries
+    25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+    25.3.2 '\gls'
 26 Letters
   26.1 '\address'
   26.2 '\cc'
@@ -271,19 +296,23 @@
   26.10 '\signature'
   26.11 '\telephone'
 27 Terminal input/output
-  27.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
-  27.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
+  27.1 '\typein'
+  27.2 '\typeout'
 28 Command line
+  28.1 Command line options
+  28.2 Command line input
+  28.3 Recovering from errors
 Appendix A Document templates
   A.1 'beamer' template
-  A.2 'book' template
-  A.3 'tugboat' template
-Concept Index
-Command Index
+  A.2 'article' template
+  A.3 'book' template
+  A.4 Larger 'book' template
+  A.5 'tugboat' template
+Index
 LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
 ***************************************
 
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of March 2018)
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of July 2018)
 for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
 
 1 About this document
@@ -292,9 +321,9 @@
 This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
 preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
 program (*note Overview::).  This document's home page is
-<http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/>.  That page has links
-to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives
-and subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
+<puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman>.  That page has links to the
+current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
+subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
 
    In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
 'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
@@ -359,26 +388,30 @@
 =======================
 
 LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
-and ending.  Here is a "hello, world" example:
+and ending.  This is a small example.
 
      \documentclass{article}
      \begin{document}
      Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
      \end{document}
 
-Here, the 'article' is the so-called "document class", implemented in a
-file 'article.cls'.  Any document class can be used.  A few document
-classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of others are widely
-available.  *Note Document classes::.
+Every LaTeX document has a '\begin{document}' line and an
+'\end{document}' line.
 
+Here, the 'article' is the "document class".  It is implemented in a
+file 'article.cls'.  You can use any document class on your system.  A
+few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of
+others are widely available.  *Note Document classes::.
+
    You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
 the '\begin{document}' commands.  This area is called the "preamble".
 
-   The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' is a so-called
+   The '\begin{document}', '\end{document}' pair defines an
 "environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
-all LaTeX documents (*note document::).  LaTeX provides many
-environments itself, and many more are defined separately.  *Note
-Environments::.
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::).  LaTeX make available to you
+many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::).  Many
+more are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
+available at CTAN (*note CTAN::).
 
    The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
 from a LaTeX input file.
@@ -386,7 +419,7 @@
 2.2 Output files
 ================
 
-LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two accessory files.  The
+LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.  The
 main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
 
 '.dvi'
@@ -426,15 +459,15 @@
    LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
 ending.  These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of
 figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file
-used to make a table of contents.  A particular class may create others;
-the list is open-ended.
+used to make a table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::).  A
+particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
 
 2.3 TeX engines
 ===============
 
 LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
 implementation (*note Overview::).  This section gives a terse overview
-of the main programs.
+of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
 
 'latex'
 'pdflatex'
@@ -530,7 +563,7 @@
        ...
      \end{verse}
 
-   See *note Environments:: for a list of environments.
+   *Note Environments:: for a list of environments.
 
    The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
 end.  This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
@@ -552,8 +585,8 @@
 command or parameter.  For instance, the '\mainmatter' command changes
 the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
 
-2.4.3 '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'
-----------------------------------------
+2.4.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
+--------------------------------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -590,10 +623,9 @@
 <http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.  These macros are mainly intended to
 package or class authors.
 
-   The example below is typical.  In the user's class file is a command
-'\thesis at universityname'.  The user wants to change the definition.
-These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
-'\begin{document}'.
+   In this example the class file has a command '\thesis at universityname'
+that the user wants to change.  These three lines should go in the
+preamble, before the '\begin{document}'.
 
      \makeatletter
      \renewcommand{\thesis at universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
@@ -605,8 +637,8 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd at star}{\mycmd at nostar}}
-     \newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[NON-STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF NON-STARRED COMMAND}
-     \newcommand{\mycmd at star}[STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF STARRED COMMAND}
+     \newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[NOSTAR-NUM-ARGS]{NOSTAR-BODY}
+     \newcommand{\mycmd at star}[STAR-NUM-ARGS]{STAR-BODY}
 
    Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
 same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk.  Examples
@@ -625,7 +657,7 @@
 could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
 arguments at all.  As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
 at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
-block (*note \makeatletter and \makeatother::).
+block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
 
    This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
 '\ciel*'.  Both have one required argument.  A call to '\ciel{night}'
@@ -637,14 +669,15 @@
      \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel at starred}{\ciel at unstarred}}
 
    In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
-arguments than does the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent
-007's '``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.'''
-is equivalent to '``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James}
-textsc{Bond}.'''
+arguments than the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent 007's
+'``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''' is
+equivalent to entering the commands '``My name is \textsc{Bond},
+\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'''
 
      \newcommand*{\agentsecret at unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
      \newcommand*{\agentsecret at starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-     \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
+     \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+       \@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
 
    There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
 of '\@ifstar'.  The 'suffix' package allows the construct
@@ -657,6 +690,32 @@
        {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
        }
 
+2.5 CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+===========================================
+
+The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
+community's repository of free material.  It is a set of Internet sites
+around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
+Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
+
+   This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people.  For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
+specifications.
+
+   In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features
+such as search by name or by functionality.
+
+   CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites.  One of the
+sites is the core.  This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.  It is hosted
+by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the world help out
+by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their collections with the
+core site and then in turn making their copies publicly available.  This
+gives users close to their location better access and relieves the load
+on the core site.  The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
+
 3 Document classes
 ******************
 
@@ -694,9 +753,9 @@
 3.1 Document class options
 ==========================
 
-You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the
+You can specify "global options" or "class options" to the
 '\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets.  To
-specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma, as in:
+specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma.
 
      \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
 
@@ -823,11 +882,11 @@
    Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
 character in command names without having to surround the code
 containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'.  *Note
-\makeatletter and \makeatother::.  This allow you to create commands
-that users will not accidentally redefine.  Another technique is to
-preface class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent
-your class or package from interfering with others.  For instance, the
-class 'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc at tolist', '\smc at fromlist', etc.
+\makeatletter & \makeatother::.  This allow you to create commands that
+users will not accidentally redefine.  Another technique is to preface
+class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your
+class or package from interfering with others.  For instance, the class
+'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc at tolist', '\smc at fromlist', etc.
 
 3.3.1 Class and package structure
 ---------------------------------
@@ -863,7 +922,7 @@
      \ProcessOptions\relax
      \LoadClass{article}
 
-   It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
 passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
 class to provide the basis for this class's code.
 
@@ -936,11 +995,11 @@
 
 '\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
 '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
-     Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+     Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
      '\documentclass' command.  For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
-     have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
-     first page with '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}'.  The class file
-     must contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
+     have an option '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}' allowing users to
+     put the institutional logo on the first page.  The class file must
+     contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
      '\ProcessOptions').
 
      If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
@@ -980,10 +1039,11 @@
      and the command is used within a moving argument, use
      '\newcommand'.
 
-     The 'etoolbox' package offers commands '\newrobustcmd',
-     '\newrobustcmd*', '\renewrobustcmd', '\renewrobustcmd*',
-     '\providerobustcmd', and '\providerobustcmd*' which are similar to
-     '\newcommand', '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
+     The 'etoolbox' package offers the commands '\newrobustcmd',
+     '\newrobustcmd*', as well as the commands '\renewrobustcmd',
+     '\renewrobustcmd*', and the commands '\providerobustcmd', and
+     '\providerobustcmd*'.  These are similar to '\newcommand',
+     '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
      '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
      with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
        1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
@@ -997,13 +1057,16 @@
 
 '\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
 '\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
-     Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX can find the file 'FILE NAME' and FALSE
-     CODE otherwise.  In the second case it inputs the file immediately
-     after executing TRUE CODE.  Thus
-     '\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
-     img.pdf not found}}' will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is
-     found but otherwise just give a warning.
+     Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file 'FILE NAME' or FALSE CODE
+     otherwise.  In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
+     inputs the file.  Thus the command
 
+          \IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+            \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+
+     will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is found and otherwise
+     give a warning.
+
      This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
      uses, not only in the current directory.  To look only in the
      current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
@@ -1024,10 +1087,12 @@
 
      If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
      on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
-     in the log like 'You have requested, on input line 4, version
-     `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
-     `2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.'
+     in the log like this.
 
+          You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+          document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+          Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+
      The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
      options for the current class.  This means it ignores any options
      passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'.  This is a convenience
@@ -1058,9 +1123,11 @@
      features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
      were implemented.  If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
      If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
-     FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested release
-     `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is available.'
+     FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like this.
 
+          You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+          release `2016/02/01' is available.
+
 '\OptionNotUsed'
      Adds the current option to the list of unused options.  Can only be
      used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
@@ -1081,18 +1148,21 @@
 
      If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
      collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
-     '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}'
-     with the single '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
-     But if you are loading a package that in turn loads another package
-     then you need to queue up the options you desire for this other
-     package.  For instance, suppose the package 'foo' loads the package
-     'geometry'.  Instead of
-     '\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}' you must
-     write '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
-     \RequirePackage{foo}'.  (If 'foo.sty' loads an option in conflict
-     with what you want then you may have to look into altering its
-     source.)
+     '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}' and
+     '\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}' with the single command
+     '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
 
+     However, imagine that you are loading 'firstpkg' and inside that
+     package it loads 'secondpkg', and you need the second package to be
+     loaded with option 'draft'.  Then before doing the first package
+     you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+
+          \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+          \RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+
+     (If 'firstpkg.sty' loads an option in conflict with what you want
+     then you may have to alter its source.)
+
      These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
      package writers.  For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
      'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
@@ -1143,31 +1213,33 @@
      Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
      and the log file.
 
-     When a user writes '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then LaTeX loads the
-     file 'smcmemo.cls'.  Similarly, a user writing '\usepackage{test}'
-     prompts LaTeX to load the file 'test.sty'.  If the name of the file
-     does not match the declared class or package name then you get a
-     warning.  Thus, if you invoke '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the
-     file 'smcmemo.cls' has the statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you
-     get a warning like 'You have requested document class `smcmemo',
-     but the document class provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not
-     prevent LaTeX from processing the rest of the class file normally.
+     When you load a class or package, for example with
+     '\documentclass{smcmemo}' or '\usepackage{test}', LaTeX inputs a
+     file.  If the name of the file does not match the class or package
+     name declared in it then you get a warning.  Thus, if you invoke
+     '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the file 'smcmemo.cls' has the
+     statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you get a warning like 'You
+     have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class
+     provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+     processing the rest of the class file normally.
 
-     If you include the optional argument, then you must include the
-     date, before the first space if any, and it must have the form
-     'YYYY/MM/DD'.  The rest of the optional argument is free-form,
-     although it traditionally identifies the class, and is written to
-     the screen during compilation and to the log file.  Thus, if your
-     file 'smcmemo.cls' contains the line
-     '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]' and your
-     document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then you will
-     see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class'.
+     If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+     before any spaces, of the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.  The rest of the
+     optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally
+     identifies the class, and is written to the screen during
+     compilation and to the log file.  Thus, if your file 'smcmemo.cls'
+     contains the line '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+     class]' and your document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}'
+     then you will see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+     class'.
 
      The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
-     ask to be warned if the version of the class or package installed
-     on their system is earlier than RELEASE DATE, by using the optional
-     arguments such as '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
-     '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]'.  (Note that package users only
+     ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier
+     than RELEASE DATE.  For instance, a user could enter
+     '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
+     '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]' to require a class or package with
+     certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+     than the given date.  (Although, in practice package users only
      rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
 
 '\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
@@ -1180,11 +1252,10 @@
 
 '\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
 '\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
-     Load a package, like the document author command '\usepackage'.
-     *Note Additional packages::.  An example is
-     '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.  Note that the
-     LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these commands
-     over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide.
+     Load a package, like the command '\usepackage' (*note Additional
+     packages::).  The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
+     these commands over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide.  An
+     example is '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.
 
      The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list.  The
      RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD.  If the
@@ -1217,27 +1288,27 @@
 
 The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
 
-   This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as
-in '\textit{TEXT}'.  In the table below, the corresponding command in
-parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no arguments, as in
-'{\itshape TEXT}'.  The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
+   In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, is
+used with an argument, as in '\textit{TEXT}'.  This is the preferred
+form.  But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the corresponding
+declaration form, which is sometimes useful.  This form takes no
+arguments, as in '{\itshape TEXT}'.  The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
+In addition, each has an environment form such as
+'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}'.
 
    These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
-are cumulative; e.g., you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or
-'\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif.
+are cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying
+either of '\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
 
-   You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations;
-for instance, '\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.
+   One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert
+italic corrections if needed (*note \/::).  Specifically, they insert
+the italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a period and a comma.  To
+suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use '\nocorr' at
+the start or end of the command argument, such as '\textit{\nocorr
+text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
 
-   These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections
-if needed.  (*Note \/::, for the details of italic corrections.)
-Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following
-character is in the list '\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a
-period and a comma.  To suppress the automatic insertion of italic
-correction, use '\nocorr' at the start or end of the command argument,
-such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
-
 '\textrm (\rmfamily)'
      Roman.
 
@@ -1275,10 +1346,14 @@
 but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
 
    LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
-switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative.  Also, they
-are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD...}' instead of
-'\CMD{...}'.  These are two unrelated constructs.
+switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative.  They are used
+as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
 
+   (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching.  The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances.  But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+
 '\bf'
      Switch to bold face.
 
@@ -1305,12 +1380,6 @@
 
    The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
 
-   (Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
-as '\tt', obsolete and that only the cumulative commands ('\texttt')
-should be used.  Others think that both sets of commands have their
-place and sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely what you
-want; for one example, *note 'description': description.)
-
    The following commands are for use in math mode.  They are not
 cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
 italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics.  This is because
@@ -1362,24 +1431,33 @@
 (in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
 respectively (*note Document class options::).
 
-Command                   '10pt'  '11pt'  '12pt'
---------------------------------------------------
-'\tiny'                   5       6       6
-'\scriptsize'             7       8       8
-'\footnotesize'           8       9       10
-'\small'                  9       10      10.95
-'\normalsize' (default)   10      10.95   12
-'\large'                  12      12      14.4
-'\Large'                  14.4    14.4    17.28
-'\LARGE'                  17.28   17.28   20.74
-'\huge'                   20.74   20.74   24.88
-'\Huge'                   24.88   24.88   24.88
+Command                     '10pt'    '11pt'    '12pt'
+--------------------------------------------------------
+'\tiny'                     5         6         6
+'\scriptsize'               7         8         8
+'\footnotesize'             8         9         10
+'\small'                    9         10        10.95
+'\normalsize' (default)     10        10.95     12
+'\large'                    12        12        14.4
+'\Large'                    14.4      14.4      17.28
+'\LARGE'                    17.28     17.28     20.74
+'\huge'                     20.74     20.74     24.88
+'\Huge'                     24.88     24.88     24.88
 
-   The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".  The scope of
-the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
-of the current group.  You can also use the environment form of these
-commands; for instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+   The commands are listed here in declaration forms.  You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
 
+     \begin{quotation} \small
+       The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+     \end{quotation}
+
+The scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
+environment.  It would also end at the next type style command or the
+end of the current group, so you could enclose it in extra curly braces
+'{\small We are here, we are here, we are here!}'.  You can instead use
+the environment form of these commands; for instance,
+'\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+
 4.3 Low-level font commands
 ===========================
 
@@ -1401,7 +1479,7 @@
      Select the font family.  The web page
      <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
      through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX.  Here are
-     examples of some common families:
+     examples of some common families.
 
      'pag'  Avant Garde
      'fvs'  Bitstream Vera Sans
@@ -1530,12 +1608,15 @@
 5.1 '\onecolumn'
 ================
 
-Start a new page and produce single-column output.  If the document is
-given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
-(*note Document class options::).
+Synopsis:
 
-   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+     \onecolumn
 
+   Start a new page and produce single-column output.  If the document
+is given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
+(*note Document class options::).  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
 5.2 '\twocolumn'
 ================
 
@@ -1546,13 +1627,11 @@
 
    Start a new page and produce two-column output.  If the document is
 given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
-Document class options::).
+Document class options::).  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
    If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
 typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
 
-   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
-
    These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
 
 '\columnsep'
@@ -1599,8 +1678,7 @@
         * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
           number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
 
-     You can redefine it, for instance with
-     '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
+     You can redefine it, as with '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
 
 '\dblfloatpagefraction'
      For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
@@ -1756,13 +1834,13 @@
 
 '\paperheight'
      The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
-     area.  It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+     area.  Normally set with a document class option, as in
      '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
      options::).
 
 '\paperwidth'
      The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
-     area.  It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+     area.  Normally set with a document class option, as in
      '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
      options::).
 
@@ -1794,6 +1872,7 @@
      specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
      the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
 
+'\hsize'
      This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
      primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines.  It should
      not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
@@ -1919,7 +1998,7 @@
      floats; default '.7'.
 
    Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
-'\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+a command of the form '\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
 
 '\floatsep'
      Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
@@ -1935,7 +2014,7 @@
      default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
 
    Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
-'\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+a command of the form '\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
 
 'bottomnumber'
      Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
@@ -1963,57 +2042,498 @@
 6 Sectioning
 ************
 
-Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
+Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc.  All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
 
-'\part'
-'\chapter'
-     ('report' and 'book' class only)
-'\section'
-'\subsection'
-'\subsubsection'
-'\paragraph'
-'\subparagraph'
+     SECTIONING-COMMAND{TITLE}
+     SECTIONING-COMMAND*{TITLE}
+     SECTIONING-COMMAND[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
 
-   All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
+For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+'\subsection{Motivation}'.
 
-     \chapter[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+   The table has each SECTIONING-COMMAND in LaTeX.  All are available in
+all of LaTeX's standard document classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', except that '\chapter' is not available in 'article'.
 
-   In addition to providing the heading TITLE in the main text, the
-section title can appear in two other places:
+Sectioning unit    Command            Level
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+Part               '\part'            -1 ('book', 'report'), 0
+                                      ('article')
+Chapter            '\chapter'         0
+Section            '\section'         1
+Subsection         '\subsection'      2
+Subsubsection      '\subsubsection'   3
+Paragraph          '\paragraph'       4
+Subparagraph       '\subparagraph'    5
 
-  1. The table of contents.
-  2. The running head at the top of the page.
+   All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but is
+not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.  An
+example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article' .  The input
+'\appendix\section{Appendix}' gives the output 'A Appendix' (*note
+\appendix::).  You can lose the numbering 'A' by instead entering
+'\section*{Appendix}' (articles often omit a table of contents and have
+simple page headers so the other differences from the '\section' command
+may not matter).
 
-   You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
-To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
-TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places.
+   The section title TITLE provides the heading in the main text, but it
+may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or foot
+(*note Page styles::).  You may not want the same text in these places
+as in the main text.  All of these commands have an optional argument
+TOC-TITLE for these other places.
 
-   Also, all sectioning commands have '*'-forms that print TITLE as
-usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table
-of contents.  For instance:
+   The level number in the table above determines which sectional units
+are numbered, and which appear in the table of contents.  If the
+sectioning command's LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
+counter 'secnumdepth' then the titles for this sectioning command will
+be numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::).  And, if LEVEL is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter 'tocdepth' then the table of
+contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (*note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::).
 
-     \section*{Preamble}
+   LaTeX expects that before you have a '\subsection' you will have a
+'\section' and, in a book, that before a '\section' you will have a
+'\chapter'.  Otherwise you can get a something like a subsection
+numbered '3.0.1'.
 
-   The '\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are
-numbered.  The '\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not
-affect the numbering of parts.  The normal use of this command is
-something like
+   Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
 
-     \chapter{A Chapter}
-     ...
+'secnumdepth'
+     Controls which sectioning commands are numbered.  Suppress
+     numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL
+     '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' (*note \setcounter::).  See the
+     above table for the level numbers.  For instance, if the
+     'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then a '\section{Introduction}'
+     command will produce output like '1 Introduction' while
+     '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like 'Discussion',
+     without the number.  LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in
+     'article' class and  2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+'tocdepth'
+     Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of
+     contents.  The setting '\setcounter{tocdepth}{LEVEL}' makes the
+     sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
+     \setcounter::).  See the above table for the level numbers.  For
+     instance, if 'tocdepth' is 1 then the table of contents will list
+     sections but not subsections.  LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3
+     in 'article' class and  2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+6.1 '\part'
+===========
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \part{TITLE}
+     \part*{TITLE}
+     \part[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+   Start a document part.  The standard LaTeX classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', all have this command.
+
+   This produces a document part, in a book.
+
+     \part{VOLUME I \\
+            PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF  U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+     \chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+     My family is American, and has been for generations,
+     in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+
+   In each standard class the '\part' command outputs a part number such
+as 'Part I', alone on its line, in boldface, and in large type.  Then
+LaTeX outputs TITLE, also alone on its line, in bold and in even larger
+type.  In class 'book', the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
+own page.  If the book is two-sided then LaTeX will skip a page if
+needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page.  In 'report' it is
+again alone on a page, but LaTeX won't force it onto an odd-numbered
+page.  In an 'article' LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
+instead outputs the part number and part title onto the main document
+page.
+
+   The '*' form shows TITLE but it does not show the part number, does
+not increment the 'part' counter, and produces no table of contents
+entry.
+
+   The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the part title in the
+table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::).  If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there.  This example puts a line break in TITLE but leaves out the break
+in the table of contents.
+
+     \part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+
+   For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+   In the class 'article', if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented.  To get an indent you can use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+   One package to change the behavior of '\part' is 'titlesec'.  See its
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.2 '\chapter'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \chapter{TITLE}
+     \chapter*{TITLE}
+     \chapter[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+   Start a chapter.  The standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' have
+this command but 'article' does not.
+
+   This produces a chapter.
+
+     \chapter{Loomings}
+     Call me Ishmael.
+     Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+     money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+     thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+     the world.
+
+   The LaTeX default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided.  It produces a chapter
+number such as 'Chapter 1' in large boldface type (the size is '\huge').
+It then puts TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface type that is still
+larger (size '\Huge').  It also increments the 'chapter' counter, adds
+an entry to the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::), and
+sets the running header information (*note Page styles::).
+
+   The '*' form shows TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface.  But it does
+not show the chapter number, does not increment the 'chapter' counter,
+produces no table of contents entry, and does not affect the running
+header.  (If you use the page style 'headings' in a two-sided document
+then the header will be from the prior chapter.)  This example
+illustrates.
+
+     \chapter*{Preamble}
+
+   The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the chapter title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::).  If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there.  This shows the full name in the chapter title,
+
+     \chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+
+but only 'Weyl' on the contents page.  This puts a line break in the
+title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
+break in the contents
+
+     \chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+
+   For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+   The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  To get an indent use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+   You can change what is shown for the chapter number.  To change it to
+something like 'Lecture 1', put in the preamble either
+'\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}' or this (*note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::).
+
+     \makeatletter
+     \renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+     \makeatother
+
+To make this change because of the primary language for the document,
+see the package 'babel'.
+
+   In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers.  To make that page completely blank, see *note
+\clearpage & \cleardoublepage::.
+
+   To change the behavior of the '\chapter' command, you can copy its
+definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments.  But there
+are also many packages on CTAN that address this.  One is 'titlesec'.
+See its documentation, but the example below gives a sense of what it
+can do.
+
+     \usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+     \titleformat{\chapter}
+       {\Huge\bfseries}  % format of title
+       {}                % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+       {0pt}             % length of separation between label and title
+       {}                % before-code hook
+
+This omits the chapter number 'Chapter 1' from the page but unlike
+'\chapter*' it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+
+6.3 '\section'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \section{TITLE}
+     \section*{TITLE}
+     \section[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+   Start a section.  The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and
+'report' all have this command.
+
+   This produces a section.
+
+     In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+     in the input-output behavior,
+     than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+     \section{Turing machines}
+     Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+     we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+     first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+     is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+
+   For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2), alone on its line and
+flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is '\Large').
+The same holds in 'article' except that there are no chapters in that
+class so it looks like '2 TITLE'.
+
+   The '*' form shows TITLE.  But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, produces no table of contents
+entry, and does not affect the running header.  (If you use the page
+style 'headings' in a two-sided document then the header will be from
+the prior section.)
+
+   The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::).  If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there.  This shows the full name in the title of the section,
+
+     \section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+       by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+       Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+       Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+
+but only 'Elizabeth II' on the contents page and in the headers.  This
+has a line break in TITLE but that does not work with headers so it is
+omitted from the contents and headers.
+
+     \section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+       I cheated\\my life story}
+
+   For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+   The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package 'indentfirst'.
+
+   In general, to change the behavior of the '\section' command, there
+are a number of options.  One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::).  There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'.  See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+     \usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+     \titleformat{\section}
+       {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}  % format of title
+       {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+       {0pt}                   % length of separation between label and title
+       {}                      % before-code hook
+     \titlespacing*{\section}
+       {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+
+That puts the section number in the margin.
+
+6.4 '\subsection'
+=================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \subsection{TITLE}
+     \subsection*{TITLE}
+     \subsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+   Start a subsection.  The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book',
+and 'report' all have this command.
+
+   This produces a subsection.
+
+     We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+     therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+     \subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+     dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+     infinite sets.
+
+   For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2.3 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2, subsection 3), alone on
+its line and flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is
+'\large').  The same holds in 'article' except that there are no
+chapters in that class so it looks like '2.3 TITLE'.
+
+   The '*' form shows TITLE.  But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, and produces no table of
+contents entry.
+
+   The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::).  If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there.  This shows the full name in the title
+of the section,
+
+     \subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+       Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+
+but only 'U+03B1,U+03B2,U+03B3 paper' on the contents page.
+
+   For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+   The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as
+is a standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+   There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+'\subsection' command.  One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::).  There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'.  See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+     \usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+     \titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+       {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}  % format of the title
+       {\thesubsection}                   % label
+       {0.6em}                            % space between label and title
+       {}                                 % before-code hook
+
+That puts the subsection number and TITLE in the first line of text.
+
+6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+===================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \subsubsection{TITLE}
+     \subsubsection*{TITLE}
+     \subsubsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+     \paragraph{TITLE}
+     \paragraph*{TITLE}
+     \paragraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+     \subparagraph{TITLE}
+     \subparagraph*{TITLE}
+     \subparagraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+   Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph.  The standard
+LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report' all have these commands,
+although they are not commonly used.
+
+   This produces a subsubsection.
+
+     \subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+     Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+     capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+     consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+
+   The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report'.  For
+'\subsubsection' the TITLE is alone on its line, in boldface and normal
+size type.  For '\paragraph' the TITLE is inline with the text, not
+indented, in boldface and normal size type.  For '\subparagraph' the
+TITLE is inline with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and
+normal size type (Because an 'article' has no chapters its
+subsubsections are numbered and so it looks like '1.2.3 TITLE', for
+section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3.  The other two divisions
+are not numbered.)
+
+   The '*' form shows TITLE.  But it does not increment the associated
+counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not show the
+number for '\subsubsection').
+
+   The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the division title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::).  If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there.
+
+   For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of a
+paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+   The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented,
+as is a standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+   There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these
+commands.  One is the '\@startsection' command (*note \@startsection::).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+'titlesec'.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.6 '\appendix'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
      \appendix
-     \chapter{The First Appendix}
 
-   The 'secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers.  The
-setting
+   This does not directly produce any output.  But in a book or report
+it declares that subsequent '\chapter' commands start an appendix.  In
+an article it does the same, for '\section' commands.  It also resets
+the 'chapter' and 'section' counters to 0 in a book or report, and in an
+article resets the 'section' and 'subsection' counters.
 
-     \setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}
+   In this book
 
-suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is
-level zero.  The default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in LaTeX's 'article' class
-and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.  (*Note \setcounter::.)
+     \chapter{One}  ...
+     \chapter{Two}  ...
+      ...
+     \appendix
+     \chapter{Three}  ...
+     \chapter{Four}  ...
 
-6.1 '\@startsection'
+the first two will generate output numbered 'Chapter 1' and 'Chapter 2'.
+After the '\appendix' the numbering will be 'Appendix A' and 'Appendix
+B'.  *Note Larger book template:: for another example.
+
+   The 'appendix' package adds the command '\appendixpage' to put a
+separate 'Appendices' in the document body before the first appendix,
+and the command '\addappheadtotoc' to do the same in the table of
+contents.  You can reset the name 'Appendix' with a command like
+'\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}', as well as a number of
+other features.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \frontmatter
+     \mainmatter
+     \backmatter
+
+   Format a 'book' class document differently according to which part of
+the document is being produced.  All three commands are optional.
+
+   Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the
+title page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of
+notations, a list of figures, and a list of tables.  (Some of these
+front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
+numbered.)  The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
+notes, a bibliography, and an index.
+
+   The '\frontmatter' declaration makes the pages numbered in lowercase
+roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
+appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
+here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::).  The '\mainmatter'
+changes the behavior back to the expected version, and resets the page
+number.  The '\backmatter' leaves the page numbering alone but switches
+the chapters back to being not numbered.  *Note Larger book template::
+for an example using the three.
+
+6.8 '\@startsection'
 ====================
 
 Synopsis:
@@ -2031,9 +2551,23 @@
 may want to use the '\secdef' command.
 
    Technically, '\@startsection' has the form
-     \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
-(the star '*' is optional), so that issuing
-     \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}}
+
+     \@startsection{NAME}
+       {LEVEL}
+       {INDENT}
+       {BEFORESKIP}
+       {AFTERSKIP}
+       {STYLE}*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+
+so that issuing
+
+     \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}
+       {LEVEL}
+       {INDENT}
+       {BEFORESKIP}
+       {AFTERSKIP}
+       {STYLE}}
+
 redefines '\section' to have the form '\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (here
 too, the star '*' is optional).  *Note Sectioning::.  This implies that
 when you write a command like '\renewcommand{section}{...}', the
@@ -2043,33 +2577,30 @@
 NAME
      Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header.  This
      counter must be defined separately.  Most commonly this is either
-     'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'.  Although in those three
-     cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
-     itself, using the same name is not required.
+     'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'.  Although in those cases
+     the counter name is the same as the sectioning command itself, you
+     don't have to use the same name.
 
      Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
      the page headers.  See the third example below.
 
 LEVEL
-     An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command: 0 for
-     'chapter' (only applies to the standard 'book' and 'report'
-     classes), 1 for 'section', 2 for 'subsection', 3 for
-     'subsubsection', 4 for 'paragraph', and 5 for 'subparagraph'.  In
-     the 'book' and 'report' classes 'part' has level -1, while in the
-     'article' class 'part' has level 0.
+     An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.  *Note
+     Sectioning:: for the list of standard level numbers.
 
-     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of 'secnumdepth' then
-     the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered.  For
-     instance, in an 'article', if 'secnumdepth' is 1 then a
-     '\section{Introduction}' command will produce output like "1
-     Introduction" while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output
-     like "Discussion", without the number prefix.  *Note
-     Sectioning/secnumdepth::.
+     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+     'secnumdepth' then titles for this sectioning command will be
+     numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::).  For instance, if
+     'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then the command
+     '\section{Introduction}' will produce output like "1 Introduction"
+     while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like
+     "Discussion", without the number prefix.
 
-     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of TOCDEPTH then the
-     table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit.  For
-     instance, in an 'article', if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of
-     contents will list sections but not subsections.
+     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter TOCDEPTH
+     then the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning
+     unit (*note Sectioning/tocdepth::).  For instance, in an 'article',
+     if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but
+     not subsections.
 
 INDENT
      A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
@@ -2132,31 +2663,29 @@
      Controls the styling of the title.  See the examples below.
      Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
      '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'.  The last command in STYLE
-     may be one such as '\MakeUppercase' or '\fbox' that takes one
-     argument.  The section title will be supplied as the argument to
-     this command.  For instance, setting STYLE to
-     '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are bold and
-     upper case.
+     may be one that takes one argument, such as '\MakeUppercase' or
+     '\fbox' that takes one argument.  The section title will be
+     supplied as the argument to this command.  For instance, setting
+     STYLE to '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are
+     bold and uppercase.
 
    These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
 are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
-'report' classes.
+'report' classes.  For section, the LEVEL is 1, the INDENT is 0pt, the
+BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex
+plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'.  For
+subsection, the LEVEL is 2, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is
+'-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
+and the STYLE is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'.  For subsubsection, the
+LEVEL is 3, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex plus -1ex
+minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is
+'\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
 
-        'section'              'subsection'           'subsubsection'
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-*note NAME: \@startsection/name.sectionsubsection     subsubsection
-*note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.12                  3
-*note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.'0pt''0pt'        '0pt'
-*note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.'-3.5ex plus -1ex'-3.25ex plus -1ex'-3.25ex plus -1ex
-        minus -0.2ex'          minus -0.2ex'          minus -0.2ex'
-*note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.'2.3ex plus 0.2ex''1.5ex plus 0.2ex''1.5ex plus 0.2ex'
-*note STYLE: \@startsection/style.'\normalfont\Large\bfseries''\normalfont\large\bfseries''\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'
-
    Here are examples.  They go either in a package or class file or in
 the preamble of a LaTeX document.  If you put them in the preamble they
 must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
 (Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
-mode.' means that you forgot this.)  *Note \makeatletter and
+mode.' means that you forgot this.)  *Note \makeatletter &
 \makeatother::.
 
    This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.  It
@@ -2206,34 +2735,43 @@
 7 Cross references
 ******************
 
-One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
-refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure~3 for more details."
+We often want something like 'See Theorem~31'.  But by-hand typing the
+31 is poor practice.  Instead you should write a "label" such as
+'\label{eq:GreensThm}' and then "reference" it, as with 'See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'.  LaTeX will automatically work out the
+number, put it into the output, and will change that number later if
+needed.
 
-   Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if
-that number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to
-update this reference by hand.  Instead, LaTeX has you write a "label"
-like '\label{eq:GreensThm}' and refer to it with 'See
-equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'.
+     We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+     ...
+     \begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+       ...
+     \end{theorem}
+     ...
+     See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
 
-   LaTeX writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
-name as the file containing the '\label{...}' but with an '.aux'
-extension.  (The information has the format
-'\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}' where CURRENTLABEL is the
-current value of the macro '\@currentlabel' that is usually updated
-whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.)
+   LaTeX tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension '.aux' and with the same base name as the file containing the
+'\label'.  So if '\label' is in 'calculus.tex' then the information is
+in 'calculus.aux'.  LaTeX puts the information in that file every time
+it runs across a '\label'.
 
-   The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
-document has a "forward reference", a '\ref{KEY}' that appears earlier
-than the associated '\label{KEY}'; see the example in the
-'\pageref{...}' description.  LaTeX gets the information for references
-from the '.aux' file.  If this is the first time you are compiling the
-document then you will get a message 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
-changed. Rerun to get cross references right.' and in the output the
-reference will appear as two question marks '??', in boldface.  Or, if
-you change some things so the references change then you get the same
-warning and the output contains the old reference information.  The
-solution in either case is just to compile the document a second time.
+   The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a "forward reference", a '\ref' that
+appears before the associated '\label'.  If this is the first time that
+you are compiling the document then you will get 'LaTeX Warning:
+Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right' and in
+the output the forward reference will appear as two question marks '??',
+in boldface.  A similar thing happens if you change some things so the
+references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the
+old reference information.  In both cases, resolve this by compiling the
+document a second time.
 
+   The 'cleveref' package enhances LaTeX's cross referencing features.
+You can arrange that if you enter
+'\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}' then '\cref{th:Nerode}' will
+output 'Theorem 3.21', without you having to enter the "Theorem."
+
 7.1 '\label'
 ============
 
@@ -2252,28 +2790,35 @@
 as usual.
 
    A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
-suffix separated by a colon or period.  This helps to avoid accidentally
-creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
-readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
+suffix separated by a colon or period.  Thus, '\label{fig:Post}' is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post.  This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
 
 'ch'
      for chapters
+
 'sec'
+'subsec'
      for lower-level sectioning commands
+
 'fig'
      for figures
+
 'tab'
      for tables
+
 'eq'
      for equations
 
-   Thus, '\label{fig:Euler}' is a label for a figure with a portrait of
-the great man.
+   In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text
+of a command of the form '\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}'.
+Here CURRENTLABEL is the current value of the macro '\@currentlabel'
+that is usually updated whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.
 
-   In this example below the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the
-current section and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the
-figure.  (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
-tables.)
+   Below, the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the current section
+and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
 
      \section{section name}
      \label{sec:test}
@@ -2285,8 +2830,8 @@
      \end{figure}
      See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
 
-7.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
-===================
+7.2 '\pageref'
+==============
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -2295,19 +2840,22 @@
    Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
 corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
 
-   In this example the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula
-number and for the page number.  (Note that the two references are
-forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice to
-resolve those.)
+   If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
 
+   Below, the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula number and
+for the page number.  (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+
      The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
        ...
      \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
         \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
      \end{equation}
 
-7.3 '\ref{KEY}'
-===============
+7.3 '\ref'
+==========
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -2318,9 +2866,13 @@
 does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
 the bare number itself.
 
-   In this example, the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'.  Note that it is a
-forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}'.
+   If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
 
+   In this example the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'.  Note that it is a
+forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}' so this
+document would have to be compiled twice.
+
      The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
      \begin{enumerate}
      \item Plain \TeX
@@ -2328,6 +2880,9 @@
      \item Con\TeX t
      \end{enumerate}
 
+   The 'cleveref' package includes text such as 'Theorem' in the
+reference.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+
 8 Environments
 **************
 
@@ -2401,7 +2956,7 @@
        ...
      \end{array}
 
-   or
+or:
 
      \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
        COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
@@ -2410,22 +2965,38 @@
 
    Produce a mathematical array.  This environment can only be used in
 math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
-environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::).  Column entries are
-separated by an ampersand ('&').  Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes (*note \\::).
+environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::).  Inside of each row
+the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&').  Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
 
+   This example shows a three by three array.
+
+     \begin{equation*}
+       \chi(x) =
+       \left|              % vertical bar fence
+         \begin{array}{ccc}
+           x-a  &-b  &-c  \\
+           -d   &x-e &-f  \\
+           -g   &-h  &x-i
+         \end{array}
+      \right|
+     \end{equation*}
+
    The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
-alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  See *note
-tabular:: for the complete description of COLS, and of the other common
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  For instance,
+'\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}' gives three columns: the first flush
+right, the second centered, and the third flush left.  See *note
+tabular:: for the complete description of COLS and of the other common
 features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
 
    There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'.  The first
-is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (except
-if the COLS definition specifies the column with 'p{...}', which causes
-the entry to be typeset in text mode).  The second is that, instead of
-'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space in an
-'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which gives half the width
-between columns.  The default for this is '5pt'.
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
+Modes::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
+'p{...}', which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode.  The second
+is that, instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's
+intercolumn space in an 'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which
+gives half the width between columns.  The default for this is '5pt' so
+that between two columns comes 10pt of space.
 
    To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
 package.  It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
@@ -2435,39 +3006,38 @@
 bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
 bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.
 
-   Here is an example of an array:
+   The next example uses the 'amsmath' package.
 
-     \begin{equation}
-       \begin{array}{cr}
-         \sqrt{y}  &12.3 \\
-         x^2       &3.4
-       \end{array}
-     \end{equation}
+     \usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
 
-   The next example works if '\usepackage{amsmath}' is in the preamble:
-
      \begin{equation}
-       \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+       \begin{vmatrix}{cc}  % array with vert lines
          a  &b \\
          c  &d
        \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
      \end{equation}
 
+   There are many packages concerning arrays.  The 'array' package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types.  The 'dcolumn'
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point.  For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+
 8.3 'center'
 ============
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{center}
-       ... text ...
+       LINE1 \\
+       LINE2 \\
+       ...
      \end{center}
 
    Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
-centered within the left and right margins on the current page.  Use
-double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (*note \\::).
-If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will
-insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
-shrinking any interword space.
+centered within the left and right margins.  Use double-backslash, '\\',
+to get a line break (*note \\::).  If some text is too long to fit on a
+line then LaTeX will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid
+stretching or shrinking any interword space.
 
    This environment inserts space above and below the text body.  See
 *note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
@@ -2494,17 +3064,42 @@
        I grew up in that belief.  --Richard Burton
      \end{center}
 
-   A double backslash after the final line is optional.
+   A double backslash after the final line is optional.  If present it
+doesn't add any vertical space.
 
+   In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+
 8.3.1 '\centering'
 ------------------
 
-A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered.  It is
-most often used inside an environment such as 'figure', or in a
-'parbox'.
+Synopsis:
 
+     {\centering ... }
+
+or
+
+     \begin{group}
+       \centering ...
+     \end{group}
+
+   Center the material in its scope.  It is most often used inside an
+environment such as 'figure', or in a 'parbox'.
+
+   This example's '\centering' declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+
+     \begin{figure}
+       \centering
+       \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+       \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
+     \end{figure}
+
+The scope of this '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
+
    Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
-add vertical space above and below the text.
+add vertical space above and below the text.  That's its advantage in
+the above example; there is not an excess of space.
 
    It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
 formats paragraph units.  If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
@@ -2515,45 +3110,36 @@
 'table' that ends the paragraph unit.  Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
 yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
 with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
-'zz' that is formatted as usual.  See also the following example.
+'zz' that is formatted as usual.
 
-   This example's '\centering' causes the graphic to be horizontally
-centered.
-
-     \begin{figure}
-       \centering
-       \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
-       \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
-     \end{figure}
-
-   The scope of the '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
-
 8.4 'description'
 =================
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{description}
-     \item[LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
-     \item[LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
-       ...
+       \item[LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+       \item[LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+        ...
      \end{description}
 
-   Environment to make a labeled list of items.  Each item's LABEL is
-typeset in bold, and is flush left so that long labels continue into the
+   Environment to make a list of labeled items.  Each item's LABEL is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
 first line of the item text.  There must be at least one item; having
 none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
 \item'.
 
    This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
-definitions.  The labels 'lama' and 'llama' come out in boldface with
-their left edges aligned on the left margin.
+definitions.
 
      \begin{definition}
        \item[lama] A priest.
        \item[llama] A beast.
      \end{definition}
 
+The labels 'lama' and 'llama' are output in boldface, with the left edge
+on the left margin.
+
    Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::).  Use the
 optional labels, as in '\item[Main point]', because there is no sensible
 default.  Following the '\item' is optional text, which may contain
@@ -2563,9 +3149,10 @@
 font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
 will come out bold.  For instance, if the label text calls for
 typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available.  The simplest way to get non-bold
-typewriter is to use declarative style: '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
-Similarly, get the standard roman font with '\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+typewriter, if that is available.  The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+'\item[{\tt label text}]'.  Similarly, get the standard roman font with
+'\item[{\rm label text}]'.
 
    For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
 and *note enumerate::.  Unlike those environments, nesting 'description'
@@ -2587,7 +3174,7 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{displaymath}
-     MATH TEXT
+       MATHEMATICAL TEXT
      \end{displaymath}
 
    Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
@@ -2617,12 +3204,14 @@
 'fleqn' option.)
 
    The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+
      \begin{displaymath}
        \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
      \end{displaymath}
-   Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\(
-\int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
 
+Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\( \int_1^2
+x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
+
 8.6 'document'
 ==============
 
@@ -2667,9 +3256,9 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{enumerate}
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
-     ...
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+       ...
      \end{enumerate}
 
    Environment to produce a numbered list of items.  The format of the
@@ -2701,9 +3290,9 @@
 level.
 
   1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
-  2. lower case letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
-  3. lower case roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
-  4. upper case letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
+  2. lowercase letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
+  3. lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
+  4. uppercase letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
 
    The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
 '\enumiv' (*note Counters::).
@@ -2731,23 +3320,23 @@
 8.8 'eqnarray'
 ==============
 
-First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment is depreciated.  It has
-infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
-inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article "Avoid
-eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+The 'eqnarray' environment is obsolete.  It has infelicities, including
+spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.  (See
+"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
 <http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>).  New documents should
 include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
-environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment.
+environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment.  We
+include a description only for completeness and for working with old
+documents.
 
-   Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with
-old documents, a synopsis:
+   Synopsis:
 
      \begin{eqnarray}
        FIRST FORMULA LEFT  &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE  &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
        ...
      \end{eqnarray}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \begin{eqnarray*}
        FIRST FORMULA LEFT  &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE  &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
@@ -2788,21 +3377,19 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{equation}
-       math text
+       MATHEMATICAL TEXT
      \end{equation}
 
-   Make a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) with an
-equation number in the right margin.
+   The same as a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) except
+that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin.  The
+equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
 
-   The equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
-
    You should have no blank lines between '\begin{equation}' and
 '\begin{equation}', or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
-dollar sign, $'$'.
+dollar sign.
 
-   Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities.  Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents.
+   The package 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities.  New documents should include this package.
 
 8.10 'figure'
 =============
@@ -2810,47 +3397,52 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
-       figure body
-     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
-     \label{LABEL}
+       FIGURE BODY
+       \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}  % optional
+       \label{LABEL}              % optional
      \end{figure}
 
-   or
+or:
 
      \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
-       figure body
-     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
-     \label{LABEL}
+       FIGURE BODY
+       \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}  % optional
+       \label{LABEL}              % optional
      \end{figure*}
 
-   A class of floats (*note Floats::).  Because they cannot be split
-across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
-instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
-following page.
+   Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text.  An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic.  Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead "floats" them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (*note Floats::).
 
-   For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
-placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+   The FIGURE BODY can consist of imported graphics (*note Graphics::),
+or text, LaTeX commands, etc.  It is typeset in a 'parbox' of width
+'\textwidth'.
 
+   The possible values of PLACEMENT are 'h' for 'here', 't' for 'top',
+'b' for 'bottom', and 'p' for 'on a separate page of floats'.  For the
+effect of these options on the float placement algorithm, see *note
+Floats::.
+
    The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
 double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::).  It produces a figure that
 spans both columns, at the top of the page.  To add the possibility of
 placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
 Floats::.
 
-   The figure body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
-it can contain text, commands, etc.
-
    The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
 references::).  The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
 for the figure.  By default it is numbered.  If LOFTITLE is present, it
-is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
-contents::).
+is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents
+etc.::).
 
-   This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  It requires one of the
-packages 'graphics' or 'graphicx'.  The graphic, with its caption, will
-be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the end of the
-document, on a page of floats.
+   This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  LaTeX will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
 
+     \usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
+       ...
      \begin{figure}[t]
        \centering
        \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
@@ -2866,7 +3458,7 @@
        TEXT
      \end{filecontents}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
        TEXT
@@ -2900,7 +3492,7 @@
      Article by \myname.
      \end{document}
 
-   produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+produces this file 'JH.sty'.
 
      %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
      %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
@@ -2911,80 +3503,132 @@
 8.12 'flushleft'
 ================
 
+Synopsis:
+
      \begin{flushleft}
-     LINE1 \\
-     LINE2 \\
-     ...
+       LINE1 \\
+       LINE2 \\
+       ...
      \end{flushleft}
 
-   The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right.  Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
+   An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right.  If you have lines that are too long
+then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new line use a double
+backslash, '\\'.  For the declaration form see *note \raggedright::.
 
+   This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the
+text flush left and ragged right.
+
+     \noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+     \begin{flushleft}
+       A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+         at a convenient spot. \\
+       And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+     \end{flushleft}
+     \end{minipage}
+
 8.12.1 '\raggedright'
 ---------------------
 
-The '\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the 'flushleft'
-environment.  This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
-'quote' or in a 'parbox'.
+Synopses:
 
+     {\raggedright  ... }
+
+or
+
+     \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedright
+       ...
+     \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+   A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right.  It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or
+in a 'parbox'.  For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
+
    Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
 not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
 units.  To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
 declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
 paragraph unit.
 
+   Here '\raggedright' in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing very
+awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column.  Note that
+'\raggedright' is inside the curly braces '{...}' to delimit its effect.
+
+     \begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+       Team alpha  &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+       Team beta   &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+                     cooler is never empty.}                         \\
+     \end{tabular}
+
 8.13 'flushright'
 =================
 
      \begin{flushright}
-     LINE1 \\
-     LINE2 \\
-     ...
+       LINE1 \\
+       LINE2 \\
+       ...
      \end{flushright}
 
-   The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left.  Each line must be terminated with the control sequence '\\'.
+   An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left.  If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids
+hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new line use
+a double backslash, '\\'.  For the declaration form see *note
+\raggedleft::.
 
+   For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::.
+
 8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
 --------------------
 
-The '\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the 'flushright'
-environment.  This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
-'quote' or in a 'parbox'.
+Synopses:
 
+     {\raggedleft  ... }
+
+or
+
+     \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedleft
+       ...
+     \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+   A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left.  It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
+a 'parbox'.  For the environment form see *note flushright::.
+
    Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
 not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
 units.  To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
 declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
 paragraph unit.
 
+   For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::.
+
 8.14 'itemize'
 ==============
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{itemize}
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
-     ...
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+       ...
      \end{itemize}
 
-   The 'itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
-The format of the label numbering depends on the nesting level of this
-environment; see below.  Each 'itemize' list environment must have at
-least one item; having none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's
-wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+   Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.
+The environment must have at least one '\item'; having none causes the
+LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
 
-   This example gives a two-item list.  As a top-level list each label
-would come out as a bullet, *.
+   This gives a two-item list.
 
      \begin{itemize}
       \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
       \item Rice portrait
      \end{itemize}
 
+As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, *.  The
+format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+
    Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::).  If you
 give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
 as in '\item[Optional label]', then by default it will appear in bold
@@ -2996,7 +3640,7 @@
 deep.  They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
 environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).  The 'itemize'
 environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through '\labelitemiv' to
-produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lower case
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
 roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
 level).  These are the default marks at each level.
 
@@ -3014,7 +3658,7 @@
    The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
 the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
 '\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'.  (Note the convention of using
-lower case roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
+lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
 nesting level.)  The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em' in
 two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and '1.7em'
 in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
@@ -3033,8 +3677,8 @@
    Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
 space between items.  Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
 environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
-within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
-\parskip::):
+within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \parindent
+& \parskip::):
 
      \newenvironment{itemize*}%
        {\begin{itemize}%
@@ -3054,31 +3698,31 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
-     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
-     ...
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+       \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+       ...
      \end{list}
 
-   The 'list' environment is a generic environment for constructing more
-specialized lists.  It is most often used to create lists via the
-'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments (*note
-description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).
+   An environment for constructing lists.
 
-   Also, many standard LaTeX environments that are not visually lists
-are constructed using 'list', including 'quotation', 'quote', 'center',
-'verbatim', and plenty more (*note quotation and quote::, *note
-center::, *note flushright::).
+   Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body.  Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
+standard: the 'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments
+(*note description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).
 
-   The third-party package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
-Here, we describe the 'list' environment by defining a new custom
-environment.
+   Instead, the 'list' environment is most often used in macros.  For
+example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately appear
+to be lists are in fact constructed using 'list', including 'quotation',
+'quote', and 'center' (*note quotation & quote::, *note center::).
 
+   This uses the 'list' environment to define a new custom environment.
+
      \newcounter{namedlistcounter}  % number the items
      \newenvironment{named}
        {\begin{list}
-          {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling argument
-          {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % spacing argument
-           \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % still spacing arg
+          {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling
+          {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % set counter
+           \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing
        }
        {\end{list}}
 
@@ -3088,42 +3732,45 @@
        \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
      \end{named}
 
-   The 'list' environment's mandatory first argument, LABELING,
-specifies the default labeling of list items.  It can contain text and
-LaTeX commands, as above where it contains both 'Item' and
-'\Roman{...}'.  LaTeX forms the label by putting the LABELING argument
-in a box of width '\labelwidth'.  If the label is wider than that, the
-additional material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a
-list you can override the default labeling by giving '\item' an optional
-argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above
-'\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.
+   The mandatory first argument LABELING specifies the default labeling
+of list items.  It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as above where
+it contains both 'Item' and '\Roman{...}'.  LaTeX forms the label by
+putting the LABELING argument in a box of width '\labelwidth'.  If the
+label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right.
+When making an instance of a list you can override the default labeling
+by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square braces and
+the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.
 
-   The label box is constructed by the command '\makelabel'.  By default
-it positions the contents flush right.  It takes one argument, the
-label.  It typesets the contents in LR mode.  An example of changing its
-definition is that to the above example before the definition of the
-'named' environment add '\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}',
-and between the '\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the
-SPACING argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'.  Then the
-items will be typeset in small caps.  Similarly, changing the second
-code line to '\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box.
-Another example is at the bottom of this entry.
+   The mandatory second argument SPACING has a list of commands.  This
+list can be empty.  A command that can go in here is
+'\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' (*note \usecounter::).  Use this to tell
+LaTeX to number the items using the given counter.  The counter will be
+reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment, and the counter is
+incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an '\item' that does not
+have an optional argument.
 
-   The mandatory second argument SPACING can have a list of commands to
-redefine the spacing parameters for the list, such as
-'\setlength{\labelwidth}{2em}'.  If this argument is empty, i.e., '{}',
-then the list will have the default spacing given below.  To number the
-items using a counter, put '\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' in this argument
-(*note \usecounter::).
+   Another command that can go in SPACING is '\makelabel', which
+constructs the label box.  By default it puts the contents flush right.
+Its only argument is the label, which it typesets in LR mode (*note
+Modes::).  One example of changing its definition is that to the above
+'named' example, before the definition of the environment add
+'\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}', and between the
+'\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
+argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'.  Then the items will
+be typeset in small caps.  Similarly, changing the second code line to
+'\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box.  Another
+example of the '\makelabel' command is below, in the definition of the
+'redlabel' environment.
 
-   Below are the spacing parameters for list formatting.  See also the
-figure below.  Each is a length (*note Lengths::).  The vertical spaces
-are normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give
-TeX flexibility in setting the page.  Change each with a command such as
+   Also often in SPACING are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list.  Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as 'itemize' can be
+different than the values shown here.)  See also the figure that follows
+the list.  Each is a length (*note Lengths::).  The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give TeX
+flexibility in setting the page.  Change each with a command such as
 '\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}'.  For some effects these
-lengths should be zero or negative.  Default values for derived
-environments such as 'itemize' can be changed from the values shown here
-for the basic 'list'.
+lengths should be zero or negative.
 
 '\itemindent'
      Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond 'leftmargin', of the
@@ -3220,13 +3867,14 @@
 
 '\topsep'
      Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
-     addition to '\parskip' (*note \parskip::).  The defaults for the
-     first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report'
-     classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt', '4pt plus2pt
-     minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults at 11 point
-     are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt
-     plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt plus4pt
-     minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt'.
+     addition to '\parskip' (*note \parindent & \parskip::).  The
+     defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book',
+     and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt',
+     '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults
+     at 11 point are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt',
+     and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt
+     plus4pt minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt
+     minus1pt'.
 
    This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
 
@@ -3311,8 +3959,11 @@
      The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default
      '-51').
 
+   The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+
    This example has the labels in red.  They are numbered, and the left
-edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.  *Note
+\usecounter::.
 
      \usepackage{color}
      \newcounter{cnt}
@@ -3337,7 +3988,8 @@
 
      \item text of item
 
-   or
+or
+
      \item[OPTIONAL-LABEL] text of item
 
    An entry in a list.  The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
@@ -3419,21 +4071,108 @@
 8.18 'minipage'
 ===============
 
+Synopses:
+
+     \begin{minipage}{WIDTH}
+       CONTENTS
+     \end{minipage}
+
+or
+
      \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}
-     TEXT
+       CONTENTS
      \end{minipage}
 
-   The 'minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that
-will not be broken across pages.  This is similar to the '\parbox'
-command (*note \parbox::), but unlike '\parbox', other paragraph-making
-environments can be used inside a minipage.
+   Put CONTENTS into a box that is WIDTH wide.  This is like a small
+version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized lists,
+etc.  (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.)  This box will not be broken across pages.  So 'minipage' is
+similar to '\parbox' (*note \parbox::) but here you can have paragraphs.
 
-   The arguments are the same as for '\parbox' (*note \parbox::).
+   This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
 
-   By default, paragraphs are not indented in the 'minipage'
-environment.  You can restore indentation with a command such as
-'\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command.
+     \begin{minipage}{3in}
+       Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
 
+       He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+       was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+       and won the National Medal of Science.
+     \end{minipage}
+
+See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a 'minipage'.
+
+   The required argument WIDTH is a rigid length (*note Lengths::).  It
+gives the width of the box into which CONTENTS are typeset.
+
+   There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+You need not include all three.  For example, get the default POSITION
+and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] CONTENTS
+\end{minipage}'.  (Get the natural height with an empty argument, '[]'.)
+
+   The optional argument POSITION governs how the 'minipage' vertically
+aligns with the surrounding material.
+
+'c'
+     (synonym 'm') Default.  Positions the 'minipage' so its vertical
+     center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+     Plain TeX calls '\vcenter').
+
+'t'
+     Match the top line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+     surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vtop'.
+
+'b'
+     Match the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+     surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vbox'.
+
+   To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+
+     ---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+       first\\ second\\ third
+     \end{minipage}
+
+with the results of changing 'c' to 'b' or 't'.
+
+   The optional argument HEIGHT is a rigid length (*note Lengths::).  It
+sets the height of the 'minipage'.  You can enter any value larger than,
+or equal to, or smaller than the 'minipage''s natural height and LaTeX
+will not give an error or warning.  You can also set it to a height of
+zero or a negative value.
+
+   The final optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of
+CONTENT inside the box.  These are the possible values are (the default
+is the value of POSITION).
+
+'t'
+     Place CONTENT at the top of the box.
+
+'c'
+     Place it in the vertical center.
+
+'b'
+     Place it at the box bottom.
+
+'s'
+     Stretch CONTENTS out vertically; it must contain vertically
+     stretchable space.
+
+   The INNER-POS argument makes sense when the HEIGHT options is set to
+a value larger than the 'minipage''s natural height.  To see the effect
+of the options, run this example with the various choices in place of
+'b'.
+
+     Text before
+     \begin{center}
+       ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+            first\\ second\\ third
+       \end{minipage}
+     \end{center}
+     Text after
+
+   By default paragraphs are not indented in a 'minipage'.  Change that
+with a command such as '\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' at the start of
+CONTENTS.
+
    Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
 particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables.  A
 '\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
@@ -3441,315 +4180,604 @@
 '\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
 Counters::).
 
-   However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
-footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
+   This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of
+the page.
 
+     \begin{center}           % center the minipage on the line
+     \begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+       \begin{center}         % center the table inside the minipage
+         \begin{tabular}{ll}
+           \textsc{Monarch}  &\textsc{Reign}             \\ \hline
+           Elizabeth II      &63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+           Victoria          &63 years                   \\
+           George III        &59 years
+         \end{tabular}
+       \end{center}
+     \end{minipage}
+     \end{center}
+
+   If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+'\end{minipage}' which may not be their logical place.
+
+   This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.
+They are vertically centered.
+
+     \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+       ...
+     \begin{center}
+       \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+       \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+         \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+           \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million)  \\ \hline
+           The Bronx      &$1.5$  \\
+           Brooklyn       &$2.6$  \\
+           Manhattan      &$1.6$  \\
+           Queens         &$2.3$  \\
+           Staten Island  &$0.5$
+         \end{tabular}
+       \end{minipage}
+     \end{center}
+
 8.19 'picture'
 ==============
 
+Synopses:
+     \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
+        PICTURE COMMANDS
+     \end{picture}
+
+or
+
      \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
-     ... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
+       PICTURE COMMANDS
      \end{picture}
 
-   The 'picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of
-picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles.  You tell
-LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
-coordinates.  A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
-a minus sign--a number like '5', '0.3' or '-3.1416'.  A coordinate
-specifies a length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if
-'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
-a length of 2.54 centimeters.
+   An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text.  Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as 'TikZ', 'PSTricks', 'MetaPost', or
+'Asymptote'.  These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
 
-   You should only change the value of '\unitlength', using the
-'\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment.  The default
-value is '1pt'.
+   This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
 
-   The 'picture' package redefine the 'picture' environment so that
-everywhere a number is used in a PICTURE COMMANDS to specify a
-coordinate, one can use alternatively a length.  Be aware however that
-this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing '\unitlength'.
+     \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+     \begin{picture}(6,6)      % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+       \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}}  % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+         \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+       \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+         \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
+       \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+         \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
+     \end{picture}
 
-   A "position" is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
-the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'.  Coordinates
-are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
-normally at the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that when a
-position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
-parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
+   You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
 
-   The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument which is a
-position (WIDTH,HEIGHT), which specifies the size of the picture.  The
-environment produces a rectangular box with these WIDTH and HEIGHT.
+     \usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
+       ...
+     \begin{center}
+     \setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+     \begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+       \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+       \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+     \end{picture}
+     \end{center}
 
-   The 'picture' environment also has an optional position argument
-(XOFFSET,YOFFSET), following the size argument, that can change the
-origin.  (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
-contained in square brackets.)  The optional argument gives the
-coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
-(thereby determining the origin).  For example, if '\unitlength' has
-been set to '1mm', the command
+The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\linewidth' from the left
+margin, and '0.35\linewidth' up from the bottom.  Another example of
+this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get repeat
+material on each of a document's pages.
 
-     \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+   The 'picture' environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT).  Multiply these by the value '\unitlength' to
+get the nominal size of the output, the space that LaTeX reserves on the
+output page.  This nominal size need not be how large the picture really
+is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture outside the picture's box.
 
-produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters,
-whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right
-corner is therefore the point (110,220).  When you first draw a picture,
-you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the
-lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your picture by shifting
-everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument.
+   This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET).  It
+is used to shift the origin.  Unlike most optional arguments, this one
+is not contained in square brackets.  As with the required argument, it
+consists of two real numbers.  Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get
+the point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
 
-   The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
-the picture.  This need bear no relation to how large the picture really
-is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or
-even off the page.  The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in
-determining how much room to leave for it.
+   For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
 
-   Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the '\put' command.
-The command
+     \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
 
-     \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters.  The
+picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm).  When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
 
-puts the object specified by '...' in the picture, with its reference
-point at coordinates (11.3,-.3).  The reference points for various
-objects will be described below.
+   Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by naming its
+position.  A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x- and
+y-coordinates.  A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real number
+(it may have a decimal point or a minus sign).  It specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if '\unitlength' has been
+set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
+centimeters.
 
-   The '\put' command creates an "LR box".  You can put anything that
-can go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the '\put'
-command.  When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left
-corner of the box.
+   LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'.  it is a rigid length
+(*note Lengths::).  Change it with the '\setlength' command (*note
+\setlength::).  Make this change only outside of a 'picture'
+environment.
 
-   The 'picture' commands are described in the following sections.
+   Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in braces
+since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.  Also, unlike in
+some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are further up the
+page.
 
-8.19.1 '\circle'
-----------------
+   There are four ways to put things in a picture: '\put', '\multiput',
+'\qbezier', and '\graphpaper'.  The most often used is '\put'.  This
 
-Synopsis:
+     \put(11.3,-0.3){...}
 
-     \circle[*]{DIAMETER}
+places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3).
+The reference points for various objects will be described below.  The
+'\put' command creates an "LR box" (*note Modes::).  Anything that can
+go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) can go in the text argument
+of the '\put' command.  The reference point will be the lower left
+corner of the box.  In this picture
 
-   The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
-the specified one as possible.  The '*'-form of the command draws a
-solid circle.
+     \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+     ...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+       \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+       \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+     \end{picture}
 
-   Circles up to 40pt can be drawn.
+the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines.  (Also, '\line(1,1){1}' does not call for a line of
+length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of 1.)
 
-8.19.2 '\makebox'
------------------
+   The '\multiput', 'qbezier', and 'graphpaper' commands are described
+below.
 
-Synopsis:
+   This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
+curve.
 
-     \makebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+     \begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+       \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
+       \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
+       \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side rectangle
+       \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
+       \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+         \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+       \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
+       \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+       \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+     \end{picture}
 
-   The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
-normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a WIDTH and
-HEIGHT in multiples of '\unitlength'.
+8.19.1 '\put'
+-------------
 
-   The optional argument, '[POSITION]', specifies the quadrant that your
-TEXT appears in.  You may select up to two of the following:
+Synopsis:
 
-'t'
-     Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
+     \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){CONTENT}
 
-'b'
-     Moves the item to the bottom.
+   Place CONTENT at the coordinate (XCOORD,YCOORD).  See the discussion
+of coordinates and '\unitlength' in *note picture::.  The CONTENT is
+processed in LR mode (*note Modes::) so it cannot contain line breaks.
 
-'l'
-     Moves the item to the left.
+   This includes the text into the 'picture'.
 
-'r'
-     Moves the item to the right.
+     \put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
 
-   *Note \makebox::.
+   The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the 'A'.
 
-8.19.3 '\framebox'
+8.19.2 '\multiput'
 ------------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...}
+     \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){NUM-COPIES}{OBJ}
 
-   The '\framebox' command is like '\makebox' (see previous section),
-except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
-creates.
+   Copy OBJ a total of NUM-COPIES times, with an increment of
+DELTA_X,DELTA_Y.  The OBJ first appears at position (x,y), then at
+(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y), and so on.
 
-   The '\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness '\fboxrule', and
-leaves a space '\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.
+   This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+*note \graphpaper::).
 
-8.19.4 '\dashbox'
+     \begin{picture}(10,10)
+       \linethickness{0.05mm}
+       \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}}
+       \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+       \linethickness{0.5mm}
+       \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+       \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+     \end{picture}
+
+8.19.3 '\qbezier'
 -----------------
 
-Draws a box with a dashed line.  Synopsis:
+Synopsis:
 
-     \dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT}
+     \qbezier(X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
+     \qbezier[NUM](X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
 
-   '\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a 'picture'
-environment.  Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall
-width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT.  The TEXT is positioned at optional
-POS.
+   Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments '(X1,Y1)', '(X2,Y2)', and '(X3,Y3)'.  That is,
+the curve runs from (X1,Y1) to (X3,Y3), is quadratic, and is such that
+the tangent line at (X1,Y1) passes through (X2,Y2), as does the tangent
+line at (X3,Y3).
 
-   A dashed box looks best when the RWIDTH and RHEIGHT are multiples of
-the DLEN.
+   This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
 
-8.19.5 '\frame'
----------------
+     \qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
 
+The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve's tangent line at (1,0).
+
+   The optional argument NUM gives the number of calculated intermediate
+points.  The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
+points is '\qbeziermax' (change this value with '\renewcommand').
+
+8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+--------------------
+
 Synopsis:
 
-     \frame{TEXT}
+     \graphpaper(X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
+     \graphpaper[SPACING](X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
 
-   The '\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT.  The
-reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame.  No extra space
-is put between the frame and the object.
+   Draw a coordinate grid.  Requires the 'graphpap' package.  The grid's
+origin is '(X_INIT,Y_INIT)'.  Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
+default is 10).  The grid extends X_DIMEN units to the right and Y_DIMEN
+units up.  All arguments must be positive integers.
 
-8.19.6 '\line'
+   This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal
+lines.
+
+     \usepackage{graphpap}    % in preamble
+       ...
+     \begin{picture}(6,20)    % in document body
+       \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+     \end{picture}
+
+The lines are numbered every ten units.
+
+8.19.5 '\line'
 --------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}
+     \line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
 
-   The '\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope
-XSLOPE/YSLOPE.
+   Draw a line.  It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
+every horizontal X_RUN.  The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change -- it
+is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x.  In the special
+case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
+change in y.
 
-   Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y
-have integer values from -6 through 6.  For lines of any slope, and
-plenty of other shapes, see 'pict2e' and many other packages on CTAN.
+   This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
 
-8.19.7 '\linethickness'
+     \put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+
+For every over 2, this line will go up 5.  Because TRAVEL specifies that
+this goes over 4, it must go up 10.  Thus its endpoint is
+(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13).  In particular, note that TRAVEL=4 is not the
+length of the line, it is the change in x.
+
+   The arguments X_RUN and Y_RISE are integers that can be positive,
+negative, or zero.  (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the second as 1.)
+With '\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}', if X_RUN is
+negative then the line's ending point has a first coordinate that is
+less than X_INIT.  If Y_RISE is negative then the line's ending point
+has a second coordinate that is less than Y_INIT.
+
+   If TRAVEL is negative then you get 'LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
+argument.'
+
+   Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts.  The two numbers X_RUN and Y_RISE must have integer
+values from -6 through 6.  Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then
+instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to
+switch to the former).  To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of
+other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e' on
+CTAN. Another solution is to use a full-featured graphics system such as
+'TikZ', or 'PSTricks', or 'MetaPost', or 'Asymptote'
+
+8.19.6 '\linethickness'
 -----------------------
 
-The '\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal
-and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a
-positive length.
+Synopsis:
 
-   '\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
-circles, or the quarter circles drawn by '\oval'.
+     \linethickness{DIM}
 
+   Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in
+a picture to be DIM, which must be a positive length (*note Lengths::).
+It differs from '\thinlines' and '\thicklines' in that it does not
+affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals.
+
+8.19.7 '\thinlines'
+-------------------
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt.  This is the default thickness, so
+this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been changed with
+either *note \linethickness:: or *note \thicklines::.
+
 8.19.8 '\thicklines'
 --------------------
 
-The '\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal
-and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
-and *note \thinlines::.
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt.  See also *note \linethickness::
+and *note \thinlines::.  This command is illustrated in the Trapezoidal
+Rule example of *note picture::.
 
-8.19.9 '\thinlines'
--------------------
+8.19.9 '\circle'
+----------------
 
-The '\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal
-and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
-and *note \thicklines::.
+Synopsis:
 
-8.19.10 '\multiput'
--------------------
+     \circle{DIAMETER}
+     \circle*{DIAMETER}
 
-Synopsis:
+   Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the
+specified one.  The '*' form produces a filled-in circle.
 
-     \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
+   This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at '(5,7)'.
 
-   The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
-across a picture.  OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at
-(x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times.
+     \put(5,7){\circle{6}}
 
-8.19.11 '\oval'
+   The available radii for 'circle' are, in points, the even numbers
+from 2 to 20, inclusive.  For 'circle*' they are all the integers from 1
+to 15.
+
+8.19.10 '\oval'
 ---------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
+     \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
      \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
 
-   The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.  The
-optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only half of the oval
-via the following:
+   Produce a rectangle with rounded corners.  The optional argument
+PORTION allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.  For
+half an oval take PORTION to be one of these.
 
 't'
-     selects the top half;
+     top half
 'b'
-     selects the bottom half;
+     bottom half
 'r'
-     selects the right half;
+     right half
 'l'
-     selects the left half.
+     left half
 
-   It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by
-setting PORTION to 'tr', 'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
+   Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting PORTION to 'tr',
+'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
 
-   The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
-maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
-rounded corners.
+   This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
 
-8.19.12 '\put'
---------------
+     \put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
 
-Synopsis:
+The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
 
-     \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){ ... }
+   These shapes are not ellipses.  They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles.  These circles have a maximum radius of 20pt
+(*note \circle:: for the sizes).  Thus large ovals are just boxes with a
+small amount of corner rounding.
 
-   The '\put' command places the material specified by the (mandatory)
-argument in braces at the given coordinate, (XCOORD,YCOORD).
-
-8.19.13 '\shortstack'
+8.19.11 '\shortstack'
 ---------------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...}
+     \shortstack[POSITION]{LINE 1 \\ ... }
 
-   The '\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects.  The valid
-positions are:
+   Produce a vertical stack of objects.
 
+   This labels the y axis.
+
+     \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}}   % x axis
+     \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}}   % y
+     \put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+
+For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the *note \mbox & \makebox:: puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the y axis.
+
+   The valid positions are:
+
 'r'
-     Move the objects to the right of the stack.
+     Make objects flush right
 'l'
-     Move the objects to the left of the stack
+     Make objects flush left
 'c'
-     Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+     Center objects (default)
 
-   Objects are separated with '\\'.
+   Separate objects into lines with '\\'.  These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, here the rows are
+not spaced out to be of even heights.  Thus, in
+'\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}' the first and last rows are taller than the
+middle two.  You can adjust row heights either by putting in the usual
+interline spacing with '\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}', or by hand,
+via an explicit zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt}
+o\\o\\X}' or by using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt]
+o\\o\\X}'.
 
-8.19.14 '\vector'
+   The '\shortstack' command is also available outside the 'picture'
+environment.
+
+8.19.12 '\vector'
 -----------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \vector(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}
+     \vector(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
 
-   The '\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope.  The XSLOPE and YSLOPE values must lie between -4 and
-+4, inclusive.
+   Draw a line ending in an arrow.  The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN.  The TRAVEL is the
+total horizontal change -- it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+change in x.  In the special case of vertical vectors, if
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
 
-8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
-============================
+   For an example see *note picture::.
 
+   For elaboration on X_RUN and Y_RISE see *note \line::.  As there, the
+values of X_RUN and Y_RISE are limited.  For '\vector' you must chooses
+integers between -4 and 4, inclusive.  Also, the two you choose must be
+relatively prime.  Thus, '\vector(2,1){4}' is acceptable but
+'\vector(4,2){4}' is not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence
+of arrowheads).
+
+8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+----------------------------
+
 Synopsis:
 
+     \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+     \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+   Make a box to hold TEXT.  This command fits with the 'picture'
+environment, although you can use it outside of there, because REC-WIDTH
+and REC-HEIGHT are numbers specifying distances in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::).  This command is similar to the normal
+'\makebox' command (*note \mbox & \makebox::) except here that you must
+specify the width and height.  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+   This makes a box of length 3.5 times '\unitlength' and height 4 times
+'\unitlength'.
+
+     \put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+
+   The optional argument 'POSITION' specifies where in the box the TEXT
+appears.  The default is to center it, both horizontally and vertically.
+To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or two of these
+letters.
+
+'t'
+     Puts TEXT the top of the box.
+
+'b'
+     Put TEXT at the bottom.
+
+'l'
+     Put TEXT on the left.
+
+'r'
+     Put TEXT on the right.
+
+8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+     \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+   This is the same as *note \makebox (picture):: except that it puts a
+frame around the outside of the box that it creates.  The reference
+point is the bottom left corner of the frame.  This command fits with
+the 'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::).  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+   This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts the text
+in the center.
+
+     \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+     \framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+
+   The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+RECT-WIDTH units and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+   The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+   The rule has thickness '\fboxrule' and there is a blank space
+'\fboxsep' between the frame and the contents of the box.
+
+   For this command, you must specify the WIDTH and HEIGHT.  If you want
+to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is determined
+in some other way then either use '\fbox' (*note \fbox & \framebox::) or
+'\frame' (*note \frame::).
+
+8.19.15 '\frame'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \frame{CONTENTS}
+
+   Puts a rectangular frame around CONTENTS.  The reference point is the
+bottom left corner of the frame.  In contrast to '\framebox' (*note
+\framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space is put between
+the frame and the object.  It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+     \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+   Create a dashed rectangle around TEXT.  This command fits with the
+'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there, because
+lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::).
+
+   The required arguments are: dashes are DASH-LEN units long, with the
+same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width RECT-WIDTH units
+and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+   The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+   This shows that you can use non-integer value for DASH-LEN.
+
+     \put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+
+Each dash will be '0.1\unitlength' long, the box's width is
+'5\unitlength' and its height is '0.5\unitlength'.
+
+   As in that example, a dashed box looks best when RECT-WIDTH and
+RECT-HEIGHT are multiples of the DASH-LEN.
+
+8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
+==========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
      \begin{quotation}
-     TEXT
+       TEXT
      \end{quotation}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \begin{quote}
-     TEXT
+       TEXT
      \end{quote}
 
-   Include a quotation.
+   Include a quotation.  Both environments indent margins on both sides
+by '\leftmargin' and the text is right-justified.
 
-   In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
-'\leftmargin' and the text is justified at both.  As with the main text,
-leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.
+   They differ in how they treat paragraphs.  In the 'quotation'
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space between
+paragraphs is small, '0pt plus 1pt'.  In the 'quote' environment,
+paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space between
+paragraphs (it is the rubber length '\parsep').
 
-   To compare the two: in the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are
-indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small, '0pt plus
-1pt'.  In the 'quote' environment, paragraphs are not indented and there
-is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the rubber length
-'\parsep').  Thus, the 'quotation' environment may be more suitable for
-documents where new paragraphs are marked by an indent rather than by a
-vertical separation.  In addition, 'quote' may be more suitable for a
-short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
-
-     \begin{quotation}
-     \it Four score and seven years ago
+     \begin{quotation} \small\it
+       Four score and seven years ago
        ... shall not perish from the earth.
-     \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+       \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
      \end{quotation}
 
 8.21 'tabbing'
@@ -3763,10 +4791,11 @@
      ...
      \end{tabbing}
 
-   The 'tabbing' environment aligns text in columns.  It works by
-setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on a typewriter.
-It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
-and known in advance.
+   Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much
+as was done on a typewriter.  This is less often used than the
+environments 'tabular' (*note tabular::) or 'array' (*note array::)
+because in those the width of each column need not be constant and need
+not be known in advance.
 
    This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
 widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):
@@ -3884,7 +4913,8 @@
                  end;\\
      \end{tabbing}
 
-   The output looks like this:
+The output looks like this.
+
      function fact(n : integer) : integer;
               begin
                     if n > 1 then
@@ -3893,11 +4923,11 @@
                        fact := 1;
               end;
 
-   (The above example is just for illustration of the environment.  To
-actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim
-environment (*note verbatim::) would normally suffice.  For
-pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including
-'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb', 'listings', and 'minted'.)
+This example is just for illustration of the environment.  To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(*note verbatim::) would normally be best.  For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including 'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb',
+'listings', and 'minted'.
 
 8.22 'table'
 ============
@@ -3905,27 +4935,45 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
-       table body
-     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
-     \label{LABEL}
+       TABLE BODY
+       \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}  % optional
+       \label{LABEL}              % also optional
      \end{table}
 
-   A class of floats (*note Floats::).  Because they cannot be split
-across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
-instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+   A class of floats (*note Floats::).  They cannot be split across
+pages and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a
 following page.
 
+   This example 'table' environment contains a 'tabular'
+
+     \begin{table}
+       \centering\small
+       \begin{tabular}{ll}
+         \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+           &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}}  \\ \hline
+         Bach            &Cello Suite Number 1  \\
+         Beethoven       &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+         Brahms          &Cello Sonata Number 1
+       \end{tabular}
+       \caption{Top cello pieces}
+       \label{tab:cello}
+     \end{table}
+
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table', including
+text, LaTeX commands, etc.
+
    For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
 placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
 
-   The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
-it can contain text, commands, etc.
+   The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'.  It
+can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
 
    The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
-references::).  The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
-for the table.  By default it is numbered.  If LOTTITLE is present, it
-is used in the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
-contents::).
+references::).  The '\caption' command is also optional.  It specifies
+caption text for the table.  By default it is numbered.  If its optional
+LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead
+of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
 
    In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
 page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -3947,20 +4995,20 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
-     column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+       COLUMN 1 ENTRY  &COLUMN 2 ENTRY  ...  &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
        ...
      \end{tabular}
 
 or
 
      \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
-     column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+       COLUMN 1 ENTRY  &COLUMN 2 ENTRY  ...  &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
        ...
      \end{tabular*}
 
-   These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
-horizontal rows.  Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
-in columns.  This illustrates many of the features.
+   Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns.  This
+illustrates many of the features.
 
      \begin{tabular}{l|l}
        \textit{Player name}  &\textit{Career home runs}  \\
@@ -3969,23 +5017,16 @@
        Babe Ruth   &714
      \end{tabular}
 
-   The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
-between them, is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'.  Columns are
-separated with an ampersand '&'.  A horizontal rule between two rows is
-created with '\hline'.  The end of each row is marked with a double
-backslash '\\'.  This '\\' is optional after the last row unless an
-'\hline' command follows, to put a rule below the table.
+The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them.  This is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'.  Put
+the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand,
+'&'.  The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, '\\'.  Put
+a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with '\hline'.
+This '\\' is optional after the last row unless an '\hline' command
+follows, to put a rule below the table.
 
    The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
 
-WIDTH
-     Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'.  Specifies the
-     width of the 'tabular*' environment.  The space between columns
-     should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
-     table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
-     are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-     ...' warning.
-
 POS
      Optional.  Specifies the table's vertical position.  The default is
      to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
@@ -4015,27 +5056,29 @@
           A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
 
      '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
-          This inserts TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row.  The
-          TEXT OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is
-          fragile (*note \protect::).
+          Insert TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row.  The TEXT
+          OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is fragile
+          (*note \protect::).
 
-          This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, LaTeX's
+          If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX's
           'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
           side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
-          default is '6pt'.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
-          separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly-named since
-          it is not the separation between tabular columns).  By
-          implication, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
+          default is 6pt.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
+          separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly named since
+          it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).
+          In addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
           and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
           there.
 
-          If you override the default and use an @-expression then you
-          must insert any desired space yourself, as in
-          '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+          If you override the default and use an @-expression then LaTeX
+          does not insert '\tabcolsep' so you must insert any desired
+          space yourself, as in '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
 
-          An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space, including
-          the space at the start or end, as in the example below where
-          the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+          An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space.  In
+          particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the the space
+          before the first column or after the last one, as in the
+          example below where the tabular lines need to lie on the left
+          margin.
 
                \begin{flushleft}
                  \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
@@ -4043,9 +5086,9 @@
                  \end{tabular}
                \end{flushleft}
 
-          This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns,
-          arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on that
-          decimal point.
+          The next example shows text, a decimal point between the
+          columns, arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on
+          it.
 
                \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
                  $3$ &$14$  \\
@@ -4055,42 +5098,50 @@
           An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
           extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
           subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
-          '\extracolsep' command.  Unlike ordinary intercolumn space,
-          this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression.  An
-          '\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in
-          the 'cols' argument.  Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
+          '\extracolsep'.  Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
+          space is not suppressed by an @-expression.  An '\extracolsep'
+          command can be used only in an @-expression in the 'cols'
+          argument.  Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
           intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
 
-               \begin{center}
-                 \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
-                   Seven times down, eight times up
-                   &such is life!
-                 \end{tabular*}
-               \end{center}
+               \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+                 Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+                 &such is life!
+               \end{tabular*}
 
           To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
           given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
           specifier.
 
      'p{WD}'
-          Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD.
+          Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD, as
+          if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{wd}{...}' command.
 
-          Note that a line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in
-          the item, except inside an environment like 'minipage',
-          'array', or 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in
-          the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft'
-          declaration (when used in a 'p'-column element these
-          declarations must appear inside braces, as with '{\centering
-          .. \\ ..}').  Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double
-          backslash as ending the row.
+          A line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in the item,
+          except inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
+          'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in the scope of
+          a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft' declaration
+          (when used in a 'p'-column element these declarations must
+          appear inside braces, as with '{\centering .. \\ ..}').
+          Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
+          ending the row.  Instead, to get a line break in there use
+          '\newline' (*note \newline::).
 
      '*{NUM}{COLS}'
           Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
-          integer and COLS is a list of specifiers.  Thus
-          '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to
+          integer and COLS is a list of specifiers.  Thus the specifier
+          '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to the specifier
           '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'.  Note that COLS may contain
           another '*'-expression.
 
+WIDTH
+     Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'.  Specifies the
+     width of the 'tabular*' environment.  The space between columns
+     should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+     table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+     are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+     ...' warning.
+
    Parameters that control formatting:
 
 '\arrayrulewidth'
@@ -4133,8 +5184,9 @@
 spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
 
      \begin{tabular}{lccl}
-       \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
-       978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\        % row two
+       \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
+       \hline
+       978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\
          ...
      \end{tabular}
 
@@ -4159,12 +5211,12 @@
          &z                        % entry four
      \end{tabular}
 
-   Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule
-because the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial
-vertical bar.  Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical
-rule; although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the
-second COLS does have a starting one.  Between entry two and entry three
-there is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
+Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial vertical
+bar.  Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical rule;
+although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the second
+COLS does have a starting one.  Between entry two and entry three there
+is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
 surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
 rule.  Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
 default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
@@ -4192,7 +5244,7 @@
        Impressionistic  &1875           &1925
      \end{tabular}
 
-   Note that although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a
+Note that although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a
 vertical rule between the first and second columns, because there is no
 vertical bar in the COLS of either of the first row's '\multicolumn'
 commands, no rule appears in the first row.
@@ -4205,22 +5257,22 @@
 @-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
 This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
 vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
-as needed with '\multicolumn'.
+as needed with '\multicolumn' (*note tabular::).
 
-   This example illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first line's second
-entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the cell.  But
-that is different than putting it halfway between the two columns, so in
-that row between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+   The example below illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first row's
+second entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the
+cell.  But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
 rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
-produced by the '\vline\hfill'.  In contrast, the first line's third
+produced by the '\vline\hfill'.  In contrast, the first row's third
 entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns.  In
-the second line, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
+the second row, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
 '\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
 entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
 
      \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
-       x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\
-       abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi
+       x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
+       abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi                       % row 2
      \end{tabular}
 
 8.23.3 '\cline'
@@ -4230,10 +5282,10 @@
 
      \cline{I-J}
 
-   Draw a horizontal rule in an 'array' or 'tabular' environment
-beginning in column I and ending in column J.  The dash '-' must appear
-in the mandatory argument.  To span a single column use the number
-twice.
+   In an 'array' or 'tabular' environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column I and ending in column J.  The dash, '-', must
+appear in the mandatory argument.  To span a single column use the
+number twice, as with '\cline{2-2}'.
 
    This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
 rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
@@ -4248,7 +5300,7 @@
 8.23.4 '\hline'
 ---------------
 
-Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
+Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
 environment.  It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
 and between the rows of a table.
 
@@ -4268,69 +5320,159 @@
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL}
-     \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
-     ...
+       \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+       ...
      \end{thebibliography}
 
-   The 'thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list.
+   Produce a bibliography or reference list.  There are two ways to
+produce bibliographic lists.  This environment is suitable when you have
+only a few references and can maintain the list by hand.  *Note Using
+BibTeX:: for a more sophisticated approach.
 
-   In the 'article' class, this reference list is labelled 'References'
-and the label is stored in macro '\refname'; in the 'report' class, it
-is labelled 'Bibliography' and the label is stored in macro '\bibname'.
+   This shows the environment with two entries.
 
-   You can change the label by redefining the command '\refname' or
-'\bibname', whichever is applicable depending on the class:
+     This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+     Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+       ...
+     \begin{thebibliography}{9}
+     \bibitem{latexdps}
+       Leslie Lamport.
+       \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+     \bibitem{texbook}
+       Donald Ervin Knuth.
+       \textit{The \TeX book}.
+       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+     \end{thebibliography}
 
-   * For standard classes whose top level sectioning is '\chapter' (such
-     as 'book' and 'report'), the label is in the macro '\bibname';
+This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that
+'\cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'.  The second
+'\cite' produces '[1, 2]'.  You must compile the document twice to
+resolve these references.
 
-   * For standard classes whose the top level sectioning is '\section'
-     (such as 'article'), the label is in macro '\refname'.
+   The mandatory argument WIDEST-LABEL is text that, when typeset, is as
+wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands.  The
+tradition is to use '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
+'99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
 
-   Typically it is neither necessary nor desirable to directly redefine
-'\refname' or '\bibname'; language support packages like 'babel' do
-this.
+   The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as 'Bibliography'.
+To change it there are two cases.  In the 'book' and 'report' classes,
+where the top level sectioning is '\chapter' and the default title is
+'Bibliography', that title is in the macro '\bibname'.  For 'article',
+where the class's top level sectioning is '\section' and the default is
+'References', the title is in macro '\refname'.  Change it by redefining
+the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}' after
+'\begin{document}'.
 
-   The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is as
-wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands.  It
-is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10
-references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+   Language support packages such as 'babel' will automatically redefine
+'\refname' or '\bibname' to fit the selected language.
 
 8.24.1 '\bibitem'
 -----------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
+     \bibitem{CITE_KEY}
+
+or
+
      \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
 
-   The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL.  If the
-LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the
-'enumi' counter.  The CITE_KEY is a "citation key" consisting in any
-sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a
-comma.
+   Generate an entry labeled by LABEL.  The default is for LaTeX to
+generates a number using the 'enumi' counter.  The "citation key"
+CITE_KEY is a string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but
+not comma).
 
-   This command writes an entry to the '.aux' file containing the item's
-CITE_KEY and LABEL.  When the '.aux' file is read by the
-'\begin{document}' command, the item's LABEL is associated with
-'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (*note
-\cite::) to produce the associated LABEL.
+   *Note thebibliography:: for an example.
 
+   The optional LABEL changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string.  With this
+
+     \begin{thebibliography}
+     \bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
+       Leslie Lamport.
+       \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+     \bibitem{texbook}
+       Donald Ervin Knuth.
+       \textit{The \TeX book}.
+       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+     \end{thebibliography}
+
+the first entry will be styled as '[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...' (The
+amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
+the WIDEST-LABEL argument of the 'thebibliography' environment; see
+*note thebibliography::.)  Similarly, '... based on \cite{latexdps}'
+will produce '... based on [Lamport 1994]'.
+
+   If you mix '\bibitem' entries having a LABEL with those that do not
+then LaTeX will number the unlabelled ones sequentially.  In the example
+above the 'texbook' entry will appear as '[1] Donald ...', despite that
+it is the second entry.
+
+   If you use the same CITE_KEY twice then you get 'LaTeX Warning: There
+were multiply-defined labels'.
+
+   Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the CITE_KEY and LABEL information
+because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'.  For
+instance, the above example causes '\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}'
+and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear in that file.  The '.aux' file is
+read by the '\begin{document}' command and then the information is
+available for '\cite' commands.  This explains why you need to run LaTeX
+twice to resolve references: once to write it out and once to read it
+in.
+
+   Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a '\bibitem' or
+change its CITE_KEY you may get 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
+changed. Rerun to get cross-references right'.  Fix it by recompiling.
+
 8.24.2 '\cite'
 --------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
+     \cite{KEYS}
+
+or
+
      \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
 
-   The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys (*note
-\bibitem::), separated by commas.  This command generates an in-text
-citation to the references associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux'
-file.
+   Generate as output a citation to the references associated with KEYS.
+The mandatory KEYS is a citation key, or a comma-separated list of
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::).
 
-   The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation.
-For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.
+   This
 
+     The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+       ...
+     \begin{thebibliography}
+     \bibitem{texbook}
+       Donald Ervin Knuth.
+       \textit{The \TeX book}.
+       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+     \end{thebibliography}
+
+produces the output '... source is [1]'.
+
+   The optional argument SUBCITE is appended to the citation.  For
+example, 'See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}' might produce 'See 14.3 in
+[1, p. 314]'.
+
+   If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get 'LaTeX
+Warning: There were undefined references', and in the output the
+citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes.  If you have mistyped something, as in
+'\cite{texbok}' then you need to correct the spelling.  On the other
+hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic information
+and so changed the '.aux' file (*note \bibitem::) then the fix may be to
+just run LaTeX again.
+
+   In addition to what appears in the output, '\cite' writes information
+to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'.  For instance, '\cite{latexdps}'
+writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file.  This information is used by
+BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you have
+actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
+
 8.24.3 '\nocite'
 ----------------
 
@@ -4338,59 +5480,102 @@
 
      \nocite{KEYS}
 
-   The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes KEYS, which is a
-list of one or more citation keys, to the '.aux' file.
+   Produces no output but writes KEYS to the auxiliary file
+'DOC-FILENAME.aux'.
 
+   The mandatory argument KEYS is a comma-separated list of one or more
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::).  This information is used by BibTeX to
+include these works in your reference list even though you have not
+cited them (*note \cite::).
+
 8.24.4 Using BibTeX
 -------------------
 
-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
-you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
-your bibliography, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment
-(*note thebibliography::).  Instead, you include the lines
+As described in 'thebibliography' (*note thebibliography::), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+BibTeX program.  This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
 
+   With BibTeX, you don't use 'thebibliography' (*note
+thebibliography::).  Instead, include these lines.
+
      \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
-     \bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2}
+     \bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
 
-   The '\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
-own.  Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be
-produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE'.bst', which defines how
-your citations will look.  The standard BIBSTYLE names distributed with
-BibTeX are:
+The BIBSTYLE refers to a file 'BIBSTYLE.bst', which defines how your
+citations will look.  The standard BIBSTYLE's distributed with BibTeX
+are:
 
 'alpha'
-     Sorted alphabetically.  Labels are formed from name of author and
-     year of publication.
+     Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.  The
+     bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
 'plain'
-     Sorted alphabetically.  Labels are numeric.
+     Labels are integers.  Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
 'unsrt'
      Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
 'abbrv'
      Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
 
-   In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
-demands of various publications.  See
+Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
+various publications.  See CTAN's listing
 <http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
 
    The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
-bibliography.  The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named
-'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ..., which should contain your database
-in BibTeX format.  Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and
-'\nocite' will be listed in the bibliography.
+bibliography.  Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named 'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ... These contain your
+database in BibTeX format.  This shows a typical couple of entries in
+that format.
 
+     @book{texbook,
+       title     = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+       author    = {D.E. Knuth},
+       isbn      = {0201134489},
+       series    = {Computers \& typesetting},
+       year      = {1983},
+       publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+     }
+     @book{sexbook,
+         author    = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+         title     = {Human Sexual Response},
+         year      = {1966},
+         publisher = {Bantam Books}
+     }
+
+   Only the bibliographic entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite'
+will be listed in the document's bibliography.  Thus you can keep all
+your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
+on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
+
 8.25 'theorem'
 ==============
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{theorem}
-     THEOREM-TEXT
+       THEOREM BODY
      \end{theorem}
 
-   The 'theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed
-by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described
-under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).
+   Produces 'Theorem N' in boldface followed by THEOREM BODY in italics.
+The numbering possibilities for N are described under '\newtheorem'
+(*note \newtheorem::).
 
+     \newtheorem{lem}{Lemma}      % in preamble
+     \newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+       ...
+     \begin{lem}                  % in  document body
+       text of lemma
+     \end{lem}
+
+     The next result follows immediately.
+     \begin{thm}[Gauss]   %  put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+       text of theorem
+     \end{thm}
+
+   Most new documents use the packages 'amsthm' and 'amsmath' from the
+American Mathematical Society.  Among other things these packages
+include a large number of options for theorem environments, such as
+styling options.
+
 8.26 'titlepage'
 ================
 
@@ -4400,15 +5585,12 @@
        ... text and spacing ...
      \end{titlepage}
 
-   Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading.
-The following page will be numbered page one.
+   Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading
+and with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
 
-   To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
-environment you can use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+   In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left
+to the author.
 
-   Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical
-spacing, is left to the author.
-
      \begin{titlepage}
      \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
      \begin{center}
@@ -4430,6 +5612,9 @@
      \vspace{\stretch{2}}
      \end{titlepage}
 
+   To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
+environment, use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+
 8.27 'verbatim'
 ===============
 
@@ -4439,51 +5624,118 @@
      LITERAL-TEXT
      \end{verbatim}
 
-   The 'verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which
-LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the '\' character
-produces a printed '\'.  It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage
-returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a
-typewriter.
+   A paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces as output
+exactly what you type as input.  For instance inside LITERAL-TEXT the
+backslash '\' character does not start commands, it produces a printed
+'\', and carriage returns and blanks are taken literally.  The output
+appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
 
-   The 'verbatim' environment uses a monospaced typewriter-like font
-('\tt').
+     \begin{verbatim}
+     Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.
+     \end{verbatim}
 
+   The only restriction on 'literal-text' is that it cannot include the
+string '\end{verbatim}'.
+
+   You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros,
+for instance in the argument to a '\section'.  This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear
+there.  (But the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
+   One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code.  There
+are packages that are an improvement the 'verbatim' environment.  For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files.  Such packages include 'listings', and
+'minted'.
+
+   A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
+is 'fancyvrb'.  Another is 'verbatimbox'.
+
+   For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+
 8.27.1 '\verb'
 --------------
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
-     \verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
+     \verb CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
+     \verb* CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
 
-   The '\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including
-special characters and spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.  No
-spaces are allowed between '\verb' or '\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR,
-which begins and ends the verbatim text.  The delimiter must not appear
-in LITERAL-TEXT.
+   Typeset LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including special characters and
+spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.
 
-   The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
-space" character.
+   This example shows two different invocations of '\verb'.
 
+     This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+     And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+
+The first '\verb' has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
+point, '!'.  The second instead uses plus, '+', because the exclamation
+point is part of 'literal-text'.
+
+   The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT -- it must
+be the same character before and after.  No spaces come between '\verb'
+or '\verb*' and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
+LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
+space only to distinguish one component from the other).  The delimiter
+must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT.  The LITERAL-TEXT cannot include a line
+break.
+
+   The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+
+   The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+
+     The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+
+   For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' provides
+an option that is better than the '\verb' command, since it allows line
+breaks.
+
+   For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+'\verb'.  One is 'listings', another is 'minted'.
+
+   You cannot use '\verb' in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a '\section'.  It is not a question of '\verb' being
+fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear there.  (But
+the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
 8.28 'verse'
 ============
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \begin{verse}
-     LINE1 \\
-     LINE2 \\
-     ...
+       LINE1 \\
+       LINE2 \\
+       ...
      \end{verse}
 
-   The 'verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
+   An environment for poetry.
 
-   The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are
-not indented, and the text is not justified.  Separate the lines of each
-stanza with '\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the
-stanzas.
+   Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
 
+     Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+     On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+
+   Separate the lines of each stanza with '\\', and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+
+     \begin{verse}
+     \makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+       \\[1\baselineskip]
+     Shut not your doors to me proud libraries,                  \\
+     For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+     \qquad yet needed most, I bring,                             \\
+     Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made,            \\
+     The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing,  \\
+     A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+     But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+     \end{verse}
+
+The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+
 9 Line breaking
 ***************
 
@@ -4495,58 +5747,128 @@
    LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
 you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
 
+   A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks).  This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it.  Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+
 9.1 '\\'
 ========
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
+     \\
      \\[MORESPACE]
 
-   or
+or one of:
 
+     \\*
      \\*[MORESPACE]
 
-   Start a new line.  The optional argument MORESPACE specifies extra
-vertical space to be insert before the next line.  This can be a
-negative length.  The text before the break is set at its normal length,
-that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.
+   End the current line.  The optional argument MORESPACE specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line.  This is a
+rubber length (*note Lengths::) and can be negative.  The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width.  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
-   Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in LaTeX.  In
-particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line.  This
-command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in a
-'tabular' or 'array' environment.
+   The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between
+the two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
 
-   Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{...}' column in a
-'tabular' environment) the '\newline' command is a synonym for '\\'
-(*note \newline::).
-
-   In addition to starting a new line, the starred form '\\*' tells
-LaTeX not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
-'\nobreak'.
-
      \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
             a tale of woe}
 
+   Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX.  In
+particular, don't start new paragraphs with '\\'.  Instead leave a blank
+line between the two paragraphs.  And don't put in a sequence of '\\''s
+to make vertical space.  Instead use '\vspace{LENGTH}', or
+'\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}', or '\vspace*{LENGTH}' if you want the
+space to not be thrown out at the top of a new page (*note \vspace::).
+
+   The '\\' command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such
+as in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment or in an equation environment.
+
+   The '\\' command is a synonym for '\newline' (*note \newline::) under
+ordinary circumstances (an example of an exception is the 'p{...}'
+column in a 'tabular' environment; *note tabular::).
+
+   The '\\' command is a macro, and its definition changes by context so
+that its definition in normal text, a 'center' environment, a
+'flushleft' environment, and a 'tabular' are all different.  In normal
+text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand for
+'\newline'.  It does not end horizontal mode or end the paragraph, it
+just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the paragraph does end
+a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short line padded with
+white space.
+
+   You get 'LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end' if you use '\\' to
+ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.  An example is
+if you have '\begin{document}\\' or, more likely, something like this.
+
+     \begin{center}
+       \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+       \\
+       In that vertical space put your mark.
+       \end{minipage}
+     \end{center}
+
+Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+'\vspace{\baselineskip}'.
+
 9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
 ============================
 
 The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
-internally) the same as '\\' (followed by '\relax').  So each new line
-in the input will also be a new line in the output.
+internally) the same as '\\', followed by '\relax'.  So each new line in
+the input will also be a new line in the output.  The '\restorecr'
+command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
 
-   '\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+   This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.  *Note
+verbatim:: instead.
 
+   With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
+
+     aaa
+     bbb
+
+     \obeycr
+     ccc
+     ddd
+        eee
+
+     \restorecr
+     fff
+     ggg
+
+     hhh
+     iii
+
+produces output like this.
+
+       aaa bbb
+       ccc
+     ddd
+     eee
+
+     fff ggg
+       hhh iii
+
+The indents are paragraph indents.
+
 9.3 '\newline'
 ==============
 
-In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (*note \\::); it
-breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
+In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched.  That is, in paragraph
+mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (*note \\::).  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
 
-   Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{...}', '\newline'
-will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, it does not
-break the entire row.  To break the entire row use '\\' or its
-equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+   However, the two commands are different inside a 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment.  In a column with a specifier producing a paragraph box
+such as typically 'p{...}', '\newline' will insert a line end inside of
+the column; that is, it does not break the entire tabular row.  To break
+the entire row use '\\' or its equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
 
    This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
 of the table.
@@ -4555,194 +5877,411 @@
        Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
      \end{tabular}
 
-   The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
+The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
 
 9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
 ===============================
 
-The '\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
-point.  LaTeX is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds most of
-the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect
-one.  The '\-' command is used for the exceptional cases.
+Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point.  When you
+insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might
+otherwise have chosen.  This command is robust (*note \protect::).
 
-   When you insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be
-hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that
-LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+   LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one.  The '\-'
+command is for exceptional cases.
 
+   For example, LaTeX does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen.  Below, the long and hyphenated word means LaTeX has to put in
+unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+
+     \begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+       Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+                    anti-intellectualism
+                    % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+                    has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+                    political and cultural life, nurtured by
+                    the false notion that democracy means that
+                    `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+     \end{tabular}
+
+Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+
+   The '\-' command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
+require that it break there.  You can insist on a split with something
+like 'Hef-\linebreak feron'.  Of course, if you later change the text
+then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+
 9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
 ====================================================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \discretionary{PRE-BREAK-TEXT}{POST-BREAK-TEXT}{NO-BREAK-TEXT}
+     \discretionary{PRE-BREAK}{POST-BREAK}{NO-BREAK}
 
-9.6 '\fussy'
-============
+   Handle word changes around hyphens.  This command is not often used
+in LaTeX documents.
 
-The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
-line breaking.  This usually avoids too much space between words, at the
-cost of an occasional overfull box.
+   If a line break occurs at the point where '\discretionary' appears
+then TeX puts PRE-BREAK at the end of the current line and puts
+POST-BREAK at the start of the next line.  If there is no line break
+here then TeX puts NO-BREAK
 
-   This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command
-(*note \sloppy::).
+   In 'difficult' the three letters 'ffi' form a ligature.  But TeX can
+nonetheless break between the two f's with this.
 
-9.7 '\sloppy'
-=============
+     di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
 
-The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
-This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.
+   Note that users do not have to do this.  It is typically handled
+automatically by TeX's hyphenation algorithm.
 
-   Lasts until a '\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).
+9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+========================
 
-9.8 '\hyphenation'
+Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking.
+Declaring '\fussy' usually avoids too much space between words, at the
+cost of an occasional overfull box.  Conversely, '\sloppy' avoids
+overfull boxes while suffering loose interword spacing.
+
+   The default is '\fussy'.  Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
+by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or '\par', or
+displayed equation ending that paragraph.  So to affect the line breaks,
+include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
+
+9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \begin{sloppypar}
+       ... paragraphs ...
+     \end{sloppypar}
+
+   Typeset the paragraphs with '\sloppy' in effect (*note \fussy &
+\sloppy::).  Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+'Overfull box' or 'Underfull box' errors.
+
+   The example is simple.
+
+     \begin{sloppypar}
+       Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+       book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+       same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+       little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+       whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+       as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+       silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+       needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+       or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+       there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+     \end{sloppypar}
+
+9.7 '\hyphenation'
 ==================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO}
+     \hyphenation{WORD1 ...}
 
-   The '\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a
-'-' character in the given words.  The words are separated by spaces.
-TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are
-tried.  Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.  Some examples (the
-default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these
-words):
+   Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.
+The words in that list are separated by spaces.  Show permitted points
+for hyphenation with a dash character, '-'.
 
-     \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+   Here is an example:
 
-9.9 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+     \hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
+
+   Use lowercase letters.  TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly.  Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.
+
+9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
 =================================
 
-Synopses:
+Synopses, one of:
 
-     \linebreak[PRIORITY]
-     \nolinebreak[PRIORITY]
+     \linebreak
+     \linebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
 
-   By default, the '\linebreak' ('\nolinebreak') command forces
-(prevents) a line break at the current position.  For '\linebreak', the
-spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right
-margin as usual.
+or one of these.
 
-   With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command from
-a demand to a request.  The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4.  The
-higher the number, the more insistent the request.
+     \nolinebreak
+     \nolinebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
 
+   Encourage or discourage a line break.  The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the instruction.  The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break.  But for instance, '\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion
+that another place may be better.  The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+
+     \boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+     We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+     underrepresented groups.
+
+   When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
+so that it extends to the right margin.  *Note \\:: and *note \newline::
+to have the spaces not stretched out.
+
 10 Page breaking
 ****************
 
-LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
-accumulated to fill up a page.  Usually this happens automatically, but
-sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
+Ordinarily LaTeX automatically takes care of breaking output into pages
+with its usual aplomb.  But if you are writing commands, or tweaking the
+final version of a document, then you may need to understand how to
+influence its actions.
 
-10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
-=======================
+   LaTeX's algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result.  Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than would
+fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some way (it
+has the smallest badness).  An example of the advantage of this approach
+is that if the page has some vertical space that can be stretched or
+shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs, then LaTeX can
+use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts with the last
+line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line onto the first
+page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is at the end of a
+page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first page so the extra line
+falls on the second page).  Another example is where LaTeX uses
+available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header for a
+new section but also the first two lines of that section.
 
-The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all the
-pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.  In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
-next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
-necessary.
+   But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
+breaks.  So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
+ahead as the next page break.  So occasionally you may want to influence
+page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
 
-10.2 '\clearpage'
-=================
+   *Note Layout:: for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
 
-The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all the
-pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.
+10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+======================================
 
-10.3 '\newpage'
+Synopsis:
+
+     \clearpage
+
+or
+
+     \cleardoublepage
+
+   End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures
+and tables (*note Floats::).  If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then LaTeX will put in extra pages containing only floats.  In
+two-sided printing, '\cleardoublepage' also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page.  The '\clearpage' command is robust while
+'\cleardoublepage' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+   The '\cleardoublepage' command will put in a blank page, but it will
+have the running headers and footers.  To get a really blank page, use
+this command.
+
+     \let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+     \newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+       \clearpage
+       {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+     }
+
+If you want LaTeX's standard '\chapter' command to do this then add the
+line '\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage'.
+
+   The command '\newpage' (*note \newpage::) also ends the current page,
+but without clearing pending floats.  And, if LaTeX is in two-column
+mode then '\newpage' ends the current column while '\clearpage' and
+'\cleardoublepage' end the current page.
+
+10.2 '\newpage'
 ===============
 
-The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
-(*note \clearpage::).
+Synopsis:
 
-10.4 '\enlargethispage'
+     \newpage
+
+   End the current page.  This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+   LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+   While the commands '\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' also end the
+current page, in addition they clear pending floats (*note \clearpage &
+\cleardoublepage::).  And, if LaTeX is in two-column mode then
+'\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' end the current page, possibly
+leaving an empty column, while '\newpage' only ends the current column.
+
+   In contrast with '\pagebreak' (*note \pagebreak & \nopagebreak::),
+the '\newpage' command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested.  This
+
+     Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+     continent,
+     \newpage
+     \noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+     proposition that all men are created equal.
+
+makes a new page start after 'continent,' and the cut-off line is not
+right justified.  In addition, '\newpage' does not vertically stretch
+out the page, as '\pagebreak' does.
+
+10.3 '\enlargethispage'
 =======================
 
-'\enlargethispage{size}'
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-   '\enlargethispage*{size}'
+     \enlargethispage{size}
+     \enlargethispage*{size}
 
-   Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g., '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
-additional line.
+   Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page.  The required
+argument SIZE must be a rigid length (*note Lengths::).  It may be
+positive or negative.  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
-   The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
-as much as possible.  This is normally used together with an explicit
-'\pagebreak'.
+   A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks.  This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
 
-10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+   This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+
+     \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+
+   The starred form '\enlargesthispage*' tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page.  This is often used together with an
+explicit '\pagebreak'.
+
+10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
 ==================================
 
 Synopses:
 
-     \pagebreak[PRIORITY]
-     \nopagebreak[PRIORITY]
+     \pagebreak
+     \pagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
 
-   By default, the '\pagebreak' ('\nopagebreak') command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position.  With '\pagebreak', the
-vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it
-extends to the normal bottom margin.
+or
 
-   With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the '\pagebreak'
-command from a demand to a request.  The number must be a number from 0
-to 4.  The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+     \nopagebreak
+     \nopagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
 
+   Encourage or discourage a page break.  The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the request.  The default is 4, so
+that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break.  But for instance '\nopagebreak[1]' suggests to LaTeX
+that another spot might be preferable.  The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+   If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point
+following the line in which they appear.  So this
+
+     Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+     continent,
+     \pagebreak
+     a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+     that all men are created equal.
+
+does not give a page break at 'continent,' but instead at 'nation,'
+since that is where LaTeX breaks that line.  In addition, with
+'\pagebreak' the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
+possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.  This can look
+strange, and if '\flushbottom' is in effect this can cause you to get
+'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
+*Note \newpage:: for a command that does not have these effects.
+
 11 Footnotes
 ************
 
-Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
 
      Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
      to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
-     love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+     love.\footnote{%
+       I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
 
-   You can place multiple footnotes on a page.  If the text becomes too
-long it will flow to the next page.
+   You can put multiple footnotes on a page.  If the footnote text
+becomes too long then it will flow to the next page.
 
    You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
 the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
 
    To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
-include a bibliographic style with that behavior.
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (*note Using BibTeX::).
 
 11.1 '\footnote'
 ================
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
+     \footnote{TEXT}
      \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
 
-   Place a numbered footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+   Place a footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
 
      There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
-     \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
-     reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
-     ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
-     of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
-     at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+     \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+       After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+       ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+       of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+       at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
 
-   The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the footnote
-number.  If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
-incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.
+   The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the number of the
+footnote.  If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the 'footnote'
+counter.
 
-   Change how LaTeX shows the footnote counter with something like
+   By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers.  Change
+this with something like
 '\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
 sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
 \fnsymbol::).  To make this change global put that in the preamble.  If
 you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
-'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.  By default LaTeX uses arabic numbers.
+'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.
 
+   LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+
+'\footnoterule'
+     Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
+     page's footnotes.  Default dimensions in the standard document
+     classes (except 'slides', where it does not appear) is: vertical
+     thickness of '0.4pt', and horizontal size of '0.4\columnwidth'
+     long.  Change the rule with something like this.
+
+          \renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+            \kern -3pt                         % This -3 is negative
+            \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+            \kern 2pt}                         % and this 2
+
+'\footnotesep'
+     The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+     (*note \strut::).  By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+     '\footnotesize' fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no
+     extra space between footnotes.  This is '6.65pt' for '10pt',
+     '7.7pt' for '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'.  Change it as with
+     '\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}'.
+
+   The '\footnote' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
    LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
 '\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
 sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
-paragraph mode).  There are some workarounds; see following sections.
+paragraph mode; *note Modes::).  There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
 
    In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
 'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
 numbered independently.  They are shown at the bottom of the
 environment, not at the bottom of the page.  And by default they are
-shown alphabetically.  *Note minipage::.
+shown alphabetically.  *Note minipage:: and *note Footnotes in a
+table::.
 
 11.2 '\footnotemark'
 ====================
@@ -4752,14 +6291,25 @@
      \footnotemark
      \footnotemark[NUMBER]
 
-   Put the current footnote number in the text.  (See *note
-\footnotetext:: for giving the text of the footnote separately.)  The
-version with the optional argument NUMBER uses that number to determine
-the mark printed.  This command can be used in inner paragraph mode.
+   Put the current footnote mark in the text.  To specify associated
+text for the footnote see *note \footnotetext::.  The optional argument
+NUMBER causes the command to use that number to determine the footnote
+mark.  This command can be used in inner paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
 
-   This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the
-first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version of 'footnote').
+   If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
+it does not.  The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
 
+     The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+     and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+     and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+   If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
+of the common mark.  This example gives the same institutional
+affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version
+of 'footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+
      \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
      \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
        \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
@@ -4767,15 +6317,28 @@
      \begin{document}
      \maketitle
 
-   If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
-it does not.  This produces several consecutive footnote markers
-referring to the same footnote.
+   This uses a counter to remember the footnote number.  The third
+sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
 
-     The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
-     and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
-     and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+     \newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+     All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+       Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+     Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+       Captain Hook.}
+     Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+     Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
 
+   This example accomplishes the same by using the package 'cleveref'.
+
+     \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % in preamble
+     \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+     ...
+     The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+     The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+     But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+
+   It will work with the package 'hyperref'.
+
 11.3 '\footnotetext'
 ====================
 
@@ -4784,79 +6347,103 @@
      \footnotetext{TEXT}
      \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
 
-   Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  This command can
-come anywhere after the '\footnotemark' command.  The optional argument
-NUMBER changes the displayed footnote number.  The '\footnotetext'
-command must appear in outer paragraph mode.
+   Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  It pairs with
+'\footnotemark' (*note \footnotemark::) and can come anywhere after that
+command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (*note Modes::).  The
+optional argument NUMBER changes the number of the footnote mark.
 
-11.4 Footnotes in a table
+   *Note \footnotemark:: and *note Footnotes in a table:: for usage
+examples.
+
+11.4 Footnotes in section headings
+==================================
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+
+     \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  The simplest way to
+have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to '\section'
+
+     \section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+       Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+
+No '\protect' is needed in front of '\footnote' here because what gets
+moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+
+11.5 Footnotes in a table
 =========================
 
-Inside a 'table' environment the '\footnote' command does not work.  For
-instance, if the code below appears on its own then the footnote simply
-disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but nothing is
-set at the bottom of the page.
+Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment the '\footnote' command does
+not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but the footnote
+text does not appear.  The solution is to use a 'minipage' environment
+as here (*note minipage::).
 
      \begin{center}
+       \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
           \begin{tabular}{l|l}
-          \textsc{Ship}  &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
-          \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\
-          \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\
-          \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
-          \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
-                                     HMS Surprise.}
+            \textsc{Ship}           &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+            \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\
+            \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\
+            \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
+            \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{%
+                                       Starting with HMS Surprise.}
           \end{tabular}
+       \end{minipage}
      \end{center}
 
-   The solution is to surround the 'tabular' environment with a
-'minipage' environment, as here (*note minipage::).
+   Inside a 'minipage', footnote marks are lowercase letters.  Change
+that with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}' (*note \alph \Alph
+\arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
 
+   The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+'minipage'.  To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as part
+of the regular footnote sequence, use the '\footnotemark' and
+'\footnotetext' pair and make a new counter.
+
+     \newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
      \begin{center}
-       \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
-         ... tabular material ...
-       \end{minipage}
+       \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+         \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+          \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+            \textsc{Woman}             &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline
+            Mona                       &Attached\footnotemark  \\
+            Diana Villiers             &Eventual wife  \\
+            Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark
+          \end{tabular}
+       \end{minipage}%  percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+       \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+         \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+           Little is known other than her death.}%
+       \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+         \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+           Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
      \end{center}
 
-   The same technique will work inside a floating 'table' environment
-(*note table::).  To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
-'tablefootnote' package, as illustrated in this example.  If you put
-'\usepackage{tablefootnote}' in the preamble and use the code shown then
-the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in sequence with
-other footnotes.
+   For a floating 'table' environment (*note table::), use the
+'tablefootnote' package.
 
+     \usepackage{tablefootnote}  % in preamble
+        ...
      \begin{table}
        \centering
           \begin{tabular}{l|l}
           \textsc{Date}  &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
           1862           &Fort Donelson \\
           1863           &Vicksburg     \\
-          1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
+          1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+                           Ending the war.}
           \end{tabular}
          \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
      \end{table}
 
-11.5 Footnotes in section headings
-==================================
+The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
 
-Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
-
-     \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-
-causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
-contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  To have it not appear
-on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc' with the 'stable'
-option.
-
-     \usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
-     ...
-     \begin{document}
-     ...
-     \section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-
-   Note that the '\protect' is gone; including it would cause the
-footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
-
 11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
 ===========================
 
@@ -4865,52 +6452,14 @@
 'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
 including allow these two, as in this example.
 
-     \usepackage{bigfoot}
+     \usepackage{bigfoot}    % in preamble
      \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
      \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph]   % create class \footnotefrom{}
       ...
-     \begin{document}
-     ...
      The third theorem is a partial converse of the
-     second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
-     ...
+     second.\footnotefrom{%
+       First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
 
-11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
-=====================================
-
-You can refer to a single footnote more than once.  This example uses
-the package 'cleverref'.
-
-     \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % this version of package or later
-     \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
-     ...
-     \begin{document}
-     ...
-     The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
-     The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
-     But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
-     ...
-
-   This solution will work with the package 'hyperref'.  See *note
-\footnotemark:: for a simpler solution in the common case of multiple
-authors with the same affiliation.
-
-11.8 Footnote parameters
-========================
-
-'\footnoterule'
-     Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
-     page's footnotes.  Default dimensions: '0.4pt' thick (or wide), and
-     '0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except
-     'slides', where it does not appear).
-
-'\footnotesep'
-     The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.
-     By default, this is set to the normal strut for '\footnotesize'
-     fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space
-     between footnotes.  This is '6.65pt' for '10pt', '7.7pt' for
-     '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'.
-
 12 Definitions
 **************
 
@@ -4919,109 +6468,156 @@
 12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
 ====================================
 
-'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
-respectively.  Synopses:
+Synopses, one of:
 
-       \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
-       \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+     \newcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
+     \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+     \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+     \newcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+     \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+     \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+or one of these.
+
+     \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+     \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
      \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+     \renewcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+     \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
      \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
 
-   The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments
-not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX
-terms).
+   Define or redefine a command.  See also the discussion of
+'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::.  The
+starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be '\long').
 
+   These are the parameters:
+
 CMD
-     Required; '\CMD' is the command name.  For '\newcommand', it must
-     not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'.  For
-     '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
 
+     Required; the command name.  It must begin with a backslash, '\',
+     and must not begin with the four letter string '\end'.  For
+     '\newcommand', it must not be already defined.  For
+     '\renewcommand', this name must already be defined.
+
 NARGS
      Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
-     arguments that the command can take, including any optional
-     argument.  If this argument is not present, the default is for the
-     command to have no arguments.  When redefining a command, the new
+     arguments that the command takes, including any optional argument.
+     Omitting this argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that
+     the command has no arguments.  If you redefine a command, the new
      version can have a different number of arguments than the old
      version.
 
 OPTARGDEFAULT
      Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
-     defined command '\CMD' is optional, with default value
-     OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is
-     not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.
+     '\CMD' is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
+     the empty string).  If this argument is not present then '\CMD'
+     does not take an optional argument.
 
-     That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets following, as in
-     '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN the first "positional parameter"
-     '#1' expands MYVAL.  On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called without
-     square brackets following, then within DEFN the positional
-     parameter '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either
-     case, any required arguments will be referred to starting with
-     '#2'.
+     That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets, as in
+     '\CMD[OPTVAL]{...}...', then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is set
+     to the value of OPTVAL.  On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called
+     without the square brackets then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is
+     set to the value of OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, the required
+     arguments start with '#2'.
 
-     Omitting '[MYVAL]' in a call is different from having the square
-     brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former results in '#1'
-     expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
-     the empty string.
+     Omitting '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is different from having the square
+     brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former sets '#1' to the
+     value of OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter sets '#1' to the empty string.
 
 DEFN
-     The text to be substituted for every occurrence of '\CMD'; the
-     positional parameter '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
-     Nth argument.
+     Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+     '\CMD'.  The parameters '#1', '#2', ...  '#NARGS' are replaced by
+     the values that you supply when you call the command (or by the
+     default value if there is an optional argument and you don't
+     exercise the option).
 
    TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
 sequence, as in '\cmd '.  If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} '; another solution
-is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
+solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and another
+solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
 
    A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
-Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text.
+Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text.  Redefining
+an existing command is similar: '\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small
+QED}}'.
 
-   Redefining an existing command is similar:
-'\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}'.
+   If you try to define a command and the name has already been used
+then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.  If you try to
+redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: \hank undefined'.
 
-   Here's a command definition with one required argument:
+   Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second
+has one required argument.
 
+     \newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
      \newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
 
-Then, '\defref{def:basis}' expands to 'Definition~\ref{def:basis}',
-which will ultimately expand to something like 'Definition~3.14'.
+Use the first as in 'I highly recommend \student{} to you'.  The second
+has a variable, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
+'Definition~\ref{def:basis}', which ultimately expands to something like
+'Definition~3.14'.
 
-   An example with two required arguments: '\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1
-\times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+   Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
 
-   An example with an optional argument:
+   This example has an optional argument.
 
      \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
 
-Then, '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
+Then '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
 gives 'Dear John:'.  And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
 
+   This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+
+     \newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+     I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+
+The output is 'I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe'.  The optional
+argument, the 'Howe', is associated with '#1', while 'Dewey' and
+'Cheatem' are associated with '#2' and '#3'.  Because of the optional
+argument, '\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}' will give the output 'I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company'.
+
    The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
-delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN.  So
-'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is problematic; in this sentence,
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN.  For example, with
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}', in this sentence,
 
      The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
 
-the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics.  Another pair of
-braces in the definition is needed, like this:
-'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.  Those braces are part of the
-definition and thus do define a group.
+the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics.  The solution is to
+put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.
 
 12.2 '\providecommand'
 ======================
 
-Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
-Synopses:
+Synopses, one of:
 
+     \providecommand{CMD}{DEFN}
+     \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
      \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+     \providecommand*{CMD}{DEFN}
+     \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
      \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
 
-   If no command of this name already exists then this has the same
-effect as '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).  If a
-command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
-This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
-loaded more than once.
+   Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as '\newcommand'.  If a command of this name already exists then this
+definition does nothing.  This is particularly useful in a file that may
+be loaded more than once, such as a style file.  *Note \newcommand &
+\renewcommand:: for the description of the arguments.
 
+   This example
+
+     \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+     \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+     From \myaffiliation.
+
+outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'.  Unlike '\newcommand', the
+repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
+
 12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
 ========================================
 
@@ -5030,70 +6626,119 @@
      \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}
      \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
 
-   Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize the
-new counter to zero.
+   Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize it to
+zero (*note Counters::).
 
-   The name COUNTERNAME must consists of letters only, and does not
-begin with a backslash.  This name must not already be in use by another
+   The name COUNTERNAME must consist of letters only.  It does not begin
+with a backslash.  This name must not already be in use by another
 counter.
 
-   When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then COUNTERNAME
-will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the existing counter
-SUPERCOUNTER.  For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within
-'section' so that any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with
-'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note
-\refstepcounter::) then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.
+   When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then the counter
+COUNTERNAME will be reset to zero whenever SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
+For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within 'section' so
+that any time you increment SECTION, either with '\stepcounter' (*note
+\stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::), then
+LaTeX will reset SUBSECTION to zero.
 
-   *Note Counters::, for more information about counters.
+   This example
 
-12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
-======================================
+     \newcounter{asuper}  \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+     \newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3}   % Note `asuper'
+     The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+     \stepcounter{asuper}
+     Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
 
-Allocate a new "length" register.  Synopsis:
+   produces 'The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3' and 'Now
+asuper is 2 while asub is 0'.
 
-     \newlength{\ARG}
+   If the counter already exists, for instance by entering 'asuper'
+twice, then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \c at asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.'.
 
-   This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
-backslash ('\').  It creates a new length register named '\ARG', which
-is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as '1in plus.2in minus.1in'
-(what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register).  The register gets an initial
-value of zero.  The control sequence '\ARG' must not already be defined.
+   If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist.  Entering '\newcounter{jh}[lh]' when 'lh' is not a defined
+counter will get you 'LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' defined.'
 
-   *Note Lengths::, for more about lengths.
+12.4 '\newlength'
+=================
 
-12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
-====================================
+Synopsis:
 
-Allocate a "bin" for holding a box.  Synopsis:
+     \newlength{ARG}
 
-     \newsavebox{\CMD}
+   Allocate a new length register (*note Lengths::).  The required
+argument ARG must begin with a backslash, '\'.  The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as '72.27pt' or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX
+length register is what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register).  The initial
+value is zero.  The control sequence '\ARG' must not be already defined.
 
-   Defines '\CMD' to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.  Such a box
-is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times (*note Boxes::)
-or to measure or manipulate.  The name '\CMD' must start with a
-backslash ('\'), and must not be already defined.
+   An example:
 
-   The allocation of a box is global.  This command is fragile (*note
-\protect::).
+     \newlength{\graphichgt}
 
+   If you forget the backslash then you get 'Missing control sequence
+inserted'.  If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
+name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.
+
+12.5 '\newsavebox'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \newsavebox{CMD}
+
+   Define '\CMD' to refer to a new "bin" for storing boxes.  Such a box
+is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times or to measure or
+manipulate (*note Boxes::).  The required bin name 'CMD' must start with
+a backslash, '\', and must not already be defined.  This command is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   The first line here sets you up to save the material for later use.
+
+     \newsavebox{\logobox}
+     \savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+     Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
+
+The output is 'Our logo is LoGo'.
+
+   If there is an already defined bin then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see
+p.192 of the manual'.
+
+   The allocation of a box is global.
+
 12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
 ============================================
 
-These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
-'\begin{ENV} BODY \end{ENV}'.  Synopses:
+Synopses, one of:
 
-        \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
-       \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
-      \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
-     \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+     \newenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \newenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
 
+or one of these.
+
+     \renewenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \renewenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+     \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+   Define or redefine the environment ENV, that is, create the construct
+'\begin{ENV} ... BODY ... \end{ENV}'.
+
    The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text.  The body of these environments can
-still contain multiple paragraphs.
+contain multiple paragraphs of text.  However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
 
 ENV
      Required; the environment name.  It consists only of letters or the
-     '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash ('\').  It
+     '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash, '\'.  It
      must not begin with the string 'end'.  For '\newenvironment', the
      name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
      and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined.  For
@@ -5102,51 +6747,57 @@
 
 NARGS
      Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
-     of that the environment will take.  When the environment is used
-     these arguments appear after the '\begin', as in
-     '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'.  If this argument is not present then
-     the default is for the environment to have no arguments.  When
-     redefining an environment, the new version can have a different
-     number of arguments than the old version.
+     of that the environment takes.  When you use the environment these
+     arguments appear after the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1} ...
+     {ARGN}'.  Omitting this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the
+     environment will have no arguments.  When redefining an
+     environment, the new version can have a different number of
+     arguments than the old version.
 
 OPTARGDEFAULT
-     Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
-     the defined environment is optional, with default value
-     OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is
-     not present then the environment does not take an optional
-     argument.
+     Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+     environment is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which
+     may be the empty string).  If this is not in the definition then
+     the environment does not take an optional argument.
 
-     That is, when '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is present in the environment
-     definition, if '\begin{ENV}' is used with square brackets
-     following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then, within BEGDEFN, the
-     positional parameter '#1' expands to MYVAL.  If '\begin{ENV}' is
-     called without square brackets following, then, within within
-     BEGDEFN, the positional parameter '#1' expands to the default
-     OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, any required arguments will be
-     referred to starting with '#2'.
+     That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the definition of the
+     environment then you can start the environment with square
+     brackets, as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'.  In this
+     case, within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of
+     OPTVAL.  If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then
+     within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the
+     default OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, any required arguments
+     start with '#2'.
 
-     Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+     Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different than having the square
      brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former results in '#1'
      expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
      the empty string.
 
-BEGDEFN
+BEGDEF
      Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
-     Within BEGDEF, the Nth positional parameter (i.e., '#N') is
-     replaced by the text of the Nth argument.
+     Within BEGDEF, the parameters '#1', '#2', ...  '#NARGS', are
+     replaced by the values that you supply when you call the
+     environment; see the examples below.
 
-ENDDEFN
+ENDDEF
      Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
-     This may not contain any positional parameters, so '#N' cannot be
-     used here (but see the final example below).
+     This may not contain any parameters, that is, you cannot use '#1',
+     '#2', etc., here (but see the final example below).
 
-   All environments, that is to say the BEGDEFN code, the environment
-body and the ENDDEFN code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in the
+   All environments, that is to say the BEGDEF code, the environment
+body, and the ENDDEF code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in the
 first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
 and does not extend to material following the environment.
 
+   If you try to define an environment and the name has already been
+used then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.  If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like 'LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.'.
+
    This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
-that it will be set in smaller type:
+that it will be set in smaller type.
 
      \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
        \small\begin{quotation}
@@ -5154,9 +6805,17 @@
        \end{quotation}
      }
 
-   This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
-that cites the author:
+   This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
 
+     \newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+       \noindent\textbf{#1}
+     }{%
+     }
+
+   This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+
      \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
        \begin{quotation}
        \noindent\textit{#1}:
@@ -5165,14 +6824,14 @@
      }
 
 The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'.  In the
-document, use the environment like this:
+document, use the environment like this.
 
      \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
        ...
      \end{citequote}
 
    The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
-in ENDDEFN, in this case in a box (*note \sbox::):
+in ENDDEF, in this case in a box (*note \sbox & \savebox::).
 
      \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
      \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
@@ -5186,29 +6845,28 @@
 12.7 '\newtheorem'
 ==================
 
-Define a new theorem-like environment.  Synopses:
+Synopses:
 
      \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}
      \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
      \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
 
-   Using the first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}' creates an
-environment that will be labelled with TITLE.  See the first example
-below.
+   Define a new theorem-like environment.  You can specify one of
+NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither, but not both.
 
-   The second form '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]' creates
+   The first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}', creates an environment
+that will be labelled with TITLE; see the first example below.
+
+   The second form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]', creates
 an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
-NUMBERED_WITHIN (its counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
-reset).
+NUMBERED_WITHIN, so this counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
+reset.  See the second example below.
 
    The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
-optional argument between the two required arguments, will create an
+optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
 environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
-NUMBERED_LIKE.
+NUMBERED_LIKE.  See the third example.
 
-   You can specify one of NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither,
-but not both.
-
    This command creates a counter named NAME.  In addition, unless the
 optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
 environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
@@ -5219,13 +6877,14 @@
    Arguments:
 
 NAME
-     The name of the environment.  It must not begin with a backslash
-     ('\').  It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
-     the command name '\NAME' must not already be defined as anything.
+     The name of the environment.  It is a string of letters.  It must
+     not begin with a backslash, '\'.  It must not be the name of an
+     existing environment, and the command name '\NAME' must not already
+     be defined.
 
 TITLE
-     The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
-     number.  For example, 'Theorem'.
+     The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before
+     the number.  For example, 'Theorem'.
 
 NUMBERED_WITHIN
      Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
@@ -5257,9 +6916,9 @@
        Second def
      \end{defn}
 
-   Because the next example specifies the optional argument
-NUMBERED_WITHIN to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the
-same document body, gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+   This example has the same document body as the prior one.  But here
+'\newtheorem''s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as 'section',
+so the output is like 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
 
      \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
      \begin{document}
@@ -5295,36 +6954,33 @@
        Second def
      \end{defn}
 
-12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
-=============================================
+12.8 '\newfont'
+===============
 
-'\newfont', now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
-Synopsis:
+This command is obsolete.  This description is here only to help with
+old documents.  New documents should define fonts in families through
+the New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example,
+associate a boldface with a roman (*note Fonts::).
 
+   Synopsis:
+
      \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
 
-   This defines a control sequence '\CMD' that will change the current
-font.  LaTeX will look on your system for a file named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
-The control sequence must must not already be defined.  It must begin
-with a backslash ('\').
+   Define a command '\CMD' that will change the current font.  The
+control sequence must must not already be defined.  It must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
 
-   This command is obsolete.  It is a low-level command for setting up
-an individual font.  Today fonts are almost always defined in families
-(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
-through the so-called "New Font Selection Scheme", either by using '.fd'
-files or through the use of an engine that can access system fonts such
-as XeLaTeX (*note TeX engines::).
+   The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at
+clause".  LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
+'FONTNAME.tfm'.  The at clause can have the form either 'at DIMEN' or
+'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of '1000' means no scaling.  For LaTeX's
+purposes, all this does is scale all the character and other font
+dimensions relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined
+in the '.tfm' file.
 
-   But since it is part of LaTeX, here is an explanation: the FONT
-DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at clause"; this can
-have the form either 'at DIMEN' or 'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of
-'1000' means no scaling.  For LaTeX's purposes, all this does is scale
-all the character and other font dimensions relative to the font's
-design size, which is a value defined in the '.tfm' file.
+   This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in
+each.
 
-   This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
-characters in each:
-
      \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
      \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
      \testfontat abc
@@ -5389,7 +7045,7 @@
 
      \ignorespaces
 
-   or
+or
 
      \ignorespacesafterend
 
@@ -5407,12 +7063,14 @@
      \newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
      \begin{enumerate}
        \item\points{10}no extra space output here
-       \item\points{15} extra space output between the number and the word `extra'
+       \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
      \end{enumerate}
 
-   The solution is to change to
-'\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}'.
+The solution is to change to this.
 
+     \newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+       \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+
    A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.
 The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
 But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
@@ -5420,14 +7078,14 @@
 
      \makeatletter
      \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
-     \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % recall title; put before name
+     \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % put title before name
      \makeatother
      \begin{tabular}{|l|}
      \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
      \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones}     % extra space before title
      \end{tabular}
 
-   To fix this, change to
+To fix this, change to
 '\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}'.
 
    The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
@@ -5478,6 +7136,8 @@
 are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
 nesting (*note enumerate::).
 
+   Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+
    New counters are created with '\newcounter'.  *Note \newcounter::.
 
 13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
@@ -5485,64 +7145,73 @@
 
 Print the value of a counter, in a specified style.  For instance, if
 the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
-source will result in a lower case letter a appearing in the output.
+source will result in a lowercase letter a appearing in the output.
 
    All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
 instance, '\alph{enumi}'.  Note that the counter name does not start
 with a backslash.
 
 '\alph{COUNTER}'
-     Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
+     Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...  If
+     the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
+     'LaTeX Error: Counter too large.'
 
 '\Alph{COUNTER}'
-     Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...
+     Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...  If the counter's value
+     is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter
+     too large.'
 
 '\arabic{COUNTER}'
-     Print in Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ...
+     Print in Arabic numbers such as '5' or '-2'.
 
 '\roman{COUNTER}'
-     Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...
+     Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...  If the counter's
+     value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+     does not print anything in the output.
 
 '\Roman{COUNTER}'
-     Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...
+     Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...  If the counter's
+     value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+     does not print anything in the output.
 
 '\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
-     Prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
-     (conventionally used for labeling footnotes).  The value of COUNTER
-     must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
+     Prints the value of COUNTER using a sequence of nine symbols that
+     are traditionally used for labeling footnotes.  The value of
+     COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive.  If the counter's
+     value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get 'LaTeX Error:
+     Counter too large', while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+     warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
 
      Here are the symbols:
 
-     Name                     Command                  Equivalent Unicode
-                                                       symbol and/or numeric
-                                                       code point
-     ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-     asterisk                 '\ast'                   *
-     dagger                   '\dagger'                U+2020
-     ddagger                  '\ddagger'               U+2021
-     section-sign             '\S'                     U+00A7
-     paragraph-sign           '\P'                     U+00B6
-     double-vert              '\parallel'              U+2016
-     double-asterisk          '\ast\ast'               **
-     double-dagger            '\dagger\dagger'         U+2020U+2020
-     double-ddagger           '\ddagger\ddagger'       U+2021U+2021
+     Number  Name                   Command                Symbol
+     -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+     1       asterisk               '\ast'                 *
+     2       dagger                 '\dagger'              U+2020
+     3       ddagger                '\ddagger'             U+2021
+     4       section-sign           '\S'                   U+00A7
+     5       paragraph-sign         '\P'                   U+00B6
+     6       double-vert            '\parallel'            U+2016
+     7       double-asterisk        '\ast\ast'             **
+     8       double-dagger          '\dagger\dagger'       U+2020U+2020
+     9       double-ddagger         '\ddagger\ddagger'     U+2021U+2021
 
-13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
-===========================
+13.2 '\usecounter'
+==================
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \usecounter{COUNTER}
 
-   In the 'list' environment, when used in the second argument, this
-command sets up COUNTER to number the list items.  It initializes
-COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called without its
-optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by '\refstepcounter',
-making its value be the current 'ref' value.  This command is fragile
-(*note \protect::).
+   Used in the second argument of the 'list' environment (*note list::),
+this declares that list items will be numbered by COUNTER.  It
+initializes COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called
+without its optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by
+'\refstepcounter', making its value be the current 'ref' value (*note
+\ref::).  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
-   Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated
-with TESTCOUNTER:
+   Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list
+environment enumerated with TESTCOUNTER:
 
      \newcounter{testcounter}
      \newenvironment{test}{%
@@ -5553,21 +7222,16 @@
        \end{list}
      }
 
-13.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
-======================
+13.3 '\value'
+=============
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \value{COUNTER}
 
-   This command expands to the value of COUNTER.  It is often used in
-'\setcounter' or '\addtocounter', but '\value' can be used anywhere that
-LaTeX expects a number.  It must not be preceded by '\protect' (*note
-\protect::).
+   Expands to the value of the counter COUNTER.  (Note that the name of
+a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
 
-   The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
-counter.  *Note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
-
    This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
 
      \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
@@ -5577,45 +7241,64 @@
      Test counter is \arabic{test}.
      Other counter is \arabic{other}.
 
+   The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter.  For that, see *note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::.
+
+   It is often used in '\setcounter' or '\addtocounter' but '\value' can
+be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such as in
+'\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}'.  It must not be preceded by '\protect'
+(*note \protect::).
+
    This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
 
      \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
      \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
 
-13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
-==================================
+13.4 '\setcounter'
+==================
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
 
-   The '\setcounter' command globally sets the value of COUNTER to the
-VALUE argument.  Note that the counter name does not start with a
-backslash.
+   Globally set the counter COUNTER to have the value of the VALUE
+argument, which must be an integer.  Thus, you can set a counter's value
+as '\setcounter{section}{5}'.  Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
 
-   In this example the section value appears as 'V'.
+   In this example if the counter 'theorem' has value 12 then the second
+line will print 'XII'.
 
-     \setcounter{section}{5}
-     Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+     \setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+     Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
 
-13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
-====================================
+13.5 '\addtocounter'
+====================
 
-The '\addtocounter' command globally increments COUNTER by the amount
-specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
+Synopsis:
 
+     \addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE 
+
+   Globally increment COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE
+argument, which may be negative.
+
    In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.
 
      \setcounter{section}{5}
      \addtocounter{section}{2}
      Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
 
-13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
-===============================
+13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+======================
 
-The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter'
-(*note \stepcounter::): it globally increments the value of COUNTER by
-one and resets the value of any counter numbered within it.  (For the
+Synopsis:
+
+     \refstepcounter{COUNTER}
+
+   Globally increments the value of COUNTER by one, as does
+'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::).  The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it.  (For the
 definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
 
    In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
@@ -5624,49 +7307,129 @@
    While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
 locally, i.e., inside the current group.
 
-13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
-============================
+13.7 '\stepcounter'
+===================
 
-The '\stepcounter' command globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all
-counters numbered within it.  (For the definition of "counters numbered
-within", *note \newcounter::.)
+Synopsis:
 
-13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
-=============================================
+     \stepcounter{COUNTER}
 
-LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month ('\day', 1-31), month of
-the year ('\month', 1-12), and year ('\year', Common Era).  When TeX
-starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is
-running.  They are not updated as the job progresses.
+   Globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all counters numbered within
+it.  (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
+\newcounter::.)
 
-   The related command '\today' produces a string representing the
-current day (*note \today::).
+   This command differs from '\refstepcounter' in that this one does not
+influence references -- it does not define the current '\ref' value to
+be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
 
+13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
+================================
+
+LaTeX defines the counter '\day' for the day of the month (nominally
+with value between 1 and 31), '\month' for the month of the year
+(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year '\year'.  When TeX
+starts up, they are set from the current values on the system.  The
+related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day
+(*note \today::).
+
+   They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle
+they could be incorrect by the end.  In addition, TeX does no sanity
+check:
+
+     \day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+
+gives no error or warning and results in the output '-2, -4' (the bogus
+month value produces no output).
+
 14 Lengths
 **********
 
 A "length" is a measure of distance.  Many LaTeX commands take a length
 as an argument.
 
+   This shows a box of the given length.
+
+     \newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}   % make a bar
+     \newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}} % box it
+     XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+
+It produces a black bar 100 points long between 'XXX' and 'YYY'.
+
    Lengths come in two types.  A "rigid length" (what Plain TeX calls a
-"dimen") such as '10pt' cannot contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component.  A
-"rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") can contain those, as
-with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm'.  These give the ability to stretch or
-shrink; the length in the prior sentence could appear in the output as
-long as 1.05 cm or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what TeX's
-typesetting algorithm finds optimum.
+"dimen") such as '10pt' does not contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component.
+The above example shows a rigid length.  A "rubber length" (what Plain
+TeX calls a "skip") can contain those components, as with '1cm
+plus0.05cm minus0.01cm'.  Here the '1cm' is the "natural length" while
+the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow the length to
+stretch or shrink.
 
+   Shrinking is simpler: with '1cm minus 0.05cm', the natural length is
+1cm but if smaller is needed then TeX can shrink it down as far as
+0.95cm.  Beyond that, TeX refuses to shrink any more.  Thus, below the
+first one works fine, producing a space of 98 points between the two
+bars.
+
+     XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+       \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+     XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+       \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+
+But the second one gets a warning like 'Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
+detected at line 17'.  In the output the first 'Y' is overwritten by the
+end of the black bar, because the box's material is wider than the 300pt
+allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
+309 points.
+
+   Stretching is like shrinking except that if TeX is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it won't refuse.  Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
+
+     XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+       \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+     XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+       \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10 points and only 1 point was
+specified.  In this situation, TeX stretches the space to the required
+length, but it complains with a warning like 'Underfull \hbox (badness
+10000) detected at line 22'.  (We won't discuss badness; the point is
+that the system was not given as much stretch as needed.)
+
+   You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in '1ex
+plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex'.
+
+   If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+
+     XXX\showhbox{300pt}{\blackbar{100pt}%  left
+       \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}%  middle
+       \blackbar{100pt}}YYY  % right
+
+The outside bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another 100.
+In the middle the bar takes up 80 points, so the two '\hspace''s must
+stretch 20 points.  Because the two say 'plus 50pt' and 'plus 10pt', TeX
+gets 5/6 of the stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+
    The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
 "fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'.  This gives the length infinite
-stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in the prior
-sentence can be set by TeX to any distance greater than or equal to
-1 inch.  TeX actually provides three infinite glue components 'fil',
-'fill', and 'filll', such that the later ones overcome the earlier ones,
-but only the middle value is ordinarily used.  *Note \hfill::, *Note
-\vfill::.
+stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set it to any
+distance.  Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across the page.
 
-   Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
-length, so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
+     \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+       \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+       \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+       \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+     \end{minipage}
+
+   TeX actually has three infinite glue components 'fil', 'fill', and
+'filll'.  The later ones are more infinite than the earlier ones.
+Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note \hfill:: and
+*note \vfill::).
+
+   Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length,
+so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
 '\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
 
 14.1 Units of length
@@ -5706,7 +7469,7 @@
 
    Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
 of the font.  The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
-height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
 Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
 often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
 '0.5em').  Use of these can help make a definition work better across
@@ -5724,143 +7487,316 @@
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \setlength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+     \setlength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
 
-   The '\setlength' sets the value of "length command" '\LEN' to the
-VALUE argument which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX
-understands, i.e., inches ('in'), millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big
-points ('bp'), etc.
+   Set the length LEN to AMOUNT.  The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.  The 'amount' can be a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
 
+   Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+
+     I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+     \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+     He said stop going to those places.
+
+   If there is no such length LEN then you get something like 'Undefined
+control sequence. <argument> \praindent'.
+
 14.3 '\addtolength'
 ===================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+     \addtolength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
 
-   The '\addtolength' command increments a length command '\LEN' by the
-amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
+   Increment the length LEN by AMOUNT.  The length name LEN begins with
+a backslash, '\'.  The 'amount' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
 
+   Below, if '\parskip' starts with the value '0pt plus 1pt'
+
+     \addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+     Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+
+     Nurse: no change.
+
+then it has the value '1pt plus 1pt' for the second paragraph.
+
+   If there is no such length LEN then you get something like 'Undefined
+control sequence. <argument> \praindent'.  If you leave off the
+backslash at the start of LEN, as in '\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}',
+then you get something like 'You can't use `the letter p' after
+\advance'.
+
 14.4 '\settodepth'
 ==================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \settodepth{\LEN}{TEXT}
+     \settodepth{LEN}{TEXT}
 
-   The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
-equal to the depth of the TEXT argument.
+   Set the length LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on typesetting
+the TEXT argument.  The length name LEN must begin with a backslash,
+'\'.
 
+   This will show how low the character descenders go.
+
+     \newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+     \settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+     \the\alphabetdepth
+
+   If there is no such length LEN then you get something like 'Undefined
+control sequence. <argument> \alphabetdepth'.  If you leave the
+backslash out of LEN, as in '\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}' then you
+get something like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
+\setbox'.
+
 14.5 '\settoheight'
 ===================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \settoheight{\LEN}{text}
+     \settoheight{LEN}{text}
 
-   The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
-equal to the height of the 'text' argument.
+   Sets the length LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the 'text' argument.  The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
 
-14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
-==============================
+   This will show how high the characters go.
 
-Synopsis:
+     \newlength{\alphabetheight}
+     \settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+     \the\alphabetheight
 
-     \settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}
+   If there is no such length LEN then you get something like 'Undefined
+control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight'.  If you leave the
+backslash out of LEN, as in '\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}' then you
+get something like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
+\setbox'.
 
-   The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
-width of the TEXT argument.
+14.6 '\settowidth'
+==================
 
-14.7 Predefined lengths
-=======================
+Synopsis:
 
-'\width'
+     \settowidth{LEN}{TEXT}
 
-   '\height'
+   Set the length LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the TEXT argument.  The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
 
-   '\depth'
+   This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
 
-   '\totalheight'
+     \newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+     \settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+     \the\alphabetwidth
 
-   These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
-box-making commands (*note Boxes::).  They specify the natural width,
-etc., of the text in the box.  '\totalheight' equals '\height' +
-'\depth'.  To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
-size, e.g., say
+   If there is no such length LEN then you get something like 'Undefined
+control sequence. <argument> \alphabetwidth'.  If you leave the
+backslash out of LEN, as in '\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you
+get something like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
+\setbox'.
 
-     \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
-
 15 Making paragraphs
 ********************
 
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not
-containing even a '%'.  A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
+Once LaTeX has all of a paragraph's contents it divides it into lines,
+in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph (*note Line
+breaking::).  To end the current paragraph, put an empty line.
 
-15.1 '\indent'
-==============
+     It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+     of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
 
-'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
-'\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation.  It is used to
-add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+     However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+     first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+     of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+     of some one or other of their daughters.
 
-   The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode,
-otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em'
-for '12pt'.
+     ``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+     ``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
 
-15.2 '\noindent'
-================
+   The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, '%'.
 
-When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
-paragraph indentation, as in this example.
+   There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted.  Don't put a
+blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the line before the
+'\end{equation}'
 
+     \begin{equation}
+       2^{|S|} > |S|
+
+     \end{equation}
+
+will get you the error 'Missing $ inserted'.  Similarly, the blank line
+in this 'section' argument
+
+     \section{aaa
+
+     bbb}
+
+gets 'Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete'.
+
+15.1 '\par'
+===========
+
+Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX, converts two
+consecutive newlines to a '\par'):
+
+     \par
+
+   End the current paragraph.  The usual way to separate paragraphs is
+with a blank line but the '\par' command is entirely equivalent.  This
+command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+   This example uses '\par' rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+
+     \newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+       \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+
+   The '\par' command does nothing in LR mode or a vertical mode but it
+terminates paragraph mode, bringing LaTeX to vertical mode (*note
+Modes::).
+
+   You cannot use the '\par' command in math mode or in the argument of
+many commands, such as the '\section' command (*note Making paragraphs::
+and *note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+
+   The '\par' command differs from the '\paragraph' command in that the
+latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning unit used by
+the standard LaTeX documents.
+
+   The '\par' command differs from '\newline' and the line break double
+backslash, '\\', in that \par ends the paragraph not just the line.  It
+also triggers the addition of the between-paragraph vertical space
+'\parskip' (*note \parindent & \parskip::).
+
+   The output from this example
+
+     xyz
+
+     \setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+     \setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+     \noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+
+is: after 'xyz' there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then 'test'
+appears, aligned with the left margin.  On the same line, there is an
+empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then 'test1' appears.  Finally.
+there is a vertical space of 5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph
+with a paragraph indent of 3 inches, and then LaTeX puts the text
+'test2'.
+
+15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \indent
+
+or
+
+     \noindent
+
+   Go into horizontal mode (*note Modes::).  The '\indent' command first
+outputs an empty box whose width is '\parindent'.  These commands are
+robust (*note \protect::).
+
+   Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+*Note \par:: for the difference between this command and '\par'.  To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use '\noindent'.
+
+   In the middle of a paragraph the '\noindent' command has no effect,
+because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there.  The '\indent'
+command's only effect is to output a space.
+
+   This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+
      ... end of the prior paragraph.
 
      \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
 
-   It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
+and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
 
-   To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
-'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble.
+     The data
 
-15.3 '\parskip'
-===============
+     \begin{center}
+       \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+     \end{center}
 
-'\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before
-each paragraph.  The default is '0pt plus1pt'.
+     \noindent shows this clearly.
 
+   To omit indentation in the entire document put
+'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble.  If you do that, you may
+want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, '\parskip'
+(*note \parindent & \parskip::).
+
+   Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English.  To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
+==============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \setlength{\parskip}{HORIZONTAL LEN}
+     \setlength{\parinden}{VERTICAL LEN}
+
+   Both are a rubber lengths (*note Lengths::).  They give the
+indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(*note minipage::), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+
+   This, put in the preamble,
+
+     \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+     \setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+
+arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+'x'.
+
+   In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for '\parindent' in
+one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt' ,
+'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'.  In two-column documents it
+is '1em'.  The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document
+styles is '0pt plus1pt'.
+
 15.4 Marginal notes
 ===================
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
+     \marginpar{RIGHT}
      \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
 
-   The '\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin.  The first
-line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
-where the '\marginpar' occurs.
+   Create a note in the margin.  The first line of the note will have
+the same baseline as the line in the text where the '\marginpar' occurs.
 
-   When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
-placed
+   The margin that LaTeX uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(*note Document class options::) and also on '\reversemarginpar' (see
+below).  If you are using one-sided layout (document option 'oneside')
+then it goes in the right margin.  If you are using two-sided layout
+(document option 'twoside') then it goes in the outside margin.  If you
+are in two-column layout (document option 'twocolumn') then it goes in
+the nearest margin.
 
-   * in the right margin for one-sided layout (option 'oneside', see
-     *note Document class options::);
-   * in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option 'twoside', see
-     *note Document class options::);
-   * in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option 'twocolumn',
-     see *note Document class options::).
+   If you declare '\reversemarginpar' then LaTeX will place subsequent
+marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior
+paragraph.  Revert that to the default position with '\normalmarginpar'.
 
-   The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
-the opposite (inside) margin.  '\normalmarginpar' places them in the
-default position.
+   When you specify the optional argument LEFT then it is used for a
+note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument RIGHT is used for
+a note in the the right margin.
 
-   When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin,
-and RIGHT is used for the right margin.
+   Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated.  You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with '\hspace{0pt}'.
 
-   The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning the node with '\hspace{0pt}'.
-
    These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
 
 '\marginparpush'
@@ -5883,89 +7819,172 @@
 16 Math formulas
 ****************
 
-There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+Produce mathematical text by putting LaTeX into math mode or display
+math mode (*note Modes::).  This example shows both.
 
-'math'
-     For formulas that appear right in the text.
-'displaymath'
-     For formulas that appear on their own line.
-'equation'
-     The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an
-     equation number in the right margin.
+     The wave equation for \( u \) is
+     \begin{displaymath}
+       \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+     \end{displaymath}
+     where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
 
-   The 'math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
-the 'displaymath' and 'equation' environments can be used only in
-paragraph mode.  The 'math' and 'displaymath' environments are used so
-often that they have the following short forms:
+Math mode is for inline mathematics.  In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting '\(' and finished by the matching ending '\)'.  Display
+math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+'displaymath' environment.  Note that any mathematical text whatever,
+including mathematical text consisting of just one character, is handled
+in math mode.
 
-     \(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
-     \[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+   When in math mode or display math mode, LaTeX handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes.  For example,
 
-   In fact, the 'math' environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
+     contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
 
-     $ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
+in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
 
-   The '\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a
-bold font.  It is used _outside_ of math mode.  Conversely, the
-'\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too
-is used _outside_ of math mode.
+   There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put LaTeX in math
+mode.
 
-   The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
-formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
-summations.  For example:
+     \( MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \)
+     $ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL $
+     \begin{math} MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \end{math}
 
-     $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used.  You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in '\(x\) and $y$'.  You can use these in paragraph mode or
+in LR mode (*note Modes::).
 
+   To make displayed formulas, put LaTeX into display math mode with
+either:
+
+     \begin{displaymath}
+       MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+     \end{displaymath}
+
+or
+
+     \begin{equation}
+       MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+     \end{equation}
+
+(*note displaymath::, *note equation::).  The only difference is that
+with the 'equation' environment, LaTeX puts a formula number alongside
+the formula.  The construct '\[ MATH \]' is equivalent to
+'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}'.  These environments can
+only be used in paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
+
+   The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some
+differences.  One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts;
+in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they
+are closer together.
+
+   Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen
+in the inline math mode.  For this, the '\displaystyle' declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of 'displaymath'.
+Thus '\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n\)' will have the limits
+above and below the summation sign, not next to it.  Another example is
+that
+
+     \begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+       \textsc{Name}  &\textsc{Series}  &\textsc{Sum}  \\  \hline
+       Arithmetic     &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+                        &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\)  \\
+       Geometric      &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+                        &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\)  \\
+     \end{tabular}
+
+because it has no '\displaystyle', the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will
+be scrunched.  But, because of its '\displaystyle', the 'Geometric'
+line's fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as
+in the rest of the line.
+
+   The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+'amsmath' and 'amssymb' (also be aware of the 'mathtools' package that
+is an extension to, and loads, 'amsmath').  New documents that will have
+mathematical text should use these packages.  Descriptions of these
+packages is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation
+on CTAN.
+
 16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
 ==============================
 
-In math mode, use the caret character '^' to make the EXP appear as a
-superscript: '^{EXP}'.  Similarly, in math mode, underscore '_{EXP}'
-makes a subscript out of EXP.
+Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
 
-   In this example the '0' and '1' appear as subscripts while the '2' is
-a superscript.
+     BASE^EXP
+     BASE^{EXP}
 
-     \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)
+or, one of:
 
-   To have more than one character in EXP use curly braces as in
-'e^{-2x}'.
+     BASE_EXP
+     BASE_{EXP}
 
-   LaTeX handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
-the natural way, so expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{a_0}' will
-look right.  It also does the right thing when something has both a
-subscript and a superscript.  In this example the '0' appears at the
-bottom of the integral sign while the '10' appears at the top.
+   Make EXP appear as a superscript of BASE (with the caret
+character, '^') or a subscript (with underscore, '_').
 
-     \int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx
+   In this example the '0''s and '1''s are subscripts while the '2''s
+are superscripts.
 
-   You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a
-construct such as '{}_t K^2' in math mode (the initial '{}' prevents the
-prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
-expression).
+     \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
 
-   Outside of math mode, a construct like 'A
-test$_\textnormal{subscript}$' will produce a subscript typeset in text
-mode, not math mode.  Note that there are packages specialized for
-writing Chemical formulas such as 'mhchem'.
+   To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in 'e^{-2x}'.  This
+example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
+the exponent.
 
+     \begin{displaymath}
+       (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+       \qquad
+       3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+     \end{displaymath}
+
+   LaTeX knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers.  So,
+expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{i_0}' give correct output.  Note
+the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the BASE a
+determined EXP.  If you enter '\(3^3^3\)' then you get 'Double
+superscript'.
+
+   LaTeX does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript.  In this example the integral has both.  They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+
+     \begin{displaymath}
+       \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+     \end{displaymath}
+
+Note the parentheses around 'x=a' to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+
+   To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct
+like '{}_t K^2'.  The empty curly braces '{}' give the subscript
+something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a
+prior symbols.
+
+   Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in 'the expression x^2', will get you the error
+'Missing $ inserted'.
+
+   A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is
+to typeset chemical formulas.  There are packages for that such as
+'mhchem'; see CTAN.
+
 16.2 Math symbols
 =================
 
-LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
-For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
-symbol U+03C0.
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
+uses.  For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get
+the pi symbol U+03C0.  See the 'Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List' at
+<https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/>.
 
-   Below is a list of commonly-available symbols.  It is by no means an
-exhaustive list.  Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
-its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
+   Here is a list of commonly-used symbols.  It is by no means
+exhaustive.  Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its
+symbol class, which determines the spacing around it, is given in
 parenthesis.  Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
-be used only in math mode.
+be used only in math mode.  To redefine a command so that it can be used
+whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
 
-   To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
-mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
-
 '\|'
      U+2225 Parallel (relation).  Synonym: '\parallel'.
 
@@ -5973,7 +7992,7 @@
      U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
 
 '\alpha'
-     U+03B1 Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+     U+03B1 Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
 
 '\amalg'
      U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
@@ -6000,7 +8019,7 @@
      '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
 
 '\beta'
-     U+03B2 Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+     U+03B2 Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
 
 '\bigcap'
      U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator).  Similar:
@@ -6067,7 +8086,7 @@
      U+22C5 Multiplication (binary).  Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
 
 '\chi'
-     U+03C7 Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).
+     U+03C7 Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
 
 '\circ'
      U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary).  Similar:
@@ -6103,18 +8122,18 @@
      U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
 
 '\Delta'
-     U+0394 Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+     U+0394 Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
 
 '\delta'
-     U+03B4 Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
+     U+03B4 Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
 
 '\Diamond'
      U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary).  Not available in plain
      TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
 
 '\diamond'
-     U+22C4 Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary).  Similar:
-     large diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
+     U+22C4 Diamond operator (binary).  Similar: large
+     diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
 
 '\diamondsuit'
      U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
@@ -6127,12 +8146,12 @@
      equal to '\Doteq'.
 
 '\downarrow'
-     U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar: double line down
-     arrow '\Downarrow'.
+     U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar: '\Downarrow'
+     double line down arrow.
 
 '\Downarrow'
-     U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar: single line
-     down arrow '\downarrow'.
+     U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar: '\downarrow'
+     single line down arrow.
 
 '\ell'
      U+2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
@@ -6142,7 +8161,7 @@
      '\varnothing'.
 
 '\epsilon'
-     U+03F5 Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary).  Similar to Greek text
+     U+03F5 Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary).  Similar to Greek text
      letter.  More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
      epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5.  Related: the set membership relation
      '\in' U+2208.
@@ -6151,7 +8170,7 @@
      U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
 
 '\eta'
-     U+03B7 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03B7 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\exists'
      U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
@@ -6166,10 +8185,10 @@
      U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
 
 '\Gamma'
-     U+0393 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+0393 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\gamma'
-     U+03B3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03B3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\ge'
      U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
@@ -6205,8 +8224,12 @@
 '\Im'
      U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary).  See: real part '\Re'.
 
+'\imath'
+     Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (*note Math
+     accents::).
+
 '\in'
-     U+2208 Set element (relation).  See also: lower case lunate
+     U+2208 Set element (relation).  See also: lowercase lunate
      epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
      epsilon '\varepsilon'.
 
@@ -6217,20 +8240,24 @@
      U+222B Integral (operator).
 
 '\iota'
-     U+03B9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03B9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\Join'
      U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation).  Not available in Plain
      TeX.
 
+'\jmath'
+     Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (*note Math
+     accents::).
+
 '\kappa'
-     U+03BA Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03BA Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\Lambda'
-     U+039B Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+039B uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\lambda'
-     U+03BB Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03BB Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\land'
      U+2227 Logical and (binary).  This is a synonym for '\wedge'.  See
@@ -6352,7 +8379,7 @@
      U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
 
 '\mu'
-     U+03BC Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03BC Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\nabla'
      U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
@@ -6378,19 +8405,19 @@
      Synonym: '\owns'.  Similar: is a member of '\in'.
 
 '\not'
-     U+0020U+00A0U+0338 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
-     following operator (relation).
+     U+0020    Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following
+     operator (relation).
 
-     Many negated operators that don't require '\not' are available,
+     Many negated operators are available that don't require '\not',
      particularly with the 'amssymb' package.  For example, '\notin' is
-     probably typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
+     typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
 
 '\notin'
      U+2209 Not an element of (relation).  Similar: not subset
      of '\nsubseteq'.
 
 '\nu'
-     U+03BD Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03BD Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\nwarrow'
      U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
@@ -6404,10 +8431,10 @@
      (operator).
 
 '\Omega'
-     U+03A9 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03A9 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\omega'
-     U+03C9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03C9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\ominus'
      U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
@@ -6439,14 +8466,14 @@
      ordinary.
 
 '\phi'
-     U+03D5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+     U+03D5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
      '\varphi' U+03C6.
 
 '\Pi'
-     U+03A0 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03A0 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\pi'
-     U+03C0 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+     U+03C0 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
      '\varpi' U+03D6.
 
 '\pm'
@@ -6475,10 +8502,10 @@
      U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
 
 '\Psi'
-     U+03A8 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03A8 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\psi'
-     U+03C8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03C8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\rangle'
      U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).  Similar:
@@ -6501,9 +8528,9 @@
      this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
 
 '\restriction'
-     U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).
-     Synonym: '\upharpoonright'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX
-     you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+     U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).  Synonym:
+     '\upharpoonright'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need
+     to load the 'amssymb' package.
 
 '\revemptyset'
      U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary).  Related:
@@ -6522,7 +8549,7 @@
      gives better spacing).
 
 '\rho'
-     U+03C1 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+     U+03C1 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
      '\varrho' U+03F1.
 
 '\Rightarrow'
@@ -6546,18 +8573,18 @@
      U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
 
 '\setminus'
-     U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \ (binary).
-     Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also '\textbackslash' outside
-     of math mode.
+     U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
+     (binary).  Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also
+     '\textbackslash' outside of math mode.
 
 '\sharp'
      U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
 
 '\Sigma'
-     U+03A3 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03A3 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\sigma'
-     U+03C3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+     U+03C3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
      '\varsigma' U+03C2.
 
 '\sim'
@@ -6642,10 +8669,10 @@
      U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
 
 '\tau'
-     U+03C4 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03C4 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\theta'
-     U+03B8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+     U+03B8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
      '\vartheta' U+03D1.
 
 '\times'
@@ -6718,10 +8745,10 @@
      operator '\biguplus'.
 
 '\Upsilon'
-     U+03A5 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03A5 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\upsilon'
-     U+03C5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03C5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\varepsilon'
      U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary).  This is more widely
@@ -6734,23 +8761,23 @@
      load the 'amssymb' package.
 
 '\varphi'
-     U+03C6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
+     U+03C6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The
      non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
 
 '\varpi'
-     U+03D6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
+     U+03D6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The
      non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
 
 '\varrho'
-     U+03F1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
+     U+03F1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The
      non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
 
 '\varsigma'
-     U+03C2 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
+     U+03C2 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The
      non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
 
 '\vartheta'
-     U+03D1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
+     U+03D1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The
      non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
 
 '\vdash'
@@ -6765,10 +8792,10 @@
      U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary).  Similar: vertical single
      bar '\vert'.
 
-     For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
-     '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}' to your preamble.
-     This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars
-     that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+     For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and put in
+     your preamble '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}'.  This
+     gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars that
+     are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
      write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
      the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
      with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
@@ -6781,10 +8808,10 @@
      vertical bar '\Vert'.  For such that, as in the definition of a
      set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
 
-     For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
-     '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' to your preamble.
-     This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars
-     that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+     For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and in your
+     preamble put '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}'.  This
+     gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars that
+     are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
      write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
      of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
      with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
@@ -6803,14 +8830,171 @@
      U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
 
 '\Xi'
-     U+039E Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+039E uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\xi'
-     U+03BE Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03BE Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
 '\zeta'
-     U+03B6 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+     U+03B6 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 
+   The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+
+'\mathdollar'
+     Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+
+'\mathparagraph'
+     Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, U+00B6.
+
+'\mathsection'
+     Section sign in math mode U+00A7.
+
+'\mathsterling'
+     Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+
+'\mathunderscore'
+     Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \usepackage{amssymb}   % in preamble
+       ...
+     \mathbb{UPPERCASE-LETTER}
+
+   Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+
+   Here
+
+     \( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+
+the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol U+2115 representing the
+natural numbers.
+
+   If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an
+error but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+
+   There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+
+16.2.2 Calligraphic
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \mathcal{UPPERCASE-LETTERS}
+
+   Use a script-like font.
+
+   In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+
+     Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+
+   If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not
+get an error.  Instead you get unexpected output.  For instance,
+'\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol, while '\mathcal{+}'
+outputs a plus sign.
+
+16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+
+     \boldmath \( MATH \)
+
+or
+
+     \unboldmath \( MATH \)
+
+   Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
+bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
+default.  They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
+(*note Modes::).  Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
+'\mbox',
+
+     we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
+explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+
+   If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
+Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+
+   There are many issues with '\boldmath'.  New documents should use the
+'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team.  A complete description
+is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
+CTAN) but even this small example
+
+     \usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
+     ...
+     we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+
+16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+-----------------------------------
+
+Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+
+     \begin{array}{cccc}
+       a_{0,0}    &a_{0,1}   &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\
+       a_{1,0}    &\ddots                     \\
+       \vdots
+     \end{array}
+
+   LaTeX provides these.
+
+'\cdots'
+     Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line,
+     as in U+22EF. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
+
+'\ddots'
+     Diagonal ellipsis, U+22F1.  See the above array example for a
+     usage.
+
+'\ldots'
+     Ellipsis on the baseline, U+2026.  Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1}
+     \)'.  Another example is the above array example.  A synonym is
+     '\mathellipsis'.  A synonym from the 'amsmath' package is '\hdots'.
+
+     You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+     'The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken'.  (In a paragraph mode
+     or LR mode a synonym for '\ldots' is '\dots'.)
+
+'\vdots'
+     Vertical ellipsis, U+22EE. See the above array example for a usage.
+
+   The 'amsmath' package has the command '\dots' to semantically mark up
+ellipses.  This example produces two different-looking outputs for the
+first two uses of the '\dots' command.
+
+     \usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
+       ...
+     Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+     Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+       multiple of any \( p_i \).
+     Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+
+In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following '\dots' to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline.  The second
+line has a '\cdot' following '\dots' so LaTeX outputs an ellipsis that
+is on the math axis, vertically centered.  However, the third usage has
+no follow-on character so you have to tell LaTeX what to do.  You can
+use one of the commands: '\dotsc' if you need the ellipsis appropriate
+for a comma following, '\dotsb' if you need the ellipses that fits when
+the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, '\dotsi'
+for dots with integrals, or '\dotso' for others.
+
 16.3 Math functions
 ===================
 
@@ -6818,107 +9002,115 @@
 spacing.
 
 '\arccos'
-     \arccos
+     Inverse cosine
 
 '\arcsin'
-     \arcsin
+     Inverse sine
 
 '\arctan'
-     \arctan
+     Inverse tangent
 
 '\arg'
-     \arg
+     Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
 
 '\bmod'
-     Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y)
+     Binary modulo operator, used as in '\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)'
 
 '\cos'
-     \cos
+     Cosine
 
 '\cosh'
-     \cosh
+     Hyperbolic cosine
 
 '\cot'
-     \cot
+     Cotangent
 
 '\coth'
-     \coth
+     Hyperbolic cotangent
 
 '\csc'
-     \csc
+     Cosecant
 
 '\deg'
-     \deg
+     Degrees
 
 '\det'
-     \det
+     Determinant
 
 '\dim'
-     \dim
+     Dimension
 
 '\exp'
-     \exp
+     Exponential
 
 '\gcd'
-     \gcd
+     Greatest common divisor
 
 '\hom'
-     \hom
+     Homomorphism
 
 '\inf'
-     \inf
+     Infinum
 
 '\ker'
-     \ker
+     Kernel
 
 '\lg'
-     \lg
+     Base 2 logarithm
 
 '\lim'
-     \lim
+     Limit
 
 '\liminf'
-     \liminf
+     Limit inferior
 
 '\limsup'
-     \limsup
+     Limit superior
 
 '\ln'
-     \ln
+     Natural logarithm
 
 '\log'
-     \log
+     Logarithm
 
 '\max'
-     \max
+     Maximum
 
 '\min'
-     \min
+     Minimum
 
 '\pmod'
-     parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1)
+     Parenthesized modulus, as used in '\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)'
 
 '\Pr'
-     \Pr
+     Probability
 
 '\sec'
-     \sec
+     Secant
 
 '\sin'
-     \sin
+     Sine
 
 '\sinh'
-     \sinh
+     Hyperbolic sine
 
 '\sup'
-     \sup
+     sup
 
 '\tan'
-     \tan
+     Tangent
 
 '\tanh'
-     \tanh
+     Hyperbolic tangent
 
+   The 'amsmath' package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own.  The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+'\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}' that is like the ones above but
+prints as 'id'.  The starred form '\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}' sets
+any limits above and below, as is traditional with '\lim', '\sup', or
+'\max'.
+
 16.4 Math accents
 =================
 
@@ -6927,77 +9119,137 @@
 Accents::).
 
 '\acute'
-     Math acute accent: \acute{x}.
+     Math acute accent
 
 '\bar'
-     Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}.
+     Math bar-over accent
 
 '\breve'
-     Math breve accent: \breve{x}.
+     Math breve accent
 
 '\check'
-     Math ha'c<ek (check) accent: \check{x}.
+     Math ha'c<ek (check) accent
 
 '\ddot'
-     Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}.
+     Math dieresis accent
 
 '\dot'
-     Math dot accent: \dot{x}.
+     Math dot accent
 
 '\grave'
-     Math grave accent: \grave{x}.
+     Math grave accent
 
 '\hat'
-     Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}.
+     Math hat (circumflex) accent
 
-'\imath'
-     Math dotless i.
-
-'\jmath'
-     Math dotless j.
-
 '\mathring'
-     Math ring accent: x*.
+     Math ring accent
 
 '\tilde'
-     Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}.
+     Math tilde accent
 
 '\vec'
-     Math vector symbol: \vec{x}.
+     Math vector symbol
 
 '\widehat'
-     Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}.
+     Math wide hat accent
 
 '\widetilde'
-     Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}.
+     Math wide tilde accent
 
-16.5 Spacing in math mode
+   When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to
+use one without a dot, '\imath' or 'jmath' (*note Math symbols::).
+
+16.5 Over- and Underlining
+==========================
+
+LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting
+braces over or under some material.
+
+'\underline{TEXT}'
+     Underline TEXT.  Works inside math mode, and outside.  The line is
+     always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so
+     in '\(\underline{y}\)' the line is lower than in
+     '\(\underline{x}\)'.  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+     Note that the package 'ulem' does text mode underlining and allows
+     line breaking as well as a number of other features.  See the
+     documentation on CTAN. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for
+     producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+
+'\overline{TEXT}'
+     Put a horizontal line over TEXT.  Works inside math mode, and
+     outside.  For example, '\overline{x+y}'.  Note that this differs
+     from the command '\bar' (*note Math accents::).
+
+'\underbrace{MATH}'
+     Put a brace under MATH.  For example, this
+     '(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)' emphasizes the telescoping part.
+     Attach text to the brace by using subscript, '_', or superscript,
+     '^', as here.
+
+          \begin{displaymath}
+            1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
+                 \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots
+          \end{displaymath}
+
+     The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+     unconnected to the underbrace.
+
+'\overbrace{MATH}'
+     Put a brace over MATH, as with
+     '\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}'.  See also
+     '\underbrace'.
+
+   The package 'mathtools' adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
+improvements on the braces.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+16.6 Spacing in math mode
 =========================
 
-In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces that you use in the
-source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal rules
-for mathematics texts.
+When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts.  If you enter 'y=m x' then LaTeX
+ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
 
-   Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math
-unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family (*note Units of length::).  LaTeX provides the
-following commands for use in math mode:
+   But LaTeX's rules sometimes need tweaking.  For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the 'f(x)'
+and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command.
 
+     \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+
+   LaTeX provides the commands that follow for use in math mode.  Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+"mu".  It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::).  Thus, a '\thickspace' is
+something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
+
 '\;'
-     Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'.  The longer name is '\thickspace'.
-     Math mode only.
+     Synonym: '\thickspace'.  Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'.  Math mode
+     only.
 
 '\:'
 '\>'
-     Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.  The longer name is
-     '\medspace'.  Math mode only.
+     Synonym: '\medspace'.  Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
+     Math mode only.
 
 '\,'
-     Normally '3mu'.  The longer name is '\thinspace'.  This can be used
-     in both math mode and text mode.  *Note \thinspace::.
+     Synonym: '\thinspace'.  Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em.  Can be
+     used in both math mode and text mode (*note \thinspace &
+     \negthinspace::).
 
+     This space is widely used, for instance between the function and
+     the infinitesimal in an integral '\int f(x)\,dx' and, if an author
+     does this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+
+          The antiderivative is
+          \begin{equation}
+            3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+          \end{equation}
+
 '\!'
-     A negative thin space.  Normally '-3mu'.  Math mode only.
+     A negative thin space.  Normally '-3mu'.  The '\!' command is math
+     mode only but the '\negthinspace' command is available for text
+     mode (*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
 
 '\quad'
      This is 18mu, that is, 1em.  This is often used for space
@@ -7009,134 +9261,171 @@
      A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em.  It is available in both
      text and math mode.
 
-   In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
-infinitesimal.
+16.7 Math miscellany
+====================
 
-     \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities.  Here are some
+that don't fit into other categories.
 
-16.6 Math miscellany
-====================
+16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+-------------------------------------
 
-'\*'
-     A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-     allowed.  Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated
-     by a space, while in the case of a break a U+00D7 symbol is printed
-     immediately before the break.  So
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-          \documentclass{article}
-          \begin{document}
-          Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
-          through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
-          equal to zero.
-          \end{document}
+     :
+     \colon
 
-     will make that sort of output (the ellipsis '[...]' is here to show
-     the line break at the same place as in a TeX output):
+   In mathematics, the colon character, ':', is a relation.
 
-          Now A_3 = 0, [...] A_1 through A_4, that is A_1 A_2 \times
-          A_3 A_4, is equal to zero.
+     With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
 
-'\cdots'
-     A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the
-     line.
+Ordinary LaTeX defines '\colon' to produce the colon character with the
+spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+'\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}'.
 
-'\ddots'
-     A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots.
+   But the widely-used 'amsmath' package defines '\colon' for use in the
+definition of functions 'f\colon D\to C'.  So if you want the colon
+character as a punctuation then use '\mathpunct{:}'.
 
-'\frac{NUM}{DEN}'
-     Produces the fraction NUM divided by DEN.
+16.7.2 '\*'
+-----------
 
-'\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
-     The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a "null delimiter",
-     producing no output.  The delimiters are sized according to the
-     math in between.  Example: '\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]'.
+Synopsis:
 
-'\mathdollar'
-     Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+     \*
 
-'\mathellipsis'
-     Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ....
+   A multiplication symbol that allows a line break.  If there is a
+break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, U+00D7, before that break.
 
-'\mathparagraph'
-     Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: U+00B6.
+   In '\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)', if there is no line break then
+LaTeX outputs it as though it were '\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)'.  If a line
+break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then LaTeX
+sets it like '\( A_1 A_2 \times \)', followed by the break, followed by
+'\( A_3 A_4 \)'.
 
-'\mathsection'
-     Section sign in math mode.
+16.7.3 '\frac'
+--------------
 
-'\mathsterling'
-     Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+Synopsis:
 
-'\mathunderscore'
-     Underscore in math mode: _.
+     \frac{NUMERATOR}{DENOMINATOR}
 
-'\overbrace{MATH}'
-     Generates a brace over MATH.  For example,
-     '\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}'.
+   Produces the fraction.  Used as: '\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}'.  In inline math mode it
+comes out small; see the discussion of '\displaystyle' (*note Math
+formulas::).
 
-'\overline{TEXT}'
-     Generates a horizontal line over TEX.  For example,
-     '\overline{x+y}'.
+16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
+-------------------------
 
-'\sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}'
-     Produces the representation of the square root of ARG.  The
-     optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce.  For
-     example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'.
+Synopsis:
 
-'\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
-     Puts TEXT above RELATION.  For example,
-     '\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+     \left DELIMITER1 ... \right DELIMITER2
 
-'\underbrace{MATH}'
-     Generates MATH with a brace underneath.  For example,
-     '\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}'
+   Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters.  The
+delimiters are sized according to the math they enclose.  This makes a
+unit vector surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
 
-'\underline{TEXT}'
-     Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be
-     underlined.  The line is always below the text, taking account of
-     descenders.
+     \begin{equation}
+       \left(\begin{array}{c}
+         1   \\
+         0   \\
+       \end{array}\right)
 
-'\vdots'
-     Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+   Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'.  Leaving out the
+'\left(' in the above gets 'Extra \right'.  Leaving off the '\right)'
+gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
 
+   However, the two delimiters DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match.
+A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below.  Use a
+period, '.', as a null delimiter.
+
+     \begin{equation}
+       f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+                     1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+                     f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}
+            \end{array}\right.
+     \end{equation}
+
+Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, '\{'.
+
+16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \sqrt{ARG}
+     \sqrt[ROOT-NUMBER]{ARG}
+
+   The square root, or optionally other roots, of ARG.  The optional
+argument ROOT-NUMBER gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of 'x+y'
+as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'.  The radical grows with the size of ARG (as the
+height of the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets
+steeper, until for a large enough 'arg', it is vertical).
+
+   LaTeX has a separate '\surd' character (*note Math symbols::).
+
+16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}
+
+   Put TEXT above RELATION.  To put a function name above an arrow enter
+'\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+
 17 Modes
 ********
 
-When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
+As LaTeX processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes.  They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes.  Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
 
-   * Paragraph mode
-   * Math mode
-   * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+   * "Paragraph mode" is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text.
+     It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+     pages.  This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time.
 
-   Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
-when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
-commands.
+     "LR mode" (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
+     "restricted horizontal mode") is in effect when LaTeX starts making
+     a box with an '\mbox' command.  As in paragraph mode, LaTeX's
+     output is a string of words with spaces between them.  Unlike in
+     paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
+     keeps going from left to right.  (Although LaTeX will not complain
+     that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to
+     put that box into a line, it could very well complain that the
+     finished LR box won't fit there.)
 
-   "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
-processing ordinary text.  In this mode, LaTeX breaks the input text
-into lines and breaks the lines into pages.
+   * "Math mode" is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
+     formula.
 
-   LaTeX is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula,
-either displayed math or within a line.
+     "Display math mode" is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
+     mathematical formula.  (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from
+     inline ones.  One example is that the placement of the subscript on
+     '\int' differs in the two situations.)
 
-   In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that
-it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them.  However,
-unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never
-starts a new line in LR mode.  Even if you put a hundred words into an
-'\mbox', LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a
-single box (and then most likely complain because the resulting box was
-too wide to fit on the line).  LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making
-a box with an '\mbox' command.  You can get it to enter a different mode
-inside the box--for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
-formula in the box.
+   * "Vertical mode" is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
+     other material making the output page.  This is the mode LaTeX is
+     in when it starts a document.
 
-   There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put LaTeX into paragraph mode.  The box made by one of
-these commands or environments will be called a 'parbox'.  When LaTeX is
-in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner
-paragraph mode" (no page breaks).  Its normal paragraph mode, which it
-starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode".
+     "Internal vertical mode" is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
+     '\vbox'.  This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
 
+For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with 'Let \( x \) be ...'
+then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in vertical
+mode, then it reads the 'L' and switches to paragraph mode, then the
+next switch happens at the '\(' where LaTeX changes to math mode, and
+then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode.
+
+   Paragraph mode has two subcases.  If you use a '\parbox' command or
+or a 'minipage' then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode.  But it will not
+put a page break here.  Inside one of these boxes, called a "parbox",
+LaTeX is in "inner paragraph mode".  Its more usual situation, where it
+can put page breaks, is "outer paragraph mode" (*note Page breaking::).
+
 17.1 '\ensuremath'
 ==================
 
@@ -7144,87 +9433,163 @@
 
      \ensuremath{FORMULA}
 
-   The '\ensuremath' command ensures that FORMULA is typeset in math
-mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+   Ensure that FORMULA is typeset in math mode.
 
-   For instance:
+   For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used
+only in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain
+text.
 
-     \documentclass{report}
-     \newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
-     \begin{document}
-     Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
-     \end{document}
+     \newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+     In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
 
-   One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
-they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
-'\leadsto':
+   Caution: the '\ensuremath' command is useful but not a panacea.
 
-     \documentclass{report}
-     \usepackage{amssymb}
-     \newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
-     \let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
-     \renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
-     \begin{document}
-     All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
-     \end{document}
+     \newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+     You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+     But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
 
+Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+
 18 Page styles
 **************
 
-The '\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
-page's head and foot.  The page style determines what goes in them.
+The style of a page determines where LaTeX places the components of that
+page, such as headers and footers, and the text body.  This includes
+pages in the main part of the document but also includes special pages
+such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first
+page of an article.
 
+   The package 'fancyhdr' is very helpful for constructing page styles.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+
 18.1 '\maketitle'
 =================
 
-The '\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title
-page--except in the 'article' class, where the title is placed at the
-top of the first page.  Information used to produce the title is
-obtained from the following declarations:
+Synopsis:
 
-'\author{NAME \and NAME2}'
-     The '\author' command declares the document author(s), where the
-     argument is a list of authors separated by '\and' commands.  Use
-     '\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example,
-     to give the author's institution or address.
+     \maketitle
 
+   Generate a title.  In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the 'article' class where it is at the top of
+the first page.  (*Note Document class options:: for information about
+the 'titlepage' document class option.)
+
+   This example shows '\maketitle' appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after '\begin{document}'.
+
+     \documentclass{article}
+     \title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+     \author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+         With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+       Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+       \and
+       Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+         Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+         and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.}           \\
+       Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+       }
+     \date{1964-Sep-26}
+     \begin{document}
+     \maketitle
+     Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+     That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+     a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+     sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+       ...
+
+   You tell LaTeX the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations.  These must come before the '\maketitle',
+either in the preamble or in the document body.
+
+'\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}'
+     Required.  Declare the document author or authors.  The argument is
+     a list of authors separated by '\and' commands.  To separate lines
+     within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
+     institution or address, use a double backslash, '\\'.  If you omit
+     the '\author' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Warning: No \author
+     given'.
+
 '\date{TEXT}'
-     The '\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date.  With
-     no '\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used.
+     Optional.  Declare TEXT to be the document's date.  The TEXT
+     doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all.  If
+     you omit '\date' then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
+     To have no date, instead use '\date{}'.
 
 '\thanks{TEXT}'
-     The '\thanks' command produces a '\footnote' to the title, usually
-     used for credit acknowledgements.
+     Optional.  Produce a footnote.  You can use it in the author
+     information for acknowledgements, as illustrated below, but you can
+     also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense.  It
+     can be any text so you can use it to print an email address, or for
+     any purpose.
 
 '\title{TEXT}'
-     The '\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document.
-     Use '\\' to force a line break, as usual.
+     Required.  Declare TEXT to be the title of the document.  Get line
+     breaks inside TEXT with a double backslash, '\\'.  If you omit the
+     '\title' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Error: No \title given'.
 
+   Many publishers will provide a class to use in place of 'article' in
+that example, that formats the title according to their house
+requirements.  To make your own, see *note titlepage::.  You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+'\maketitle' command.
+
 18.2 '\pagenumbering'
 =====================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \pagenumbering{STYLE}
+     \pagenumbering{NUMBER-STYLE}
 
-   Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE; also resets
-the page number to 1.  The STYLE argument is one of the following:
+   Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number.  The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references.  This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
 
+   In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered 'a',
+etc.  Starting on the page containing that section, the pages are
+numbered '1', etc.
+
+     \begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+       ...
+     \section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+       ...
+
+   The argument NUMBER-STYLE is one of the following (see also *note
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
+
 'arabic'
-     arabic numerals
+     arabic numerals: 1, 2, ...
 
 'roman'
-     lowercase Roman numerals
+     lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, ...
 
 'Roman'
-     uppercase Roman numerals
+     uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, ...
 
 'alph'
-     lowercase letters
+     lowercase letters: a, b, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+     you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
 
 'Alph'
-     uppercase letters
+     uppercase letters: A, B, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+     you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
 
+'gobble'
+     LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset.
+     References to that page also are blank.  (This does not work with
+     the popular package 'hyperref' so to have the page number not
+     appear you may want to instead use '\pagestyle{empty}' or
+     '\thispagestyle{empty}'.)
+
+   Traditionally, if a document has front matter--preface, table of
+contents, etc.--then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals.  The
+main matter of a document uses arabic.  *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter::.
+
+   If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see *note \pagestyle::.  If you want to change the value of page number
+then you will manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
+
 18.3 '\pagestyle'
 =================
 
@@ -7232,110 +9597,277 @@
 
      \pagestyle{STYLE}
 
-   The '\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are
-typeset from the current page onwards.  Values for STYLE:
+   Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are
+typeset, from the current page onwards.
 
+   A discussion with an example is below.  Note first that the package
+'fancyhdr' is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
+New documents that need to do anything other than one of the standard
+options below should use this package.  See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+   Values for STYLE:
+
 'plain'
-     Just a plain page number.
+     The header is empty.  The footer contains only a page number,
+     centered.
 
 'empty'
-     Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
+     The header and footer is empty.
 
 'headings'
-     Put running headers on each page.  The document style specifies
-     what goes in the headers.
+     Put running headers and footers on each page.  The document style
+     specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
 
 'myheadings'
      Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
      commands.
 
+   Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX's mechanism will help you
+work with the options 'headings' or 'myheadings'.  The document source
+below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle 'headings'.  On
+this document's left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
+number) the title of the current section.  On its right hand pages LaTeX
+wants the title of the current subsection.  When it makes up a page,
+LaTeX gets this information from the commands '\leftmark' and
+'\rightmark'.  So it is up to '\section' and '\subsection' to store that
+information there.
+
+     \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+     \pagestyle{headings}
+     \begin{document}
+       ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+     \section{Section 2}
+       ...
+     \subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+       ...
+     \subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+       ...
+
+Suppose that the second section falls on a left page.  Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put 'Section 2' in
+the left page header.  As to the right header, if no subsection starts
+before the end of the right page then LaTeX blanks the right hand
+header.  If a subsection does appear before the right page finishes then
+there are two cases.  If at least one subsection starts on the right
+hand page then LaTeX will put in the right header the title of the first
+subsection starting on that right page.  If at least one of 2.1, 2.2,
+..., starts on the left page but none starts on the right then LaTeX
+puts in the right hand header the title of the last subsection to start,
+that is, the one in effect during the right hand page.
+
+   To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has '\section'
+issue a command '\markboth', setting '\leftmark' to 'Section 2' and
+setting '\rightmark' to blank.  And, LaTeX has '\subsection' issue a
+command '\markright', setting '\rightmark' to 'Subsection 2.1', etc.
+
    Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':
 
-'\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}'
-     Sets both the left and the right heading.  A "left-hand heading"
-     (LEFT) is generated by the last '\markboth' command before the end
-     of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT) is generated by
-     the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on the page if
-     there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+'\markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}'
+     Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for
+     either a page style of 'headings' or 'myheadings'.  A left hand
+     page heading LEFT-HEAD is generated by the last '\markboth' command
+     before the end of the page.  A right hand page heading RIGHT-HEAD
+     is generated by the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on
+     the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one that came
+     before that page.
 
 '\markright{RIGHT}'
-     Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+     Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
 
-18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
-============================
+18.4 '\thispagestyle'
+=====================
 
-The '\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
-'\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to
-STYLE for the current page only.
+Synopsis:
 
+     \thispagestyle{STYLE}
+
+   Works in the same way as the '\pagestyle' (*note \pagestyle::),
+except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only.  This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+
+   Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.
+For example, this LaTeX book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in in 'plain' style, as is the default (*note Page styles::).
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \pagestyle{headings}
+     \begin{document}
+     \chapter{First chapter}
+       ...
+     \chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+       ...
+
+The 'plain' style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.  To
+make the page entirely empty, the command '\thispagestyle{empty}'
+immediately follows the second '\chapter'.
+
 19 Spaces
 *********
 
-LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
+LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.  Some of these
+are best suited to mathematical text; see *note Spacing in math mode::.
+Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text and
+mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
 
-19.1 '\hspace'
+19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+====================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \enspace
+     \quad
+     \qquad
+
+   Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em.  The em is a length
+defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the width of a
+capital M. One advantage of describing space in ems is that it can be
+more portable across documents than an absolute measurement such as
+points (*note Lengths/em::).
+
+   This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+
+     \begin{center}
+       \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+       \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+     \end{center}
+
+*Note Spacing in math mode:: for '\quad' and '\qquad'.  These are
+lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in
+many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+'\hspace'.
+
+19.2 '\hspace'
 ==============
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
      \hspace{LENGTH}
      \hspace*{LENGTH}
 
-   Add the horizontal space given by LENGTH.  The LENGTH is a rubber
-length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, in any
-unit that LaTeX understands (*note Lengths::).
+   Insert the horizontal space LENGTH.  The LENGTH can be positive,
+negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.  It is a
+rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, or
+both (*note Lengths::).  Because the space is stretchable and
+shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
 
-   This command can add both positive and negative space; adding
-negative space is like backspacing.
+   This makes a line with 'Name:' an inch from the right margin.
 
-   Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
-space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
-get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both.
-This command's starred version '\hspace*{...}' puts a non-discardable
-invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
-output.
+     \noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
 
-   This example make a one-line paragraph that puts 'Name:' an inch from
-the right margin.
+   The '*'-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.  More
+precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
+and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded.  The '*'-version
+avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in
+front of the space).
 
-     \noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}
+   In this example
 
-19.2 '\hfill'
+     \parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+       Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+       fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+       conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+       that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
+
+the 1 inch blank following 'conceived in' falls at the start of a line.
+If you erase the '*' then LaTeX discards the blank.
+
+   Here, the '\hspace' separates the three graphics.
+
+     \begin{center}
+       \includegraphics{lion.png}%   comment keeps out extra space
+       \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+       \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+     \end{center}
+
+Because the argument to each '\hspace' has 'minus 0.25cm', each can
+shrink a little if the three figures are too wide.  But each space won't
+shrink more than 0.25cm (*note Lengths::).
+
+19.3 '\hfill'
 =============
 
-Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but can stretch
-horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
+Synopsis:
 
-   The command '\hfill' is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}'.  For space
-that does not disappear at line breaks use '\hspace*{\fill}' instead
-(*note \hspace::).
+     \hfill
 
-19.3 '\spacefactor'
+   Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can
+stretch horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
+
+   This creates a one-line paragraph with 'Name:' on the left side of
+the page and 'Quiz One' on the right.
+
+     \noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+
+   The '\hfill' command is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}' and so the
+space can be discarded at line breaks.  To avoid that instead use
+'\hspace*{\fill}' (*note \hspace::).
+
+   Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+
+     \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+       ...
+     \begin{figure}
+       \hspace*{\fill}%
+       \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+         \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+       \hspace*{\fill}%
+       \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+     \end{figure}
+
+Note the '\hspace*''s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+
+19.4 '\hss'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \hss
+
+   Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive).  LaTeX authors
+should reach first for the '\makebox' command to get the effects of
+'\hss' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+
+   Here, the first line's '\hss' makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+
+     X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+     X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+
+Without the '\hss' you get something like 'Overfull \hbox (6.11111pt too
+wide) detected at line 20'.
+
+19.5 '\spacefactor'
 ===================
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \spacefactor=INTEGER
 
-   While LaTeX is making the page, to give the lines the best appearance
-it may stretch or shrink the gaps between words.  The '\spacefactor'
-command (from Plain TeX) allows you to change the LaTeX's default
-behavior.
+   Influence LaTeX's glue stretch and shrink behavior.  Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
 
+   While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words.  (This space is not a character; it is called the
+"interword glue"; *note \hspace::).  The '\spacefactor' command (from
+Plain TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
+stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+
    After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
 parameter called the "space factor".  If the next thing in the input is
-a space then this parameter affects how much of a horizontal gap LaTeX
-will have it span.  (This gap is not a character; it is called
-"interword glue".)  A larger space factor means that the glue gap can
-stretch more and shrink less.
+a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking can
+happen.  A space factor that is larger than the normal value means that
+the glue can stretch more and shrink less.  Normally, the space factor
+is 1000.  This value is in effect following most characters, and any
+non-character box or math formula.  But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.  Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
 
-   Normally, the space factor is 1000; this value is in effect following
-most characters, and any non-character box or math formula.  But it is
-3000 after a period, exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000
-after a colon, 1500 after a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a
-right parenthesis or bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.
-Finally, it is 999 after a capital letter.
-
    If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
 normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
 3.3333 points).  Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
@@ -7343,233 +9875,515 @@
 point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font's normal stretch value
 is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
 1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
-1.11111 points).  In short, compared to a normal space, such as the
-space following a word ending in a lowercase letter, inter-sentence
-spacing has a fixed extra space added and then the space can stretch 3
-times as much and shrink 1/3 as much.
+1.11111 points).
 
-   The rules for how TeX uses space factors are even more complex
-because they play two more roles.  In practice, there are two
-consequences.  First, if a period or other punctuation is followed by a
-close parenthesis or close double quote then its effect is still in
-place, that is, the following glue will have increased stretch and
-shrink.  Second, conversely, if punctuation comes after a capital letter
-then its effect is not in place so you get an ordinary space.  For how
-to adjust to this second case, for instance if an abbreviation does not
-end in a capital letter, *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
+   For example, consider the period ending 'A man's best friend is his
+dog.' After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after 'friend', which does not end in a period.
 
-19.3.1 '\(SPACE)' and '\@'
---------------------------
+   The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles.  In practice, there are two consequences.  First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink).  Second, if punctuation comes
+after a capital letter then its effect is not in place so you get an
+ordinary space.  This second case also affects abbreviations that do not
+end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
 
-Here, '\(SPACE)' means a backslash followed by a space.  These commands
-mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either ending a
-sentence or as ending an abbreviation.
+   You can only use '\spacefactor' in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
+Modes::).  You can see the current value with '\the\spacefactor' or
+'\showthe\spacefactor'.
 
-   By default, in justifying a line LaTeX adjusts the space after a
-sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
-colon) more than the space between words.  *Note \spacefactor::.  As
-described there, LaTeX assumes that the period ends a sentence unless it
-is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it takes that period for
-part of an abbreviation.  Note that if a sentence-ending period is
-immediately followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single
-or double quote, then the space effect of that period follows through
-that parenthesis or quote.
+   (Comment, not really related to '\spacefactor': if you get errors
+like 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode', or 'You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in math mode.', or 'Improper \spacefactor' then you have
+probably tried to redefine an internal command.  *Note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::.)
 
-   So: if you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is
-not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
-sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space ('\ ') or a tie
-('~') or a '\@'.  Examples are 'Nat.\ Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean',
-and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note that in the last the '\@' comes
-before the closing parenthesis).
+19.5.1 '\@'
+-----------
 
-   In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that does end the sentence, then put '\@' before the period.  For
-example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have correct inter-sentence spacing
-after the period.
+Synopsis:
 
-   For another use of '\(SPACE)', *note \(SPACE) after control
-sequence::.
+     CAPITAL-LETTER\@.
 
-19.3.2 '\frenchspacing'
+   Treat a period as sentence-ending, where LaTeX would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation.  LaTeX thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence.  By default, in justifying a line
+LaTeX adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (*note \spacefactor::).
+
+   This example shows the two cases to remember.
+
+     The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+
+The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital.  We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting '\@' before
+it.  The first period ends the abbreviation 'etc.' but not the sentence.
+The backslash-space, '\ ', produces a mid-sentence space.
+
+   So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put '\@' before the period.  This holds even if there is
+an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
+quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through those
+characters.  For example, this
+
+     Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+     (a book by the MAA)\@.
+
+will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+
+   The '\@' command is only for a text mode.  If you use it outside of a
+text mode then you get 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode'
+(*note Modes::).
+
+   Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose
+last letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the
+last word in the sentence.  For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, ('\ '), or a tie, ('~'), or '\@'.  Examples are 'Nat.\
+Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note
+in the last one that the '\@' comes before the closing parenthesis).
+
+19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
 -----------------------
 
-This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat inter-sentence
-spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-   In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions,
-including English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or
-after other punctuation marks) more than the space between words.
-Following this declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.
+     \frenchspacing
+     \nonfrenchspacing
 
-   Revert to the default behavior by declaring '\nonfrenchspacing'.
+   The first declaration causes LaTeX to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(*note \spacefactor::); this is the default.
 
-19.3.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+   Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence.  Declaring '\frenchspacing' (the
+command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
+treated equally.
+
+19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
 -----------------------
 
-Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default.
+Synopsis:
 
-19.4 '\ ' after control sequence
-================================
+     \normalsfcodes
 
-The '\ ' command is often used after control sequences to keep them from
-gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'.  And, under
-normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to '\ '.
-For another use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
+   Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default (*note
+\spacefactor::).
 
-   Some people prefer to use '{}' for the same purpose, as in '\TeX{} is
-nice'.  This has the advantage that you can always write it the same
-way, namely '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
-punctuation mark.  Compare:
+19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+==========================
 
-     \TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
+This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space.  Synopsis:
 
-     \TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
+     \
 
-   Some individual commands, notably those defined with the 'xspace',
-package do not follow the standard behavior.
+   Produce a space.  By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
 
-19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
-===============================
+   A blank is not a space.  When you type a blank between words, LaTeX
+produces white space.  That's different from an explicit space.  This
+illustrates.
 
-'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
-of an em.  This is the proper space to use between nested quotes, as in
-'".
+     \begin{tabular}{l}
+     Three blanks:   in a row \\
+     Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+     \end{tabular}
 
-19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
+On the first line LaTeX collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace (it would be the same with a single blank or, for instance,
+with a blank and an tab and a blank, or a blank and a newline and a
+blank).  But the second line asks for three spaces so the white area is
+wider.  Thus, the backslash-space command will create some horizontal
+space.  (But the best way to create horizontal space is with '\hspace';
+*Note \hspace::.)
+
+   The backslash-space command has two main uses.  First, it is often
+used after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
+follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'.  (But the approach of using curly
+parentheses, as in '\TeX{} is nice', has the advantage of still working
+if the next character is a period.)
+
+   The second common use is that it mark a period as ending an
+abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in 'So says Prof.\ Smith'
+(*note \@::).
+
+   Under normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent
+to backslash-space, '\ '.
+
+19.7 '~'
+========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     BEFORE~AFTER
+
+   The tie character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER at
+which the line will not be broken.  By default the white space has
+length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
+
+   Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words.
+
+     Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+
+In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
+spacing (*note \@::).
+
+   Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
+cause confusion.  But they also reduce LaTeX's options when it breaks
+lines into paragraphs, so you can use too many.  They are also matters
+of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers.
+Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
+
+   * Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+     'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
+     'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'.  When cases are enumerated inline:
+     '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
+
+   * Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
+     package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'.  This
+     includes between a month and a date: 'October~12' or '12~Oct'.  In
+     general, in any expressions where numbers and abbreviations or
+     symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or '2:50~pm', or
+     'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'.
+
+   * When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
+     'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
+     large~$n$' (but compare 'is~$15$' with 'is $15$~times the height').
+     Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+     'dimension~$d$' or 'function~$f(x)$' (but compare 'with length
+     $l$~or more').  When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+     preposition: 'of~$x$', or 'from $0$ to~$1$', or 'in common
+     with~$m$'.
+
+   * Between symbols in series: '$1$,~$2$, or~$3$' or '$1$,~$2$,
+     \ldots,~$n$'.
+
+   * Between a person's forenames and between multiple surnames:
+     'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII' (but
+     you must give TeX places to break the line so you may do 'Charles
+     Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin').
+
+   * Before a dash: 'pages 12~--14' or 'it is~--- it must be said~---
+     plausible'.
+
+19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
 ===================================
 
-The '\/' command produces an "italic correction".  This is a small space
-defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the
-character colliding with whatever follows.  The italic f character
-typically has a large italic correction value.
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-   If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary
-to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
-very small height.  However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
-normal letters, it can help.  Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the 'f's
-are nicely separated) with f: f;.
+     \thinspace
+     \negthinspace
 
-   When changing fonts with commands such as '\textit{italic text}' or
-'{\itshape italic text}', LaTeX will automatically insert an italic
-correction if appropriate (*note Font styles::).
+   Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and -1/6em.
+These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and '\!' (*note Spacing in
+math mode/\thinspace::).  You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace'
+in text mode.
 
-   Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
-correction.  Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space
-after the 'f') with pdfTeX.
+   The '\negthinspace' command is used in text mode mostly for fiddling
+with spaces.  One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between
+nested quotes.
 
+     Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+
+Another use is that some style guides call for a '\thinspace' between an
+ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, though, think
+the three dots are quite enough already).  Still another use is between
+initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+
+19.9 '\/'
+=========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     BEFORE-CHARACTER\/AFTER-CHARACTER
+
+   Insert an "italic correction", a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows.  When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the correction from
+the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been applied to
+the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+
+   Here, were it not for the '\/', the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
+hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
+
+     \newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+
+because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+
+   If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
+correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small height.
+However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal letters, the
+italic correction can help.
+
+   When you use commands such as '\textit' or '\itshape' to change
+fonts, LaTeX will automatically insert any needed italic correction
+(*note Font styles::).
+
+   Roman characters can also have an italic correction.  An example is
+in the name 'pdf\/\TeX'.
+
    There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
 done in a different way.
 
-19.7 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
-==========================
+19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+===============================
 
-Produce an infinite rubber length (*note Lengths::) filled with a
-horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \hrulefill
+     \dotfill
+
+   Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (*note Lengths::) that
+LaTeX fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of white
 space.
 
-   When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that
-is left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled
-with evenly spaced dots.
+   This outputs a line 2 inches long.
 
-     \noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge
+     Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
 
+This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+
+     \noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+
    To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
 start or end.
 
    To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
-with '\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
-1pt\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to
-1pt.  Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
-'\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@ 1.00em{\hss .\hss
-}\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+here
 
-19.8 '\addvspace'
-=================
+     \renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+       \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
 
-'\addvspace{LENGTH}'
+which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt.  Similarly, adjust
+the dot spacing as with
 
-   Add a vertical space of height LENGTH, which is a rubber length
-(*note Lengths::).  However, if vertical space has already been added to
-the same point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command then
-this command will not add more space than what is needed to make the
-natural length of the total vertical space equal to LENGTH.
+     \renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+       \leavevmode\cleaders\hb at xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
 
-   Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end with '\addvspace{...}' so that
-two consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.
+which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
 
-   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+   This example produces a line for a signature.
 
-   The error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' means that you
-were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
-change that is to precede this command with a '\par' command.
+     \begin{minipage}{4cm}
+       \centering
+       \hrulefill\\
+       Signed
+     \end{minipage}
 
-19.9 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
-===================================
+The line is 4cm long.
 
-These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the
-document class.
+19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+============================================
 
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \bigskip
+     \medskip
+     \smallskip
+
+   Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or small.
+These commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by
+O'Brian).
+
+     Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+     was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+     \bigskip
+     ``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+     said Peter.
+
+   Each command is associated with a length defined in the document
+class file.
+
 '\bigskip'
      The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
-     space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and
-     'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt').
+     space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the 'book' and
+     'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt'.
 
 '\medskip'
      The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
-     line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and
-     'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt').
+     line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the 'book'
+     and 'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt'.
 
 '\smallskip'
      The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
-     of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
-     'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt').
+     of a line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the
+     'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'.
 
-19.10 '\vfill'
+   Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it.  So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+
+   The commands '\bigbreak', '\medbreak', and '\smallbreak' are similar
+but also suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to put a page break
+(*note \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak::.
+
+19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+===============================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \bigbreak
+     \medbreak
+     \smallbreak
+
+   Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to break the page.  (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+
+   *Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for more.  These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with '\addvspace').  In addition, they terminate a paragraph where they
+are used: this example
+
+     abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+     jkl mno pqr
+
+will output three paragraphs, the first ending in 'abc' and the second
+starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent, with
+'def'.
+
+19.13 '\strut'
 ==============
 
-End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length (*note
-Lengths::) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as
-needed.
+Synopsis:
 
-   It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
-'\vfill' ends the current paragraph, whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
-infinite vertical space below its line irrespective of the paragraph
-structure.  In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
-to circumvent this see *note \vspace::.
+     \strut
 
-   In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
-contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the third 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
-halfway between them.
+   Ensure that the current line has height at least '0.7\baselineskip'
+and depth at least '0.3\baselineskip'.  Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
+the line a rectangle having zero width,
+'\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}' (*note \rule::).  The
+'\baselineskip' changes with the current font and fontsize.
 
-     \begin{document}
-     Lost Dog!
-     \vfill
-     Lost Dog!
-     \vfill
-     Lost Dog!
-     \end{document}
+   In this example the '\strut' keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
 
-19.11 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
-=======================
+     \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
 
-Synopsis, one of these two:
+   This example has four lists.  In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2.  The second
+list fixes that with a '\strut' at the end of its first item's second
+line.
 
+     \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+     \noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+     \begin{enumerate}
+       \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+       \item test
+       \item test
+     \end{enumerate}
+     \end{minipage}%
+     \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+     \begin{enumerate}
+       \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+       \item test
+       \item test
+     \end{enumerate}
+     \end{minipage}%
+     \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+     \begin{enumerate}
+       \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+       \item \fbox{test}
+       \item \fbox{test}
+     \end{enumerate}
+     \end{minipage}%
+     \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+     \begin{enumerate}
+       \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+       \item \fbox{test}
+       \item \fbox{test}
+     \end{enumerate}
+     \end{minipage}%
+
+The final two lists use 'fbox' to show what's happening.  The third
+list's '\parbox' goes only to the bottom of its second 'test', which
+happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline.  The
+fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline
+space.
+
+   The '\strut' command is often useful in graphics, such as in 'TikZ'
+or 'Asymptote'.  For instance, you may have a command such as
+'\graphnode{NODE-NAME}' that fits a circle around NODE-NAME.  However,
+unless you are careful the NODE-NAME's 'x' and 'y' will produce
+different-diameter circles because the characters are different sizes.
+A careful '\graphnode' might insert a '\strut', then NODE-NAME, and then
+draw the circle.
+
+   The general approach of using a zero width '\rule' is useful in many
+circumstances.  In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of the
+first integral from hitting the '\hline'.  Similarly, the second rule
+keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+
+     \begin{tabular}{rl}
+       \textsc{Integral}   &\textsc{Value}           \\
+       \hline
+       $\int_0^x t\, dt$   &$x^2/2$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\
+       $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+     \end{tabular}
+
+(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won't work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like '\\[2.5ex]' will
+put the room between the header line and the '\hline', and the integral
+would still hit the line.)
+
+19.14 '\vspace'
+===============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
      \vspace{LENGTH}
      \vspace*{LENGTH}
 
-   Add the vertical space LENGTH.  This can be negative or positive, and
-is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+   Add the vertical space LENGTH.  The LENGTH can be positive, negative,
+or zero.  It is a rubber length--it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus'
+component (*note Lengths::).
 
-   LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vspace' at a page break, that
-is, at the top or bottom of a page.  The starred version '\vspace*{...}'
-causes the space to stay.
+   This puts space between the two paragraphs.
 
-   If '\vspace' is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
-horizontal mode), the space is inserted _after_ the line with the
-'\vspace' command.  A new paragraph is not started.
+     And I slept.
 
+     \vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+     The new day dawned cold.
+
+(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+
+   The '*'-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable.  More
+precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
+'*'-version causes the space to stay.  This example leaves space between
+the two questions.
+
+     Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+     \vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+     Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+
+That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+
+   If you use '\vspace' in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the '\vspace' command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+'\vspace' command.
+
    In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
 the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
 
@@ -7581,172 +10395,461 @@
      \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
      \end{document}
 
-20 Boxes
-********
+19.15 '\vfill'
+==============
 
-All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
+Synopsis:
 
-20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
-==================
+     \vfill
 
-The '\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
-created by its argument.  The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can
-be used to prevent hyphenation.
+   End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed (*note
+Lengths::).
 
-20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
-============================
+   It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
+'\vfill' ends the current paragraph whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the paragraph
+structure.  In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
+to circumvent this see the starred option in *note \vspace::.
 
-Synopses:
+   In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
+contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the second 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+halfway between them.
 
-     \fbox{TEXT}
-     \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+     \begin{document}
+     Lost Dog!
+     \vfill
+     Lost Dog!  % perfectly in the middle
+     \vfill
+     Lost Dog!
+     \end{document}
 
-   The '\fbox' and '\framebox' commands are like '\mbox', except that
-they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
+19.16 '\addvspace'
+==================
 
-   In addition, the '\framebox' command allows for explicit
-specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a
-dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument.
+Synopsis:
 
-   Both commands produce a rule of thickness '\fboxrule' (default
-'0.4pt'), and leave a space of '\fboxsep' (default '3pt') between the
-rule and the contents of the box.
+     \addvspace{VERT-LENGTH}
 
-   *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the '\framebox' command in the
-'picture' environment.
+   Add a vertical space of VERT-LENGTH.  However, if there are two or
+more '\addvspace''s in a sequence then together they only add the space
+needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence.  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).  The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
 
-20.3 'lrbox'
-============
+   This example illustrates.  The 'picture' draws a scale.  In a
+standard LaTeX article the length '\baselineskip' is 12pt.  The two
+rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt
+from the first 'addvspace'.
 
-Synopsis:
+     \documentclass{article}
+     \usepackage{color}
+     \begin{document}
+     \setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+     \noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+       \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+       \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+     \end{picture}%
+     \rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+     \par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+     \par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+     \end{document}
 
-     \begin{lrbox}{\CMD}
-       TEXT
-     \end{lrbox}
+Now uncomment the second '\addvspace'.  It does not make the gap 20pt
+longer; instead the gap is the sum of '\baselineskip' and 20pt.  So
+'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name -- it makes sure
+that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
+the largest one is used.
 
-   This is the environment form of *note '\sbox': \sbox.
+   LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a 'theorem'
+environment begins and ends with '\addvspace' so that two consecutive
+'theorem''s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
 
-   The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box '\CMD', which
-must have been declared with '\newsavebox'.
+   A error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' pointing to an
+'\addvspace' means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
+command.  One way to change that is to precede '\addvspace' with a
+'\par' command (*note \par::), as in the above example.
 
-20.4 '\makebox'
-===============
+20 Boxes
+********
 
-Synopsis:
+At its core, LaTeX puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page.  So these commands are central.
 
+   There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating
+boxes.  One useful adjunct to the commands here is 'adjustbox'.
+
+20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+=========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \mbox{TEXT}
+     \makebox{TEXT}
+     \makebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
      \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
 
-   The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
-TEXT specified.  The width of the box can be overridden by the optional
-WIDTH argument.  The position of the text within the box is determined
-by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
+   Create a box, a container for material.  The TEXT is is typeset in LR
+mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines.  The '\mbox'
+command is robust, while '\makebox' is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
+   Because 'text' is not broken into lines, you can use '\mbox' to
+prevent hyphenation.  In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the
+table name, 'T-4'.
+
+     See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+
+   The first two command versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are roughly
+equivalent.  They create a box just wide enough to contain the TEXT.
+(They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
+
+   In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
+of the box.  Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
+width of the box.  For one thing, TEXT can be too small; this creates a
+full-line box
+
+     \makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+
+with 'Chapter Exam' centered.  But TEXT can also be too wide for WIDTH.
+See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+
+   In the WIDTH argument you can use the following lengths that refer to
+the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: '\depth',
+'\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this is the box's height plus its
+depth).  For example, to make a box with the text stretched to double
+the natural size you can say this.
+
+     \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+
+   For the fourth command version the optional argument POSITION gives
+position of the text within the box.  It may take the following values:
+
 'c'
-     Centered (default).
+     The TEXT is centered (default).
+
 'l'
-     Flush left.
+     The TEXT is flush left.
+
 'r'
      Flush right.
+
 's'
-     Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
-     stretchable space for this to work.
+     Stretch the interword space in TEXT across the entire WIDTH.  The
+     TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work.  For
+     instance, this could head a press release:
+     '\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+     RELEASE\hfil}'
 
-   '\makebox' is also used within the 'picture' environment *note
-\makebox (picture)::.
+   A common use of '\makebox' is to make zero-width text boxes.  This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
 
-20.5 '\parbox'
+     \newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+     \pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+     \pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+
+
+   The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space)
+will be just before the 'What' (note the space after 'points').  You can
+use '\makebox' similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or
+'Asymptote', where you put the edge of the text at a known location,
+regardless of the length of that text.
+
+   For boxes with frames see *note \fbox & \framebox::.  For colors
+see *note Colored boxes::.
+
+   There is a related version of '\makebox' that is used within the
+'picture' environment, where the length is given in terms of
+'\unitlength' (*note \makebox (picture)::).
+
+   If you put a double-backslash into TEXT then LaTeX will not give you
+a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}' outputs 'abc defghi'
+while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def ghi', but neither go
+to a second line.  To get multiple lines see *note \parbox:: and *note
+minipage::.
+
+20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+==========================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+     \fbox{TEXT}
+     \framebox{TEXT}
+     \framebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+     \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+   Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the
+space.  These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
+the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::).  The '\fbox' command is robust,
+the '\framebox' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+     \fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+
+LaTeX puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+
+   The first two command invocations, '\fbox{...}' and '\framebox{...}',
+are roughly the same.  As to the third and fourth invocations, the
+optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as WIDTH and the
+position of the text inside that box as POSITION.  *Note \mbox &
+\makebox:: for the full description but here is an example creating an
+empty box that is 1/4in wide.
+
+     \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+
+The '\strut' inserts a vertical height of '\baselineskip' (*note
+\strut::).
+
+   These parameters determine the frame layout.
+
+'\fboxrule'
+     The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box.  The default is
+     0.2pt.  Change it with a command such as
+     '\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}' (*note \setlength::).
+
+'\fboxsep'
+     The distance from the frame to the enclosed box.  The default is
+     3pt.  Change it with a command such as '\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}'
+     (*note \setlength::).  Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: this
+     will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+
+          {\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+           \framebox{%
+             \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+
+     The extra curly braces keep the effect of the '\setlength' local.
+
+   As with '\mbox' and '\makebox', LaTeX will not break lines in TEXT.
+But this example has LaTeX break lines to make a paragraph, and then
+frame the result.
+
+     \framebox{%
+       \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+         My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+         And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+       \end{minipage}}
+
+   *Note Colored boxes:: for colors other than black and white.
+
+   The 'picture' environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox (picture)::).
+
+20.3 '\parbox'
 ==============
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopses, one of:
 
-     \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT}
+     \parbox{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+     \parbox[POSITION]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+     \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+     \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
 
-   The '\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
-"paragraph mode".  It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
-with nothing fancy inside.  In particular, you shouldn't use any
-paragraph-making environments inside a '\parbox' argument.  For larger
-pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
-environment, you should use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+   Produce a box of text that is WIDTH wide.  Use this command to make a
+box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph.  This command is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
 
-   '\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:
+     \begin{picture}(0,0)
+       ...
+       \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+                              this semilog paper, the relationship is
+                              exponential.}}
+     \end{picture}
 
-WIDTH
-     the width of the parbox;
-TEXT
-     the text that goes inside the parbox.
+   The CONTENTS are processed in a text mode (*note Modes::) so LaTeX
+will break lines to make a paragraph.  But it won't make multiple
+paragraphs; for that, use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
 
-   By default LaTeX will position vertically a parbox so its center
-lines up with the center of the surrounding text line.  When the
-optional POSITION argument is present and equal either to 't' or 'b',
-this allows you respectively to align either the top or bottom line in
-the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text.  You may also
-specify 'm' for POSITION to get the default behaviour.
+   The options for '\parbox' (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
+for 'minipage'.  For convenience a summary of the options is here but
+see *note minipage:: for a complete description.
 
-   The optional HEIGHT argument overrides the natural height of the box.
+   There are two required arguments.  The WIDTH is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::).  It sets the width of the box into which LaTeX typesets
+CONTENTS.  The CONTENTS is the text that is placed in that box.  It
+should not have any paragraph-making components.
 
-   The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the
-box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used.
+   There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the 'parbox' with respect
+to the surrounding material.  The possible values are 'c' or 'm' to make
+the vertical center of the 'parbox' lines up with the center of the
+adjacent line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line of the
+'parbox' with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to match
+the bottom line.
 
-'t'
-     text is placed at the top of the box.
-'c'
-     text is centered in the box.
-'b'
-     text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-'s'
-     stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable
-     space for this to work.
+   The optional argument HEIGHT overrides the natural height of the box.
 
-20.6 '\raisebox'
+   The optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of CONTENT
+inside the 'parbox'.  Its default is the value of POSITION.  Its
+possible values are: 't' to put the CONTENT at the top of the box, 'c'
+to put it in the vertical center, 'b' to put it at the bottom of the
+box, and 's' to stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must
+contain vertically stretchable space).
+
+20.4 '\raisebox'
 ================
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
+     \raisebox{DISTANCE}{TEXT}
+     \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT]{TEXT}
      \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{TEXT}
 
-   The '\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT.  The first mandatory
-argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a
-negative amount).  TEXT itself is processed in LR mode.
+   Raise or lower TEXT.  This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
 
+   This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+
+     \newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+     $f\restricted{A}$
+
+   The first mandatory argument DISTANCE specifies how far to raise the
+second mandatory argument TEXT.  This is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::).  If it is negative then it lowers TEXT.  The TEXT is
+processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks (*note Modes::).
+
    The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions.  If they are
-specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the
-baseline (HEIGHT) or below (DEPTH), ignoring its natural height and
-depth.
+specified, they override the natural height and depth of the box LaTeX
+gets by typesetting TEXT.
 
-20.7 '\savebox'
-===============
+   In the arguments DISTANCE, HEIGHT, and DEPTH you can use the
+following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets
+on typesetting TEXT: '\depth', '\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this
+is the box's height plus its depth).
 
-Synopsis:
+   This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
 
-     \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
+     \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc}  % in preamble
+        ...
+     \begin{center}
+       \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+         \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+       \qquad
+       \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+         \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+     \end{center}
 
-   This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with '\makebox' (*note
-\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves
-it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with
-'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+The first '\height' is the height of 'lion.png' while the second is the
+height of 'meta.png'.
 
-20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
-===========================
+20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+=========================
 
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+     \savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+     \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+     \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
+
+   Typeset TEXT just as with '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
+except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a storage
+bin named BOX-CMD.  The bin name BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'.
+You must have previously allocated the bin BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox'
+(*note \newsavebox::).The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+   This creates and uses a bin.
+
+     \newsavebox{\fullname}
+     \sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+       ...
+     \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+     Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+     There goes \\usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
+
+One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a '\newcommand' is
+efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.  See
+the example below.
+
+   The first two command invocations, '\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}' and
+'\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}', are roughly equivalent.  As to the third and
+fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
+WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION.  *Note
+\mbox & \makebox:: for the full description.
+
+   In the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
+so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::).  If you use these then
+LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
+enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newbin}' then you get
+'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}' and
+'\usebox{\newbin}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
+To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
+
+     \savebox{\abin}{%
+       \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+         \begin{enumerate}
+           \item First item
+           \item Second item
+         \end{enumerate}
+       \end{minipage}}
+       ...
+     \usebox{\abin}
+
+   As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin's contents, this
+puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header.  LaTeX only typesets it once.
+
+     \usepackage{graphicx}  % all this in the preamble
+     \newsavebox{\sealbin}
+     \savebox{\sealbin}{%
+       \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+       \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+          \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+            \begin{tabular}{c}
+               \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+               Office of the President
+            \end{tabular}}
+       \end{picture}%
+     }
+     \markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+     \pagestyle{headings}
+
+The 'picture' environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+
+   If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin'.
+
+20.6 'lrbox'
+============
+
 Synopsis:
 
-     \sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}
+     \begin{lrbox}{BOX-CMD}
+       TEXT
+     \end{lrbox}
 
-   '\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with '\mbox' (*note \mbox::)
-except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal
-output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD.  \BOXCMD must have been
-previously declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+   The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the bin 'BOX-CMD'.  The
+BOX-CMD must begin with a backslash.  You must create this bin in
+advance with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).  This is the
+environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands, and is
+equivalent to them.  *Note \sbox & \savebox:: for the full information.
 
-20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}'
-=======================
+   In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+'tabular'.
 
+     \newsavebox{\jhbin}
+     \begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+       \begin{tabular}{c}
+         \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+         Jim Hef{}feron
+       \end{tabular}
+     \end{lrbox}
+       ...
+     \usebox{\jhbin}
+
+20.7 '\usebox'
+==============
+
 Synopsis:
 
-     \usebox{\BOXCMD}
+     \usebox{BOX-CMD}
 
-   '\usebox' produces the box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by
-a '\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).
+   Produce the box most recently saved in the bin BOX-CMD by the
+commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment.  *Note \sbox
+& \savebox:: for more information and examples.  (Note that BOX-CMD
+starts with a backslash.)  This command is robust (*note \protect::).
 
 21 Color
 ********
@@ -7763,8 +10866,8 @@
 significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
 'HTML' and 'Hsb' color models.
 
-21.1 Color package options
-==========================
+21.1 'color' package options
+============================
 
 Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
 
@@ -7860,10 +10963,12 @@
 
      \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}
 
-   Give the name NAME to the color.  For example, after
-'\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}' you can use that color name
-with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.
+   Give the name NAME to the color.  For example, after this
 
+     \definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+
+you can use that color name with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.
+
    This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
 and not be misleading.
 
@@ -7881,17 +10986,18 @@
      \textcolor{NAME}{...}
      \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \color{NAME}
      \color[COLOR MODEL]{SPECIFICATION}
 
    The affected text gets the color.  This line
 
-     \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+     \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+     Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
 
-   causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black.
-You can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
+causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black.  You
+can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
 that we just used the builtin color 'magenta'.
 
      \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
@@ -7913,10 +11019,13 @@
        \end{tabular}
      \end{center}
 
-   You can use color in equations.  A document might have
-'\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}' in the preamble, and then
-contain this equation.
+   You can use color in equations.  A document might have this
+definition in the preamble
 
+     \definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+
+and then contain this equation.
+
      \begin{equation}
        \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
      \end{equation}
@@ -7925,7 +11034,8 @@
 style but sometimes you want a one-off.  Those are the second forms in
 the synopses.
 
-     Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team
+     Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+     {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
 
    The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
 Color models::).  For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
@@ -7937,7 +11047,7 @@
 
      \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
 
-   has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
 
 21.3.3 Colored boxes
 --------------------
@@ -7945,19 +11055,19 @@
 Synopses:
 
      \colorbox{NAME}{...}
-     \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
+     \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
-     \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR SPECIFICATION}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
+     \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
 
    Make a box with the stated background color.  The '\fcolorbox'
 command puts a frame around the box.  For instance this
 
      Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
 
-   makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
 depth and height from the '\strut' (so the depth is '-.3\baselineskip'
 and the height is '\baselineskip').  This puts white text on a blue
 background.
@@ -7965,7 +11075,7 @@
      \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
 
    The '\fcolorbox' commands use the same parameters as '\fbox' (*note
-\fbox and \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
+\fbox & \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
 of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
 surrounding rule.  LaTeX's defaults are '0.4pt' and '3pt', respectively.
 
@@ -8032,16 +11142,16 @@
 commands of this chapter.  Two that use a programming language are
 Asymptote and MetaPost.  One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
 Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
-see their documentation.
+see their documentation on CTAN.
 
-22.1 Graphics package options
-=============================
+22.1 'graphics' package options
+===============================
 
 Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
 
      \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphics}
 
-   or
+or
 
      \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphicx}
 
@@ -8098,15 +11208,15 @@
      multiples, such as 1.23, in '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines.  This
      option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
 
-22.2 Graphics package configuration
-===================================
+22.2 'graphics' package configuration
+=====================================
 
 These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
 graphic.
 
    The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
-dependent.  In this document we cover Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
-those systems are typically configured.  For other situations consult
+dependent.  In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows,
+as those systems are typically configured.  For other situations consult
 the documentation in 'grfguide.pdf', or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
 distribution's documentation.
 
@@ -8150,9 +11260,9 @@
      ...
      \usepackage{lion.png}
 
-   for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the
-file name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and
-then '../pix/lion.png'.  This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
+for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the file
+name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and then
+'../pix/lion.png'.  This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
 command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
 '\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
 will not find it.  It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
@@ -8162,8 +11272,8 @@
 portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
 parameter 'TEXINPUTS'; see the documentation of your system.)
 
-   You can use '\graphicspath' in the preamble or in the document body.
-You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
+   You can use '\graphicspath' anywhere in the document.  You can use it
+more than once.  Show its value with
 '\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput at path}\makeatother'.
 
    The directories are taken with respect to the base file.  That is,
@@ -8191,24 +11301,25 @@
        ...
      \includegraphics{lion}   % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
 
-   Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
+Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
 extension list.  For each directory in the graphics path (*note
 \graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given.  If
 it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
 extensions then it reports '! LaTeX Error: File `'lion'' not found'.
 Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions.
 
-   Because Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
-file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms.  The Windows
-platform is not case sensitive.
+   Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the
+list of file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms.  The
+Windows platform is not case sensitive.
 
    You are not required to include '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions' in your
 document; the printer driver has a sensible default.  For example, the
-most recent 'pdftex.def' has the extension list
-''.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2''.
+most recent 'pdftex.def' has this extension list.
 
-   You can use this command in the preamble or in the document body.
-You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
+     .png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
+   You can use this command anywhere in the document.  You can use it
+more than once.  Show its value with
 '\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin at extensions}\makeatother'.
 
 22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
@@ -8231,7 +11342,7 @@
 
      \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
 
-   tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
 extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
 'filename.2', etc.
 
@@ -8322,13 +11433,13 @@
        \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
      \end{center}
 
-   will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf',
-centered and at its nominal size.  You can also give a path to the file,
-as with '\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'.  To specify a list of
-locations to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
+will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf', centered
+and at its nominal size.  You can also give a path to the file, as with
+'\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'.  To specify a list of locations
+to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
 
-   If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes, as
-with '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
+   If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes.  An
+example is '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
 
    The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
 graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot.  You can use FILENAME
@@ -8362,14 +11473,13 @@
        ...
      \begin{center}
        \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
-       \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix}  % if you want a caption
+       \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
      \end{center}
 
    This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
 text, with the two vertically centered.
 
-     \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begingroup
-                                     \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\parbox{\wd0}{\box0}\endgroup}
+     \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
        ...
      \begin{center}
        \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
@@ -8402,10 +11512,10 @@
        \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
      \end{center}
 
-   The options are read left-to-right.  So the first graphic above is
-made one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and
-then made one inch wide.  Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square,
-the two will end with different widths and heights.
+The options are read left-to-right.  So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide.  Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
 
    There are many options.  The primary ones are listed first.
 
@@ -8430,9 +11540,9 @@
      The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You
      can use the standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::), and
      also convenient are '\pageheight' and '\textheight' (*note Page
-     layout parameters::).  For instance,
+     layout parameters::).  For instance, the command
      '\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}' will make the
-     graphic be a quarter of the height of the text area.
+     graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
 
 'totalheight'
      The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
@@ -8441,22 +11551,24 @@
      height but a large depth.
 
 'keepaspectratio'
-     If set to 'true', or just specified as with
-     '\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}' and you give as
-     options both 'width' and 'height' (or 'totalheight'), then LaTeX
-     will make the graphic is as large as possible without distortion.
-     That is, LaTeX will ensure that neither is the graphic wider than
-     'width' nor taller than 'height' (or 'totalheight').
+     If set to 'true', or just specified as here
 
+          \includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}
+
+     and you give as options both 'width' and 'height' (or
+     'totalheight'), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
+     possible without distortion.  That is, LaTeX will ensure that
+     neither is the graphic wider than 'width' nor taller than 'height'
+     (or 'totalheight').
+
 'scale'
-     Factor by which to scale the graphic.  Specifying
-     '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}' makes the graphic twice its
-     nominal size.  This number may be any value; a number between 1
-     and 0 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect
-     it.
+     Factor by which to scale the graphic.  To make a graphic twice its
+     nominal size, enter '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}'.  This
+     number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+     graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
 
 'angle'
-     Rotate the picture.  The angle is taken in degrees and
+     Rotate the graphic.  The angle is taken in degrees and
      counterclockwise.  The graphic is rotated about its 'origin'; see
      that option.  For a complete description of how rotated material is
      typeset, *note \rotatebox::.
@@ -8465,9 +11577,9 @@
      The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.
      Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
      left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
-     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus,
+     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus, entering the command
      '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
-     upside down from the center, while
+     upside down about that picture's center, while the command
      '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
      picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character 'c'
      gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc', but gives the vertical
@@ -8495,11 +11607,14 @@
      also the 'viewport' option.
 
 'clip'
-     If set to 'true', or just specified as with
-     '\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}', then the graphic is cropped
-     to the bounding box.  You can get this effect by instead using the
-     starred form of the command, as '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.
+     If set to 'true', or just specified as here
 
+          \includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+
+     then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box.  This is the same
+     as using the starred form of the command,
+     '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.
+
 'page'
      Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file.  The default is
      'page=1'.
@@ -8521,21 +11636,24 @@
 
 'interpolate'
      Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.
-     Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as with
-     '\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}'.
+     Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as here.
 
+          \includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+
 'quiet'
      Do not write information to the log.  You can set it with
      'quiet=true' or just specified it with
      '\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}',
 
 'draft'
-     If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specified it with
-     '\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}', then the graphic will not
-     appear in the document, possibly saving color printer ink.
-     Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the correct size with the
-     filename printed in it.
+     If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specify it with
 
+          \includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+
+     then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving
+     color printer ink.  Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the
+     correct size with the filename printed in it.
+
    These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
 graphic files, which have a size specified with a line '%%BoundingBox'
 that appears in the file.  It has four values, giving the lower x
@@ -8559,18 +11677,22 @@
 
 'natwidth, natheight'
      An alternative for 'bb'.  Setting
-     '\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}' is
-     the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.
 
+          \includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+
+     is the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.
+
 'hiresbb'
      If set to 'true', or just specified as with
-     '\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}', then LaTeX will look for
-     '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of '%%BoundingBox' lines.  (The
-     'BoundingBox' lines use only natural numbers while the
-     'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use units equivalent to
-     TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.)  To override a prior setting of
-     'true', you can set it to 'false'.
 
+          \includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+
+     then LaTeX will look for '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of
+     '%%BoundingBox' lines.  (The 'BoundingBox' lines use only natural
+     numbers while the 'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use
+     units equivalent to TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.)  To override a
+     prior setting of 'true', you can set it to 'false'.
+
    These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
 choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension.  An example
 is that '\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}' will read
@@ -8590,7 +11712,9 @@
 
 'command'
      Specify a command to be applied to this file.  Only use this in
-     conjunction with the option 'type'.
+     conjunction with the option 'type'.  *Note Command line options::
+     for a discussion of enabling the '\write18' functionality to run
+     external commands.
 
 22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
 -------------------
@@ -8636,16 +11760,18 @@
 
 'origin'
      The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
-     Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
+     Possible value is any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
      left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
-     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus,
-     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
-     upside down from the center, while
-     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
-     picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character 'c'
-     gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives the vertical
-     center in 'lc' or 'rc'.)  The default is 'lB'.
+     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus, the first line here
 
+          \includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}
+          \includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}
+
+     will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second
+     will turn its picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The
+     character 'c' gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives
+     the vertical center in 'lc' or 'rc'.)  The default is 'lB'.
+
 'x, y'
      Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with '\rotatebox[x=TeX
      DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}' (*note Units of length::).  These
@@ -8676,11 +11802,14 @@
    If you do not specify the optional VERTICAL FACTOR then it defaults
 to the same value as the HORIZONTAL FACTOR.
 
-   You can use this command to resize a graphic, as with
-'\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}'.  If you use the 'graphicx'
-package then you can accomplish the same thing with optional arguments
-to '\includegraphics' (*note \includegraphics::).
+   You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
 
+     \scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+
+If you use the 'graphicx' package then you can accomplish the same thing
+with optional arguments to '\includegraphics' (*note
+\includegraphics::).
+
    The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
 Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
 I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
@@ -8723,34 +11852,31 @@
 23.1 Reserved characters
 ========================
 
-LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
-example, the percent sign '%' is for comments) so they are called
+LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes.  For
+example, the percent sign '%' is for comments.  They are called
 "reserved characters" or "special characters".
 
      # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
 
    If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
 body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
-put a backslash '\' in front of the character.  Thus, '\$1.23' will
-produce '$1.23' in your output.
+put a backslash '\' in front of the character.  Thus, typing '\$1.23'
+will produce '$1.23' in your output.
 
    As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
 use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
 receiving a tilde accent).  Similarly, to get a get a text body font
-circumflex use '\^{}'.  A text body font backslash results from
-'\textbackslash{}'.
+circumflex use '\^{}'.  To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
+enter '\textbackslash{}'.
 
-   To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
-'\verb!!', as below.
+   To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use '\verb!!'
+as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines).
 
      \begin{center}
        \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
        \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
      \end{center}
 
-   In that example the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the
-lines.
-
 23.2 Upper and lower case
 =========================
 
@@ -8812,17 +11938,18 @@
 
 LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
 running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
-available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package.
+available in OT1.  Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then you may
+need to load the 'textcomp' package.
 
 '\copyright'
 '\textcopyright'
-     The copyright symbol, (C).
+     (C) The copyright symbol.
 
 '\dag'
-     The dagger symbol (in text).
+     U+2020 The dagger symbol (in text).
 
 '\ddag'
-     The double dagger symbol (in text).
+     U+2021 The double dagger symbol (in text).
 
 '\LaTeX'
      The LaTeX logo.
@@ -8834,260 +11961,260 @@
 '\guillemotright (>>)'
 '\guilsinglleft (<)'
 '\guilsinglright (>)'
-     Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
-     <<, >>, <, >.
+     <<, >>, <, > Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
+     in French.
 
 '\ldots'
 '\dots'
 '\textellipsis'
-     An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '...'.  '\ldots' and
-     '\dots' also work in math mode.
+     ... An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '\ldots' and '\dots'
+     also work in math mode.
 
 '\lq'
-     Left (opening) quote: '.
+     ' Left (opening) quote.
 
 '\P'
 '\textparagraph'
-     Paragraph sign (pilcrow): U+00B6.
+     U+00B6 Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
 
 '\pounds'
 '\textsterling'
-     English pounds sterling: #.
+     # English pounds sterling.
 
 '\quotedblbase (,,)'
 '\quotesinglbase (,)'
-     Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: ,, and ,.
+     ,, and , Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
 
 '\rq'
-     Right (closing) quote: '.
+     ' Right (closing) quote.
 
 '\S'
-     \itemx \textsection Section sign: U+00A7.
+'\textsection'
+     U+00A7 Section sign.
 
 '\TeX'
      The TeX logo.
 
 '\textasciicircum'
-     ASCII circumflex: ^.
+     ^ ASCII circumflex.
 
 '\textasciitilde'
-     ASCII tilde: ~.
+     ~ ASCII tilde.
 
 '\textasteriskcentered'
-     Centered asterisk: *.
+     * Centered asterisk.
 
 '\textbackslash'
-     Backslash: \.
+     \ Backslash.
 
 '\textbar'
-     Vertical bar: |.
+     | Vertical bar.
 
 '\textbardbl'
-     Double vertical bar.
+     U+23F8 Double vertical bar.
 
 '\textbigcircle'
-     Big circle symbol.
+     U+25EF Big circle symbol.
 
 '\textbraceleft'
-     Left brace: {.
+     { Left brace.
 
 '\textbraceright'
-     Right brace: }.
+     } Right brace.
 
 '\textbullet'
-     Bullet: *.
+     * Bullet.
 
 '\textcircled{LETTER}'
-     LETTER in a circle, as in (R).
+     U+24B6 Circle around LETTER.
 
 '\textcompwordmark'
 '\textcapitalcompwordmark'
 '\textascendercompwordmark'
-     Composite word mark (invisible).  The '\textcapital...' form has
-     the cap height of the font, while the '\textascender...' form has
-     the ascender height.
+     Used to separate letters that would normally ligature.  For
+     example, 'f\textcompwordmark i' produces 'fi' without a ligature.
+     This is most useful in non-English languages.  The
+     '\textcapitalcompwordmark' form has the cap height of the font
+     while the '\textascendercompwordmark' form has the ascender height.
 
 '\textdagger'
-     Dagger: \dag.
+     U+2020 Dagger.
 
 '\textdaggerdbl'
-     Double dagger: \ddag.
+     U+2021 Double dagger.
 
 '\textdollar (or '\$')'
-     Dollar sign: $.
+     $ Dollar sign.
 
 '\textemdash (or '---')'
-     Em-dash: -- (for punctuation).
+     -- Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in 'The playoffs --- if you
+     are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- is more like a
+     sprint.').
 
 '\textendash (or '--')'
-     En-dash: - (for ranges).
+     - En-dash (used for ranges, as in 'See pages 12--14').
 
 '\texteuro'
-     The Euro symbol: Euro.
 
+     The Euro symbol: Euro.  For an alternative glyph design, try the
+     'eurosym' package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+     Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+
 '\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
-     Upside down exclamation point: !.
+     !  Upside down exclamation point.
 
 '\textgreater'
-     Greater than: >.
+     > Greater than symbol.
 
 '\textless'
-     Less than: <.
+     < Less than symbol.
 
 '\textleftarrow'
-     Left arrow.
+     U+2190 Left arrow.
 
 '\textordfeminine'
 '\textordmasculine'
-     Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o.
+     a, o Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
 
 '\textperiodcentered'
-     Centered period: U+00B7.
+     U+00B7 Centered period.
 
 '\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
-     Upside down question mark: ?.
+     ?  Upside down question mark.
 
 '\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
-     Double left quote: ".
+     " Double left quote.
 
 '\textquotedblright (or '''')'
-     Double right quote: ".
+     " Double right quote.
 
 '\textquoteleft (or '`')'
-     Single left quote: '.
+     ' Single left quote.
 
 '\textquoteright (or ''')'
-     Single right quote: '.
+     ' Single right quote.
 
 '\textquotesingle'
-     Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)
+     U+0027 Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)
 
 '\textquotestraightbase'
 '\textquotestraightdblbase'
      Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
 
 '\textregistered'
-     Registered symbol: (R).
+     (R) Registered symbol.
 
 '\textrightarrow'
-     Right arrow.
+     U+2192 Right arrow.
 
 '\textthreequartersemdash'
-     "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+     U+FE58 "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
 
 '\texttrademark'
-     Trademark symbol: U+2122.
+     U+2122 Trademark symbol.
 
 '\texttwelveudash'
-     "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+     U+FE58 "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
 
 '\textunderscore'
-     Underscore: _.
+     _ Underscore.
 
 '\textvisiblespace'
-     Visible space symbol.
+     U+2423 Visible space symbol.
 
 23.5 Accents
 ============
 
 LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
-through the 'babel' package and related support.  This section does not
-attempt to cover all that support.  It merely lists the core LaTeX
-commands for creating accented characters.
+through the 'babel' package and related support if you are using
+pdfLaTeX, or 'polyglossia' if you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX.  This
+section does not cover that support.  It only lists the core LaTeX
+commands for creating accented characters.  The '\capital...' commands
+shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital letters.
+These are not available with OT1.
 
-   The '\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with
-capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.
+   Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated
+with lowercase 'o'.
 
+   Note that '\i' produces a dotless i, and '\j' produces a dotless j.
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+
 '\"'
 '\capitaldieresis'
-     Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o".
+     o" Umlaut (dieresis).
 
 '\''
 '\capitalacute'
-     Produces an acute accent, as in o'.  In the 'tabbing' environment,
-     pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note
-     tabbing::).
+     o' Acute accent.
 
 '\.'
-     Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o..
+     o. Dot accent.
 
 '\='
 '\capitalmacron'
-     Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=.
+     o= Macron (overbar) accent.
 
 '\^'
 '\capitalcircumflex'
-     Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^.
+     o^ Circumflex (hat) accent.
 
 '\`'
 '\capitalgrave'
-     Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`.  In the
-     'tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin
-     (*note tabbing::).
+     o` Grave accent.
 
 '\~'
 '\capitaltilde'
-     Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.
+     n~ Tilde accent.
 
 '\b'
-     Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.  See also
-     '\underbar' hereinafter.
+     o_ Bar accent underneath.
 
+     Related to this, '\underbar{TEXT}' produces a bar under TEXT.  The
+     argument is always processed in LR mode (*note Modes::).  The bar
+     is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing
+     through descenders.  See also '\underline' in *note Math
+     miscellany::.
+
 '\c'
 '\capitalcedilla'
-     Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c,.
+     c, Cedilla accent underneath.
 
 '\d'
 '\capitaldotaccent'
-     Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o.
+     .o Dot accent underneath.
 
 '\H'
 '\capitalhungarumlaut'
-     Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in
-     o''.
+     o'' Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
 
-'\i'
-     Produces a dotless i, as in 'i'.
-
-'\j'
-     Produces a dotless j, as in 'j'.
-
 '\k'
 '\capitalogonek'
-     Produces a letter with ogonek, as in 'o;'.  Not available in the
-     OT1 encoding.
+     o; Ogonek.  Not available in the OT1 encoding.
 
 '\r'
 '\capitalring'
-     Produces a ring accent, as in 'o*'.
+     o* Ring accent.
 
 '\t'
 '\capitaltie'
 '\newtie'
 '\capitalnewtie'
-     Produces a tie-after accent, as in 'oo['.  The '\newtie' form is
-     centered in its box.
+     oo[ Tie-after accent.  The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
 
 '\u'
 '\capitalbreve'
-     Produces a breve accent, as in 'o('.
+     o( Breve accent.
 
-'\underbar'
-     Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
-     The argument is always processed in horizontal mode.  The bar is
-     always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
-     descenders.  See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.  See
-     also '\b' above.
-
 '\v'
 '\capitalcaron'
-     Produces a ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent, as in 'o<'.
+     o< Ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent.
 
 23.6 Additional Latin letters
 =============================
 
-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters (beyond A-Z)
-extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A-Z that
+extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
 English.
 
 '\aa'
@@ -9143,34 +12270,52 @@
 23.7 '\rule'
 ============
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
+     \rule{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
      \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
 
-   The '\rule' command produces "rules", that is, lines or rectangles.
-The arguments are:
+   Produce a "rule", a filled-in rectangle.
 
-RAISE
-     How high to raise the rule (optional).
+   This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
 
-WIDTH
-     The length of the rule (mandatory).
+     \newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
 
-THICKNESS
-     The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
+The 'amsthm' package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
 
+   The mandatory arguments give the horizontal WIDTH and vertical
+THICKNESS of the rectangle.  They are rigid lengths (*note Lengths::).
+The optional argument RAISE is also a rigid length, and tells LaTeX how
+much to raise the rule above the baseline, or lower it if the length is
+negative.
+
+   This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+
+     \noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+
+The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall.  This line
+thickness is common in LaTeX.
+
+   A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in
+the output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it.  *Note
+\strut:: for examples.
+
 23.8 '\today'
 =============
 
-The '\today' command produces today's date, in the format 'MONTH DD,
-YYYY'; for example, 'July 4, 1976'.  It uses the predefined counters
-'\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day \month \year::) to do this.
-It is not updated as the program runs.
+Synopsis:
 
-   Multilingual packages like 'babel' or classes like 'lettre', among
-others, will localize '\today'.  For example, the following will output
-'4 juillet 1976':
+     \today
 
+   Produce today's date in the format 'MONTH DD, YYYY'.  An example of a
+date in that format is 'July 4, 1976'.
+
+   Multilingual packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia', or classes
+such as 'lettre', will localize '\today'.  For example, the following
+will output '4 juillet 1976':
+
      \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
      \documentclass{minimal}
      \usepackage[french]{babel}
@@ -9178,93 +12323,338 @@
      \today
      \end{document}
 
-   The 'datetime' package, among others, can produce a wide variety of
-other date formats.
+'\today' uses the counters '\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day &
+\month & \year::).
 
+   A number of package on CTAN work with dates.  One is 'datetime'
+package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO
+standards.
+
+   The date is not updated as the LaTeX process runs, so in principle
+the date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+
 24 Splitting the input
 **********************
 
-A large document requires a lot of input.  Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones.  Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the "root file"; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run LaTeX.
+LaTeX lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.  This
+can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the document.
+It can also speed processing.
 
-   *Note filecontents::, for an environment that allows bundling an
-external file to be created with the main document.
+   Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+"root file", on which LaTeX compilation starts.  This shows such a file
+with five included files.
 
-24.1 '\include'
-===============
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \includeonly{  % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+       pref,
+       chap1,
+       chap2,
+       append,
+       bib
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     \frontmatter
+     \include{pref}
+     \mainmatter
+     \include{chap1}
+     \include{chap2}
+     \appendix
+     \include{append}
+     \backmatter
+     \include{bib}
+     \end{document}
 
+This will bring in material from 'pref.tex', 'chap1.tex', 'chap2.tex',
+'append.tex', and 'bib.tex'.  If you compile this file, and then comment
+out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1,' and
+compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first
+chapter.  Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to
+print.  However, the advantage of the '\includeonly' command is that
+LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+
+   *Note Larger book template:: for another example of '\includeonly'.
+
+24.1 '\endinput'
+================
+
 Synopsis:
 
-     \include{FILE}
+     \endinput
 
-   If no '\includeonly' command is present, the '\include' command
-executes '\clearpage' to start a new page (*note \clearpage::), then
-reads FILE, then does another '\clearpage'.
+   When you '\include{filename}', inside 'filename.tex' the material
+after '\endinput' will not be included.  This command is optional; if
+'filename.tex' has no '\endinput' then LaTeX will read all of the file.
 
-   Given an '\includeonly' command, the '\include' actions are only run
-if FILE is listed as an argument to '\includeonly'.  See *note
-\includeonly::.
+   For example, suppose that a document's root file has '\input{chap1}'
+and this is 'chap1.tex'.
 
-   The '\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another '\include' command.
+     \chapter{One}
+     This material will appear in the document.
+     \endinput
+     This will not appear.
 
-24.2 '\includeonly'
-===================
+   This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end
+of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during
+mailing.  It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize
+errors is to put '\endinput' halfway through the included file and see
+if the error disappears.  Now, knowing which half contains the error,
+moving '\endinput' to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location.  This process rapidly finds the offending line.
 
+   After reading '\endinput', LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
+line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an '\if...' with a '\fi'.
+
+24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
+================================
+
 Synopsis:
 
-     \includeonly{FILE1,FILE2,...}
+     \includeonly{  % in document preamble
+       ...
+       FILENAME,
+       ...
+       }
+       ...
+     \include{FILENAME}  % in document body
 
-   The '\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by
-subsequent '\include' commands.  The list of filenames is
-comma-separated.  Each element FILE1, FILE2, ... must exactly match a
-filename specified in a '\include' command for the selection to be
-effective.
+   Bring material from the external file 'FILENAME.tex' into a LaTeX
+document.
 
-   This command can only appear in the preamble.
+   The '\include' command does three things: it executes '\clearpage'
+(*note \clearpage & \cleardoublepage::), then it inputs the material
+from 'FILENAME.tex' into the document, and then it does another
+'\clearpage'.  This command can only appear in the document body.  The
+'\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX under
+subsequent '\include' commands.  Its list of filenames is
+comma-separated, and it can only appear in the preamble.
 
+   This example root document, 'constitution.tex', brings in three
+files, 'preamble.tex', 'articles.tex', and 'amendments.tex'.
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \includeonly{
+       preamble,
+       articles,
+       amendments
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     \include{preamble}
+     \include{articles}
+     \include{amendments}
+     \end{document}
+
+The file 'preamble.tex' contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from 'consitution.tex' and put it in a separate
+file just for editing convenience.
+
+     \chapter{Preamble}
+     We the People of the United States,
+     in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+
+Running LaTeX on 'constitution.tex' makes the material from the three
+files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
+'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.tex'.  These contain
+information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
+references::).  If you now comment out '\includeonly''s lines with
+'preamble' and 'amendments' and run LaTeX again then the resulting
+document shows only the material from 'articles.tex', not the material
+from 'preamble.tex' or 'amendments.tex'.  Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+
+   If the document preamble does not have '\includeonly' then LaTeX will
+include all the files you call for with '\include' commands.
+
+   The '\include' command makes a new page.  To avoid that, see *note
+\input:: (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).
+
+   *Note Larger book template:: for another example using '\include' and
+'\includeonly'.  That example also uses '\input' for some material that
+will not necessarily start on a new page.
+
+   File names can involve paths.
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \includeonly{
+       chapters/chap1,
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     \include{chapters/chap1}
+     \end{document}
+
+   To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names.  The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \includeonly{
+       "amo\space amas\space amat"
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     \include{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+     \end{document}
+
+   and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \includeonly{
+       {"amo amas amat"}
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     \include{{"amo amas amat"}}
+     \end{document}
+
+   You cannot use '\include' inside a file that is being included or you
+get 'LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.' The '\include' command
+cannot appear in the document preamble; you will get 'LaTeX Error:
+Missing \begin{document}'.
+
+   If a file that you '\include' does not exist, for instance if you
+'\include{athiesm}' but you meant '\include{atheism}', then LaTeX does
+not give you an error but will warn you 'No file athiesm.tex.' (It will
+also create 'athiesm.aux'.)
+
+   If you '\include' the root file in itself then you first get 'LaTeX
+Error: Can be used only in preamble.' Later runs get 'TeX capacity
+exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]'.  To fix this, you must remove
+the inclusion '\include{root}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
+rerun LaTeX.
+
 24.3 '\input'
 =============
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \input{FILE}
+     \input{FILENAME}
 
-   The '\input' command causes the specified FILE to be read and
-processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at
-that point.
+   LaTeX processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file.  For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see *note
+\include & \includeonly::.
 
-   If FILE does not end in '.tex' (e.g., 'foo' or 'foo.bar'), it is
-first tried with that extension ('foo.tex' or 'foo.bar.tex').  If that
-is not found, the original FILE is tried ('foo' or 'foo.bar').
+   If FILENAME does not end in '.tex' then LaTeX first tries the
+filename with that extension; this is the usual case.  If FILENAME ends
+with '.tex' then LaTeX looks for the filename as it is.
 
+   For example, this
+
+     \input{macros}
+
+will cause LaTeX to first look for 'macros.tex'.  If it finds that file
+then it processes its contents as thought they had been copy-pasted in.
+If there is no file of the name 'macros.tex' then LaTeX tries the name
+'macros', without an extension.  (This may vary by distribution.)
+
+   To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names.  The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+     \input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+
+   and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+     \input{{"amo amas amat"}}
+
 25 Front/back matter
 ********************
 
-25.1 Tables of contents
-=======================
+25.1 Table of contents etc.
+===========================
 
-A table of contents is produced with the '\tableofcontents' command.
-You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
-LaTeX does the rest for you.  A previous run must have generated a
-'.toc' file.
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-   The '\tableofcontents' command produces a heading, but it does not
-automatically start a new page.  If you want a new page after the table
-of contents, write a '\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents'
-command.
+     \tableofcontents
+     \listoffigures
+     \listoftables
 
-   The analogous commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a
-list of figures and a list of tables (from '.lof' and '.lot' files),
-respectively.  Everything works exactly the same as for the table of
+   Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables.
+Put the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go.  You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands '\chapter', etc.
+
+   This example illustrates the first command, '\tableofcontents'.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
+
+     \documentclass{book}
+     % \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+     \begin{document}
+     \tableofcontents\newpage
+       ...
+     \chapter{...}
+       ...
+     \section{...}
+       ...
+     \subsection{...}
+       ...
+     \end{document}
+
+Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the '\section'
+command has level 1.  *Note Sectioning:: for level numbers of the
+sectioning units.  For more on the 'tocdepth' *note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::.
+
+   Another example of the use of '\tableofcontents' is in *note Larger
+book template::.
+
+   If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+'\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents' command, as above.
+
+   To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named 'ROOT-FILE.toc' (*note Splitting the input::).  For
+example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
+
+     \documentclass{article}
+     \begin{document}
+     \tableofcontents\newpage
+     \section{First section}
+     \subsection{First subsection}
+       ...
+
+writes the following line to 'test.toc'.
+
+     \contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+     \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+
+The 'section' or 'subsection' is the sectioning unit.  The hook
+'\numberline' lets you to change how the information appears in the
+table of contents.  Of its two arguments, '1' or '1.1' is the sectioning
+unit number and 'First section' or 'First subsection' is the title.
+Finally, '2' is the page number on which the sectioning units start.
+
+   One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to
+get the contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store
+the information and once to get it.  In particular, the first time that
+you run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be
+empty except for its 'Contents' header.  Just run it again.
+
+   The commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a list of
+figures and a list of tables.  They work the same way as the contents
+commands; for instance, these work with information stored in '.lof' and
+'.lot' files.
+
+   To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+
+     \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+     \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+     \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+
+Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
+change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+
+   CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables.  One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is 'tocloft'.  And, 'tocbibbind' will
+automatically add the bibliography, index, etc.  to the table of
 contents.
 
-   The command '\nofiles' overrides these commands, and _prevents_ any
-of these lists from being generated.
-
 25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
 -------------------------
 
@@ -9272,110 +12662,605 @@
 
      \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}
 
-   The '\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list or
-table where:
+   Add an entry to the file specified by EXT.  Usually EXT is one of
+'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the list of figures, or 'lot'
+for the list of tables.
 
+   The following will result in an 'Appendices' line in the table of
+contents.
+
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+
+   The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.EXT'.  It writes that information as the text of the command
+'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
+counter 'UNIT'.  The most common case is the table of contents and there
+NUM is the page number of the first page of UNIT.
+
+   This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.,
+and also by '\caption' inside a float environment.  But it is also used
+by authors.  For example, in a book to have the preface unnumbered, you
+may use the starred '\chapter*'.  But that does not put in table of
+contents information, so you can enter it manually, as here.
+
+     \chapter*{Preface}
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+
+In the '.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note the page number '3'.
+
+   All of the arguments for '\addcontentsline' are required.
+
 EXT
-     The filename extension of the file on which information is to be
-     written, typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list
-     of figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).
+     Typically one of the strings 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof'
+     for the list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables.  The
+     filename extension of the information file.
 
 UNIT
-     The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
-     following, matching the value of the EXT argument:
+     A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument:
 
      'toc'
-          The name of the sectional unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section',
-          'subsection', 'subsubsection'.
+          For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional
+          unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section', 'subsection', etc.
+
      'lof'
           For the list of figures: 'figure'.
+
      'lot'
           For the list of tables: 'table'.
 
 TEXT
-     The text of the entry.
+     The text of the entry.  You must '\protect' any commands that are
+     fragile (*note \protect::).
 
-   What is written to the '.EXT' file is the command
-'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
-counter 'UNIT'.
+   The '\addcontentsline' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::).  If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution is to
+move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
 
+   If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as here
+
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+
 25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
 -----------------------
 
-The '\addtocontents'{EXT}{TEXT} command adds text (or formatting
-commands) directly to the '.EXT' file that generates the table of
-contents or lists of figures or tables.
+Synopsis:
 
+     \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}
+
+   Add TEXT, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the
+auxiliary file with extension EXT.  This is most commonly used for the
+table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also applies
+to the list of figures and list of tables.
+
+   This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+'Contents' header.
+
+     \tableofcontents\newpage
+     \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+
+   The '\addtocontents' command has two arguments.  Both are required.
+
 EXT
-     The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
-     typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list of
-     figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).
+     Typically one of: 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the
+     list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables.  The extension of
+     the file holding the information.
 
 TEXT
-     The text to be written.
+     The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
 
-25.2 Glossaries
-===============
+   The sectioning commands such as '\chapter' use the '\addcontentsline'
+command to store information.  This command creates lines in the '.toc'
+auxiliary file containing the '\contentsline' command (*note
+\addcontentsline::).  In contrast, the command '\addtocontents' puts
+material directly in that file.
 
-The command '\makeglossary' enables creating glossaries.
+   The '\addtocontents' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::).  If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the table
+of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution is to move
+'\addtocontents' into the file being included.
 
-   The command '\glossary{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an
-auxiliary file with the '.glo' extension.
+25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+-----------------
 
-   Specifically, what gets written is the command
-'\glossaryentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current '\thepage'
-value.
+Synopsis:
 
-   The 'glossary' package on CTAN provides support for fancier
-glossaries.
+     \nofiles
 
-25.3 Indexes
-============
-
-The command '\makeindex' enables creating indexes.  Put this in the
+   Prevent LaTeX from writing any auxiliary files.  The only output will
+be the '.log' and '.pdf' (or '.dvi') files.  This command must go in the
 preamble.
 
-   The command '\index{TEXT}' writes an index entry for TEXT to an
-auxiliary file named with the '.idx' extension.
+   Because of the '\nofiles' command this example will not produce a
+'.toc' file.
 
-   Specifically, what gets written is the command
-'\indexentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current '\thepage'
-value.
+     \documentclass{book}
+     \nofiles
+     \begin{document}
+     \tableofcontents\newpage
+     \chapter{...}
+       ...
 
-   To generate a index entry for 'bar' that says 'See foo', use a
-vertical bar: '\index{bar|see{foo}}'.  Use 'seealso' instead of 'see' to
-make a 'See also' entry.
+LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert the
+'\nofiles' command after you have run the file and gotten a '.toc' then
+the table of contents page will continue to show the old information.
 
-   The text 'See' is defined by the macro '\seename', and 'See also' by
-the macro '\alsoname'.  These can be redefined for other languages.
+25.2 Indexes
+============
 
-   The generated '.idx' file is then sorted with an external command,
-usually either 'makeindex' (<http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex>)
-or (the multi-lingual) 'xindy' (<http://xindy.sourceforge.net>).  This
-results in a '.ind' file, which can then be read to typeset the index.
+This document has an index.
 
-   The index is usually generated with the '\printindex' command.  This
-is defined in the 'makeidx' package, so '\usepackage{makeidx}' needs to
-be in the preamble.
+     \documentclass{article}
+     \usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+       ...
+     \begin{document}
+       ...
+     Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+     a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+     is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+       ...
+     \printindex
+       ...
 
-   The rubber length '\indexspace' is inserted before each new letter in
-the printed index; its default value is '10pt plus5pt minus3pt'.
+The '\usepackage{makeidx}' and '\makeindex' in the preamble bring in the
+relevant commands.
 
-   The 'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the
-margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in preparing
-the index.
+   Producing an index is a three stage process.  First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
+\index::).  When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information to
+an auxiliary file 'ROOT-NAME.idx'.  Next, to alphabetize and to do other
+manipulations you run an external command, typically 'makeindex' or
+'xindy' (*note makeindex::).  These output a file 'ROOT-NAME.ind'.
+Finally, you bring the information back into your document and typeset
+it with the '\printindex' command (*note \printindex::).
 
-   The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes.  See also the TeX
-FAQ entry on this topic,
+   There are many packages that apply to indexing commands.  The
+'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on
+the page where the entry appears.  This can help in preparing the index.
+The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes.  See also the TeX FAQ
+entry on this topic,
 <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
 
+25.2.1 '\index'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \index{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}
+
+   Declare an entry in the index.  This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+   For example, as described in *note Indexes::, one way to get an index
+from what's below is to compile the document with 'pdflatex test', then
+process the index entries with 'makeindex test', and then compile again
+with 'pdflatex test'.
+
+     W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+       ...
+     Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+       ...
+     rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+
+All three index entries will get a page number, such as 'Ackermann, 22'.
+LaTeX will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the line
+below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.  Three
+levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries.  (If you add
+'\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}' then 'makeindex'
+says 'Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
+rejected)' and nothing appears in the index).
+
+   If you enter a second '\index' with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
+you will get a single index entry with two page numbers (unless they
+happen to fall on the same page).  Thus, adding 'as for
+Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}' later in the same document as above will
+give an index entry like 'Ackermann, 22, 151'.  Also, you can enter the
+index entries in any order, so for instance '\index{Ackermann!function}'
+could come before '\index{Ackermann}'.
+
+   Get a page range in the output, like 'Hilbert, 23--27', as here.
+
+     W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+       ...
+     D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+       ...
+     disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+
+If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+
+   If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+'\index{Jones!program}' and '\index{Jones!results}', then the output is
+the item 'Jones' with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
+like 'program, 50' and 'results, 51'.
+
+   Generate a index entry that says 'See' by using a vertical bar
+character: '\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}'.  You
+can instead get 'See also' with 'seealso'.  (The text 'See' is defined
+by '\seename', and 'See also' by '\alsoname'.  You can redefine these
+either by using an internationalization package such as 'babel' or
+'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}'.)
+
+   The 'See' feature is part of a more general functionality.  After the
+vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+'\index{group|textit}' (note the missing backslash on the '\textit'
+command) and the system will apply that command to the page number, here
+giving something like '\textit{7}'.  You can define your own one-input
+commands, such as '\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}' and
+then '\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}' will give a blue page
+number (*note Color::).  Another, less practical, example is this,
+
+     \newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+       ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+
+which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+
+   The two functions just described combine, as here
+
+     \index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+       ...
+     \index{Ackermann!function|)}
+
+which outputs an index entry like 'function, 23--27' where the page
+number range is in blue.
+
+   Consider an index entry such as 'U+03B1-ring'.  Entering it as
+'$\alpha$-ring' will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
+sign.  You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+'\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}'.  If you specify an entry with an
+at-sign separating two strings, 'POS at TEXT', then POS gives the
+alphabetical position of the entry while TEXT produces the text of the
+entry.  Another example is that '\index{Saint Michael's College at SMC}'
+produces an index entry 'SMC' alphabetized into a different location
+than its spelling would naturally give it.
+
+   To put a '!', or '@', or '|' character in an index entry, preceding
+it with a double quote, '"'.  (The double quote gets deleted before
+alphabetization.)
+
+   A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond
+that provided by 'makeidx'.  One is 'index', which allows for multiple
+indices and contains a command '\index*{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}' that prints
+the INDEX-ENTRY-STRING as well as indexing it.
+
+   The '\index' command writes the indexing information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.idx' file.  Specifically, it writes text of the command
+'\indexentry{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}{PAGE-NUM}', where where PAGE-NUM is the
+value of the '\thepage' counter.  On occasion, when the '\printindex'
+command is confused, you have to delete this file to start with a fresh
+slate.
+
+   If you omit the closing brace of an '\index' command then you get a
+message like this.
+
+     Runaway argument?  {Ackermann!function
+     !  Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+
+25.2.2 'makeindex'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     makeindex FILENAME
+     makeindex -s STYLE-FILE FILENAME
+     makeindex OPTIONS FILENAME0 ...
+
+   Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary
+file FILENAME.  This is a command line program.  It takes one or more
+raw index files, 'FILENAME.idx' files, and produces the actual index
+file, the 'FILENAME.ind' file that is input by '\printindex' (*note
+\printindex::).
+
+   The first form of the command suffices for many uses.  The second
+allows you to format the index by using an "index style file", a '.isty'
+file.  The third form is the most general; see the full documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+   This is a simple '.isty' file.
+
+     % book.isty
+     %   $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+     % creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+     preamble
+     "\\pagestyle{empty}
+     \\small
+     \\begin{theindex}
+     \\thispagestyle{empty}"
+
+     postamble
+     "\n
+     \\end{theindex}"
+
+   The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in STYLE-FILE.  For a full list see the documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+   A style file consists of a list of pairs: SPECIFIER and ATTRIBUTE.
+These can appear in the file in any order.  All of the ATTRIBUTES are
+strings, except where noted.  Strings are surrounded with double quotes,
+'"', and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters.  The '\n' is
+for a newline and '\t' is for a tab.  Backslashes are escaped with
+another backslash, '\\'.  If a line begins with a percent sign, '%',
+then it is a comment.
+
+'preamble'
+     Preamble of the output file.  Defines the context in which the
+     index is formatted.  Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'postamble'
+     Postamble of the output file.  Default: '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'group_skip'
+     Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
+     for entries starting with 'a', etc.  This specifier gives what is
+     inserted when a new group begins.  Default: '"\n\n \\indexspace\n"'
+     ('\indexspace' is a rubber length with default value '10pt plus5pt
+     minus3pt').
+
+'lethead_flag'
+     An integer.  It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
+     If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than 'group_skip'
+     nothing will be inserted before the group.  If it is is positive
+     then at a new letter the 'lethead_prefix' and 'lethead_suffix' will
+     be inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them.  If it is
+     negative then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.
+     The default is 0.
+
+'lethead_prefix'
+     If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the
+     prefix inserted before the new letter header.  Default: '""'
+
+'lethead_suffix'
+     If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+     inserted after the new letter header.  Default: '""'.
+
+'item_0'
+     What is put between two level 0 items.  Default: '"\n \\item "'.
+
+'item_1'
+     Put between two level 1 items.  Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_2'
+     put between two level 2 items.  Default: '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_01'
+     What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item.  Default:
+     '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_x1'
+     What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case
+     that the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
+     '\index{aaa|see{bbb}}').  Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_12'
+     What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item.  Default:
+     '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_x2'
+     What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
+     level 1 item doesn't have page numbers.  Default: '"\n \\subsubitem
+     "'.
+
+'delim_0'
+     Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page number.
+     Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_1'
+     Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page number.
+     Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_2'
+     Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number.
+     Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_n'
+     Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any level).
+     Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_r'
+     What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a
+     range.  Default: '"--"'.
+
+'line_max'
+     An integer.  Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
+     beyond which the line wraps.  Default: '72'.
+
+'indent_space'
+     What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line.  Default:
+     '"\t\t"'.
+
+'indent_length'
+     A number.  The length of the wrapped line indentation.  The default
+     'indent_space' is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+     default here is '16'.
+
+'page_precedence'
+     A document may have pages numbered in different ways.  For example,
+     a book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman
+     while main matter pages are in arabic.  This string specifies the
+     order in which they will appear in the index.  The 'makeindex'
+     command supports five different types of numerals: lowercase roman
+     'r', and numeric or arabic 'n', and lowercase alphabetic 'a', and
+     uppercase roman 'R', and uppercase alphabetic 'A'.  Default:
+     '"rnaRA"'.
+
+   There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
+does.  One is 'xindy', which does internationalization and can process
+indexes for documents marked up using LaTeX and a number of other
+languages.  It is is highly configurable, both in markup terms and in
+terms of the collating order of the text.  See the documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+25.2.3 '\printindex'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \printindex
+
+   Place the index into the output.
+
+   To get an index you must first include
+'\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex' in the document preamble and compile
+the document, then run the system command 'makeindex', and then compile
+the document again.  *Note Indexes:: for further discussion and an
+example of the use of '\printindex'.
+
+25.3 Glossaries
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+     \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+       ...
+     \newglossaryentry{LABEL}{SETTINGS}
+       ...
+     \gls{LABEL}.
+       ...
+     \printglossaries
+
+   The 'glossaries' package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+
+   To get the output from this example, compile the document (for
+instance with 'pdflatex filename'), then run the command line command
+'makeglossaries filename', and then compile the document again.
+
+     \documentclass{...}
+     \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+     \newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+       name={Turing machine},
+       description={A model of a machine that computes.  The model is simple
+                    but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+                    It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+       }
+     \begin{document}
+     Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.
+       ...
+     \printglossaries
+     \end{document}
+
+That gives two things.  In the main text it outputs '... definition of a
+Turing machine'.  In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+'Glossary' there appears a description list.  In boldface it says
+'Turing machine' and the rest of the item says in normal type 'A model
+of a machine ... Computer Science'.
+
+   The command '\makeglossary' opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, 'ROOT-FILE.glo'.  Put the '\printglossaries' command
+where you want the glossaries to appear in your document.
+
+   The 'glossaries' package is very powerful.  For instance, besides the
+commands '\newglossaryentry' and '\gls', there are similar commands for
+a list of acronyms.  See the package documentations on CTAN.
+
+25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \newglossaryentry{LABEL}
+     {
+       name={NAME},
+       description={DESCRIPTION},
+       OTHER OPTIONS, ...
+     }
+
+   or
+
+     \longnewglossaryentry{LABEL}
+     {
+       name={NAME},
+       OTHER OPTIONS ...,
+     }
+     {DESCRIPTION}
+
+   Declare a new entry for a glossary.  The LABEL must be unique for the
+document.  The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+'KEY=VALUE'.
+
+   This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers U+211D in
+the glossary.
+
+     \newglossaryentry{R}
+     {
+       name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},
+       description={the real numbers},
+     }
+
+   Use the second command form if the DESCRIPTION spans more than one
+paragraph.
+
+   For a full list of KEYs see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+
+'name'
+     (Required.)  The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+
+'description'
+     (Required.)  The description that will appear in the glossary.  If
+     this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second
+     command form given in the synopsis.
+
+'plural'
+     The plural form of NAME.  Refer to the plural form using '\glspl'
+     or '\Glspl' (*note \gls::).
+
+'sort'
+     How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary
+     holds.
+
+'symbol'
+     A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+
+25.3.2 '\gls'
+-------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+     \gls{LABEL}
+     \glspl{LABEL}
+     \Gls{LABEL}
+     \Glspl{LABEL}
+
+   Refer to a glossary entry.  The entries are declared with
+'\newglossaryentry' (*note \newglossaryentry::).
+
+   This
+
+     \newglossaryentry{N}{%
+       name={the natural numbers},
+       description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+       symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+       }
+       ...
+     Consider \gls{N}.
+
+gives the output 'Consider the natural numbers'.
+
+   The second command form '\glspl{LABEL}' produces the plural of NAME
+(by default it tries adding an 's').  The third form capitalizes the
+first letter of NAME, as does the fourth form, which also takes the
+plural.
+
 26 Letters
 **********
 
 Synopsis:
 
      \documentclass{letter}
-     \address{SENDER ADDRESS}
+     \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}   % return address
      \signature{SENDER NAME}
      \begin{document}
      \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
@@ -9383,18 +13268,17 @@
        LETTER BODY
      \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
      \end{letter}
-     ...  more letters ...
+        ...
      \end{document}
 
    Produce one or more letters.
 
    Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
 RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
-backslash ('\\').  For example, you might have:
+backslash, ('\\').  For example, you might have:
 
-      \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\
-           2345 Princess St. \\
-           Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+      \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+                     l'h\^otel Sagonne}
         ...
       \end{letter}
 
@@ -9406,7 +13290,7 @@
 with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
 separated by a double backslash ('\\').  LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
 under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
-hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
+hand-written signature.
 
    Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
 command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'.  The LETTER BODY text is
@@ -9420,13 +13304,13 @@
 the Boss's Boss}'.  There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
 enclosures.  And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
 
-   LaTeX's default is to indent the signature and the '\closing' above
-it by a length of '\longindentation'.  By default this is
-'0.5\textwidth'.  To make them flush left, put
-'\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your preamble.
+   LaTeX's default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of '\longindentation'.  By default this is '0.5\textwidth'.
+To make them flush left, put '\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your
+preamble.
 
    To set a fixed date use something like
-'\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}'.  If put in your preamble then it
+'\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}'.  If put in your preamble then it
 will apply to all the letters.
 
    This example shows only one 'letter' environment.  The three lines
@@ -9455,19 +13339,18 @@
 
      \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}
 
-   Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
+   Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
 envelope.  Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
-backslash '\\'.
+backslash, '\\'.
 
    Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
 put in the preamble.  However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
 individual 'letter' environment.
 
-   This command is optional: without the '\address' declaration the
-letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
-pre-printed letterhead paper.  (*Note Overview::, for details on your
-local implementation.)  With the '\address' declaration, it is formatted
-as a personal letter.
+   This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper.  If you do use the '\address' declaration then it is
+formatted as a personal letter.
 
    Here is an example.
 
@@ -9479,13 +13362,13 @@
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \cc{FIRST NAME \\
+     \cc{NAME0 \\
           ... }
 
    Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
 This command is optional.  If it appears then typically it comes after
-'\closing'.  Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\', as
-in:
+'\closing'.  Put the names on different lines by separating them with a
+double backslash, '\\', as in:
 
      \cc{President \\
          Vice President}
@@ -9497,8 +13380,9 @@
 
      \closing{TEXT}
 
-   Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature,
-there is a '\closing' (although this command is optional).  For example,
+   Produce the letter's closing.  This is optional, but usual.  It
+appears at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature.  For
+example:
 
      \closing{Regards,}
 
@@ -9512,10 +13396,10 @@
 
    Produce a list of things included with the letter.  This command is
 optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'.
 
      \encl{License \\
-            Passport }
+           Passport}
 
 26.5 '\location'
 ================
@@ -9524,31 +13408,66 @@
 
      \location{TEXT}
 
-   The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the each page.  It only
-appears if the page style is 'firstpage'.
+   The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the page.  It only appears
+if the page style is 'firstpage'.
 
 26.6 '\makelabels'
 ==================
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \makelabels
+     \makelabels   % in preamble
 
-   Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one
-for each letter.  This sheet will be output before the letters, with the
-idea that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels.  This command
-goes in the preamble.
+   Optional, for a document that contains 'letter' environments.  If you
+just put '\makelabels' in the preamble then at the end of the document
+you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one for each
+letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off address
+labels.
 
    Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
-'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' in the preamble.  The command
-'\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of the
-page onto which the labels are printed.  The command '\mlabel{SENDER
-ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or one, if you
-choose to ignore the SENDER ADDRESS).  The SENDER ADDRESS is the value
-returned by the macro '\returnaddress' while RECIPIENT ADDRESS is the
-value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment.  By default
-'\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the SENDER ADDRESS.
+'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' (and perhaps '\name') in the preamble.
+The command '\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns,
+etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.  The command
+'\mlabel{RETURN ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or
+one, if you choose to ignore the RETURN ADDRESS) for each letter
+environment.  The first argument, RETURN ADDRESS, is the value returned
+by the macro '\returnaddress'.  The second argument, RECIPIENT ADDRESS,
+is the value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment.  By
+default '\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the RETURN ADDRESS,
+causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
 
+   This illustrates customization.  Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+
+     \documentclass{letter}
+     \renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+                                    Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+     \newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+     \let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+     \def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+     \makelabels
+       ...
+     \begin{document}
+     \begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+                    112 Mercer Street \\
+                    Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+       ...
+     \end{letter}
+     \begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\
+                    145 Linden Lane \\
+                    Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+       ...
+     \end{letter}
+     \end{document}
+
+The first column contains the return address twice.  The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+
+   The package 'envlab' makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided.  The preamble lines
+'\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}' and '\makelabels' are all that
+you need to print envelopes.
+
 26.7 '\name'
 ============
 
@@ -9556,19 +13475,18 @@
 
      \name{NAME}
 
-   Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
-return address.
+   Optional.  Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
 
 26.8 '\opening'
 ===============
 
 Synopsis:
 
-     \opening{TEXT}
+     \opening{SALUTATION}
 
-   This command is required.  It starts a letter, following the
-'\begin{letter}{...}'.  The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
-starts your letter.  For instance:
+   Required.  Follows the '\begin{letter}{...}'.  The argument
+SALUTATION is mandatory.  For instance:
 
      \opening{Dear John:}
 
@@ -9595,24 +13513,30 @@
    The sender's name.  This command is optional, although its inclusion
 is usual.
 
-   The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
-and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written signature.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.  For example:
+   The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the
+closing.  LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten signature.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'.  For example:
 
      \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
                 White House}
 
    LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
-to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times 0.7em.
+to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times
+'\medskipamount' (where '\medskipamount' is equal to a '\parskip', which
+in turn is defined by default here to 0.7em).
 
    This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
 in the document.  To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
 'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
 
-   You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
-'\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ My
-name}' (this requires writing '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble).
+   You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
 
+     \signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+                  My name}
+
+For this you must put '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble (*note
+Graphics::).
+
 26.11 '\telephone'
 ==================
 
@@ -9628,57 +13552,292 @@
 27 Terminal input/output
 ************************
 
-27.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
-========================
+27.1 '\typein'
+==============
 
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
 
-     \typein[\CMD]{MSG}
+     \typein{PROMPT-MSG}
+     \typein[CMD]{PROMPT-MSG}
 
-   '\typein' prints MSG on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and
-wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return.  If the
-optional '\CMD' argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if
-it had been included in the input file in place of the '\typein'
-command.  If the '\CMD' argument is present, it must be a command name.
-This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
+   Print PROMPT-MSG on the terminal and cause LaTeX to stop and wait for
+you to type a line of input.  This line of input ends when you hit the
+return key.
 
-27.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
-====================
+   For example, this
 
+     As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+
+coupled with this command line interaction
+
+     Enter student name:
+
+     \@typein=Aphra Behn
+
+gives the output '... never forget Aphra Behn'.
+
+   The first command version, '\typein{PROMPT-MSG}', causes the input
+you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file
+in place of the '\typein' command.
+
+   In the second command version the optional argument 'CMD' argument
+must be a command name -- it must begin with a backslash, \.  This
+command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed.  For example, this
+
+     \typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+     \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+gives this output on the command line,
+
+     Enter student name:
+
+     \student=John Dee
+     Recommendation for John Dee.
+
+where the user has entered 'John Dee.'
+
+27.2 '\typeout'
+===============
+
 Synopsis:
 
      \typeout{MSG}
 
-   Prints 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.  Commands in
-'msg' that are defined with '\newcommand' or '\renewcommand' (among
-others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+   Print 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.
 
+   This
+
+     \newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+     \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+outputs 'Recommendation for John Dee'.  Like what happens here with
+'\student', commands that are defined with '\newcommand' or
+'\renewcommand' (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
+being printed.
+
    LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'.  A '\space'
-command in 'msg' causes a single space to be printed, independent of
-surrounding spaces.  A '^^J' in 'msg' prints a newline.
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'.  As above, use
+the command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+spaces.  Use '^^J' to get a newline.  Get a percent character with
+'\csname @percentchar\endcsname'.
 
+   This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+
+     \newlength{\jhlength}
+     \setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+     \typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+
+produces on the command line 'The length is 5.0pt'.
+
 28 Command line
 ***************
 
-The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
-uses '.tex' as a default file extension.  If you omit the input file
-entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal.  You can also specify
-arbitrary LaTeX input by starting with a backslash.  For example, this
-processes 'foo.tex' without pausing after every error:
+Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
 
-     latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+     pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT
 
-   With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can
-also be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with '-' or '--'.  For
-a list of those options, try 'latex --help'.
+   Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT.  In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use
+'xelatex', or 'lualatex', or 'dviluatex', or 'latex'.
 
-   If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a '*'
-prompt, it is waiting for input.  You can type '\stop' (and return) and
-it will prematurely end the document.
+   For example, this will run LaTeX on the file 'thesis.tex', creating
+the output 'thesis.pdf'.
 
-   *Note TeX engines::, for other system commands invoking LaTeX.
+     pdflatex thesis
 
+Note that '.tex' is the default file extension.
+
+   pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
+LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::).  They are completely backward compatible.
+But the original program had a custom output format, DVI, while the
+newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows them to take
+advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks, support for
+modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous viewing
+programs.  In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or 'lualatex'
+then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern
+features.  If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will get DVI.
+The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
+
+   *Note Command line options::, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options.  As to ARGUMENT, the usual case is that it does
+not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name of a
+file and it compiles that file.  If ARGUMENT begins with a backslash
+then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX input, which can be
+used for special effects (*note Command line input::).
+
+   If you gave no arguments or options then 'pdflatex' prompts for input
+from the terminal.  You can escape from this by entering '<control>-D'.
+
+   If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it.  *Note Recovering from errors:: for an outline of
+what to do.
+
+28.1 Command line options
+=========================
+
+These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring.  For a full list, try running 'latex --help' from the command
+line.
+
+   With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with '-' or '--'.  This is the case for both TeX Live
+(and MacTeX) and MiKTeX.  We will use both conventions interchangeably.
+
+'-version'
+     Show the current version, like 'pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+     Live 2015/Debian)' along with a small amount of additional
+     information, and exit.
+
+'-help'
+     Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+
+'-interaction=MODE'
+     TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+     'batchmode', 'nonstopmode', 'scrollmode', 'errorstopmode'.  In
+     "errorstop mode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks
+     for user intervention.  In "batch mode" it prints nothing on the
+     terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit '<return>' at
+     every error, and missing files cause the job to abort.  In "nonstop
+     mode", diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch
+     mode there is no user interaction.  In "scroll mode", TeX only
+     stops for missing files or keyboard input.
+
+     For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
+
+          pdflatex -interaction=batchmode FILENAME
+
+     eliminates most terminal output.
+
+'-jobname=STRING'
+     Set the value of TeX's 'jobname' to the string.  The log file and
+     output file will then be named 'STRING.log' and 'STRING.pdf'.
+
+     When you run 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT', if ARGUMENT does not
+     start with a backslash then TeX considers it the name of a file to
+     input.  Otherwise it waits for the first '\input' instruction and
+     the name of the input file will be the job name.  This is used to
+     name the log file the output file.  This option overrides that
+     process and directly specifies the name.  *Note Command line
+     input:: for an example of its use.
+
+'-output-directory=DIRECTORY'
+     Write files in the directory DIRECTORY.  It must already exist.
+
+'shell-escape'
+'no-shell-escape'
+'enable-write18'
+'disable-write18'
+     Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL COMMAND}'.  The first two options
+     are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are for
+     MiKTeX.
+
+     Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+     LaTeX file.  For instance the package 'sagetex' allows you to have
+     the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw graphs
+     and then incorporate that output in your document.  For this TeX
+     provides the '\write18' command.
+
+     But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen
+     if you compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet.  By default
+     '\write18' is disabled.  (More precisely, by default TeX Live,
+     MacTeX, and MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of
+     TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
+
+     If you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape', and in your
+     document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not get an error
+     but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
+
+'-halt-on-error'
+     Stop processing at the first error.
+
+'-file-line-error'
+'-no-file-line-error'
+     Enable or disable 'FILENAME:LINENO:ERROR'-style error messages.
+     These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
+
+28.2 Command line input
+=======================
+
+As part of the command line invocation 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT' you
+can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting ARGUMENT with a backslash.
+This allows you to do some special effects.
+
+   For example, this file (which uses the 'hyperref' package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+
+     \ifdefined\paperversion        % in preamble
+     \newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+     \else
+     \newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+     \fi
+     \usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+       ...
+     \href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN}  % in body
+       ...
+
+Compiling this document 'book.tex' with the command line 'pdflatex test'
+will give the 'CTAN' link in blue.  But compiling it with 'pdflatex
+"\def\paperversion{}\input test.tex"' has the link in black.  (Note the
+use of double quotes to prevent interpretation of the symbols by the
+command line shell; your system may do this differently.)
+
+   In a similar way, from the single file 'main.tex' you can compile two
+different versions.
+
+     pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
+     pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
+
+The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first.
+
+   A final example.  This loads the package 'graphicx' with the option
+'draft'
+
+     pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The 'jobname' option is needed because
+otherwise the output file would be 'graphicx.pdf', as '\RequirePackage'
+does an '\input' of its own.)
+
+28.3 Recovering from errors
+===========================
+
+If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, '?'.  For instance,
+running LaTeX on this file
+
+     \newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+     The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+
+causes it show this, and wait for input.
+
+     ! Undefined control sequence.
+     l.5 The \PN
+                {} problem is a million dollar one.
+     ?
+
+The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and '<return>' and fix the typo.  You
+could instead enter '?' and '<return>' to see other options.
+
+   There are two other error scenarios.  The first is that you forgot to
+include the '\end{document}' or misspelled it.  In this case LaTeX gives
+you a '*' prompt.  You can get back to the command line by typing
+'\stop' and '<return>'.
+
+   The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name.  For instance,
+instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
+
+     ! I can't find file `tste'.
+     <*> tste
+
+     (Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+     Please type another input file name:
+
+The simplest thing is to enter '<Contol>' and 'd' (holding them down at
+the same time), and just fix the command line.
+
 Appendix A Document templates
 *****************************
 
@@ -9717,9 +13876,32 @@
    One web resource for this:
 <http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/>.
 
-A.2 'book' template
+A.2 'article' template
+======================
+
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+
+A.3 'book' template
 ===================
 
+This is a straightforward template for a book.  See *Note Larger book
+template:: for a more elaborate one.
+
 \documentclass{book}
 \title{Book Class Template}
 \author{Alex Author}
@@ -9737,7 +13919,57 @@
 The end.
 \end{document}
 
-A.3 'tugboat' template
+A.4 Larger 'book' template
+==========================
+
+This is a more elaborate template for a book.  It has '\frontmatter',
+'\mainmatter', and '\backmatter' to control the typography of the three
+main areas of a book (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::).
+The book has a bibliography and an index.
+
+   Notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
+Splitting the input::).  While you are working on a chapter you can
+comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+'\includeonly'.  That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references.  (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with '\input' instead of '\include'.
+You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+  frontcover,
+  preface,
+  chap1,
+  ...
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+  % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+
+A.5 'tugboat' template
 ======================
 
 'TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
@@ -9823,2162 +14055,2566 @@
 \makesignature
 \end{document}
 
-Concept Index
-*************
+Index
+*****
 
 * Menu:
 
-* * prompt:                              Command line.       (line 9746)
+* &:                                     tabular.           (line  5037)
+* * prompt:                              Recovering from errors.
+                                                            (line 13911)
 * *-form of environment commands:        \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5105)
-* *-form of sectioning commands:         Sectioning.         (line 1997)
+                                                            (line  6754)
+* *-form of sectioning commands:         Sectioning.        (line  2077)
 * *-form, defining new commands:         \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4945)
-* .glo file:                             Glossaries.         (line 9389)
-* .idx file:                             Indexes.            (line 9405)
-* .ind file:                             Indexes.            (line 9419)
-* 'see' and 'see also' index entries:    Indexes.            (line 9412)
-* abstracts:                             abstract.           (line 2357)
-* accents:                               Accents.            (line 9060)
-* accents, mathematical:                 Math accents.       (line 6977)
-* accessing any character of a font:     Symbols by font position.
-                                                             (line 8868)
-* acute accent:                          Accents.            (line 9074)
-* acute accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6982)
-* additional packages, loading:          Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  802)
-* ae ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9166)
-* algorithm2e package:                   tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* align environment, from amsmath:       eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* aligning equations:                    eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* alignment via tabbing:                 tabbing.            (line 3771)
-* amsmath package:                       array.              (line 2437)
-* amsmath package <1>:                   displaymath.        (line 2613)
-* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray:   eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* appendix, creating:                    Sectioning.         (line 2003)
-* aring:                                 Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9162)
-* arrays, math:                          array.              (line 2403)
-* arrow, left, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 9005)
-* arrow, right, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 9040)
-* ascender height:                       Text symbols.       (line 8973)
-* ASCII circumflex, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 8938)
-* ASCII tilde, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8941)
-* asterisk, centered, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8944)
-* at clause, in font definitions:        \newfont.           (line 5333)
-* author, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.         (line 7238)
-* auxiliary file:                        Output files.       (line  416)
-* babel package:                         thebibliography.    (line 4305)
-* babel package <1>:                     Accents.            (line 9060)
-* background, colored:                   Colored pages.      (line 8038)
-* backslash, in text:                    Text symbols.       (line 8947)
-* bar, double vertical, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 8953)
-* bar, vertical, in text:                Text symbols.       (line 8950)
-* bar-over accent:                       Accents.            (line 9083)
-* bar-over accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 6985)
-* bar-under accent:                      Accents.            (line 9100)
-* basics of LaTeX:                       Overview.           (line  335)
-* beamer template and class:             beamer template.    (line 9762)
-* beginning of document hook:            \AtBeginDocument.   (line 2645)
-* bibliography format, open:             Document class options.
-                                                             (line  764)
-* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX.      (line 4361)
-* bibliography, creating (manually):     thebibliography.    (line 4282)
-* bibTeX, using:                         Using BibTeX.       (line 4361)
-* big circle symbols, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8956)
-* Big point:                             Units of length.    (line 5707)
-* black boxes, omitting:                 Document class options.
-                                                             (line  750)
-* bold font:                             Font styles.        (line 1289)
-* bold math:                             Font styles.        (line 1348)
-* bold typewriter, avoiding:             description.        (line 2572)
-* box, allocating new:                   \newsavebox.        (line 5082)
-* box, colored:                          Colored boxes.      (line 8001)
-* boxes:                                 Boxes.              (line 7643)
-* brace, left, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8959)
-* brace, right, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8962)
-* breaking lines:                        Line breaking.      (line 4504)
-* breaking pages:                        Page breaking.      (line 4647)
-* breve accent:                          Accents.            (line 9140)
-* breve accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6988)
-* bug reporting:                         About this document.
-                                                             (line  306)
-* bullet symbol:                         Math symbols.       (line 6082)
-* bullet, in text:                       Text symbols.       (line 8965)
-* bulleted lists:                        itemize.            (line 2979)
-* calligraphic letters for math:         Font styles.        (line 1292)
-* cap height:                            Text symbols.       (line 8973)
-* caron accent:                          Accents.            (line 9151)
-* catcode:                               \makeatletter and \makeatother.
-                                                             (line  572)
-* category code, character:              \makeatletter and \makeatother.
-                                                             (line  572)
-* cc list, in letters:                   \cc.                (line 9549)
-* cedilla accent:                        Accents.            (line 9105)
-* centered asterisk, in text:            Text symbols.       (line 8944)
-* centered equations:                    Document class options.
-                                                             (line  754)
-* centered period, in text:              Text symbols.       (line 9012)
-* centering text, declaration for:       \centering.         (line 2512)
-* centering text, environment for:       center.             (line 2469)
-* Centimeter:                            Units of length.    (line 5711)
-* character category code:               \makeatletter and \makeatother.
-                                                             (line  572)
-* characters, accented:                  Accents.            (line 9060)
-* characters, case:                      Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8823)
-* characters, non-English:               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* characters, reserved:                  Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8789)
-* characters, special:                   Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8789)
-* check accent:                          Accents.            (line 9151)
-* check accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6991)
-* Cicero:                                Units of length.    (line 5720)
-* circle symbol, big, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8956)
-* circled letter, in text:               Text symbols.       (line 8968)
-* circumflex accent:                     Accents.            (line 9087)
-* circumflex accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 7003)
-* circumflex, ASCII, in text:            Text symbols.       (line 8938)
-* citation key:                          \bibitem.           (line 4323)
-* class and package commands:            Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  885)
-* class and package difference:          Class and package construction.
-                                                             (line  827)
-* class and package structure:           Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* class file example:                    Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  871)
-* class file layout:                     Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* class options:                         Document class options.
-                                                             (line  703)
-* class options <1>:                     Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* class options <2>:                     Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
-* classes of documents:                  Document classes.   (line  669)
-* closing letters:                       \closing.           (line 9565)
-* closing quote:                         Text symbols.       (line 8929)
-* code, typesetting:                     verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* color:                                 Color.              (line 7810)
-* color <1>:                             Define colors.      (line 7915)
-* color <2>:                             Colored text.       (line 7935)
-* color <3>:                             Colored boxes.      (line 8001)
-* color <4>:                             Colored pages.      (line 8038)
-* color models:                          Color models.       (line 7863)
-* color package commands:                Commands for color. (line 7910)
-* color package options:                 Color package options.
-                                                             (line 7825)
-* color, define:                         Define colors.      (line 7915)
-* colored boxes:                         Colored boxes.      (line 8001)
-* colored page:                          Colored pages.      (line 8038)
-* colored text:                          Colored text.       (line 7935)
-* command line:                          Command line.       (line 9734)
-* command syntax:                        LaTeX command syntax.
-                                                             (line  486)
-* commands, class and package:           Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  885)
-* commands, defining new ones:           \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4937)
-* commands, defining new ones <1>:       \providecommand.    (line 5028)
-* commands, document class:              Class and package construction.
-                                                             (line  818)
-* commands, graphics package:            Commands for graphics.
-                                                             (line 8346)
-* commands, ignore spaces:               \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
-                                                             (line 5403)
-* commands, redefining:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4937)
-* commands, star-variants:               \@ifstar.           (line  609)
-* composite word mark, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8973)
-* computer programs, typesetting:        verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* configuration, graphics package:       Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* contents file:                         Output files.       (line  426)
-* copyright symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 8886)
-* counters, a list of:                   Counters.           (line 5476)
-* counters, defining new:                \newcounter.        (line 5043)
-* counters, getting value of:            \value.             (line 5576)
-* counters, printing:                    \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5502)
-* counters, setting:                     \setcounter.        (line 5605)
-* creating pictures:                     picture.            (line 3463)
-* creating tables:                       table.              (line 3918)
-* credit footnote:                       \maketitle.         (line 7248)
-* cross references:                      Cross references.   (line 2215)
-* cross references, resolving:           Output files.       (line  416)
-* cross referencing with page number:    \pageref.           (line 2297)
-* cross referencing, symbolic:           \ref.               (line 2318)
-* currency, dollar:                      Text symbols.       (line 8984)
-* currency, euro:                        Text symbols.       (line 8993)
-* dagger, double, in text:               Text symbols.       (line 8981)
-* dagger, in text:                       Text symbols.       (line 8889)
-* dagger, in text <1>:                   Text symbols.       (line 8978)
-* date, for titlepage:                   \maketitle.         (line 7244)
-* date, today's:                         \today.             (line 9232)
-* datetime package:                      \today.             (line 9248)
-* define color:                          Define colors.      (line 7915)
-* defining a new command:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4937)
-* defining a new command <1>:            \providecommand.    (line 5028)
-* defining new environments:             \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5097)
-* defining new fonts:                    \newfont.           (line 5316)
-* defining new theorems:                 \newtheorem.        (line 5204)
-* definitions:                           Definitions.        (line 4932)
-* description lists, creating:           description.        (line 2544)
-* design size, in font definitions:      \newfont.           (line 5333)
-* Didot point:                           Units of length.    (line 5717)
-* dieresis accent:                       Accents.            (line 9070)
-* difference between class and package:  Class and package construction.
-                                                             (line  827)
-* discretionary hyphenation:             \discretionary.     (line 4589)
-* discretionary multiplication:          Math miscellany.    (line 7073)
-* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* document class commands:               Class and package construction.
-                                                             (line  818)
-* document class options:                Document class options.
-                                                             (line  703)
-* document class, defined:               Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  369)
-* document classes:                      Document classes.   (line  669)
-* document templates:                    Document templates. (line 9755)
-* dollar sign:                           Text symbols.       (line 8984)
-* dot accent:                            Accents.            (line 9079)
-* dot over accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 6997)
-* dot-over accent:                       Accents.            (line 9079)
-* dot-under accent:                      Accents.            (line 9109)
-* dotless i:                             Accents.            (line 9117)
-* dotless i, math:                       Math accents.       (line 7006)
-* dotless j:                             Accents.            (line 9120)
-* dotless j, math:                       Math accents.       (line 7009)
-* double angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* double dagger, in text:                Text symbols.       (line 8892)
-* double dagger, in text <1>:            Text symbols.       (line 8981)
-* double dot accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 6994)
-* double guillemets:                     Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* double left quote:                     Text symbols.       (line 9018)
-* double low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.       (line 8926)
-* double quote, straight base:           Text symbols.       (line 9034)
-* double right quote:                    Text symbols.       (line 9021)
-* double spacing:                        Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1504)
-* double vertical bar, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8953)
-* e-dash:                                Text symbols.       (line 8990)
-* e-TeX:                                 TeX engines.        (line  441)
-* ellipsis:                              Text symbols.       (line 8910)
-* em:                                    Units of length.    (line 5725)
-* em-dash:                               Text symbols.       (line 8987)
-* em-dash, three-quarters:               Text symbols.       (line 9043)
-* em-dash, two-thirds:                   Text symbols.       (line 9049)
-* emphasis:                              Font styles.        (line 1277)
-* enclosure list:                        \encl.              (line 9577)
-* end of document hook:                  \AtEndDocument.     (line 2661)
-* ending and starting:                   Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  361)
-* engines, TeX:                          TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* enlarge current page:                  \enlargethispage.   (line 4676)
-* enumitem package:                      list.               (line 3085)
-* environment:                           Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  377)
-* environment, theorem-like:             \newtheorem.        (line 5204)
-* environments:                          Environments.       (line 2340)
-* environments, defining:                \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5097)
-* EPS files:                             Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* EPS files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* equation number, cross referencing:    \ref.               (line 2318)
-* equation numbers, left vs. right:      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  760)
-* equation numbers, omitting:            eqnarray.           (line 2779)
-* equations, aligning:                   eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* equations, environment for:            equation.           (line 2800)
-* equations, flush left vs. centered:    Document class options.
-                                                             (line  754)
-* es-zet German letter:                  Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9202)
-* eth, Icelandic letter:                 Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9170)
-* etoolbox package:                      Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  989)
-* euro symbol:                           Text symbols.       (line 8993)
-* ex:                                    Units of length.    (line 5725)
-* exclamation point, upside-down:        Text symbols.       (line 8996)
-* exponent:                              Subscripts & superscripts.
-                                                             (line 5941)
-* extended Latin:                        Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* external files, writing:               filecontents.       (line 2876)
-* families, of fonts:                    Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1407)
-* fancyvrb package:                      tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* feminine ordinal symbol:               Text symbols.       (line 9009)
-* figure number, cross referencing:      \ref.               (line 2318)
-* figures, footnotes in:                 minipage.           (line 3450)
-* figures, inserting:                    figure.             (line 2823)
-* file, root:                            Splitting the input.
-                                                             (line 9257)
-* fixed-width font:                      Font styles.        (line 1310)
-* flafter package:                       Floats.             (line 1898)
-* float package:                         Floats.             (line 1868)
-* float page:                            Floats.             (line 1874)
-* flush left equations:                  Document class options.
-                                                             (line  754)
-* flushing floats and starting a page:   \clearpage.         (line 4663)
-* font catalogue:                        Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1407)
-* font commands, low-level:              Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1392)
-* font size:                             Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1487)
-* font sizes:                            Font sizes.         (line 1366)
-* font styles:                           Font styles.        (line 1224)
-* font symbols, by number:               Symbols by font position.
-                                                             (line 8868)
-* fonts:                                 Fonts.              (line 1218)
-* fonts, new commands for:               \newfont.           (line 5316)
-* footer style:                          \pagestyle.         (line 7283)
-* footer, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* footmisc package:                      Footnotes in section headings.
-                                                             (line 4860)
-* footnote number, cross referencing:    \ref.               (line 2318)
-* footnote parameters:                   Footnote parameters.
-                                                             (line 4916)
-* footnotes in figures:                  minipage.           (line 3450)
-* footnotes, creating:                   Footnotes.          (line 4709)
-* Footnotes, in a minipage:              \footnote.          (line 4756)
-* Footnotes, in a table:                 Footnotes in a table.
-                                                             (line 4810)
-* footnotes, in section headings:        Footnotes in section headings.
-                                                             (line 4856)
-* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote.          (line 4744)
-* formulas, environment for:             equation.           (line 2800)
-* formulas, math:                        Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* forward reference:                     Cross references.   (line 2231)
-* forward references, resolving:         Output files.       (line  416)
-* fragile commands:                      \protect.           (line 5351)
-* French quotation marks:                Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* functions, math:                       Math functions.     (line 6869)
-* geometry package:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  737)
-* geometry package <1>:                  Document class options.
-                                                             (line  741)
-* global options:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  703)
-* global options <1>:                    Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  811)
-* glossaries:                            Glossaries.         (line 9387)
-* glossary package:                      Glossaries.         (line 9396)
-* glue register, plain TeX:              \newlength.         (line 5067)
-* graphics:                              Graphics.           (line 8059)
-* graphics <1>:                          Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* graphics <2>:                          \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* graphics package:                      Graphics.           (line 8059)
-* graphics package <1>:                  Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* graphics package <2>:                  \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* graphics package commands:             Commands for graphics.
-                                                             (line 8346)
-* graphics package options:              Graphics package options.
-                                                             (line 8096)
-* graphics packages:                     \line.              (line 3626)
-* graphics, resizing:                    \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* graphics, resizing <1>:                \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* graphics, scaling:                     \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* graphics, scaling <1>:                 \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* grave accent:                          Accents.            (line 9091)
-* grave accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 7000)
-* greater than symbol, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8999)
-* greek letters:                         Math symbols.       (line 5974)
-* group, and environments:               Environments.       (line 2352)
-* ha'c<ek accent, math:                  Math accents.       (line 6991)
-* hacek accent:                          Accents.            (line 9151)
-* hat accent:                            Accents.            (line 9087)
-* hat accent, math:                      Math accents.       (line 7003)
-* header style:                          \pagestyle.         (line 7283)
-* header, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* hello, world:                          Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  361)
-* here, putting floats:                  Floats.             (line 1868)
-* hungarian umlaut accent:               Accents.            (line 9113)
-* hyphenation, defining:                 \hyphenation.       (line 4614)
-* hyphenation, discretionary:            \discretionary.     (line 4589)
-* hyphenation, forcing:                  \- (hyphenation).   (line 4577)
-* hyphenation, preventing:               \mbox.              (line 7649)
-* Icelandic eth:                         Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9170)
-* Icelandic thorn:                       Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9206)
-* ij letter, Dutch:                      Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9182)
-* implementations of TeX:                TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* importing graphics:                    \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* in-line formulas:                      math.               (line 3423)
-* including graphics:                    \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* indent, forcing:                       \indent.            (line 5822)
-* indent, suppressing:                   \noindent.          (line 5833)
-* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage.          (line 3446)
-* index entries, 'see' and 'see also':   Indexes.            (line 9412)
-* indexes:                               Indexes.            (line 9402)
-* infinite horizontal stretch:           \hfill.             (line 7358)
-* infinite vertical stretch:             \vfill.             (line 7587)
-* input file:                            Splitting the input.
-                                                             (line 9254)
-* input/output, to terminal:             Terminal input/output.
-                                                             (line 9701)
-* inserting figures:                     figure.             (line 2823)
-* insertions of special characters:      Special insertions. (line 8783)
-* italic correction:                     \/.                 (line 7496)
-* italic font:                           Font styles.        (line 1295)
-* JPEG files:                            Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* JPEG files <1>:                        \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* JPG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* JPG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* justification, ragged left:            \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
-* justification, ragged right:           \raggedright.       (line 2940)
-* Knuth, Donald E.:                      Overview.           (line  335)
-* label:                                 Cross references.   (line 2218)
-* labelled lists, creating:              description.        (line 2544)
-* Lamport TeX:                           Overview.           (line  353)
-* Lamport, Leslie:                       Overview.           (line  335)
-* landscape orientation:                 Document class options.
-                                                             (line  757)
-* LaTeX logo:                            Text symbols.       (line 8895)
-* LaTeX overview:                        Overview.           (line  335)
-* LaTeX Project team:                    About this document.
-                                                             (line  302)
-* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e:                     About this document.
-                                                             (line  298)
-* LaTeX2e logo:                          Text symbols.       (line 8898)
-* Latin letters, additional:             Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* layout commands:                       Layout.             (line 1534)
-* layout, page parameters for:           Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* left angle quotation marks:            Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* left arrow, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 9005)
-* left brace, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 8959)
-* left quote:                            Text symbols.       (line 8914)
-* left quote, double:                    Text symbols.       (line 9018)
-* left quote, single:                    Text symbols.       (line 9024)
-* left-hand equation numbers:            Document class options.
-                                                             (line  760)
-* left-justifying text:                  \raggedright.       (line 2940)
-* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft.          (line 2927)
-* left-to-right mode:                    Modes.              (line 7156)
-* length command:                        \setlength.         (line 5747)
-* lengths, adding to:                    \addtolength.       (line 5755)
-* lengths, allocating new:               \newlength.         (line 5067)
-* lengths, defining and using:           Lengths.            (line 5665)
-* lengths, predefined:                   Predefined lengths. (line 5795)
-* lengths, setting:                      \setlength.         (line 5743)
-* less than symbol, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 9002)
-* letters, accented:                     Accents.            (line 9060)
-* letters, additional Latin:             Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* letters, ending:                       \closing.           (line 9565)
-* letters, starting:                     \opening.           (line 9635)
-* letters, writing:                      Letters.            (line 9442)
-* line break, forcing:                   \\.                 (line 4515)
-* line breaking:                         Line breaking.      (line 4504)
-* line breaks, forcing:                  \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
-                                                             (line 4630)
-* line breaks, preventing:               \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
-                                                             (line 4630)
-* lines in tables:                       tabular.            (line 3960)
-* lining numerals:                       Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* lining text up in tables:              tabular.            (line 3960)
-* lining text up using tab stops:        tabbing.            (line 3771)
-* list items, specifying counter:        \usecounter.        (line 5550)
-* list of figures file:                  Output files.       (line  426)
-* list of tables file:                   Output files.       (line  426)
-* listings package:                      tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* lists of items:                        itemize.            (line 2979)
-* lists of items, generic:               list.               (line 3067)
-* lists of items, numbered:              enumerate.          (line 2677)
-* loading additional packages:           Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  802)
-* log file:                              Output files.       (line  411)
-* logo, LaTeX:                           Text symbols.       (line 8895)
-* logo, LaTeX2e:                         Text symbols.       (line 8898)
-* logo, TeX:                             Text symbols.       (line 8935)
-* long command:                          Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  902)
-* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols.    (line 8926)
-* low-level font commands:               Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1392)
-* Lower case:                            Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8823)
-* LR mode:                               Modes.              (line 7156)
-* ltugboat class:                        tugboat template.   (line 9813)
-* LuaTeX:                                TeX engines.        (line  458)
-* m-width:                               Units of length.    (line 5725)
-* macro package, LaTeX as:               Overview.           (line  340)
-* macron accent:                         Accents.            (line 9083)
-* macron accent, math:                   Math accents.       (line 6985)
-* macros2e package:                      \makeatletter and \makeatother.
-                                                             (line  593)
-* Madsen, Lars:                          eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* makeidx package:                       Indexes.            (line 9424)
-* makeindex program:                     Indexes.            (line 9419)
-* making a title page:                   titlepage.          (line 4411)
-* making paragraphs:                     Making paragraphs.  (line 5814)
-* marginal notes:                        Marginal notes.     (line 5854)
-* masculine ordinal symbol:              Text symbols.       (line 9009)
-* math accents:                          Math accents.       (line 6977)
-* math formulas:                         Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* math functions:                        Math functions.     (line 6869)
-* math miscellany:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7072)
-* math mode:                             Modes.              (line 7156)
-* math mode, entering:                   Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* math mode, spacing:                    Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7029)
-* math symbols:                          Math symbols.       (line 5974)
-* math, bold:                            Font styles.        (line 1348)
-* mfirstuc package:                      Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8862)
-* Millimeter:                            Units of length.    (line 5714)
-* minipage, creating a:                  minipage.           (line 3435)
-* minted package:                        tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* modes:                                 Modes.              (line 7156)
-* monospace font:                        Font styles.        (line 1310)
-* moving arguments:                      \protect.           (line 5364)
-* mpfootnote counter:                    \footnote.          (line 4756)
-* mu, math unit:                         Units of length.    (line 5736)
-* multicolumn text:                      \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
-* multilingual support:                  Accents.            (line 9060)
-* multind package:                       Indexes.            (line 9435)
-* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany.
-                                                             (line 7073)
-* nested \include, not allowed:          \include.           (line 9278)
-* new class commands:                    Class and package construction.
-                                                             (line  818)
-* new command, check:                    Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  900)
-* new command, definition:               Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  975)
-* new commands, defining:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4937)
-* new commands, defining <1>:            \providecommand.    (line 5028)
-* new line, output as input:             \obeycr & \restorecr.
-                                                             (line 4547)
-* new line, starting:                    \\.                 (line 4515)
-* new line, starting (paragraph mode):   \newline.           (line 4556)
-* new page, starting:                    \newpage.           (line 4670)
-* non-English characters:                Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* notes in the margin:                   Marginal notes.     (line 5854)
-* null delimiter:                        Math miscellany.    (line 7102)
-* numbered items, specifying counter:    \usecounter.        (line 5550)
-* numerals, old-style:                   Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* oblique font:                          Font styles.        (line 1307)
-* oe ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9198)
-* ogonek:                                Accents.            (line 9124)
-* old-style numerals:                    Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* one-column output:                     \onecolumn.         (line 1539)
-* opening quote:                         Text symbols.       (line 8914)
-* OpenType fonts:                        TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* options, class:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
-* options, color package:                Color package options.
-                                                             (line 7825)
-* options, document class:               Document class options.
-                                                             (line  703)
-* options, document class <1>:           Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* options, global:                       Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  811)
-* options, graphics package:             Graphics package options.
-                                                             (line 8096)
-* options, package:                      Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* options, package <1>:                  Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
-* ordinals, feminine and masculine:      Text symbols.       (line 9009)
-* oslash:                                Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9194)
-* overbar accent:                        Accents.            (line 9083)
-* overdot accent, math:                  Math accents.       (line 6997)
-* overview of LaTeX:                     Overview.           (line  335)
-* package file layout:                   Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* package options:                       Class and package structure.
-                                                             (line  841)
-* package options <1>:                   Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
-* package, algorithm2e:                  tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* package, amsmath:                      array.              (line 2437)
-* package, amsmath <1>:                  displaymath.        (line 2613)
-* package, babel:                        thebibliography.    (line 4305)
-* package, babel <1>:                    Accents.            (line 9060)
-* package, datetime:                     \today.             (line 9248)
-* package, enumitem:                     list.               (line 3085)
-* package, etoolbox:                     Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  989)
-* package, fancyvrb:                     tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* package, flafter:                      Floats.             (line 1898)
-* package, float:                        Floats.             (line 1868)
-* package, footmisc:                     Footnotes in section headings.
-                                                             (line 4860)
-* package, geometry:                     Document class options.
-                                                             (line  737)
-* package, geometry <1>:                 Document class options.
-                                                             (line  741)
-* package, listings:                     tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* package, macros2e:                     \makeatletter and \makeatother.
-                                                             (line  593)
-* package, makeidx:                      Indexes.            (line 9424)
-* package, mfirstuc:                     Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8862)
-* package, minted:                       tabbing.            (line 3909)
-* package, multind:                      Indexes.            (line 9435)
-* package, picture:                      picture.            (line 3480)
-* package, setspace:                     Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1504)
-* package, showidx:                      Indexes.            (line 9431)
-* package, textcase:                     Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8859)
-* package, textcomp:                     Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* package, xspace:                       \(SPACE) after control sequence.
-                                                             (line 7483)
-* packages, loading additional:          Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  802)
-* page break, forcing:                   \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
-                                                             (line 4691)
-* page break, preventing:                \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
-                                                             (line 4691)
-* page breaking:                         Page breaking.      (line 4647)
-* page layout parameters:                Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* page number, cross referencing:        \pageref.           (line 2297)
-* page numbering style:                  \pagenumbering.     (line 7258)
-* page styles:                           Page styles.        (line 7226)
-* page, colored:                         Colored pages.      (line 8038)
-* paragraph indentation, in minipage:    minipage.           (line 3446)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* paragraph mode:                        Modes.              (line 7156)
-* paragraph mode <1>:                    \parbox.            (line 7721)
-* paragraph symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 8918)
-* paragraphs:                            Making paragraphs.  (line 5814)
-* parameters, for footnotes:             Footnote parameters.
-                                                             (line 4916)
-* parameters, page layout:               Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* PDF graphic files:                     Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* PDF graphic files <1>:                 \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* pdfTeX:                                Output files.       (line  403)
-* pdfTeX engine:                         TeX engines.        (line  441)
-* period, centered, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 9012)
-* pica:                                  Units of length.    (line 5701)
-* pict2e package:                        \line.              (line 3626)
-* picture package:                       picture.            (line 3480)
-* pictures, creating:                    picture.            (line 3463)
-* pilcrow:                               Text symbols.       (line 8918)
-* placement of floats:                   Floats.             (line 1847)
-* PNG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
-                                                             (line 8160)
-* PNG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* poetry, an environment for:            verse.              (line 4485)
-* Point:                                 Units of length.    (line 5697)
-* polish l:                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9186)
-* portrait orientation:                  Document class options.
-                                                             (line  757)
-* position, in picture:                  picture.            (line 3485)
-* positional parameter:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4968)
-* postscript, in letters:                \ps.                (line 9648)
-* pounds symbol:                         Text symbols.       (line 8922)
-* preamble, defined:                     Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  374)
-* predefined lengths:                    Predefined lengths. (line 5795)
-* prompt, *:                             Command line.       (line 9746)
-* pronunciation:                         Overview.           (line  353)
-* quad:                                  Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7055)
-* question mark, upside-down:            Text symbols.       (line 9015)
-* quotation marks, French:               Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* quote, single straight:                Text symbols.       (line 9030)
-* quote, straight base:                  Text symbols.       (line 9034)
-* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* ragged left text:                      \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
-* ragged left text, environment for:     flushright.         (line 2953)
-* ragged right text:                     \raggedright.       (line 2940)
-* ragged right text, environment for:    flushleft.          (line 2927)
-* redefining environments:               \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5097)
-* reference, forward:                    Cross references.   (line 2231)
-* references, resolving forward:         Output files.       (line  416)
-* registered symbol:                     Text symbols.       (line 9037)
-* remarks in the margin:                 Marginal notes.     (line 5854)
-* reporting bugs:                        About this document.
-                                                             (line  306)
-* reserved characters:                   Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8789)
-* resizing:                              \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* resizing <1>:                          \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* right angle quotation marks:           Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* right arrow, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 9040)
-* right brace, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8962)
-* right quote:                           Text symbols.       (line 8929)
-* right quote, double:                   Text symbols.       (line 9021)
-* right quote, single:                   Text symbols.       (line 9027)
-* right-hand equation numbers:           Document class options.
-                                                             (line  760)
-* right-justifying text:                 \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
-* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright.        (line 2953)
-* ring accent:                           Accents.            (line 9129)
-* ring accent, math:                     Math accents.       (line 7012)
-* robust commands:                       \protect.           (line 5351)
-* roman font:                            Font styles.        (line 1298)
-* root file:                             Splitting the input.
-                                                             (line 9257)
-* rotating graphics:                     \rotatebox.         (line 8661)
-* rotating text:                         \rotatebox.         (line 8661)
-* rotation:                              \rotatebox.         (line 8661)
-* row, tabbing:                          tabbing.            (line 3810)
-* rubber lengths, defining new:          \newlength.         (line 5067)
-* running header and footer:             Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
-* running header and footer style:       \pagestyle.         (line 7283)
-* sans serif font:                       Font styles.        (line 1304)
-* Scaled point:                          Units of length.    (line 5723)
-* scaling:                               \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* scaling <1>:                           \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* script letters for math:               Font styles.        (line 1292)
-* section number, cross referencing:     \ref.               (line 2318)
-* section numbers, printing:             Sectioning.         (line 2013)
-* section symbol:                        Text symbols.       (line 8932)
-* section, redefining:                   \@startsection.     (line 2025)
-* sectioning commands:                   Sectioning.         (line 1972)
-* series, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1434)
-* setspace package:                      Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1504)
-* setting counters:                      \setcounter.        (line 5605)
-* shapes, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1474)
-* sharp S letters:                       Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9202)
-* showidx package:                       Indexes.            (line 9431)
-* simulating typed text:                 verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* single angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* single guillemets:                     Text symbols.       (line 8904)
-* single left quote:                     Text symbols.       (line 9024)
-* single low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.       (line 8926)
-* single quote, straight:                Text symbols.       (line 9030)
-* single right quote:                    Text symbols.       (line 9027)
-* sizes of text:                         Font sizes.         (line 1366)
-* skip register, plain TeX:              \newlength.         (line 5067)
-* slanted font:                          Font styles.        (line 1307)
-* small caps font:                       Font styles.        (line 1301)
-* space, inserting vertical:             \addvspace.         (line 7544)
-* space, vertical:                       \vspace.            (line 7613)
-* spaces:                                Spaces.             (line 7326)
-* spaces, ignore around commands:        \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
-                                                             (line 5403)
-* spacing within math mode:              Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7029)
-* spacing, inter-sentence:               \frenchspacing.     (line 7451)
-* spacing, inter-sentence <1>:           \normalsfcodes.     (line 7464)
-* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols.    (line 9009)
-* special characters:                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8789)
-* special characters <1>:                Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9156)
-* special insertions:                    Special insertions. (line 8783)
-* specifier, float placement:            Floats.             (line 1847)
-* splitting the input file:              Splitting the input.
-                                                             (line 9254)
-* stable option to footmisc package:     Footnotes in section headings.
-                                                             (line 4860)
-* star-variants, commands:               \@ifstar.           (line  609)
-* starred form, defining new commands:   \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4945)
-* starting a new page:                   \newpage.           (line 4670)
-* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage.       (line 4663)
-* starting and ending:                   Starting and ending.
-                                                             (line  361)
-* starting on a right-hand page:         \cleardoublepage.   (line 4654)
-* sterling symbol:                       Text symbols.       (line 8922)
-* straight double quote, base:           Text symbols.       (line 9034)
-* straight quote, base:                  Text symbols.       (line 9034)
-* straight single quote:                 Text symbols.       (line 9030)
-* stretch, infinite horizontal:          \hfill.             (line 7358)
-* stretch, infinite vertical:            \vfill.             (line 7587)
-* stretch, omitting vertical:            \raggedbottom.      (line 1679)
-* styles of text:                        Font styles.        (line 1224)
-* styles, page:                          Page styles.        (line 7226)
-* subscript:                             Subscripts & superscripts.
-                                                             (line 5941)
-* superscript:                           Subscripts & superscripts.
-                                                             (line 5941)
-* symbols, math:                         Math symbols.       (line 5974)
-* symbols, text:                         Text symbols.       (line 8880)
-* tab stops, using:                      tabbing.            (line 3771)
-* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
-                                                             (line 9338)
-* table of contents file:                Output files.       (line  426)
-* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
-                                                             (line 4856)
-* table of contents, creating:           Tables of contents. (line 9317)
-* tables, creating:                      table.              (line 3918)
-* template, beamer:                      beamer template.    (line 9762)
-* template, book:                        book template.      (line 9793)
-* template, TUGboat:                     tugboat template.   (line 9813)
-* templates, document:                   Document templates. (line 9755)
-* terminal input/output:                 Terminal input/output.
-                                                             (line 9701)
-* TeX logo:                              Text symbols.       (line 8935)
-* text symbols:                          Text symbols.       (line 8880)
-* text, resizing:                        \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* text, resizing <1>:                    \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* text, scaling:                         \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* text, scaling <1>:                     \resizebox.         (line 8754)
-* textcase package:                      Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8859)
-* textcomp package:                      Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* thanks, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.         (line 7248)
-* theorem-like environment:              \newtheorem.        (line 5204)
-* theorems, defining:                    \newtheorem.        (line 5204)
-* theorems, typesetting:                 theorem.            (line 4398)
-* thorn, Icelandic letter:               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9206)
-* three-quarters em-dash:                Text symbols.       (line 9043)
-* tie-after accent:                      Accents.            (line 9135)
-* tilde accent:                          Accents.            (line 9097)
-* tilde accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 7015)
-* tilde, ASCII, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8941)
-* title page, separate or run-in:        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  768)
-* title pages, creating:                 titlepage.          (line 4411)
-* title, for titlepage:                  \maketitle.         (line 7252)
-* titles, making:                        \maketitle.         (line 7232)
-* trademark symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 9046)
-* transcript file:                       Output files.       (line  411)
-* TrueType fonts:                        TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* TUGboat template:                      tugboat template.   (line 9813)
-* two-column output:                     \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
-* two-thirds em-dash:                    Text symbols.       (line 9049)
-* type styles:                           Font styles.        (line 1224)
-* typed text, simulating:                verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* typeface sizes:                        Font sizes.         (line 1366)
-* typefaces:                             Fonts.              (line 1218)
-* typewriter font:                       Font styles.        (line 1310)
-* typewriter labels in lists:            description.        (line 2572)
-* umlaut accent:                         Accents.            (line 9070)
-* underbar:                              Accents.            (line 9143)
-* underscore, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 9052)
-* Unicode input, native:                 TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* units, of length:                      Units of length.    (line 5693)
-* unofficial nature of this manual:      About this document.
-                                                             (line  302)
-* unordered lists:                       itemize.            (line 2979)
-* Upper case:                            Upper and lower case.
-                                                             (line 8823)
-* using BibTeX:                          Using BibTeX.       (line 4361)
-* UTF-8:                                 TeX engines.        (line  435)
-* variables, a list of:                  Counters.           (line 5476)
-* vector symbol, math:                   Math accents.       (line 7018)
-* verbatim text:                         verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* verbatim text, inline:                 \verb.              (line 4468)
-* vertical bar, double, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 8953)
-* vertical bar, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8950)
-* vertical space:                        \addvspace.         (line 7544)
-* vertical space <1>:                    \vspace.            (line 7613)
-* vertical space before paragraphs:      \parskip.           (line 5848)
-* visible space:                         \verb.              (line 4479)
-* visible space symbol, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 9055)
-* weights, of fonts:                     Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1444)
-* white space:                           Spaces.             (line 7326)
-* wide hat accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 7021)
-* wide tilde accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 7024)
-* widths, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1456)
-* writing external files:                filecontents.       (line 2876)
-* writing letters:                       Letters.            (line 9442)
-* x-height:                              Units of length.    (line 5725)
-* XeTeX:                                 TeX engines.        (line  467)
-* xindy program:                         Indexes.            (line 9419)
-* xspace package:                        \(SPACE) after control sequence.
-                                                             (line 7483)
-
-Command Index
-*************
-
-* Menu:
-
-* $:                                     Math formulas.      (line 5922)
-* &:                                     tabular.            (line 3986)
-* --help command-line option:            Command line.       (line 9742)
-* .aux file:                             Output files.       (line  416)
-* .dvi file:                             Output files.       (line  393)
-* .fd file:                              \newfont.           (line 5326)
-* .lof file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
-* .lof file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9327)
-* .log file:                             Output files.       (line  411)
-* .lot file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
-* .lot file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9327)
-* .pdf file:                             Output files.       (line  403)
-* .tex, default extension:               Command line.       (line 9734)
-* .toc file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
-* .toc file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9317)
-* .xdv file:                             TeX engines.        (line  467)
+                                                            (line  6509)
+* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13813)
+* --enable-write18 command-line option:  Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13813)
+* --file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13840)
+* --halt-on-error command-line option:   Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13837)
+* --help command-line option:            Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13778)
+* --interaction command-line option:     Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13781)
+* --jobname command-line option:         Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13798)
+* --no-file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13840)
+* --no-shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13813)
+* --output-directory command-line option: Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13810)
+* --shell-escape command-line option:    Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13813)
+* --version command-line option:         Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13773)
+* .aux file:                             Output files.      (line   449)
+* .dvi file:                             Output files.      (line   426)
+* .glo file:                             Glossaries.        (line 13245)
+* .idx file:                             Indexes.           (line 12884)
+* .idx file <1>:                         makeindex.         (line 13036)
+* .ind file:                             makeindex.         (line 13036)
+* .isty file:                            makeindex.         (line 13048)
+* .lof file:                             Output files.      (line   459)
+* .lof file <1>:                         Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* .log file:                             Output files.      (line   444)
+* .lot file:                             Output files.      (line   459)
+* .lot file <1>:                         Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* .pdf file:                             Output files.      (line   436)
+* .tex, default extension:               Command line.      (line 13735)
+* .toc file:                             Output files.      (line   459)
+* .toc file <1>:                         Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* .xdv file:                             TeX engines.       (line   501)
 * 10pt option:                           Document class options.
-                                                             (line  711)
+                                                            (line   771)
 * 11pt option:                           Document class options.
-                                                             (line  711)
+                                                            (line   771)
 * 12pt option:                           Document class options.
-                                                             (line  711)
+                                                            (line   771)
+* ::                                     Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9335)
+* : <1>:                                 Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9335)
 * [...] for optional arguments:          LaTeX command syntax.
-                                                             (line  486)
+                                                            (line   520)
 * \ character starting commands:         LaTeX command syntax.
-                                                             (line  486)
+                                                            (line   520)
 * \!:                                    Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7052)
-* \" (umlaut accent):                    Accents.            (line 9070)
+                                                            (line  9312)
+* \" (umlaut accent):                    Accents.           (line 12227)
 * \#:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
+                                                            (line 11939)
 * \$:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
+                                                            (line 11939)
 * \%:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
+                                                            (line 11939)
 * \&:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
-* \' (acute accent):                     Accents.            (line 9074)
-* \' (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3851)
-* \(:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5914)
-* \(SPACE):                              \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7419)
-* \):                                    Math formulas.      (line 5914)
-* \*:                                    Math miscellany.    (line 7072)
-* \+:                                    tabbing.            (line 3843)
+                                                            (line 11939)
+* \' (acute accent):                     Accents.           (line 12231)
+* \' (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4883)
+* \*:                                    \*.                (line  9355)
+* \+:                                    tabbing.           (line  4875)
 * \,:                                    Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7048)
-* \-:                                    tabbing.            (line 3847)
-* \- (hyphenation):                      \- (hyphenation).   (line 4577)
-* \. (dot-over accent):                  Accents.            (line 9079)
-* \/:                                    \/.                 (line 7496)
+                                                            (line  9298)
+* \-:                                    tabbing.           (line  4879)
+* \- (hyphenation):                      \- (hyphenation).  (line  5904)
+* \. (dot-over accent):                  Accents.           (line 12234)
+* \/:                                    \/.                (line 10174)
 * \::                                    Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7044)
+                                                            (line  9294)
 * \;:                                    Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7039)
-* \<:                                    tabbing.            (line 3839)
-* \= (macron accent):                    Accents.            (line 9083)
-* \= (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3833)
-* \>:                                    tabbing.            (line 3837)
+                                                            (line  9289)
+* \<:                                    tabbing.           (line  4871)
+* \= (macron accent):                    Accents.           (line 12238)
+* \= (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4865)
+* \>:                                    tabbing.           (line  4869)
 * \> <1>:                                Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7044)
-* \> (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3836)
-* \@:                                    \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7419)
-* \@beginparpenalty:                     list.               (line 3315)
-* \@endparpenalty:                       list.               (line 3323)
-* \@fnsymbol:                            \footnote.          (line 4744)
-* \@ifstar:                              \@ifstar.           (line  609)
-* \@itempenalty:                         list.               (line 3319)
-* \@startsection:                        \@startsection.     (line 2025)
-* \a (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3866)
-* \a' (acute accent in tabbing):         tabbing.            (line 3867)
-* \a= (macron accent in tabbing):        tabbing.            (line 3867)
+                                                            (line  9294)
+* \> (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4868)
+* \@:                                    \@.                (line  9977)
+* \@beginparpenalty:                     list.              (line  3964)
+* \@endparpenalty:                       list.              (line  3972)
+* \@fnsymbol:                            \footnote.         (line  6260)
+* \@ifstar:                              \@ifstar.          (line   642)
+* \@itempenalty:                         list.              (line  3968)
+* \@startsection:                        \@startsection.    (line  2548)
+* \a (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4898)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing):         tabbing.           (line  4899)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing):        tabbing.           (line  4899)
 * \aa (aa):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9162)
+                                                            (line 12304)
 * \AA (AA):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9162)
-* \acute:                                Math accents.       (line 6981)
-* \addcontentsline:                      \addcontentsline.   (line 9338)
-* \address:                              \address.           (line 9522)
-* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}:             \addtocontents.     (line 9372)
-* \addtocounter:                         \addtocounter.      (line 5621)
-* \addtolength:                          \addtolength.       (line 5755)
-* \addvspace:                            \addvspace.         (line 7544)
+                                                            (line 12304)
+* \acute:                                Math accents.      (line  9182)
+* \addcontentsline:                      \addcontentsline.  (line 12744)
+* \address:                              \address.          (line 13424)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}:             \addtocontents.    (line 12819)
+* \addtocounter:                         \addtocounter.     (line  7299)
+* \addtolength:                          \addtolength.      (line  7535)
+* \addvspace:                            \addvspace.        (line 10499)
 * \ae (ae):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9166)
+                                                            (line 12308)
 * \AE (AE):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9166)
-* \aleph:                                Math symbols.       (line 5990)
-* \Alph example:                         enumerate.          (line 2732)
-* \alpha:                                Math symbols.       (line 5993)
+                                                            (line 12308)
+* \aleph:                                Math symbols.      (line  8016)
+* \Alph example:                         enumerate.         (line  3323)
+* \alpha:                                Math symbols.      (line  8019)
 * \alph{COUNTER}:                        \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5510)
+                                                            (line  7174)
 * \Alph{COUNTER}:                        \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5513)
-* \alsoname:                             Indexes.            (line 9416)
-* \amalg:                                Math symbols.       (line 5996)
-* \and for \author:                      \maketitle.         (line 7238)
-* \angle:                                Math symbols.       (line 5999)
-* \appendix:                             Sectioning.         (line 2003)
-* \approx:                               Math symbols.       (line 6004)
+                                                            (line  7179)
+* \alsoname:                             \index.            (line 12970)
+* \amalg:                                Math symbols.      (line  8022)
+* \and for \author:                      \maketitle.        (line  9567)
+* \angle:                                Math symbols.      (line  8025)
+* \appendix:                             \appendix.         (line  2487)
+* \approx:                               Math symbols.      (line  8030)
 * \arabic{COUNTER}:                      \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5516)
-* \arccos:                               Math functions.     (line 6872)
-* \arcsin:                               Math functions.     (line 6875)
-* \arctan:                               Math functions.     (line 6878)
-* \arg:                                  Math functions.     (line 6881)
-* \arraycolsep:                          array.              (line 2434)
-* \arrayrulewidth:                       tabular.            (line 4110)
-* \arraystretch:                         tabular.            (line 4116)
-* \ast:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6007)
-* \asymp:                                Math symbols.       (line 6016)
-* \AtBeginDocument:                      \AtBeginDocument.   (line 2645)
+                                                            (line  7184)
+* \arccos:                               Math functions.    (line  9065)
+* \arcsin:                               Math functions.    (line  9068)
+* \arctan:                               Math functions.    (line  9071)
+* \arg:                                  Math functions.    (line  9074)
+* \arraycolsep:                          array.             (line  3006)
+* \arrayrulewidth:                       tabular.           (line  5163)
+* \arraystretch:                         tabular.           (line  5169)
+* \ast:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8033)
+* \asymp:                                Math symbols.      (line  8042)
+* \AtBeginDocument:                      \AtBeginDocument.  (line  3236)
 * \AtBeginDvi:                           Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  888)
-* \AtEndDocument:                        \AtEndDocument.     (line 2661)
+                                                            (line   948)
+* \AtEndDocument:                        \AtEndDocument.    (line  3252)
 * \AtEndOfClass:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  893)
+                                                            (line   953)
 * \AtEndOfPackage:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  893)
-* \author{NAME \and NAME2}:              \maketitle.         (line 7237)
-* \a` (grave accent in tabbing):         tabbing.            (line 3867)
-* \b (bar-under accent):                 Accents.            (line 9100)
-* \backslash:                            Math symbols.       (line 6019)
-* \bar:                                  Math accents.       (line 6984)
+                                                            (line   953)
+* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}:    \maketitle.        (line  9566)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing):         tabbing.           (line  4899)
+* \b (bar-under accent):                 Accents.           (line 12253)
+* \backmatter:                           \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* \backslash:                            Math symbols.      (line  8045)
+* \bar:                                  Math accents.      (line  9185)
 * \baselineskip:                         Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1487)
+                                                            (line  1566)
 * \baselinestretch:                      Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1497)
-* \begin:                                Environments.       (line 2340)
-* \beta:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6023)
-* \bf:                                   Font styles.        (line 1288)
-* \bfseries:                             Font styles.        (line 1257)
-* \bibitem:                              \bibitem.           (line 4317)
-* \bibliography:                         Using BibTeX.       (line 4361)
-* \bibliographystyle:                    Using BibTeX.       (line 4361)
-* \bibname:                              thebibliography.    (line 4299)
-* \bigcap:                               Math symbols.       (line 6026)
-* \bigcirc:                              Math symbols.       (line 6030)
-* \bigcup:                               Math symbols.       (line 6034)
-* \bigodot:                              Math symbols.       (line 6038)
-* \bigoplus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6041)
-* \bigotimes:                            Math symbols.       (line 6044)
-* \bigskip:                              \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7569)
-* \bigskipamount:                        \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7570)
-* \bigsqcup:                             Math symbols.       (line 6055)
-* \bigtriangledown:                      Math symbols.       (line 6047)
-* \bigtriangleup:                        Math symbols.       (line 6051)
-* \biguplus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6058)
-* \bigvee:                               Math symbols.       (line 6062)
-* \bigwedge:                             Math symbols.       (line 6065)
-* \bmod:                                 Math functions.     (line 6884)
-* \boldmath:                             Math formulas.      (line 5927)
-* \bot:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6068)
-* \bottomfraction:                       Floats.             (line 1910)
-* \bottomfraction <1>:                   Floats.             (line 1911)
-* \bowtie:                               Math symbols.       (line 6073)
-* \Box:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6076)
-* \breve:                                Math accents.       (line 6987)
-* \bullet:                               Math symbols.       (line 6081)
-* \c (cedilla accent):                   Accents.            (line 9105)
-* \cal:                                  Font styles.        (line 1291)
-* \cap:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6084)
-* \capitalacute:                         Accents.            (line 9074)
-* \capitalbreve:                         Accents.            (line 9140)
-* \capitalcaron:                         Accents.            (line 9151)
-* \capitalcedilla:                       Accents.            (line 9105)
-* \capitalcircumflex:                    Accents.            (line 9087)
-* \capitaldieresis:                      Accents.            (line 9070)
-* \capitaldotaccent:                     Accents.            (line 9109)
-* \capitalgrave:                         Accents.            (line 9091)
-* \capitalhungarumlaut:                  Accents.            (line 9113)
-* \capitalmacron:                        Accents.            (line 9083)
-* \capitalnewtie:                        Accents.            (line 9135)
-* \capitalogonek:                        Accents.            (line 9124)
-* \capitalring:                          Accents.            (line 9129)
-* \capitaltie:                           Accents.            (line 9135)
-* \capitaltilde:                         Accents.            (line 9097)
-* \caption:                              figure.             (line 2857)
-* \caption <1>:                          table.              (line 3938)
-* \cc:                                   \cc.                (line 9549)
-* \cdot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6089)
-* \cdots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7091)
-* \centering:                            \centering.         (line 2512)
-* \chapter:                              Sectioning.         (line 1975)
-* \check:                                Math accents.       (line 6990)
+                                                            (line  1576)
+* \begin:                                Environments.      (line  2898)
+* \beta:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8049)
+* \bf:                                   Font styles.       (line  1364)
+* \bfseries:                             Font styles.       (line  1329)
+* \bibitem:                              \bibitem.          (line  5390)
+* \bibliography:                         Using BibTeX.      (line  5512)
+* \bibliographystyle:                    Using BibTeX.      (line  5512)
+* \bigcap:                               Math symbols.      (line  8052)
+* \bigcirc:                              Math symbols.      (line  8056)
+* \bigcup:                               Math symbols.      (line  8060)
+* \bigodot:                              Math symbols.      (line  8064)
+* \bigoplus:                             Math symbols.      (line  8067)
+* \bigotimes:                            Math symbols.      (line  8070)
+* \bigskip:                              \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10280)
+* \bigskipamount:                        \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10281)
+* \bigsqcup:                             Math symbols.      (line  8081)
+* \bigtriangledown:                      Math symbols.      (line  8073)
+* \bigtriangleup:                        Math symbols.      (line  8077)
+* \biguplus:                             Math symbols.      (line  8084)
+* \bigvee:                               Math symbols.      (line  8088)
+* \bigwedge:                             Math symbols.      (line  8091)
+* \bmod:                                 Math functions.    (line  9077)
+* \boldmath:                             \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8967)
+* \boldmath <1>:                         \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8975)
+* \bot:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8094)
+* \bottomfraction:                       Floats.            (line  1990)
+* \bottomfraction <1>:                   Floats.            (line  1991)
+* \bowtie:                               Math symbols.      (line  8099)
+* \Box:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8102)
+* \breve:                                Math accents.      (line  9188)
+* \bullet:                               Math symbols.      (line  8107)
+* \c (cedilla accent):                   Accents.           (line 12263)
+* \cal:                                  Font styles.       (line  1367)
+* \cap:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8110)
+* \capitalacute:                         Accents.           (line 12231)
+* \capitalbreve:                         Accents.           (line 12289)
+* \capitalcaron:                         Accents.           (line 12293)
+* \capitalcedilla:                       Accents.           (line 12263)
+* \capitalcircumflex:                    Accents.           (line 12242)
+* \capitaldieresis:                      Accents.           (line 12227)
+* \capitaldotaccent:                     Accents.           (line 12267)
+* \capitalgrave:                         Accents.           (line 12246)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut:                  Accents.           (line 12271)
+* \capitalmacron:                        Accents.           (line 12238)
+* \capitalnewtie:                        Accents.           (line 12285)
+* \capitalogonek:                        Accents.           (line 12275)
+* \capitalring:                          Accents.           (line 12279)
+* \capitaltie:                           Accents.           (line 12285)
+* \capitaltilde:                         Accents.           (line 12250)
+* \caption:                              figure.            (line  3449)
+* \caption <1>:                          table.             (line  4989)
+* \cc:                                   \cc.               (line 13450)
+* \cdot:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8115)
+* \cdots:                                Dots.              (line  9018)
+* \centering:                            \centering.        (line  3088)
+* \chapter:                              Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \chapter <1>:                          \chapter.          (line  2185)
+* \check:                                Math accents.      (line  9191)
 * \CheckCommand:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  900)
+                                                            (line   960)
 * \CheckCommand*:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  900)
-* \chi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6092)
-* \circ:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6095)
-* \circle:                               \circle.            (line 3538)
-* \cite:                                 \cite.              (line 4336)
+                                                            (line   960)
+* \chi:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8118)
+* \circ:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8121)
+* \circle:                               \circle.           (line  4536)
+* \cite:                                 \cite.             (line  5449)
 * \ClassError:                           Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \ClassInfo:                            Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \ClassInfoNoLine:                      Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \ClassWarning:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \ClassWarningNoLine:                   Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
-* \cleardoublepage:                      \cleardoublepage.   (line 4654)
-* \clearpage:                            \clearpage.         (line 4663)
-* \cline:                                \cline.             (line 4243)
-* \closing:                              \closing.           (line 9565)
-* \clubsuit:                             Math symbols.       (line 6100)
-* \columnsep:                            \twocolumn.         (line 1564)
+                                                            (line   980)
+* \cleardoublepage:                      \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+                                                            (line  6083)
+* \clearpage:                            \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+                                                            (line  6083)
+* \cline:                                \cline.            (line  5297)
+* \closing:                              \closing.          (line 13466)
+* \clubsuit:                             Math symbols.      (line  8126)
+* \colon:                                Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9335)
+* \columnsep:                            \twocolumn.        (line  1644)
 * \columnsep <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1690)
+                                                            (line  1769)
 * \columnsep <2>:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1693)
-* \columnseprule:                        \twocolumn.         (line 1570)
+                                                            (line  1772)
+* \columnseprule:                        \twocolumn.        (line  1650)
 * \columnseprule <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1691)
+                                                            (line  1770)
 * \columnseprule <2>:                    Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1693)
-* \columnwidth:                          \twocolumn.         (line 1577)
+                                                            (line  1772)
+* \columnwidth:                          \twocolumn.        (line  1657)
 * \columnwidth <1>:                      Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1692)
+                                                            (line  1771)
 * \columnwidth <2>:                      Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1693)
-* \complement:                           Math symbols.       (line 6103)
-* \cong:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6109)
-* \contentsline:                         \addcontentsline.   (line 9365)
-* \coprod:                               Math symbols.       (line 6112)
-* \copyright:                            Text symbols.       (line 8884)
-* \cos:                                  Math functions.     (line 6887)
-* \cosh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6890)
-* \cot:                                  Math functions.     (line 6893)
-* \coth:                                 Math functions.     (line 6896)
-* \csc:                                  Math functions.     (line 6899)
-* \cup:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6115)
+                                                            (line  1772)
+* \complement:                           Math symbols.      (line  8129)
+* \cong:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8135)
+* \contentsline:                         \addcontentsline.  (line 12748)
+* \coprod:                               Math symbols.      (line  8138)
+* \copyright:                            Text symbols.      (line 12026)
+* \cos:                                  Math functions.    (line  9080)
+* \cosh:                                 Math functions.    (line  9083)
+* \cot:                                  Math functions.    (line  9086)
+* \coth:                                 Math functions.    (line  9089)
+* \csc:                                  Math functions.    (line  9092)
+* \cup:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8141)
 * \CurrentOption:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  939)
-* \d (dot-under accent):                 Accents.            (line 9109)
-* \dag:                                  Text symbols.       (line 8888)
-* \dagger:                               Math symbols.       (line 6120)
-* \dashbox:                              \dashbox.           (line 3593)
-* \dashv:                                Math symbols.       (line 6123)
-* \date{TEXT}:                           \maketitle.         (line 7243)
-* \day:                                  \day \month \year.  (line 5654)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction:                 \twocolumn.         (line 1611)
-* \dblfloatsep:                          \twocolumn.         (line 1617)
-* \dbltextfloatsep:                      \twocolumn.         (line 1624)
-* \dbltopfraction:                       \twocolumn.         (line 1589)
-* \dbltopnumber:                         \twocolumn.         (line 1629)
-* \ddag:                                 Text symbols.       (line 8891)
-* \ddagger:                              Math symbols.       (line 6127)
-* \ddot:                                 Math accents.       (line 6993)
-* \ddots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7095)
+                                                            (line   999)
+* \d (dot-under accent):                 Accents.           (line 12267)
+* \dag:                                  Text symbols.      (line 12030)
+* \dagger:                               Math symbols.      (line  8146)
+* \dashbox:                              \dashbox.          (line  4742)
+* \dashv:                                Math symbols.      (line  8149)
+* \date{TEXT}:                           \maketitle.        (line  9574)
+* \day:                                  \day & \month & \year.
+                                                            (line  7349)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction:                 \twocolumn.        (line  1690)
+* \dblfloatsep:                          \twocolumn.        (line  1696)
+* \dbltextfloatsep:                      \twocolumn.        (line  1703)
+* \dbltopfraction:                       \twocolumn.        (line  1669)
+* \dbltopnumber:                         \twocolumn.        (line  1708)
+* \ddag:                                 Text symbols.      (line 12033)
+* \ddagger:                              Math symbols.      (line  8153)
+* \ddot:                                 Math accents.      (line  9194)
+* \ddots:                                Dots.              (line  9022)
 * \DeclareGraphicsExtensions:            \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
-                                                             (line 8234)
+                                                            (line 11358)
 * \DeclareGraphicsRule:                  \DeclareGraphicsRule.
-                                                             (line 8273)
+                                                            (line 11398)
 * \DeclareOption:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
+                                                            (line  1005)
 * \DeclareOption*:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  945)
+                                                            (line  1005)
 * \DeclareRobustCommand:                 Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  975)
+                                                            (line  1035)
 * \DeclareRobustCommand*:                Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  975)
-* \deg:                                  Math functions.     (line 6902)
-* \Delta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6130)
-* \delta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6133)
-* \depth:                                Predefined lengths. (line 5799)
-* \det:                                  Math functions.     (line 6905)
+                                                            (line  1035)
+* \deg:                                  Math functions.    (line  9095)
+* \Delta:                                Math symbols.      (line  8156)
+* \delta:                                Math symbols.      (line  8159)
+* \det:                                  Math functions.    (line  9098)
 * \dh (d):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9170)
+                                                            (line 12312)
 * \DH (D):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9170)
-* \Diamond:                              Math symbols.       (line 6136)
-* \diamond:                              Math symbols.       (line 6140)
-* \diamondsuit:                          Math symbols.       (line 6144)
-* \dim:                                  Math functions.     (line 6908)
-* \displaystyle:                         Math formulas.      (line 5932)
-* \div:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6147)
+                                                            (line 12312)
+* \Diamond:                              Math symbols.      (line  8162)
+* \diamond:                              Math symbols.      (line  8166)
+* \diamondsuit:                          Math symbols.      (line  8170)
+* \dim:                                  Math functions.    (line  9101)
+* \displaystyle:                         Math formulas.     (line  7902)
+* \div:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8173)
 * \dj:                                   Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9176)
+                                                            (line 12318)
 * \DJ:                                   Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9176)
-* \documentclass:                        Document classes.   (line  669)
-* \dot:                                  Math accents.       (line 6996)
-* \doteq:                                Math symbols.       (line 6150)
-* \dotfill:                              \hrulefill \dotfill.
-                                                             (line 7521)
-* \dots:                                 Text symbols.       (line 8908)
-* \doublerulesep:                        tabular.            (line 4121)
-* \downarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6154)
-* \Downarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6158)
-* \ell:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6162)
-* \emph:                                 Font styles.        (line 1277)
-* \emptyset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6165)
-* \encl:                                 \encl.              (line 9577)
-* \end:                                  Environments.       (line 2340)
-* \enlargethispage:                      \enlargethispage.   (line 4676)
-* \enumi:                                enumerate.          (line 2718)
-* \enumii:                               enumerate.          (line 2718)
-* \enumiii:                              enumerate.          (line 2718)
-* \enumiv:                               enumerate.          (line 2718)
-* \epsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6169)
-* \equiv:                                Math symbols.       (line 6175)
-* \eta:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6178)
+                                                            (line 12318)
+* \documentclass:                        Document classes.  (line   729)
+* \dot:                                  Math accents.      (line  9197)
+* \doteq:                                Math symbols.      (line  8176)
+* \dotfill:                              \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+                                                            (line 10209)
+* \dots:                                 Text symbols.      (line 12050)
+* \doublerulesep:                        tabular.           (line  5174)
+* \downarrow:                            Math symbols.      (line  8180)
+* \Downarrow:                            Math symbols.      (line  8184)
+* \ell:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8188)
+* \emph:                                 Font styles.       (line  1349)
+* \emptyset:                             Math symbols.      (line  8191)
+* \encl:                                 \encl.             (line 13479)
+* \end:                                  Environments.      (line  2898)
+* \endinput:                             \endinput.         (line 12464)
+* \enlargethispage:                      \enlargethispage.  (line  6157)
+* \enspace:                              \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+                                                            (line  9782)
+* \enumi:                                enumerate.         (line  3309)
+* \enumii:                               enumerate.         (line  3309)
+* \enumiii:                              enumerate.         (line  3309)
+* \enumiv:                               enumerate.         (line  3309)
+* \epsilon:                              Math symbols.      (line  8195)
+* \equiv:                                Math symbols.      (line  8201)
+* \eta:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8204)
 * \evensidemargin:                       Document class options.
-                                                             (line  781)
+                                                            (line   841)
 * \evensidemargin <1>:                   Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1751)
+                                                            (line  1830)
 * \evensidemargin <2>:                   Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1752)
+                                                            (line  1831)
 * \ExecuteOptions:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1045)
-* \exists:                               Math symbols.       (line 6181)
-* \exp:                                  Math functions.     (line 6911)
-* \extracolsep:                          tabular.            (line 4069)
-* \fbox:                                 \fbox and \framebox.
-                                                             (line 7656)
+                                                            (line  1111)
+* \exists:                               Math symbols.      (line  8207)
+* \exp:                                  Math functions.    (line  9104)
+* \extracolsep:                          tabular.           (line  5114)
+* \fbox:                                 \fbox & \framebox. (line 10644)
 * \fboxrule:                             \framebox (picture).
-                                                             (line 3587)
-* \fboxrule <1>:                         \fbox and \framebox.
-                                                             (line 7668)
+                                                            (line  4719)
+* \fboxrule <1>:                         \fbox & \framebox. (line 10677)
+* \fboxrule <2>:                         \fbox & \framebox. (line 10676)
 * \fboxsep:                              \framebox (picture).
-                                                             (line 3587)
-* \fboxsep <1>:                          \fbox and \framebox.
-                                                             (line 7668)
-* \fill:                                 \hfill.             (line 7361)
-* \flat:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6184)
-* \floatpagefraction:                    Floats.             (line 1914)
-* \floatpagefraction <1>:                Floats.             (line 1915)
-* \floatsep:                             Floats.             (line 1930)
-* \floatsep <1>:                         Floats.             (line 1931)
-* \flushbottom:                          \flushbottom.       (line 1658)
-* \fnsymbol, and footnotes:              \footnote.          (line 4744)
+                                                            (line  4719)
+* \fboxsep <1>:                          \fbox & \framebox. (line 10682)
+* \fboxsep <2>:                          \fbox & \framebox. (line 10681)
+* \fill:                                 \hfill.            (line  9869)
+* \flat:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8210)
+* \floatpagefraction:                    Floats.            (line  1994)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>:                Floats.            (line  1995)
+* \floatsep:                             Floats.            (line  2010)
+* \floatsep <1>:                         Floats.            (line  2011)
+* \flushbottom:                          \flushbottom.      (line  1737)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes:              \footnote.         (line  6260)
 * \fnsymbol{COUNTER}:                    \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5525)
+                                                            (line  7197)
 * \fontencoding:                         Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1397)
+                                                            (line  1476)
 * \fontfamily:                           Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1407)
+                                                            (line  1486)
 * \fontseries:                           Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1434)
+                                                            (line  1513)
 * \fontshape:                            Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1474)
+                                                            (line  1553)
 * \fontsize:                             Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1487)
-* \footnote:                             \footnote.          (line 4727)
-* \footnotemark:                         \footnotemark.      (line 4765)
-* \footnoterule:                         Footnote parameters.
-                                                             (line 4916)
-* \footnotesep:                          Footnote parameters.
-                                                             (line 4922)
-* \footnotesize:                         Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \footnotetext:                         \footnotetext.      (line 4797)
+                                                            (line  1566)
+* \footnote:                             \footnote.         (line  6242)
+* \footnotemark:                         \footnotemark.     (line  6308)
+* \footnoterule:                         \footnote.         (line  6270)
+* \footnotesep:                          \footnote.         (line  6282)
+* \footnotesize:                         Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \footnotetext:                         \footnotetext.     (line  6364)
 * \footskip:                             Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1710)
+                                                            (line  1789)
 * \footskip <1>:                         Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1711)
-* \forall:                               Math symbols.       (line 6187)
-* \frac:                                 Math miscellany.    (line 7099)
-* \frac{NUM}{DEN}:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7098)
-* \frame:                                \frame.             (line 3608)
+                                                            (line  1790)
+* \forall:                               Math symbols.      (line  8213)
+* \frac:                                 \frac.             (line  9371)
+* \frame:                                \frame.            (line  4730)
 * \framebox:                             \framebox (picture).
-                                                             (line 3579)
-* \framebox <1>:                         \fbox and \framebox.
-                                                             (line 7656)
-* \frenchspacing:                        \frenchspacing.     (line 7451)
-* \frown:                                Math symbols.       (line 6190)
-* \fussy:                                \fussy.             (line 4596)
-* \Gamma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6193)
-* \gamma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6196)
-* \gcd:                                  Math functions.     (line 6914)
-* \ge:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6199)
-* \geq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6203)
-* \gets:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6207)
-* \gg:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6210)
-* \glossary:                             Glossaries.         (line 9389)
-* \glossaryentry:                        Glossaries.         (line 9392)
-* \graphicspath:                         \graphicspath.      (line 8172)
-* \grave:                                Math accents.       (line 6999)
-* \guillemotleft (<<):                   Text symbols.       (line 8900)
-* \guillemotright (>>):                  Text symbols.       (line 8901)
-* \guilsinglleft (<):                    Text symbols.       (line 8902)
-* \guilsinglright (>):                   Text symbols.       (line 8903)
-* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent):          Accents.            (line 9113)
-* \hat:                                  Math accents.       (line 7002)
-* \hbar:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6214)
+                                                            (line  4694)
+* \framebox <1>:                         \fbox & \framebox. (line 10644)
+* \frenchspacing:                        \frenchspacing.    (line 10023)
+* \frontmatter:                          \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* \frown:                                Math symbols.      (line  8216)
+* \fussy:                                \fussy & \sloppy.  (line  5962)
+* \Gamma:                                Math symbols.      (line  8219)
+* \gamma:                                Math symbols.      (line  8222)
+* \gcd:                                  Math functions.    (line  9107)
+* \ge:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8225)
+* \geq:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8229)
+* \gets:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8233)
+* \gg:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8236)
+* \gls:                                  \gls.              (line 13315)
+* \graphicspath:                         \graphicspath.     (line 11296)
+* \graphpaper:                           \graphpaper.       (line  4440)
+* \grave:                                Math accents.      (line  9200)
+* \guillemotleft (<<):                   Text symbols.      (line 12042)
+* \guillemotright (>>):                  Text symbols.      (line 12043)
+* \guilsinglleft (<):                    Text symbols.      (line 12044)
+* \guilsinglright (>):                   Text symbols.      (line 12045)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent):          Accents.           (line 12271)
+* \hat:                                  Math accents.      (line  9203)
+* \hbar:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8240)
 * \headheight:                           Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1698)
+                                                            (line  1777)
 * \headheight <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1699)
+                                                            (line  1778)
 * \headsep:                              Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1703)
+                                                            (line  1782)
 * \headsep <1>:                          Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1704)
-* \heartsuit:                            Math symbols.       (line 6217)
-* \height:                               Predefined lengths. (line 5797)
-* \hfill:                                \hfill.             (line 7358)
-* \hline:                                \hline.             (line 4265)
-* \hom:                                  Math functions.     (line 6917)
-* \hookleftarrow:                        Math symbols.       (line 6220)
-* \hookrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6223)
-* \hrulefill:                            \hrulefill \dotfill.
-                                                             (line 7521)
+                                                            (line  1783)
+* \heartsuit:                            Math symbols.      (line  8243)
+* \hfill:                                \hfill.            (line  9857)
+* \hline:                                \hline.            (line  5320)
+* \hom:                                  Math functions.    (line  9110)
+* \hookleftarrow:                        Math symbols.      (line  8246)
+* \hookrightarrow:                       Math symbols.      (line  8249)
+* \hrulefill:                            \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+                                                            (line 10209)
 * \hsize:                                Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1803)
+                                                            (line  1882)
 * \hsize <1>:                            Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1803)
-* \hspace:                               \hspace.            (line 7331)
-* \huge:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \Huge:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \hyphenation:                          \hyphenation.       (line 4614)
-* \i (dotless i):                        Accents.            (line 9117)
-* \iff:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6226)
+                                                            (line  1882)
+* \hspace:                               \hspace.           (line  9810)
+* \hss:                                  \hss.              (line  9890)
+* \huge:                                 Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \Huge:                                 Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \hyphenation:                          \hyphenation.      (line  6003)
+* \i (dotless i):                        Accents.           (line 12221)
+* \iff:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8252)
 * \IfFileExists:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1006)
+                                                            (line  1067)
 * \ignorespaces:                         \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
-                                                             (line 5403)
+                                                            (line  7063)
 * \ignorespacesafterend:                 \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
-                                                             (line 5403)
+                                                            (line  7063)
 * \ij (ij):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9182)
+                                                            (line 12324)
 * \IJ (IJ):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9182)
-* \Im:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6230)
-* \imath:                                Math accents.       (line 7005)
-* \in:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6233)
-* \include:                              \include.           (line 9266)
-* \includegraphics:                      \includegraphics.   (line 8352)
-* \includeonly:                          \includeonly.       (line 9284)
-* \indent:                               \indent.            (line 5822)
-* \index:                                Indexes.            (line 9405)
-* \indexentry:                           Indexes.            (line 9408)
-* \indexspace:                           Indexes.            (line 9428)
-* \inf:                                  Math functions.     (line 6920)
-* \infty:                                Math symbols.       (line 6239)
-* \input:                                \input.             (line 9299)
+                                                            (line 12324)
+* \Im:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8256)
+* \imath:                                Math symbols.      (line  8259)
+* \in:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8263)
+* \include:                              \include & \includeonly.
+                                                            (line 12495)
+* \includegraphics:                      \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* \includeonly:                          \include & \includeonly.
+                                                            (line 12495)
+* \indent:                               \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7722)
+* \index:                                Indexes.           (line 12884)
+* \index <1>:                            \index.            (line 12920)
+* \indexentry:                           \index.            (line 13020)
+* \indexspace:                           makeindex.         (line 13088)
+* \inf:                                  Math functions.    (line  9113)
+* \infty:                                Math symbols.      (line  8268)
+* \input:                                \input.            (line 12612)
 * \InputIfFileExists:                    Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1006)
-* \int:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6242)
-* \intextsep:                            Floats.             (line 1934)
-* \intextsep <1>:                        Floats.             (line 1935)
-* \iota:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6245)
-* \it:                                   Font styles.        (line 1294)
-* \item:                                 description.        (line 2567)
-* \item <1>:                             enumerate.          (line 2700)
-* \item <2>:                             itemize.            (line 2979)
-* \item <3>:                             itemize.            (line 3001)
-* \itemindent:                           list.               (line 3141)
-* \itemsep:                              list.               (line 3145)
-* \itshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1251)
-* \j (dotless j):                        Accents.            (line 9120)
-* \jmath:                                Math accents.       (line 7008)
-* \Join:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6248)
-* \k (ogonek):                           Accents.            (line 9124)
-* \kappa:                                Math symbols.       (line 6252)
-* \ker:                                  Math functions.     (line 6923)
-* \kill:                                 tabbing.            (line 3871)
+                                                            (line  1067)
+* \int:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8271)
+* \intextsep:                            Floats.            (line  2014)
+* \intextsep <1>:                        Floats.            (line  2015)
+* \iota:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8274)
+* \it:                                   Font styles.       (line  1370)
+* \item:                                 description.       (line  3155)
+* \item <1>:                             enumerate.         (line  3291)
+* \item <2>:                             itemize.           (line  3624)
+* \item <3>:                             itemize.           (line  3646)
+* \itemindent:                           list.              (line  3789)
+* \itemsep:                              list.              (line  3793)
+* \itshape:                              Font styles.       (line  1323)
+* \j (dotless j):                        Accents.           (line 12221)
+* \jmath:                                Math symbols.      (line  8281)
+* \Join:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8277)
+* \k (ogonek):                           Accents.           (line 12275)
+* \kappa:                                Math symbols.      (line  8285)
+* \ker:                                  Math functions.    (line  9116)
+* \kill:                                 tabbing.           (line  4903)
 * \l (/l):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9186)
+                                                            (line 12328)
 * \L (/L):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9186)
-* \label:                                \label.             (line 2246)
-* \labelenumi:                           enumerate.          (line 2727)
-* \labelenumii:                          enumerate.          (line 2727)
-* \labelenumiii:                         enumerate.          (line 2727)
-* \labelenumiv:                          enumerate.          (line 2727)
-* \labelitemi:                           itemize.            (line 3008)
-* \labelitemii:                          itemize.            (line 3008)
-* \labelitemiii:                         itemize.            (line 3008)
-* \labelitemiv:                          itemize.            (line 3008)
-* \labelsep:                             list.               (line 3157)
-* \labelwidth:                           list.               (line 3162)
-* \Lambda:                               Math symbols.       (line 6255)
-* \lambda:                               Math symbols.       (line 6258)
-* \land:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6261)
-* \langle:                               Math symbols.       (line 6266)
-* \large:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \Large:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \LARGE:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \LaTeX:                                Text symbols.       (line 8894)
-* \LaTeXe:                               Text symbols.       (line 8897)
-* \lbrace:                               Math symbols.       (line 6271)
-* \lbrack:                               Math symbols.       (line 6275)
-* \lceil:                                Math symbols.       (line 6279)
-* \ldots:                                Text symbols.       (line 8907)
-* \le:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6283)
-* \leadsto:                              Math symbols.       (line 6287)
-* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2:        Math miscellany.    (line 7101)
-* \Leftarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6294)
-* \leftarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6299)
-* \lefteqn:                              eqnarray.           (line 2784)
-* \leftharpoondown:                      Math symbols.       (line 6303)
-* \leftharpoonup:                        Math symbols.       (line 6306)
-* \leftmargin:                           itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmargin <1>:                       list.               (line 3182)
-* \leftmargini:                          itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmarginii:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmarginiii:                        itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmarginiv:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmarginv:                          itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \leftmarginvi:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
-* \Leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6309)
-* \leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6314)
-* \leq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6319)
-* \lfloor:                               Math symbols.       (line 6323)
-* \lg:                                   Math functions.     (line 6926)
-* \lhd:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6326)
-* \lim:                                  Math functions.     (line 6929)
-* \liminf:                               Math functions.     (line 6932)
-* \limsup:                               Math functions.     (line 6935)
-* \line:                                 \line.              (line 3619)
+                                                            (line 12328)
+* \label:                                \label.            (line  2787)
+* \labelenumi:                           enumerate.         (line  3318)
+* \labelenumii:                          enumerate.         (line  3318)
+* \labelenumiii:                         enumerate.         (line  3318)
+* \labelenumiv:                          enumerate.         (line  3318)
+* \labelitemi:                           itemize.           (line  3653)
+* \labelitemii:                          itemize.           (line  3653)
+* \labelitemiii:                         itemize.           (line  3653)
+* \labelitemiv:                          itemize.           (line  3653)
+* \labelsep:                             list.              (line  3805)
+* \labelwidth:                           list.              (line  3810)
+* \Lambda:                               Math symbols.      (line  8288)
+* \lambda:                               Math symbols.      (line  8291)
+* \land:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8294)
+* \langle:                               Math symbols.      (line  8299)
+* \large:                                Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \Large:                                Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \LARGE:                                Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \LaTeX:                                Text symbols.      (line 12036)
+* \LaTeXe:                               Text symbols.      (line 12039)
+* \lbrace:                               Math symbols.      (line  8304)
+* \lbrack:                               Math symbols.      (line  8308)
+* \lceil:                                Math symbols.      (line  8312)
+* \ldots:                                Dots.              (line  9026)
+* \ldots <1>:                            Text symbols.      (line 12049)
+* \le:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8316)
+* \leadsto:                              Math symbols.      (line  8320)
+* \left:                                 \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* \Leftarrow:                            Math symbols.      (line  8327)
+* \leftarrow:                            Math symbols.      (line  8332)
+* \lefteqn:                              eqnarray.          (line  3375)
+* \leftharpoondown:                      Math symbols.      (line  8336)
+* \leftharpoonup:                        Math symbols.      (line  8339)
+* \leftmargin:                           itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmargin <1>:                       list.              (line  3830)
+* \leftmargini:                          itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmarginii:                         itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmarginiii:                        itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmarginiv:                         itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmarginv:                          itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \leftmarginvi:                         itemize.           (line  3672)
+* \Leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.      (line  8342)
+* \leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.      (line  8347)
+* \leq:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8352)
+* \lfloor:                               Math symbols.      (line  8356)
+* \lg:                                   Math functions.    (line  9119)
+* \lhd:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8359)
+* \lim:                                  Math functions.    (line  9122)
+* \liminf:                               Math functions.    (line  9125)
+* \limsup:                               Math functions.    (line  9128)
+* \line:                                 \line.             (line  4464)
 * \linebreak:                            \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
-                                                             (line 4630)
+                                                            (line  6021)
 * \linespread:                           Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1511)
-* \linethickness:                        \linethickness.     (line 3633)
+                                                            (line  1590)
+* \linethickness:                        \linethickness.    (line  4508)
 * \linewidth:                            Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1717)
+                                                            (line  1796)
 * \linewidth <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1718)
-* \listoffigures:                        Tables of contents. (line 9327)
-* \listoftables:                         Tables of contents. (line 9327)
-* \listparindent:                        list.               (line 3199)
-* \ll:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6334)
-* \ln:                                   Math functions.     (line 6938)
-* \lnot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6338)
+                                                            (line  1797)
+* \listoffigures:                        Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* \listoftables:                         Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* \listparindent:                        list.              (line  3847)
+* \ll:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8367)
+* \ln:                                   Math functions.    (line  9131)
+* \lnot:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8371)
 * \LoadClass:                            Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1023)
+                                                            (line  1087)
 * \LoadClassWithOptions:                 Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1023)
-* \location:                             \location.          (line 9593)
-* \log:                                  Math functions.     (line 6941)
-* \longleftarrow:                        Math symbols.       (line 6341)
-* \longleftrightarrow:                   Math symbols.       (line 6346)
-* \longmapsto:                           Math symbols.       (line 6350)
-* \longrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6355)
-* \lor:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6360)
-* \lq:                                   Text symbols.       (line 8913)
-* \makebox:                              \makebox.           (line 7692)
-* \makebox (for picture):                \makebox (picture). (line 3551)
-* \makeglossary:                         Glossaries.         (line 9387)
-* \makeindex:                            Indexes.            (line 9402)
-* \makelabel:                            list.               (line 3114)
-* \makelabels:                           \makelabels.        (line 9603)
-* \maketitle:                            \maketitle.         (line 7232)
-* \mapsto:                               Math symbols.       (line 6363)
-* \marginpar:                            Marginal notes.     (line 5854)
+                                                            (line  1087)
+* \location:                             \location.         (line 13494)
+* \log:                                  Math functions.    (line  9134)
+* \longleftarrow:                        Math symbols.      (line  8374)
+* \longleftrightarrow:                   Math symbols.      (line  8379)
+* \longmapsto:                           Math symbols.      (line  8383)
+* \longrightarrow:                       Math symbols.      (line  8388)
+* \lor:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8393)
+* \lq:                                   Text symbols.      (line 12055)
+* \mainmatter:                           \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* \makebox:                              \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10555)
+* \makebox (for picture):                \makebox (picture).
+                                                            (line  4656)
+* \makeglossary:                         Glossaries.        (line 13208)
+* \makeglossary <1>:                     Glossaries.        (line 13245)
+* \makeindex:                            Indexes.           (line 12884)
+* \makelabel:                            list.              (line  3766)
+* \makelabels:                           \makelabels.       (line 13504)
+* \maketitle:                            \maketitle.        (line  9530)
+* \mapsto:                               Math symbols.      (line  8396)
+* \marginpar:                            Marginal notes.    (line  7798)
 * \marginparpush:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1724)
+                                                            (line  1803)
 * \marginparpush <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1727)
-* \marginparpush <2>:                    Marginal notes.     (line 5884)
-* \marginparsep:                         Marginal notes.     (line 5888)
+                                                            (line  1806)
+* \marginparpush <2>:                    Marginal notes.    (line  7827)
+* \marginparsep:                         Marginal notes.    (line  7831)
 * \marginparwidth:                       Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1726)
+                                                            (line  1805)
 * \marginparwidth <1>:                   Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1727)
-* \marginparwidth <2>:                   Marginal notes.     (line 5892)
+                                                            (line  1806)
+* \marginparwidth <2>:                   Marginal notes.    (line  7835)
 * \marginsep:                            Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1725)
+                                                            (line  1804)
 * \marginsep <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1727)
-* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}:                \pagestyle.         (line 7306)
-* \markright{RIGHT}:                     \pagestyle.         (line 7313)
-* \mathbf:                               Font styles.        (line 1330)
-* \mathcal:                              Font styles.        (line 1346)
-* \mathdollar:                           Math miscellany.    (line 7106)
-* \mathellipsis:                         Math miscellany.    (line 7109)
-* \mathnormal:                           Font styles.        (line 1343)
-* \mathparagraph:                        Math miscellany.    (line 7112)
-* \mathring:                             Math accents.       (line 7011)
-* \mathrm:                               Font styles.        (line 1327)
-* \mathsection:                          Math miscellany.    (line 7115)
-* \mathsf:                               Font styles.        (line 1333)
-* \mathsterling:                         Math miscellany.    (line 7118)
-* \mathtt:                               Font styles.        (line 1336)
-* \mathunderscore:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7121)
-* \mathversion:                          Font styles.        (line 1348)
-* \max:                                  Math functions.     (line 6944)
-* \mbox:                                 \mbox.              (line 7649)
-* \mbox, and LR mode:                    Modes.              (line 7174)
-* \mdseries:                             Font styles.        (line 1254)
-* \medskip:                              \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7574)
-* \medskipamount:                        \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7575)
+                                                            (line  1806)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}:      \pagestyle.        (line  9729)
+* \markright{RIGHT}:                     \pagestyle.        (line  9738)
+* \mathbf:                               Font styles.       (line  1400)
+* \mathcal:                              Font styles.       (line  1416)
+* \mathdollar:                           Math symbols.      (line  8905)
+* \mathnormal:                           Font styles.       (line  1413)
+* \mathparagraph:                        Math symbols.      (line  8908)
+* \mathring:                             Math accents.      (line  9206)
+* \mathrm:                               Font styles.       (line  1397)
+* \mathsection:                          Math symbols.      (line  8911)
+* \mathsf:                               Font styles.       (line  1403)
+* \mathsterling:                         Math symbols.      (line  8914)
+* \mathtt:                               Font styles.       (line  1406)
+* \mathunderscore:                       Math symbols.      (line  8917)
+* \mathversion:                          Font styles.       (line  1418)
+* \max:                                  Math functions.    (line  9137)
+* \mbox:                                 \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10555)
+* \mdseries:                             Font styles.       (line  1326)
+* \medskip:                              \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10285)
+* \medskipamount:                        \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10286)
 * \medspace:                             Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7044)
-* \mho:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6367)
-* \mid:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6372)
-* \min:                                  Math functions.     (line 6947)
-* \models:                               Math symbols.       (line 6382)
-* \month:                                \day \month \year.  (line 5654)
-* \mp:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6387)
-* \mu:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6390)
-* \multicolumn:                          \multicolumn.       (line 4136)
-* \multiput:                             \multiput.          (line 3657)
-* \nabla:                                Math symbols.       (line 6393)
-* \name:                                 \name.              (line 9625)
-* \natural:                              Math symbols.       (line 6396)
-* \ne:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6399)
-* \nearrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6402)
+                                                            (line  9294)
+* \mho:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8400)
+* \mid:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8405)
+* \min:                                  Math functions.    (line  9140)
+* \models:                               Math symbols.      (line  8415)
+* \month:                                \day & \month & \year.
+                                                            (line  7349)
+* \mp:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8420)
+* \mu:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8423)
+* \multicolumn:                          \multicolumn.      (line  5189)
+* \multiput:                             \multiput.         (line  4392)
+* \nabla:                                Math symbols.      (line  8426)
+* \name:                                 \name.             (line 13561)
+* \natural:                              Math symbols.      (line  8429)
+* \ne:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8432)
+* \nearrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8435)
 * \NeedsTeXFormat:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1055)
-* \neg:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6405)
-* \neq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6409)
+                                                            (line  1121)
+* \neg:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8438)
+* \negthinspace:                         Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9312)
+* \negthinspace <1>:                     \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* \neq:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8442)
 * \newcommand:                           \newcommand & \renewcommand.
-                                                             (line 4937)
-* \newcounter:                           \newcounter.        (line 5043)
+                                                            (line  6490)
+* \newcounter:                           \newcounter.       (line  6643)
 * \newenvironment:                       \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5097)
-* \newfont:                              \newfont.           (line 5316)
-* \newlength:                            \newlength.         (line 5067)
-* \newline:                              \newline.           (line 4556)
-* \NEWLINE:                              \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7419)
-* \newpage:                              \newpage.           (line 4670)
-* \newsavebox:                           \newsavebox.        (line 5082)
-* \newtheorem:                           \newtheorem.        (line 5204)
-* \newtie:                               Accents.            (line 9135)
+                                                            (line  6733)
+* \newfont:                              \newfont.          (line  6979)
+* \newglossaryentry:                     \newglossaryentry. (line 13256)
+* \newlength:                            \newlength.        (line  6684)
+* \newline:                              \newline.          (line  5880)
+* \NEWLINE:                              \(SPACE).          (line 10053)
+* \newpage:                              \newpage.          (line  6124)
+* \newsavebox:                           \newsavebox.       (line  6706)
+* \newtheorem:                           \newtheorem.       (line  6867)
+* \newtie:                               Accents.           (line 12285)
 * \ng:                                   Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9190)
+                                                            (line 12332)
 * \NG:                                   Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9190)
-* \ni:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6412)
-* \nocite:                               \nocite.            (line 4351)
-* \nocorr:                               Font styles.        (line 1239)
-* \nocorrlist:                           Font styles.        (line 1239)
-* \nofiles:                              Tables of contents. (line 9332)
-* \noindent:                             \noindent.          (line 5833)
+                                                            (line 12332)
+* \ni:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8445)
+* \nocite:                               \nocite.           (line  5497)
+* \nocorr:                               Font styles.       (line  1311)
+* \nocorrlist:                           Font styles.       (line  1311)
+* \nofiles:                              \nofiles.          (line 12859)
+* \noindent:                             \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7722)
 * \nolinebreak:                          \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
-                                                             (line 4630)
-* \nonfrenchspacing:                     \frenchspacing.     (line 7451)
-* \nonumber:                             eqnarray.           (line 2779)
+                                                            (line  6021)
+* \nonfrenchspacing:                     \frenchspacing.    (line 10023)
+* \nonumber:                             eqnarray.          (line  3370)
 * \nopagebreak:                          \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
-                                                             (line 4691)
-* \normalfont:                           Font styles.        (line 1275)
-* \normalmarginpar:                      Marginal notes.     (line 5872)
-* \normalsfcodes:                        \normalsfcodes.     (line 7464)
-* \normalsize:                           Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \not:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6417)
-* \notin:                                Math symbols.       (line 6425)
-* \nu:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6429)
-* \nwarrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6432)
+                                                            (line  6182)
+* \normalfont:                           Font styles.       (line  1347)
+* \normalmarginpar:                      Marginal notes.    (line  7814)
+* \normalsfcodes:                        \normalsfcodes.    (line 10043)
+* \normalsize:                           Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \not:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8450)
+* \notin:                                Math symbols.      (line  8458)
+* \nu:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8462)
+* \nwarrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8465)
 * \o (/o):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9194)
+                                                            (line 12336)
 * \O (/O):                               Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9194)
+                                                            (line 12336)
 * \obeycr:                               \obeycr & \restorecr.
-                                                             (line 4547)
+                                                            (line  5840)
 * \oddsidemargin:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  781)
+                                                            (line   841)
 * \oddsidemargin <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1750)
+                                                            (line  1829)
 * \oddsidemargin <2>:                    Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1752)
-* \odot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6435)
+                                                            (line  1831)
+* \odot:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8468)
 * \oe (oe):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9198)
+                                                            (line 12340)
 * \OE (OE):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9198)
-* \oint:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6440)
-* \oldstylenums:                         Font styles.        (line 1352)
-* \Omega:                                Math symbols.       (line 6444)
-* \omega:                                Math symbols.       (line 6447)
-* \ominus:                               Math symbols.       (line 6450)
-* \onecolumn:                            \onecolumn.         (line 1539)
-* \opening:                              \opening.           (line 9635)
-* \oplus:                                Math symbols.       (line 6453)
+                                                            (line 12340)
+* \oint:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8473)
+* \oldstylenums:                         Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* \Omega:                                Math symbols.      (line  8477)
+* \omega:                                Math symbols.      (line  8480)
+* \ominus:                               Math symbols.      (line  8483)
+* \onecolumn:                            \onecolumn.        (line  1618)
+* \opening:                              \opening.          (line 13571)
+* \oplus:                                Math symbols.      (line  8486)
 * \OptionNotUsed:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1071)
-* \oslash:                               Math symbols.       (line 6457)
-* \otimes:                               Math symbols.       (line 6460)
-* \oval:                                 \oval.              (line 3668)
-* \overbrace{MATH}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7124)
-* \overline{TEXT}:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7128)
-* \owns:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6465)
-* \P:                                    Text symbols.       (line 8916)
+                                                            (line  1139)
+* \oslash:                               Math symbols.      (line  8490)
+* \otimes:                               Math symbols.      (line  8493)
+* \oval:                                 \oval.             (line  4555)
+* \overbrace{MATH}:                      Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9261)
+* \overline{TEXT}:                       Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9242)
+* \owns:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8498)
+* \P:                                    Text symbols.      (line 12058)
 * \PackageError:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \PackageInfo:                          Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \PackageInfoNoLine:                    Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \PackageWarning:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \PackageWarningNoLine:                 Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line  920)
+                                                            (line   980)
 * \pagebreak:                            \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
-                                                             (line 4691)
-* \pagenumbering:                        \pagenumbering.     (line 7258)
-* \pageref:                              \pageref.           (line 2297)
-* \pagestyle:                            \pagestyle.         (line 7283)
+                                                            (line  6182)
+* \pagenumbering:                        \pagenumbering.    (line  9602)
+* \pageref:                              \pageref.          (line  2845)
+* \pagestyle:                            \pagestyle.        (line  9660)
 * \paperheight:                          Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1763)
+                                                            (line  1842)
 * \paperheight <1>:                      Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1764)
+                                                            (line  1843)
 * \paperwidth:                           Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1769)
+                                                            (line  1848)
 * \paperwidth <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1770)
-* \paragraph:                            Sectioning.         (line 1980)
-* \parallel:                             Math symbols.       (line 6470)
-* \parbox:                               \parbox.            (line 7717)
-* \parindent:                            minipage.           (line 3446)
-* \parindent <1>:                        \indent.            (line 5822)
-* \parsep:                               list.               (line 3205)
-* \parskip:                              \parskip.           (line 5848)
-* \parskip example:                      itemize.            (line 3046)
-* \part:                                 Sectioning.         (line 1974)
-* \partial:                              Math symbols.       (line 6473)
-* \partopsep:                            list.               (line 3214)
+                                                            (line  1849)
+* \par:                                  \par.              (line  7671)
+* \paragraph:                            Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \paragraph <1>:                        \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* \parallel:                             Math symbols.      (line  8503)
+* \parbox:                               \parbox.           (line 10711)
+* \parindent:                            minipage.          (line  4186)
+* \parindent <1>:                        \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7722)
+* \parindent <2>:                        \parindent & \parskip.
+                                                            (line  7771)
+* \parsep:                               list.              (line  3853)
+* \parskip:                              \parindent & \parskip.
+                                                            (line  7771)
+* \parskip example:                      itemize.           (line  3691)
+* \part:                                 Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \part <1>:                             \part.             (line  2131)
+* \partial:                              Math symbols.      (line  8506)
+* \partopsep:                            list.              (line  3862)
 * \PassOptionsToClass:                   Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1077)
+                                                            (line  1145)
 * \PassOptionsToPackage:                 Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1077)
+                                                            (line  1145)
 * \pdfpageheight:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  737)
+                                                            (line   797)
 * \pdfpagewidth:                         Document class options.
-                                                             (line  737)
-* \perp:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6476)
-* \phi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6481)
-* \Pi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6485)
-* \pi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6488)
-* \pm:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6492)
-* \pmod:                                 Math functions.     (line 6950)
-* \poptabs:                              tabbing.            (line 3877)
-* \poptabs <1>:                          tabbing.            (line 3878)
-* \pounds:                               Text symbols.       (line 8920)
-* \Pr:                                   Math functions.     (line 6953)
-* \prec:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6495)
-* \preceq:                               Math symbols.       (line 6498)
-* \prime:                                Math symbols.       (line 6503)
-* \printindex:                           Indexes.            (line 9424)
+                                                            (line   797)
+* \perp:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8509)
+* \phi:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8514)
+* \Pi:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8518)
+* \pi:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8521)
+* \pm:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8525)
+* \pmod:                                 Math functions.    (line  9143)
+* \poptabs:                              tabbing.           (line  4909)
+* \poptabs <1>:                          tabbing.           (line  4910)
+* \pounds:                               Text symbols.      (line 12062)
+* \Pr:                                   Math functions.    (line  9146)
+* \prec:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8528)
+* \preceq:                               Math symbols.      (line  8531)
+* \prime:                                Math symbols.      (line  8536)
+* \printglossaries:                      Glossaries.        (line 13208)
+* \printglossaries <1>:                  Glossaries.        (line 13245)
+* \printindex:                           \printindex.       (line 13193)
+* \printindex <1>:                       \printindex.       (line 13197)
 * \ProcessOptions:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1111)
+                                                            (line  1182)
 * \ProcessOptions*:                      Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1111)
-* \prod:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6512)
-* \propto:                               Math symbols.       (line 6515)
-* \protect:                              \protect.           (line 5351)
-* \providecommand:                       \providecommand.    (line 5028)
+                                                            (line  1182)
+* \prod:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8545)
+* \propto:                               Math symbols.      (line  8548)
+* \protect:                              \protect.          (line  7011)
+* \providecommand:                       \providecommand.   (line  6615)
 * \ProvidesClass:                        Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1149)
+                                                            (line  1220)
 * \ProvidesFile:                         Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1180)
+                                                            (line  1253)
 * \ProvidesPackage:                      Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1149)
-* \ps:                                   \ps.                (line 9648)
-* \Psi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6518)
-* \psi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6521)
-* \pushtabs:                             tabbing.            (line 3880)
-* \put:                                  \put.               (line 3695)
+                                                            (line  1220)
+* \ps:                                   \ps.               (line 13583)
+* \Psi:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8551)
+* \psi:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8554)
+* \pushtabs:                             tabbing.           (line  4912)
+* \put:                                  \put.              (line  4374)
+* \qbezier:                              \qbezier.          (line  4415)
 * \qquad:                                Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7061)
+                                                            (line  9323)
+* \qquad <1>:                            \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+                                                            (line  9782)
 * \quad:                                 Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7055)
-* \quotedblbase (,,):                    Text symbols.       (line 8924)
-* \quotesinglbase (,):                   Text symbols.       (line 8925)
-* \r (ring accent):                      Accents.            (line 9129)
-* \raggedbottom:                         \raggedbottom.      (line 1679)
-* \raggedleft:                           \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
-* \raggedright:                          \raggedright.       (line 2940)
-* \raisebox:                             \raisebox.          (line 7760)
-* \rangle:                               Math symbols.       (line 6524)
-* \rbrace:                               Math symbols.       (line 6528)
-* \rbrack:                               Math symbols.       (line 6532)
-* \rceil:                                Math symbols.       (line 6536)
-* \Re:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6539)
-* \ref:                                  \ref.               (line 2318)
-* \reflectbox:                           \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* \refname:                              thebibliography.    (line 4302)
-* \refstepcounter:                       \refstepcounter.    (line 5633)
+                                                            (line  9317)
+* \quad <1>:                             \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+                                                            (line  9782)
+* \quotedblbase (,,):                    Text symbols.      (line 12066)
+* \quotesinglbase (,):                   Text symbols.      (line 12067)
+* \r (ring accent):                      Accents.           (line 12279)
+* \raggedbottom:                         \raggedbottom.     (line  1758)
+* \raggedleft:                           \raggedleft.       (line  3599)
+* \raggedright:                          \raggedright.      (line  3548)
+* \raisebox:                             \raisebox.         (line 10763)
+* \rangle:                               Math symbols.      (line  8557)
+* \rbrace:                               Math symbols.      (line  8562)
+* \rbrack:                               Math symbols.      (line  8566)
+* \rceil:                                Math symbols.      (line  8570)
+* \Re:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8573)
+* \ref:                                  \ref.              (line  2869)
+* \reflectbox:                           \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* \refstepcounter:                       \refstepcounter.   (line  7315)
 * \renewenvironment:                     \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
-                                                             (line 5097)
+                                                            (line  6733)
 * \RequirePackage:                       Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1189)
+                                                            (line  1262)
 * \RequirePackageWithOptions:            Class and package commands.
-                                                             (line 1189)
-* \resizebox:                            \resizebox.         (line 8754)
+                                                            (line  1262)
+* \resizebox:                            \resizebox.        (line 11897)
 * \restorecr:                            \obeycr & \restorecr.
-                                                             (line 4547)
-* \restriction:                          Math symbols.       (line 6544)
-* \revemptyset:                          Math symbols.       (line 6549)
-* \reversemarginpar:                     Marginal notes.     (line 5872)
-* \rfloor:                               Math symbols.       (line 6554)
-* \rhd:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6558)
-* \rho:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6565)
-* \right:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7102)
-* \Rightarrow:                           Math symbols.       (line 6569)
-* \rightarrow:                           Math symbols.       (line 6573)
-* \rightharpoondown:                     Math symbols.       (line 6578)
-* \rightharpoonup:                       Math symbols.       (line 6581)
-* \rightleftharpoons:                    Math symbols.       (line 6584)
-* \rightmargin:                          list.               (line 3229)
-* \rm:                                   Font styles.        (line 1297)
-* \rmfamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1248)
+                                                            (line  5840)
+* \restriction:                          Math symbols.      (line  8578)
+* \revemptyset:                          Math symbols.      (line  8583)
+* \reversemarginpar:                     Marginal notes.    (line  7814)
+* \rfloor:                               Math symbols.      (line  8588)
+* \rhd:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8592)
+* \rho:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8599)
+* \right:                                \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* \Rightarrow:                           Math symbols.      (line  8603)
+* \rightarrow:                           Math symbols.      (line  8608)
+* \rightharpoondown:                     Math symbols.      (line  8612)
+* \rightharpoonup:                       Math symbols.      (line  8615)
+* \rightleftharpoons:                    Math symbols.      (line  8618)
+* \rightmargin:                          list.              (line  3877)
+* \rm:                                   Font styles.       (line  1373)
+* \rmfamily:                             Font styles.       (line  1320)
 * \roman{COUNTER}:                       \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5519)
+                                                            (line  7187)
 * \Roman{COUNTER}:                       \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
-                                                             (line 5522)
-* \rotatebox:                            \rotatebox.         (line 8661)
-* \rq:                                   Text symbols.       (line 8928)
-* \rule:                                 \rule.              (line 9213)
-* \S:                                    Text symbols.       (line 8931)
-* \savebox:                              \savebox.           (line 7776)
-* \sbox:                                 \sbox.              (line 7788)
-* \sc:                                   Font styles.        (line 1300)
-* \scalebox:                             \scalebox.          (line 8726)
-* \scriptsize:                           Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \scshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1269)
-* \searrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6587)
-* \sec:                                  Math functions.     (line 6956)
-* \section:                              Sectioning.         (line 1977)
-* \seename:                              Indexes.            (line 9416)
+                                                            (line  7192)
+* \rotatebox:                            \rotatebox.        (line 11799)
+* \rq:                                   Text symbols.      (line 12070)
+* \rule:                                 \rule.             (line 12355)
+* \S:                                    Text symbols.      (line 12073)
+* \savebox:                              \sbox & \savebox.  (line 10809)
+* \sbox:                                 \sbox & \savebox.  (line 10809)
+* \sc:                                   Font styles.       (line  1376)
+* \scalebox:                             \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* \scriptsize:                           Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \scshape:                              Font styles.       (line  1341)
+* \searrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8621)
+* \sec:                                  Math functions.    (line  9149)
+* \section:                              Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \section <1>:                          \section.          (line  2278)
+* \seename:                              \index.            (line 12970)
 * \selectfont:                           Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1517)
-* \setcounter:                           \setcounter.        (line 5605)
-* \setlength:                            \setlength.         (line 5743)
-* \setminus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6590)
-* \settodepth:                           \settodepth.        (line 5765)
-* \settoheight:                          \settoheight.       (line 5775)
-* \settowidth:                           \settowidth.        (line 5785)
-* \sf:                                   Font styles.        (line 1303)
-* \sffamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1266)
-* \sharp:                                Math symbols.       (line 6596)
-* \shortstack:                           \shortstack.        (line 3705)
-* \Sigma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6599)
-* \sigma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6602)
-* \signature:                            \signature.         (line 9665)
-* \sim:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6606)
-* \simeq:                                Math symbols.       (line 6609)
-* \sin:                                  Math functions.     (line 6959)
-* \sinh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6962)
-* \sl:                                   Font styles.        (line 1306)
-* \sloppy:                               \sloppy.            (line 4606)
-* \slshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1263)
-* \small:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \smallint:                             Math symbols.       (line 6612)
-* \smallskip:                            \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7579)
-* \smallskipamount:                      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
-                                                             (line 7580)
-* \smile:                                Math symbols.       (line 6616)
-* \spacefactor:                          \spacefactor.       (line 7372)
-* \spadesuit:                            Math symbols.       (line 6619)
-* \sqcap:                                Math symbols.       (line 6622)
-* \sqcup:                                Math symbols.       (line 6626)
-* \sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7132)
-* \sqsubset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6630)
-* \sqsubseteq:                           Math symbols.       (line 6635)
-* \sqsupset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6640)
-* \sqsupseteq:                           Math symbols.       (line 6645)
+                                                            (line  1596)
+* \setcounter:                           \setcounter.       (line  7281)
+* \setlength:                            \setlength.        (line  7512)
+* \setminus:                             Math symbols.      (line  8624)
+* \settodepth:                           \settodepth.       (line  7562)
+* \settoheight:                          \settoheight.      (line  7585)
+* \settowidth:                           \settowidth.       (line  7608)
+* \sf:                                   Font styles.       (line  1379)
+* \sffamily:                             Font styles.       (line  1338)
+* \sharp:                                Math symbols.      (line  8630)
+* \shortstack:                           \shortstack.       (line  4591)
+* \Sigma:                                Math symbols.      (line  8633)
+* \sigma:                                Math symbols.      (line  8636)
+* \signature:                            \signature.        (line 13600)
+* \sim:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8640)
+* \simeq:                                Math symbols.      (line  8643)
+* \sin:                                  Math functions.    (line  9152)
+* \sinh:                                 Math functions.    (line  9155)
+* \sl:                                   Font styles.       (line  1382)
+* \sloppy:                               \fussy & \sloppy.  (line  5962)
+* \slshape:                              Font styles.       (line  1335)
+* \small:                                Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \smallint:                             Math symbols.      (line  8646)
+* \smallskip:                            \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10290)
+* \smallskipamount:                      \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+                                                            (line 10291)
+* \smile:                                Math symbols.      (line  8650)
+* \SPACE:                                \(SPACE).          (line 10053)
+* \spacefactor:                          \spacefactor.      (line  9916)
+* \spadesuit:                            Math symbols.      (line  8653)
+* \sqcap:                                Math symbols.      (line  8656)
+* \sqcup:                                Math symbols.      (line  8660)
+* \sqrt:                                 \sqrt.             (line  9418)
+* \sqsubset:                             Math symbols.      (line  8664)
+* \sqsubseteq:                           Math symbols.      (line  8669)
+* \sqsupset:                             Math symbols.      (line  8674)
+* \sqsupseteq:                           Math symbols.      (line  8679)
 * \ss (ss):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9202)
+                                                            (line 12344)
 * \SS (SS):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9202)
-* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}:             Math miscellany.    (line 7137)
-* \star:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6649)
-* \stepcounter:                          \stepcounter.       (line 5647)
-* \stop:                                 Command line.       (line 9746)
-* \subparagraph:                         Sectioning.         (line 1981)
-* \subsection:                           Sectioning.         (line 1978)
-* \subset:                               Math symbols.       (line 6656)
-* \subseteq:                             Math symbols.       (line 6659)
-* \subsubsection:                        Sectioning.         (line 1979)
-* \succ:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6662)
-* \succeq:                               Math symbols.       (line 6666)
-* \sum:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6671)
-* \sup:                                  Math functions.     (line 6965)
-* \suppressfloats:                       Floats.             (line 1903)
-* \supset:                               Math symbols.       (line 6675)
-* \supseteq:                             Math symbols.       (line 6678)
-* \surd:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6681)
-* \swarrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6686)
+                                                            (line 12344)
+* \stackrel:                             \stackrel.         (line  9434)
+* \star:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8684)
+* \stepcounter:                          \stepcounter.      (line  7333)
+* \stop:                                 Recovering from errors.
+                                                            (line 13911)
+* \strut:                                \strut.            (line 10334)
+* \subparagraph:                         Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \subparagraph <1>:                     \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* \subsection:                           Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* \subsection <1>:                       \subsection.       (line  2356)
+* \subset:                               Math symbols.      (line  8692)
+* \subseteq:                             Math symbols.      (line  8695)
+* \subsubsection:                        \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* \succ:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8698)
+* \succeq:                               Math symbols.      (line  8702)
+* \sum:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8707)
+* \sup:                                  Math functions.    (line  9158)
+* \suppressfloats:                       Floats.            (line  1983)
+* \supset:                               Math symbols.      (line  8711)
+* \supseteq:                             Math symbols.      (line  8714)
+* \surd:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8717)
+* \swarrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8722)
 * \symbol:                               Symbols by font position.
-                                                             (line 8868)
-* \t (tie-after accent):                 Accents.            (line 9135)
-* \TAB:                                  \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7419)
-* \tabbingsep:                           tabbing.            (line 3885)
-* \tabcolsep:                            tabular.            (line 4125)
-* \tableofcontents:                      Tables of contents. (line 9317)
-* \tan:                                  Math functions.     (line 6968)
-* \tanh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6971)
-* \tau:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6689)
-* \telephone:                            \telephone.         (line 9689)
-* \TeX:                                  Text symbols.       (line 8934)
-* \textascendercompwordmark:             Text symbols.       (line 8972)
-* \textasciicircum:                      Text symbols.       (line 8937)
-* \textasciitilde:                       Text symbols.       (line 8940)
-* \textasteriskcentered:                 Text symbols.       (line 8943)
+                                                            (line 12009)
+* \t (tie-after accent):                 Accents.           (line 12285)
+* \TAB:                                  \(SPACE).          (line 10053)
+* \tabbingsep:                           tabbing.           (line  4917)
+* \tabcolsep:                            tabular.           (line  5178)
+* \tableofcontents:                      Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* \tan:                                  Math functions.    (line  9161)
+* \tanh:                                 Math functions.    (line  9164)
+* \tau:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8725)
+* \telephone:                            \telephone.        (line 13630)
+* \TeX:                                  Text symbols.      (line 12077)
+* \textascendercompwordmark:             Text symbols.      (line 12115)
+* \textasciicircum:                      Text symbols.      (line 12080)
+* \textasciitilde:                       Text symbols.      (line 12083)
+* \textasteriskcentered:                 Text symbols.      (line 12086)
 * \textbackslash:                        Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8803)
-* \textbackslash <1>:                    Text symbols.       (line 8946)
-* \textbar:                              Text symbols.       (line 8949)
-* \textbardbl:                           Text symbols.       (line 8952)
-* \textbf:                               Font styles.        (line 1257)
-* \textbigcircle:                        Text symbols.       (line 8955)
-* \textbraceleft:                        Text symbols.       (line 8958)
-* \textbraceright:                       Text symbols.       (line 8961)
-* \textbullet:                           Text symbols.       (line 8964)
-* \textcapitalcompwordmark:              Text symbols.       (line 8971)
-* \textcircled{LETTER}:                  Text symbols.       (line 8967)
-* \textcompwordmark:                     Text symbols.       (line 8970)
-* \textcopyright:                        Text symbols.       (line 8885)
-* \textdagger:                           Text symbols.       (line 8977)
-* \textdaggerdbl:                        Text symbols.       (line 8980)
-* \textdollar (or \$):                   Text symbols.       (line 8983)
-* \textellipsis:                         Text symbols.       (line 8909)
-* \textemdash (or ---):                  Text symbols.       (line 8986)
-* \textendash (or --):                   Text symbols.       (line 8989)
-* \texteuro:                             Text symbols.       (line 8992)
-* \textexclamdown (or !`):               Text symbols.       (line 8995)
-* \textfloatsep:                         Floats.             (line 1939)
-* \textfloatsep <1>:                     Floats.             (line 1940)
-* \textfraction:                         Floats.             (line 1918)
-* \textfraction <1>:                     Floats.             (line 1919)
-* \textgreater:                          Text symbols.       (line 8998)
+                                                            (line 11946)
+* \textbackslash <1>:                    Text symbols.      (line 12089)
+* \textbar:                              Text symbols.      (line 12092)
+* \textbardbl:                           Text symbols.      (line 12095)
+* \textbf:                               Font styles.       (line  1329)
+* \textbigcircle:                        Text symbols.      (line 12098)
+* \textbraceleft:                        Text symbols.      (line 12101)
+* \textbraceright:                       Text symbols.      (line 12104)
+* \textbullet:                           Text symbols.      (line 12107)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark:              Text symbols.      (line 12114)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}:                  Text symbols.      (line 12110)
+* \textcompwordmark:                     Text symbols.      (line 12113)
+* \textcopyright:                        Text symbols.      (line 12027)
+* \textdagger:                           Text symbols.      (line 12122)
+* \textdaggerdbl:                        Text symbols.      (line 12125)
+* \textdollar (or \$):                   Text symbols.      (line 12128)
+* \textellipsis:                         Text symbols.      (line 12051)
+* \textemdash (or ---):                  Text symbols.      (line 12131)
+* \textendash (or --):                   Text symbols.      (line 12136)
+* \texteuro:                             Text symbols.      (line 12139)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`):               Text symbols.      (line 12145)
+* \textfloatsep:                         Floats.            (line  2019)
+* \textfloatsep <1>:                     Floats.            (line  2020)
+* \textfraction:                         Floats.            (line  1998)
+* \textfraction <1>:                     Floats.            (line  1999)
+* \textgreater:                          Text symbols.      (line 12148)
 * \textheight:                           Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1775)
+                                                            (line  1854)
 * \textheight <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1776)
-* \textit:                               Font styles.        (line 1251)
-* \textleftarrow:                        Text symbols.       (line 9004)
-* \textless:                             Text symbols.       (line 9001)
-* \textmd:                               Font styles.        (line 1254)
-* \textnormal:                           Font styles.        (line 1275)
-* \textordfeminine:                      Text symbols.       (line 9007)
-* \textordmasculine:                     Text symbols.       (line 9008)
-* \textparagraph:                        Text symbols.       (line 8917)
-* \textperiodcentered:                   Text symbols.       (line 9011)
-* \textquestiondown (or ?`):             Text symbols.       (line 9014)
-* \textquotedblleft (or ``):             Text symbols.       (line 9017)
-* \textquotedblright (or ''):            Text symbols.       (line 9020)
-* \textquoteleft (or `):                 Text symbols.       (line 9023)
-* \textquoteright (or '):                Text symbols.       (line 9026)
-* \textquotesingle:                      Text symbols.       (line 9029)
-* \textquotestraightbase:                Text symbols.       (line 9032)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase:             Text symbols.       (line 9033)
-* \textregistered:                       Text symbols.       (line 9036)
-* \textrightarrow:                       Text symbols.       (line 9039)
-* \textrm:                               Font styles.        (line 1248)
-* \textsc:                               Font styles.        (line 1269)
-* \textsf:                               Font styles.        (line 1266)
-* \textsl:                               Font styles.        (line 1263)
-* \textsterling:                         Text symbols.       (line 8921)
-* \textthreequartersemdash:              Text symbols.       (line 9042)
-* \texttrademark:                        Text symbols.       (line 9045)
-* \texttt:                               Font styles.        (line 1272)
-* \texttwelveudash:                      Text symbols.       (line 9048)
-* \textunderscore:                       Text symbols.       (line 9051)
-* \textup:                               Font styles.        (line 1260)
-* \textvisiblespace:                     Text symbols.       (line 9054)
+                                                            (line  1855)
+* \textit:                               Font styles.       (line  1323)
+* \textleftarrow:                        Text symbols.      (line 12154)
+* \textless:                             Text symbols.      (line 12151)
+* \textmd:                               Font styles.       (line  1326)
+* \textnormal:                           Font styles.       (line  1347)
+* \textordfeminine:                      Text symbols.      (line 12157)
+* \textordmasculine:                     Text symbols.      (line 12158)
+* \textparagraph:                        Text symbols.      (line 12059)
+* \textperiodcentered:                   Text symbols.      (line 12161)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`):             Text symbols.      (line 12164)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``):             Text symbols.      (line 12167)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''):            Text symbols.      (line 12170)
+* \textquoteleft (or `):                 Text symbols.      (line 12173)
+* \textquoteright (or '):                Text symbols.      (line 12176)
+* \textquotesingle:                      Text symbols.      (line 12179)
+* \textquotestraightbase:                Text symbols.      (line 12182)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase:             Text symbols.      (line 12183)
+* \textregistered:                       Text symbols.      (line 12186)
+* \textrightarrow:                       Text symbols.      (line 12189)
+* \textrm:                               Font styles.       (line  1320)
+* \textsc:                               Font styles.       (line  1341)
+* \textsection:                          Text symbols.      (line 12074)
+* \textsf:                               Font styles.       (line  1338)
+* \textsl:                               Font styles.       (line  1335)
+* \textsterling:                         Text symbols.      (line 12063)
+* \textthreequartersemdash:              Text symbols.      (line 12192)
+* \texttrademark:                        Text symbols.      (line 12195)
+* \texttt:                               Font styles.       (line  1344)
+* \texttwelveudash:                      Text symbols.      (line 12198)
+* \textunderscore:                       Text symbols.      (line 12201)
+* \textup:                               Font styles.       (line  1332)
+* \textvisiblespace:                     Text symbols.      (line 12204)
 * \textwidth:                            Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1783)
+                                                            (line  1862)
 * \textwidth <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1784)
+                                                            (line  1863)
 * \th (th):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9206)
+                                                            (line 12348)
 * \TH (TH):                              Additional Latin letters.
-                                                             (line 9206)
-* \thanks{TEXT}:                         \maketitle.         (line 7247)
-* \theta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6692)
-* \thicklines:                           \thicklines.        (line 3643)
+                                                            (line 12348)
+* \thanks{TEXT}:                         \maketitle.        (line  9580)
+* \theta:                                Math symbols.      (line  8728)
+* \thicklines:                           \thicklines.       (line  4528)
 * \thickspace:                           Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7039)
-* \thinlines:                            \thinlines.         (line 3650)
+                                                            (line  9289)
+* \thinlines:                            \thinlines.        (line  4520)
 * \thinspace:                            Spacing in math mode.
-                                                             (line 7048)
-* \thinspace <1>:                        \thinspace.         (line 7489)
-* \thispagestyle:                        \thispagestyle.     (line 7319)
-* \tilde:                                Math accents.       (line 7014)
-* \times:                                Math symbols.       (line 6696)
-* \tiny:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
-* \title{TEXT}:                          \maketitle.         (line 7251)
-* \to:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6700)
-* \today:                                \today.             (line 9232)
-* \top:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6704)
-* \topfraction:                          Floats.             (line 1923)
-* \topfraction <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1924)
+                                                            (line  9298)
+* \thinspace <1>:                        \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* \thispagestyle:                        \thispagestyle.    (line  9744)
+* \tilde:                                Math accents.      (line  9209)
+* \times:                                Math symbols.      (line  8732)
+* \tiny:                                 Font sizes.        (line  1441)
+* \title{TEXT}:                          \maketitle.        (line  9587)
+* \to:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8736)
+* \today:                                \today.            (line 12390)
+* \top:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8740)
+* \topfraction:                          Floats.            (line  2003)
+* \topfraction <1>:                      Floats.            (line  2004)
 * \topmargin:                            Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1807)
-* \topsep:                               list.               (line 3234)
+                                                            (line  1887)
+* \topsep:                               list.              (line  3882)
 * \topskip:                              Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1814)
+                                                            (line  1894)
 * \topskip <1>:                          Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1815)
-* \totalheight:                          Predefined lengths. (line 5801)
-* \triangle:                             Math symbols.       (line 6709)
-* \triangleleft:                         Math symbols.       (line 6712)
-* \triangleright:                        Math symbols.       (line 6718)
-* \tt:                                   Font styles.        (line 1309)
-* \ttfamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1272)
-* \twocolumn:                            \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
-* \typein:                               \typein.            (line 9704)
-* \typeout:                              \typeout.           (line 9718)
-* \u (breve accent):                     Accents.            (line 9140)
-* \unboldmath:                           Math formulas.      (line 5927)
-* \underbar:                             Accents.            (line 9143)
-* \underbrace{MATH}:                     Math miscellany.    (line 7141)
-* \underline{TEXT}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7145)
-* \unitlength:                           picture.            (line 3467)
-* \unlhd:                                Math symbols.       (line 6724)
-* \unrhd:                                Math symbols.       (line 6731)
-* \Uparrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6738)
-* \uparrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6742)
-* \Updownarrow:                          Math symbols.       (line 6746)
-* \updownarrow:                          Math symbols.       (line 6751)
-* \upharpoonright:                       Math symbols.       (line 6756)
-* \uplus:                                Math symbols.       (line 6761)
-* \upshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1260)
-* \Upsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6768)
-* \upsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6771)
-* \usebox:                               \usebox.            (line 7800)
-* \usecounter:                           \usecounter.        (line 5550)
+                                                            (line  1895)
+* \triangle:                             Math symbols.      (line  8745)
+* \triangleleft:                         Math symbols.      (line  8748)
+* \triangleright:                        Math symbols.      (line  8754)
+* \tt:                                   Font styles.       (line  1385)
+* \ttfamily:                             Font styles.       (line  1344)
+* \twocolumn:                            \twocolumn.        (line  1630)
+* \typein:                               \typein.           (line 13645)
+* \typeout:                              \typeout.          (line 13690)
+* \u (breve accent):                     Accents.           (line 12289)
+* \unboldmath:                           \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8967)
+* \unboldmath <1>:                       \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8975)
+* \underbar:                             Accents.           (line 12255)
+* \underbrace{MATH}:                     Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9247)
+* \underline{TEXT}:                      Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9230)
+* \unitlength:                           picture.           (line  4259)
+* \unlhd:                                Math symbols.      (line  8760)
+* \unrhd:                                Math symbols.      (line  8767)
+* \Uparrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8774)
+* \uparrow:                              Math symbols.      (line  8778)
+* \Updownarrow:                          Math symbols.      (line  8782)
+* \updownarrow:                          Math symbols.      (line  8787)
+* \upharpoonright:                       Math symbols.      (line  8792)
+* \uplus:                                Math symbols.      (line  8797)
+* \upshape:                              Font styles.       (line  1332)
+* \Upsilon:                              Math symbols.      (line  8804)
+* \upsilon:                              Math symbols.      (line  8807)
+* \usebox:                               \usebox.           (line 10915)
+* \usecounter:                           \usecounter.       (line  7222)
 * \usefont:                              Low-level font commands.
-                                                             (line 1525)
+                                                            (line  1604)
 * \usepackage:                           Additional packages.
-                                                             (line  802)
-* \v (breve accent):                     Accents.            (line 9151)
-* \value:                                \value.             (line 5576)
-* \vanothing:                            Math symbols.       (line 6779)
-* \varepsilon:                           Math symbols.       (line 6774)
-* \varphi:                               Math symbols.       (line 6784)
-* \varpi:                                Math symbols.       (line 6788)
-* \varrho:                               Math symbols.       (line 6792)
-* \varsigma:                             Math symbols.       (line 6796)
-* \vartheta:                             Math symbols.       (line 6800)
-* \vdash:                                Math symbols.       (line 6804)
-* \vdots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7150)
-* \vec:                                  Math accents.       (line 7017)
-* \vector:                               \vector.            (line 3724)
-* \vee:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6808)
-* \verb:                                 \verb.              (line 4468)
-* \Vert:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6813)
-* \vert:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6829)
-* \vfill:                                \vfill.             (line 7587)
-* \vline:                                \vline.             (line 4217)
-* \vspace:                               \vspace.            (line 7613)
-* \wedge:                                Math symbols.       (line 6847)
-* \widehat:                              Math accents.       (line 7020)
-* \widetilde:                            Math accents.       (line 7023)
-* \width:                                Predefined lengths. (line 5795)
-* \wp:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6851)
-* \wr:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6854)
-* \Xi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6857)
-* \xi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6860)
-* \year:                                 \day \month \year.  (line 5654)
-* \zeta:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6863)
-* \[:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5914)
-* \\ (for center):                       center.             (line 2477)
-* \\ (for eqnarray):                     eqnarray.           (line 2767)
-* \\ (for flushright):                   flushright.         (line 2959)
-* \\ (for \shortstack objects):          \shortstack.        (line 3719)
-* \\ (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3830)
-* \\ for flushleft:                      flushleft.          (line 2933)
-* \\ for letters:                        Letters.            (line 9486)
-* \\ for tabular:                        tabular.            (line 3988)
-* \\ for verse:                          verse.              (line 4496)
-* \\ for \author:                        \maketitle.         (line 7238)
-* \\ for \title:                         \maketitle.         (line 7252)
-* \\ force line break:                   \\.                 (line 4515)
-* \\* (for eqnarray):                    eqnarray.           (line 2775)
-* \]:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5914)
+                                                            (line   862)
+* \v (breve accent):                     Accents.           (line 12293)
+* \value:                                \value.            (line  7248)
+* \vanothing:                            Math symbols.      (line  8815)
+* \varepsilon:                           Math symbols.      (line  8810)
+* \varphi:                               Math symbols.      (line  8820)
+* \varpi:                                Math symbols.      (line  8824)
+* \varrho:                               Math symbols.      (line  8828)
+* \varsigma:                             Math symbols.      (line  8832)
+* \vartheta:                             Math symbols.      (line  8836)
+* \vdash:                                Math symbols.      (line  8840)
+* \vdots:                                Dots.              (line  9035)
+* \vec:                                  Math accents.      (line  9212)
+* \vector:                               \vector.           (line  4633)
+* \vee:                                  Math symbols.      (line  8844)
+* \verb:                                 \verb.             (line  5678)
+* \Vert:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8849)
+* \vert:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8865)
+* \vfill:                                \vfill.            (line 10470)
+* \vline:                                \vline.            (line  5271)
+* \vspace:                               \vspace.           (line 10419)
+* \wedge:                                Math symbols.      (line  8883)
+* \widehat:                              Math accents.      (line  9215)
+* \widetilde:                            Math accents.      (line  9218)
+* \wp:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8887)
+* \wr:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8890)
+* \Xi:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8893)
+* \xi:                                   Math symbols.      (line  8896)
+* \year:                                 \day & \month & \year.
+                                                            (line  7349)
+* \zeta:                                 Math symbols.      (line  8899)
+* \\ (for center):                       center.            (line  3050)
+* \\ (for eqnarray):                     eqnarray.          (line  3358)
+* \\ (for flushright):                   flushright.        (line  3587)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects):          \shortstack.       (line  4617)
+* \\ (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4862)
+* \\ for flushleft:                      flushleft.         (line  3528)
+* \\ for letters:                        Letters.           (line 13388)
+* \\ for tabular:                        tabular.           (line  5040)
+* \\ for verse:                          verse.             (line  5740)
+* \\ for \author:                        \maketitle.        (line  9567)
+* \\ for \title:                         \maketitle.        (line  9588)
+* \\ force line break:                   \\.                (line  5778)
+* \\* (for eqnarray):                    eqnarray.          (line  3366)
 * \^:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8803)
-* \^ (circumflex accent):                Accents.            (line 9087)
+                                                            (line 11946)
+* \^ (circumflex accent):                Accents.           (line 12242)
 * \_:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
-* \` (grave accent):                     Accents.            (line 9091)
-* \` (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3857)
+                                                            (line 11939)
+* \` (grave accent):                     Accents.           (line 12246)
+* \` (tabbing):                          tabbing.           (line  4889)
 * \{:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
-* \|:                                    Math symbols.       (line 5987)
+                                                            (line 11939)
+* \|:                                    Math symbols.      (line  8013)
 * \}:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8796)
+                                                            (line 11939)
 * \~:                                    Reserved characters.
-                                                             (line 8803)
-* \~ (tilde accent):                     Accents.            (line 9097)
+                                                            (line 11946)
+* \~ (tilde accent):                     Accents.           (line 12250)
 * ^:                                     Subscripts & superscripts.
-                                                             (line 5941)
+                                                            (line  7938)
 * _:                                     Subscripts & superscripts.
-                                                             (line 5941)
+                                                            (line  7938)
+* 'see' and 'see also' index entries:    \index.            (line 12970)
 * {...} for required arguments:          LaTeX command syntax.
-                                                             (line  486)
+                                                            (line   520)
+* ~:                                     ~.                 (line 10094)
 * a4paper option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
+                                                            (line   776)
 * a5paper option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
-* abstract environment:                  abstract.           (line 2357)
-* array environment:                     array.              (line 2403)
-* article class:                         Document classes.   (line  674)
+                                                            (line   776)
+* abstract environment:                  abstract.          (line  2915)
+* abstracts:                             abstract.          (line  2915)
+* accents:                               Accents.           (line 12210)
+* accents, mathematical:                 Math accents.      (line  9178)
+* accessing any character of a font:     Symbols by font position.
+                                                            (line 12009)
+* acronyms, list of:                     Glossaries.        (line 13208)
+* acute accent:                          Accents.           (line 12231)
+* acute accent, math:                    Math accents.      (line  9183)
+* additional packages, loading:          Additional packages.
+                                                            (line   862)
+* ae ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12308)
+* algorithm2e package:                   tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* align environment, from amsmath:       eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* aligning equations:                    eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* alignment via tabbing:                 tabbing.           (line  4802)
+* amsfonts package:                      Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* amsmath package:                       array.             (line  3010)
+* amsmath package <1>:                   array.             (line  3021)
+* amsmath package <2>:                   displaymath.       (line  3202)
+* amsmath package <3>:                   equation.          (line  3405)
+* amsmath package <4>:                   theorem.           (line  5592)
+* amsmath package <5>:                   Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* amsmath package <6>:                   Dots.              (line  9038)
+* amsmath package <7>:                   Math functions.    (line  9167)
+* amsmath package <8>:                   Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9344)
+* amsmath package <9>:                   Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9348)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray:   eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* amsthm package:                        theorem.           (line  5592)
+* amsthm package <1>:                    \rule.             (line 12367)
+* appendices:                            \appendix.         (line  2487)
+* appendix:                              \appendix.         (line  2487)
+* appendix package:                      \appendix.         (line  2510)
+* aring:                                 Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12304)
+* array (package) package:               array.             (line  3032)
+* array environment:                     array.             (line  2961)
+* arrays, math:                          array.             (line  2961)
+* arrow, left, in text:                  Text symbols.      (line 12155)
+* arrow, right, in text:                 Text symbols.      (line 12190)
+* article class:                         Document classes.  (line   734)
+* ascender height:                       Text symbols.      (line 12116)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text:             Text symbols.      (line 12081)
+* ASCII tilde, in text:                  Text symbols.      (line 12084)
+* asterisk, centered, in text:           Text symbols.      (line 12087)
+* Asymptote package:                     \line.             (line  4494)
+* Asymptote package <1>:                 \strut.            (line 10390)
+* Asymptote package <2>:                 \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10622)
+* at clause, in font definitions:        \newfont.          (line  6992)
+* at-sign:                               \@.                (line  9977)
+* author, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.        (line  9567)
+* auxiliary file:                        Output files.      (line   449)
 * b5paper option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
-* book class:                            Document classes.   (line  674)
-* bottomnumber:                          Floats.             (line 1946)
-* bottomnumber <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1947)
-* bp:                                    Units of length.    (line 5707)
-* cc:                                    Units of length.    (line 5720)
-* center environment:                    center.             (line 2469)
+                                                            (line   776)
+* babel package:                         \chapter.          (line  2250)
+* babel package <1>:                     thebibliography.   (line  5384)
+* babel package <2>:                     Accents.           (line 12210)
+* babel package <3>:                     \today.            (line 12397)
+* babel package <4>:                     Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12724)
+* babel package <5>:                     \index.            (line 12970)
+* background, colored:                   Colored pages.     (line 11162)
+* backslash, in text:                    Text symbols.      (line 12090)
+* bar, double vertical, in text:         Text symbols.      (line 12096)
+* bar, vertical, in text:                Text symbols.      (line 12093)
+* bar-over accent:                       Accents.           (line 12238)
+* bar-over accent, math:                 Math accents.      (line  9186)
+* bar-under accent:                      Accents.           (line 12253)
+* basics of LaTeX:                       Overview.          (line   364)
+* beamer template and class:             beamer template.   (line 13938)
+* beginning of document hook:            \AtBeginDocument.  (line  3236)
+* bibliography format, open:             Document class options.
+                                                            (line   824)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX.     (line  5512)
+* bibliography, creating (manually):     thebibliography.   (line  5337)
+* bibTeX, using:                         Using BibTeX.      (line  5512)
+* big circle symbols, in text:           Text symbols.      (line 12099)
+* Big point:                             Units of length.   (line  7476)
+* bigfoot package:                       Footnotes of footnotes.
+                                                            (line  6469)
+* black boxes, omitting:                 Document class options.
+                                                            (line   810)
+* blackboard bold:                       Blackboard bold.   (line  8923)
+* bm package:                            \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8993)
+* bold font:                             Font styles.       (line  1365)
+* bold math:                             Font styles.       (line  1418)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding:             description.       (line  3160)
+* boldface mathematics:                  \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8967)
+* book class:                            Document classes.  (line   734)
+* book, back matter:                     \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* book, end matter:                      \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* book, front matter:                    \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* book, main matter:                     \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+                                                            (line  2520)
+* bottomnumber:                          Floats.            (line  2026)
+* bottomnumber <1>:                      Floats.            (line  2027)
+* box:                                   \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10555)
+* box, allocating new:                   \newsavebox.       (line  6706)
+* box, colored:                          Colored boxes.     (line 11125)
+* box, save:                             \sbox & \savebox.  (line 10809)
+* box, use saved box:                    \usebox.           (line 10915)
+* boxes:                                 Boxes.             (line 10546)
+* bp:                                    Units of length.   (line  7476)
+* brace, left, in text:                  Text symbols.      (line 12102)
+* brace, right, in text:                 Text symbols.      (line 12105)
+* breaking lines:                        Line breaking.     (line  5761)
+* breaking pages:                        Page breaking.     (line  6052)
+* breaks, multiplication discretionary:  \*.                (line  9355)
+* breve accent:                          Accents.           (line 12289)
+* breve accent, math:                    Math accents.      (line  9189)
+* bug reporting:                         About this document.
+                                                            (line   335)
+* bullet lists:                          itemize.           (line  3624)
+* bullet symbol:                         Math symbols.      (line  8108)
+* bullet, in text:                       Text symbols.      (line 12108)
+* bulleted lists:                        itemize.           (line  3624)
+* calligraphic fonts:                    Calligraphic.      (line  8949)
+* calligraphic letters for math:         Font styles.       (line  1368)
+* cap height:                            Text symbols.      (line 12116)
+* caron accent:                          Accents.           (line 12293)
+* catcode:                               \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+                                                            (line   606)
+* category code, character:              \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+                                                            (line   606)
+* cc:                                    Units of length.   (line  7489)
+* cc list, in letters:                   \cc.               (line 13450)
+* cedilla accent:                        Accents.           (line 12263)
+* center environment:                    center.            (line  3040)
+* centered asterisk, in text:            Text symbols.      (line 12087)
+* centered equations:                    Document class options.
+                                                            (line   814)
+* centered period, in text:              Text symbols.      (line 12162)
+* centering text, declaration for:       \centering.        (line  3088)
+* centering text, environment for:       center.            (line  3040)
+* Centimeter:                            Units of length.   (line  7480)
+* chapter:                               Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* chapter <1>:                           \chapter.          (line  2185)
+* character category code:               \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+                                                            (line   606)
+* characters, accented:                  Accents.           (line 12210)
+* characters, case of:                   Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 11964)
+* characters, non-English:               Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* characters, reserved:                  Reserved characters.
+                                                            (line 11932)
+* characters, special:                   Reserved characters.
+                                                            (line 11932)
+* check accent:                          Accents.           (line 12293)
+* check accent, math:                    Math accents.      (line  9192)
+* Cicero:                                Units of length.   (line  7489)
+* circle symbol, big, in text:           Text symbols.      (line 12099)
+* circled letter, in text:               Text symbols.      (line 12111)
+* circumflex accent:                     Accents.           (line 12242)
+* circumflex accent, math:               Math accents.      (line  9204)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text:            Text symbols.      (line 12081)
+* citation key:                          \bibitem.          (line  5399)
+* class and package commands:            Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line   945)
+* class and package difference:          Class and package construction.
+                                                            (line   887)
+* class and package structure:           Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* class file example:                    Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   931)
+* class file layout:                     Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* class options:                         Document class options.
+                                                            (line   763)
+* class options <1>:                     Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* class options <2>:                     Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1005)
+* classes of documents:                  Document classes.  (line   729)
+* cleveref package:                      Cross references.  (line  2779)
+* cleveref package <1>:                  \ref.              (line  2892)
+* cleveref package <2>:                  \footnotemark.     (line  6350)
 * clock option to slides class:          Document class options.
-                                                             (line  796)
-* cm:                                    Units of length.    (line 5711)
-* dbltopnumber:                          Floats.             (line 1950)
-* dbltopnumber <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1951)
-* dd:                                    Units of length.    (line 5717)
-* description environment:               description.        (line 2544)
-* displaymath environment:               displaymath.        (line 2597)
-* displaymath environment <1>:           Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* document environment:                  document.           (line 2639)
+                                                            (line   856)
+* closing letters:                       \closing.          (line 13466)
+* closing quote:                         Text symbols.      (line 12071)
+* cm:                                    Units of length.   (line  7480)
+* code, typesetting:                     verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* colon character:                       Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9335)
+* color:                                 Color.             (line 10927)
+* color <1>:                             Define colors.     (line 11032)
+* color <2>:                             Colored text.      (line 11054)
+* color <3>:                             Colored boxes.     (line 11125)
+* color <4>:                             Colored pages.     (line 11162)
+* color models:                          Color models.      (line 10980)
+* color package commands:                Commands for color.
+                                                            (line 11027)
+* color package options:                 Color package options.
+                                                            (line 10942)
+* color, define:                         Define colors.     (line 11032)
+* colored boxes:                         Colored boxes.     (line 11125)
+* colored page:                          Colored pages.     (line 11162)
+* colored text:                          Colored text.      (line 11054)
+* command line:                          Command line.      (line 13723)
+* command syntax:                        LaTeX command syntax.
+                                                            (line   520)
+* commands, class and package:           Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line   945)
+* commands, defining new ones:           \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6490)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>:       \providecommand.   (line  6615)
+* commands, document class:              Class and package construction.
+                                                            (line   878)
+* commands, graphics package:            Commands for graphics.
+                                                            (line 11471)
+* commands, ignore spaces:               \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+                                                            (line  7063)
+* commands, redefining:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6490)
+* commands, star-variants:               \@ifstar.          (line   642)
+* composite word mark, in text:          Text symbols.      (line 12116)
+* computer programs, typesetting:        verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* configuration, graphics package:       Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* contents file:                         Output files.      (line   459)
+* copyright symbol:                      Text symbols.      (line 12028)
+* counters, a list of:                   Counters.          (line  7138)
+* counters, defining new:                \newcounter.       (line  6643)
+* counters, getting value of:            \value.            (line  7248)
+* counters, printing:                    \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+                                                            (line  7166)
+* counters, setting:                     \setcounter.       (line  7281)
+* cprotect package:                      verbatim.          (line  5659)
+* cprotect package <1>:                  \verb.             (line  5717)
+* creating pictures:                     picture.           (line  4240)
+* creating tables:                       table.             (line  4951)
+* credit footnote:                       \maketitle.        (line  9581)
+* cross references:                      Cross references.  (line  2747)
+* cross references, resolving:           Output files.      (line   449)
+* cross referencing with page number:    \pageref.          (line  2845)
+* cross referencing, symbolic:           \ref.              (line  2869)
+* CTAN:                                  CTAN.              (line   703)
+* currency, dollar:                      Text symbols.      (line 12129)
+* currency, euro:                        Text symbols.      (line 12140)
+* dagger, double, in text:               Text symbols.      (line 12126)
+* dagger, in text:                       Text symbols.      (line 12031)
+* dagger, in text <1>:                   Text symbols.      (line 12123)
+* DANTE e.V.:                            CTAN.              (line   717)
+* date, for titlepage:                   \maketitle.        (line  9575)
+* date, today's:                         \today.            (line 12390)
+* datetime package:                      \today.            (line 12411)
+* dbltopnumber:                          Floats.            (line  2030)
+* dbltopnumber <1>:                      Floats.            (line  2031)
+* dcolumn package:                       array.             (line  3032)
+* dd:                                    Units of length.   (line  7486)
+* define color:                          Define colors.     (line 11032)
+* defining a new command:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6490)
+* defining a new command <1>:            \providecommand.   (line  6615)
+* defining new environments:             \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+                                                            (line  6733)
+* defining new fonts:                    \newfont.          (line  6979)
+* defining new theorems:                 \newtheorem.       (line  6867)
+* definitions:                           Definitions.       (line  6485)
+* delimiters, paired:                    \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* delim_0:                               makeindex.         (line 13140)
+* delim_1:                               makeindex.         (line 13144)
+* delim_2:                               makeindex.         (line 13148)
+* delim_n:                               makeindex.         (line 13152)
+* delim_r:                               makeindex.         (line 13156)
+* description:                           \newglossaryentry. (line 13296)
+* description environment:               description.       (line  3130)
+* description lists, creating:           description.       (line  3130)
+* design size, in font definitions:      \newfont.          (line  6992)
+* Didot point:                           Units of length.   (line  7486)
+* dieresis accent:                       Accents.           (line 12227)
+* difference between class and package:  Class and package construction.
+                                                            (line   887)
+* discretionary breaks, multiplication:  \*.                (line  9355)
+* discretionary hyphenation:             \discretionary.    (line  5939)
+* display math mode:                     Modes.             (line  9467)
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+                                                            (line  4772)
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+                                                            (line  4772)
+* displaymath environment:               displaymath.       (line  3186)
+* displaymath environment <1>:           Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* document class commands:               Class and package construction.
+                                                            (line   878)
+* document class options:                Document class options.
+                                                            (line   763)
+* document class, defined:               Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   401)
+* document classes:                      Document classes.  (line   729)
+* document environment:                  document.          (line  3230)
+* document templates:                    Document templates.
+                                                            (line 13931)
+* dollar sign:                           Text symbols.      (line 12129)
+* dot accent:                            Accents.           (line 12234)
+* dot over accent, math:                 Math accents.      (line  9198)
+* dot-over accent:                       Accents.           (line 12234)
+* dot-under accent:                      Accents.           (line 12267)
+* dotless i:                             Accents.           (line 12221)
+* dotless i, math:                       Math symbols.      (line  8260)
+* dotless j:                             Accents.           (line 12221)
+* dotless j, math:                       Math symbols.      (line  8282)
+* dots:                                  Dots.              (line  9007)
+* double angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* double dagger, in text:                Text symbols.      (line 12034)
+* double dagger, in text <1>:            Text symbols.      (line 12126)
+* double dot accent, math:               Math accents.      (line  9195)
+* double guillemets:                     Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* double left quote:                     Text symbols.      (line 12168)
+* double low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.      (line 12068)
+* double quote, straight base:           Text symbols.      (line 12184)
+* double right quote:                    Text symbols.      (line 12171)
+* double spacing:                        Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1583)
+* double vertical bar, in text:          Text symbols.      (line 12096)
+* doublestruck:                          Blackboard bold.   (line  8923)
 * draft option:                          Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
-* dvipdfmx command:                      Output files.       (line  393)
-* dvips command:                         Output files.       (line  393)
-* dvitype command:                       Output files.       (line  393)
-* em:                                    Units of length.    (line 5725)
-* enumerate environment:                 enumerate.          (line 2677)
-* environment, abstract:                 abstract.           (line 2357)
-* environment, array:                    array.              (line 2403)
-* environment, center:                   center.             (line 2469)
-* environment, description:              description.        (line 2544)
-* environment, displaymath:              displaymath.        (line 2597)
-* environment, displaymath <1>:          Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* environment, document:                 document.           (line 2639)
-* environment, enumerate:                enumerate.          (line 2677)
-* environment, eqnarray:                 eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* environment, equation:                 equation.           (line 2800)
-* environment, equation <1>:             Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* environment, figure:                   figure.             (line 2823)
-* environment, filecontents:             filecontents.       (line 2876)
-* environment, filecontents*:            filecontents.       (line 2876)
-* environment, flushleft:                flushleft.          (line 2927)
-* environment, flushright:               flushright.         (line 2953)
-* environment, itemize:                  itemize.            (line 2979)
-* environment, letter:                   letter.             (line 3062)
-* environment, list:                     list.               (line 3067)
-* environment, math:                     math.               (line 3423)
-* environment, math <1>:                 Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* environment, minipage:                 minipage.           (line 3435)
-* environment, picture:                  picture.            (line 3463)
-* environment, quotation:                quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* environment, quote:                    quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* environment, tabbing:                  tabbing.            (line 3771)
-* environment, table:                    table.              (line 3918)
-* environment, tabular:                  tabular.            (line 3960)
-* environment, thebibliography:          thebibliography.    (line 4282)
-* environment, theorem:                  theorem.            (line 4398)
-* environment, titlepage:                titlepage.          (line 4411)
-* environment, verbatim:                 verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* environment, verse:                    verse.              (line 4485)
-* eqnarray environment:                  eqnarray.           (line 2744)
-* equation environment:                  equation.           (line 2800)
-* equation environment <1>:              Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* etex command:                          TeX engines.        (line  441)
-* ex:                                    Units of length.    (line 5725)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* dvipdfmx command:                      Output files.      (line   426)
+* dvips command:                         Output files.      (line   426)
+* dvitype command:                       Output files.      (line   426)
+* e-dash:                                Text symbols.      (line 12137)
+* e-TeX:                                 TeX engines.       (line   475)
+* ellipses:                              Dots.              (line  9007)
+* ellipsis:                              Text symbols.      (line 12052)
+* em:                                    Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* em <1>:                                Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* em-dash:                               Text symbols.      (line 12132)
+* em-dash, three-quarters:               Text symbols.      (line 12193)
+* em-dash, two-thirds:                   Text symbols.      (line 12199)
+* emphasis:                              Font styles.       (line  1349)
+* enclosure list:                        \encl.             (line 13479)
+* end of document hook:                  \AtEndDocument.    (line  3252)
+* ending and starting:                   Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   390)
+* engines, TeX:                          TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* enlarge current page:                  \enlargethispage.  (line  6157)
+* enumerate environment:                 enumerate.         (line  3268)
+* enumitem package:                      list.              (line  3976)
+* environment:                           Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   409)
+* environment, abstract:                 abstract.          (line  2915)
+* environment, array:                    array.             (line  2961)
+* environment, center:                   center.            (line  3040)
+* environment, description:              description.       (line  3130)
+* environment, displaymath:              displaymath.       (line  3186)
+* environment, displaymath <1>:          Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* environment, document:                 document.          (line  3230)
+* environment, enumerate:                enumerate.         (line  3268)
+* environment, eqnarray:                 eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* environment, equation:                 equation.          (line  3391)
+* environment, equation <1>:             Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* environment, figure:                   figure.            (line  3411)
+* environment, filecontents:             filecontents.      (line  3469)
+* environment, filecontents*:            filecontents.      (line  3469)
+* environment, flushleft:                flushleft.         (line  3520)
+* environment, flushright:               flushright.        (line  3581)
+* environment, itemize:                  itemize.           (line  3624)
+* environment, letter:                   letter.            (line  3707)
+* environment, list:                     list.              (line  3712)
+* environment, math:                     math.              (line  4076)
+* environment, math <1>:                 Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* environment, minipage:                 minipage.          (line  4088)
+* environment, picture:                  picture.           (line  4240)
+* environment, quotation:                quotation & quote. (line  4772)
+* environment, quote:                    quotation & quote. (line  4772)
+* environment, tabbing:                  tabbing.           (line  4802)
+* environment, table:                    table.             (line  4951)
+* environment, tabular:                  tabular.           (line  5011)
+* environment, thebibliography:          thebibliography.   (line  5337)
+* environment, theorem:                  theorem.           (line  5570)
+* environment, theorem-like:             \newtheorem.       (line  6867)
+* environment, titlepage:                titlepage.         (line  5600)
+* environment, verbatim:                 verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* environment, verse:                    verse.             (line  5725)
+* environments:                          Environments.      (line  2898)
+* environments, defining:                \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+                                                            (line  6733)
+* envlab package:                        \makelabels.       (line 13553)
+* EPS files:                             Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* EPS files <1>:                         \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* eqnarray environment:                  eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* equation environment:                  equation.          (line  3391)
+* equation environment <1>:              Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* equation number, cross referencing:    \ref.              (line  2869)
+* equation numbers, left vs. right:      Document class options.
+                                                            (line   820)
+* equation numbers, omitting:            eqnarray.          (line  3370)
+* equations, aligning:                   eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* equations, environment for:            equation.          (line  3391)
+* equations, flush left vs. centered:    Document class options.
+                                                            (line   814)
+* es-zet German letter:                  Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12344)
+* etex command:                          TeX engines.       (line   475)
+* eth, Icelandic letter:                 Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12312)
+* etoolbox package:                      Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1049)
+* euro symbol:                           Text symbols.      (line 12140)
+* eurosym package:                       Text symbols.      (line 12140)
+* ex:                                    Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* ex <1>:                                Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* exclamation point, upside-down:        Text symbols.      (line 12146)
 * executivepaper option:                 Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
-* figure environment:                    figure.             (line 2823)
-* filecontents environment:              filecontents.       (line 2876)
-* filecontents* environment:             filecontents.       (line 2876)
+                                                            (line   776)
+* exponent:                              Subscripts & superscripts.
+                                                            (line  7938)
+* extended Latin:                        Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* external files, writing:               filecontents.      (line  3469)
+* families, of fonts:                    Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1486)
+* fancyhdr package:                      Page styles.       (line  9524)
+* fancyhdr package <1>:                  \pagestyle.        (line  9667)
+* fancyvrb package:                      tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* fancyvrb package <1>:                  verbatim.          (line  5670)
+* feminine ordinal symbol:               Text symbols.      (line 12159)
+* figure environment:                    figure.            (line  3411)
+* figure number, cross referencing:      \ref.              (line  2869)
+* figures, footnotes in:                 minipage.          (line  4190)
+* figures, inserting:                    figure.            (line  3411)
+* file, root:                            Splitting the input.
+                                                            (line 12425)
+* filecontents environment:              filecontents.      (line  3469)
+* filecontents* environment:             filecontents.      (line  3469)
 * final option:                          Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
+                                                            (line   806)
 * first-latex-doc document:              About this document.
-                                                             (line  318)
+                                                            (line   347)
+* fixed-width font:                      Font styles.       (line  1386)
+* flafter package:                       Floats.            (line  1978)
 * fleqn option:                          Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
-* flushleft environment:                 flushleft.          (line 2927)
-* flushright environment:                flushright.         (line 2953)
-* <http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/> home page: About this document.
-                                                             (line  291)
-* in:                                    Units of length.    (line 5704)
-* inch:                                  Units of length.    (line 5704)
-* itemize environment:                   itemize.            (line 2979)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* float package:                         Floats.            (line  1948)
+* float page:                            Floats.            (line  1954)
+* flush left equations:                  Document class options.
+                                                            (line   814)
+* flushing floats and starting a page:   \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+                                                            (line  6083)
+* flushleft environment:                 flushleft.         (line  3520)
+* flushright environment:                flushright.        (line  3581)
+* font catalogue:                        Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1486)
+* font commands, low-level:              Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1471)
+* font size:                             Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1566)
+* font sizes:                            Font sizes.        (line  1436)
+* font styles:                           Font styles.       (line  1296)
+* font symbols, by number:               Symbols by font position.
+                                                            (line 12009)
+* fonts:                                 Fonts.             (line  1290)
+* fonts, new commands for:               \newfont.          (line  6979)
+* fonts, script:                         Calligraphic.      (line  8949)
+* footer style:                          \pagestyle.        (line  9660)
+* footer, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* footnote number, cross referencing:    \ref.              (line  2869)
+* footnote parameters:                   \footnote.         (line  6270)
+* footnote, in a table:                  Footnotes in a table.
+                                                            (line  6399)
+* footnote, in section headings:         Footnotes in section headings.
+                                                            (line  6380)
+* footnote, of a footnote:               Footnotes of footnotes.
+                                                            (line  6469)
+* footnotes in figures:                  minipage.          (line  4190)
+* footnotes, creating:                   Footnotes.         (line  6223)
+* Footnotes, in a minipage:              \footnote.         (line  6298)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote.         (line  6260)
+* formulas, environment for:             equation.          (line  3391)
+* formulas, math:                        Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* forward reference:                     Cross references.  (line  2768)
+* forward references, resolving:         Output files.      (line   449)
+* fraction:                              \frac.             (line  9371)
+* fragile commands:                      \protect.          (line  7011)
+* frame rule width:                      \fbox & \framebox. (line 10677)
+* frame, line width:                     \fbox & \framebox. (line 10677)
+* frame, separation from contents:       \fbox & \framebox. (line 10682)
+* French quotation marks:                Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* functions, math:                       Math functions.    (line  9062)
+* geometry package:                      Document class options.
+                                                            (line   797)
+* geometry package <1>:                  Document class options.
+                                                            (line   801)
+* global options:                        Document class options.
+                                                            (line   763)
+* global options <1>:                    Additional packages.
+                                                            (line   871)
+* glossaries:                            Glossaries.        (line 13208)
+* glossary:                              Glossaries.        (line 13208)
+* glossary, entries:                     \newglossaryentry. (line 13256)
+* glossary, entry reference:             \gls.              (line 13315)
+* glue register, plain TeX:              \newlength.        (line  6684)
+* graphics:                              Graphics.          (line 11183)
+* graphics <1>:                          Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* graphics <2>:                          \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* graphics package:                      Graphics.          (line 11183)
+* graphics package <1>:                  Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* graphics package <2>:                  \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* graphics package commands:             Commands for graphics.
+                                                            (line 11471)
+* graphics package options:              Graphics package options.
+                                                            (line 11220)
+* graphics packages:                     \line.             (line  4494)
+* graphics, resizing:                    \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* graphics, resizing <1>:                \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* graphics, scaling:                     \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* graphics, scaling <1>:                 \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* grave accent:                          Accents.           (line 12246)
+* grave accent, math:                    Math accents.      (line  9201)
+* greater than symbol, in text:          Text symbols.      (line 12149)
+* greek letters:                         Math symbols.      (line  8001)
+* group, and environments:               Environments.      (line  2910)
+* group_skip:                            makeindex.         (line 13087)
+* ha'c<ek accent, math:                  Math accents.      (line  9192)
+* hacek accent:                          Accents.           (line 12293)
+* Halmos symbol:                         \rule.             (line 12362)
+* hat accent:                            Accents.           (line 12242)
+* hat accent, math:                      Math accents.      (line  9204)
+* header style:                          \pagestyle.        (line  9660)
+* header, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* hello, world:                          Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   390)
+* here, putting floats:                  Floats.            (line  1948)
+* home page for manual:                  About this document.
+                                                            (line   320)
+* horizontal space:                      \hss.              (line  9890)
+* horizontal space, stretchable:         \hss.              (line  9890)
+* hungarian umlaut accent:               Accents.           (line 12271)
+* hyperref package:                      \footnotemark.     (line  6350)
+* hyperref package <1>:                  \footnotemark.     (line  6359)
+* hyperref package <2>:                  \pagenumbering.    (line  9641)
+* hyperref package <3>:                  Command line input.
+                                                            (line 13852)
+* hyphenation, defining:                 \hyphenation.      (line  6003)
+* hyphenation, discretionary:            \discretionary.    (line  5939)
+* hyphenation, forcing:                  \- (hyphenation).  (line  5904)
+* hyphenation, preventing:               \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10555)
+* Icelandic eth:                         Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12312)
+* Icelandic thorn:                       Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12348)
+* idx file:                              \index.            (line 13020)
+* ij letter, Dutch:                      Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12324)
+* implementations of TeX:                TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* importing graphics:                    \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* in:                                    Units of length.   (line  7473)
+* in-line formulas:                      math.              (line  4076)
+* inch:                                  Units of length.   (line  7473)
+* including graphics:                    \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* indent, forcing:                       \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7722)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage.         (line  4186)
+* indentfirst package:                   \part.             (line  2175)
+* indentfirst package <1>:               \chapter.          (line  2237)
+* indentfirst package <2>:               \section.          (line  2332)
+* indentfirst package <3>:               \subsection.       (line  2398)
+* indentfirst package <4>:               \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2475)
+* indentfirst package <5>:               \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7764)
+* indent_length:                         makeindex.         (line 13168)
+* indent_space:                          makeindex.         (line 13164)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also':   \index.            (line 12970)
+* index entry:                           \index.            (line 12920)
+* index package:                         \index.            (line 13015)
+* index, page range:                     \index.            (line 12954)
+* index, printing:                       \printindex.       (line 13193)
+* index, processing:                     makeindex.         (line 13036)
+* index, style file:                     makeindex.         (line 13048)
+* indexes:                               Indexes.           (line 12884)
+* infinite horizontal stretch:           \hfill.            (line  9857)
+* infinite vertical stretch:             \vfill.            (line 10470)
+* inner paragraph mode:                  Modes.             (line  9485)
+* input file:                            Splitting the input.
+                                                            (line 12421)
+* input, on command line:                Command line input.
+                                                            (line 13848)
+* input/output, to terminal:             Terminal input/output.
+                                                            (line 13642)
+* inserting figures:                     figure.            (line  3411)
+* insertions of special characters:      Special insertions.
+                                                            (line 11926)
+* internal vertical mode:                Modes.             (line  9476)
+* italic correction:                     \/.                (line 10174)
+* italic font:                           Font styles.       (line  1371)
+* itemize environment:                   itemize.           (line  3624)
+* item_0:                                makeindex.         (line 13111)
+* item_01:                               makeindex.         (line 13120)
+* item_1:                                makeindex.         (line 13114)
+* item_12:                               makeindex.         (line 13130)
+* item_2:                                makeindex.         (line 13117)
+* item_x1:                               makeindex.         (line 13124)
+* item_x2:                               makeindex.         (line 13134)
+* JPEG files:                            Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* JPEG files <1>:                        \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* JPG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* JPG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* justification, ragged left:            \raggedleft.       (line  3599)
+* justification, ragged right:           \raggedright.      (line  3548)
+* Knuth, Donald E.:                      Overview.          (line   364)
+* label:                                 Cross references.  (line  2747)
+* labelled lists, creating:              description.       (line  3130)
+* Lamport TeX:                           Overview.          (line   382)
+* Lamport, Leslie:                       Overview.          (line   364)
 * landscape option:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
-* latex command:                         Output files.       (line  393)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* landscape orientation:                 Document class options.
+                                                            (line   817)
+* latex command:                         Output files.      (line   426)
+* LaTeX logo:                            Text symbols.      (line 12037)
+* LaTeX overview:                        Overview.          (line   364)
+* LaTeX Project team:                    About this document.
+                                                            (line   331)
+* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e:                     About this document.
+                                                            (line   327)
 * latex-doc-ptr document:                About this document.
-                                                             (line  315)
+                                                            (line   344)
+* LaTeX2e logo:                          Text symbols.      (line 12040)
 * <latexrefman at tug.org> email address:   About this document.
-                                                             (line  302)
+                                                            (line   331)
+* Latin letters, additional:             Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* layout commands:                       Layout.            (line  1613)
+* layout, page parameters for:           Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* left angle quotation marks:            Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* left arrow, in text:                   Text symbols.      (line 12155)
+* left brace, in text:                   Text symbols.      (line 12102)
+* left quote:                            Text symbols.      (line 12056)
+* left quote, double:                    Text symbols.      (line 12168)
+* left quote, single:                    Text symbols.      (line 12174)
+* left-hand equation numbers:            Document class options.
+                                                            (line   820)
+* left-justifying text:                  \raggedright.      (line  3548)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft.         (line  3520)
+* left-to-right mode:                    Modes.             (line  9454)
 * legalpaper option:                     Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
+                                                            (line   776)
+* lengths, adding to:                    \addtolength.      (line  7535)
+* lengths, allocating new:               \newlength.        (line  6684)
+* lengths, defining and using:           Lengths.           (line  7368)
+* lengths, setting:                      \setlength.        (line  7512)
 * leqno option:                          Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
-* letter class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
-* letter environment:                    letter.             (line 3062)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* less than symbol, in text:             Text symbols.      (line 12152)
+* lethead_flag:                          makeindex.         (line 13094)
+* lethead_prefix:                        makeindex.         (line 13103)
+* lethead_suffix:                        makeindex.         (line 13107)
+* letter class:                          Document classes.  (line   734)
+* letter environment:                    letter.            (line  3707)
 * letterpaper option:                    Document class options.
-                                                             (line  716)
-* list environment:                      list.               (line 3067)
-* lR box:                                picture.            (line 3528)
-* lrbox:                                 lrbox.              (line 7678)
+                                                            (line   776)
+* letters, accented:                     Accents.           (line 12210)
+* letters, additional Latin:             Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* letters, ending:                       \closing.          (line 13466)
+* letters, starting:                     \opening.          (line 13571)
+* letters, writing:                      Letters.           (line 13345)
+* line break, forcing:                   \\.                (line  5778)
+* line breaking:                         Line breaking.     (line  5761)
+* line breaks, changing:                 \fussy & \sloppy.  (line  5962)
+* line breaks, forcing:                  \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+                                                            (line  6021)
+* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*.            (line  9355)
+* line breaks, preventing:               \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+                                                            (line  6021)
+* lines in tables:                       tabular.           (line  5011)
+* line_max:                              makeindex.         (line 13160)
+* lining numerals:                       Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* lining text up in tables:              tabular.           (line  5011)
+* lining text up using tab stops:        tabbing.           (line  4802)
+* list environment:                      list.              (line  3712)
+* list items, specifying counter:        \usecounter.       (line  7222)
+* list of figures file:                  Output files.      (line   459)
+* list of tables file:                   Output files.      (line   459)
+* listings package:                      tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* listings package <1>:                  verbatim.          (line  5664)
+* listings package <2>:                  \verb.             (line  5714)
+* lists of items:                        itemize.           (line  3624)
+* lists of items, generic:               list.              (line  3712)
+* lists of items, numbered:              enumerate.         (line  3268)
+* loading additional packages:           Additional packages.
+                                                            (line   862)
+* log file:                              Output files.      (line   444)
+* logo, LaTeX:                           Text symbols.      (line 12037)
+* logo, LaTeX2e:                         Text symbols.      (line 12040)
+* logo, TeX:                             Text symbols.      (line 12078)
+* long command:                          Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line   962)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols.   (line 12068)
+* low-level font commands:               Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1471)
+* lowercase:                             Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 11964)
+* LR box:                                picture.           (line  4337)
+* LR mode:                               Modes.             (line  9454)
+* lrbox:                                 lrbox.             (line 10887)
 * lshort document:                       About this document.
-                                                             (line  326)
-* lualatex command:                      TeX engines.        (line  458)
-* math environment:                      math.               (line 3423)
-* math environment <1>:                  Math formulas.      (line 5904)
-* minipage environment:                  minipage.           (line 3435)
-* mm:                                    Units of length.    (line 5714)
-* mu:                                    Units of length.    (line 5736)
+                                                            (line   355)
+* ltugboat class:                        tugboat template.  (line 14062)
+* lualatex command:                      TeX engines.       (line   492)
+* LuaTeX:                                TeX engines.       (line   492)
+* m-width:                               Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* macro package, LaTeX as:               Overview.          (line   369)
+* macron accent:                         Accents.           (line 12238)
+* macron accent, math:                   Math accents.      (line  9186)
+* macros2e package:                      \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+                                                            (line   627)
+* Madsen, Lars:                          eqnarray.          (line  3335)
+* make a box:                            \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10555)
+* makeindex:                             makeindex.         (line 13036)
+* makeindex program:                     makeindex.         (line 13036)
+* makeindex, style file:                 makeindex.         (line 13048)
+* making a title page:                   titlepage.         (line  5600)
+* making paragraphs:                     Making paragraphs. (line  7631)
+* marginal notes:                        Marginal notes.    (line  7798)
+* masculine ordinal symbol:              Text symbols.      (line 12159)
+* matching brackets:                     \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* matching parentheses:                  \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* math accents:                          Math accents.      (line  9178)
+* math environment:                      math.              (line  4076)
+* math environment <1>:                  Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* math formulas:                         Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* math functions:                        Math functions.    (line  9062)
+* math miscellany:                       Math miscellany.   (line  9329)
+* math mode:                             Modes.             (line  9464)
+* math mode, entering:                   Math formulas.     (line  7847)
+* math mode, spacing:                    Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9272)
+* math symbols:                          Math symbols.      (line  8001)
+* math, bold:                            Font styles.       (line  1418)
+* mathtools package:                     Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* mathtools package <1>:                 Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9266)
+* MetaPost package:                      \line.             (line  4494)
+* mfirstuc package:                      Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 12003)
+* mhchem package:                        Subscripts & superscripts.
+                                                            (line  7994)
+* Millimeter:                            Units of length.   (line  7483)
+* minipage environment:                  minipage.          (line  4088)
+* minipage, creating a:                  minipage.          (line  4088)
+* minted package:                        tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* minted package <1>:                    verbatim.          (line  5664)
+* minted package <2>:                    \verb.             (line  5714)
+* mirrors of CTAN:                       CTAN.              (line   717)
+* mm:                                    Units of length.   (line  7483)
+* modes:                                 Modes.             (line  9444)
+* monospace font:                        Font styles.       (line  1386)
+* moving arguments:                      \protect.          (line  7024)
+* mpfootnote counter:                    \footnote.         (line  6298)
+* mu:                                    Units of length.   (line  7505)
+* mu, math unit:                         Units of length.   (line  7505)
+* multicolumn text:                      \twocolumn.        (line  1630)
+* multilingual support:                  Accents.           (line 12210)
+* multind package:                       Indexes.           (line 12910)
+* multiplication, discretionary:         \*.                (line  9355)
+* name:                                  \newglossaryentry. (line 13293)
+* NBSP:                                  ~.                 (line 10094)
+* nested \include, not allowed:          \include & \includeonly.
+                                                            (line 12593)
+* new class commands:                    Class and package construction.
+                                                            (line   878)
+* new command, check:                    Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line   960)
+* new command, definition:               Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1035)
+* new commands, defining:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6490)
+* new commands, defining <1>:            \providecommand.   (line  6615)
+* new line, output as input:             \obeycr & \restorecr.
+                                                            (line  5840)
+* new line, starting:                    \\.                (line  5778)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode):   \newline.          (line  5880)
+* new page, starting:                    \newpage.          (line  6124)
+* non-English characters:                Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* notes in the margin:                   Marginal notes.    (line  7798)
 * notitlepage option:                    Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* null delimiter:                        \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* numbered items, specifying counter:    \usecounter.       (line  7222)
+* numerals, old-style:                   Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* oblique font:                          Font styles.       (line  1383)
+* oe ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12340)
+* ogonek:                                Accents.           (line 12275)
+* old-style numerals:                    Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* one-column output:                     \onecolumn.        (line  1618)
 * onecolumn option:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
+                                                            (line   835)
 * oneside option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
+                                                            (line   835)
 * openany option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
+                                                            (line   835)
 * openbib option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* opening quote:                         Text symbols.      (line 12056)
 * openright option:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
-* pc:                                    Units of length.    (line 5701)
-* pdflatex command:                      Output files.       (line  403)
-* picture environment:                   picture.            (line 3463)
-* pt:                                    Units of length.    (line 5697)
-* quotation environment:                 quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* quote environment:                     quotation and quote.
-                                                             (line 3735)
-* report class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
-* secnumdepth counter:                   Sectioning.         (line 2013)
-* slides class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
-* sp:                                    Units of length.    (line 5723)
-* tabbing environment:                   tabbing.            (line 3771)
-* table environment:                     table.              (line 3918)
-* tabular environment:                   tabular.            (line 3960)
-* textcomp package:                      Text symbols.       (line 8880)
-* thebibliography environment:           thebibliography.    (line 4282)
-* theorem environment:                   theorem.            (line 4398)
-* titlepage environment:                 titlepage.          (line 4411)
+                                                            (line   835)
+* OpenType fonts:                        TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* options, class:                        Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1005)
+* options, color package:                Color package options.
+                                                            (line 10942)
+* options, command line:                 Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13765)
+* options, document class:               Document class options.
+                                                            (line   763)
+* options, document class <1>:           Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* options, global:                       Additional packages.
+                                                            (line   871)
+* options, graphics package:             Graphics package options.
+                                                            (line 11220)
+* options, package:                      Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* options, package <1>:                  Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1005)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine:      Text symbols.      (line 12159)
+* oslash:                                Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12336)
+* outer paragraph mode:                  Modes.             (line  9485)
+* overbar accent:                        Accents.           (line 12238)
+* overdot accent, math:                  Math accents.      (line  9198)
+* overlining:                            Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9227)
+* overview of LaTeX:                     Overview.          (line   364)
+* package file layout:                   Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* package options:                       Class and package structure.
+                                                            (line   901)
+* package options <1>:                   Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1005)
+* package, algorithm2e:                  tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* package, amsfonts:                     Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* package, amsmath:                      array.             (line  3010)
+* package, amsmath <1>:                  array.             (line  3021)
+* package, amsmath <2>:                  displaymath.       (line  3202)
+* package, amsmath <3>:                  equation.          (line  3405)
+* package, amsmath <4>:                  theorem.           (line  5592)
+* package, amsmath <5>:                  Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* package, amsmath <6>:                  Dots.              (line  9038)
+* package, amsmath <7>:                  Math functions.    (line  9167)
+* package, amsmath <8>:                  Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9344)
+* package, amsmath <9>:                  Colon character & \colon.
+                                                            (line  9348)
+* package, amsthm:                       theorem.           (line  5592)
+* package, amsthm <1>:                   \rule.             (line 12367)
+* package, appendix:                     \appendix.         (line  2510)
+* package, array (package):              array.             (line  3032)
+* package, Asymptote:                    \line.             (line  4494)
+* package, Asymptote <1>:                \strut.            (line 10390)
+* package, Asymptote <2>:                \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10622)
+* package, babel:                        \chapter.          (line  2250)
+* package, babel <1>:                    thebibliography.   (line  5384)
+* package, babel <2>:                    Accents.           (line 12210)
+* package, babel <3>:                    \today.            (line 12397)
+* package, babel <4>:                    Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12724)
+* package, babel <5>:                    \index.            (line 12970)
+* package, bigfoot:                      Footnotes of footnotes.
+                                                            (line  6469)
+* package, bm:                           \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8993)
+* package, cleveref:                     Cross references.  (line  2779)
+* package, cleveref <1>:                 \ref.              (line  2892)
+* package, cleveref <2>:                 \footnotemark.     (line  6350)
+* package, cprotect:                     verbatim.          (line  5659)
+* package, cprotect <1>:                 \verb.             (line  5717)
+* package, datetime:                     \today.            (line 12411)
+* package, dcolumn:                      array.             (line  3032)
+* package, enumitem:                     list.              (line  3976)
+* package, envlab:                       \makelabels.       (line 13553)
+* package, etoolbox:                     Class and package commands.
+                                                            (line  1049)
+* package, eurosym:                      Text symbols.      (line 12140)
+* package, fancyhdr:                     Page styles.       (line  9524)
+* package, fancyhdr <1>:                 \pagestyle.        (line  9667)
+* package, fancyvrb:                     tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>:                 verbatim.          (line  5670)
+* package, flafter:                      Floats.            (line  1978)
+* package, float:                        Floats.            (line  1948)
+* package, geometry:                     Document class options.
+                                                            (line   797)
+* package, geometry <1>:                 Document class options.
+                                                            (line   801)
+* package, hyperref:                     \footnotemark.     (line  6350)
+* package, hyperref <1>:                 \footnotemark.     (line  6359)
+* package, hyperref <2>:                 \pagenumbering.    (line  9641)
+* package, hyperref <3>:                 Command line input.
+                                                            (line 13852)
+* package, indentfirst:                  \part.             (line  2175)
+* package, indentfirst <1>:              \chapter.          (line  2237)
+* package, indentfirst <2>:              \section.          (line  2332)
+* package, indentfirst <3>:              \subsection.       (line  2398)
+* package, indentfirst <4>:              \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2475)
+* package, indentfirst <5>:              \indent & \noindent.
+                                                            (line  7764)
+* package, index:                        \index.            (line 13015)
+* package, listings:                     tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* package, listings <1>:                 verbatim.          (line  5664)
+* package, listings <2>:                 \verb.             (line  5714)
+* package, macros2e:                     \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+                                                            (line   627)
+* package, mathtools:                    Math formulas.     (line  7927)
+* package, mathtools <1>:                Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9266)
+* package, MetaPost:                     \line.             (line  4494)
+* package, mfirstuc:                     Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 12003)
+* package, mhchem:                       Subscripts & superscripts.
+                                                            (line  7994)
+* package, minted:                       tabbing.           (line  4942)
+* package, minted <1>:                   verbatim.          (line  5664)
+* package, minted <2>:                   \verb.             (line  5714)
+* package, multind:                      Indexes.           (line 12910)
+* package, pict2e:                       \line.             (line  4494)
+* package, polyglossia:                  Accents.           (line 12210)
+* package, polyglossia <1>:              \today.            (line 12397)
+* package, polyglossia <2>:              Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12724)
+* package, polyglossia <3>:              \index.            (line 12970)
+* package, PSTricks:                     \line.             (line  4494)
+* package, sagetex:                      Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13821)
+* package, setspace:                     Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1583)
+* package, showidx:                      Indexes.           (line 12910)
+* package, siunitx:                      ~.                 (line 10120)
+* package, symbols:                      Math symbols.      (line  8001)
+* package, textcase:                     Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 12000)
+* package, textcomp:                     Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* package, TikZ:                         \line.             (line  4494)
+* package, TikZ <1>:                     \strut.            (line 10390)
+* package, TikZ <2>:                     \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10621)
+* package, titlesec:                     \part.             (line  2179)
+* package, titlesec <1>:                 \chapter.          (line  2258)
+* package, titlesec <2>:                 \section.          (line  2336)
+* package, titlesec <3>:                 \subsection.       (line  2402)
+* package, titlesec <4>:                 \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2479)
+* package, tocbibbind:                   Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12735)
+* package, tocloft:                      Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12735)
+* package, ulem:                         Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9236)
+* package, url:                          \verb.             (line  5710)
+* package, verbatimbox:                  verbatim.          (line  5670)
+* packages, loading additional:          Additional packages.
+                                                            (line   862)
+* page break, forcing:                   \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+                                                            (line  6182)
+* page break, preventing:                \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+                                                            (line  6182)
+* page breaking:                         Page breaking.     (line  6052)
+* page layout parameters:                Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* page number, cross referencing:        \pageref.          (line  2845)
+* page numbering style:                  \pagenumbering.    (line  9602)
+* page style, this page:                 \thispagestyle.    (line  9744)
+* page styles:                           Page styles.       (line  9518)
+* page, colored:                         Colored pages.     (line 11162)
+* page_precedence:                       makeindex.         (line 13173)
+* paired delimiters:                     \left & \right.    (line  9383)
+* paragraph:                             Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* paragraph <1>:                         \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* paragraph indentation:                 \parindent & \parskip.
+                                                            (line  7771)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage:    minipage.          (line  4186)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line  4772)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation & quote.
+                                                            (line  4772)
+* paragraph mode:                        Modes.             (line  9450)
+* paragraph mode <1>:                    \parbox.           (line 10711)
+* paragraph symbol:                      Text symbols.      (line 12060)
+* paragraph, ending:                     \par.              (line  7671)
+* paragraph, in a box:                   \parbox.           (line 10711)
+* paragraphs:                            Making paragraphs. (line  7631)
+* parameters, for footnotes:             \footnote.         (line  6270)
+* parameters, page layout:               Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* part:                                  Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* part <1>:                              \part.             (line  2131)
+* pc:                                    Units of length.   (line  7470)
+* PDF graphic files:                     Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* PDF graphic files <1>:                 \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* pdflatex command:                      Output files.      (line   436)
+* pdfTeX:                                Output files.      (line   436)
+* pdfTeX engine:                         TeX engines.       (line   475)
+* period, abbreviation-ending:           \@.                (line  9977)
+* period, centered, in text:             Text symbols.      (line 12162)
+* period, sentence-ending:               \@.                (line  9977)
+* period, spacing after:                 \@.                (line  9977)
+* pica:                                  Units of length.   (line  7470)
+* pict2e package:                        \line.             (line  4494)
+* pict2e package <1>:                    \line.             (line  4494)
+* picture environment:                   picture.           (line  4240)
+* pictures, creating:                    picture.           (line  4240)
+* pilcrow:                               Text symbols.      (line 12060)
+* placement of floats:                   Floats.            (line  1927)
+* plural:                                \newglossaryentry. (line 13301)
+* PNG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
+                                                            (line 11284)
+* PNG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.  (line 11477)
+* poetry, an environment for:            verse.             (line  5725)
+* Point:                                 Units of length.   (line  7466)
+* polish l:                              Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12328)
+* polyglossia package:                   Accents.           (line 12210)
+* polyglossia package <1>:               \today.            (line 12397)
+* polyglossia package <2>:               Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12724)
+* polyglossia package <3>:               \index.            (line 12970)
+* portrait orientation:                  Document class options.
+                                                            (line   817)
+* position, in picture:                  picture.           (line  4311)
+* positional parameter:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6536)
+* postamble:                             makeindex.         (line 13084)
+* postscript, in letters:                \ps.               (line 13583)
+* pounds symbol:                         Text symbols.      (line 12064)
+* preamble:                              makeindex.         (line 13080)
+* preamble, defined:                     Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   406)
+* prompt, *:                             Recovering from errors.
+                                                            (line 13911)
+* pronunciation:                         Overview.          (line   382)
+* PSTricks package:                      \line.             (line  4494)
+* pt:                                    Units of length.   (line  7466)
+* quad:                                  Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9317)
+* question mark, upside-down:            Text symbols.      (line 12165)
+* quotation environment:                 quotation & quote. (line  4772)
+* quotation marks, French:               Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* quote environment:                     quotation & quote. (line  4772)
+* quote, single straight:                Text symbols.      (line 12180)
+* quote, straight base:                  Text symbols.      (line 12184)
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+                                                            (line  4772)
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+                                                            (line  4772)
+* radical:                               \sqrt.             (line  9418)
+* ragged left text:                      \raggedleft.       (line  3599)
+* ragged left text, environment for:     flushright.        (line  3581)
+* ragged right text:                     \raggedright.      (line  3548)
+* ragged right text, environment for:    flushleft.         (line  3520)
+* redefining environments:               \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+                                                            (line  6733)
+* reference, forward:                    Cross references.  (line  2768)
+* references, resolving forward:         Output files.      (line   449)
+* registered symbol:                     Text symbols.      (line 12187)
+* relation, text above:                  \stackrel.         (line  9434)
+* remarks in the margin:                 Marginal notes.    (line  7798)
+* report class:                          Document classes.  (line   734)
+* reporting bugs:                        About this document.
+                                                            (line   335)
+* reserved characters:                   Reserved characters.
+                                                            (line 11932)
+* resizing:                              \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* resizing <1>:                          \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* right angle quotation marks:           Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* right arrow, in text:                  Text symbols.      (line 12190)
+* right brace, in text:                  Text symbols.      (line 12105)
+* right quote:                           Text symbols.      (line 12071)
+* right quote, double:                   Text symbols.      (line 12171)
+* right quote, single:                   Text symbols.      (line 12177)
+* right-hand equation numbers:           Document class options.
+                                                            (line   820)
+* right-justifying text:                 \raggedleft.       (line  3599)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright.       (line  3581)
+* ring accent:                           Accents.           (line 12279)
+* ring accent, math:                     Math accents.      (line  9207)
+* robust commands:                       \protect.          (line  7011)
+* roman font:                            Font styles.       (line  1374)
+* root file:                             Splitting the input.
+                                                            (line 12425)
+* roots:                                 \sqrt.             (line  9418)
+* rotating graphics:                     \rotatebox.        (line 11799)
+* rotating text:                         \rotatebox.        (line 11799)
+* rotation:                              \rotatebox.        (line 11799)
+* row, tabbing:                          tabbing.           (line  4842)
+* rubber lengths, defining new:          \newlength.        (line  6684)
+* running header and footer:             Page layout parameters.
+                                                            (line  1769)
+* running header and footer style:       \pagestyle.        (line  9660)
+* sagetex package:                       Command line options.
+                                                            (line 13821)
+* sans serif font:                       Font styles.       (line  1380)
+* Scaled point:                          Units of length.   (line  7492)
+* scaling:                               \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* scaling <1>:                           \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* script fonts:                          Calligraphic.      (line  8949)
+* script letters for math:               Font styles.       (line  1368)
+* secnumdepth:                           Sectioning.        (line  2108)
+* secnumdepth counter:                   Sectioning.        (line  2109)
+* section:                               Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* section <1>:                           \section.          (line  2278)
+* section number, cross referencing:     \ref.              (line  2869)
+* section numbers, printing:             Sectioning.        (line  2109)
+* section symbol:                        Text symbols.      (line 12075)
+* section, redefining:                   \@startsection.    (line  2548)
+* sectioning commands:                   Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* sectioning, part:                      \part.             (line  2131)
+* series, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1513)
+* setspace package:                      Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1583)
+* setting counters:                      \setcounter.       (line  7281)
+* shapes, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1553)
+* sharp S letters:                       Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12344)
+* showidx package:                       Indexes.           (line 12910)
+* simulating typed text:                 verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* single angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* single guillemets:                     Text symbols.      (line 12046)
+* single left quote:                     Text symbols.      (line 12174)
+* single low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.      (line 12068)
+* single quote, straight:                Text symbols.      (line 12180)
+* single right quote:                    Text symbols.      (line 12177)
+* siunitx package:                       ~.                 (line 10120)
+* sizes of text:                         Font sizes.        (line  1436)
+* skip register, plain TeX:              \newlength.        (line  6684)
+* slanted font:                          Font styles.       (line  1383)
+* slides class:                          Document classes.  (line   734)
+* sloppypar:                             sloppypar.         (line  5975)
+* sloppypar environment:                 sloppypar.         (line  5975)
+* small caps font:                       Font styles.       (line  1377)
+* sort:                                  \newglossaryentry. (line 13305)
+* sp:                                    Units of length.   (line  7492)
+* space, hard:                           ~.                 (line 10094)
+* space, inserting horizontal:           \hss.              (line  9890)
+* space, inserting vertical:             \addvspace.        (line 10499)
+* space, negative thin:                  \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* space, thin:                           \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* space, unbreakable:                    ~.                 (line 10094)
+* space, vertical:                       \vspace.           (line 10419)
+* spaces:                                Spaces.            (line  9772)
+* spaces, ignore around commands:        \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+                                                            (line  7063)
+* spacing within math mode:              Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9272)
+* spacing, inter-sentence:               \frenchspacing.    (line 10023)
+* spacing, inter-sentence <1>:           \normalsfcodes.    (line 10043)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols.   (line 12159)
+* special characters:                    Reserved characters.
+                                                            (line 11932)
+* special characters <1>:                Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12298)
+* special insertions:                    Special insertions.
+                                                            (line 11926)
+* specifier, float placement:            Floats.            (line  1927)
+* splitting the input file:              Splitting the input.
+                                                            (line 12421)
+* square root:                           \sqrt.             (line  9418)
+* stack math:                            \stackrel.         (line  9434)
+* star-variants, commands:               \@ifstar.          (line   642)
+* starred form, defining new commands:   \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+                                                            (line  6509)
+* starting a new page:                   \newpage.          (line  6124)
+* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+                                                            (line  6083)
+* starting and ending:                   Starting and ending.
+                                                            (line   390)
+* starting on a right-hand page:         \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+                                                            (line  6083)
+* sterling symbol:                       Text symbols.      (line 12064)
+* straight double quote, base:           Text symbols.      (line 12184)
+* straight quote, base:                  Text symbols.      (line 12184)
+* straight single quote:                 Text symbols.      (line 12180)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal:          \hfill.            (line  9857)
+* stretch, infinite vertical:            \vfill.            (line 10470)
+* stretch, omitting vertical:            \raggedbottom.     (line  1758)
+* strut:                                 \strut.            (line 10334)
+* styles of text:                        Font styles.       (line  1296)
+* styles, page:                          Page styles.       (line  9518)
+* subparagraph:                          Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* subparagraph <1>:                      \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* subscript:                             Subscripts & superscripts.
+                                                            (line  7938)
+* subsection:                            Sectioning.        (line  2052)
+* subsection <1>:                        \subsection.       (line  2356)
+* subsubsection:                         \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2420)
+* superscript:                           Subscripts & superscripts.
+                                                            (line  7938)
+* symbol:                                \newglossaryentry. (line 13309)
+* symbols package:                       Math symbols.      (line  8001)
+* symbols, boldface:                     \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+                                                            (line  8967)
+* symbols, math:                         Math symbols.      (line  8001)
+* symbols, text:                         Text symbols.      (line 12021)
+* tab stops, using:                      tabbing.           (line  4802)
+* tabbing environment:                   tabbing.           (line  4802)
+* table environment:                     table.             (line  4951)
+* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
+                                                            (line 12744)
+* table of contents file:                Output files.      (line   459)
+* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
+                                                            (line  6380)
+* table of contents, creating:           Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12650)
+* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning.
+                                                            (line  2120)
+* tables, creating:                      table.             (line  4951)
+* tabular environment:                   tabular.           (line  5011)
+* template, article:                     article template.  (line 13969)
+* template, beamer:                      beamer template.   (line 13938)
+* template, book:                        book template.     (line 13989)
+* template, book <1>:                    Larger book template.
+                                                            (line 14012)
+* template, TUGboat:                     tugboat template.  (line 14062)
+* templates, document:                   Document templates.
+                                                            (line 13931)
+* terminal input/output:                 Terminal input/output.
+                                                            (line 13642)
+* TeX logo:                              Text symbols.      (line 12078)
+* text symbols:                          Text symbols.      (line 12021)
+* text, resizing:                        \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* text, resizing <1>:                    \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* text, scaling:                         \scalebox.         (line 11866)
+* text, scaling <1>:                     \resizebox.        (line 11897)
+* textcase package:                      Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 12000)
+* textcomp package:                      Font styles.       (line  1422)
+* textcomp package <1>:                  Text symbols.      (line 12021)
+* thanks, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.        (line  9581)
+* thebibliography environment:           thebibliography.   (line  5337)
+* theorem environment:                   theorem.           (line  5570)
+* theorem-like environment:              \newtheorem.       (line  6867)
+* theorems, defining:                    \newtheorem.       (line  6867)
+* theorems, typesetting:                 theorem.           (line  5570)
+* thin space:                            Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9298)
+* thin space <1>:                        \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* thin space, negative:                  Spacing in math mode.
+                                                            (line  9312)
+* thin space, negative <1>:              \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+                                                            (line 10150)
+* thorn, Icelandic letter:               Additional Latin letters.
+                                                            (line 12348)
+* three-quarters em-dash:                Text symbols.      (line 12193)
+* tie:                                   ~.                 (line 10094)
+* tie-after accent:                      Accents.           (line 12285)
+* TikZ package:                          \line.             (line  4494)
+* TikZ package <1>:                      \strut.            (line 10390)
+* TikZ package <2>:                      \mbox & \makebox.  (line 10621)
+* tilde accent:                          Accents.           (line 12250)
+* tilde accent, math:                    Math accents.      (line  9210)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text:                 Text symbols.      (line 12084)
+* title page, separate or run-in:        Document class options.
+                                                            (line   828)
+* title pages, creating:                 titlepage.         (line  5600)
+* title, for titlepage:                  \maketitle.        (line  9588)
+* titlepage environment:                 titlepage.         (line  5600)
 * titlepage option:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  746)
+                                                            (line   806)
+* titles, making:                        \maketitle.        (line  9530)
+* titlesec package:                      \part.             (line  2179)
+* titlesec package <1>:                  \chapter.          (line  2258)
+* titlesec package <2>:                  \section.          (line  2336)
+* titlesec package <3>:                  \subsection.       (line  2402)
+* titlesec package <4>:                  \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+                                                            (line  2479)
+* tocbibbind package:                    Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12735)
+* tocdepth:                              Sectioning.        (line  2119)
+* tocdepth counter:                      Sectioning.        (line  2120)
+* tocloft package:                       Table of contents etc..
+                                                            (line 12735)
+* today's date:                          \today.            (line 12390)
+* tombstone:                             \rule.             (line 12362)
 * topmargin:                             Page layout parameters.
-                                                             (line 1808)
-* topnumber:                             Floats.             (line 1954)
-* topnumber <1>:                         Floats.             (line 1955)
-* totalnumber:                           Floats.             (line 1958)
-* totalnumber <1>:                       Floats.             (line 1959)
+                                                            (line  1888)
+* topnumber:                             Floats.            (line  2034)
+* topnumber <1>:                         Floats.            (line  2035)
+* totalnumber:                           Floats.            (line  2038)
+* totalnumber <1>:                       Floats.            (line  2039)
+* trademark symbol:                      Text symbols.      (line 12196)
+* transcript file:                       Output files.      (line   444)
+* TrueType fonts:                        TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* TUGboat template:                      tugboat template.  (line 14062)
+* two-column output:                     \twocolumn.        (line  1630)
+* two-thirds em-dash:                    Text symbols.      (line 12199)
 * twocolumn option:                      Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
+                                                            (line   835)
 * twoside option:                        Document class options.
-                                                             (line  775)
+                                                            (line   835)
+* type styles:                           Font styles.       (line  1296)
+* typed text, simulating:                verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* typeface sizes:                        Font sizes.        (line  1436)
+* typefaces:                             Fonts.             (line  1290)
+* typewriter font:                       Font styles.       (line  1386)
+* typewriter labels in lists:            description.       (line  3160)
+* ulem package:                          Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9236)
+* umlaut accent:                         Accents.           (line 12227)
+* underbar:                              Accents.           (line 12255)
+* underlining:                           Over- and Underlining.
+                                                            (line  9227)
+* underscore, in text:                   Text symbols.      (line 12202)
+* Unicode input, native:                 TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* units, of length:                      Units of length.   (line  7462)
+* unofficial nature of this manual:      About this document.
+                                                            (line   331)
+* unordered lists:                       itemize.           (line  3624)
+* uppercase:                             Upper and lower case.
+                                                            (line 11964)
+* url package:                           \verb.             (line  5710)
+* using BibTeX:                          Using BibTeX.      (line  5512)
 * usrguide official documentation:       About this document.
-                                                             (line  321)
-* verbatim environment:                  verbatim.           (line 4450)
-* verse environment:                     verse.              (line 4485)
-* xdvi command:                          Output files.       (line  393)
-* xdvipdfmx:                             TeX engines.        (line  467)
-* xelatex command:                       TeX engines.        (line  467)
+                                                            (line   350)
+* UTF-8:                                 TeX engines.       (line   468)
+* variables, a list of:                  Counters.          (line  7138)
+* vector symbol, math:                   Math accents.      (line  9213)
+* verbatim environment:                  verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* verbatim text:                         verbatim.          (line  5639)
+* verbatim text, inline:                 \verb.             (line  5678)
+* verbatimbox package:                   verbatim.          (line  5670)
+* verse environment:                     verse.             (line  5725)
+* vertical bar, double, in text:         Text symbols.      (line 12096)
+* vertical bar, in text:                 Text symbols.      (line 12093)
+* vertical mode:                         Modes.             (line  9472)
+* vertical space:                        \vspace.           (line 10419)
+* vertical space <1>:                    \addvspace.        (line 10499)
+* vertical space before paragraphs:      \parindent & \parskip.
+                                                            (line  7771)
+* visible space:                         \verb.             (line  5703)
+* visible space symbol, in text:         Text symbols.      (line 12205)
+* weights, of fonts:                     Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1523)
+* white space:                           Spaces.            (line  9772)
+* wide hat accent, math:                 Math accents.      (line  9216)
+* wide tilde accent, math:               Math accents.      (line  9219)
+* widths, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
+                                                            (line  1535)
+* writing external files:                filecontents.      (line  3469)
+* writing letters:                       Letters.           (line 13345)
+* x-height:                              Units of length.   (line  7494)
+* xdvi command:                          Output files.      (line   426)
+* xdvipdfmx:                             TeX engines.       (line   501)
+* xelatex command:                       TeX engines.       (line   501)
+* XeTeX:                                 TeX engines.       (line   501)
+* xindy:                                 makeindex.         (line 13183)
+* xindy program:                         makeindex.         (line 13183)
 

Modified: trunk/latex2e.xml
===================================================================
--- trunk/latex2e.xml	2018-07-02 20:51:26 UTC (rev 678)
+++ trunk/latex2e.xml	2018-07-03 15:04:05 UTC (rev 679)
@@ -3,39 +3,44 @@
 <texinfo xml:lang="en">
 <filename file="latex2e.xml"></filename>
 <preamble>\input texinfo
-</preamble><!-- c $Id: latex2e.texi 613 2018-03-21 18:48:08Z jimhefferon $ -->
+</preamble><!-- c $Id: latex2e.texi 678 2018-07-02 20:51:26Z karl $ -->
 <!-- comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
 <setfilename file="latex2e.info" spaces=" ">latex2e.info</setfilename>
-<set name="UPDATED" line=" UPDATED March 2018">March 2018</set>
-<set name="LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE" line=" LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/
-">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</set>
-<set name="LTXREFMAN_BUGS" line=" LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org
-">latexrefman@@tug.org</set>
-<clear name="HAS-MATH" line=" HAS-MATH 
-"></clear>
-<macro name="iftexthenelse" line=" iftexthenelse {then,else}
-"><formalarg>then</formalarg><formalarg>else</formalarg>\else\@c
-</macro>
-        
-
-<settitle spaces=" ">&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (March 2018)</settitle>
+<set name="UPDATED" line=" UPDATED July 2018">July 2018</set>
+<!-- c $Id$ -->
+<!-- c Public domain. -->
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE" line=" LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman">puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</set>
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_BUGS" line=" LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org">latexrefman@@tug.org</set>
+<clear name="HAS-MATH" line=" HAS-MATH "></clear>
+<macro name="iftexthenelse" line=" iftexthenelse {then,else}"><formalarg>then</formalarg><formalarg>else</formalarg>\else\@c
+</macro>
+        
+
+<settitle spaces=" ">&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (July 2018)</settitle>
 <!-- comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
 
 <!-- c latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
 <!-- c xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
 <!-- c xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
 <!-- c -->
-<!-- c xx ending a run with errors -->
 <!-- c xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
 <!-- c xx classes and packages - required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
 <!-- c -->
-<!-- c xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (CTAN package latex-info) -->
-<!-- c xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex2e-reference -->
 <!-- c xx merge permuted-index -->
 <!-- c xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
 <!-- c xx merge display style math -->
-<!-- c xx vertical mode, horizontal mode -->
-<!-- c xx JH Discuss restricted execution -->
+<!-- c xx JH explain nfss somewhere -->
+<!-- c xx JH expand BiBTeX -->
+<!-- c xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
+<!-- c xx JH something on code listings -->
+<!-- c xx JH ligatures -->
+<!-- c xx JH \xspace -->
+<!-- c xx JH \stretch -->
+<!-- c xx JH \mathstrut -->
+<!-- c xx JH \phantom https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/4519/how-do-i-create-an-invisible-character -->
+<!-- c xx JH \baselineskip https://texfaq.org/FAQ-baselinepar -->
+<!-- c xx JH \contentsline, \@@dottedtocline? -->
+<!-- c xx JH more on \write18, beyond what's mentioned in Command line. -->
 <!-- c -->
 <!-- c xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
 <!-- c xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
@@ -44,7 +49,7 @@
 
 <copying endspaces=" ">
 <para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of March 2018.
+document preparation system, version of July 2018.
 </para>
 <para>This manual was originally translated from <file>LATEX.HLP</file> v1.0a in
 the VMS Help Library.  The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -85,6 +90,9 @@
 <!-- comment end of License -->
 </para></copying>
 
+<!-- c Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). -->
+<syncodeindex from="fn" to="cp" line=" fn cp"></syncodeindex>
+
 <dircategory spaces=" ">TeX</dircategory>
 <direntry endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menutitle separator=": ">LaTeX2e</menutitle><menunode separator=".              ">(latex2e)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
@@ -95,8 +103,8 @@
 
 <titlepage endspaces=" ">
 <title spaces=" ">&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
-<subtitle spaces=" ">March 2018</subtitle>
-<author spaces=" "><url><urefurl>http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</urefurl></url></author>
+<subtitle spaces=" ">July 2018</subtitle>
+<author spaces=" "><url><urefurl>puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</urefurl></url></author>
 <page></page>
 <vskip> 0pt plus 1filll</vskip>
 <insertcopying></insertcopying>
@@ -127,7 +135,7 @@
 <top spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</sectiontitle>
 
 <para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-March 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+July 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">About this document</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bug reporting, etc.
@@ -135,7 +143,7 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::		">Document classes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Some of the various classes available.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::			">Fonts</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::			">Layout</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Controlling the page layout.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::			">Sectioning</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How to section properly.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::			">Sectioning</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::		">Cross references</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Automatic referencing.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::		">Environments</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Such as enumerate & itemize.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::	        ">Line breaking</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Influencing line breaks.
@@ -159,8 +167,7 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::	">Terminal input/output</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">User interaction.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">Command line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">System-independent command-line behavior.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">Document templates</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Starter templates for various document classes.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::		">Concept Index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">General index.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           	">Command Index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Alphabetical list of &latex; commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::		        ">Index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">General index.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
@@ -168,29 +175,29 @@
 <node name="About-this-document" spaces=" "><nodename>About this document</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Overview</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Top</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>About this document</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1"><url><urefurl>http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</urefurl></url> <r>home page</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="1">home page for manual</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document
 preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex;
 typesetting program (<pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This document&textrsquo;s home page is
-<url><urefurl>http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</urefurl></url>.  That page has links to the
+<url><urefurl>puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</urefurl></url>.  That page has links to the
 current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
 subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="1">&latex; vs.&noeos; &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="2">&latex; vs.&noeos; &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>In this document, we will mostly just use &textlsquo;&latex;&textrsquo; rather than
 &textlsquo;&latex;2e&textrsquo;, since the previous version of &latex; (2.09) was
 frozen decades ago.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="2">unofficial nature of this manual</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="3">&latex; Project team</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="2"><email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email> <r>email address</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="3">unofficial nature of this manual</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="4">&latex; Project team</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1" mergedindex="cp"><email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email> <r>email address</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
 (<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org</urefurl></url>).  The official documentation written by
 the &latex; project is available from their web site.  This document is
 completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex;
 maintainers.  
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="4">bug reporting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="5">reporting bugs</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="5">bug reporting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="6">reporting bugs</indexterm></cindex>
 Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
 Instead, please send all comments to <email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email>.
 </para>
@@ -200,21 +207,21 @@
 </para>
 <table commandarg="url" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="3">latex-doc-ptr <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="2" mergedindex="cp">latex-doc-ptr <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="4">first-latex-doc <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="3" mergedindex="cp">first-latex-doc <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="5">usrguide <r>official documentation</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="4" mergedindex="cp">usrguide <r>official documentation</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;.
 Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
 of &latex; itself; one such is the next item:
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="6">lshort <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="5" mergedindex="cp">lshort <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://tug.org/begin.html</itemformat></item>
@@ -228,18 +235,18 @@
 <node name="Overview" spaces=" "><nodename>Overview</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Document classes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">About this document</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Overview of &latex;</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="6">overview of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="7">basics of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="8">Knuth, Donald E.</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="9">Lamport, Leslie</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="10">&latex; overview</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="7">overview of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="8">basics of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="9">Knuth, Donald E.</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="10">Lamport, Leslie</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="11">&latex; overview</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; is a system for typesetting documents.  It was originally
 created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
 (<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org</urefurl></url>).  It is widely used, particularly for
 complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="11">macro package, &latex; as</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="12">macro package, &latex; as</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with
 interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
 should be formatted.  It is implemented as a set of related commands
@@ -252,18 +259,19 @@
 the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
 available to a &latex; user.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="12">Lamport &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="13">pronunciation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="13">Lamport &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="14">pronunciation</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The name &latex; is short for &textldquo;Lamport &tex;&textrdquo;.  It is pronounced
 LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks.  Inside a document,
 produce the logo with <code>\LaTeX</code>.  Where use of the logo is not
 sensible, such as in plain text, write it as <samp>LaTeX</samp>.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">Starting and ending</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The standard beginning and end of a document.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">Output files</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Files produced.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">Starting and ending</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The standard beginning and end of a document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">Output files</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Files produced.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">&tex; engines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Programs that can compile &tex; and  &latex;.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">&latex; command syntax</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">General syntax of &latex; commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                    ">CTAN</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Our repository.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
@@ -271,12 +279,12 @@
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Starting and ending</sectiontitle>
 
 <anchor name="Starting-_0026-ending">Starting & ending</anchor><!-- c old name -->
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="14">starting and ending</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="15">ending and starting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="16">hello, world</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="15">starting and ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="16">ending and starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="17">hello, world</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
-and ending.  Here is a &textldquo;hello, world&textrdquo; example:
+and ending.  This is a small example.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
@@ -285,24 +293,29 @@
 \end{document}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="17">document class, defined</indexterm></cindex>
 <noindent></noindent>
-<para>Here, the <samp>article</samp> is the so-called <dfn>document class</dfn>,
-implemented in a file <file>article.cls</file>.  Any document class can be
-used.  A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
+<para>Every &latex; document has a <code>\begin{document}</code> line and an
+<code>\end{document}</code> line.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="18">document class, defined</indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Here, the <samp>article</samp> is the <dfn>document class</dfn>.  It is implemented
+in a file <file>article.cls</file>.  You can use any document class on your
+system.  A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
 array of others are widely available.  <xref label="Document-classes"><xrefnodename>Document classes</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="18">preamble, defined</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="19">preamble, defined</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>You can include other &latex; commands between the
 <code>\documentclass</code> and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands.
 This area is called the <dfn>preamble</dfn>.
 </para>
-<para>The <code>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</code> is a so-called
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="19">environment</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>\begin{document}</code>, <code>\end{document}</code> pair defines an
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="20">environment</indexterm></cindex>
 <dfn>environment</dfn>; the <samp>document</samp> environment (and no others) is
-required in all &latex; documents (<pxref label="document"><xrefnodename>document</xrefnodename></pxref>).  &latex;
-provides many environments itself, and many more are defined separately.
-<xref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></xref>.
+required in all &latex; documents (<pxref label="document"><xrefnodename>document</xrefnodename></pxref>).  &latex; make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(<pxref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (<pxref label="CTAN"><xrefnodename>CTAN</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <para>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
 a &latex; input file.
@@ -312,17 +325,18 @@
 <node name="Output-files" spaces=" "><nodename>Output files</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">&tex; engines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Starting and ending</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Output files</sectiontitle>
 
-<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two accessory files.
+<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
 The main output file&textrsquo;s name ends in either <file>.dvi</file> or <file>.pdf</file>.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.dvi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="7">.dvi <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="8">latex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="9">xdvi <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="10">dvips <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="11">dvipdfmx <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="12">dvitype <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="6" mergedindex="cp">.dvi <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="7" mergedindex="cp">latex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="8" mergedindex="cp">xdvi <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="9" mergedindex="cp">dvips <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="10" mergedindex="cp">dvipdfmx <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="11" mergedindex="cp">dvitype <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-dvi">output files dvi</anchor>
 <para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>latex</command> then it
 produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <file>.dvi</file>.  You
 can view this file with a command such as <command>xdvi</command>, or convert
@@ -333,9 +347,10 @@
 available (<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</urefurl></url>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.pdf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="13">.pdf <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="20">pdf&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="14">pdflatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="12" mergedindex="cp">.pdf <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="21">pdf&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="13" mergedindex="cp">pdflatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-pdf">output files pdf</anchor>
 <para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>pdflatex</command>,
 among other commands (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>), then the main output is
 a Portable Document Format (PDF) file.  Typically this is a
@@ -347,19 +362,21 @@
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.log</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="21">transcript file</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="22">log file</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="15">.log <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="22">transcript file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="23">log file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="14" mergedindex="cp">.log <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-log">output files log</anchor>
 <para>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
 loaded packages.  It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
 additional information for any errors.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.aux</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="23">auxiliary file</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="16">.aux <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="24">cross references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="25">forward references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="26">references, resolving forward</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="24">auxiliary file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="15" mergedindex="cp">.aux <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="25">cross references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="26">forward references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="27">references, resolving forward</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="output-files-aux">output files aux</anchor>
 <para>Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as
 cross references.  For example, the first time that &latex; finds a
 forward reference&textmdash;a cross reference to something that has not yet
@@ -373,41 +390,43 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="17">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="27">list of figures file</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="18">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="28">list of tables file</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="19">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="29">table of contents file</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="30">contents file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="16" mergedindex="cp">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="28">list of figures file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="17" mergedindex="cp">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="29">list of tables file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="18" mergedindex="cp">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="30">table of contents file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="31">contents file</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
-ending.  These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list
-of figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
-<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents.  A particular class
-may create others; the list is open-ended.
+ending.  These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of
+contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).  A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
 </para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="TeX-engines" spaces=" "><nodename>&tex; engines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Output files</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&tex; engines</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="31">engines, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="32">implementations of &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="33">UTF-8</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="34">Unicode input, native</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="35">TrueType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="36">OpenType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="32">engines, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="33">implementations of &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="34">UTF-8</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="35">Unicode input, native</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="36">TrueType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="37">OpenType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex;
 implementation (<pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This section gives a terse
-overview of the main programs.
+overview of the main programs (see also <ref label="Command-line"><xrefnodename>Command line</xrefnodename></ref>).
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">latex</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pdflatex</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="37">pdf&tex; engine</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="20">etex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="38">e-&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="38">pdf&tex; engine</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="19" mergedindex="cp">etex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="39">e-&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-latex">tex engines latex</anchor>
 <para>In &tex; Live (<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/texlive</urefurl></url>), if &latex; is invoked
 via either the system command <command>latex</command> or <command>pdflatex</command>,
 then the pdf&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</urefurl></url>).
@@ -426,8 +445,9 @@
 assumed to be available in &latex;.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lualatex</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="21">lualatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="39">Lua&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="20" mergedindex="cp">lualatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="40">Lua&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-lualatex">tex engines lualatex</anchor>
 <para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>lualatex</command>, the
 Lua&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</urefurl></url>).  This
 program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
@@ -438,10 +458,11 @@
 but this is rarely used.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">xelatex</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="22">xelatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="40">Xe&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="23">.xdv <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="24">xdvipdfmx</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="21" mergedindex="cp">xelatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="41">Xe&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="22" mergedindex="cp">.xdv <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="23" mergedindex="cp">xdvipdfmx</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-xelatex">tex engines xelatex</anchor>
 <para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>xelatex</command>, the
 Xe&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/xetex</urefurl></url>).  Like Lua&tex;,
 Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
@@ -462,13 +483,13 @@
 </para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="LaTeX-command-syntax" spaces=" "><nodename>&latex; command syntax</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">&tex; engines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<node name="LaTeX-command-syntax" spaces=" "><nodename>&latex; command syntax</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">CTAN</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">&tex; engines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&latex; command syntax</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="41">command syntax</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="25">\ <r>character starting commands</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="26">[...] <r>for optional arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="27">{...} <r>for required arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="42">command syntax</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="24" mergedindex="cp">\ <r>character starting commands</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="25" mergedindex="cp">[...] <r>for optional arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="26" mergedindex="cp">{...} <r>for required arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a backslash
 character, <code>\</code>.  The name itself then consists of either
 (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
@@ -503,7 +524,7 @@
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">Environment</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Area of the source with distinct behavior.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">Declaration</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the value or meaning of a command.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\makeatletter and \makeatother</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the status of the at-sign character.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\makeatletter & \makeatother</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the status of the at-sign character.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
@@ -529,7 +550,7 @@
 \end{verse}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>See <ref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></ref> for a list of environments. 
+<para><xref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></xref> for a list of environments. 
 </para>
 <para>The <var>environment name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
 the end.  This includes the case where <var>environment name</var> ends in a
@@ -549,7 +570,7 @@
 
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="Declaration" spaces=" "><nodename>Declaration</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makeatletter and \makeatother</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Environment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Declaration" spaces=" "><nodename>Declaration</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makeatletter & \makeatother</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Environment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command declarations</sectiontitle>
 
 <para>A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
@@ -558,8 +579,8 @@
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother" spaces=" "><nodename>\makeatletter and \makeatother</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Declaration</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" spaces=" "><nodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Declaration</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></sectiontitle>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -576,9 +597,9 @@
 </para>
 <para>As each character is read by &tex; for &latex;, it is assigned a
 character category code, or 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="42">catcode</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="43">character category code</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="44">category code, character</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="43">catcode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="44">character category code</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="45">category code, character</indexterm></cindex>
 <dfn>catcode</dfn> for short. For instance, the backslash <code>\</code> is
 assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a command.  These two
 commands alter the catcode assigned to <code>&arobase;</code>.
@@ -599,16 +620,16 @@
 <code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\documentclass</code> commands set the at sign to
 have the character code of a letter.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="45"><r>package</r>, <code>macros2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="46"><code>macros2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="46"><r>package</r>, <code>macros2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="47"><code>macros2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign
 in their names see <url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</urefurl></url>. These macros are
 mainly intended to package or class authors.
 </para>
-<para>The example below is typical.  In the user&textrsquo;s class file is a command
-<code>\thesis&arobase;universityname</code>.  The user wants to change the
-definition.  These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<para>In this example the class file has a command
+<code>\thesis&arobase;universityname</code> that the user wants to change.  These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
 <code>\begin{document}</code>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -622,19 +643,19 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005c_0040ifstar" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;ifstar</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">\makeatletter and \makeatother</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005c_0040ifstar" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;ifstar</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">\makeatletter & \makeatother</nodeup></node>
 <subsubsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;ifstar</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="28">\&arobase;ifstar</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="47">commands, star-variants</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="48">star-variants, commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="27" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;ifstar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="48">commands, star-variants</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="49">star-variants, commands</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\mycmd}{\&arobase;ifstar{\mycmd&arobase;star}{\mycmd&arobase;nostar}}
-\newcommand{\mycmd&arobase;nostar}[<var>non-starred command number of args</var>]{<var>body of non-starred command</var>} 
-\newcommand{\mycmd&arobase;star}[<var>starred command number of args</var>]{<var>body of starred command</var>}
+\newcommand{\mycmd&arobase;nostar}[<var>nostar-num-args</var>]{<var>nostar-body</var>} 
+\newcommand{\mycmd&arobase;star}[<var>star-num-args</var>]{<var>star-body</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>Many standard &latex; environments or commands have a variant with the
@@ -655,7 +676,7 @@
 same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
 As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign <code>&arobase;</code>
 must be enclosed inside a <code>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</code> block
-(<pxref label="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter and \makeatother</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+(<pxref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <para>This example of <code>\&arobase;ifstar</code> defines the command <code>\ciel</code> and a
 variant <code>\ciel*</code>.  Both have one required argument.  A call to
@@ -669,15 +690,16 @@
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
-arguments than does the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent
-007&textrsquo;s <code>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
-\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</code> is equivalent to <code>``My name is
-\textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</code>
+arguments than the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent 007&textrsquo;s
+<code>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
+\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</code> is equivalent to entering the commands
+<code>``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</code>
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*{\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
 \newcommand*{\agentsecret&arobase;starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\&arobase;ifstar{\agentsecret&arobase;starred}{\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+  \&arobase;ifstar{\agentsecret&arobase;starred}{\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred}}
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
@@ -697,13 +719,46 @@
 </subsubsection>
 </subsection>
 </section>
+<node name="CTAN" spaces=" "><nodename>CTAN</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>CTAN: Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="50">CTAN</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network, CTAN, is the &tex; and
+&latex; community&textrsquo;s repository of free material.  It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to &latex;
+for download.  Visit CTAN on the web at <url><urefurl>https://ctan.org</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people.  For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher&textrsquo;s
+specifications.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="51">DANTE e.V.</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="52">mirrors of CTAN</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/mirrors</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Document-classes" spaces=" "><nodename>Document classes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Fonts</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Overview</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document classes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="49">document classes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="50">classes of documents</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="29">\documentclass</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="53">document classes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="54">classes of documents</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="28" mergedindex="cp">\documentclass</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>The document&textrsquo;s overall class is defined with this command, which is
 normally the first command in a &latex; source file.
@@ -712,34 +767,39 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>options</var>]{<var>class</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="30">article <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="31">report <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="32">book <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="33">letter <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="34">slides <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="29" mergedindex="cp">article <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="30" mergedindex="cp">report <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="31" mergedindex="cp">book <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="32" mergedindex="cp">letter <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="33" mergedindex="cp">slides <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>The following document <var>class</var> names are built into &latex;.
 (Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
 <pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">article</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-article">document classes article</anchor>
+<para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">book</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-book">document classes book</anchor>
+<para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
 matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
 (<pxref label="Front_002fback-matter"><xrefnodename>Front/back matter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">letter</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels 
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-letter">document classes letter</anchor>
+<para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels 
 (<pxref label="Letters"><xrefnodename>Letters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">report</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-report">document classes report</anchor>
+<para>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
 such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">slides</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>For slide presentations&textmdash;rarely used today.  In its place the
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-slides">document classes slides</anchor>
+<para>For slide presentations&textmdash;rarely used today.  In its place the
 <code>beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent (<pxref label="beamer-template"><xrefnodename>beamer
 template</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
@@ -757,14 +817,14 @@
 <node name="Document-class-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Document class options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Additional packages</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document class options</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="51">document class options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="52">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="53">class options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="54">global options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="55">document class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="56">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="57">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="58">global options</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>You can specify so-called <dfn>global options</dfn> or <dfn>class options</dfn> to
-the <code>\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets.
-To specify more than one <var>option</var>, separate them with a comma, as in:
+<para>You can specify <dfn>global options</dfn> or <dfn>class options</dfn> to the
+<code>\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets.  To
+specify more than one <var>option</var>, separate them with a comma.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>option1</var>,<var>option2</var>,...]{<var>class</var>}
@@ -772,9 +832,9 @@
 
 <para>Here is the list of the standard class options.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="35">10pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="36">11pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="37">12pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="34" mergedindex="cp">10pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="35" mergedindex="cp">11pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="36" mergedindex="cp">12pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>All of the standard classes except <code>slides</code> accept the following
 options for selecting the typeface size (default is <code>10pt</code>):
 </para>
@@ -782,12 +842,12 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">10pt  11pt  12pt
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="38">a4paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="39">a5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="40">b5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="41">executivepaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="42">legalpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="43">letterpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="37" mergedindex="cp">a4paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="38" mergedindex="cp">a5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="39" mergedindex="cp">b5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="40" mergedindex="cp">executivepaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="41" mergedindex="cp">legalpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="42" mergedindex="cp">letterpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
 size (these show height by width):
 </para>
@@ -811,63 +871,63 @@
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="44">\pdfpagewidth</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="45">\pdfpageheight</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="55"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="56"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="43" mergedindex="cp">\pdfpagewidth</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="44" mergedindex="cp">\pdfpageheight</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="59"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="60"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>When using one of the engines pdf&latex;, Lua&latex;, or Xe&latex;
 (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>), options other than <code>letterpaper</code> set
 the print area but you must also set the physical paper size.  One way
 to do that is to put <code>\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</code> and
 <code>\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</code> in your document&textrsquo;s preamble.
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="57"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="58"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="61"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="62"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 </para>
 <para>The <code>geometry</code> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
 area and physical page size.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="46">draft <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="47">final <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="48">fleqn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="49">landscape <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="50">leqno <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="51">openbib <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="52">titlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="53">notitlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="45" mergedindex="cp">draft <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="46" mergedindex="cp">final <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="47" mergedindex="cp">fleqn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="48" mergedindex="cp">landscape <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="49" mergedindex="cp">leqno <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="50" mergedindex="cp">openbib <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="51" mergedindex="cp">titlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="52" mergedindex="cp">notitlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Miscellaneous other options:
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">final</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="59">black boxes, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="63">black boxes, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
 black box in the margin; default is <code>final</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fleqn</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="60">flush left equations</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="61">centered equations</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="62">equations, flush left vs.&noeos; centered</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="64">flush left equations</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="65">centered equations</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="66">equations, flush left vs.&noeos; centered</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">landscape</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="63">landscape orientation</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="64">portrait orientation</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="67">landscape orientation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="68">portrait orientation</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">leqno</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="65">left-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="66">right-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="67">equation numbers, left vs.&noeos; right</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="69">left-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="70">right-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="71">equation numbers, left vs.&noeos; right</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openbib</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="68">bibliography format, open</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="72">bibliography format, open</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Use &textldquo;open&textrdquo; bibliography format.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">titlepage</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">notitlepage</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="69">title page, separate or run-in</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="73">title page, separate or run-in</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
 for the abstract also, if there is one.  The default for the
 <code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
@@ -876,12 +936,12 @@
 
 <para>The following options are not available with the <code>slides</code> class.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="54">onecolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="55">twocolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="56">oneside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="57">twoside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="58">openright <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="59">openany <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="53" mergedindex="cp">onecolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="54" mergedindex="cp">twocolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="55" mergedindex="cp">oneside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="56" mergedindex="cp">twoside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="57" mergedindex="cp">openright <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="58" mergedindex="cp">openany <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">onecolumn</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twocolumn</itemformat></itemx>
@@ -889,8 +949,8 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">oneside</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twoside</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="60">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="61">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="59" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="60" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code>oneside</code>, except
 that in the <code>book</code> class the default is <code>twoside</code>.
 </para>
@@ -907,7 +967,7 @@
 <code>openright</code> for <code>book</code>, and <code>openany</code> for <code>report</code>.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="62">clock <r>option to <code>slides</code> class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="61" mergedindex="cp">clock <r>option to <code>slides</code> class</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>The <code>slides</code> class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing
 the time at the bottom of each note.
 </para>
@@ -916,10 +976,10 @@
 <node name="Additional-packages" spaces=" "><nodename>Additional packages</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Document class options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Additional packages</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="70">loading additional packages</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="71">packages, loading additional</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="72">additional packages, loading</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="63">\usepackage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="74">loading additional packages</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="75">packages, loading additional</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="76">additional packages, loading</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="62" mergedindex="cp">\usepackage</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Load a package <var>pkg</var>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
 list <var>options</var>, as here.
 </para>
@@ -931,8 +991,8 @@
 as in <code>\usepackage{<var>pkg1</var>,<var>pkg2</var>,...}</code>, or use multiple
 <code>\usepackage</code> commands.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="73">global options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="74">options, global</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="77">global options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="78">options, global</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
 to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
 <code>\usepackage</code>.
@@ -942,9 +1002,9 @@
 <node name="Class-and-package-construction" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package construction</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Additional packages</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package construction</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="75">document class commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="76">commands, document class</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="77">new class commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="79">document class commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="80">commands, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="81">new class commands</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>You can create new document classes and new packages.  For instance, if
 your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
@@ -957,13 +1017,13 @@
 specific to that class.  Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
 package while a command to make the page headers say <code>Memo from the
 SMC Math Department</code> is for a class.
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="78">class and package difference</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="79">difference between class and package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="82">class and package difference</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="83">difference between class and package</indexterm></cindex>
 </para>
 <para>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <code>&arobase;</code> as a
 character in command names without having to surround the code
 containing that command with <code>\makeatletter</code> and
-<code>\makeatother</code>.  <xref label="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter and \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>. This allow
+<code>\makeatother</code>.  <xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>. This allow
 you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
 Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
 some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
@@ -980,13 +1040,13 @@
 <node name="Class-and-package-structure" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package structure</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Class and package commands</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package structure</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="80">class and package structure</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="81">class file layout</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="82">package file layout</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="83">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="84">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="85">class options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="86">package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="84">class and package structure</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="85">class file layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="86">package file layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="87">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="88">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="89">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="90">package options</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>A class file or package file typically has four parts.  
 </para><enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
@@ -1015,7 +1075,6 @@
 loading other files.
 </para></listitem></enumerate>
 
-
 <para>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <file>stub.cls</file>
 where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the
 <file>.tex</file> file.
@@ -1027,8 +1086,9 @@
 \ProcessOptions\relax
 \LoadClass{article}
 </pre></example>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="87">class file example</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="91">class file example</indexterm></cindex>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
 passing them all to the <code>article</code> class, and then loads the
 <code>article</code> class to provide the basis for this class&textrsquo;s code.
@@ -1039,24 +1099,25 @@
 of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
 <url><urefurl>https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
+
 </subsection>
 <node name="Class-and-package-commands" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package commands</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Class and package structure</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package commands</sectiontitle>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="88">class and package commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="89">commands, class and package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="92">class and package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="93">commands, class and package</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtBeginDvi{specials}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="64">\AtBeginDvi</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="63" mergedindex="cp">\AtBeginDvi</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Save in a box register things that are written to the <file>.dvi</file> file
 at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtEndOfClass{<var>code</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtEndOfPackage{<var>code</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="65">\AtEndOfClass</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="66">\AtEndOfPackage</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="64" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndOfClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="65" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndOfPackage</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Hook to insert <var>code</var> to be executed when &latex; finishes
 processing the current class or package.  You can use these hooks
 multiple times; the <code>code</code> will be executed in the order that you
@@ -1064,13 +1125,13 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CheckCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CheckCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="67">\CheckCommand</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="68">\CheckCommand*</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="90">new command, check</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="66" mergedindex="cp">\CheckCommand</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="67" mergedindex="cp">\CheckCommand*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="94">new command, check</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) but does
 not define <var>cmd</var>; instead it checks that the current definition of
 <var>cmd</var> is exactly as given by <var>definition</var> and is or is not 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="91">long command</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="95">long command</indexterm></cindex>
 <dfn>long</dfn> as expected.  A long command is a command that accepts
 <code>\par</code> within an argument.  The <var>cmd</var> command is expected to be
 long with the unstarred version of <code>\CheckCommand</code>.  Raises an
@@ -1088,16 +1149,16 @@
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageInfo{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassInfoNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageInfoNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="69">\ClassError</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="70">\PackageError</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="71">\ClassWarning</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="72">\PackageWarning</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="73">\ClassWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="74">\PackageWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="75">\ClassInfo</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="76">\PackageInfo</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="77">\ClassInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="78">\PackageInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="68" mergedindex="cp">\ClassError</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="69" mergedindex="cp">\PackageError</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="70" mergedindex="cp">\ClassWarning</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="71" mergedindex="cp">\PackageWarning</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="72" mergedindex="cp">\ClassWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="73" mergedindex="cp">\PackageWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="74" mergedindex="cp">\ClassInfo</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="75" mergedindex="cp">\PackageInfo</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="76" mergedindex="cp">\ClassInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="77" mergedindex="cp">\PackageInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
 </para>
 <para>For <code>\ClassError</code> and <code>\PackageError</code> the message is
@@ -1118,23 +1179,23 @@
 appends a period to the messages.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CurrentOption</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="79">\CurrentOption</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="78" mergedindex="cp">\CurrentOption</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option.  Can only
 be used within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code>
 or <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareOption{<var>option</var>}{<var>code</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="80">\DeclareOption</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="81">\DeclareOption*</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="92">class options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="93">package options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="94">options, class</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="95">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="79" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareOption</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="80" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareOption*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="96">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="97">package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="98">options, class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="99">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
 <code>\documentclass</code> command.  For example, the <code>smcmemo</code> class
-could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
-first page with <code>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</code>.  The class file
+could have an option <code>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</code> allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page.  The class file
 must contain <code>\DeclareOption{logo}{<var>code</var>}</code> (and later,
 <code>\ProcessOptions</code>).
 </para>
@@ -1165,9 +1226,9 @@
 
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareRobustCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>} </itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareRobustCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="82">\DeclareRobustCommand</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="83">\DeclareRobustCommand*</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="96">new command, definition</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="81" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareRobustCommand</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="82" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareRobustCommand*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="100">new command, definition</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &
 \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
 within the <var>definition</var> is fragile.  (For a discussion of robust and
@@ -1181,16 +1242,16 @@
 using <code>\newcommand</code> so unless the command&textrsquo;s data is fragile and the
 command is used within a moving argument, use <code>\newcommand</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="97"><r>package</r>, <code>etoolbox</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="98"><code>etoolbox</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
- 
-<para>The <code>etoolbox</code> package offers commands <code>\newrobustcmd</code>,
-<code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>,
-<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code> which are similar
-to <code>\newcommand</code>, <code>\newcommand*</code>, <code>\renewcommand</code>,
-<code>\renewcommand*</code>, <code>\providecommand</code>, and
-<code>\providecommand*</code>, but define a robust <var>cmd</var> with two advantages
-as compared to <code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code>:
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="101"><r>package</r>, <code>etoolbox</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="102"><code>etoolbox</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <file>etoolbox</file> package offers the commands
+<code>\newrobustcmd</code>, <code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, as well as the commands
+<code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>, and the commands
+<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code>.  These are
+similar to <code>\newcommand</code>, <code>\newcommand*</code>,
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, <code>\renewcommand*</code>, <code>\providecommand</code>, and
+<code>\providecommand*</code>, but define a robust <var>cmd</var> with two
+advantages as compared to <code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code>:
 </para><enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
 <listitem>
 <para>They use the low-level e-&tex; protection mechanism rather than the
@@ -1207,15 +1268,21 @@
 
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\IfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\InputIfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="84">\IfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="85">\InputIfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Execute <var>true code</var> if &latex; can find the file <file><var>file
-name</var></file> and <var>false code</var> otherwise.  In the second case it inputs the
-file immediately after executing <var>true code</var>.  Thus
-<code>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
-img.pdf not found}}</code> will include the graphic <file>img.pdf</file> if it is
-found but otherwise just give a warning.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="83" mergedindex="cp">\IfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="84" mergedindex="cp">\InputIfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Execute <var>true code</var> if &latex; finds the file <file><var>file
+name</var></file> or <var>false code</var> otherwise.  In the first case it executing
+<var>true code</var> and then inputs the file.  Thus the command
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+  \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will include the graphic <file>img.pdf</file> if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+</para>
 <para>This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses,
 not only in the current directory.  To look only in the current
 directory do something like <code>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<var>true
@@ -1226,8 +1293,8 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\LoadClassWithOptions{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="86">\LoadClass</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="87">\LoadClassWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="85" mergedindex="cp">\LoadClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="86" mergedindex="cp">\LoadClassWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Load a class, as with <code>\documentclass[<var>options
 list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release info</var>]</code>.  An example is
 <code>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</code>.
@@ -1239,12 +1306,16 @@
 <!-- c and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some -->
 <!-- c date. -->
 </para>
-<para>If you request a <var>release date</var> and the date of
-the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning
-on the screen and in the log like <code>You have requested, on input
-line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
-`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.</code>
+<para>If you request a <var>release date</var> and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+</pre></example>
+
 <para>The command version <code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code> uses the list of
 options for the current class.  This means it ignores any options passed
 to it via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>.  This is a convenience command
@@ -1252,7 +1323,7 @@
 <code>article</code> class, without having to track which options were passed.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ExecuteOptions{<var>options-list</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="88">\ExecuteOptions</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="87" mergedindex="cp">\ExecuteOptions</indexterm></findex>
 <para>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
 executes the command <code>\ds&arobase;<var>option</var></code>.  If this command is not
 defined then that option is silently ignored.
@@ -1263,7 +1334,7 @@
 <code>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\NeedsTeXFormat{<var>format</var>}[<var>format date</var>]</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="89">\NeedsTeXFormat</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="88" mergedindex="cp">\NeedsTeXFormat</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Specifies the format that this class must be run under.  Often issued
 as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
 <code>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</code>.  When a document using that class is
@@ -1276,12 +1347,15 @@
 features, include the optional <var>format date</var> on which those features
 were implemented.  If present it must be in the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>.
 If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
-<var>format date</var> then you get a warning like <samp>You have requested
-release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is
-available.</samp>
+<var>format date</var> then you get a warning like this.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+</pre></example>
+
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\OptionNotUsed</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="90">\OptionNotUsed</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="89" mergedindex="cp">\OptionNotUsed</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Adds the current option to the list of unused options.  Can only be used
 within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code> or
 <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
@@ -1294,8 +1368,8 @@
 
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PassOptionsToClass{<var>option list</var>}{<var>class name</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>option list</var>}{<var>package name</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="91">\PassOptionsToClass</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="92">\PassOptionsToPackage</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="90" mergedindex="cp">\PassOptionsToClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="91" mergedindex="cp">\PassOptionsToPackage</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <var>option list</var> to the
 options used by any future <code>\RequirePackage</code> or <code>\usepackage</code>
 command for package <var>package name</var> or the class <var>class name</var>.
@@ -1309,18 +1383,24 @@
 </para>
 <para>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
 that to once, for example replacing the two
-<code>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</code>
-with the single
-<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</code>.  But if you
-are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need
-to queue up the options you desire for this other package.  For
-instance, suppose the package <code>foo</code> loads the package
-<code>geometry</code>.  Instead of
-<code>\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}</code> you must
-write <code>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
-\RequirePackage{foo}</code>.  (If <code>foo.sty</code> loads an option in conflict
-with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.)
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}</code> and
+<code>\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</code> with the single command
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</code>.
 </para>
+<para>However, imagine that you are loading <file>firstpkg</file> and inside that
+package it loads <file>secondpkg</file>, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option <code>draft</code>.  Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+\RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(If <code>firstpkg.sty</code> loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+</para>
 <para>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
 writers.  For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <code>graphicx</code>
 package with the option <code>draft</code> and also wants to use a class
@@ -1330,8 +1410,8 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProcessOptions</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProcessOptions*<var>\&arobase;options</var></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="93">\ProcessOptions</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="94">\ProcessOptions*</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="92" mergedindex="cp">\ProcessOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="93" mergedindex="cp">\ProcessOptions*</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.  Include it
 in the class file as <code>\ProcessOptions\relax</code> (because of the
 existence of the starred command).
@@ -1371,44 +1451,45 @@
 the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
 means that the global options are processed first.
 </para>
-
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="95">\ProvidesClass</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="96">\ProvidesPackage</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="94" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="95" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesPackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
 </para>
-<para>When a user writes <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then &latex; loads
-the file <file>smcmemo.cls</file>.  Similarly, a user writing
-<code>\usepackage{test}</code> prompts &latex; to load the file
-<code>test.sty</code>.  If the name of the file does not match the declared
-class or package name then you get a warning.  Thus, if you invoke
+<para>When you load a class or package, for example with
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> or <code>\usepackage{test}</code>, &latex;
+inputs a file.  If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning.  Thus, if you invoke
 <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code>, and the file <file>smcmemo.cls</file> has
 the statement <code>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</code> then you get a warning like
 <code>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
 class provides 'xxx'.</code>  This warning does not prevent &latex; from
 processing the rest of the class file normally.
 </para>
-<para>If you include the optional argument, then you must include the date, before
-the first space if any, and it must have the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>. The rest
-of the optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies
-the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the
-log file.  Thus, if your file <file>smcmemo.cls</file> contains the line
-<code>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</code> and your
-document&textrsquo;s first line is <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then you will
-see <code>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</code>.
+<para>If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file.  Thus, if your file <file>smcmemo.cls</file> contains the line
+<code>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</code> and
+your document&textrsquo;s first line is <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then you
+will see <code>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</code>.
 </para>
 <para>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
-to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their
-system is earlier than <var>release date</var>, by using the optional arguments
-such as <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</code> or
-<code>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</code>.  (Note that package users only
-rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+<var>release date</var>.  For instance, a user could enter
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</code> or
+<code>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</code> to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date.  (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesFile{<var>file name</var>}[<var>additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="97">\ProvidesFile</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="96" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesFile</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
 configuration files or font definition files.  Put this command in that
 file and you get in the log a string like <code>File: test.config
@@ -1418,13 +1499,13 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\RequirePackageWithOptions{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="98">\RequirePackage</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="99">\RequirePackageWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Load a package, like the document author command <code>\usepackage</code>.
-<xref label="Additional-packages"><xrefnodename>Additional packages</xrefnodename></xref>. An example is
-<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</code>.  Note that the
-&latex; development team strongly recommends use of these commands over
-Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\input</code>; see the Class Guide.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="97" mergedindex="cp">\RequirePackage</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="98" mergedindex="cp">\RequirePackageWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Load a package, like the command <code>\usepackage</code> (<pxref label="Additional-packages"><xrefnodename>Additional
+packages</xrefnodename></pxref>). The &latex; development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\input</code>; see the Class
+Guide.  An example is
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</code>.
 </para>
 <para>The <var>option list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list.  The
 <var>release date</var>, if present, must have the form <var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>.  If
@@ -1455,8 +1536,8 @@
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Fonts</sectiontitle>
 <anchor name="Typefaces">Typefaces</anchor><!-- c old name -->
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="99">typefaces</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="100">fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="103">typefaces</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="104">fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Two important aspects of selecting a <dfn>font</dfn> are specifying a size
 and a style.  The &latex; commands for doing this are described here.
@@ -1471,92 +1552,90 @@
 <node name="Font-styles" spaces=" "><nodename>Font styles</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Font sizes</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Font styles</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="101">font styles</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="102">type styles</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="103">styles of text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="105">font styles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="106">type styles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="107">styles of text</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>The following type style commands are supported by &latex;.
 </para>
-<para>This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as in
-<code>\textit{<var>text</var>}</code>.  In the table below, the corresponding
-command in parenthesis is the &textldquo;declaration form&textrdquo;, which takes no
-arguments, as in <code>{\itshape <var>text</var>}</code>.  The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group.
+<para>In the table below the listed commands, the <code>\text...</code>  commands,
+is used with an argument, as in <code>\textit{<var>text</var>}</code>.  This is
+the preferred form.  But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful.  This form
+takes no arguments, as in <code>{\itshape <var>text</var>}</code>.  The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group.  In addition, each has an environment form such as
+<code>\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}</code>.
 </para>
-<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
-are cumulative; e.g., you can say either <code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> or
-<code>\bfseries\sffamily</code> to get bold sans serif.
+<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> or <code>\bfseries\sffamily</code>.
 </para>
-<para>You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for
-instance, <code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="99" mergedindex="cp">\nocorrlist</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="100" mergedindex="cp">\nocorr</indexterm></findex>
+<para>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (<pxref label="_005c_002f"><xrefnodename>\/</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+<code>\nocorrlist</code>, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+<code>\nocorr</code> at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+<code>\textit{\nocorr text}</code> or <code>\textsc{text \nocorr}</code>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="100">\nocorrlist</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="101">\nocorr</indexterm></findex>
-<para>These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections
-if needed.  (<xref label="_005c_002f"><xrefnodename>\/</xrefnodename></xref>, for the details of italic corrections.)
-Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following
-character is in the list <code>\nocorrlist</code>, which by default consists
-of a period and a comma.  To suppress the automatic insertion of
-italic correction, use <code>\nocorr</code> at the start or end of the
-command argument, such as <code>\textit{\nocorr text}</code> or
-<code>\textsc{text \nocorr}</code>.
-</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textrm (\rmfamily)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="102">\textrm</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="103">\rmfamily</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="101" mergedindex="cp">\textrm</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="102" mergedindex="cp">\rmfamily</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Roman.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textit (\itshape)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="104">\textit</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="105">\itshape</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="103" mergedindex="cp">\textit</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="104" mergedindex="cp">\itshape</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Italics.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textmd (\mdseries)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="106">\textmd</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="107">\mdseries</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="105" mergedindex="cp">\textmd</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="106" mergedindex="cp">\mdseries</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Medium weight (default).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textbf (\bfseries)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="108">\textbf</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="109">\bfseries</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="107" mergedindex="cp">\textbf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="108" mergedindex="cp">\bfseries</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Boldface.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textup (\upshape)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="110">\textup</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="111">\upshape</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="109" mergedindex="cp">\textup</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="110" mergedindex="cp">\upshape</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Upright (default).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsl (\slshape)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="112">\textsl</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="113">\slshape</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="111" mergedindex="cp">\textsl</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="112" mergedindex="cp">\slshape</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Slanted.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsf (\sffamily)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="114">\textsf</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="115">\sffamily</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="113" mergedindex="cp">\textsf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="114" mergedindex="cp">\sffamily</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Sans serif.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsc (\scshape)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="116">\textsc</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="117">\scshape</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="115" mergedindex="cp">\textsc</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="116" mergedindex="cp">\scshape</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Small caps.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\texttt (\ttfamily)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="118">\texttt</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="119">\ttfamily</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="117" mergedindex="cp">\texttt</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="118" mergedindex="cp">\ttfamily</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Typewriter.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textnormal (\normalfont)</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="120">\textnormal</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="121">\normalfont</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="119" mergedindex="cp">\textnormal</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="120" mergedindex="cp">\normalfont</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Main document font.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="104">emphasis</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="122">\emph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="108">emphasis</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="121" mergedindex="cp">\emph</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Although it also changes fonts, the <code>\emph{<var>text</var>}</code> command
 is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
 substitute for <code>\textit</code>.  For example, <code>\emph{<var>start
@@ -1565,59 +1644,56 @@
 will be in roman.
 </para>
 <para>&latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
-switch to the given style, that is, are <emph>not</emph> cumulative.  Also,
-they are used differently than the above commands:
-<code>{\<var>cmd</var>...}</code> instead of <code>\<var>cmd</var>{...}</code>.  These
-are two unrelated constructs.
+switch to the given style, that is, are <emph>not</emph> cumulative.  They are
+used as declarations: <code>{\<var>cmd</var>...}</code> instead of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>{...}</code>.
 </para>
+<para>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+</para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="123">\bf</indexterm>\bf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="105">bold font</indexterm></cindex>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="122" mergedindex="cp">\bf</indexterm>\bf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="109">bold font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Switch to bold face.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="124">\cal</indexterm>\cal</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="106">script letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="107">calligraphic letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="123" mergedindex="cp">\cal</indexterm>\cal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="110">script letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="111">calligraphic letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="125">\it</indexterm>\it</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="108">italic font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="124" mergedindex="cp">\it</indexterm>\it</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="112">italic font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Italics.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="126">\rm</indexterm>\rm</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="109">roman font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="125" mergedindex="cp">\rm</indexterm>\rm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="113">roman font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Roman.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="127">\sc</indexterm>\sc</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="110">small caps font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="126" mergedindex="cp">\sc</indexterm>\sc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="114">small caps font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Small caps.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="128">\sf</indexterm>\sf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="111">sans serif font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="127" mergedindex="cp">\sf</indexterm>\sf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="115">sans serif font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Sans serif.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="129">\sl</indexterm>\sl</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="112">slanted font</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="113">oblique font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="128" mergedindex="cp">\sl</indexterm>\sl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="116">slanted font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="117">oblique font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Slanted (oblique).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="130">\tt</indexterm>\tt</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="114">typewriter font</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="115">monospace font</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="116">fixed-width font</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="129" mergedindex="cp">\tt</indexterm>\tt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="118">typewriter font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="119">monospace font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="120">fixed-width font</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
 <para>The <code>\em</code> command is the unconditional version of <code>\emph</code>.
 </para>
-<para>(Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
-as <code>\tt</code>, obsolete and that only the cumulative commands
-(<code>\texttt</code>) should be used.  Others think that both sets of
-commands have their place and sometimes an unconditional font switch
-is precisely what you want; for one example,
-<pxref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename><xrefprinteddesc><code>description</code></xrefprinteddesc></pxref>.)
-</para>
 <para>The following commands are for use in math mode.  They are not
 cumulative, so <code>\mathbf{\mathit{<var>symbol</var>}}</code> does not
 create a boldface and italic <var>symbol</var>; instead, it will just be in
@@ -1626,19 +1702,19 @@
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathrm</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="131">\mathrm</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="130" mergedindex="cp">\mathrm</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Roman, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathbf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="132">\mathbf</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="131" mergedindex="cp">\mathbf</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Boldface, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathsf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="133">\mathsf</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="132" mergedindex="cp">\mathsf</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathtt</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="134">\mathtt</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="133" mergedindex="cp">\mathtt</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathit</itemformat></item>
@@ -1646,28 +1722,28 @@
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Italics, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathnormal</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="135">\mathnormal</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="134" mergedindex="cp">\mathnormal</indexterm></findex>
 <para>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathcal</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="136">\mathcal</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="135" mergedindex="cp">\mathcal</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="137">\mathversion</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="117">math, bold</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="118">bold math</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="136" mergedindex="cp">\mathversion</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="121">math, bold</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="122">bold math</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>In addition, the command <code>\mathversion{bold}</code> can be used for
 switching to bold letters and symbols in
 formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="138">\oldstylenums</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="119">numerals, old-style</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="120">old-style numerals</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="121">lining numerals</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="122"><r>package</r>, <code>textcomp</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="123"><code>textcomp</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="137" mergedindex="cp">\oldstylenums</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="123">numerals, old-style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="124">old-style numerals</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="125">lining numerals</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="126"><r>package</r>, <code>textcomp</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="127"><code>textcomp</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Finally, the command <code>\oldstylenums{<var>numerals</var>}</code> will typeset
 so-called &textldquo;old-style&textrdquo; numerals, which have differing heights and
@@ -1685,9 +1761,9 @@
 <node name="Font-sizes" spaces=" "><nodename>Font sizes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Low-level font commands</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Font styles</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Font sizes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="124">font sizes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="125">typeface sizes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="126">sizes of text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="128">font sizes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="129">typeface sizes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="130">sizes of text</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;.
 The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
@@ -1695,18 +1771,18 @@
 <samp>12pt</samp> document size options, respectively (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
 options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="139">\tiny</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="140">\scriptsize</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="141">\footnotesize</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="142">\small</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="143">\normalsize</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="144">\large</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="145">\Large</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="146">\LARGE</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="147">\huge</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="148">\Huge</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="138" mergedindex="cp">\tiny</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="139" mergedindex="cp">\scriptsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="140" mergedindex="cp">\footnotesize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="141" mergedindex="cp">\small</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="142" mergedindex="cp">\normalsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="143" mergedindex="cp">\large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="144" mergedindex="cp">\Large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="145" mergedindex="cp">\LARGE</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="146" mergedindex="cp">\huge</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="147" mergedindex="cp">\Huge</indexterm></findex>
 
-<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on"><code>\normalsize</code> (default)</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on"><code>\normalsize</code> (default)<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
 <thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Command  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>10pt</code>  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>11pt</code>  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>12pt</code>
 </para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\tiny</code>
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>5          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6
@@ -1730,18 +1806,30 @@
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88      </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88      </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
-<para>The commands as listed here are &textldquo;declaration forms&textrdquo;. The scope of
-the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the
-end of the current group.  You can also use the environment form of
-these commands; for instance, <code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
+<para>The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{quotation} \small
+  The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end{quotation}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The scope of the <code>\small</code> lasts until the end of the
+<code>quotation</code> environment.  It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces <code>{\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!}</code>.  You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, <code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands" spaces=" "><nodename>Low-level font commands</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Font sizes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Low-level font commands</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="127">low-level font commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="128">font commands, low-level</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="131">low-level font commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="132">font commands, low-level</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
 packages.  The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
@@ -1750,8 +1838,9 @@
 <!-- c xx something about ultimately reading ENCFAM.fd? -->
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontencoding{<var>encoding</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="149">\fontencoding</indexterm></findex>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding">low level font commands fontencoding</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontencoding{<var>encoding</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="148" mergedindex="cp">\fontencoding</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
 large number of valid encodings.  The most common are <code>OT1</code>,
 Knuth&textrsquo;s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
@@ -1761,16 +1850,17 @@
 hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
 <url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily">low level font commands fontfamily</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontfamily{<var>family</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="150">\fontfamily</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="129">families, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="130">font catalogue</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="149" mergedindex="cp">\fontfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="133">families, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="134">font catalogue</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Select the font family.  The web page
 <url><urefurl>http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/</urefurl></url> provides one way to browse
 through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;.  Here are
-examples of some common families:
+examples of some common families.
 </para>
-<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">font</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Computer Modern Typewriter XXXX</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">font</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Computer Modern Typewriter more space</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
 <tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pag</code>
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Avant Garde
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>fvs</code>
@@ -1814,9 +1904,10 @@
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
 
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontseries">low level font commands fontseries</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontseries{<var>series</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="151">\fontseries</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="131">series, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="150" mergedindex="cp">\fontseries</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="135">series, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Select the font series.  A <dfn>series</dfn> combines a <dfn>weight</dfn> and a
 <dfn>width</dfn>.  Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
 combinations.  Some common combined series values include:
@@ -1834,7 +1925,7 @@
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bold extended
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="132">weights, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="136">weights, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The possible values for weight, individually, are:
 </para>
 <multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Medium (normal) xx</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
@@ -1858,11 +1949,10 @@
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra bold
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
  
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="133">widths, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="137">widths, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
 relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
 </para>
-
 <multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Ultra condensed</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
 <tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>uc</code>
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra condensed
@@ -1884,15 +1974,15 @@
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra expanded
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
-
 <para>When forming the <var>series</var> string from the weight and width, drop the
 <code>m</code> that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
 weight and width are <code>m</code>, in which case use just one
 (<samp><code>m</code></samp>).
 </para> 
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontshape{<var>shape</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="152">\fontshape</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="134">shapes, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="151" mergedindex="cp">\fontshape</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="138">shapes, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontshape">low level font commands fontshape</anchor>
 <para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
 </para>
 <multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Slanted (oblique)xx</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
@@ -1910,14 +2000,14 @@
 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Outline
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
-
 <para>The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
 small caps are often missing as well.
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontsize">low level font commands fontsize</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontsize{<var>size</var>}{<var>skip</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="153">\fontsize</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="135">font size</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="154">\baselineskip</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="152" mergedindex="cp">\fontsize</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="139">font size</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="153" mergedindex="cp">\baselineskip</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Set the font size and the line spacing.  The unit of both parameters
 defaults to points (<code>pt</code>).  The line spacing is the nominal
 vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline.  It is stored in the
@@ -1926,8 +2016,9 @@
 Changing <code>\baselineskip</code> directly is inadvisable since its value is
 reset every time a size change happens; see <code>\baselinestretch</code>, next.
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-baselinestretch">low level font commands baselinestretch</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\baselinestretch</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="155">\baselinestretch</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="154" mergedindex="cp">\baselinestretch</indexterm></findex>
 <para>&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
 <code>\baselinestretch</code> parameter; the default factor is 1.  A change
 takes effect when <code>\selectfont</code> (see below) is called.  You can
@@ -1935,26 +2026,28 @@
 doubling it, by doing <code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}</code> in
 the preamble.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="136"><r>package</r>, <code>setspace</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="137"><code>setspace</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="140"><r>package</r>, <code>setspace</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="141"><code>setspace</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="138">double spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="142">double spacing</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
 <file>setspace</file> package.  In addition to offering a number of spacing
 options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
 where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
 captions.  See the package documentation.
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-linespread">low level font commands linespread</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\linespread{<var>factor</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="156">\linespread</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="155" mergedindex="cp">\linespread</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Equivalent to
 <code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code>, and
 therefore must be followed by <code>\selectfont</code> to have any effect.
 Best specified in the preamble, or use the <code>setspace</code> package, as
 just described.
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-selectfont">low level font commands selectfont</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\selectfont</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="157">\selectfont</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="156" mergedindex="cp">\selectfont</indexterm></findex>
 <para>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
 <code>\selectfont</code> is called, as in
 <code>\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont</code>.  It is often useful
@@ -1962,8 +2055,9 @@
 <code>\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont}</code>&linebreak;
 (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-usefont">low level font commands usefont</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\usefont{<var>enc</var>}{<var>family</var>}{<var>series</var>}{<var>shape</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="158">\usefont</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="157" mergedindex="cp">\usefont</indexterm></findex>
 <para>The same as invoking <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
 <code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters,
 followed by <code>\selectfont</code>.  For example:
@@ -1980,7 +2074,7 @@
 <node name="Layout" spaces=" "><nodename>Layout</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Sectioning</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Fonts</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Layout</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="139">layout commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="143">layout commands</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Commands for controlling the general page layout.
 </para>
@@ -1997,23 +2091,28 @@
 <node name="_005conecolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\onecolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\onecolumn</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="159">\onecolumn</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="140">one-column output</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="158" mergedindex="cp">\onecolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="144">one-column output</indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\onecolumn
+</pre></example>
+
 <para>Start a new page and produce single-column output.  If the document is
 given the class option <code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default
-behavior (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+behavior (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005ctwocolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\twocolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\onecolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\twocolumn</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="160">\twocolumn</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="141">multicolumn text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="142">two-column output</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="159" mergedindex="cp">\twocolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="145">multicolumn text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="146">two-column output</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -2024,32 +2123,34 @@
 
 <para>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
 the class option <code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default
-(<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+(<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <para>If the optional <var>prelim one column text</var> argument
 is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
 typesetting starts.
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-</para>
 <para>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="161">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt.  Change it with a
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="160" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnsep">twocolumn columnsep</anchor>
+<para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt.  Change it with a
 command such as <code>\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}</code> You must change
 it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
 place.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="162">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="161" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnseprule">twocolumn columnseprule</anchor>
+<para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
 the two columns.  The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
 Change it with a command such as
 <code>\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}</code>, before the two-column
 environment starts.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="163">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The width of a single column.  In one-column mode this is equal to
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="162" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnwidth">twocolumn columnwidth</anchor>
+<para>The width of a single column.  In one-column mode this is equal to
 <code>\textwidth</code>.  In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the
 width of each of the two columns to be half of <code>\textwidth</code> minus
 <code>\columnsep</code>.
@@ -2063,7 +2164,8 @@
 The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="164">\dbltopfraction</indexterm>\dbltopfraction</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="twocolumn-dbltopfraction">twocolumn dbltopfraction</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="163" mergedindex="cp">\dbltopfraction</indexterm>\dbltopfraction</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
 occupied by two-column wide floats.  The default is 0.7, meaning that
 the height of a <code>table*</code> or <code>figure*</code> environment must not
@@ -2085,27 +2187,31 @@
 to avoid going to float pages so soon.
 </para></listitem></itemize>
 
-<para>You can redefine it, for instance with
+<para>You can redefine it, as with
 <code>\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="165">\dblfloatpagefraction</indexterm>\dblfloatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction">twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="164" mergedindex="cp">\dblfloatpagefraction</indexterm>\dblfloatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
 that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
 &latex;&textrsquo;s default is <code>0.5</code>.  Change it with <code>\renewcommand</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="166">\dblfloatsep</indexterm>\dblfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dblfloatsep">twocolumn dblfloatsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="165" mergedindex="cp">\dblfloatsep</indexterm>\dblfloatsep</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
 between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.  The default is
 <code>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> for a document set at <code>10pt</code> or
 <code>11pt</code>, and <code>14pt plus2pt minus4pt</code> for a document set at
 <code>12pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="167">\dbltextfloatsep</indexterm>\dbltextfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep">twocolumn dbltextfloatsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="166" mergedindex="cp">\dbltextfloatsep</indexterm>\dbltextfloatsep</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
 bottom of a page and the main text.  The default is <code>20pt plus2pt
 minus4pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="168">\dbltopnumber</indexterm>\dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dbltopnumber">twocolumn dbltopnumber</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="167" mergedindex="cp">\dbltopnumber</indexterm>\dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
 maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page.  The &latex;
 default is <code>2</code>.
@@ -2141,7 +2247,7 @@
 <node name="_005cflushbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\flushbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\flushbottom</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="169">\flushbottom</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="168" mergedindex="cp">\flushbottom</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
 height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
@@ -2166,8 +2272,8 @@
 <node name="_005craggedbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page layout parameters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedbottom</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="170">\raggedbottom</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="143">stretch, omitting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="169" mergedindex="cp">\raggedbottom</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="147">stretch, omitting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
 rubber vertical lengths will be stretched.  Thus, in a two-sided
@@ -2182,49 +2288,56 @@
 <node name="Page-layout-parameters" spaces=" "><nodename>Page layout parameters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Floats</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page layout parameters</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="144">page layout parameters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="145">parameters, page layout</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="146">layout, page parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="147">header, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="148">footer, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="149">running header and footer</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="148">page layout parameters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="149">parameters, page layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="150">layout, page parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="151">header, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="152">footer, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="153">running header and footer</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="171">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="172">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="173">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="174">\columnsep</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="175">\columnseprule</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="176">\columnwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="170" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="171" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="172" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="173" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="174" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="175" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnsep">page layout parameters columnsep</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule">page layout parameters columnseprule</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth">page layout parameters columnwidth</anchor>
 <para>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
 columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
 <code>twocolumn</code> is in effect (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 <xref label="_005ctwocolumn"><xrefnodename>\twocolumn</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="177">\headheight</indexterm>\headheight</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="178">\headheight</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="176" mergedindex="cp">\headheight</indexterm>\headheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="177" mergedindex="cp">\headheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-headheight">page layout parameters headheight</anchor>
 <para>Height of the box that contains the running head.  The default in the
 <code>article</code>, <code>report</code>, and <code>book</code> classes is <samp>12pt</samp>,
 at all type sizes.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="179">\headsep</indexterm>\headsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="180">\headsep</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="178" mergedindex="cp">\headsep</indexterm>\headsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="179" mergedindex="cp">\headsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-headsep">page layout parameters headsep</anchor>
 <para>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
 the main text.  The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
 classes is <samp>25pt</samp>.  In the <code>book</code> class the default is: if the
 document is set at 10pt then it is <samp>0.25in</samp>, and at 11pt and 12pt
 it is <samp>0.275in</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="181">\footskip</indexterm>\footskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="182">\footskip</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="180" mergedindex="cp">\footskip</indexterm>\footskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="181" mergedindex="cp">\footskip</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-footskip">page layout parameters footskip</anchor>
 <para>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
 the page footer.  The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
 classes is <samp>30pt</samp>.  In the <code>book</code> class the default is: when
 the type size is 10pt the default is <samp>0.35in</samp>, while at 11pt it is
 <samp>0.38in</samp>, and at 12pt it is <samp>30pt</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="183">\linewidth</indexterm>\linewidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="184">\linewidth</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="182" mergedindex="cp">\linewidth</indexterm>\linewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="183" mergedindex="cp">\linewidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-linewidth">page layout parameters linewidth</anchor>
 <para>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <code>list</code>
 (<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>).  That is, the nominal value for <code>\linewidth</code> is to
 equal <code>\textwidth</code> but for each nested list the <code>\linewidth</code>
@@ -2234,12 +2347,15 @@
 <!-- c etc.  For an @code{article} document set in 10pt, the default is -->
 <!-- c @samp{345pt}, while in two-column mode that becomes @samp{229.5pt}. -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="185">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="186">\marginsep</indexterm>\marginsep</itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="187">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="188">\marginparpush</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="189">\marginsep</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="190">\marginparwidth</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="184" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="185" mergedindex="cp">\marginsep</indexterm>\marginsep</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="186" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="187" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="188" mergedindex="cp">\marginsep</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="189" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginparpush">page layout parameters marginparpush</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginsep">page layout parameters marginsep</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginparwidth">page layout parameters marginparwidth</anchor>
 <para>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
 space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
 width of the notes.
@@ -2264,10 +2380,12 @@
 − \textwidth</code>, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that
 distance.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="191">\oddsidemargin</indexterm>\oddsidemargin</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="192">\evensidemargin</indexterm>\evensidemargin</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="193">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="194">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="190" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm>\oddsidemargin</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="191" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm>\evensidemargin</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="192" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="193" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin">page layout parameters oddsidemargin</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin">page layout parameters evensidemargin</anchor>
 <para>The <code>\oddsidemargin</code> is the extra distance between the left side of
 the page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
 document class option <code>twoside</code> is chosen and on all pages when
@@ -2279,22 +2397,25 @@
 difference between <code>\paperwidth</code> and <code>\textwidth</code>, and
 <code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="195">\paperheight</indexterm>\paperheight</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="196">\paperheight</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="194" mergedindex="cp">\paperheight</indexterm>\paperheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="195" mergedindex="cp">\paperheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-paperheight">page layout parameters paperheight</anchor>
 <para>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
-It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
 <code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
 options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="197">\paperwidth</indexterm>\paperwidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="198">\paperwidth</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="196" mergedindex="cp">\paperwidth</indexterm>\paperwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="197" mergedindex="cp">\paperwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth">page layout parameters paperwidth</anchor>
 <para>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
-It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
 <code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
 options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="199">\textheight</indexterm>\textheight</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="200">\textheight</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="198" mergedindex="cp">\textheight</indexterm>\textheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="199" mergedindex="cp">\textheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-textheight">page layout parameters textheight</anchor>
 <para>The normal vertical height of the page body.  If the document is set at
 a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <code>article</code> or <code>report</code>
 the default is <samp>43\baselineskip</samp>, while for a <code>book</code> it is
@@ -2302,8 +2423,9 @@
 <samp>38\baselineskip</samp> for all document classes.  At 12pt it is
 <samp>36\baselineskip</samp> for all classes.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="201">\textwidth</indexterm>\textwidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="202">\textwidth</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="200" mergedindex="cp">\textwidth</indexterm>\textwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="201" mergedindex="cp">\textwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-textwidth">page layout parameters textwidth</anchor>
 <para>The full horizontal width of the entire page body.  For an
 <code>article</code> or <code>report</code> document, the default is <samp>345pt</samp>
 when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is <samp>360pt</samp> at 11pt,
@@ -2323,22 +2445,25 @@
 specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
 <code>minipage</code> or <code>\parbox</code>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="203">\hsize</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="204">\hsize</indexterm></findex>
-<para>This entry is included for completeness: <code>\hsize</code> is the &tex;
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="202" mergedindex="cp">\hsize</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-hsize">page layout parameters hsize</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="203" mergedindex="cp">\hsize</indexterm>\hsize</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>This entry is included for completeness: <code>\hsize</code> is the &tex;
 primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines.  It should not
 be used in normal &latex; documents.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="205">\topmargin</indexterm>\topmargin</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="206">topmargin</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="204" mergedindex="cp">\topmargin</indexterm>\topmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="205" mergedindex="cp">topmargin</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-topmargin">page layout parameters topmargin</anchor>
 <para>Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
 paper, by default) and the top of the header.  The value is computed
 based on many other parameters: <code>\paperheight − 2in −
 \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip</code>,
 and then divided by two.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="207">\topskip</indexterm>\topskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="208">\topskip</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="206" mergedindex="cp">\topskip</indexterm>\topskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="207" mergedindex="cp">\topskip</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-topskip">page layout parameters topskip</anchor>
 <para>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
 the first line of text.  For the standard classes, the default is the
 same as the font size, e.g., <samp>10pt</samp> at a type size of 10pt.
@@ -2375,8 +2500,8 @@
 event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
 every following float in that class also appears at the end.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="150">placement of floats</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="151">specifier, float placement</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="154">placement of floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="155">specifier, float placement</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
 where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
 <var>placement</var> argument.  The possible values are a sequence of the
@@ -2399,9 +2524,9 @@
 appears.  However, <code>h</code> is not allowed by itself; <code>t</code> is
 automatically added.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="152">here, putting floats</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="153"><r>package</r>, <code>float</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="154"><code>float</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="156">here, putting floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="157"><r>package</r>, <code>float</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="158"><code>float</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>To absolutely force a float to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can
 <code>\usepackage{float}</code> and use the <code>H</code> specifier which it
@@ -2409,7 +2534,7 @@
 <url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="155">float page</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="159">float page</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>(Page of floats)&textmdash;on a separate <dfn>float page</dfn>, which is a page
 containing no text, only floats.
 </para>
@@ -2437,8 +2562,8 @@
 <code>\afterpage{\clearpage}</code>.  This will wait until the current page
 is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="156"><r>package</r>, <code>flafter</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="157"><code>flafter</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="160"><r>package</r>, <code>flafter</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="161"><code>flafter</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
 (although on the same output page) if there is a <code>t</code> specifier in
@@ -2446,7 +2571,7 @@
 the <code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
 at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
 the <file>flafter</file> package or using the command
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="209">\suppressfloats</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="208" mergedindex="cp">\suppressfloats</indexterm></findex>
 <code>\suppressfloats[t]</code>, which causes floats for the top position on
 this page to moved to the next page.
 </para>
@@ -2455,70 +2580,83 @@
 <code>\renewcommand{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>decimal between 0 and 1</var>}</code>):
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="210">\bottomfraction</indexterm>\bottomfraction</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="211">\bottomfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="209" mergedindex="cp">\bottomfraction</indexterm>\bottomfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="210" mergedindex="cp">\bottomfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-bottomfraction">floats bottomfraction</anchor>
 <para>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
 the bottom; default <samp>.3</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="212">\floatpagefraction</indexterm>\floatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="213">\floatpagefraction</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="211" mergedindex="cp">\floatpagefraction</indexterm>\floatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="212" mergedindex="cp">\floatpagefraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-floatpagefraction">floats floatpagefraction</anchor>
 <para>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
 default <samp>.5</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="214">\textfraction</indexterm>\textfraction</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="215">\textfraction</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="213" mergedindex="cp">\textfraction</indexterm>\textfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="214" mergedindex="cp">\textfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-textfraction">floats textfraction</anchor>
 <para>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
 much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
 different page.  The default is <samp>.2</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="216">\topfraction</indexterm>\topfraction</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="217">\topfraction</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="215" mergedindex="cp">\topfraction</indexterm>\topfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="216" mergedindex="cp">\topfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-topfraction">floats topfraction</anchor>
 <para>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
 floats; default <samp>.7</samp>.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
-<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
-<code>\setlength{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>length expression</var>}</code>):
+<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setlength{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>length
+expression</var>}</code>):
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="218">\floatsep</indexterm>\floatsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="219">\floatsep</indexterm></findex>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="217" mergedindex="cp">\floatsep</indexterm>\floatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="218" mergedindex="cp">\floatsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-floatsep">floats floatsep</anchor>
 <para>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
 <samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="220">\intextsep</indexterm>\intextsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="221">\intextsep</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="219" mergedindex="cp">\intextsep</indexterm>\intextsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="220" mergedindex="cp">\intextsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-intextsep">floats intextsep</anchor>
 <para>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
 <samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp> for 10 point and 11 point documents,
 and <samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp> for 12 point documents.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="222">\textfloatsep</indexterm>\textfloatsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="223">\textfloatsep</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="221" mergedindex="cp">\textfloatsep</indexterm>\textfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="222" mergedindex="cp">\textfloatsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-textfloatsep">floats textfloatsep</anchor>
 <para>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
 default <samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
-<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
-<code>\setcounter{<var>ctrname</var>}{<var>natural number</var>}</code>):
+<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setcounter{<var>ctrname</var>}{<var>natural
+number</var>}</code>):
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="224">bottomnumber</indexterm>bottomnumber</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="225">bottomnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="223" mergedindex="cp">bottomnumber</indexterm>bottomnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="224" mergedindex="cp">bottomnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-bottomnumber">floats bottomnumber</anchor>
 <para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
 default 1.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="226">dbltopnumber</indexterm>dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="227">dbltopnumber</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="225" mergedindex="cp">dbltopnumber</indexterm>dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="226" mergedindex="cp">dbltopnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-dbltopnumber">floats dbltopnumber</anchor>
 <para>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
 two-column page; default 2.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="228">topnumber</indexterm>topnumber</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="229">topnumber</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="227" mergedindex="cp">topnumber</indexterm>topnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="228" mergedindex="cp">topnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-topnumber">floats topnumber</anchor>
 <para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
 default 2.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="230">totalnumber</indexterm>totalnumber</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="231">totalnumber</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="229" mergedindex="cp">totalnumber</indexterm>totalnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="230" mergedindex="cp">totalnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-totalnumber">floats totalnumber</anchor>
 <para>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
@@ -2537,91 +2675,711 @@
 <node name="Sectioning" spaces=" "><nodename>Sectioning</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Cross references</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Layout</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Sectioning</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="158">sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="162">sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="163">part</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="164">chapter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="165">section</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="166">subsection</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="167">paragraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="168">subparagraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="231" mergedindex="cp">\part</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="232" mergedindex="cp">\chapter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="233" mergedindex="cp">\section</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="234" mergedindex="cp">\subsection</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="235" mergedindex="cp">\paragraph</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="236" mergedindex="cp">\subparagraph</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
+<para>Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc.  All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>sectioning-command</var>{<var>title</var>}
+<var>sectioning-command</var>*{<var>title</var>}
+<var>sectioning-command</var>[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+<code>\subsection{Motivation}</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The table has each <var>sectioning-command</var> in &latex;.  All are
+available in all of &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and <code>article</code>, except that <code>\chapter</code> is
+not available in <code>article</code>.
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .25 .25 .40 "><columnfraction value=".25"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".25"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".40"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Sectioning unit  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Command  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Level 
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Part
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\part</code>  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>-1 (<code>book</code>, <code>report</code>), 0 (<code>article</code>)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Chapter
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\chapter</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>0
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Section
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\section</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>1 
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subsection
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subsection</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>2 
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subsubsection
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subsubsection</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>3  
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Paragraph
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\paragraph</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>4  
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subparagraph
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subparagraph</code>   </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>5  
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="169"><code>*</code>-form of sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>All these commands have a <code>*</code>-form that prints <var>title</var> as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an <code>article</code> .  The
+input <code>\appendix\section{Appendix}</code> gives the output <samp>A
+Appendix</samp> (<pxref label="_005cappendix"><xrefnodename>\appendix</xrefnodename></pxref>).  You can lose the numbering <samp>A</samp>
+by instead entering <code>\section*{Appendix}</code> (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the <code>\section</code> command may not matter).
+</para>
+<para>The section title <var>title</var> provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).  You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text.  All of these commands have an optional
+argument <var>toc-title</var> for these other places.
+</para>
+<para>The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents.  If the sectioning
+command&textrsquo;s <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).  And, if <var>level</var> is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter <code>tocdepth</code> then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; expects that before you have a <code>\subsection</code> you will have
+a <code>\section</code> and, in a book, that before a <code>\section</code> you will
+have a <code>\chapter</code>.  Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered <samp>3.0.1</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+</para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="232">\part</indexterm>\part</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="233">\chapter</indexterm>\chapter</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>(<code>report</code> and <code>book</code> class only)
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="234">\section</indexterm>\section</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="235">\subsection</indexterm>\subsection</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="236">\subsubsection</indexterm>\subsubsection</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="237">\paragraph</indexterm>\paragraph</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="238">\subparagraph</indexterm>\subparagraph</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm></tableentry></ftable>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="237" mergedindex="cp">secnumdepth</indexterm>secnumdepth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="238" mergedindex="cp">secnumdepth <r>counter</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="170">section numbers, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="sectioning-secnumdepth">sectioning secnumdepth</anchor>
+<anchor name="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</anchor>
+<para>Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered.  Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+<var>level</var> <code>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).  See the above table for the level numbers.  For
+instance, if the <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then a
+<code>\section{Introduction}</code> command will produce output like <samp>1
+Introduction</samp> while <code>\subsection{Discussion}</code> will produce output
+like <samp>Discussion</samp>, without the number. &latex;&textrsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is 3 in <file>article</file> class and  2 in the
+<file>book</file> and <file>report</file> classes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="239" mergedindex="cp">tocdepth</indexterm>tocdepth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="240" mergedindex="cp">tocdepth <r>counter</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="171">table of contents, sectioning numbers printed</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="sectioning-tocdepth">sectioning tocdepth</anchor>
+<anchor name="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</anchor>
+<para>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting <code>\setcounter{tocdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code> makes the
+sectioning units at <var>level</var> be the smallest ones listed
+(<pxref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).  See the above table for the level numbers.  For
+instance, if <code>tocdepth</code> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.  &latex;&textrsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is 3 in <file>article</file> class and  2 in the
+<file>book</file> and <file>report</file> classes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
-<para>All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                                         ">\part</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a part.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                                      ">\chapter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a chapter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                                      ">\section</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a section.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                                   ">\subsection</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a subsection.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lower divisions.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                                     ">\appendix</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start appendices.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The three parts of a book.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                               ">\&arobase;startsection</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Layout of sectional units.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cpart" spaces=" "><nodename>\part</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\chapter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\part</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="241" mergedindex="cp">\part</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="172">part</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="173">sectioning, part</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part{<var>title</var>}
+\part*{<var>title</var>}
+\part[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>In addition to providing the heading <var>title</var> in the main text, the
-section title can appear in two other places:
+<para>Start a document part.  The standard &latex; classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and <code>article</code>, all have this command.
 </para>
-<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
-<listitem>
-<para>The table of contents.
-</para></listitem><listitem>
-<para>The running head at the top of the page.
-</para></listitem></enumerate>
+<para>This produces a document part, in a book.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part{VOLUME I \\
+       PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF  U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+\chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
-To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
-<var>toctitle</var> that, when given, specifies the text for these other
-places.
+<para>In each standard class the <code>\part</code> command outputs a part number
+such as <samp>Part I</samp>, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type.  Then &latex; outputs <var>title</var>, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type.  In class <code>book</code>, the &latex;
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then &latex; will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page.  In <code>report</code> it is again alone on a page, but
+&latex; won&textrsquo;t force it onto an odd-numbered page.  In an <code>article</code>
+&latex; does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="159"><code>*</code>-form of sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Also, all sectioning commands have <code>*</code>-forms that print
-<var>title</var> as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an
-entry in the table of contents.  For instance:
+<para>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var> 
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+<code>part</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
 </para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in running
+headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is not present then <var>title</var>
+will be there.  This example puts a line break in <var>title</var> but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\section*{Preamble}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="239">\appendix</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="160">appendix, creating</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\appendix</code> command changes the way following sectional units
-are numbered.  The <code>\appendix</code> command itself generates no text
-and does not affect the numbering of parts.  The normal use of this
-command is something like
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="174"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="175"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>In the class <code>article</code>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented.  To get an indent you can use the package
+<file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="176"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="177"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>One package to change the behavior of <code>\part</code> is <file>titlesec</file>.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cchapter" spaces=" "><nodename>\chapter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\section</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\part</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\chapter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="242" mergedindex="cp">\chapter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="178">chapter</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{A Chapter}
-&dots;
-\appendix
-\chapter{The First Appendix}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{<var>title</var>}
+\chapter*{<var>title</var>}
+\chapter[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="240">secnumdepth <r>counter</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="161">section numbers, printing</indexterm></cindex>
-<anchor name="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</anchor>
-<para>The <code>secnumdepth</code> counter controls printing of section numbers.
-The setting
+<para>Start a chapter.  The standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and
+<code>report</code> have this command but <code>article</code> does not.
 </para>
+<para>This produces a chapter.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<var>level</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{Loomings}
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>The &latex; default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided.  It produces a chapter
+number such as <samp>Chapter 1</samp> in large boldface type (the size is
+<code>\huge</code>).  It then puts <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size <code>\Huge</code>).  It also increments the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>), and sets the running header
+information (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header.  (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.)  This example illustrates.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter*{Preamble}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in
+running headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there.  This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+</pre></example>
+
 <noindent></noindent>
-<para>suppresses heading numbers at any depth <math>> <var>level</var></math>, where
-<code>chapter</code> is level zero.  The default <code>secnumdepth</code> is 3 in
-&latex;&textrsquo;s <file>article</file> class and 2 in the <file>book</file> and
-<file>report</file> classes.  (<xref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></xref>.)
+<para>but only <samp>Weyl</samp> on the contents page.  This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn&textrsquo;t work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
 </para>
-<menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\&arobase;startsection</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Redefine layout of start of sections, subsections, etc.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="179"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="180"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<node name="_005c_0040startsection" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;startsection</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<para>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  To get an indent use the package
+<file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<para>You can change what is shown for the chapter number.  To change it to
+something like <samp>Lecture 1</samp>, put in the preamble either
+<code>\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}</code> or this
+(<pxref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\&arobase;chapapp}{Lecture}
+\makeatother
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="181"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="182"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package <file>babel</file>.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers.  To make that page completely blank,
+see <ref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="183"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="184"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To change the behavior of the <code>\chapter</code> command, you can copy its
+definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments.  But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this.  One is
+<file>titlesec</file>.  See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\chapter}
+  {\Huge\bfseries}  % format of title
+  {}                % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+  {0pt}             % length of separation between label and title
+  {}                % before-code hook
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This omits the chapter number <samp>Chapter 1</samp> from the page but unlike
+<code>\chapter*</code> it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csection" spaces=" "><nodename>\section</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\subsection</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\chapter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\section</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="243" mergedindex="cp">\section</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="185">section</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section{<var>title</var>}
+\section*{<var>title</var>}
+\section[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a section.  The standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a section.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section{Turing machines}
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like <samp>1.2 <var>title</var></samp> (for chapter 1,
+section 2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is <code>\Large</code>).  The same holds in
+<code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like <samp>2 <var>title</var></samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header.  (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in
+running headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there.  This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+  by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+  Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+  Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but only <samp>Elizabeth II</samp> on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in <var>title</var> but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+  I cheated\\my life story}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="186"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="187"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="188"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="189"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>In general, to change the behavior of the <code>\section</code> command, there
+are a number of options.  One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>).  There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <file>titlesec</file>.  See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\section}
+  {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}  % format of title
+  {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+  {0pt}                   % length of separation between label and title
+  {}                      % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*{\section}
+  {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That puts the section number in the margin.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csubsection" spaces=" "><nodename>\subsection</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\section</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\subsection</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="244" mergedindex="cp">\subsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="190">subsection</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsection{<var>title</var>}
+\subsection*{<var>title</var>}
+\subsection[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a subsection.  The standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsection.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like <samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp> (for chapter 1,
+section 2, subsection 3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is <code>\large</code>).  The same
+holds in <code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like <samp>2.3 <var>title</var></samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there.  This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+  Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but only <samp><U>03B1</U>,<U>03B2</U>,<U>03B3</U>
+paper</samp> on the contents page.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="191"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="192"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="193"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="194"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+<code>\subsection</code> command.  One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>).  There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <file>titlesec</file>.  See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{titlesec}   % in preamble
+\titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+  {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}  % format of the title
+  {\thesubsection}                   % label
+  {0.6em}                            % space between label and title
+  {}                                 % before-code hook
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That puts the subsection number and <var>title</var> in the first line of
+text.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" spaces=" "><nodename>\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\appendix</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\subsection</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="245" mergedindex="cp">\subsubsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="195">subsubsection</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="246" mergedindex="cp">\paragraph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="196">paragraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="247" mergedindex="cp">\subparagraph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="197">subparagraph</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsubsection{<var>title</var>}
+\subsubsection*{<var>title</var>}
+\subsubsection[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\paragraph{<var>title</var>}
+\paragraph*{<var>title</var>}
+\paragraph[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subparagraph{<var>title</var>}
+\subparagraph*{<var>title</var>}
+\subparagraph[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph.  The standard
+&latex; classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsubsection.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from 
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and
+<code>report</code>.  For <code>\subsubsection</code> the <var>title</var> is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type.  For <code>\paragraph</code> the
+<var>title</var> is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type.  For <code>\subparagraph</code> the <var>title</var> is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an <code>article</code> has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like <samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp>, for
+section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3.  The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code> form shows <var>title</var>.  But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for <code>\subsubsection</code>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of
+a paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="198"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="199"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="200"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="201"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command (<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+<file>titlesec</file>.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cappendix" spaces=" "><nodename>\appendix</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\appendix</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="248" mergedindex="cp">\appendix</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="202">appendix</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="203">appendices</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\appendix
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This does not directly produce any output.  But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent <code>\chapter</code> commands start an appendix.  In
+an article it does the same, for <code>\section</code> commands.  It also
+resets the <code>chapter</code> and <code>section</code> counters to 0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the <code>section</code> and
+<code>subsection</code> counters.
+</para>
+<para>In this book
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{One}  ...
+\chapter{Two}  ...
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{Three}  ...
+\chapter{Four}  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the first two will generate output numbered <samp>Chapter 1</samp> and
+<samp>Chapter 2</samp>.  After the <code>\appendix</code> the numbering will be
+<samp>Appendix A</samp> and <samp>Appendix B</samp>.  <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref>
+for another example.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="204"><r>package</r>, <code>appendix</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="205"><code>appendix</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <file>appendix</file> package adds the command
+<code>\appendixpage</code> to put a separate <samp>Appendices</samp> in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command <code>\addappheadtotoc</code>
+to do the same in the table of contents.  You can reset the name
+<samp>Appendix</samp> with a command like
+<code>\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}</code>, as well as a
+number of other features.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" spaces=" "><nodename>\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\&arobase;startsection</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\appendix</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="249" mergedindex="cp">\frontmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="206">book, front matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="250" mergedindex="cp">\mainmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="207">book, main matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="251" mergedindex="cp">\backmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="208">book, back matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="209">book, end matter</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Format a <code>book</code> class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced.  All three commands are optional.
+</para>
+<para>Traditionally, a book&textrsquo;s front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables.  (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.)  The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\frontmatter</code> declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter&textrsquo;s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the <code>*</code>-version (<pxref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The <code>\mainmatter</code> changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number.  The <code>\backmatter</code> leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered.  <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for an example using the three.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_0040startsection" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;startsection</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;startsection</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="241">\&arobase;startsection</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="162">section, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="252" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;startsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="210">section, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -2641,14 +3399,30 @@
 <!-- c xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef. -->
 </para>
 <para>Technically, <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> has the form
-</para><example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\&arobase;startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}{<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\&arobase;startsection{<var>name</var>}
+  {<var>level</var>}
+  {<var>indent</var>}
+  {<var>beforeskip</var>}
+  {<var>afterskip</var>}
+  {<var>style</var>}*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
 </pre></example>
-<noindent></noindent> <para>(the star <code>*</code> is optional), so that issuing
-</para><example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\section}{\&arobase;startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}{<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}}
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>so that issuing
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\section}{\&arobase;startsection{<var>name</var>}
+  {<var>level</var>}
+  {<var>indent</var>}
+  {<var>beforeskip</var>}
+  {<var>afterskip</var>}
+  {<var>style</var>}}
 </pre></example>
-<noindent></noindent> <para>redefines <code>\section</code> to have the form
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>redefines <code>\section</code> to have the form
 <code>\section*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code> (here too, the
 star <code>*</code> is optional).  <xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref>.  This implies that
 when you write a command like <code>\renewcommand{section}{...}</code>,
@@ -2658,55 +3432,56 @@
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <beforefirstitem>
 </beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">name</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fname">\&arobase;startsection/name</anchor> <para>Name of the counter used to number the
-sectioning header.  This counter must be defined separately.  Most
-commonly this is either <code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or
-<code>paragraph</code>.  Although in those three cases the counter name is the
-same as the sectioning command itself, using the same name is not
-required.
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-name">startsection name</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fname">\&arobase;startsection/name</anchor>
+<para>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header.  This counter
+must be defined separately.  Most commonly this is either
+<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or <code>paragraph</code>.  Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don&textrsquo;t have to use the same name.
 </para>
 <para>Then <code>\the</code><var>name</var> displays the title number and
 <code>\</code><var>name</var><code>mark</code> is for the page headers.  See the third
 example below.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">level</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel">\&arobase;startsection/level</anchor> <para>An integer giving the depth of the
-sectioning command: 0 for <code>chapter</code> (only applies to the standard
-<code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes), 1 for <code>section</code>, 2 for
-<code>subsection</code>, 3 for <code>subsubsection</code>, 4 for <code>paragraph</code>,
-and 5 for <code>subparagraph</code>.  In the <code>book</code> and <code>report</code>
-classes <code>part</code> has level -1, while in the <code>article</code> class
-<code>part</code> has level 0.
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-level">startsection level</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel">\&arobase;startsection/level</anchor>
+<para>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+<xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref> for the list of standard level numbers.
 </para>
-<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of <code>secnumdepth</code>
-then the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered.  For
-instance, in an <code>article</code>, if <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 then a
-<code>\section{Introduction}</code> command will produce output like &textldquo;1
+<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).  For instance, if
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then the command
+<code>\section{Introduction}</code> will produce output like &textldquo;1
 Introduction&textrdquo; while <code>\subsection{Discussion}</code> will produce
 output like &textldquo;Discussion&textrdquo;, without the number prefix.
-<xref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
-<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of <var>tocdepth</var> then
-the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit.
-For instance, in an <code>article</code>, if <var>tocdepth</var> is 1 then the table of
-contents will list sections but not subsections.
-<!-- c xx add, and cross reference to, tocdepth -->
+<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<var>tocdepth</var> then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).  For instance, in an
+<code>article</code>, if <var>tocdepth</var> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">indent</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002findent">\&arobase;startsection/indent</anchor> <para>A length giving the indentation of all
-of the title lines with respect to the left margin.  To have the title
-flush with the margin use <code>0pt</code>.  A negative indentation such as
-<code>-\parindent</code> will move the title into the left margin.
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-indent">startsection indent</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002findent">\&arobase;startsection/indent</anchor>
+<para>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin.  To have the title flush with the margin use
+<code>0pt</code>.  A negative indentation such as <code>-\parindent</code> will move
+the title into the left margin.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">beforeskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip">\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</anchor> <para>The absolute value of this length is
-the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning
-unit&textrsquo;s title.  This space will be discarded if the sectioning unit
-happens to start at the top of a fresh page.  If this number is negative
-then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
-non-negative then the first paragraph is indented.  (Note that the
-negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus
--3pt</code>.)
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-beforeskip">startsection beforeskip</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip">\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</anchor>
+<para>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title.  This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page.  If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented.  (Note that the negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code>
+is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
 </para>
 <para>For example, if <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
 then to start the new sectioning unit, &latex; will add about 3.5 times
@@ -2726,14 +3501,15 @@
 page.)
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">afterskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip">\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</anchor> <para>This is a length.  If <var>afterskip</var>
-is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the
-sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title header.  If it is negative then the title header
-becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph.
-In this case the absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space
-between the end of the title and the beginning of the following
-paragraph.  (Note that the negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is
-<code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-afterskip">startsection afterskip</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip">\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</anchor>
+<para>This is a length.  If <var>afterskip</var> is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title header.  If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph.  In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph.  (Note that the negative of
+<code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
 </para>
 <para>As with <var>beforeskip</var>, using a rubber length, with <code>plus</code> and
 <code>minus</code> components, is good practice here since it gives &latex;
@@ -2750,48 +3526,39 @@
 <code>afterskip</code> to cancel part of the <code>\parskip</code>.)
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">style</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle">\&arobase;startsection/style</anchor> <para>Controls the styling of the title.  See
-the examples below.  Typical commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>,
-<code>\raggedright</code>, <code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or
-<code>\newpage</code>.  The last command in <var>style</var> may be one such as
-<code>\MakeUppercase</code> or <code>\fbox</code> that takes one argument. The
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-style">startsection style</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle">\&arobase;startsection/style</anchor>
+<para>Controls the styling of the title.  See the examples below.  Typical
+commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>,
+<code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or <code>\newpage</code>.  The last command
+in <var>style</var> may be one that takes one argument, such as
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> or <code>\fbox</code> that takes one argument.  The
 section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
 instance, setting <var>style</var> to <code>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</code> would
-produce titles that are bold and upper case.
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 <para>These are &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
 are defined with <code>\&arobase;startsection</code>, for the <file>article</file>,
-<file>book</file>, and <file>report</file> classes.
+<file>book</file>, and <file>report</file> classes.  For section, the <var>level</var> is
+1, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is <code>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</code>,
+and the <var>style</var> is <code>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</code>.  For
+subsection, the <var>level</var> is 2, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the
+<var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the
+<var>afterskip</var> is <code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\large\bfseries</code>.  For subsubsection, the <var>level</var>
+is 3, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the <var>beforeskip</var> is
+<code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is
+<code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</code>.
 </para>
-<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .10 .30 .30 .30"><columnfraction value=".10"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
-<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces="   "></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>section</code>  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>subsection</code>  </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>subsubsection</code>
-</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/name</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>name</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>name</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>section          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>subsection          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>subsubsection
-</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces="  "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/level</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>level</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>level</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>1          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>2          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>3
-</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/indent</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>indent</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>indent</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>0pt</code>          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>0pt</code>          </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>0pt</code>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>beforeskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>beforeskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>afterskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>afterskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>
-</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/style</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>style</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>style</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\normalfont\large\bfseries</code>
-</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</code>
-</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
-
 <para>Here are examples.  They go either in a package or class file or in the
 preamble of a &latex; document.  If you put them in the preamble they
 must go between a <code>\makeatletter</code> command and a
 <code>\makeatother</code>.  (Probably the error message <code>You can't use
 `\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</code>  means that you forgot this.)
-<xref label="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter and \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>.
+<xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
 <para>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.  It says
 <code>\renewcommand</code> because &latex;&textrsquo;s standard classes have already
@@ -2823,7 +3590,9 @@
   }
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.  This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to display that counter.
+<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
 </para>
 <!-- c From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ -->
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -2848,40 +3617,52 @@
 <node name="Cross-references" spaces=" "><nodename>Cross references</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Environments</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Cross references</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="163">cross references</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="211">cross references</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
-refer the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure~3 for more details.&textrdquo;
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="212">label</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>We often want something like <samp>See Theorem~31</samp>.  But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice.  Instead you should write a <dfn>label</dfn> such as
+<code>\label{eq:GreensThm}</code> and then <dfn>reference</dfn> it, as with
+<code>See equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</code>.  &latex; will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="164">label</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that
-number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update
-this reference by hand.  Instead, &latex; has you write a <dfn>label</dfn>
-like <code>\label{eq:GreensThm}</code> and refer to it with <code>See
-equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</code>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+...
+\begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+  ...
+\end{theorem}
+...
+See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension <file>.aux</file> and with the same base name as the file containing
+the <code>\label</code>.  So if <code>\label</code> is in <file>calculus.tex</file> then
+the information is in <file>calculus.aux</file>.  &latex; puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a <code>\label</code>.
 </para>
-<para>&latex; writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
-name as the file containing the <code>\label{...}</code> but with an
-<file>.aux</file> extension.  (The information has the format
-<code>\newlabel{<var>label</var>}{{<var>currentlabel</var>}{<var>pagenumber</var>}}</code>
-where <var>currentlabel</var> is the current value of the macro
-<code>\&arobase;currentlabel</code> that is usually updated whenever you call
-<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code>.)
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="213">forward reference</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="214">reference, forward</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a <dfn>forward reference</dfn>, a <code>\ref</code>
+that appears before the associated <code>\label</code>.  If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get <samp>LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right</samp>
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks <samp>??</samp>, in boldface.  A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information.  In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="165">forward reference</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="166">reference, forward</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
-document has a <dfn>forward reference</dfn>, a <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> that
-appears earlier than the associated <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code>; see the
-example in the <code>\pageref{...}</code> description.  &latex; gets the
-information for references from the <file>.aux</file> file.  If this is the
-first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message
-<code>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
-cross references right.</code> and in the output the reference will appear as
-two question marks <samp>??</samp>, in boldface.  Or, if you change some
-things so the references change then you get the same warning and the
-output contains the old reference information.  The solution in either
-case is just to compile the document a second time.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="215"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="216"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <code>cleveref</code> package enhances &latex;&textrsquo;s
+cross referencing features.  You can arrange that if you enter
+<code>\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}</code> then
+<code>\cref{th:Nerode}</code> will output <samp>Theorem 3.21</samp>, without you
+having to enter the &textldquo;Theorem.&textrdquo;
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\label</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
@@ -2893,7 +3674,7 @@
 <node name="_005clabel" spaces=" "><nodename>\label</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pageref</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\label</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="242">\label</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="253" mergedindex="cp">\label</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -2914,30 +3695,39 @@
 distinguished, as usual.
 </para>
 <para>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
-separated by a colon or period.  This helps to avoid accidentally
-creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
-readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
+separated by a colon or period.  Thus, <code>\label{fig:Post}</code> is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post.  This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ch</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>for chapters
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sec</itemformat></item>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sec</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">subsec</itemformat></itemx>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>for lower-level sectioning commands
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fig</itemformat></item>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fig</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>for figures
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">tab</itemformat></item>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">tab</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>for tables
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">eq</itemformat></item>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">eq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>for equations
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<para>Thus, <code>\label{fig:Euler}</code> is a label for a figure with a portrait
-of the great man.
+<para>In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+<code>\newlabel{<var>label</var>}{{<var>currentlabel</var>}{<var>pagenumber</var>}}</code>.
+Here <var>currentlabel</var> is the current value of the macro
+<code>\&arobase;currentlabel</code> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code>.
 </para>
-<para>In this example below the key <code>sec:test</code> will get the number of the
-current section and the key <code>fig:test</code> will get the number of the
-figure.  (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
-tables.)
+<para>Below, the key <code>sec:test</code> will get the number of the current
+section and the key <code>fig:test</code> will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\section{section name}
@@ -2954,11 +3744,11 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cpageref" spaces=" "><nodename>\pageref</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ref</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\label</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pageref{<var>key</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pageref</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="243">\pageref</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="167">cross referencing with page number</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="168">page number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="254" mergedindex="cp">\pageref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="217">cross referencing with page number</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="218">page number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -2969,11 +3759,15 @@
 <para>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
 <code>\label</code>{<var>key</var>} command appears.
 </para>
-<para>In this example the <code>\label{eq:main}</code> is used both for the
-formula number and for the page number.  (Note that the two references
-are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice
-to resolve those.)
+<para>If there is no <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>
 </para>
+<para>Below, the <code>\label{eq:main}</code> is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number.  (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
   ...
@@ -2985,14 +3779,14 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cref" spaces=" "><nodename>\ref</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pageref</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ref</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="244">\ref</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="169">cross referencing, symbolic</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="170">section number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="171">equation number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="172">figure number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="173">footnote number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="255" mergedindex="cp">\ref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="219">cross referencing, symbolic</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="220">section number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="221">equation number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="222">figure number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="223">footnote number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3005,10 +3799,14 @@
 <code>\label</code> command (<pxref label="_005clabel"><xrefnodename>\label</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It does not produce any text,
 such as the word &textlsquo;Section&textrsquo; or &textlsquo;Figure&textrsquo;, just the bare number itself.
 </para>
-<para>In this example, the <code>\ref{popular}</code> produces <samp>2</samp>.  Note
-that it is a forward reference since it comes before
-<code>\label{popular}</code>.
+<para>If there is no <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>
 </para>
+<para>In this example the <code>\ref{popular}</code> produces <samp>2</samp>.  Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before <code>\label{popular}</code>
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
 \begin{enumerate}
@@ -3018,15 +3816,21 @@
 \end{enumerate}
 </pre></example>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="224"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="225"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>The <file>cleveref</file> package includes text such as <samp>Theorem</samp> in the
+reference.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Environments" spaces=" "><nodename>Environments</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Line breaking</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Cross references</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Environments</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="174">environments</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="245">\begin</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="246">\end</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="226">environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="256" mergedindex="cp">\begin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="257" mergedindex="cp">\end</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>&latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
 An environment begins with <code>\begin</code> and ends with <code>\end</code>,
@@ -3044,7 +3848,7 @@
 <samp>! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
 \end{table}.</samp>
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="175">group, and environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="227">group, and environments</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Environments are executed within a group.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
@@ -3067,11 +3871,11 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                  ">math</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">In-line math.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">minipage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Miniature page.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">picture</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">quotation and quote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Include a quotation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">quotation & quote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Include a quotation.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">tabbing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Align text arbitrarily.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                 ">table</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Floating tables.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">tabular</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Align text in columns.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">thebibliography</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bibliography or reference list.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">thebibliography</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bibliography or reference list.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">theorem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Theorems, lemmas, etc.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">titlepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">For hand crafted title pages.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">verbatim</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Simulating typed input.
@@ -3082,10 +3886,10 @@
 <node name="abstract" spaces=" "><nodename>abstract</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">array</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>abstract</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="247"><r>environment</r>, <code>abstract</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="248"><code>abstract</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="258" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>abstract</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="259" mergedindex="cp"><code>abstract</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="176">abstracts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="228">abstracts</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3142,10 +3946,10 @@
 <node name="array" spaces=" "><nodename>array</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">center</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">abstract</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>array</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="249"><r>environment</r>, <code>array</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="250"><code>array</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="260" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>array</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="261" mergedindex="cp"><code>array</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="177">arrays, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="229">arrays, math</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3156,7 +3960,8 @@
 \end{array}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>or
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{array}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
@@ -3167,29 +3972,47 @@
 
 <para>Produce a mathematical array.  This environment can only be used in math
 mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
-such as <code>equation</code> (<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Column entries are
-separated by an ampersand (<code>&</code>).  Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).  
+such as <code>equation</code> (<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<code>&</code>).  Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This example shows a three by three array.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation*}
+  \chi(x) =
+  \left|              % vertical bar fence
+    \begin{array}{ccc}
+      x-a  &-b  &-c  \\
+      -d   &x-e &-f  \\
+      -g   &-h  &x-i
+    \end{array}
+ \right|
+\end{equation*}
+</pre></example>
+
 <para>The required argument <var>cols</var> describes the number of columns, their
-alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  See
-<ref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></ref> for the complete description of <var>cols</var>, and of the
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  For instance,
+<code>\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}</code> gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left.  See
+<ref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></ref> for the complete description of <var>cols</var> and of the
 other common features of the two environments, including the optional
 <var>pos</var> argument.
 </para>
 <para>There are two ways that <code>array</code> diverges from <code>tabular</code>.  The
 first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in math mode, in
-textstyle (except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies the column with
-<code>p{...}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
-The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s parameter
-<code>\tabcolsep</code>, &latex;&textrsquo;s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is governed
-by
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="251">\arraycolsep</indexterm></findex>
+textstyle (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies
+the column with <code>p{...}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode.  The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s parameter
+<code>\tabcolsep</code>, &latex;&textrsquo;s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is
+governed by
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="262" mergedindex="cp">\arraycolsep</indexterm></findex>
 <code>\arraycolsep</code>, which gives half the width between columns. The
-default for this is <samp>5pt</samp>.
+default for this is <samp>5pt</samp> so that between two columns comes
+10<dmn>pt</dmn> of space.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="178"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="179"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="230"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="231"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <file>amsmath</file>
 package.  It comes with environments <code>pmatrix</code> for an array
@@ -3200,54 +4023,60 @@
 <code>Vmatrix</code> for an array surrounded by double vertical
 bars <code>||...||</code>, along with a number of other array constructs.
 </para>
-<para>Here is an example of an array:
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="232"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="233"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The next example uses the <file>amsmath</file> package.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
-  \begin{array}{cr}
-    \sqrt{y}  &12.3 \\
-    x^2       &3.4       
-  \end{array}
-\end{equation}
-</pre></example>
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
 
-<para>The next example works if <code>\usepackage{amsmath}</code> is in the
-preamble:
-</para>
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
-  \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+\begin{equation}    
+  \begin{vmatrix}{cc}  % array with vert lines
     a  &b \\
     c  &d       
   \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
 \end{equation}
 </pre></example>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="234"><r>package</r>, <code>array (package)</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="235"><code>array (package)</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="236"><r>package</r>, <code>dcolumn</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="237"><code>dcolumn</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many packages concerning arrays.  The <file>array</file> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types.  The <file>dcolumn</file>
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point.  For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="center" spaces=" "><nodename>center</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">description</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">array</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>center</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="252"><r>environment</r>, <code>center</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="253"><code>center</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="263" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>center</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="264" mergedindex="cp"><code>center</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="180">centering text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="238">centering text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
-  ... text ...
+  <var>line1</var> \\
+  <var>line2</var> \\
+  ...
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
-centered within the left and right margins on the current page.  Use
-double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="254">\\ <r>(for <code>center</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
-If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, &latex;
-will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
-shrinking any interword space.
+centered within the left and right margins.  Use
+double-backslash, <code>\\</code>, to get a line break (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="265" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>center</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
 </para>
 <para>This environment inserts space above and below the text body.  See
 <ref label="_005ccentering"><xrefnodename>\centering</xrefnodename></ref> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
@@ -3278,8 +4107,12 @@
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional.
+<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional.  If present it
+doesn&textrsquo;t add any vertical space.
 </para>
+<para>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\centering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -3288,15 +4121,45 @@
 <node name="_005ccentering" spaces=" "><nodename>\centering</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">center</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\centering</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="255">\centering</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="181">centering text, declaration for</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="266" mergedindex="cp">\centering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="239">centering text, declaration for</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered.  It is
-most often used inside an environment such as <code>figure</code>, or in a
-<code>parbox</code>.
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">{\centering ... }
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{group}
+  \centering ...
+\end{group}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Center the material in its scope.  It is most often used inside an
+environment such as <code>figure</code>, or in a <code>parbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This example&textrsquo;s <code>\centering</code> declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{figure}
+  \centering
+  \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+  \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The scope of this <code>\centering</code> ends with the <code>\end{figure}</code>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does
-not add vertical space above and below the text.
+not add vertical space above and below the text.  That&textrsquo;s its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
 </para>
 <para>It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  If <code>ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz</code> is
@@ -3308,52 +4171,37 @@
 paragraph unit.  Thus, if <code>{\centering xx \\ yy\par} zz</code> is
 surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
 centered lines <samp>xx</samp> and <samp>yy</samp>, followed by a new paragraph with
-<samp>zz</samp> that is formatted as usual.  See also the following example.
+<samp>zz</samp> that is formatted as usual.
 </para>
-<para>This example&textrsquo;s <code>\centering</code> causes the graphic to be horizontally
-centered.  
-</para>
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{figure}
-  \centering
-  \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
-  \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
-\end{figure}
-</pre></example>
 
-<para>The scope of the <code>\centering</code> ends with the <code>\end{figure}</code>.
-</para>
-
 </subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="description" spaces=" "><nodename>description</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">displaymath</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">center</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>description</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="256"><r>environment</r>, <code>description</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="257"><code>description</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="267" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>description</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="268" mergedindex="cp"><code>description</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="182">labelled lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="183">description lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="240">labelled lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="241">description lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{description}
-\item[<var>label of first item</var>] text of first item
-\item[<var>label of second item</var>] text of second item
-  ...
+  \item[<var>label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+  \item[<var>label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+   ...
 \end{description}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Environment to make a labeled list of items.  Each item&textrsquo;s <var>label</var> is
-typeset in bold, and is flush left so that long labels continue into the
+<para>Environment to make a list of labeled items.  Each item&textrsquo;s <var>label</var> is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
 first line of the item text.  There must be at least one item; having
 none causes the &latex; error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
 missing \item</samp>.
 </para>
 <para>This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
-The labels <samp>lama</samp> and <samp>llama</samp> come out in boldface with their
-left edges aligned on the left margin.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{definition}
@@ -3362,22 +4210,26 @@
 \end{definition}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="258">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The labels <samp>lama</samp> and <samp>llama</samp> are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="269" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Use the
 optional labels, as in <code>\item[Main point]</code>, because there is
 no sensible default.  Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which
 may contain multiple paragraphs.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="184">bold typewriter, avoiding</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="185">typewriter labels in lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="242">bold typewriter, avoiding</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="243">typewriter labels in lists</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
 change given in argument style (see <ref label="Font-styles"><xrefnodename>Font styles</xrefnodename></ref>) then it will come
 out bold.  For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
 <code>\item[\texttt{label text}]</code> then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
-typewriter is to use declarative style: <code>\item[{\tt label
-text}]</code>.  Similarly, get the standard roman font with <code>\item[{\rm
-label text}]</code>.
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+<code>\item[{\tt label text}]</code>.  Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with <code>\item[{\rm label text}]</code>.
 </para>
 <para>For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>
 and <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>.  Unlike those environments, nesting
@@ -3402,15 +4254,15 @@
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>displaymath</code></sectiontitle>
 <!-- c http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath -->
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="259"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="260"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="270" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="271" mergedindex="cp"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
-<var>math text</var>
+  <var>mathematical text</var>
 \end{displaymath}
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -3424,8 +4276,8 @@
 </para>
 <para>&latex; will not break the <var>math text</var> across lines.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="186"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="187"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="244"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="245"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Note that the <file>amsmath</file> package has significantly more extensive
 displayed equation facilities.  For example, there are a number of
@@ -3445,11 +4297,14 @@
 environment honors the <code>fleqn</code> option.)
 </para>
 <para>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line. 
-</para><example endspaces=" ">
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
   \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
 \end{displaymath}
 </pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version  
 <code>\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)</code> produces.
 </para>
@@ -3458,8 +4313,8 @@
 <node name="document" spaces=" "><nodename>document</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">enumerate</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">displaymath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>document</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="261"><r>environment</r>, <code>document</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="262"><code>document</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="272" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>document</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="273" mergedindex="cp"><code>document</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
 
 <para>The <code>document</code> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
@@ -3474,8 +4329,8 @@
 <node name="_005cAtBeginDocument" spaces=" "><nodename>\AtBeginDocument</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\AtEndDocument</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">document</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="263">\AtBeginDocument</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="188">beginning of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="274" mergedindex="cp">\AtBeginDocument</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="246">beginning of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3497,8 +4352,8 @@
 <node name="_005cAtEndDocument" spaces=" "><nodename>\AtEndDocument</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\AtBeginDocument</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">document</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\AtEndDocument</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="264">\AtEndDocument</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="189">end of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="275" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndDocument</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="247">end of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3522,18 +4377,18 @@
 <node name="enumerate" spaces=" "><nodename>enumerate</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">eqnarray</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">document</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>enumerate</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="265"><r>environment</r>, <code>enumerate</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="266"><code>enumerate</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="276" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>enumerate</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="277" mergedindex="cp"><code>enumerate</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="190">lists of items, numbered</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="248">lists of items, numbered</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{enumerate}
-\item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] text of first item
-\item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+  \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+  ...
 \end{enumerate}
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -3555,7 +4410,7 @@
 \end{enumerate}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="267">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="278" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If you
 give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
 brackets, as in <code>\item[Interstitial label]</code>, then the next item
@@ -3572,15 +4427,19 @@
 </para>
 <enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
 <listitem spaces=" "><para>arabic number followed by a period: <samp>1.</samp>, <samp>2.</samp>, &dots;
-</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lower case letter inside parentheses: <samp>(a)</samp>, <samp>(b)</samp> &dots;
-</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lower case roman numeral followed by a period: <samp>i.</samp>, <samp>ii.</samp>, &dots;
-</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>upper case letter followed by a period: <samp>A.</samp>, <samp>B.</samp>, &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lowercase letter inside parentheses: <samp>(a)</samp>, <samp>(b)</samp> &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: <samp>i.</samp>, <samp>ii.</samp>, &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>uppercase letter followed by a period: <samp>A.</samp>, <samp>B.</samp>, &dots;
 </para></listitem></enumerate>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="268">\enumi</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="269">\enumii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="270">\enumiii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="271">\enumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="279" mergedindex="cp">\enumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="280" mergedindex="cp">\enumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="281" mergedindex="cp">\enumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="282" mergedindex="cp">\enumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumi">enumerate enumi</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumii">enumerate enumii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumiii">enumerate enumiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumiv">enumerate enumiv</anchor>
 <para>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the counters <code>\enumi</code> through
 <code>\enumiv</code> (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
@@ -3590,17 +4449,21 @@
 customizing list layout, see <ref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></ref>.  The package <file>enumitem</file> is
 useful for customizing lists.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="272">\labelenumi</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="273">\labelenumii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="274">\labelenumiii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="275">\labelenumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="283" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="284" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="285" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="286" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumi">enumerate labelenumi</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumii">enumerate labelenumii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumiii">enumerate labelenumiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumiv">enumerate labelenumiv</anchor>
 <para>To change the format of the label use <code>\renewcommand</code>
 (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) on the commands <code>\labelenumi</code>
 through <code>\labelenumiv</code>. For instance, this first level list will be
 labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
 period.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="276">\Alph <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="287" mergedindex="cp">\Alph <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
 \begin{enumerate}
@@ -3617,26 +4480,25 @@
 <node name="eqnarray" spaces=" "><nodename>eqnarray</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">equation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">enumerate</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>eqnarray</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="277"><r>environment</r>, <code>eqnarray</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="278"><code>eqnarray</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="288" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>eqnarray</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="289" mergedindex="cp"><code>eqnarray</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="191">equations, aligning</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="192">aligning equations</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="249">equations, aligning</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="250">aligning equations</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="193">align <r>environment, from <code>amsmath</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="194">amsmath <r>package, replacing <code>eqnarray</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="195">Madsen, Lars</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>First, a caveat: the <code>eqnarray</code> environment is depreciated.  It has
-infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
-inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article &textldquo;Avoid
-eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars Madsen
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="251">align <r>environment, from <code>amsmath</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="252">amsmath <r>package, replacing <code>eqnarray</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="253">Madsen, Lars</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is obsolete.  It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars Madsen
 <url><urefurl>http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</urefurl></url>).  New documents
 should include the <file>amsmath</file> package and use the displayed
 mathematics environments provided there, such as the <code>align</code>
-environment.
+environment.  We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
 </para>
-<para>Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with old
-documents, a synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{eqnarray} 
@@ -3645,6 +4507,7 @@
 \end{eqnarray}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or 
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -3654,7 +4517,7 @@
 \end{eqnarray*}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="279">\\ <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="290" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Display a sequence of equations or inequalities.  The left and right
 sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
 mode.
@@ -3662,18 +4525,18 @@
 <para>It is similar to a three-column <code>array</code> environment, with items
 within a row separated by an ampersand (<code>&</code>), and with rows
 separated by double backslash  <code>\\</code>).
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="280">\\* <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="291" mergedindex="cp">\\* <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
 The starred form of line break (<code>\\*</code>) can also be used to separate
 equations, and will disallow a page break there (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="281">\nonumber</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="196">equation numbers, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="292" mergedindex="cp">\nonumber</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="254">equation numbers, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The unstarred form <code>eqnarray</code> places an equation number on every
 line (using the <code>equation</code> counter), unless that line contains a
 <code>\nonumber</code> command.  The starred form <code>eqnarray*</code> omits
 equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="282">\lefteqn</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="293" mergedindex="cp">\lefteqn</indexterm></findex>
 <para>The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across
 lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
 zero width.
@@ -3694,96 +4557,103 @@
 <node name="equation" spaces=" "><nodename>equation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">figure</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">eqnarray</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>equation</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="283"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="284"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="294" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="295" mergedindex="cp"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="197">equations, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="198">formulas, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="255">equations, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="256">formulas, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
-  math text
+  <var>mathematical text</var>
 \end{equation}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Make a <code>displaymath</code> environment (<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>) with an
-equation number in the right margin.
+<para>The same as a <code>displaymath</code> environment (<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>)
+except that &latex; puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the <code>equation</code> counter.
 </para>
-<para>The equation number is generated using the <code>equation</code> counter.
-</para>
 <para>You should have no blank lines between <code>\begin{equation}</code> and
 <code>\begin{equation}</code>, or &latex; will tell you that there is a
-missing dollar sign, $<code>$</code>.
+missing dollar sign.
 </para>
-<para>Note that the <file>amsmath</file> package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities.  Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="257"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="258"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <file>amsmath</file> package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities.  New documents should include this package.
 </para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="figure" spaces=" "><nodename>figure</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">filecontents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">equation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>figure</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="285"><r>environment</r>, <code>figure</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="286"><code>figure</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="296" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>figure</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="297" mergedindex="cp"><code>figure</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="199">inserting figures</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="200">figures, inserting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="259">inserting figures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="260">figures, inserting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{figure}[<var>placement</var>]
-  figure body
-\caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
-\label{<var>label}</var>
+  <var>figure body</var>
+  \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}  % optional
+  \label{<var>label}</var>              % optional
 \end{figure}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>or
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{figure*}[<var>placement</var>]
-  figure body
-\caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
-\label{<var>label}</var>
+  <var>figure body</var>
+  \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}  % optional
+  \label{<var>label}</var>              % optional  
 \end{figure*}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>A class of floats (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Because they cannot be split across
-pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
-are &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, such as the top of a following
-page.
+<para>Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text.  An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic.  Because of this, &latex; does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead &textldquo;floats&textrdquo; them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>For the possible values of <var>placement</var> and their effect on the 
-float placement algorithm, see <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<para>The <var>figure body</var> can consist of imported graphics
+(<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>), or text, &latex; commands, etc.  It is typeset in a
+<code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
 </para>
+<para>The possible values of <var>placement</var> are <code>h</code> for <samp>here</samp>,
+<code>t</code> for <samp>top</samp>, <code>b</code> for <samp>bottom</samp>, and <code>p</code> for
+<samp>on a separate page of floats</samp>.  For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 <para>The starred form <code>figure*</code> is used when a document is in
 double-column mode (<pxref label="_005ctwocolumn"><xrefnodename>\twocolumn</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It produces a figure that
 spans both columns, at the top of the page.  To add the possibility of
 placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <var>placement</var> <code>b</code>
 in <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
-<para>The figure body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>
-and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
-</para>
 <para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross
 references</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="287">\caption</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="298" mergedindex="cp">\caption</indexterm></findex>
 The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
 figure.  By default it is numbered.  If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is
-used in the list of figures instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Tables-of-contents"><xrefnodename>Tables of
-contents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+used in the list of figures instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of
+contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  It requires one of the
-packages <file>graphics</file> or <file>graphicx</file>.  The graphic, with its
-caption, will be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  &latex; will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
 end of the document, on a page of floats.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{figure}[t]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{figure}[t]
   \centering
   \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
   \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
@@ -3795,14 +4665,14 @@
 <node name="filecontents" spaces=" "><nodename>filecontents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushleft</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">figure</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>filecontents</code>: Write an external file</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="288"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="289"><code>filecontents</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="299" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="300" mergedindex="cp"><code>filecontents</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="290"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents*</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="291"><code>filecontents*</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="301" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents*</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="302" mergedindex="cp"><code>filecontents*</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="201">external files, writing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="202">writing external files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="261">external files, writing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="262">writing external files</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -3812,6 +4682,7 @@
 \end{filecontents}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -3850,6 +4721,7 @@
 \end{document}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>produces this file <file>JH.sty</file>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -3865,25 +4737,44 @@
 <node name="flushleft" spaces=" "><nodename>flushleft</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushright</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">filecontents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushleft</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="292"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushleft</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="293"><code>flushleft</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="303" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushleft</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="304" mergedindex="cp"><code>flushleft</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="203">left-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="204">ragged right text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="263">left-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="264">ragged right text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{flushleft}
-<var>line1</var> \\
-<var>line2</var> \\
-...
+  <var>line1</var> \\
+  <var>line2</var> \\
+  ...
 \end{flushleft}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="294">\\ <r>for <code>flushleft</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>flushleft</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right. Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="305" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>flushleft</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new line use a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>.  For the declaration form
+see <ref label="_005craggedright"><xrefnodename>\raggedright</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
+<para>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+\begin{flushleft}
+  A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+    at a convenient spot. \\
+  And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
+
+
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">\raggedright</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -3892,46 +4783,80 @@
 <node name="_005craggedright" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedright</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushleft</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedright</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="295">\raggedright</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="205">ragged right text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="206">left-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="207">justification, ragged right</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="306" mergedindex="cp">\raggedright</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="265">ragged right text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="266">left-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="267">justification, ragged right</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\raggedright</code> declaration corresponds to the
-<code>flushleft</code> environment.  This declaration can be used inside an
-environment such as <code>quote</code> or in a <code>parbox</code>.
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">{\raggedright  ... }
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{<var>environment</var>} \raggedright
+  ...
+\end{<var>environment</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>.  For the environment form
+see <ref label="flushleft"><xrefnodename>flushleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code>
 command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
 scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
 command that ends the paragraph unit.
 </para>
+<para>Here <code>\raggedright</code> in each second column keeps &latex; from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column.  Note
+that <code>\raggedright</code> is inside the curly braces <code>{...}</code> to
+delimit its effect.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+  Team alpha  &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+  Team beta   &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+                cooler is never empty.}                         \\
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></example>
 
+
 </subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="flushright" spaces=" "><nodename>flushright</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">itemize</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushleft</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushright</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="296"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushright</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="297"><code>flushright</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="307" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushright</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="308" mergedindex="cp"><code>flushright</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="208">ragged left text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="209">right-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="268">ragged left text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="269">right-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{flushright}
-<var>line1</var> \\
-<var>line2</var> \\
-...
+  <var>line1</var> \\
+  <var>line2</var> \\
+  ...
 \end{flushright}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="298">\\ (for <code>flushright</code>)</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>flushright</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left.  Each line must be terminated with the control sequence <code>\\</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="309" mergedindex="cp">\\ (for <code>flushright</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces.  To force a new
+line use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.  For the declaration form
+see <ref label="_005craggedleft"><xrefnodename>\raggedleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see <ref label="flushleft"><xrefnodename>flushleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\raggedleft</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -3940,53 +4865,69 @@
 <node name="_005craggedleft" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedleft</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushright</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedleft</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="299">\raggedleft</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="210">ragged left text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="211">justification, ragged left</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="212">right-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="310" mergedindex="cp">\raggedleft</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="270">ragged left text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="271">justification, ragged left</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="272">right-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\raggedleft</code> declaration corresponds to the
-<code>flushright</code> environment.  This declaration can be used inside an
-environment such as <code>quote</code> or in a <code>parbox</code>.
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">{\raggedleft  ... }
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{<var>environment</var>} \raggedleft
+  ...
+\end{<var>environment</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>.  For the environment form
+see <ref label="flushright"><xrefnodename>flushright</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 <para>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code>
 command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
 formats paragraph units.  To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
 scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
 command that ends the paragraph unit.
 </para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see <ref label="_005craggedright"><xrefnodename>\raggedright</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="itemize" spaces=" "><nodename>itemize</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">letter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushright</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>itemize</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="300"><r>environment</r>, <code>itemize</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="301"><code>itemize</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="311" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>itemize</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="312" mergedindex="cp"><code>itemize</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="302">\item</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="213">lists of items</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="214">unordered lists</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="215">bulleted lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="313" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="273">lists of items</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="274">unordered lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="275">bulleted lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="276">bullet lists</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{itemize}
-\item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] text of first item
-\item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+  \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+  ...
 \end{itemize}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces an &textldquo;unordered&textrdquo;, &textldquo;bulleted&textrdquo;
-list.  The format of the label numbering depends on the nesting level of
-this environment; see below.  Each <code>itemize</code> list environment must
-have at least one item; having none causes the &latex; error
-<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>.
+<para>Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.  The
+environment must have at least one <code>\item</code>; having none causes the
+&latex; error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>.
 </para>
-<para>This example gives a two-item list.  As a top-level list each label
-would come out as a bullet, •.
+<para>This gives a two-item list.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{itemize}
@@ -3995,7 +4936,11 @@
 \end{itemize}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="303">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, •.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="314" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If you
 give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
 brackets, as in <code>\item[Optional label]</code>, then by default it will
@@ -4004,15 +4949,19 @@
 environment. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
 contain multiple paragraphs.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="304">\labelitemi</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="305">\labelitemii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="306">\labelitemiii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="307">\labelitemiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="315" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="316" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="317" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="318" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemi">itemize labelitemi</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemii">itemize labelitemii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemiii">itemize labelitemiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemiv">itemize labelitemiv</anchor>
 <para>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
 They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
 as <code>enumerate</code> (<pxref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The <code>itemize</code> environment
 uses the commands <code>\labelitemi</code> through <code>\labelitemiv</code> to
-produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lower case
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
 roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
 level).  These are the default marks at each level.
 </para>
@@ -4030,17 +4979,24 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="308">\leftmargin</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="309">\leftmargini</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="310">\leftmarginii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="311">\leftmarginiii</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="312">\leftmarginiv</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="313">\leftmarginv</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="314">\leftmarginvi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="319" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="320" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargini</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="321" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="322" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="323" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="324" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="325" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginvi</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmargin">itemize leftmargin</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmargini">itemize leftmargini</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginii">itemize leftmarginii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginiii">itemize leftmarginiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginiv">itemize leftmarginiv</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginv">itemize leftmarginv</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginvi">itemize leftmarginvi</anchor>
 <para>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
 the left margin of the <code>itemize</code> list is determined by the
 parameters <code>\leftmargini</code> through <code>\leftmarginvi</code>.  (Note the
-convention of using lower case roman numerals a the end of the command
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
 name to denote the nesting level.)  The defaults are: <code>2.5em</code> in
 level 1 (<code>2em</code> in two-column mode), <code>2.2em</code> in level 2,
 <code>1.87em</code> in level 3, and <code>1.7em</code> in level 4, with smaller
@@ -4059,12 +5015,12 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="315">\parskip <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="326" mergedindex="cp">\parskip <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
 space between items.  Here is an example defining an <code>itemize*</code>
 environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
 within a single item (<code>\parskip</code> is not list-specific,
-<pxref label="_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>):
+<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent & \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>):
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment{itemize*}%
@@ -4080,8 +5036,8 @@
 <node name="letter" spaces=" "><nodename>letter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">list</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">itemize</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="316"><r>environment</r>, <code>letter</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="317"><code>letter</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="327" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>letter</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="328" mergedindex="cp"><code>letter</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
 
 <para>This environment is used for creating letters.  <xref label="Letters"><xrefnodename>Letters</xrefnodename></xref>.
@@ -4091,45 +5047,44 @@
 <node name="list" spaces=" "><nodename>list</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">math</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">letter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>list</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="318"><r>environment</r>, <code>list</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="319"><code>list</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="329" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>list</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="330" mergedindex="cp"><code>list</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="216">lists of items, generic</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="277">lists of items, generic</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{list}{<var>labeling</var>}{<var>spacing</var>}
-\item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] text of first item
-\item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] text of second item
-...
+  \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+  \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+  ...
 \end{list}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment for constructing
-more specialized lists.  It is most often used to create lists via the
-<code>description</code>, <code>enumerate</code>, and <code>itemize</code> environments
-(<pxref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></pxref>, <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>, and <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>).
+<para>An environment for constructing lists.
 </para>
-<para>Also, many standard &latex; environments that are not visually lists
-are constructed using <code>list</code>, including <code>quotation</code>,
-<code>quote</code>, <code>center</code>, <code>verbatim</code>, and plenty more
-(<pxref label="quotation-and-quote"><xrefnodename>quotation and quote</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="center"><xrefnodename>center</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="flushright"><xrefnodename>flushright</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body.  Most lists created by &latex; authors are the ones that come
+standard: the <code>description</code>, <code>enumerate</code>, and <code>itemize</code>
+environments (<pxref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></pxref>, <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>, and <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>).
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="217"><r>package</r>, <code>enumitem</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="218"><code>enumitem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
-
-<para>The third-party package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing lists.
-Here, we describe the <code>list</code> environment by defining a new custom
+<para>Instead, the <code>list</code> environment is most often used in macros.  For
+example, many standard &latex; environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <code>list</code>, including
+<code>quotation</code>, <code>quote</code>, and <code>center</code> (<pxref label="quotation-_0026-quote"><xrefnodename>quotation &
+quote</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="center"><xrefnodename>center</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This uses the <code>list</code> environment to define a new custom
 environment.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter{namedlistcounter}  % number the items
 \newenvironment{named}
   {\begin{list}
-     {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling argument
-     {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % spacing argument
-      \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % still spacing arg
+     {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling 
+     {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % set counter
+      \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing 
   }
   {\end{list}}
 
@@ -4140,55 +5095,58 @@
 \end{named}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>list</code> environment&textrsquo;s mandatory first argument,
-<var>labeling</var>, specifies the default labeling of list items.  It can
-contain text and &latex; commands, as above where it contains both
-<samp>Item</samp> and <samp>\Roman{...}</samp>.  &latex; forms the label by
-putting the <var>labeling</var> argument in a box of width
-<code>\labelwidth</code>.  If the label is wider than that, the additional
-material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a list you
-can override the default labeling by giving <code>\item</code> an optional
-argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above
-<code>\item[Special label.]</code>; <pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+<para>The mandatory first argument <var>labeling</var> specifies the default
+labeling of list items.  It can contain text and &latex; commands, as
+above where it contains both <samp>Item</samp> and <samp>\Roman{...}</samp>.
+&latex; forms the label by putting the <var>labeling</var> argument in a box
+of width <code>\labelwidth</code>.  If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving <code>\item</code> an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above <code>\item[Special label.]</code>; <pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="320">\makelabel</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The label box is constructed by the command <code>\makelabel</code>.  By
-default it positions the contents flush right.  It takes one argument,
-the label.  It typesets the contents in LR mode. An example of changing
-its definition is that to the above example before the definition of the
-<code>named</code> environment add
+<para>The mandatory second argument <var>spacing</var> has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty.  A command that can go in here is
+<code>\usecounter{<var>countername</var>}</code> (<pxref label="_005cusecounter"><xrefnodename>\usecounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Use this
+to tell &latex; to number the items using the given counter.  The
+counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an
+<code>\item</code> that does not have an optional argument.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="331" mergedindex="cp">\makelabel</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="list-makelabel">list makelabel</anchor> <para>Another command that can go in <var>spacing</var> is
+<code>\makelabel</code>, which constructs the label box.  By default it puts
+the contents flush right.  Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above <code>named</code> example, before the
+definition of the environment add
 <code>\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}</code>, and between
 the <code>\setlength</code> command and the parenthesis that closes the
 <var>spacing</var> argument also add <code>\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel</code>.
 Then the items will be typeset in small caps.  Similarly, changing the
 second code line to <code>\let\makelabel\fbox</code> puts the labels inside a
-framed box.  Another example is at the bottom of this entry.
+framed box.  Another example of the <code>\makelabel</code> command is below,
+in the definition of the <code>redlabel</code> environment.
 </para>
-<para>The mandatory second argument <var>spacing</var> can have a list of
-commands to redefine the spacing parameters for the list, such as
-<code>\setlength{\labelwidth}{2em}</code>.  If this argument is empty,
-i.e., <code>{}</code>, then the list will have the default spacing given
-below.  To number the items using a counter, put
-<code>\usecounter{<var>countername</var>}</code> in this argument
-(<pxref label="_005cusecounter"><xrefnodename>\usecounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Also often in <var>spacing</var> are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list.  Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as <code>itemize</code> can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list.  Each is a length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with <code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components,
+to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page.  Change each with a
+command such as <code>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}</code>.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
 </para>
-<para>Below are the spacing parameters for list formatting.  See also the
-figure below.  Each is a length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The vertical
-spaces are normally rubber lengths, with <code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code>
-components, to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page.  Change
-each with a command such as <code>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt
-minus1pt}</code>.  For some effects these lengths should be zero or
-negative.  Default values for derived environments such as
-<code>itemize</code> can be changed from the values shown here for the basic
-<code>list</code>.
-</para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="321">\itemindent</indexterm>\itemindent</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <code>leftmargin</code>, of the
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="332" mergedindex="cp">\itemindent</indexterm>\itemindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itemindent">list itemindent</anchor>
+<para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <code>leftmargin</code>, of the
 first line each item.  Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="322">\itemsep</indexterm>\itemsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <code>\parsep</code>.  The defaults
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="333" mergedindex="cp">\itemsep</indexterm>\itemsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itemsep">list itemsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <code>\parsep</code>.  The defaults
 for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>,
 and <samp>report</samp> classes at 10 point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt
 minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
@@ -4199,13 +5157,15 @@
 minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
 <code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="323">\labelsep</indexterm>\labelsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="334" mergedindex="cp">\labelsep</indexterm>\labelsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-labelsep">list labelsep</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
 The default for &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>,
 and <samp>report</samp> classes is <code>0.5em</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="324">\labelwidth</indexterm>\labelwidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal width.  The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="335" mergedindex="cp">\labelwidth</indexterm>\labelwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-labelwidth">list labelwidth</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal width.  The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
 If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text that is wider than this then the first
 line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
 If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text of width less than or equal to
@@ -4225,8 +5185,9 @@
 label&textrsquo;s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
 environment.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="325">\leftmargin</indexterm>\leftmargin</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="336" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargin</indexterm>\leftmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-leftmargin">list leftmargin</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
 (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
 left margin of this list.  It must be non-negative.
 </para>
@@ -4242,14 +5203,16 @@
 <code>2.5em</code> (in two column mode, <code>2em</code>), <code>\leftmarginii</code> is
 <code>2.2em</code>, and <code>\leftmarginiii</code> is <code>1.87em</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="326">\listparindent</indexterm>\listparindent</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="337" mergedindex="cp">\listparindent</indexterm>\listparindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-listparindent">list listparindent</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
 <code>\leftmargin</code>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
 item.  A negative value makes this an &textldquo;outdent&textrdquo;.  Its default value
 is <code>0pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="327">\parsep</indexterm>\parsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.  In the <samp>book</samp>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="338" mergedindex="cp">\parsep</indexterm>\parsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-parsep">list parsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.  In the <samp>book</samp>
 and <samp>article</samp> classes The defaults for the first three levels in
 &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp> classes at 10
 point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt
@@ -4258,8 +5221,9 @@
 <code>0pt</code>.  The defaults at 12 point size are: <code>5pt plus2.5pt
 minus1pt</code>, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="328">\partopsep</indexterm>\partopsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical space added, beyond <code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>, to the top
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="339" mergedindex="cp">\partopsep</indexterm>\partopsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-partopsep">list partopsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space added, beyond <code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>, to the top
 and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
 a blank line.  (A blank line in the &latex; source before the list
 changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
@@ -4273,21 +5237,23 @@
 defaults at 12 point are: <code>3pt plus2pt minus3pt</code>, <code>3pt plus2pt
 minus2pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="329">\rightmargin</indexterm>\rightmargin</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="340" mergedindex="cp">\rightmargin</indexterm>\rightmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-rightmargin">list rightmargin</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
 margin of the enclosing environment.  Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
 It must be non-negative.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="330">\topsep</indexterm>\topsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
-to <code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The defaults for the first three
-levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp>
-classes at 10 point size are: <code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code>, <code>4pt
-plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.  The defaults at 11
-point are: <code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code>, <code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>,
-and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.  The defaults at 12 point are:
-<code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code>, <code>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</code>, and
-<code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="341" mergedindex="cp">\topsep</indexterm>\topsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-topsep">list topsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to <code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent & \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The defaults for
+the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and
+<samp>report</samp> classes at 10 point size are: <code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code>,
+<code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.  The
+defaults at 11 point are: <code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code>, <code>4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.  The defaults at 12
+point are: <code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code>, <code>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</code>,
+and <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
@@ -4356,19 +5322,28 @@
 page break.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="331">\&arobase;beginparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;beginparpenalty</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <code>-51</code>).
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="342" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;beginparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;beginparpenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-beginparpenalty">list beginparpenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <code>-51</code>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="332">\&arobase;itempenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;itempenalty</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <code>-51</code>).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="343" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;itempenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;itempenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itempenalty">list itempenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <code>-51</code>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="333">\&arobase;endparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;endparpenalty</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <code>-51</code>).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="344" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;endparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;endparpenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-endparpenalty">list endparpenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <code>-51</code>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="278"><r>package</r>, <code>enumitem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="279"><code>enumitem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
 <para>This example has the labels in red.  They are numbered, and the left
 edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+<xref label="_005cusecounter"><xrefnodename>\usecounter</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{color}
@@ -4403,8 +5378,10 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\item text of item
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
-</para><example endspaces=" ">
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\item[<var>optional-label</var>] text of item
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -4492,10 +5469,10 @@
 <node name="math" spaces=" "><nodename>math</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">minipage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">list</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>math</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="334"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="335"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="345" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="346" mergedindex="cp"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="219">in-line formulas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="280">in-line formulas</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -4514,34 +5491,139 @@
 <node name="minipage" spaces=" "><nodename>minipage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">picture</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">math</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>minipage</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="336"><r>environment</r>, <code>minipage</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="337"><code>minipage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="347" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>minipage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="348" mergedindex="cp"><code>minipage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="220">minipage, creating a</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="281">minipage, creating a</indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{minipage}{<var>width</var>}
+  <var>contents</var>
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{minipage}[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}
-<var>text</var>
+  <var>contents</var>
 \end{minipage}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>minipage</code> environment typesets its body <var>text</var> in a
-block that will not be broken across pages.  This is similar to the
-<code>\parbox</code> command (<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>), but unlike <code>\parbox</code>,
-other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage.
+<para>Put <var>contents</var> into a box that is <var>width</var> wide.  This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.)  This box will not be broken across pages.  So <code>minipage</code>
+is similar to <code>\parbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
 </para>
-<!-- c (xxref positions) -->
-<para>The arguments are the same as for <code>\parbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="221">indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="222">paragraph indentation, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="338">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
-<para>By default, paragraphs are not indented in the <code>minipage</code>
-environment.  You can restore indentation with a command such as
-<code>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</code> command.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{minipage}{3in}
+  Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+  He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+  was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+  and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+<code>minipage</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="223">footnotes in figures</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="224">figures, footnotes in</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The required argument <var>width</var> is a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+It gives the width of the box into which <var>contents</var> are typeset.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>.  You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default <var>position</var> and set the <var>height</var> with
+<code>\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] <var>contents</var> \end{minipage}</code>.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, <code>[]</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> governs how the <code>minipage</code>
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(synonym <code>m</code>) Default.  Positions the <code>minipage</code> so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain &tex; calls <code>\vcenter</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Match the top line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\vtop</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Match the bottom line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\vbox</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+  first\\ second\\ third
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>with the results of changing <code>c</code> to <code>b</code> or <code>t</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>height</var> is a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+It sets the height of the <code>minipage</code>.  You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the <code>minipage</code>&textrsquo;s natural
+height and &latex; will not give an error or warning.  You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+</para>
+<para>The final optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of <var>position</var>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place <var>content</var> at the top of the box.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place it in the vertical center.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place it at the box bottom.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stretch <var>contents</var> out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The <var>inner-pos</var> argument makes sense when the <var>height</var> options
+is set to a value larger than the <code>minipage</code>&textrsquo;s natural height.  To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of <code>b</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Text before
+\begin{center}
+  ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+       first\\ second\\ third
+  \end{minipage}              
+\end{center}
+Text after  
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="282">indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="283">paragraph indentation, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="349" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<para>By default paragraphs are not indented in a <code>minipage</code>.  Change
+that with a command such as <code>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</code> at
+the start of <var>contents</var>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="284">footnotes in figures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="285">figures, footnotes in</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is
 particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables.  A
 <code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at
@@ -4549,485 +5631,858 @@
 uses the <code>\mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary
 <code>footnote</code> counter (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>However, don&textrsquo;t put one minipage inside another if you are using
-footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
+<para>This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}           % center the minipage on the line
+\begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+  \begin{center}         % center the table inside the minipage
+    \begin{tabular}{ll}
+      \textsc{Monarch}  &\textsc{Reign}             \\ \hline
+      Elizabeth II      &63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+      Victoria          &63 years                   \\
+      George III        &59 years
+    \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}  
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+<code>\end{minipage}</code> which may not be their logical place.
+</para>
+<para>This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.  They
+are vertically centered.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{&arobase;{}c&arobase;{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+  \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+  \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+    \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million)  \\ \hline
+      The Bronx      &$1.5$  \\
+      Brooklyn       &$2.6$  \\
+      Manhattan      &$1.6$  \\
+      Queens         &$2.3$  \\
+      Staten Island  &$0.5$  
+    \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}              
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
+
+
 </section>
-<node name="picture" spaces=" "><nodename>picture</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">quotation and quote</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">minipage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<node name="picture" spaces=" "><nodename>picture</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">quotation & quote</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">minipage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>picture</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="339"><r>environment</r>, <code>picture</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="340"><code>picture</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="350" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>picture</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="351" mergedindex="cp"><code>picture</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="225">creating pictures</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="226">pictures, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="286">creating pictures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="287">pictures, creating</indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>Synopses: 
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+   <var>picture commands</var> 
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>)
-&dots; <var>picture commands</var> &dots;
+  <var>picture commands</var>
 \end{picture}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="341">\unitlength</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>picture</code> environment allows you to create just about any
-kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles.
-You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying
-their coordinates.  A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal
-point and a minus sign&textmdash;a number like <code>5</code>, <code>0.3</code> or
-<code>-3.1416</code>.  A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the
-unit length <code>\unitlength</code>, so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set
-to <code>1cm</code>, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
-centimeters.
+<para>An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text.  Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as <code>TikZ</code>, <code>PSTricks</code>, <code>MetaPost</code>,
+or <code>Asymptote</code>.  These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
 </para>
-<para>You should only change the value of <code>\unitlength</code>, using the
-<code>\setlength</code> command, outside of a <code>picture</code> environment.
-The default value is <code>1pt</code>.
+<para>This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="227"><r>package</r>, <code>picture</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="228"><code>picture</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="352" mergedindex="cp">\unitlength</indexterm></findex>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(6,6)      % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+  \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}}  % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+    \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+  \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+    \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}  
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+    \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}  
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>picture</code> package redefine the <code>picture</code> environment so
-that everywhere a number is used in a <var>picture commands</var> to specify
-a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
-this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing <code>\unitlength</code>.
+<para>You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
+\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="229">position, in picture</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>A <dfn>position</dfn> is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying
-the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>.
-Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin,
-which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that
-when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces;
-the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The red X will be precisely a quarter of the <code>\linewidth</code> from
+the left margin, and <code>0.35\linewidth</code> up from the bottom.  Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document&textrsquo;s pages.
 </para>
-<para>The <code>picture</code> environment has one mandatory argument which is a
-position (<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>), which specifies the size of the
-picture.  The environment produces a rectangular box with these
-<var>width</var> and <var>height</var>.
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>).  Multiply these by the value
+<code>\unitlength</code> to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+&latex; reserves on the output page.  This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture&textrsquo;s box.
 </para>
-<para>The <code>picture</code> environment also has an optional position argument
-(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>), following the size argument, that can
-change the origin.  (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument
-is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
-coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
-(thereby determining the origin).  For example, if <code>\unitlength</code>
-has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the command
+<para>This environment also has an optional argument
+(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>).  It is used to shift the origin.  Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by <code>\unitlength</code> to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
 </para>
+<para>For example, if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the
+command
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
-millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
-upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220).  When you first
-draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the
-origin at the lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters.  The
+picture&textrsquo;s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm).  When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your
 picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
 optional argument.
 </para>
-<para>The environment&textrsquo;s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
-picture.  This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
-&latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even
-off the page.  The picture&textrsquo;s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining
-how much room to leave for it.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="288">position, in picture</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Each <var>picture command</var> tells &latex; where to put something by
+naming its position.  A <dfn>position</dfn> is a pair such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>
+giving the x- and y-coordinates.  A <dfn>coordinate</dfn> is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign).  It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length <code>\unitlength</code>,
+so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
 </para>
-<para>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <code>\put</code>
-command. The command
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default for <code>\unitlength</code> is <code>1pt</code>.  it is a rigid
+length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Change it with the <code>\setlength</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Make this change only outside of a <code>picture</code>
+environment.
 </para>
+<para>Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with <code>\put(1,2){...}</code>, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.  Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+</para>
+<para>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <code>\put</code>,
+<code>\multiput</code>, <code>\qbezier</code>, and <code>\graphpaper</code>.  The most
+often used is <code>\put</code>. This
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(11.3,-0.3){...}
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>puts the object specified by <code>...</code> in the
-picture, with its reference point at coordinates <math>(11.3,-.3)</math>.
-The reference points for various objects will be described below.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+<math>(11.3,-0.3)</math>.  The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="353" mergedindex="cp">LR box</indexterm></findex>
+The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn> (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+Anything that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) can
+go in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command.  The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box.  In this picture
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="342">lR box</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn>.  You can put anything
-that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox"><xrefnodename>\mbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) in the text argument of
-the <code>\put</code> command.  When you do this, the reference point will
-be the lower left corner of the box.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines.  (Also, <code>\line(1,1){1}</code> does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
 </para>
-<para>The <code>picture</code> commands are described in the following sections.
+<para>The <code>\multiput</code>, <code>qbezier</code>, and <code>graphpaper</code> commands are
+described below.
 </para>
+<para>This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using <code>\qbezier</code> for
+that curve.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
+  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
+  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side rectangle
+  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
+  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
+  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
+
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\circle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a circle.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\put</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Place an object at a specified place.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\multiput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw multiple instances of an object.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\qbezier</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\graphpaper</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw graph paper.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a straight line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\linethickness</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\thinlines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The default line thickness.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\thicklines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A heavier line thickness.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\circle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a circle.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\oval</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw an oval.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\shortstack</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make a stack of objects.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\vector</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a line with an arrow.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\makebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a box of the specified size.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\framebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a box with a frame around it.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\frame</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a frame around an object.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\dashbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a dashed box.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\frame</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a frame around an object.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a straight line.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\linethickness</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the line thickness.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\thicklines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A heavier line thickness.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\thinlines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The default line thickness.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\multiput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw multiple instances of an object.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\oval</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw an ellipse.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\put</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Place an object at a specified place.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\shortstack</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make a pile of objects.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\vector</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a line with an arrow.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005ccircle" spaces=" "><nodename>\circle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\circle</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cput" spaces=" "><nodename>\put</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\multiput</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\put</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="343">\circle</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="354" mergedindex="cp">\put</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\circle[*]{<var>diameter</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>){<var>content</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\circle</code> command produces a circle with a diameter as close
-to the specified one as possible.  The <code>*</code>-form of the command
-draws a solid circle.
+<para>Place <var>content</var> at the coordinate (<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>).  See
+the discussion of coordinates and <code>\unitlength</code> in <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
+The <var>content</var> is processed in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
 </para>
-<para>Circles up to 40<dmn>pt</dmn> can be drawn.
+<para>This includes the text into the <code>picture</code>.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the <samp>A</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\circle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cmultiput" spaces=" "><nodename>\multiput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\qbezier</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\put</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multiput</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="344">\makebox <r>(for <code>picture</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="355" mergedindex="cp">\multiput</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>){<var>num-copies</var>}{<var>obj</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\makebox</code> command for the picture environment is similar to
-the normal <code>\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a
-<var>width</var> and <var>height</var> in multiples of <code>\unitlength</code>.
+<para>Copy <var>obj</var> a total of <var>num-copies</var> times, with an increment of
+<var>delta_x,delta_y</var>.  The <var>obj</var> first appears at position
+<math>(x,y)</math>, then at <math>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</math>, and so on.
 </para>
-<para>The optional argument, <code>[<var>position</var>]</code>, specifies the quadrant that
-your <var>text</var> appears in.  You may select up to two of the following:
+<para>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+<ref label="_005cgraphpaper"><xrefnodename>\graphpaper</xrefnodename></ref>).
 </para>
-<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the item to the bottom.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the item to the left.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the item to the right.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(10,10)
+  \linethickness{0.05mm}
+  \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}} 
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+  \linethickness{0.5mm}
+  \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para><xref label="_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\makebox</xrefnodename></xref>.
-</para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\framebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\dashbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cqbezier" spaces=" "><nodename>\qbezier</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\graphpaper</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multiput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\qbezier</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="345">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="356" mergedindex="cp">\qbezier</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>pos</var>]{...}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\qbezier(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
+\qbezier[<var>num</var>](<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\framebox</code> command is like <code>\makebox</code> (see previous
-section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
-that it creates.
+<para>Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments <code>(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)</code>,
+<code>(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)</code>, and <code>(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)</code>.  That is,
+the curve runs from <var>(x1,y1)</var> to <var>(x3,y3)</var>, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at <var>(x1,y1)</var> passes through
+<var>(x2,y2)</var>, as does the tangent line at <var>(x3,y3)</var>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="346">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="347">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\framebox</code> command produces a rule of thickness
-<code>\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule
-and the contents of the box.
+<para>This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
 </para>
-
-</subsection>
-<node name="_005cdashbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\dashbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frame</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\dashbox</code></sectiontitle>
-
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="348">\dashbox</indexterm></findex>
-
-<para>Draws a box with a dashed line.  Synopsis:
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\dashbox{<var>dlen</var>}(<var>rwidth</var>,<var>rheight</var>)[<var>pos</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)  
 </pre></example>
 
-<para><code>\dashbox</code> creates a dashed rectangle around <var>text</var> in a
-<code>picture</code> environment.  Dashes are <var>dlen</var> units long, and the
-rectangle has overall width <var>rwidth</var> and height <var>rheight</var>.
-The <var>text</var> is positioned at optional <var>pos</var>.  <!-- c xxref positions. -->
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The curve&textrsquo;s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve&textrsquo;s tangent line at (1,0).
 </para>
-<para>A dashed box looks best when the <var>rwidth</var> and <var>rheight</var> are
-multiples of the <var>dlen</var>.
+<para>The optional argument <var>num</var> gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points.  The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is <code>\qbeziermax</code> (change this value with
+<code>\renewcommand</code>).
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cframe" spaces=" "><nodename>\frame</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\dashbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frame</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cgraphpaper" spaces=" "><nodename>\graphpaper</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\qbezier</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\graphpaper</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="349">\frame</indexterm></findex>
-
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="357" mergedindex="cp">\graphpaper</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\frame{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\graphpaper(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
+\graphpaper[<var>spacing</var>](<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\frame</code> command puts a rectangular frame around <var>text</var>.
-The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame.  No extra
-space is put between the frame and the object.
+<para>Draw a coordinate grid.  Requires the <code>graphpap</code> package.
+The grid&textrsquo;s origin is <code>(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)</code>.
+Grid lines come every <var>spacing</var> units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends <var>x_dimen</var> units to the right and <var>y_dimen</var> units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
 </para>
+<para>This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{graphpap}    % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{picture}(6,20)    % in document body
+  \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The lines are numbered every ten units.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cline" spaces=" "><nodename>\line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linethickness</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\frame</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cline" spaces=" "><nodename>\line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linethickness</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\graphpaper</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\line</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="350">\line</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="358" mergedindex="cp">\line</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\line(<var>xslope</var>,<var>yslope</var>){<var>length</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\line</code> command draws a line with the given <var>length</var> and
-slope <var>xslope</var>/<var>yslope</var>.
+<para>Draw a line.  It slopes such that it vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for
+every horizontal <var>x_run</var>.  The <var>travel</var> is the total horizontal
+change &textmdash; it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+<math>x</math>.  In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), the <var>travel</var> gives the change in
+<math>y</math>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="230"><code>pict2e</code> package</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="231">graphics packages</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with <math><var>slope</var> = x/y</math>,
-where <math>x</math> and <math>y</math> have integer values from −6
-through 6.  For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes,
-see <code>pict2e</code> and many other packages on CTAN.
+<para>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For every over 2, this line will go up 5.  Because <var>travel</var>
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up 10.  Thus its
+endpoint is <math>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</math>.  In particular, note that
+<math><var>travel</var>=4</math> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<math>x</math>.
+</para>
+<para>The arguments <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then &latex; treats the
+second as 1.)  With
+<code>\put(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>){\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}}</code>,
+if <var>x_run</var> is negative then the line&textrsquo;s ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than <var>x_init</var>.  If <var>y_rise</var> is negative
+then the line&textrsquo;s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+<var>y_init</var>.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>travel</var> is negative then you get <code>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.</code>
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="289"><code>pict2e</code> package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="290">graphics packages</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="291"><r>package</r>, <code>pict2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="292"><code>pict2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="293"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="294"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="295"><r>package</r>, <code>PSTricks</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="296"><code>PSTricks</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="297"><r>package</r>, <code>MetaPost</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="298"><code>MetaPost</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="299"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="300"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts.  The two numbers <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> must have
+integer values from −6 through 6.  Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that <var>(x_run,y_rise)</var> can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former).  To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+<code>picture</code>, see the package <file>pict2e</file> on CTAN.  Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as <file>TikZ</file>, or
+<file>PSTricks</file>, or <file>MetaPost</file>, or <file>Asymptote</file>
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005clinethickness" spaces=" "><nodename>\linethickness</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thicklines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005clinethickness" spaces=" "><nodename>\linethickness</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinlines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linethickness</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="351">\linethickness</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="359" mergedindex="cp">\linethickness</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\linethickness{<var>dim</var>}</code> command declares the thickness
-of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be
-<var>dim</var>, which must be a positive length.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para><code>\linethickness</code> does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
-circles, or the quarter circles drawn by <code>\oval</code>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\linethickness{<var>dim</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be <var>dim</var>, which must be a positive length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It differs from <code>\thinlines</code> and
+<code>\thicklines</code> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cthicklines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thicklines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinlines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\linethickness</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thicklines</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cthinlines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinlines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thicklines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\linethickness</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinlines</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="352">\thicklines</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="360" mergedindex="cp">\thinlines</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\thicklines</code> command is an alternate line thickness for
-horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. <ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="_005cthinlines"><xrefnodename>\thinlines</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4<dmn>pt</dmn>.  This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either <ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> or <ref label="_005cthicklines"><xrefnodename>\thicklines</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cthinlines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinlines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\multiput</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thicklines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinlines</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cthicklines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thicklines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\circle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinlines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thicklines</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="353">\thinlines</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="361" mergedindex="cp">\thicklines</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\thinlines</code> command is the default line thickness for
-horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. <ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="_005cthicklines"><xrefnodename>\thicklines</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8<dmn>pt</dmn>.  See also
+<ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="_005cthinlines"><xrefnodename>\thinlines</xrefnodename></ref>.  This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cmultiput" spaces=" "><nodename>\multiput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\oval</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinlines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multiput</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005ccircle" spaces=" "><nodename>\circle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\oval</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thicklines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\circle</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="354">\multiput</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="362" mergedindex="cp">\circle</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>){<var>n</var>}{<var>obj</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\circle{<var>diameter</var>}
+\circle*{<var>diameter</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\multiput</code> command copies the object <var>obj</var> in a regular
-pattern across a picture.  <var>obj</var> is first placed at position
-<math>(x,y)</math>, then at <math>(x+\delta x,y+\delta y)</math>, and so on,
-<var>n</var> times.
+<para>Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one.  The <code>*</code> form produces a filled-in circle.
 </para>
+<para>This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at <code>(5,7)</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>The available radii for <code>circle</code> are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive.  For <code>circle*</code> they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005coval" spaces=" "><nodename>\oval</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\put</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multiput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005coval" spaces=" "><nodename>\oval</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\shortstack</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\circle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\oval</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="355">\oval</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="363" mergedindex="cp">\oval</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>portion</var>]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>portion</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\oval</code> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.  The
-optional argument <var>portion</var> allows you to produce only half of the
-oval via the following:
+<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners.  The optional argument
+<var>portion</var> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take <var>portion</var> to be one of these.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>selects the top half;
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>top half
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>selects the bottom half;
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>bottom half
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>selects the right half;
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>right half
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>selects the left half.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>left half
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<para>It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by setting
-<var>portion</var> to <code>tr</code>, <code>br</code>, <code>bl</code>, or <code>tl</code>.
+<para>Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting <var>portion</var> to
+<code>tr</code>, <code>br</code>, <code>bl</code>, or <code>tl</code>.
 </para>
-<para>The &textldquo;corners&textrdquo; of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
-maximum radius of 20<dmn>pt</dmn>, so large &textldquo;ovals&textrdquo; will look more like
-boxes with rounded corners.
+<para>This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.  
 </para>
-
-</subsection>
-<node name="_005cput" spaces=" "><nodename>\put</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\shortstack</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\oval</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\put</code></sectiontitle>
-
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="356">\put</indexterm></findex>
-
-<para>Synopsis:
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>){ ... }
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\put</code> command places the material specified by the
-(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate,
-(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>).
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
 </para>
+<para>These shapes are not ellipses.  They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles.  These circles have a maximum radius of
+20<dmn>pt</dmn> (<pxref label="_005ccircle"><xrefnodename>\circle</xrefnodename></pxref> for the sizes).  Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cshortstack" spaces=" "><nodename>\shortstack</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vector</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\put</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cshortstack" spaces=" "><nodename>\shortstack</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vector</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\oval</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\shortstack</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="357">\shortstack</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="364" mergedindex="cp">\shortstack</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\shortstack[<var>position</var>]{...\\...\\...}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\shortstack[<var>position</var>]{<var>line 1</var> \\ ... }
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\shortstack</code> command produces a stack of objects.  The valid
-positions are:
+<para>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
 </para>
+<para>This labels the <math>y</math> axis.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}}   % x axis
+\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}}   % y
+\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the <ref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></ref> puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the <math>y</math> axis.
+</para>
+<para>The valid positions are:
+</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Move the objects to the right of the stack.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Make objects flush right
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Move the objects to the left of the stack
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Make objects flush left
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Center objects (default)
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="358">\\ <r>(for <code>\shortstack</code> objects)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>Objects are separated with <code>\\</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="365" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>\shortstack</code> objects)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Separate objects into lines with <code>\\</code>.  These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights.  Thus, in
+<code>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</code> the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two.  You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with <code>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</code>,
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <code>\shortstack{X \\
+\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</code> or by using <code>\\</code>&textrsquo;s optional
+argument <code>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</code>.
 </para>
+<para>The <code>\shortstack</code> command is also available outside the
+<code>picture</code> environment.
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cvector" spaces=" "><nodename>\vector</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\shortstack</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cvector" spaces=" "><nodename>\vector</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\shortstack</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vector</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="359">\vector</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="366" mergedindex="cp">\vector</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\vector(<var>xslope</var>,<var>yslope</var>){<var>length</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vector(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\vector</code> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope.  The <math><var>xslope</var></math> and <math><var>yslope</var></math>
-values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive.
+<para>Draw a line ending in an arrow.  The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for every horizontal <var>x_run</var>.  The
+<var>travel</var> is the total horizontal change &textmdash; it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in <math>x</math>.  In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), then
+<var>travel</var> gives the change in <math>y</math>.
 </para>
+<para>For an example see <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>For elaboration on <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> see <ref label="_005cline"><xrefnodename>\line</xrefnodename></ref>.  As
+there, the values of <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are limited.  For
+<code>\vector</code> you must chooses integers between −4 and 4,
+inclusive.  Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime.  Thus,
+<code>\vector(2,1){4}</code> is acceptable but <code>\vector(4,2){4}</code> is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
+<node name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vector</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="367" mergedindex="cp">\makebox <r>(for <code>picture</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make a box to hold <var>text</var>.  This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because <var>rec-width</var> and <var>rec-height</var> are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the <code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This
+command is similar to the normal <code>\makebox</code> command (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &
+\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) except here that you must specify the width and height.  This
+command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <code>\unitlength</code> and height 4
+times <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The optional argument <code><var>position</var></code> specifies where in the box
+the <var>text</var> appears.  The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically.  To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Puts <var>text</var> the top of the box.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> at the bottom.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> on the left.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> on the right.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\framebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frame</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="368" mergedindex="cp">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This is the same as <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates.  The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame.  This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+\framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="369" mergedindex="cp">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="370" mergedindex="cp">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The rule has thickness <code>\fboxrule</code> and there is a blank space
+<code>\fboxsep</code> between the frame and the contents of the box.
+</para>
+<para>For this command, you must specify the <var>width</var> and <var>height</var>.  If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use <code>\fbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox
+& \framebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>\frame</code> (<pxref label="_005cframe"><xrefnodename>\frame</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframe" spaces=" "><nodename>\frame</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\dashbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frame</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="371" mergedindex="cp">\frame</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frame{<var>contents</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <var>contents</var>.  The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame.  In contrast to <code>\framebox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox (picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object.  It is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cdashbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\dashbox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frame</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\dashbox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="372" mergedindex="cp">\dashbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\dashbox{<var>dash-len</var>}(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\dashbox{<var>dash-len</var>}(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a dashed rectangle around <var>text</var>.  This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The required arguments are: dashes are <var>dash-len</var> units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<para>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <var>dash-len</var>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Each dash will be <code>0.1\unitlength</code> long, the box&textrsquo;s width is
+<code>5\unitlength</code> and its height is <code>0.5\unitlength</code>.
+</para>
+<para>As in that example, a dashed box looks best when <var>rect-width</var> and
+<var>rect-height</var> are multiples of the <var>dash-len</var>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
 </section>
-<node name="quotation-and-quote" spaces=" "><nodename>quotation and quote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabbing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">picture</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>quotation</code> and <code>quote</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="quotation-_0026-quote" spaces=" "><nodename>quotation & quote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabbing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">picture</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="360"><r>environment</r>, <code>quotation</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="361"><code>quotation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="373" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>quotation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="374" mergedindex="cp"><code>quotation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="232">quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="233">displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="234">paragraph indentations in quoted text</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="362"><r>environment</r>, <code>quote</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="363"><code>quote</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="301">quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="302">displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="303">paragraph indentations in quoted text</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="375" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>quote</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="376" mergedindex="cp"><code>quote</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="235">quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="236">displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="237">paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="304">quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="305">displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="306">paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{quotation}
-<var>text</var>
+  <var>text</var>
 \end{quotation}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or 
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{quote}
-<var>text</var>
+  <var>text</var>
 \end{quote}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Include a quotation. 
+<para>Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+<code>\leftmargin</code> and the text is right-justified.
 </para>
-<para>In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
-<code>\leftmargin</code> and the text is justified at both.  As with the main
-text, leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.
+<para>They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the <code>quotation</code>
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5<dmn>em</dmn> and the space
+between paragraphs is small, <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>.  In the <code>quote</code>
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length <code>\parsep</code>).
 </para>
-<para>To compare the two: in the <code>quotation</code> environment, paragraphs are
-indented by 1.5<dmn>em</dmn> and the space between paragraphs is small,
-<code>0pt plus 1pt</code>.  In the <code>quote</code> environment, paragraphs are
-not indented and there is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the
-rubber length <code>\parsep</code>).  Thus, the <code>quotation</code> environment
-may be more suitable for documents where new paragraphs are marked by an
-indent rather than by a vertical separation.  In addition, <code>quote</code>
-may be more suitable for a short quotation or a sequence of short
-quotations.
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{quotation}
-\it Four score and seven years ago
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{quotation} \small\it
+  Four score and seven years ago
   ... shall not perish from the earth.
-\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+  \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
 \end{quotation}
 </pre></example>
 
 
 </section>
-<node name="tabbing" spaces=" "><nodename>tabbing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">quotation and quote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<node name="tabbing" spaces=" "><nodename>tabbing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">quotation & quote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabbing</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="364"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabbing</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="365"><code>tabbing</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="377" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabbing</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="378" mergedindex="cp"><code>tabbing</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="238">tab stops, using</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="239">lining text up using tab stops</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="240">alignment via tabbing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="307">tab stops, using</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="308">lining text up using tab stops</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="309">alignment via tabbing</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5039,10 +6494,11 @@
 \end{tabbing}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>tabbing</code> environment aligns text in columns.  It works by
-setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on a typewriter.
-It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
-and known in advance.
+<para>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter.  This is less often used than the environments
+<code>tabular</code> (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>array</code> (<pxref label="array"><xrefnodename>array</xrefnodename></pxref>) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
 </para>
 <para>This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
 widths, ended by a <code>\kill</code> command (which is described below):
@@ -5074,7 +6530,7 @@
 the end of line, so that the width of the environment is
 <code>\linewidth</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="241">row, <r>tabbing</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="310">row, <r>tabbing</r></indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The <code>tabbing</code> environment contains a sequence of <dfn>tabbed
 rows</dfn>.  The first tabbed row begins immediately after
 <code>\begin{tabbing}</code> and each row ends with <code>\\</code> or
@@ -5098,37 +6554,37 @@
 They are all fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="366">\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="379" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>End a tabbed line and typeset it.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="367">\= <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\= <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="380" mergedindex="cp">\= <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\= <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets a tab stop at the current position.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="368">\> <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\> <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="369">\></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="381" mergedindex="cp">\> <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\> <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="382" mergedindex="cp">\></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Advances to the next tab stop.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="370">\<</indexterm>\<</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="383" mergedindex="cp">\<</indexterm>\<</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
 the margin).  Can only be used at the start of the line.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="371">\+</indexterm>\+</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="384" mergedindex="cp">\+</indexterm>\+</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
 following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
 necessary.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="372">\-</indexterm>\-</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="385" mergedindex="cp">\-</indexterm>\-</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
 following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
 necessary.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="373">\' <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\' <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="386" mergedindex="cp">\' <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\' <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
 everything from the most recent <code>\></code>, <code>\<</code>, <code>\'</code>,
 <code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the previous column and aligned
 to the right, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="374">\` <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\` <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="387" mergedindex="cp">\` <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\` <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
 stop 0.  However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last
 column because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there.  The <code>\`</code> command moves
@@ -5138,29 +6594,29 @@
 <code>\'</code> command between the <code>\`</code> and the <code>\\</code> or
 <code>\end{tabbing}</code> command that ends the line.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="375">\a <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\a <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="376">\a' <r>(acute accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="377">\a` <r>(grave accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="378">\a= <r>(macron accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="388" mergedindex="cp">\a <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\a <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="389" mergedindex="cp">\a' <r>(acute accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="390" mergedindex="cp">\a` <r>(grave accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="391" mergedindex="cp">\a= <r>(macron accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and
 <code>\`</code> do not produce accents as usual (<pxref label="Accents"><xrefnodename>Accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Instead,
 use the commands <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="379">\kill</indexterm>\kill</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="392" mergedindex="cp">\kill</indexterm>\kill</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets tab stops without producing text.  Works just like <code>\\</code> except
 that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
 Any <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
 effect.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="380">\poptabs</indexterm>\poptabs</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="381">\poptabs</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="393" mergedindex="cp">\poptabs</indexterm>\poptabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="394" mergedindex="cp">\poptabs</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="382">\pushtabs</indexterm>\pushtabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="395" mergedindex="cp">\pushtabs</indexterm>\pushtabs</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
 tab stop positions in the middle of a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="383">\tabbingsep</indexterm>\tabbingsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="396" mergedindex="cp">\tabbingsep</indexterm>\tabbingsep</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Distance of the text moved by <code>\'</code> to left of current tab stop.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
@@ -5179,8 +6635,10 @@
 \end{tabbing}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The output looks like this:
-</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output looks like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">function fact(n : integer) : integer;
          begin
                if n > 1 then
@@ -5190,63 +6648,82 @@
          end;
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="242"><r>package</r>, <code>algorithm2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="243"><code>algorithm2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
- <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="244"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="245"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
- <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="246"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="247"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="311"><r>package</r>, <code>algorithm2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="312"><code>algorithm2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="313"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="314"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="315"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="316"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="248"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyvrb</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="249"><code>fancyvrb</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="317"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyvrb</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="318"><code>fancyvrb</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-
-<para>(The above example is just for illustration of the environment.  To
-actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim
-environment (<pxref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></pxref>) would normally suffice.  For
-pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including
-<code>algorithm2e</code>, <code>fancyvrb</code>, <code>listings</code>, and
-<code>minted</code>.)
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This example is just for illustration of the environment.  To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(<pxref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></pxref>) would normally be best.  For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including <code>algorithm2e</code>,
+<code>fancyvrb</code>, <code>listings</code>, and <code>minted</code>.
 </para>
         
 </section>
 <node name="table" spaces=" "><nodename>table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabular</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabbing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>table</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="384"><r>environment</r>, <code>table</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="385"><code>table</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="397" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>table</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="398" mergedindex="cp"><code>table</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="250">tables, creating</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="251">creating tables</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="319">tables, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="320">creating tables</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{table}[<var>placement</var>]
-  table body
-\caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
-\label{<var>label}</var>
+  <var>table body</var>
+  \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}  % optional
+  \label{<var>label}</var>              % also optional
 \end{table}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>A class of floats (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Because they cannot be split across
-pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
-are &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, such as the top of a following
-page.
+<para>A class of floats (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).  They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
 </para>
+<para>This example <code>table</code> environment contains a <code>tabular</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{table}
+  \centering\small
+  \begin{tabular}{ll}
+    \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+      &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}}  \\ \hline
+    Bach            &Cello Suite Number 1  \\
+    Beethoven       &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+    Brahms          &Cello Sonata Number 1
+  \end{tabular}
+  \caption{Top cello pieces}
+  \label{tab:cello}
+\end{table}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but you can put many different kinds of content in a <code>table</code>,
+including text, &latex; commands, etc.
+</para>
 <para>For the possible values of <var>placement</var> and their effect on the 
 float placement algorithm, see <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
-<para>The table body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>
-and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
+<para>The table body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
 </para>
 <para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross
 references</xrefnodename></pxref>).  
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="386">\caption</indexterm></findex>
-The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
-table.  By default it is numbered.  If <var>lottitle</var> is present, it is
-used in the list of tables instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Tables-of-contents"><xrefnodename>Tables of
-contents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="399" mergedindex="cp">\caption</indexterm></findex>
+The <code>\caption</code> command is also optional.  It specifies caption text
+for the table.  By default it is numbered.  If its optional
+<var>lottitle</var> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <para>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
 unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -5269,17 +6746,17 @@
 <node name="tabular" spaces=" "><nodename>tabular</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">thebibliography</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabular</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="387"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabular</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="388"><code>tabular</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="400" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabular</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="401" mergedindex="cp"><code>tabular</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="252">lines in tables</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="253">lining text up in tables</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="321">lines in tables</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="322">lining text up in tables</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
-column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+  <var>column 1 entry</var>  &<var>column 2 entry</var>  ...  &<var>column n entry</var> \\
   ...
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
@@ -5289,14 +6766,14 @@
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular*}{<var>width</var>}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
-column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+  <var>column 1 entry</var>  &<var>column 2 entry</var>  ...  &<var>column n entry</var> \\
   ...
 \end{tabular*}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
-horizontal rows.  Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
-in columns.  This illustrates many of the features.
+<para>Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns.  This
+illustrates many of the features.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{l|l}
@@ -5307,28 +6784,23 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
-between them, is specified in <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s argument <code>{l|l}</code>.
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="389">&</indexterm></findex>
-Columns are separated with an ampersand <code>&</code>.  A horizontal rule
-between two rows is created with <code>\hline</code>.
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="390">\\ <r>for <code>tabular</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-The end of each row is marked with a double backslash <code>\\</code>.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them.  This is specified in <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s argument
+<code>{l|l}</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="402" mergedindex="cp">&</indexterm></findex>
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, <code>&</code>.  The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>.  Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with <code>\hline</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="403" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>tabular</code></r></indexterm></findex>
 This <code>\\</code> is optional after the last row unless an <code>\hline</code>
 command follows, to put a rule below the table.
 </para>
 <para>The required and optional arguments to <code>tabular</code> consist of:
 </para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">width</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required for <code>tabular*</code>, not allowed for <code>tabular</code>. Specifies
-the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment.  The space between columns
-should be rubber, as with <code>&arobase;{\extracolsep{\fill}}</code>, to allow
-the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
-are likely to get the <code>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-...</code> warning.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">pos</itemformat></item>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">pos</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional.  Specifies the table&textrsquo;s vertical position.  The default is to
 align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
 surrounding text.  There are two other possible alignments: <code>t</code>
@@ -5358,25 +6830,28 @@
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">&arobase;{<var>text or space</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>This inserts <var>text or space</var> at this location in every row.  The
-<var>text or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is
-fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Insert <var>text or space</var> at this location in every row.  The <var>text
+or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This specifier is optional: with no &arobase;-expression, &latex;&textrsquo;s
+<para>If between two columns there is no &arobase;-expression then &latex;&textrsquo;s
 <code>book</code>, <code>article</code>, and <code>report</code> classes will put on
-either side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which
-by default is <samp>6pt</samp>.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
-separated by 12pt (so <code>\tabcolsep</code> is misleadingly-named since it
-is not the separation between tabular columns).  By implication, a
-space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final
-column, unless you put a <code>&arobase;{...}</code> or <code>|</code> there.
+either side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which by
+default is 6<dmn>pt</dmn>.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12<dmn>pt</dmn> (so <code>\tabcolsep</code> is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).  In
+addition, a space of 6<dmn>pt</dmn> also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a <code>&arobase;{...}</code> or <code>|</code>
+there.
 </para>
-<para>If you override the default and use an &arobase;-expression then you must
-insert any desired space yourself, as in <code>&arobase;{\hspace{1em}}</code>.
+<para>If you override the default and use an &arobase;-expression then &latex; does
+not insert <code>\tabcolsep</code> so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in <code>&arobase;{\hspace{1em}}</code>.
 </para>
-<para>An empty expression <code>&arobase;{}</code> will eliminate the space, including
-the space at the start or end, as in the example below where the tabular
-lines need to lie on the left margin.
+<para>An empty expression <code>&arobase;{}</code> will eliminate the space.  In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the the space before the
+first column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{flushleft}
@@ -5386,8 +6861,8 @@
 \end{flushleft}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns, arranged
-so the numbers in the table are aligned on that decimal point.
+<para>The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" "> 
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{r&arobase;{$.$}l}
@@ -5396,23 +6871,21 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="391">\extracolsep</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="404" mergedindex="cp">\extracolsep</indexterm></findex>
 <para>An <code>\extracolsep{<var>wd</var>}</code> command in an &arobase;-expression causes an
 extra space of width <var>wd</var> to appear to the left of all subsequent
-columns, until countermanded by another <code>\extracolsep</code> command.
-Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by
-an &arobase;-expression.  An <code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an
+columns, until countermanded by another <code>\extracolsep</code>.  Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+&arobase;-expression.  An <code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an
 &arobase;-expression in the <code>cols</code> argument.  Below, &latex; inserts the
 right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
 wide.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
-  \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l&arobase;{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
-    Seven times down, eight times up 
-    &such is life!
-  \end{tabular*}
-\end{center}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular*}{4in}{l&arobase;{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+  Seven times down, eight times up \ldots 
+  &such is life!
+\end{tabular*}
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
@@ -5421,48 +6894,63 @@
 <!-- c xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages... -->
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p{<var>wd</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <var>wd</var>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <var>wd</var>, as if
+it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}{...}</code> command.
 </para>
-<para>Note that a line break double backslash <code>\\</code> may not appear in the
-item, except inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>,
-or <code>tabular</code>, or inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>, or in the scope
-of a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
+<para>A line break double backslash <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or
+<code>tabular</code>, or inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>, or in the scope of
+a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
 declaration (when used in a <code>p</code>-column element these declarations
 must appear inside braces, as with <code>{\centering .. \\
 ..}</code>). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as
-ending the row.
+ending the row.  Instead, to get a line break in there use
+<code>\newline</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">*{<var>num</var>}{<var>cols</var>}</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Equivalent to <var>num</var> copies of <var>cols</var>, where <var>num</var> is a
-positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers.  Thus
-<code>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</code> is equivalent to
-<code>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</code>.  Note that <var>cols</var> may
-contain another <code>*</code>-expression.
+positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers.  Thus the
+specifier <code>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</code> is equivalent to
+the specifier <code>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</code>.  Note that
+<var>cols</var> may contain another <code>*</code>-expression.
 </para> 
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">width</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required for <code>tabular*</code>, not allowed for <code>tabular</code>. Specifies
+the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment.  The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with <code>&arobase;{\extracolsep{\fill}}</code>, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the <code>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...</code> warning.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 <para>Parameters that control formatting:
 <!-- c xx defaults, own node (xref from array)? -->
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="392">\arrayrulewidth</indexterm>\arrayrulewidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <code>|</code>,
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="405" mergedindex="cp">\arrayrulewidth</indexterm>\arrayrulewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-arrayrulewidth">tabular arrayrulewidth</anchor>
+<para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <code>|</code>,
 <code>\hline</code>, and <code>\vline</code> in the <code>tabular</code> and <code>array</code>
 environments.  The default is <samp>.4pt</samp>. Change it as in
 <code>\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="393">\arraystretch</indexterm>\arraystretch</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <code>tabular</code> and
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="406" mergedindex="cp">\arraystretch</indexterm>\arraystretch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-arraystrech">tabular arraystrech</anchor>
+<para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <code>tabular</code> and
 <code>array</code> environments is multiplied.  The default is <samp>1</samp>, for
 no scaling.  Change it as <code>\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="394">\doublerulesep</indexterm>\doublerulesep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="407" mergedindex="cp">\doublerulesep</indexterm>\doublerulesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-doublerulesep">tabular doublerulesep</anchor>
+<para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
 <code>||</code> specifier.  The default is <samp>2pt</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="395">\tabcolsep</indexterm>\tabcolsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="408" mergedindex="cp">\tabcolsep</indexterm>\tabcolsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-tabcolsep">tabular tabcolsep</anchor>
+<para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
 <samp>6pt</samp>.  Change it with <code>\setlength</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
@@ -5482,7 +6970,7 @@
 <node name="_005cmulticolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\multicolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vline</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multicolumn</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="396">\multicolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="409" mergedindex="cp">\multicolumn</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5502,8 +6990,9 @@
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{lccl} 
-  \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one 
-  978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\        % row two 
+  \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
+  \hline  
+  978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\
     ...
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
@@ -5532,6 +7021,7 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
 the <code>\multicolumn</code> has the <var>cols</var> specifier <samp>r</samp> with no
 initial vertical bar.  Between entry one and entry two there will be a
@@ -5569,6 +7059,7 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>Note that although the <code>tabular</code> specification by default puts a
 vertical rule between the first and second columns, because there is no
 vertical bar in the <var>cols</var> of either of the first row&textrsquo;s
@@ -5579,31 +7070,31 @@
 <node name="_005cvline" spaces=" "><nodename>\vline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multicolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vline</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="397">\vline</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="410" mergedindex="cp">\vline</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Draw a vertical line in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment
 extending the full height and depth of an entry&textrsquo;s row.  Can also be
 used in an &arobase;-expression, although its synonym vertical
 bar <code>|</code> is more common.  This command is rarely used in the
 body of a table; typically a table&textrsquo;s vertical lines are specified in
 <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s <var>cols</var> argument and overridden as needed with
-<code>\multicolumn</code>.
+<code>\multicolumn</code> (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This example illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first line&textrsquo;s second
+<para>The example below illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first row&textrsquo;s second
 entry the <code>\hfill</code> moves the <code>\vline</code> to the left edge of the
 cell.  But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
-columns, so in that row between the first and second columns there are
-two vertical rules, with the one from the <code>{c|cc}</code> specifier
-coming before the one produced by the <code>\vline\hfill</code>.  In contrast,
-the first line&textrsquo;s third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar
-between two columns.  In the second line, the <code>ghi</code> is the widest
-entry in its column so in the <code>\vline\hfill</code> the <code>\hfill</code> has
-no effect and the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next
-to the <code>g</code>, with no whitespace.
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the <code>{c|cc}</code> specifier coming before the
+one produced by the <code>\vline\hfill</code>.  In contrast, the first row&textrsquo;s
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns.  In the second row, the <code>ghi</code> is the widest entry in its
+column so in the <code>\vline\hfill</code> the <code>\hfill</code> has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+<code>g</code>, with no whitespace.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{c|cc}
-  x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\  
-  abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi 
+  x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1  
+  abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi                       % row 2  
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -5612,7 +7103,7 @@
 <node name="_005ccline" spaces=" "><nodename>\cline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cline</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="398">\cline</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="411" mergedindex="cp">\cline</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5620,10 +7111,10 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\cline{<var>i</var>-<var>j</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Draw a horizontal rule in an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment
-beginning in column <var>i</var> and ending in column <var>j</var>. The
-dash <code>-</code> must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a
-single column use the number twice.
+<para>In an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column <var>i</var> and ending in column <var>j</var>. The
+dash, <code>-</code>, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with <code>\cline{2-2}</code>.
 </para>
 <para>This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
 rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
@@ -5642,9 +7133,9 @@
 <node name="_005chline" spaces=" "><nodename>\hline</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\cline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hline</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="399">\hline</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="412" mergedindex="cp">\hline</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <code>tabular</code> or
+<para>Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <code>tabular</code> or
 <code>array</code> environment.  It&textrsquo;s most commonly used to draw a line at the
 top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
 </para>
@@ -5667,56 +7158,71 @@
 <node name="thebibliography" spaces=" "><nodename>thebibliography</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">theorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabular</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>thebibliography</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="400"><r>environment</r>, <code>thebibliography</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="401"><code>thebibliography</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="413" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>thebibliography</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="414" mergedindex="cp"><code>thebibliography</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="254">bibliography, creating (manually)</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="323">bibliography, creating (manually)</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{thebibliography}{<var>widest-label</var>}
-\bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key}</var>
-...
+  \bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key}</var>
+  ...
 \end{thebibliography}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>thebibliography</code> environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list.
+<para>Produce a bibliography or reference list.  There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists.  This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand.  <xref label="Using-BibTeX"><xrefnodename>Using BibTeX</xrefnodename></xref>
+for a more sophisticated approach.
 </para>
-<para>In the <code>article</code> class, this reference list is labelled
-<samp>References</samp> and the label is stored in macro <code>\refname</code>; in
-the <code>report</code> class, it is labelled <samp>Bibliography</samp> and the
-label is stored in macro <code>\bibname</code>.
+<para>This shows the environment with two entries.
 </para>
-<para>You can change the label by redefining the command <code>\refname</code> or
-<code>\bibname</code>, whichever is applicable depending on the class:
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+  ...
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+\bibitem{latexdps} 
+  Leslie Lamport. 
+  \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This styles the first reference as <samp>[1] Leslie ...</samp>, and so that
+<code>\cite{latexdps}</code> produces the matching <samp>... based on [1]</samp>.
+The second <code>\cite</code> produces <samp>[1, 2]</samp>.  You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
 </para>
-<itemize commandarg="bullet" endspaces=" ">
-<listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="402">\bibname</indexterm></findex>
-<para>For standard classes whose top level sectioning is <code>\chapter</code>
-(such as <file>book</file> and <file>report</file>), the label is in the macro
-<code>\bibname</code>;
+<para>The mandatory argument <var>widest-label</var> is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the <code>\bibitem</code>
+commands.  The tradition is to use <code>9</code> for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, <code>99</code> for ones with less than 100, etc.
 </para>
-</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="403">\refname</indexterm></findex>
-<para>For standard classes whose the top level sectioning is <code>\section</code>
-(such as <file>article</file>), the label is in macro <code>\refname</code>.
-</para></listitem></itemize>
+<para>The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as <samp>Bibliography</samp>.
+To change it there are two cases.  In the <file>book</file> and <file>report</file>
+classes, where the top level sectioning is <code>\chapter</code> and the
+default title is <samp>Bibliography</samp>, that title is in the macro
+<code>\bibname</code>.  For <file>article</file>, where the class&textrsquo;s top level
+sectioning is <code>\section</code> and the default is <samp>References</samp>, the
+title is in macro <code>\refname</code>.  Change it by redefining the command,
+as with <code>\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}</code> after
+<code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="324"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="325"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="255"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="256"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
-
-<para>Typically it is neither necessary nor desirable to directly redefine
-<code>\refname</code> or <code>\bibname</code>; language support packages like
-<file>babel</file> do this.
+<para>Language support packages such as <file>babel</file> will automatically
+redefine <code>\refname</code> or <code>\bibname</code> to fit the selected
+language.
 </para>
-<para>The mandatory <var>widest-label</var> argument is text that, when typeset,
-is as wide as the widest item label produced by the <code>\bibitem</code>
-commands.  It is typically given as <code>9</code> for bibliographies with
-less than 10 references, <code>99</code> for ones with less than 100, etc.
-</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\bibitem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Specify a bibliography item.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\cite</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Refer to a bibliography item.
@@ -5728,56 +7234,141 @@
 <node name="_005cbibitem" spaces=" "><nodename>\bibitem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cite</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bibitem</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="404">\bibitem</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="415" mergedindex="cp">\bibitem</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibitem{<var>cite_key</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <var>label</var>.
-If the <var>label</var> argument is missing, a number is automatically
-generated using the <code>enumi</code> counter.  The <var>cite_key</var> is a
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="257">citation key</indexterm></cindex>
-<dfn>citation key</dfn> consisting in any sequence of
-letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
+<para>Generate an entry labeled by <var>label</var>.  The default is for &latex; to
+generates a number using the <code>enumi</code> counter.  The <dfn>citation key</dfn> 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="326">citation key</indexterm></cindex>
+<var>cite_key</var> is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
 </para>
-<para>This command writes an entry to the <file>.aux</file> file containing the
-item&textrsquo;s <var>cite_key</var> and <var>label</var>.  When the <file>.aux</file> file is
-read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the item&textrsquo;s <var>label</var> is
-associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing references to <var>cite_key</var>
-with a <code>\cite</code> command (<pxref label="_005ccite"><xrefnodename>\cite</xrefnodename></pxref>) to produce the associated
-<var>label</var>.
+<para><xref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></xref> for an example.
 </para>
+<para>The optional <var>label</var> changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string.  With this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps} 
+  Leslie Lamport. 
+  \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the first entry will be styled as <samp>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</samp>  (The
+amount of horizontal space that &latex; leaves for the label depends on
+the <var>widest-label</var> argument of the <code>thebibliography</code>
+environment; see <ref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></ref>.)  Similarly, <code>... based on
+\cite{latexdps}</code> will produce <samp>... based on [Lamport 1994]</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If you mix <code>\bibitem</code> entries having a <var>label</var> with those that
+do not then &latex; will number the unlabelled ones sequentially.  In
+the example above the <code>texbook</code> entry will appear as <samp>[1]
+Donald ...</samp>, despite that it is the second entry.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the same <var>cite_key</var> twice then you get <samp>LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Under the hood, &latex; remembers the <var>cite_key</var> and <var>label</var>
+information because <code>\bibitem</code> writes it to the auxiliary file
+<file><var>filename</var>.aux</file>.  For instance, the above example causes
+<code>\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}</code> and
+<code>\bibcite{texbook}{1}</code> to appear in that file.  The <file>.aux</file>
+file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command and then the
+information is available for <code>\cite</code> commands.  This explains why
+you need to run &latex; twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+</para>
+<para>Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a <code>\bibitem</code> or
+change its <var>cite_key</var> you may get <samp>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right</samp>.  Fix it by
+recompiling.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
 <node name="_005ccite" spaces=" "><nodename>\cite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\nocite</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bibitem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cite</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="405">\cite</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="416" mergedindex="cp">\cite</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cite{<var>keys</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\cite[<var>subcite</var>]{<var>keys</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <var>keys</var> argument is a list of one or more citation keys
-(<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>), separated by commas.  This command generates an
-in-text citation to the references associated with <var>keys</var> by entries
-in the <file>.aux</file> file.
+<para>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+<var>keys</var>.  The mandatory <var>keys</var> is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The text of the optional <var>subcite</var> argument appears after the
-citation.  For example, <code>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</code> might produce
-<samp>[Knuth, p. 314]</samp>.
+<para>This 
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+  ...
+\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem{texbook} 
+  Donald Ervin Knuth. 
+  \textit{The \TeX book}. 
+  Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces the output <samp>... source is [1]</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>subcite</var> is appended to the citation.  For
+example, <code>See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}</code> might produce
+<samp>See 14.3 in [1, p. 314]</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>keys</var> is not in your bibliography information then you get
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</samp>, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes.  If you have mistyped something, as in
+<code>\cite{texbok}</code> then you need to correct the spelling.  On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the <file>.aux</file> file (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>) then
+the fix may be to just run &latex; again.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to what appears in the output, <code>\cite</code> writes
+information to the auxiliary file <file><var>filename</var>.aux</file>.  For
+instance, <code>\cite{latexdps}</code> writes <samp>\citation{latexdps}</samp>
+to that file.  This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+<ref label="_005cnocite"><xrefnodename>\nocite</xrefnodename></ref> also.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
 <node name="_005cnocite" spaces=" "><nodename>\nocite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Using BibTeX</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\nocite</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="406">\nocite</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="417" mergedindex="cp">\nocite</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5785,94 +7376,147 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\nocite{<var>keys</var>}</code>
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <var>keys</var>,
-which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the <file>.aux</file> file.
+<para>Produces no output but writes <var>keys</var> to the auxiliary file
+<file><var>doc-filename</var>.aux</file>.
 </para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <var>keys</var> is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This information is used by
+Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (<pxref label="_005ccite"><xrefnodename>\cite</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
 <node name="Using-BibTeX" spaces=" "><nodename>Using BibTeX</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\nocite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Using Bib&tex;</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="258">using Bib&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="259">bib&tex;, using</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="260">bibliography, creating (automatically)</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="407">\bibliographystyle</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="408">\bibliography</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="327">using Bib&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="328">bib&tex;, using</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="329">bibliography, creating (automatically)</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="418" mergedindex="cp">\bibliographystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="419" mergedindex="cp">\bibliography</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly
-recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
-titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don&textrsquo;t use the
-<code>thebibliography</code> environment (<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>). Instead,
-you include the lines
+<para>As described in <code>thebibliography</code> (<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+Bib&tex; program.  This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
 </para>
+<para>With Bib&tex;, you don&textrsquo;t use <code>thebibliography</code>
+(<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>). Instead, include these lines.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\bibliographystyle{<var>bibstyle</var>}
-\bibliography{<var>bibfile1</var>,<var>bibfile2</var>}
+\bibliography{<var>bibfile1</var>, <var>bibfile2</var>, ...}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\bibliographystyle</code> command does not produce any output of
-its own.  Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
-be produced: <var>bibstyle</var> refers to a file
-<var>bibstyle</var><file>.bst</file>, which defines how your citations will look.
-The standard <var>bibstyle</var> names distributed with Bib&tex; are:
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <var>bibstyle</var> refers to a file <file><var>bibstyle</var>.bst</file>, which
+defines how your citations will look.  The standard <var>bibstyle</var>&textrsquo;s
+distributed with Bib&tex; are:
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alpha</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
-publication.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Labels are integers.
+Sort the  bibliographic items alphabetically.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">unsrt</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">abbrv</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<para>In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to
-the demands of various publications.  See
+<noindent></noindent> <para>Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications.  See CTAN&textrsquo;s listing
 <url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
 <para>The <code>\bibliography</code> command is what actually produces the
-bibliography.  The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to files
-named <file><var>bibfile1</var>.bib</file>, <file><var>bibfile2</var>.bib</file>, &dots;,
-which should contain your database in
-Bib&tex; format.  Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and
-<code>\nocite</code> will be listed in the bibliography.
+bibliography.  Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named <file><var>bibfile1</var>.bib</file>, <file><var>bibfile2</var>.bib</file>,
+&dots; These contain your database in Bib&tex; format.  This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&arobase;book{texbook,
+  title     = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+  author    = {D.E. Knuth},
+  isbn      = {0201134489},
+  series    = {Computers \& typesetting},
+  year      = {1983},
+  publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+}
+&arobase;book{sexbook,
+    author    = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+    title     = {Human Sexual Response},
+    year      = {1966},
+    publisher = {Bantam Books}
+}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Only the bibliographic entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and
+<code>\nocite</code> will be listed in the document&textrsquo;s bibliography.  Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="theorem" spaces=" "><nodename>theorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">titlepage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>theorem</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="409"><r>environment</r>, <code>theorem</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="410"><code>theorem</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="420" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>theorem</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="421" mergedindex="cp"><code>theorem</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="261">theorems, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="330">theorems, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{theorem}
-<var>theorem-text</var>
+  <var>theorem body</var>
 \end{theorem}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>theorem</code> environment produces &textldquo;Theorem <var>n</var>&textrdquo; in
-boldface followed by <var>theorem-text</var>, where the numbering
-possibilities for <var>n</var> are described under <code>\newtheorem</code>
-(<pxref label="_005cnewtheorem"><xrefnodename>\newtheorem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Produces <samp>Theorem <var>n</var></samp> in boldface followed by <var>theorem
+body</var> in italics.  The numbering possibilities for <var>n</var> are described under
+<code>\newtheorem</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewtheorem"><xrefnodename>\newtheorem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma}      % in preamble
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}    
+  ...
+\begin{lem}                  % in  document body
+  text of lemma
+\end{lem}
 
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin{thm}[Gauss]   %  put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+  text of theorem
+\end{thm}
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="331"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="332"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="333"><r>package</r>, <code>amsthm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="334"><code>amsthm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Most new documents use the packages <code>amsthm</code> and <code>amsmath</code>
+from the American Mathematical Society.  Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="titlepage" spaces=" "><nodename>titlepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verbatim</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">theorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>titlepage</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="411"><r>environment</r>, <code>titlepage</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="412"><code>titlepage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="422" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>titlepage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="423" mergedindex="cp"><code>titlepage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="262">making a title page</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="263">title pages, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="335">making a title page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="336">title pages, creating</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5882,15 +7526,12 @@
 \end{titlepage}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading.  The
-following page will be numbered page one.
+<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
 </para>
-<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
-environment you can use <code>\maketitle</code> (<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
 </para>
-<para>Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing,
-is left to the author.
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{titlepage}
 \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
@@ -5914,19 +7555,22 @@
 \end{titlepage}
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
+environment, use <code>\maketitle</code> (<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="verbatim" spaces=" "><nodename>verbatim</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verse</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">titlepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verbatim</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="413"><r>environment</r>, <code>verbatim</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="414"><code>verbatim</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="424" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>verbatim</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="425" mergedindex="cp"><code>verbatim</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="264">verbatim text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="265">simulating typed text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="266">typed text, simulating</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="267">code, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="268">computer programs, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="337">verbatim text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="338">simulating typed text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="339">typed text, simulating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="340">code, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="341">computer programs, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -5936,82 +7580,191 @@
 \end{verbatim}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>verbatim</code> environment is a paragraph-making environment in
-which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the
-<code>\</code> character produces a printed <samp>\</samp>.  It turns &latex;
-into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same
-effect that they would on a typewriter.
-</para>
-<para>The <code>verbatim</code> environment uses a monospaced typewriter-like font
+<para>A paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces as output
+exactly what you type as input.  For instance inside <var>literal-text</var>
+the backslash <code>\</code> character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed <samp>\</samp>, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally.  The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
 (<code>\tt</code>).
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{verbatim}
+Symbol swearing: %&$#?&eosexcl;.
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The only restriction on <code>literal-text</code> is that it cannot include
+the string <code>\end{verbatim}</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="342"><r>package</r>, <code>cprotect</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="343"><code>cprotect</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a <code>\section</code>.  This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="344"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="345"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="346"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="347"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code.  There are
+packages that are an improvement the <code>verbatim</code> environment.  For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files.  Such packages include <code>listings</code>,
+and <code>minted</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="348"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyvrb</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="349"><code>fancyvrb</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="350"><r>package</r>, <code>verbatimbox</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="351"><code>verbatimbox</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+<code>fancyvrb</code>.  Another is <code>verbatimbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\verb</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
+
 <node name="_005cverb" spaces=" "><nodename>\verb</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">verbatim</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\verb</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="415">\verb</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="269">verbatim text, inline</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="426" mergedindex="cp">\verb</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="352">verbatim text, inline</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\verb<var>char</var><var>literal-text</var><var>char</var>
-\verb*<var>char</var><var>literal-text</var><var>char</var>
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\verb <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
+\verb* <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\verb</code> command typesets <var>literal-text</var> as it is input,
-including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter
-(<code>\tt</code>) font.  No spaces are allowed between <code>\verb</code> or
-<code>\verb*</code> and the delimiter <var>char</var>, which begins and ends the
-verbatim text.  The delimiter must not appear in <var>literal-text</var>.
+<para>Typeset <var>literal-text</var> as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) font.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="270">visible space</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>*</code>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a
-&textldquo;visible space&textrdquo; character.
+<para>This example shows two different invocations of <code>\verb</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first <code>\verb</code> has its <var>literal-text</var> surrounded with
+exclamation point, <code>!</code>.  The second instead uses plus, <code>+</code>,
+because the exclamation point is part of <code>literal-text</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The single-character delimiter <var>char</var> surrounds
+<var>literal-text</var> &textmdash; it must be the same character before and
+after.  No spaces come between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and
+<var>char</var>, or between <var>char</var> and <var>literal-text</var>, or between
+<var>literal-text</var> and the second occurrence of <var>char</var> (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other).  The
+delimiter must not appear in <var>literal-text</var>. The <var>literal-text</var>
+cannot include a line break.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="353">visible space</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>*</code>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
 <tex endspaces=" ">
 </tex>
 </para>
+<para>The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+</pre></example>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="354"><r>package</r>, <code>url</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="355"><code>url</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package <code>url</code>
+provides an option that is better than the <code>\verb</code> command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="356"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="357"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="358"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="359"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+<code>\verb</code>.  One is <file>listings</file>, another is <file>minted</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="360"><r>package</r>, <code>cprotect</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="361"><code>cprotect</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You cannot use <code>\verb</code> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a <code>\section</code>.  It is not a question of <code>\verb</code>
+being fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="verse" spaces=" "><nodename>verse</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">verbatim</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verse</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="416"><r>environment</r>, <code>verse</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="417"><code>verse</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="427" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>verse</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="428" mergedindex="cp"><code>verse</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="271">poetry, an environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="362">poetry, an environment for</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{verse}
-<var>line1</var> \\
-<var>line2</var> \\
-...
+  <var>line1</var> \\
+  <var>line2</var> \\
+  ...
 \end{verse}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>verse</code> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
+<para>An environment for poetry.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="418">\\ <r>for <code>verse</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not
-indented, and the text is not justified.  Separate the lines of each
-stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more blank lines to separate the
-stanzas.
+<para>Here are two lines from Shakespeare&textrsquo;s Romeo and Juliet.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+</pre></example>
 
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="429" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>verse</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Separate the lines of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{verse}
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+  \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries,                  \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring,                             \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made,            \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing,  \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end{verse}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Line-breaking" spaces=" "><nodename>Line breaking</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page breaking</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Environments</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Line breaking</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="272">line breaking</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="273">breaking lines</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="363">line breaking</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="364">breaking lines</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to
 translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces.  To
@@ -6021,14 +7774,19 @@
 <para>&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
 you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
 </para>
+<para>A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks).  This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it.  Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                         ">\\</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new line.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\obeycr & \restorecr</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make each input line start a new output line.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                   ">\newline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Break the line
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\- (hyphenation)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert explicit hyphenation.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\discretionary</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert explicit hyphenation with control of hyphen character.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">\fussy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Be fussy about line breaking.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                    ">\sloppy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Be sloppy about line breaking.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\discretionary</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Explicit control of the hyphen character.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\fussy & \sloppy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Be more or less particular with line breaking.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\hyphenation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -6037,77 +7795,157 @@
 <node name="_005c_005c" spaces=" "><nodename>\\</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\obeycr & \restorecr</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\\</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="419">\\ <r>force line break</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="274">new line, starting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="275">line break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="430" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>force line break</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="365">new line, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="366">line break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\\[<var>morespace</var>]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\\
+\\[<var>morespace</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>or 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of: 
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\\*[<var>morespace</var>]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\\*
+\\*[<var>morespace</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Start a new line.  The optional argument <var>morespace</var> specifies extra
-vertical space to be insert before the next line.  This can be a
-negative length.  The text before the break is set at its normal length,
-that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.
+<para>End the current line.  The optional argument <var>morespace</var> specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line.  This is a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) and can be negative.  The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width.  This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in &latex;.  In
-particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line.  This
-command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in
-a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment.
+<para>The starred form, <code>\\*</code>, tells &latex; not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <code>\nobreak</code>.
 </para>
-<para>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <code>p{...}</code> column
-in a <code>tabular</code> environment) the <code>\newline</code> command is a synonym for
-<code>\\</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-</para>
-<para>In addition to starting a new line, the starred form <code>\\*</code> tells
-&latex; not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
-<code>\nobreak</code>.
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
        a tale of woe}
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;.  In
+particular, don&textrsquo;t start new paragraphs with <code>\\</code>.  Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs.  And don&textrsquo;t put in a sequence of
+<code>\\</code>&textrsquo;s to make vertical space. Instead use
+<code>\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
+<code>\leavevmode\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
+<code>\vspace*{<var>length</var>}</code> if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (<pxref label="_005cvspace"><xrefnodename>\vspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment or in an
+equation environment.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is a synonym for <code>\newline</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></pxref>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the <code>p{...}</code> column in a <code>tabular</code>
+environment; <pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/82666 -->
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a <code>center</code> environment, a
+<code>flushleft</code> environment, and a <code>tabular</code> are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for <code>\newline</code>.  It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+</para>
+<para>You get <samp>LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end</samp> if you use
+<code>\\</code> to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have <code>\begin{document}\\</code> or, more likely,
+something like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+  \\
+  In that vertical space put your mark.
+  \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+<code>\vspace{\baselineskip}</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" spaces=" "><nodename>\obeycr & \restorecr</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\\</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="420">\obeycr</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="421">\restorecr</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="276">new line, output as input</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="431" mergedindex="cp">\obeycr</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="432" mergedindex="cp">\restorecr</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="367">new line, output as input</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\obeycr</code> command makes a return in the input file
-(<samp>^^M</samp>, internally) the same as <code>\\</code> (followed by
-<code>\relax</code>).  So each new line in the input will also be a new line
-in the output.
+<para>The <code>\obeycr</code> command makes a return in the input file (<samp>^^M</samp>,
+internally) the same as <code>\\</code>, followed by <code>\relax</code>.  So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output.  The
+<code>\restorecr</code> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
 </para>
-<para><code>\restorecr</code> restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+<para>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+<xref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></xref> instead.
 </para>
+<para>With &latex;&textrsquo;s usual defaults, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">aaa
+bbb
 
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+   eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces output like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">  aaa bbb
+  ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+  hhh iii
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The indents are paragraph indents.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewline" spaces=" "><nodename>\newline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\obeycr & \restorecr</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newline</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="422">\newline</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="277">new line, starting (paragraph mode)</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="433" mergedindex="cp">\newline</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="368">new line, starting (paragraph mode)</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>); it
-breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
+<para>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>), the <code>\newline</code> command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <code>p{...}</code>,
-<code>\newline</code> will insert a line break inside of the column, that is,
-it does not break the entire row.  To break the entire row use <code>\\</code>
-or its equivalent <code>\tabularnewline</code>.
+<para>However, the two commands are different inside a <code>tabular</code> or
+<code>array</code> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically <code>p{...}</code>, <code>\newline</code> will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row.  To break the entire row use <code>\\</code> or its
+equivalent <code>\tabularnewline</code>.
 </para>
 <para>This will print <samp>Name:</samp> and <samp>Address:</samp> as two lines in a
 single cell of the table.
@@ -6118,6 +7956,7 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>The <samp>Date:</samp> will be baseline-aligned with <samp>Name:</samp>.
 </para>
 
@@ -6125,311 +7964,582 @@
 <node name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\- (hyphenation)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\discretionary</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="423">\- <r>(hyphenation)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="278">hyphenation, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="434" mergedindex="cp">\- <r>(hyphenation)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="369">hyphenation, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\-</code> command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at
-that point.  &latex; is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds
-most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an
-incorrect one.  The <code>\-</code> command is used for the exceptional
-cases.
+<para>Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point.  When you
+insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex;
+might otherwise have chosen.  This command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>When you insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will only be
-hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
-that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
+<para>&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one.  The
+<code>\-</code> command is for exceptional cases.
 </para>
+<para>For example, &latex; does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen.  Below, the long and hyphenated word means &latex; has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+  Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+               anti-intellectualism
+               % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+               has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+               political and cultural life, nurtured by
+               the false notion that democracy means that
+               `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\-</code> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
+require that it break there.  You can insist on a split with something
+like <code>Hef-\linebreak feron</code>.  Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cdiscretionary" spaces=" "><nodename>\discretionary</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fussy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cdiscretionary" spaces=" "><nodename>\discretionary</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fussy & \sloppy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</sectiontitle>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="279">hyphenation, discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="280">discretionary hyphenation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="370">hyphenation, discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="371">discretionary hyphenation</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\discretionary{<var>pre-break-text</var>}{<var>post-break-text</var>}{<var>no-break-text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\discretionary{<var>pre-break</var>}{<var>post-break</var>}{<var>no-break</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<!-- c xxx TODO, complete this node, see LaTeX-fr -->
+<para>Handle word changes around hyphens.  This command is not often used in
+&latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>If a line break occurs at the point where <code>\discretionary</code> appears
+then &tex; puts <var>pre-break</var> at the end of the current line and puts
+<var>post-break</var> at the start of the next line.  If there is no line
+break here then &tex; puts <var>no-break</var>
+</para>
+<para>In <samp>difficult</samp> the three letters <code>ffi</code> form a ligature.  But
+&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f&textrsquo;s with this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Note that users do not have to do this.  It is typically handled
+automatically by &tex;&textrsquo;s hyphenation algorithm.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cfussy" spaces=" "><nodename>\fussy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sloppy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\discretionary</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fussy</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" spaces=" "><nodename>\fussy & \sloppy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\discretionary</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="424">\fussy</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="435" mergedindex="cp">\fussy</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="436" mergedindex="cp">\sloppy</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="372">line breaks, changing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The declaration <code>\fussy</code> (which is the default) makes &tex;
-picky about line breaking.  This usually avoids too much space between
-words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
+<para>Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line
+breaking.  Declaring <code>\fussy</code> usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.  Conversely,
+<code>\sloppy</code> avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
 </para>
-<para>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command
-(<pxref label="_005csloppy"><xrefnodename>\sloppy</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>The default is <code>\fussy</code>.  Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+<code>\par</code>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph.  So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
 </para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">sloppypar</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Environment version of \sloppy command.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005csloppy" spaces=" "><nodename>\sloppy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fussy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sloppy</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="425">\sloppy</indexterm></findex>
+<node name="sloppypar" spaces=" "><nodename>sloppypar</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">\fussy & \sloppy</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>sloppypar</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<para>The declaration <code>\sloppy</code> makes &tex; less fussy about line
-breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose
-interword spacing.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="437" mergedindex="cp">sloppypar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="373">sloppypar environment</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Lasts until a <code>\fussy</code> command is issued (<pxref label="_005cfussy"><xrefnodename>\fussy</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{sloppypar}
+  ... paragraphs ...
+\end{sloppypar}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typeset the paragraphs with <code>\sloppy</code> in effect (<pxref label="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy"><xrefnodename>\fussy &
+\sloppy</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+<samp>Overfull box</samp> or <samp>Underfull box</samp> errors.
 </para>
+<para>The example is simple.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{sloppypar}
+  Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+  book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+  same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+  little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+  whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+  as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+  silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+  needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+  or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+  there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end{sloppypar}
+</pre></example>
 
+
+</subsection>
 </section>
-<node name="_005chyphenation" spaces=" "><nodename>\hyphenation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\sloppy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005chyphenation" spaces=" "><nodename>\hyphenation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fussy & \sloppy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hyphenation</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="426">\hyphenation</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="281">hyphenation, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="438" mergedindex="cp">\hyphenation</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="374">hyphenation, defining</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation{<var>word-one</var> <var>word-two</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation{<var>word1</var> ...}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\hyphenation</code> command declares allowed hyphenation points
-with a <code>-</code> character in the given words.  The words are separated
-by spaces.  &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no
-inflections are tried.  Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code> commands
-accumulate.  Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns
-misses the hyphenations in these words):
+<para>Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.  The
+words in that list are separated by spaces.  Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, <code>-</code>.
 </para>
+<para>Here is an example:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>Use lowercase letters.  &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly.  Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code> commands accumulate.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\linebreak & \nolinebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="427">\linebreak</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="428">\nolinebreak</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="282">line breaks, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="283">line breaks, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="439" mergedindex="cp">\linebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="440" mergedindex="cp">\nolinebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="375">line breaks, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="376">line breaks, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\linebreak[<var>priority</var>]
-\nolinebreak[<var>priority</var>]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\linebreak
+\linebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>By default, the <code>\linebreak</code> (<code>\nolinebreak</code>) command forces
-(prevents) a line break at the current position.  For
-<code>\linebreak</code>, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it
-extends to the right margin as usual.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
 </para>
-<para>With the optional argument <var>priority</var>, you can convert the command
-from a demand to a request.  The <var>priority</var> must be a number from
-0 to 4.  The higher the number, the more insistent the request.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Encourage or discourage a line break.  The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction.  The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break.  But for instance, <code>\nolinebreak[1]</code> is a
+suggestion that another place may be better.  The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>When you issue <code>\linebreak</code>, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin.  <xref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></xref>
+and <ref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></ref> to have the spaces not stretched out.
+</para>
+
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Page-breaking" spaces=" "><nodename>Page breaking</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page breaking</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="284">page breaking</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="285">breaking pages</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="377">page breaking</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="378">breaking pages</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
-accumulated to fill up a page.  Usually this happens automatically,
-but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
+<para>Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb.  But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
 </para>
+<!-- c credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563 -->
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result.  Instead, &latex; typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; &latex; can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where &latex; uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex; does not optimize over the entire document&textrsquo;s set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t look as
+far ahead as the next page break.  So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Layout"><xrefnodename>Layout</xrefnodename></xref> for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\cleardoublepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new right-hand page.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                 ">\clearpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                   ">\newpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\enlargethispage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Enlarge the current page a bit.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page; eject floats.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                        ">\newpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\enlargethispage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Enlarge the current page a bit.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005ccleardoublepage" spaces=" "><nodename>\cleardoublepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\clearpage</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cleardoublepage</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" spaces=" "><nodename>\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newpage</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code> </sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="429">\cleardoublepage</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="286">starting on a right-hand page</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="441" mergedindex="cp">\clearpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="379">flushing floats and starting a page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="380">starting a new page and clearing floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="442" mergedindex="cp">\cleardoublepage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="381">starting on a right-hand page</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command ends the current page and causes all
-the pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.  In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
-next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
-necessary.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\clearpage
+</pre></example>
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005cclearpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\clearpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newpage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cleardoublepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\clearpage</code></sectiontitle>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cleardoublepage
+</pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="430">\clearpage</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="287">flushing floats and starting a page</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="288">starting a new page and clearing floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then &latex; will put in extra pages containing only floats.  In
+two-sided printing, <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page.  The <code>\clearpage</code> command is robust while
+<code>\cleardoublepage</code> is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: https://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-reallyblank.html -->
+<para>The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers.  To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+  \clearpage
+  {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\clearpage</code> command ends the current page and causes all the
-pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
-input to be printed.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If you want &latex;&textrsquo;s standard <code>\chapter</code> command to do this then
+add the line <code>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</code>.
 </para>
+<para>The command <code>\newpage</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewpage"><xrefnodename>\newpage</xrefnodename></pxref>) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats.  And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <code>\newpage</code> ends the current column while
+<code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end the current page.
+</para>
 
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cnewpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\newpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\clearpage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cnewpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\newpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newpage</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="431">\newpage</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="289">new page, starting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="290">starting a new page</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="443" mergedindex="cp">\newpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="382">new page, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="383">starting a new page</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\newpage</code> command ends the current page, but does not clear
-floats (<pxref label="_005cclearpage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newpage
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>End the current page.  This command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>While the commands <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(<pxref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></pxref>).  And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+<code>\newpage</code> only ends the current column.
+</para>
+<para>In contrast with <code>\pagebreak</code> (<pxref label="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak"><xrefnodename>\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</xrefnodename></pxref>),
+the <code>\newpage</code> command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested.  This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>makes a new page start after <samp>continent,</samp> and the cut-off line is
+not right justified.  In addition, <code>\newpage</code> does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as <code>\pagebreak</code> does.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cenlargethispage" spaces=" "><nodename>\enlargethispage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newpage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\enlargethispage</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="432">\enlargethispage</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="291">enlarge current page</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="444" mergedindex="cp">\enlargethispage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="384">enlarge current page</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\enlargethispage{size}</code>
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para><code>\enlargethispage*{size}</code>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page.  The required
+argument <var>size</var> must be a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It may be
+positive or negative.  This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g., <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one
-additional line.
+<para>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks.  This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
 </para>
-<para>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as
-much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-<code>\pagebreak</code>.
+<para>This will allow one extra line on the current page.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>The starred form <code>\enlargesthispage*</code> tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit <code>\pagebreak</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="433">\pagebreak</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="434">\nopagebreak</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="292">page break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="293">page break, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="445" mergedindex="cp">\pagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="446" mergedindex="cp">\nopagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="385">page break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="386">page break, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagebreak[<var>priority</var>]
-\nopagebreak[<var>priority</var>]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>By default, the <code>\pagebreak</code> (<code>\nopagebreak</code>) command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position.  With
-<code>\pagebreak</code>, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
-where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
 </para>
-<para>With the optional argument <var>priority</var>, you can convert the
-<code>\pagebreak</code> command from a demand to a request.  The number must
-be a number from 0 to 4.  The higher the number, the more
-insistent the request is.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Encourage or discourage a page break.  The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break.  But for instance <code>\nopagebreak[1]</code> suggests to
+&latex; that another spot might be preferable.  The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request.  Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear.  So this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>does not give a page break at <samp>continent,</samp> but instead at
+<samp>nation,</samp> since that is where &latex; breaks that line.  In
+addition, with <code>\pagebreak</code> the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin.  This can look strange, and if <code>\flushbottom</code> is in effect
+this can cause you to get <samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</samp>.  <xref label="_005cnewpage"><xrefnodename>\newpage</xrefnodename></xref> for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Definitions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="294">footnotes, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="387">footnotes, creating</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+<para>Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">No<accent type="uml">e</accent>l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
 to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
-love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+love.\footnote{%
+  I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>You can place multiple footnotes on a page. If the text becomes too long
-it will flow to the next page.
+<para>You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
 </para>
 <para>You can also produce footnotes by combining the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
 the <code>\footnotetext</code> commands, which is useful in special
 circumstances.
 </para>
 <para>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
-include a bibliographic style with that behavior.
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (<pxref label="Using-BibTeX"><xrefnodename>Using BibTeX</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\footnote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert a footnote.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\footnotemark</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert footnote mark only.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\footnotetext</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert footnote text only.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">Footnotes in section headings</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Chapter or section titles.  
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">Footnotes in a table</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Table footnotes.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">Footnotes in section headings</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Chapter or section titles.  
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">Footnotes of footnotes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Multiple classes of footnotes.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">Multiple reference to footnotes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Referring to a footnote more than once.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">Footnote parameters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Parameters for footnote formatting.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
 <node name="_005cfootnote" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnote</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="435">\footnote</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="447" mergedindex="cp">\footnote</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnote[<var>number</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnote{<var>text</var>}
+\footnote[<var>number</var>]{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Place a numbered footnote <var>text</var> at the bottom of the current page.
+<para>Place a footnote <var>text</var> at the bottom of the current page.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's 
-\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
-reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, 
-``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method 
-of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed 
-at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+  After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, 
+  ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method 
+  of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed 
+  at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The optional argument <var>number</var> allows you to specify the footnote
-number.  If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
-incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.
+<para>The optional argument <var>number</var> allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote.  If you use this then &latex; does not increment the
+<code>footnote</code> counter.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="295">footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="436">\fnsymbol<r>, and footnotes</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="437">\&arobase;fnsymbol</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Change how &latex; shows the footnote counter with something like
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="388">footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="448" mergedindex="cp">\fnsymbol<r>, and footnotes</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="449" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;fnsymbol</indexterm></findex>
+<para>By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers.  Change
+this with something like
 <code>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}</code>, which
 uses a sequence of symbols (<pxref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
 \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></pxref>).  To make this change global put that in the preamble.  If
 you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
-<code>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</code>.  By default &latex; uses arabic
-numbers.
+<code>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</code>.
 </para>
+<para>&latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="389">footnote parameters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="390">parameters, for footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="450" mergedindex="cp">\footnoterule</indexterm>\footnoterule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="footnote-footnoterule">footnote footnoterule</anchor>
+<para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s
+footnotes.  Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+<code>slides</code>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+<code>0.4pt</code>, and horizontal size of <code>0.4\columnwidth</code> long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+</para>
+<!-- c Credit egreg: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/21917 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+  \kern -3pt                         % This -3 is negative
+  \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+  \kern 2pt}                         % and this 2
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="451" mergedindex="cp">\footnotesep</indexterm>\footnotesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="footnote-footnotesep">footnote footnotesep</anchor>
+<para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(<pxref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></pxref>).  By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<code>\footnotesize</code> fonts (<pxref label="Font-sizes"><xrefnodename>Font sizes</xrefnodename></pxref>), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes.  This is <samp>6.65pt</samp> for <samp>10pt</samp>,
+<samp>7.7pt</samp> for <samp>11pt</samp>, and <samp>8.4pt</samp> for <samp>12pt</samp>.  Change
+it as with <code>\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The <code>\footnote</code> command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 <para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
 <code>\footnote</code>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
 sectioning command such as <code>\chapter</code> (it can only be used in outer
-paragraph mode).  There are some workarounds; see following sections.
-<!-- c xx mention packages that fix this -->
+paragraph mode; <pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="296">Footnotes, in a minipage</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="297">mpfootnote counter</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>In a <code>minipage</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code>
-command uses the <code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the
-<code>footnote</code> counter, so they are numbered independently.  They are
-shown at the bottom of the environment, not at the bottom of the page.
-And by default they are shown alphabetically. <xref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></xref>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="391">Footnotes, in a minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="392">mpfootnote counter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>In a <code>minipage</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code> command uses the
+<code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the <code>footnote</code> counter, so
+they are numbered independently.  They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page.  And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. <xref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></xref> and <ref label="Footnotes-in-a-table"><xrefnodename>Footnotes in a table</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cfootnotemark" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotemark</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotemark</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="438">\footnotemark</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="452" mergedindex="cp">\footnotemark</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
@@ -6438,16 +8548,29 @@
 \footnotemark[<var>number</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Put the current footnote number in the
-text. (See <ref label="_005cfootnotetext"><xrefnodename>\footnotetext</xrefnodename></ref> for giving the text of the footnote
-separately.)  The version with the optional argument <var>number</var> uses
-that number to determine the mark printed. This command can be used in
-inner paragraph mode.
+<para>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see <ref label="_005cfootnotetext"><xrefnodename>\footnotetext</xrefnodename></ref>.  The optional argument
+<var>number</var> causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the first
-and third authors (<code>\thanks</code> is a version of <code>footnote</code>).
+<para>If you use <code>\footnotemark</code> without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <var>number</var>
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} 
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] 
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark.  This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (<code>\thanks</code> is a version of
+<code>footnote</code>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
 \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds} 
   \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University} 
@@ -6456,23 +8579,48 @@
 \maketitle
 </pre></example> 
 
-<para>If you use <code>\footnotemark</code> without the optional argument then it
-increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <var>number</var>
-then it does not. This produces several consecutive footnote markers
-referring to the same footnote.
+<para>This uses a counter to remember the footnote number.  The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} 
-and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] 
-and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+  Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+  Captain Hook.}
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
 </pre></example>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="393"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="394"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="395"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="396"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <file>cleveref</file>.
+</para>
+<!-- c from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % in preamble 
+\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="397"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="398"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>It will work with the package <file>hyperref</file>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cfootnotetext" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotetext</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cfootnotetext" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotetext</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotetext</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="439">\footnotetext</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="453" mergedindex="cp">\footnotetext</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
@@ -6481,186 +8629,161 @@
 \footnotetext[<var>number</var>]{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Place <var>text</var> at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  This command
-can come anywhere after the <code>\footnotemark</code> command.  The optional
-argument <var>number</var> changes the displayed footnote number.  The
-<code>\footnotetext</code> command must appear in outer paragraph mode.
+<para>Place <var>text</var> at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  It pairs with
+<code>\footnotemark</code> (<pxref label="_005cfootnotemark"><xrefnodename>\footnotemark</xrefnodename></pxref>) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The optional argument <var>number</var> changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
 </para>
+<para><xref label="_005cfootnotemark"><xrefnodename>\footnotemark</xrefnodename></xref> and <ref label="Footnotes-in-a-table"><xrefnodename>Footnotes in a table</xrefnodename></ref> for usage
+examples.
+</para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="Footnotes-in-a-table" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in a table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Footnotes-in-section-headings" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in section headings</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes in section headings</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="399">footnote, in section headings</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="400">table of contents, avoiding footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to <code>\section</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+  Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>No <code>\protect</code> is needed in front of <code>\footnote</code> here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Footnotes-in-a-table" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in a table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes of footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes in a table</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="298">Footnotes, in a table</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="401">footnote, in a table</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Inside a <code>table</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code> command does not
-work.  For instance, if the code below appears on its own then the
-footnote simply disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell
-but nothing is set at the bottom of the page.
+<para>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code>
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear.  The solution is to use a
+<code>minipage</code> environment as here (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
      \begin{tabular}{l|l}
-     \textsc{Ship}  &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline 
-     \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\ 
-     \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\  
-     \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
-     \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
-                                HMS Surprise.}
+       \textsc{Ship}           &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline 
+       \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\ 
+       \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\  
+       \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
+       \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{%
+                                  Starting with HMS Surprise.}
      \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}                              
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The solution is to surround the <code>tabular</code> environment with a
-<code>minipage</code> environment, as here (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Inside a <code>minipage</code>, footnote marks are lowercase letters.  Change
+that with something like
+<code>\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}</code>
+(<pxref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+<code>minipage</code>.  To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
+<code>\footnotetext</code> pair and make a new counter.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
-  \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
-    ... tabular material ...
-  \end{minipage}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+    \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+     \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+       \textsc{Woman}             &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline 
+       Mona                       &Attached\footnotemark  \\ 
+       Diana Villiers             &Eventual wife  \\  
+       Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark 
+     \end{tabular}
+  \end{minipage}%  percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+  \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+    \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+      Little is known other than her death.}%
+  \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+    \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+      Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The same technique will work inside a floating <code>table</code> environment
-(<pxref label="table"><xrefnodename>table</xrefnodename></pxref>).  To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
-<file>tablefootnote</file> package, as illustrated in this example.  If you
-put <code>\usepackage{tablefootnote}</code> in the preamble and use the code
-shown then the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in
-sequence with other footnotes.
+<para>For a floating <code>table</code> environment (<pxref label="table"><xrefnodename>table</xrefnodename></pxref>), use the
+<file>tablefootnote</file> package.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{table}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{tablefootnote}  % in preamble
+   ...
+\begin{table}
   \centering
      \begin{tabular}{l|l}
      \textsc{Date}  &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline 
      1862           &Fort Donelson \\ 
      1863           &Vicksburg     \\  
-     1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
+     1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+                      Ending the war.}
      \end{tabular}
     \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
 \end{table}
 </pre></example>
 
-
-</section>
-<node name="Footnotes-in-section-headings" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in section headings</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes of footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes in section headings</sectiontitle>
-
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="299">footnotes, in section headings</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="300">table of contents, avoiding footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
-</para>
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-</pre></example>
-
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="301"><r>package</r>, <code>footmisc</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="302"><code>footmisc</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
-
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="303"><code>stable</code> option to <code>footmisc</code> package</indexterm></cindex>
 <noindent></noindent>
-<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
-contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  To have it not appear
-on the table of contents use the package <file>footmisc</file> with the
-<code>stable</code> option.
+<para>The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
 </para>
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
-...
-\begin{document}
-...
-\section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
-</pre></example>
 
-<para>Note that the <code>\protect</code> is gone; including it would cause the
-footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
-</para>
-
 </section>
-<node name="Footnotes-of-footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes of footnotes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Multiple reference to footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Footnotes-of-footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes of footnotes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes of footnotes</sectiontitle>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="402">footnote, of a footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="403"><r>package</r>, <code>bigfoot</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="404"><code>bigfoot</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
 <para>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
 footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes.  The package
 <file>bigfoot</file> extends &latex;&textrsquo;s default footnote mechanism in many
 ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{bigfoot}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{bigfoot}    % in preamble
 \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
 \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph]   % create class \footnotefrom{}
  ...
-\begin{document}
-...
 The third theorem is a partial converse of the 
-second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
-...
+second.\footnotefrom{%
+  First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
 </pre></example>
 
 
 </section>
-<node name="Multiple-reference-to-footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Multiple reference to footnotes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnote parameters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes of footnotes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Multiple references to footnotes</sectiontitle>
-
-<para>You can refer to a single footnote more than once.  This example
-uses the package <file>cleverref</file>.
-</para>
-<!-- c from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % this version of package or later 
-\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
-...
-\begin{document}
-...
-The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
-The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
-But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
-...
-</pre></example>
-
-<para>This solution will work with the package <file>hyperref</file>.
-See <ref label="_005cfootnotemark"><xrefnodename>\footnotemark</xrefnodename></ref> for a simpler solution in the common case
-of multiple authors with the same affiliation.
-</para>
-
-</section>
-<node name="Footnote-parameters" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnote parameters</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Multiple reference to footnotes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnote parameters</sectiontitle>
-
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="304">footnote parameters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="305">parameters, for footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
-
-<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="440">\footnoterule</indexterm>\footnoterule</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s
-footnotes.  Default dimensions: <code>0.4pt</code> thick (or wide), and
-<code>0.4\columnwidth</code> long in the standard document classes (except
-<code>slides</code>, where it does not appear).
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="441">\footnotesep</indexterm>\footnotesep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.  By
-default, this is set to the normal strut for <code>\footnotesize</code>
-fonts (<pxref label="Font-sizes"><xrefnodename>Font sizes</xrefnodename></pxref>), therefore there is no extra space between
-footnotes.  This is <samp>6.65pt</samp> for <samp>10pt</samp>, <samp>7.7pt</samp> for
-<samp>11pt</samp>, and <samp>8.4pt</samp> for <samp>12pt</samp>.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
-
-
-</section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Definitions" spaces=" "><nodename>Definitions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Counters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Definitions</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="306">definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="405">definitions</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
 </para>
-<!-- c xx everything in this chapter needs examples. -->
-<!-- c xx Add DeclareRobustCommand (see clsguide.pdf) -->
-
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\newcommand & \renewcommand</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">(Re)define a new command.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                       ">\providecommand</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new command, if name not used.
@@ -6678,149 +8801,209 @@
 <node name="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\providecommand</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="442">\newcommand</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="307">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="308">commands, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="309">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="310">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="454" mergedindex="cp">\newcommand</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="406">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="407">commands, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="408">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="409">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\renewcommand</code> define and redefine a
-command, respectively.  Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">  \newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-  \newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
 \renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
 \renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="311">starred form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="312">*-form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <code>\long</code>, in plain &tex;
-terms).
+<para>Define or redefine a command.  See also the discussion of
+<code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code> in <ref label="Class-and-package-commands"><xrefnodename>Class and package commands</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="410">starred form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="411">*-form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be
+<code>\long</code>).
 </para>
+<para>These are the parameters:
+</para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">cmd</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is the command name.  For <code>\newcommand</code>, it
-must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>.  For
-<code>\renewcommand</code>, it must already be defined.
+</tableterm><tableitem>
+<para>Required; the command name.  It must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>,
+and must not begin with the four letter string <code>\end</code>.  For
+<code>\newcommand</code>, it must not be already defined.  For
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, this name must already be defined.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">nargs</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
-that the command can take, including any optional argument.  If this
-argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no
-arguments.  When redefining a command, the new version can have a
+that the command takes, including any optional argument.  Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments.  If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
 different number of arguments than the old version.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">optargdefault</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined
-command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
 (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is not present then
 <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not take an optional argument.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="313">positional parameter</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>That is, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is used with square brackets following,
-as in <code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then within <var>defn</var> the first
-<dfn>positional parameter</dfn> <code>#1</code> expands <var>myval</var>.  On the
-other hand, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is called without square brackets
-following, then within <var>defn</var> the positional parameter <code>#1</code>
-expands to the default <var>optargdefault</var>.  In either case, any
-required arguments will be referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="412">positional parameter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>That is, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is used with square brackets, as in
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>optval</var>]{...}...</code>, then within <var>defn</var> the
+parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the value of <var>optval</var>.  On the
+other hand, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is called without the square brackets
+then within <var>defn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the value of
+<var>optargdefault</var>.  In either case, the required arguments start with
+<code>#2</code>.
 </para>
-<para>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in a call is different from having the
-square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>.  The former results
-in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
-<code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
+<para>Omitting <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>.  The former sets
+<code>#1</code> to the value of <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter sets <code>#1</code>
+to the empty string.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">defn</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>; the
-positional parameter <code>#<var>n</var></code> in <var>defn</var> is replaced by
-the text of the <var>n</var>th argument.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code>. The parameters <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>,
+... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code> are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don&textrsquo;t exercise the option).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 <para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
 sequence, as in <samp>\cmd </samp>.  If you actually want a space there, one
-solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command (<samp>\cmd{} </samp>;
+solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command (<samp>\cmd{} </samp>, and
 another solution is to use an explicit control space (<samp>\cmd\ </samp>).
 </para>
 <para>A simple example of defining a new command:
-<code>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</code> results in
-<code>\RS</code> being replaced by the longer text.
-</para>
-<para>Redefining an existing command is similar:
+<code>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</code> results in <code>\RS</code> being
+replaced by the longer text.  Redefining an existing command is similar:
 <code>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</code>.
 </para>
-<para>Here&textrsquo;s a command definition with one required argument:
+<para>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.  If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like <samp>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</samp>.
 </para>
+<para>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>Then, <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
-<code>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</code>, which will ultimately expand to
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Use the first as in <code>I highly recommend \student{} to you</code>.  The
+second has a variable, so that <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
+<code>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</code>, which ultimately expands to
 something like <samp>Definition~3.14</samp>.
 </para>
-<para>An example with two required arguments:
+<para>Similarly, but with two required arguments:
 <code>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</code> is invoked as
 <code>\nbym{2}{k}</code>.
 </para>
-<para>An example with an optional argument:
+<para>This example has an optional argument.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>Then, <code>\salutation</code> gives <samp>Dear Sir or Madam:</samp> while
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Then <code>\salutation</code> gives <samp>Dear Sir or Madam:</samp> while
 <code>\salutation[John]</code> gives <samp>Dear John:</samp>.  And
 <code>\salutation[]</code> gives <samp>Dear :</samp>.
 </para>
-<para>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not define a group, that is, they do
-not delimit the scope of the result of expanding <var>defn</var>.  So
-<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</code> is problematic; in this
-sentence,
+<para>This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output is <samp>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</samp>.  The optional
+argument, the <code>Howe</code>, is associated with <code>#1</code>, while
+<code>Dewey</code> and <code>Cheatem</code> are associated with <code>#2</code>
+and <code>#3</code>.  Because of the optional argument,
+<code>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</code> will give the output <samp>I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding <var>defn</var>.  For example,
+with <code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</code>, in this sentence,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>the words <samp>met the</samp> would incorrectly be in italics.  Another
-pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this:
-<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>.  Those braces are
-part of the definition and thus do define a group.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the words <samp>met the</samp> would incorrectly be in italics.  The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>.
 </para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cprovidecommand" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\providecommand</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcommand & \renewcommand</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\providecommand</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="443">\providecommand</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="314">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="315">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="316">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="455" mergedindex="cp">\providecommand</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="413">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="414">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="415">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
-Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
 \providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
-as <code>\newcommand</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If a
-command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
-This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
-loaded more than once.
+<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as <code>\newcommand</code>.  If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing.  This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+<xref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></xref> for the description of the arguments.
 </para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+From \myaffiliation.
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>outputs <samp>From Saint Michael's College</samp>.  Unlike <code>\newcommand</code>,
+the repeated use of <code>\providecommand</code> does not give an error.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newlength</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\providecommand</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="444">\newcounter</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="317">counters, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="456" mergedindex="cp">\newcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="416">counters, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
@@ -6829,103 +9012,163 @@
 \newcounter{<var>countername</var>}[<var>supercounter</var>]
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Globally defines a new counter named <var>countername</var> and initialize
-the new counter to zero.
+<para>Globally defines a new counter named <var>countername</var> and initialize it
+to zero (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The name <var>countername</var> must consists of letters only, and does not
+<para>The name <var>countername</var> must consist of letters only. It does not
 begin with a backslash.  This name must not already be in use by another
 counter.
 </para>
-<para>When you use the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> then
-<var>countername</var> will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the
-existing counter <var>supercounter</var>.  For example, ordinarily
-<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time
-<var>supercounter</var> is incremented with <code>\stepcounter</code>
+<para>When you use the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> then the
+counter <var>countername</var> will be reset to zero whenever
+<var>supercounter</var> is incremented.  For example, ordinarily
+<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time you
+increment <var>section</var>, either with <code>\stepcounter</code>
 (<pxref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
-(<pxref label="_005crefstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\refstepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>) then <var>countername</var> is reset to zero.
+(<pxref label="_005crefstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\refstepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>), then &latex; will reset <var>subsection</var> to
+zero.
 </para>
-<para><xref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></xref>, for more information about counters.
+<para>This example
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter{asuper}  \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+\newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3}   % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+\stepcounter{asuper}
+Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>produces <samp>The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3</samp> and
+<samp>Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If the counter already exists, for instance by entering <code>asuper</code>
+twice, then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \c&arobase;asuper
+already defined.  Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering <code>\newcounter{jh}[lh]</code> when <code>lh</code> is not a
+defined counter will get you <samp>LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.</samp>
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\newlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newlength</code>: Allocating a length</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newlength</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="445">\newlength</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="318">lengths, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="319">rubber lengths, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="320">skip register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="321">glue register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="457" mergedindex="cp">\newlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="417">lengths, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="418">rubber lengths, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="419">skip register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="420">glue register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Allocate a new <dfn>length</dfn> register.  Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\<var>arg</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{<var>arg</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
-backslash (<samp>\</samp>).  It creates a new length register named
-<code>\<var>arg</var></code>, which is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as
-<code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code> (what plain &tex; calls a <code>skip</code>
-register).  The register gets an initial value of zero.  The control
-sequence <code>\<var>arg</var></code> must not already be defined.
+<para>Allocate a new length register (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The required argument
+<var>arg</var> must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.  The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as <code>72.27pt</code> or <code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code>
+(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a <code>skip</code>
+register).  The initial value is zero.  The control sequence
+<code>\<var>arg</var></code> must not be already defined.
 </para>
-<para><xref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></xref>, for more about lengths.
+<para>An example:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\graphichgt}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>If you forget the backslash then you get <samp>Missing control sequence
+inserted</samp>.  If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewsavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\newsavebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newsavebox</code>: Allocating a box</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newsavebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="446">\newsavebox</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="322">box, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="458" mergedindex="cp">\newsavebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="421">box, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Allocate a &textldquo;bin&textrdquo; for holding a box.  Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{\<var>cmd</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{<var>cmd</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Defines <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
-Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times
-(<pxref label="Boxes"><xrefnodename>Boxes</xrefnodename></pxref>) or to measure or manipulate.  The name
-<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> must start with a backslash (<samp>\</samp>), and must not
-be already defined.
+<para>Define <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> to refer to a new &textldquo;bin&textrdquo; for storing boxes.
+Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times or to
+measure or manipulate (<pxref label="Boxes"><xrefnodename>Boxes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The required bin name
+<code><var>cmd</var></code> must start with a backslash, <code>\</code>, and must not
+already be defined.  This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The allocation of a box is global.  This command is fragile
-(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>The first line here sets you up to save the material for later use. 
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{\logobox}
+\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}. 
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output is <samp>Our logo is LoGo</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The allocation of a box is global.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" spaces=" "><nodename>\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="447">\newenvironment</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="448">\renewenvironment</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="323">environments, defining</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="324">defining new environments</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="325">redefining environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="459" mergedindex="cp">\newenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="460" mergedindex="cp">\renewenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="422">environments, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="423">defining new environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="424">redefining environments</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>These commands define or redefine an environment <var>env</var>, that is,
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>} <var>body</var> \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.  Synopses:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">   \newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
-  \newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
- \renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
-\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="326"><code>*</code>-form of environment commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define or redefine the environment <var>env</var>, that is, create the
+construct <code>\begin{<var>env</var>} ... <var>body</var> ... \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="425"><code>*</code>-form of environment commands</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text.  The body of these environments can
-still contain multiple paragraphs.
+contain multiple paragraphs of text.  However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">env</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the environment name.  It consists only of letters or the
-<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash
-(<code>\</code>).  It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>.  For
+<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <code>\</code>.
+It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>.  For
 <code>\newenvironment</code>, the name <var>env</var> must not be the name of an
 already existing environment, and also the command <code>\<var>env</var></code>
 must be undefined.  For <code>\renewenvironment</code>, <var>env</var> must be the
@@ -6933,55 +9176,61 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">nargs</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-that the environment will take.  When the environment is used these
+that the environment takes.  When you use the environment these
 arguments appear after the <code>\begin</code>, as in
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}{<var>arg1</var>}&dots;{<var>argn</var>}</code>.  If this
-argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have
-no arguments.  When redefining an environment, the new version can have
-a different number of arguments than the old version.
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}{<var>arg1</var>} ... {<var>argn</var>}</code>.  Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments.  When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">optargdefault</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of the
-defined environment is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
-(which may be the empty string).  If this argument is not present then
-the environment does not take an optional argument.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var> (which
+may be the empty string).  If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
 </para>
-<para>That is, when <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is present in the
-environment definition, if <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is used with
-square brackets following, as in
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then, within <var>begdefn</var>,
-the positional parameter <code>#1</code> expands to <var>myval</var>.  If
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is called without square brackets
-following, then, within within <var>begdefn</var>, the positional parameter
-<code>#1</code> expands to the default <var>optargdefault</var>.  In either case,
-any required arguments will be referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
+<para>That is, when <var>optargdefault</var> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>optval</var>]{...} ... \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.
+In this case, within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the
+value of <var>optval</var>.  If you call <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> without
+square brackets, then within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is
+set to the value of the default <var>optargdefault</var>.  In either case,
+any required arguments start with <code>#2</code>.
 </para>
-<para>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different from having the
+<para>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different than having the
 square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>.  The former results
 in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
 <code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">begdefn</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">begdef</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>.  Within <var>begdef</var>, the <var>n</var>th
-positional parameter (i.e., <code>#<var>n</var></code>) is replaced by the text
-of the <var>n</var>th argument.
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>.  Within <var>begdef</var>, the parameters
+<code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, ... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code>, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">enddefn</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">enddef</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>.  This may not contain any positional
-parameters, so <code>#<var>n</var></code> cannot be used here (but see the final
+<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>.  This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, etc., here (but see the final
 example below).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<para>All environments, that is to say the <var>begdefn</var> code, the environment
-body and the <var>enddefn</var> code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in
+<para>All environments, that is to say the <var>begdef</var> code, the environment
+body, and the <var>enddef</var> code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in
 the first example below, the effect of the <code>\small</code> is limited to
 the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
 </para>
+<para>If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.  If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.</samp>.
+</para>
 <para>This example gives an environment like &latex;&textrsquo;s <code>quotation</code>
-except that it will be set in smaller type:
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
@@ -6991,10 +9240,20 @@
 }
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
-that cites the author:
+<para>This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+  \noindent\textbf{#1}
+}{%
+}
+</pre></example> 
+
+<para>This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
   \begin{quotation}
   \noindent\textit{#1}: 
@@ -7003,8 +9262,9 @@
 }
 </pre></example>
 
-<noindent></noindent> <para>The author&textrsquo;s name is optional, and defaults to <samp>Shakespeare</samp>.
-In the document, use the environment like this:
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The author&textrsquo;s name is optional, and defaults to <samp>Shakespeare</samp>.  In
+the document, use the environment like this.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
@@ -7013,7 +9273,7 @@
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in 
-<var>enddefn</var>, in this case in a box (<pxref label="_005csbox"><xrefnodename>\sbox</xrefnodename></pxref>):
+<var>enddef</var>, in this case in a box (<pxref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox & \savebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
@@ -7031,13 +9291,13 @@
 <node name="_005cnewtheorem" spaces=" "><nodename>\newtheorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newfont</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newtheorem</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="449">\newtheorem</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="327">theorems, defining</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="328">defining new theorems</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="461" mergedindex="cp">\newtheorem</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="426">theorems, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="427">defining new theorems</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="329">theorem-like environment</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="330">environment, theorem-like</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Define a new theorem-like environment.  Synopses:
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="428">theorem-like environment</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="429">environment, theorem-like</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Synopses:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}
@@ -7045,26 +9305,25 @@
 \newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Using the first form, <code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}</code>
-creates an environment that will be labelled with <var>title</var>.  See the
-first example below.
+<para>Define a new theorem-like environment.  You can specify one of
+<var>numbered_within</var> and <var>numbered_like</var>, or neither, but not both.
 </para>
-<para>The second form
-<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]</code>
+<para>The first form, <code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}</code>, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with <var>title</var>; see the first
+example below.
+</para>
+<para>The second form,
+<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]</code>,
 creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
-counter <var>numbered_within</var> (its counter will be reset when
-<var>numbered_within</var> is reset).
+counter <var>numbered_within</var>, so this counter will be reset when
+<var>numbered_within</var> is reset.  See the second example below.
 </para>
-
 <para>The third form
 <code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code>,
-with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create
-an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
-<var>numbered_like</var>.
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<var>numbered_like</var>.  See the third example.
 </para>
-<para>You can specify one of <var>numbered_within</var> and <var>numbered_like</var>,
-or neither, but not both.
-</para>
 <para>This command creates a counter named <var>name</var>.  In addition, unless
 the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, inside of the
 theorem-like environment the current <code>\ref</code> value will be that of
@@ -7076,12 +9335,13 @@
 </para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">name</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The name of the environment.  It must not begin with a backslash
-(<samp>\</samp>).  It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
-the command name <code>\<var>name</var></code> must not already be defined as anything.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The name of the environment.  It is a string of letters.  It must not
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.  It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name <code>\<var>name</var></code> must not
+already be defined.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">title</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
 number. For example, <samp>Theorem</samp>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">numbered_within</itemformat></item>
@@ -7118,10 +9378,10 @@
 \end{defn}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Because the next example specifies the optional argument
-<var>numbered_within</var> to <code>\newtheorem</code> as <code>section</code>, the
-example, with the same document body, gives <samp>Definition 1.1</samp>
-and <samp>Definition 2.1</samp>.
+<para>This example has the same document body as the prior one.  But here
+<code>\newtheorem</code>&textrsquo;s optional argument <var>numbered_within</var> is given as
+<code>section</code>, so the output is like <samp>Definition 1.1</samp> and
+<samp>Definition 2.1</samp>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
@@ -7164,46 +9424,44 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cnewfont" spaces=" "><nodename>\newfont</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\protect</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newfont</code>: Define a new font (obsolete)</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newfont</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="450">\newfont</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="331">fonts, new commands for</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="332">defining new fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="462" mergedindex="cp">\newfont</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="430">fonts, new commands for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="431">defining new fonts</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\newfont</code>, now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
-Synopsis:
+<!-- c @findex .fd @r{file} -->
+<para>This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents.  New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (<pxref label="Fonts"><xrefnodename>Fonts</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<!-- c This is done either by using -->
+<!-- c @file{.fd} files or through the use of an engine that can access system -->
+<!-- c fonts such as Xe at LaTeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}). -->
 </para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newfont{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>font description</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This defines a control sequence <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> that will change the
-current font.  &latex; will look on your system for a file named
-<file><var>fontname</var>.tfm</file>.  The control sequence must must not already
-be defined.  It must begin with a backslash (<samp>\</samp>).
+<para>Define a command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must must not already be defined.  It must begin
+with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="451">.fd <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>This command is obsolete.  It is a low-level command for setting up an
-individual font.  Today fonts are almost always defined in families
-(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
-through the so-called &textldquo;New Font Selection Scheme&textrdquo;, either by using
-<file>.fd</file> files or through the use of an engine that can access
-system fonts such as Xe&latex; (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-<!-- c xx explain nfss somewhere -->
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="432">at clause, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="433">design size, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <var>font description</var> consists of a <var>fontname</var> and an optional
+<dfn>at clause</dfn>.  &latex; will look on your system for a file named
+<file><var>fontname</var>.tfm</file>.  The at clause can have the form either
+<code>at <var>dimen</var></code> or <code>scaled <var>factor</var></code>, where a
+<var>factor</var> of <samp>1000</samp> means no scaling.  For &latex;&textrsquo;s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font&textrsquo;s design size, which is a value defined in the
+<file>.tfm</file> file.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="333">at clause, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="334">design size, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>But since it is part of &latex;, here is an explanation: the
-<var>font description</var> consists of a <var>fontname</var> and an optional
-<dfn>at clause</dfn>; this can have the form either <code>at <var>dimen</var></code>
-or <code>scaled <var>factor</var></code>, where a <var>factor</var> of <samp>1000</samp>
-means no scaling.  For &latex;&textrsquo;s purposes, all this does is scale all
-the character and other font dimensions relative to the font&textrsquo;s design
-size, which is a value defined in the <file>.tfm</file> file.
+<para>This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
 </para>
-<para>This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
-characters in each:
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
 \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
@@ -7216,9 +9474,9 @@
 <node name="_005cprotect" spaces=" "><nodename>\protect</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newfont</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\protect</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="452">\protect</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="335">fragile commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="336">robust commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="463" mergedindex="cp">\protect</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="434">fragile commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="435">robust commands</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>All &latex; commands are either <dfn>fragile</dfn> or <dfn>robust</dfn>.  A
 fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
@@ -7236,7 +9494,7 @@
 document such as in the table of contents.  Any argument that is
 internally expanded by &latex; without typesetting it directly is
 referred to as a 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="337">moving arguments</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="436">moving arguments</indexterm></cindex>
 <dfn>moving argument</dfn>.  A command is fragile if it can
 expand during this process into invalid &tex; code.  Some examples of
 moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption{...}</code>
@@ -7282,10 +9540,10 @@
 <node name="_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" spaces=" "><nodename>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\protect</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="453">\ignorespaces</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="454">\ignorespacesafterend</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="338">spaces, ignore around commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="339">commands, ignore spaces</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="464" mergedindex="cp">\ignorespaces</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="465" mergedindex="cp">\ignorespacesafterend</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="437">spaces, ignore around commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="438">commands, ignore spaces</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -7293,6 +9551,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\ignorespaces
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -7314,13 +9573,18 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
 \begin{enumerate} 
   \item\points{10}no extra space output here
-  \item\points{15} extra space output between the number and the word `extra'
+  \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
 \end{enumerate} 
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The solution is to change to
-<code>\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}</code>.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The solution is to change to this.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+  \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+</pre></example>
+
 <para>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.  The
 commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.  But,
 as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
@@ -7329,7 +9593,7 @@
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
 \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\&arobase;honorific{#1}} % remember title
-\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\&arobase;honorific~#1}       % recall title; put before name
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\&arobase;honorific~#1}       % put title before name
 \makeatother
 \begin{tabular}{|l|}
 \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
@@ -7337,6 +9601,7 @@
 \end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>To fix this, change to
 <code>\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\&arobase;honorific~#1}</code>.
 </para>
@@ -7374,8 +9639,8 @@
 <node name="Counters" spaces=" "><nodename>Counters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Lengths</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Definitions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Counters</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="340">counters, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="341">variables, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="439">counters, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="440">variables, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with
 it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
@@ -7400,29 +9665,31 @@
 through <code>enumiv</code> are used in the <code>enumerate</code> environment, for
 up to four levels of nesting (<pxref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+</para>
 <para>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>.  <xref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></xref>.
 </para>
 
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Print value of a counter.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\usecounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\value</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use the value of a counter in an expression.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\setcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the value of a counter.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">\addtocounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add a quantity to a counter.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\refstepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\stepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\day \month \year</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Numeric date values.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\usecounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\value</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use the value of a counter in an expression.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\setcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the value of a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\addtocounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add a quantity to a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\refstepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\stepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\day & \month & \year</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Numeric date values.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
 <node name="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" spaces=" "><nodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usecounter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="342">counters, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="441">counters, printing</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style.  For instance, if
 the counter <var>counter</var> has the value 1 then a
-<code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code> in your source will result in a lower case
+<code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code> in your source will result in a lowercase
 letter a appearing in the output.
 </para>
 <para>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
@@ -7430,51 +9697,61 @@
 start with a backslash.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="455">\alph{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="466" mergedindex="cp">\alph{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;,
+&enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</samp>
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="456">\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="467" mergedindex="cp">\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.</samp>
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="457">\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers: &textlsquo;1&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;2&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="468" mergedindex="cp">\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers such as <samp>5</samp> or <samp>-2</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="458">\roman{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="469" mergedindex="cp">\roman{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="459">\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="470" mergedindex="cp">\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="460">\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> in a specific sequence of nine
-symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes).  The value of
-<var>counter</var> must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="471" mergedindex="cp">\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</indexterm>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes.  The value of
+<var>counter</var> should be between 1 and 9, inclusive.  If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get <samp>LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large</samp>, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but &latex; does not output anything.
 </para>
 <para>Here are the symbols:
 </para>
-<multitable spaces="  " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .33 .33 .33"><columnfraction value=".33"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".33"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".33"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
-<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Name</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Command</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>Equivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point<!-- c
- -->
+<multitable spaces="  " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .10 .30 .30 .30"><columnfraction value=".10"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Number</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Name</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Command</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Symbol
 </para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item">
-<para>asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>*<!-- c
- -->
+<para>1</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>*<!-- c -->
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U>
+<para>2</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U>
+<para>3</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>section-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\S</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00A7</U>
+<para>4</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\S</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00A7</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\P</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00B6</U>
+<para>5</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\P</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00B6</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>double-vert</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\parallel</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2016</U>
+<para>6</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\parallel</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2016</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>**<!-- c
- -->
+<para>7</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>**<!-- c -->
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U><U>2020</U>
+<para>8</para></entry><entry command="tab">
+  <para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U><U>2020</U>
 </para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
-<para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U><U>2021</U>
+<para>9</para></entry><entry command="tab">
+  <para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U><U>2021</U>
 </para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
 
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
@@ -7482,11 +9759,11 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cusecounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\usecounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\value</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usecounter</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="461">\usecounter</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="343">list items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="344">numbered items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="472" mergedindex="cp">\usecounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="442">list items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="443">numbered items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -7494,15 +9771,16 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>In the <code>list</code> environment, when used in the second argument, this
-command sets up <var>counter</var> to number the list items.  It initializes
-<var>counter</var> to zero, and arranges that when <code>\item</code> is called
-without its optional argument then <var>counter</var> is incremented by
-<code>\refstepcounter</code>, making its value be the current <code>ref</code>
-value.  This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Used in the second argument of the <code>list</code> environment
+(<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+<var>counter</var>.  It initializes <var>counter</var> to zero, and arranges that
+when <code>\item</code> is called without its optional argument then
+<var>counter</var> is incremented by <code>\refstepcounter</code>, making its value
+be the current <code>ref</code> value (<pxref label="_005cref"><xrefnodename>\ref</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated with
-<var>testcounter</var>:
+<para>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with <var>testcounter</var>:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter{testcounter}
@@ -7518,10 +9796,10 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cvalue" spaces=" "><nodename>\value</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\setcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\usecounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\value{<var>counter</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\value</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="462">\value</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="345">counters, getting value of</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="473" mergedindex="cp">\value</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="444">counters, getting value of</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -7529,14 +9807,9 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\value{<var>counter</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This command expands to the value of <var>counter</var>.  It is often used
-in <code>\setcounter</code> or <code>\addtocounter</code>, but <code>\value</code> can
-be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number.  It must not be
-preceded by <code>\protect</code> (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Expands to the value of the counter <var>counter</var>. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
 </para>
-<para>The <code>\value</code> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
-counter.  <xref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></xref>.
-</para>
 <para>This example outputs <samp>Test counter is 6. Other counter
 is 5.</samp>.
 </para>
@@ -7549,6 +9822,14 @@
 Other counter is \arabic{other}.
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>The <code>\value</code> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter.  For that, see <ref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in <code>\setcounter</code> or <code>\addtocounter</code> but
+<code>\value</code> can be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number, such
+as in <code>\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}</code>.  It must not be
+preceded by <code>\protect</code> (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 <para>This example inserts <code>\hspace{4\parindent}</code>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -7559,11 +9840,11 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005csetcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\setcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\value</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setcounter</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="463">\setcounter</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="346">counters, setting</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="347">setting counters</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="474" mergedindex="cp">\setcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="445">counters, setting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="446">setting counters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -7571,27 +9852,34 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\setcounter</code> command globally sets the value of <var>counter</var>
-to the <var>value</var> argument.  Note that the counter name does not start
-with a backslash.
+<para>Globally set the counter <var>counter</var> to have the value of the
+<var>value</var> argument, which must be an integer.  Thus, you can set a
+counter&textrsquo;s value as <code>\setcounter{section}{5}</code>.  Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
 </para>
-<para>In this example the section value appears as <samp>V</samp>.
+<para>In this example if the counter <code>theorem</code> has value 12 then the
+second line will print <samp>XII</samp>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter{section}{5}
-Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
 </pre></example>
 
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005caddtocounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocounter</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="464">\addtocounter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="475" mergedindex="cp">\addtocounter</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command globally increments <var>counter</var> by
-the amount specified by the <var>value</var> argument, which may be negative.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var><spacecmd type="nl"/></pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally increment <var>counter</var> by the amount specified by the
+<var>value</var> argument, which may be negative.
+</para>
 <para>In this example the section value appears as <samp>VII</samp>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -7603,16 +9891,21 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005crefstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\refstepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\refstepcounter</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="465">\refstepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="476" mergedindex="cp">\refstepcounter</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\refstepcounter</code> command works in the same way as
-<code>\stepcounter</code> (<pxref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>): it globally increments the
-value of <var>counter</var> by one and resets the value of any counter
-numbered within it.  (For the definition of &textldquo;counters numbered
-within&textrdquo;, <pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally increments the value of <var>counter</var> by one, as does
+<code>\stepcounter</code> (<pxref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it.  (For the
+definition of &textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo;, <pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+</para>
 <para>In addition, this command also defines the current <code>\ref</code> value
 to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
 </para>
@@ -7621,68 +9914,170 @@
 </para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005cstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\stepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\day \month \year</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\stepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\day & \month & \year</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stepcounter</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="466">\stepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="477" mergedindex="cp">\stepcounter</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\stepcounter</code> command globally adds one to <var>counter</var> and
-resets all counters numbered within it.  (For the definition of
-&textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo;, <pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Globally adds one to <var>counter</var> and resets all counters numbered
+within it.  (For the definition of &textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo;,
+<pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+</para>
+<para>This command differs from <code>\refstepcounter</code> in that this one does
+not influence references &textmdash; it does not define the current
+<code>\ref</code> value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>
+(<pxref label="_005crefstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\refstepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear" spaces=" "><nodename>\day \month \year</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\day \month \year</code>: Predefined counters</sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" spaces=" "><nodename>\day & \month & \year</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\day</code> & <code>\month</code> & <code>\year</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="467">\day</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="468">\month</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="469">\year</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="478" mergedindex="cp">\day</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="479" mergedindex="cp">\month</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="480" mergedindex="cp">\year</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (<code>\day</code>,
-1&textndash;31), month of the year (<code>\month</code>, 1&textndash;12), and year
-(<code>\year</code>, Common Era).  When &tex; starts up, they are
-set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running.  They
-are not updated as the job progresses.
+<para>&latex; defines the counter <code>\day</code> for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <code>\month</code> for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <code>\year</code>.
+When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system.  The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string
+representing the current day (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string representing the
-current day (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end.  In addition, &tex; does no sanity
+check:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives no error or warning and results in the output <samp>-2, -4</samp> (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Lengths" spaces=" "><nodename>Lengths</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Counters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Lengths</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="348">lengths, defining and using</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="447">lengths, defining and using</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>A <dfn>length</dfn> is a measure of distance.  Many &latex; commands take a
 length as an argument.
 </para>
+<para>This shows a box of the given length.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}   % make a bar 
+\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}} % box it
+XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>It produces a black bar 100 points long between <samp>XXX</samp> and
+<samp>YYY</samp>.
+</para>
 <para>Lengths come in two types.  A <dfn>rigid length</dfn> (what Plain &tex;
-calls a <dfn>dimen</dfn>) such as <code>10pt</code> cannot contain a <code>plus</code> or
-<code>minus</code> component.  A <dfn>rubber length</dfn> (what Plain &tex; calls
-a <dfn>skip</dfn>) can contain those, as with <code>1cm plus0.05cm
-minus0.01cm</code>.  These give the ability to stretch or shrink; the length
-in the prior sentence could appear in the output as long as 1.05 cm
-or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what &tex;&textrsquo;s typesetting
-algorithm finds optimum.
+calls a <dfn>dimen</dfn>) such as <code>10pt</code> does not contain a <code>plus</code>
+or <code>minus</code> component.  The above example shows a rigid length. A
+<dfn>rubber length</dfn> (what Plain &tex; calls a <dfn>skip</dfn>) can contain
+those components, as with <code>1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm</code>.  Here the
+<code>1cm</code> is the <dfn>natural length</dfn> while the other two, the
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components, allow the length to stretch or
+shrink.
 </para>
+<para>Shrinking is simpler: with <code>1cm minus 0.05cm</code>, the natural length
+is 1<dmn>cm</dmn> but if smaller is needed then &tex; can shrink it down as
+far as 0.95<dmn>cm</dmn>.  Beyond that, &tex; refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98 points between the two bars.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>But the second one gets a warning like <samp>Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17</samp>.  In the output the first <samp>Y</samp> is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box&textrsquo;s material is
+wider than the 300<dmn>pt</dmn> allocated, as &tex; has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309 points.
+</para>
+<para>Stretching is like shrinking except that if &tex; is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it won&textrsquo;t refuse.  Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+  \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the second line &tex; needs a stretch of 10 points and only
+1 point was specified.  In this situation, &tex; stretches the
+space to the required length, but it complains with a warning like
+<samp>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line 22</samp>.  (We won&textrsquo;t
+discuss badness; the point is that the system was not given as much
+stretch as needed.)
+</para>
+<para>You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+<code>1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{\blackbar{100pt}%  left
+  \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}%  middle
+  \blackbar{100pt}}YYY  % right
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The outside bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
+100.  In the middle the bar takes up 80 points, so the two
+<code>\hspace</code>&textrsquo;s must stretch 20 points.  Because the two say
+<code>plus 50pt</code> and <code>plus 10pt</code>, &tex; gets 5/6 of the
+stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+</para>
 <para>The <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code> component of a rubber length can contain
 a <dfn>fill</dfn> component, as in <code>1in plus2fill</code>.  This gives the
-length infinite stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in
-the prior sentence can be set by &tex; to any distance greater than or
-equal to 1 inch.  &tex; actually provides three infinite glue
-components <code>fil</code>, <code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>, such that the
-later ones overcome the earlier ones, but only the middle value is
-ordinarily used.  <xref label="_005chfill"><xrefnodename>\hfill</xrefnodename></xref>, <xref label="_005cvfill"><xrefnodename>\vfill</xrefnodename></xref>.
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that &tex; could set
+it to any distance.  Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
 </para>
-<para>Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
-length, so that after <code>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</code>
-and <code>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</code> then the value of
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+  \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&tex; actually has three infinite glue components <code>fil</code>,
+<code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>.  The later ones are more infinite than
+the earlier ones.  Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one
+(<pxref label="_005chfill"><xrefnodename>\hfill</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="_005cvfill"><xrefnodename>\vfill</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after <code>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</code> and
+<code>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</code> then the value of
 <code>\zlength</code> is <code>3in</code>.
 </para>
-
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">Units of length</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The units that &latex; knows.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\setlength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the value of a length.
@@ -7690,77 +10085,92 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\settodepth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the depth of something.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">\settoheight</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the height of something.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\settowidth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the width of something.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">Predefined lengths</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+<!-- c * Predefined lengths::  Lengths that are, like, predefined. -->
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
 <node name="Units-of-length" spaces=" "><nodename>Units of length</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\setlength</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Units of length</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="349">units, of length</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="448">units, of length</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&tex; and &latex; know about these units both inside and outside of
 math mode.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pt </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="470">pt</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="350">Point</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="481" mergedindex="cp">pt</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="449">Point</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-pt">units of length pt</anchor>
 <para>Point 1/72.27 inch.  The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
 places, is 1<dmn>point</dmn> = 2.85<dmn>mm</dmn> = 28.45<dmn>cm</dmn>. 
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pc</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="351">pica</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="471">pc</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="450">pica</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="482" mergedindex="cp">pc</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-pc">units of length pc</anchor>
 <para>Pica, 12 pt
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">in </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="472">in</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="473">inch</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="483" mergedindex="cp">in</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="484" mergedindex="cp">inch</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-in">units of length in</anchor>
 <para>Inch,  72.27 pt
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces="  "><itemformat command="code">bp </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="474">bp</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="352">Big point</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="485" mergedindex="cp">bp</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="451">Big point</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-bp">units of length bp</anchor>
 <para>Big point, 1/72 inch.  This length is the definition of a point in
 PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cm </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="353">Centimeter</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="475">cm</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="452">Centimeter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="486" mergedindex="cp">cm</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-cm">units of length cm</anchor>
 <para>Centimeter
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">mm </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="354">Millimeter</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="476">mm</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="453">Millimeter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="487" mergedindex="cp">mm</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-mm">units of length mm</anchor>
 <para>Millimeter
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">dd </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="355">Didot point</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="477">dd</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="454">Didot point</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="488" mergedindex="cp">dd</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-dd">units of length dd</anchor>
 <para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cc </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="356">Cicero</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="478">cc</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="455">Cicero</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="489" mergedindex="cp">cc</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-cc">units of length cc</anchor>
 <para>Cicero, 12 dd
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sp </itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="357">Scaled point</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="479">sp</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="456">Scaled point</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="490" mergedindex="cp">sp</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-sp">units of length sp</anchor>
 <para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table> 
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="358">ex</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="359">x-height</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="480">ex</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="360">m-width</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="361">em</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="481">em</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="457">ex</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="458">x-height</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="491" mergedindex="cp">ex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="459">m-width</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="460">em</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="492" mergedindex="cp">em</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fem">Lengths/em</anchor>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fen">Lengths/en</anchor>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fex">Lengths/ex</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-em">units of length em</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-en">units of length en</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-ex">units of length ex</anchor>
 <para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
 the font.  The x-height of the current font <dfn>ex</dfn>, traditionally the
-height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
 lengths. Similarly <dfn>em</dfn>, traditionally the width of the capital
 letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
 <code>\enspace</code>, which is <code>0.5em</code>).  Use of these can help make a
@@ -7770,8 +10180,8 @@
 likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
 given in points.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="362">mu, math unit</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="482">mu</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="461">mu, math unit</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="493" mergedindex="cp">mu</indexterm></findex>
 <para>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
 <dfn>mu</dfn> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
 math symbols family.  <xref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode</xrefnodename></xref>.
@@ -7781,246 +10191,485 @@
 <node name="_005csetlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\setlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtolength</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Units of length</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setlength</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="483">\setlength</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="363">lengths, setting</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="494" mergedindex="cp">\setlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="462">lengths, setting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\setlength</code> sets the value of <dfn>length command</dfn>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="364">length command</indexterm></cindex>
-<code>\<var>len</var></code> to the <var>value</var> argument which can be expressed in any
-units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>), millimeters
-(<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), big points (<code>bp</code>), etc.
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to <var>amount</var>.  The length name <var>len</var>
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.  The <code>amount</code> can be a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of
+length</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>Below, with &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
 
+\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+He said stop going to those places.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If there is no such length <var>len</var> then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005caddtolength" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtolength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settodepth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtolength</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="484">\addtolength</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="365">lengths, adding to</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="495" mergedindex="cp">\addtolength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="463">lengths, adding to</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtolength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>Increment the length <var>len</var> by <var>amount</var>.  The length name
+<var>len</var> begins with a backslash, <code>\</code>.  The <code>amount</code> is a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of
+length</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, if <code>\parskip</code> starts with the value <code>0pt plus 1pt</code> 
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
 
-<para>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a length command <code>\<var>len</var></code>
-by the amount specified in the <var>amount</var> argument, which may be
-negative.
+Nurse: no change.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then it has the value <code>1pt plus 1pt</code> for the second paragraph.
 </para>
+<para>If there is no such length <var>len</var> then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent</samp>.  If you leave
+off the backslash at the start of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</code>, then you get something like
+<samp>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</samp>.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005csettodepth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settodepth</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settoheight</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtolength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settodepth</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="485">\settodepth</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="496" mergedindex="cp">\settodepth</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\settodepth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settodepth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a length command
-<code>\<var>len</var></code> equal to the depth of the <var>text</var> argument.
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument.  The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
 </para>
+<para>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetdepth
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>If there is no such length <var>len</var> then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetdepth</samp>.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005csettoheight" spaces=" "><nodename>\settoheight</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settowidth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\settodepth</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settoheight</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="486">\settoheight</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="497" mergedindex="cp">\settoheight</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\settoheight{\<var>len</var>}{text}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settoheight{<var>len</var>}{text}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a length command <code>\<var>len</var></code>
-equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument.
+<para>Sets the length <var>len</var> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <code>text</code> argument.  The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
 </para>
+<para>This will show how high the characters go.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\alphabetheight}
+\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetheight
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>If there is no such length <var>len</var> then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight</samp>.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005csettowidth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settowidth</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Predefined lengths</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\settoheight</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005csettowidth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settowidth</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\settoheight</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settowidth</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="487">\settowidth</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="498" mergedindex="cp">\settowidth</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settowidth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of the command <var>\len</var>
-to the width of the <var>text</var> argument.
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument.  The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
 </para>
+<para>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetwidth
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>If there is no such length <var>len</var> then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetwidth</samp>.  If you
+leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
+
+<!-- c @node Predefined lengths -->
+<!-- c @section Predefined lengths -->
+
+<!-- c @cindex lengths, predefined -->
+<!-- c @cindex predefined lengths -->
+
+<!-- c @code{\width} -->
+<!-- c @findex \width -->
+
+<!-- c @code{\height} -->
+<!-- c @findex \height -->
+
+<!-- c @code{\depth} -->
+<!-- c @findex \depth -->
+
+<!-- c @code{\totalheight} -->
+<!-- c @findex \totalheight -->
+
+<!-- c These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -->
+<!-- c commands (@pxref{Boxes}).  They specify the natural width, etc., of the -->
+<!-- c text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals -->
+<!-- c @math{@code{@backslashchar{}height} + @code{@backslashchar{}depth}}. To -->
+<!-- c make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say -->
+
+<!-- c @example -->
+<!-- c \makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@} -->
+<!-- c @end example -->
+
+
 </section>
-<node name="Predefined-lengths" spaces=" "><nodename>Predefined lengths</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\settowidth</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Predefined lengths</sectiontitle>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Making-paragraphs" spaces=" "><nodename>Making paragraphs</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math formulas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Lengths</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Making paragraphs</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="366">lengths, predefined</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="367">predefined lengths</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="464">making paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="465">paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\width</code>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="488">\width</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Once &latex; has all of a paragraph&textrsquo;s contents it divides it into
+lines, in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph (<pxref label="Line-breaking"><xrefnodename>Line
+breaking</xrefnodename></pxref>).  To end the current paragraph, put an empty line.
 </para>
-<para><code>\height</code>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="489">\height</indexterm></findex>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, <code>%</code>.
 </para>
-<para><code>\depth</code>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="490">\depth</indexterm></findex>
+<para>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted.  Don&textrsquo;t put a
+blank line in math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>); here the line before the
+<code>\end{equation}</code>
 </para>
-<para><code>\totalheight</code>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="491">\totalheight</indexterm></findex>
-</para>
-<para>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands (<pxref label="Boxes"><xrefnodename>Boxes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  They specify the natural width, etc., of
-the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <math><code>&backslashchar;height</code> +
-<code>&backslashchar;depth</code></math>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
-natural size, e.g., say
-</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
+  2^{|S|} > |S|
+
+\end{equation}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will get you the error <samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>.  Similarly, the blank
+line in this <code>section</code> argument
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section{aaa
 
-</section>
-</chapter>
-<node name="Making-paragraphs" spaces=" "><nodename>Making paragraphs</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math formulas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Lengths</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
-<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Making paragraphs</sectiontitle>
+bbb}
+</pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="368">making paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="369">paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gets <samp>Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \&arobase;sect was
+complete</samp>.
+</para>
 
-<para>A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines&textmdash;lines not
-containing even a <code>%</code>.  A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
-</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">\indent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Indent this paragraph.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\noindent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Do not indent this paragraph.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\parskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Space added before paragraphs.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Marginal notes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Putting remarks in the margin.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">\par</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">End the current paragraph.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\indent & \noindent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\parindent & \parskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Space added before paragraphs.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">Marginal notes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put remarks in the margin.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005cindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\indent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\noindent</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\indent</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cpar" spaces=" "><nodename>\par</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\indent & \noindent</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\par</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="492">\indent</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="493">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="370">indent, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="499" mergedindex="cp">\par</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="466">paragraph, ending</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\indent</code> produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
-<code>\parindent</code> length, the normal paragraph indentation.  It is used
-to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex;, converts two
+consecutive newlines to a <code>\par</code>):
 </para>
-<para>The default value for <code>\parindent</code> is <code>1em</code> in two-column
-mode, otherwise <code>15pt</code> for <code>10pt</code> documents, <code>17pt</code> for
-<code>11pt</code>, and <code>1.5em</code> for <code>12pt</code>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\par
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current paragraph.  The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the <code>\par</code> command is entirely equivalent.  This
+command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This example uses <code>\par</code> rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+  \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>The <code>\par</code> command does nothing in LR mode or a vertical mode but
+it terminates paragraph mode, bringing &latex; to vertical mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>You cannot use the <code>\par</code> command in math mode or in the argument
+of many commands, such as the <code>\section</code> command (<pxref label="Making-paragraphs"><xrefnodename>Making
+paragraphs</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand & \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\par</code> command differs from the <code>\paragraph</code> command in
+that the latter is, like <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\par</code> command differs from <code>\newline</code> and the line break
+double backslash, <code>\\</code>, in that \par ends the paragraph not just
+the line.  It also triggers the addition of the between-paragraph
+vertical space <code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent & \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">xyz
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+\setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2 
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>is: after <samp>xyz</samp> there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then
+<samp>test</samp> appears, aligned with the left margin.  On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then
+<samp>test1</samp> appears.  Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3 inches, and then &latex; puts the text <samp>test2</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cnoindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\noindent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\indent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\noindent</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\indent & \noindent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parindent & \parskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\par</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="494">\noindent</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="371">indent, suppressing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="500" mergedindex="cp">\indent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="501" mergedindex="cp">\noindent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="502" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="467">indent, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
-paragraph indentation, as in this example.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\indent
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Go into horizontal mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The <code>\indent</code> command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is <code>\parindent</code>.  These
+commands are robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+<xref label="_005cpar"><xrefnodename>\par</xrefnodename></xref> for the difference between this command and <code>\par</code>.  To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use <code>\noindent</code>.
+</para>
+<para>In the middle of a paragraph the <code>\noindent</code> command has no effect,
+because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there.  The
+<code>\indent</code> command&textrsquo;s only effect is to output a space.
+</para>
+<para>This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">... end of the prior paragraph.
 
 \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
 </para>
-<para>To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
-<code>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</code> in the preamble.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The data 
+
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To omit indentation in the entire document put
+<code>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</code> in the preamble.  If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+<code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent & \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="468"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="469"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English.  To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package <code>indentfirst</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cparskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\parskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Marginal notes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\noindent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parskip</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\parindent & \parskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Marginal notes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\indent & \noindent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="495">\parskip</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="372">vertical space before paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="503" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="504" mergedindex="cp">\parskip</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="470">paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="471">vertical space before paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\parskip</code> is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added
-before each paragraph.  The default is <code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\parskip}{<var>horizontal len</var>}
+\setlength{\parinden}{<var>vertical len</var>}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Both are a rubber lengths (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This, put in the preamble,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+<samp>x</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>In standard &latex; documents, the default value for <code>\parindent</code>
+in one-column documents is <code>15pt</code> when the default text size is
+<code>10pt</code> , <code>17pt</code> for <code>11pt</code>, and <code>1.5em</code> for
+<code>12pt</code>.  In two-column documents it is <code>1em</code>.  The default
+value for <code>\parskip</code> in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document styles is
+<code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="Marginal-notes" spaces=" "><nodename>Marginal notes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\parskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Marginal-notes" spaces=" "><nodename>Marginal notes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\parindent & \parskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Marginal notes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="373">marginal notes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="374">notes in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="375">remarks in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="496">\marginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="472">marginal notes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="473">notes in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="474">remarks in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="505" mergedindex="cp">\marginpar</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\marginpar[<var>left</var>]{<var>right</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\marginpar{<var>right</var>}
+\marginpar[<var>left</var>]{<var>right</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\marginpar</code> command creates a note in the margin.  The first
-line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
-where the <code>\marginpar</code> occurs.
+<para>Create a note in the margin.  The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the <code>\marginpar</code>
+occurs.
 </para>
-<para>When you only specify the mandatory argument <var>right</var>, the text
-will be placed
+<para>The margin that &latex; uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>) and also on <code>\reversemarginpar</code>
+(see below).  If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+<code>oneside</code>) then it goes in the right margin.  If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option <code>twoside</code>) then it goes in the
+outside margin.  If you are in two-column layout (document option
+<code>twocolumn</code>) then it goes in the nearest margin.
 </para>
-<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
-<listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>in the right margin for one-sided layout (option <code>oneside</code>, see <ref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></ref>);
-</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option <code>twoside</code>, see <ref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></ref>);
-</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option <code>twocolumn</code>, see <ref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></ref>).
-</para></listitem></itemize>
-
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="497">\reversemarginpar</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="498">\normalmarginpar</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The command <code>\reversemarginpar</code> places subsequent marginal notes
-in the opposite (inside) margin.  <code>\normalmarginpar</code> places them
-in the default position.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="506" mergedindex="cp">\reversemarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="507" mergedindex="cp">\normalmarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<para>If you declare <code>\reversemarginpar</code> then &latex; will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph.  Revert that to the default position with
+<code>\normalmarginpar</code>.
 </para>
-<para>When you specify both arguments, <var>left</var> is used for the left
-margin, and <var>right</var> is used for the right margin.
+<para>When you specify the optional argument <var>left</var> then it is used for a
+note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument <var>right</var> is
+used for a note in the the right margin.
 </para>
-<para>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning the node with <code>\hspace{0pt}</code>.
+<para>Normally, a note&textrsquo;s first word will not be hyphenated.  You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning <var>left</var> or <var>right</var> with
+<code>\hspace{0pt}</code>.
 </para>
 <para>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="499">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default <samp>7pt</samp> for
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="508" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparpush">marginal notes marginparpush</anchor>
+<para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default <samp>7pt</samp> for
 <samp>12pt</samp> documents, <samp>5pt</samp> else.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="500">\marginparsep</indexterm>\marginparsep</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="509" mergedindex="cp">\marginparsep</indexterm>\marginparsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparsep">marginal notes marginparsep</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
 <samp>11pt</samp> for <samp>10pt</samp> documents, <samp>10pt</samp> else.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="501">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided <samp>10pt</samp> document
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="510" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparwidth">marginal notes marginparwidth</anchor>
+<para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided <samp>10pt</samp> document
 is <samp>90pt</samp>, <samp>83pt</samp> for <samp>11pt</samp>, and <samp>68pt</samp> for
 <samp>12pt</samp>; <samp>17pt</samp> more in each case for a two-sided document.
 In two column mode, the default is <samp>48pt</samp>.
@@ -8039,78 +10688,143 @@
 <node name="Math-formulas" spaces=" "><nodename>Math formulas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Modes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math formulas</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="376">math formulas</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="377">formulas, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="378">math mode, entering</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="502"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="503"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="475">math formulas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="476">formulas, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="477">math mode, entering</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="511" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="512" mergedindex="cp"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="504"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="505"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="513" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="514" mergedindex="cp"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="506"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="507"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="515" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="516" mergedindex="cp"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
         
 
-<para>There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
+<para>Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display
+math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This example shows both.
 </para>
-<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">math</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>For formulas that appear right in the text.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">displaymath</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>For formulas that appear on their own line.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">equation</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
-number in the right margin.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin{displaymath}
+  \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end{displaymath}
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+</pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="508">\(</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="509">\)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="510">\[</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="511">\]</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>math</code> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
-but the <code>displaymath</code> and <code>equation</code> environments can be used
-only in paragraph mode.  The <code>math</code> and <code>displaymath</code>
-environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Math mode is for inline mathematics.  In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting <code>\(</code> and finished by the matching ending <code>\)</code>.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+<code>displaymath</code> environment.  Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
 </para>
+<para>When in math mode or display math mode, &latex; handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes.  For example,
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\(...\)   <r>instead of</r>   \begin{math}...\end{math}
-\[...\]   <r>instead of</r>   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="512">$</indexterm></findex>
-<para>In fact, the <code>math</code> environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
 </para>
+<para>There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put &latex; in math
+mode.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">$ ... $   <r>instead of</r>   \(...\)
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( <var>mathematical material</var> \)
+$ <var>mathematical material</var> $
+\begin{math} <var>mathematical material</var> \end{math}
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="513">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="514">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\boldmath</code> command changes math letters and symbols to be in
-a bold font.  It is used <emph>outside</emph> of math mode.  Conversely, the
-<code>\unboldmath</code> command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font;
-it too is used <emph>outside</emph> of math mode.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used.  You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in <code>\(x\) and $y$</code>.  You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<!-- c xx own section? Math fonts? -->
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="515">\displaystyle</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\displaystyle</code> declaration forces the size and style of the
-formula to be that of <code>displaymath</code>, e.g., with limits above and
-below summations.  For example:
+<para>To make displayed formulas, put &latex; into display math mode with
+either:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
+  <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end{displaymath}
 </pre></example>
 
-<!-- c xx see also \cal, \mathcal -->
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
+  <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end{equation}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The only difference is that
+with the <code>equation</code> environment, &latex; puts a formula number
+alongside the formula.  The construct <code>\[ <var>math</var> \]</code> is
+equivalent to <code>\begin{displaymath} <var>math</var>
+\end{displaymath}</code>.  These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="517" mergedindex="cp">\displaystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
+</para>
+<para>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode.  For this, the <code>\displaystyle</code> declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+<code>displaymath</code>.  Thus <code>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
+x_n\)</code> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it.  Another example is that
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+  \textsc{Name}  &\textsc{Series}  &\textsc{Sum}  \\  \hline
+  Arithmetic     &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+                   &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\)  \\
+  Geometric      &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+                   &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\)  \\
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>because it has no <code>\displaystyle</code>, the <samp>Arithmetic</samp> line&textrsquo;s
+fraction will be scrunched.  But, because of its <code>\displaystyle</code>,
+the <samp>Geometric</samp> line&textrsquo;s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="478"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="479"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="480"><r>package</r>, <code>amsfonts</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="481"><code>amsfonts</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="482"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="483"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+<file>amsmath</file> and <file>amssymb</file> (also be aware of the <file>mathtools</file>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <file>amsmath</file>).  New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">Subscripts & superscripts</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Also known as exponent or index.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">Math symbols</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Various mathematical squiggles.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">Math functions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Math function names like sin and exp.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">Math accents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Accents in math.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">Spacing in math mode</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">Over- and Underlining</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Things over or under formulas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">Spacing in math mode</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">Math miscellany</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stuff that doesn&textrsquo;t fit anywhere else.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
@@ -8118,450 +10832,501 @@
 <node name="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" spaces=" "><nodename>Subscripts & superscripts</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math symbols</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Subscripts & superscripts</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="379">superscript</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="380">subscript</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="381">exponent</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="516">_</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="517">^</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="484">superscript</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="485">subscript</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="486">exponent</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="518" mergedindex="cp">_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="519" mergedindex="cp">^</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>In math mode, use the caret character <code>^</code> to make the
-<var>exp</var> appear as a superscript: <code>^{<var>exp</var>}</code>.
-Similarly, in math mode, underscore <code>_{<var>exp</var>}</code> makes a
-subscript out of <var>exp</var>.
+<para>Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
 </para>
-<para>In this example the <code>0</code> and <code>1</code> appear as subscripts while the
-<code>2</code> is a superscript.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>base</var>^<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>^{<var>exp</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>base</var>_<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>_{<var>exp</var>}
 </pre></example> 
 
-<para>To have more than one character in <var>exp</var> use curly braces as in
-<code>e^{-2x}</code>.
+<para>Make <var>exp</var> appear as a superscript of <var>base</var> (with the caret
+character, <code>^</code>) or a subscript (with
+underscore, <code>_</code>).
 </para>
-<para>&latex; handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
-the natural way, so expressions such as <code>e^{x^2}</code> and
-<code>x_{a_0}</code> will look right.  It also does the right thing when
-something has both a subscript and a superscript.  In this example the
-<code>0</code> appears at the bottom of the integral sign while the <code>10</code>
-appears at the top.
-</para> 
+<para>In this example the <code>0</code>&textrsquo;s and <code>1</code>&textrsquo;s are subscripts while the
+<code>2</code>&textrsquo;s are superscripts.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+</pre></example> 
+
+<para>To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in <code>e^{-2x}</code>.
+This example&textrsquo;s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
+  (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+  \qquad
+  3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end{displaymath}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a construct
-such as <code>{}_t K^2</code> in math mode (the initial <code>{}</code> prevents
-the prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
-expression).
+<para>&latex; knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers.  So,
+expressions such as <code>e^{x^2}</code> and <code>x_{i_0}</code> give correct
+output.  Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+<var>base</var> a determined <var>exp</var>.  If you enter <code>\(3^3^3\)</code> then
+you get <samp>Double superscript</samp>.
 </para>
-<para>Outside of math mode, a construct like <code>A
-test$_\textnormal{subscript}$</code> will produce a subscript typeset in
-text mode, not math mode.  Note that there are packages specialized for
-writing Chemical formulas such as <file>mhchem</file>.
-<!-- c xx display mode -->
+<para>&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript.  In this example the integral has both.  They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
+  \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note the parentheses around <code>x=a</code> to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+</para>
+<para>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+<code>{}_t K^2</code>.  The empty curly braces <code>{}</code> give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+</para>
+<para>Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in <code>the expression x^2</code>, will get you
+the error <samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="487"><r>package</r>, <code>mhchem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="488"><code>mhchem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas.  There are packages for that such as
+<file>mhchem</file>; see CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="Math-symbols" spaces=" "><nodename>Math symbols</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math functions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Subscripts & superscripts</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math symbols</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="382">math symbols</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="383">symbols, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="384">greek letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="489">math symbols</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="490">symbols, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="491">greek letters</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you&textrsquo;re likely to need.
-For example, if you include <code>$\pi$</code> in your source, you will get
-the pi symbol <U>03C0</U>.
-</para> 
-<para>Below is a list of commonly-available symbols.  It is by no means an
-exhaustive list.  Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
-its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis.  Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
-be used only in math mode.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="492"><r>package</r>, <code>symbols</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="493"><code>symbols</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+
+<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses.  For example, if you include <code>$\pi$</code> in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol <U>03C0</U>.  See the <file>Comprehensive
+&latex; Symbol List</file> at
+<url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
-<para>To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode,
-see <ref label="_005censuremath"><xrefnodename>\ensuremath</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<para>Here is a list of commonly-used symbols.  It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis.  Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode.  To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see <ref label="_005censuremath"><xrefnodename>\ensuremath</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
-
 <!-- c xx Add Negation: @code{} for negations of relevant symbols -->
 <!-- c Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html -->
 
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="518">\|</indexterm>\|</itemformat></item>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="520" mergedindex="cp">\|</indexterm>\|</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2225</U> Parallel (relation). Synonym: <code>\parallel</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="519">\aleph</indexterm>\aleph</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="521" mergedindex="cp">\aleph</indexterm>\aleph</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2135</U> Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="520">\alpha</indexterm>\alpha</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B1</U> Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="522" mergedindex="cp">\alpha</indexterm>\alpha</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B1</U> Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="521">\amalg</indexterm>\amalg</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="523" mergedindex="cp">\amalg</indexterm>\amalg</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A3F</U> Disjoint union (binary)
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="522">\angle</indexterm>\angle</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="524" mergedindex="cp">\angle</indexterm>\angle</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2220</U> Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
 sign <code><</code> and angle bracket <code>\langle</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="523">\approx</indexterm>\approx</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="525" mergedindex="cp">\approx</indexterm>\approx</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2248</U> Almost equal to (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="524">\ast</indexterm>\ast</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="526" mergedindex="cp">\ast</indexterm>\ast</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2217</U> Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
 (binary). Synonym: <code>*</code>, which is often a superscript or
 subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar: <code>\star</code>, which is
 five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and
 sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="525">\asymp</indexterm>\asymp</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="527" mergedindex="cp">\asymp</indexterm>\asymp</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>224D</U> Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="526">\backslash</indexterm>\backslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="528" mergedindex="cp">\backslash</indexterm>\backslash</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>\ Backslash (ordinary).  Similar: set minus <code>\setminus</code>, and
 <code>\textbackslash</code> for backslash outside of math mode.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="527">\beta</indexterm>\beta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B2</U> Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="529" mergedindex="cp">\beta</indexterm>\beta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B2</U> Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="528">\bigcap</indexterm>\bigcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="530" mergedindex="cp">\bigcap</indexterm>\bigcap</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C2</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
 binary intersection <code>\cap</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="529">\bigcirc</indexterm>\bigcirc</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="531" mergedindex="cp">\bigcirc</indexterm>\bigcirc</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>26AA</U> Circle, larger (binary).  Similar: function
 composition <code>\circ</code>.
 <!-- c bb Best unicode symbol for this? -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="530">\bigcup</indexterm>\bigcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="532" mergedindex="cp">\bigcup</indexterm>\bigcup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C3</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
 union <code>\cup</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="531">\bigodot</indexterm>\bigodot</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="533" mergedindex="cp">\bigodot</indexterm>\bigodot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A00</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="532">\bigoplus</indexterm>\bigoplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="534" mergedindex="cp">\bigoplus</indexterm>\bigoplus</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A01</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="533">\bigotimes</indexterm>\bigotimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="535" mergedindex="cp">\bigotimes</indexterm>\bigotimes</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A02</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="534">\bigtriangledown</indexterm>\bigtriangledown</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="536" mergedindex="cp">\bigtriangledown</indexterm>\bigtriangledown</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25BD</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
 (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="535">\bigtriangleup</indexterm>\bigtriangleup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="537" mergedindex="cp">\bigtriangleup</indexterm>\bigtriangleup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B3</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="536">\bigsqcup</indexterm>\bigsqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="538" mergedindex="cp">\bigsqcup</indexterm>\bigsqcup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A06</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="537">\biguplus</indexterm>\biguplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="539" mergedindex="cp">\biguplus</indexterm>\biguplus</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A04</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
 (operator).  (Note that the name has only one p.)
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="538">\bigvee</indexterm>\bigvee</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="540" mergedindex="cp">\bigvee</indexterm>\bigvee</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C1</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="539">\bigwedge</indexterm>\bigwedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="541" mergedindex="cp">\bigwedge</indexterm>\bigwedge</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C0</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="540">\bot</indexterm>\bot</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="542" mergedindex="cp">\bot</indexterm>\bot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A5</U> Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
 set, or a contradiction (ordinary).  See also <code>\top</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="541">\bowtie</indexterm>\bowtie</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="543" mergedindex="cp">\bowtie</indexterm>\bowtie</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C8</U> Natural join of two relations (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="542">\Box</indexterm>\Box</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="544" mergedindex="cp">\Box</indexterm>\Box</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25A1</U> Modal operator for necessity; square open box
 (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 <!-- c bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="543">\bullet</indexterm>\bullet</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="385">bullet symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="545" mergedindex="cp">\bullet</indexterm>\bullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="494">bullet symbol</indexterm></cindex>
 <para><U>2022</U> Bullet (binary).  Similar: multiplication
 dot <code>\cdot</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="544">\cap</indexterm>\cap</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="546" mergedindex="cp">\cap</indexterm>\cap</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2229</U> Intersection of two sets (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigcap</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="545">\cdot</indexterm>\cdot</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="547" mergedindex="cp">\cdot</indexterm>\cdot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C5</U> Multiplication (binary).  Similar: Bullet
 dot <code>\bullet</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="546">\chi</indexterm>\chi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C7</U> Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="548" mergedindex="cp">\chi</indexterm>\chi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C7</U> Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="547">\circ</indexterm>\circ</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="549" mergedindex="cp">\circ</indexterm>\circ</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2218</U> Function composition, ring operator (binary).  Similar:
 variable-sized operator <code>\bigcirc</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="548">\clubsuit</indexterm>\clubsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="550" mergedindex="cp">\clubsuit</indexterm>\clubsuit</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2663</U> Club card suit (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="549">\complement</indexterm>\complement</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="551" mergedindex="cp">\complement</indexterm>\complement</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2201</U> Set complement, used as a superscript as in
-<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. Also
-used: <code>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</code> or <code>$\bar{S}$</code>.
+<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. Also used:
+<code>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</code> or <code>$\bar{S}$</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="550">\cong</indexterm>\cong</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="552" mergedindex="cp">\cong</indexterm>\cong</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2245</U> Congruent (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="551">\coprod</indexterm>\coprod</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="553" mergedindex="cp">\coprod</indexterm>\coprod</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2210</U> Coproduct (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="552">\cup</indexterm>\cup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="554" mergedindex="cp">\cup</indexterm>\cup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222A</U> Union of two sets (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigcup</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="553">\dagger</indexterm>\dagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="555" mergedindex="cp">\dagger</indexterm>\dagger</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2020</U> Dagger relation (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="554">\dashv</indexterm>\dashv</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="556" mergedindex="cp">\dashv</indexterm>\dashv</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A3</U> Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation).  Similar:
 turnstile <code>\vdash</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="555">\ddagger</indexterm>\ddagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="557" mergedindex="cp">\ddagger</indexterm>\ddagger</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2021</U> Double dagger relation (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="556">\Delta</indexterm>\Delta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0394</U> Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="558" mergedindex="cp">\Delta</indexterm>\Delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0394</U> Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="557">\delta</indexterm>\delta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B4</U> Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="559" mergedindex="cp">\delta</indexterm>\delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B4</U> Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="558">\Diamond</indexterm>\Diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="560" mergedindex="cp">\Diamond</indexterm>\Diamond</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C7</U> Large diamond operator (ordinary).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
-<!-- c bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="559">\diamond</indexterm>\diamond</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C4</U> Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary).  Similar: large
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="561" mergedindex="cp">\diamond</indexterm>\diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C4</U> Diamond operator (binary).  Similar: large
 diamond <code>\Diamond</code>, circle bullet <code>\bullet</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="560">\diamondsuit</indexterm>\diamondsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="562" mergedindex="cp">\diamondsuit</indexterm>\diamondsuit</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2662</U> Diamond card suit (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="561">\div</indexterm>\div</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="563" mergedindex="cp">\div</indexterm>\div</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00F7</U> Division sign (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="562">\doteq</indexterm>\doteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="564" mergedindex="cp">\doteq</indexterm>\doteq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2250</U> Approaches the limit (relation).  Similar: geometrically equal
 to <code>\Doteq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="563">\downarrow</indexterm>\downarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2193</U> Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar: double line down
-arrow <code>\Downarrow</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="565" mergedindex="cp">\downarrow</indexterm>\downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2193</U> Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar:
+<code>\Downarrow</code> double line down arrow.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="564">\Downarrow</indexterm>\Downarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D3</U> Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar: single line down
-arrow <code>\downarrow</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="566" mergedindex="cp">\Downarrow</indexterm>\Downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D3</U> Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar:
+<code>\downarrow</code> single line down arrow.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="565">\ell</indexterm>\ell</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="567" mergedindex="cp">\ell</indexterm>\ell</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2113</U> Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="566">\emptyset</indexterm>\emptyset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="568" mergedindex="cp">\emptyset</indexterm>\emptyset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2205</U> Empty set symbol (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <code>\varnothing</code>.
 <!-- c bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset? -->
 </para>	
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="567">\epsilon</indexterm>\epsilon</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F5</U> Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="569" mergedindex="cp">\epsilon</indexterm>\epsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F5</U> Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
 Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
 letter epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code> <U>03B5</U>. Related:
 the set membership relation <code>\in</code> <U>2208</U>.
 <!-- c src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and -->
 <!-- c Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used. -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="568">\equiv</indexterm>\equiv</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="570" mergedindex="cp">\equiv</indexterm>\equiv</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2261</U> Equivalence (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="569">\eta</indexterm>\eta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B7</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="571" mergedindex="cp">\eta</indexterm>\eta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B7</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="570">\exists</indexterm>\exists</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="572" mergedindex="cp">\exists</indexterm>\exists</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2203</U> Existential quantifier (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="571">\flat</indexterm>\flat</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="573" mergedindex="cp">\flat</indexterm>\flat</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266D</U> Musical flat (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="572">\forall</indexterm>\forall</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="574" mergedindex="cp">\forall</indexterm>\forall</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2200</U> Universal quantifier (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="573">\frown</indexterm>\frown</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="575" mergedindex="cp">\frown</indexterm>\frown</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2322</U> Downward curving arc (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="574">\Gamma</indexterm>\Gamma</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0393</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="576" mergedindex="cp">\Gamma</indexterm>\Gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0393</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="575">\gamma</indexterm>\gamma</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B3</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="577" mergedindex="cp">\gamma</indexterm>\gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B3</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="576">\ge</indexterm>\ge</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="578" mergedindex="cp">\ge</indexterm>\ge</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2265</U> Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
 for <code>\geq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="577">\geq</indexterm>\geq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="579" mergedindex="cp">\geq</indexterm>\geq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2265</U> Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
 for <code>\ge</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="578">\gets</indexterm>\gets</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="580" mergedindex="cp">\gets</indexterm>\gets</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2190</U> Is assigned the value (relation).
 Synonym: <code>\leftarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="579">\gg</indexterm>\gg</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="581" mergedindex="cp">\gg</indexterm>\gg</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>226B</U> Much greater than (relation).  Similar: much less
 than <code>\ll</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="580">\hbar</indexterm>\hbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="582" mergedindex="cp">\hbar</indexterm>\hbar</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>210F</U> Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="581">\heartsuit</indexterm>\heartsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="583" mergedindex="cp">\heartsuit</indexterm>\heartsuit</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2661</U> Heart card suit (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="582">\hookleftarrow</indexterm>\hookleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="584" mergedindex="cp">\hookleftarrow</indexterm>\hookleftarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21A9</U> Hooked left arrow (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="583">\hookrightarrow</indexterm>\hookrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="585" mergedindex="cp">\hookrightarrow</indexterm>\hookrightarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21AA</U> Hooked right arrow (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="584">\iff</indexterm>\iff</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="586" mergedindex="cp">\iff</indexterm>\iff</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F7</U> If and only if (relation).  It is <code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>
 with a <code>\thickmuskip</code> on either side.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="585">\Im</indexterm>\Im</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="587" mergedindex="cp">\Im</indexterm>\Im</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2111</U> Imaginary part (ordinary).  See: real part <code>\Re</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="586">\in</indexterm>\in</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2208</U> Set element (relation).  See also: lower case lunate
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="588" mergedindex="cp">\imath</indexterm>\imath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="495">dotless i, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="589" mergedindex="cp">\in</indexterm>\in</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2208</U> Set element (relation).  See also: lowercase lunate
 epsilon <code>\epsilon</code><U>03F5</U> and small letter script
 epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="587">\infty</indexterm>\infty</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="590" mergedindex="cp">\infty</indexterm>\infty</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221E</U> Infinity (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="588">\int</indexterm>\int</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="591" mergedindex="cp">\int</indexterm>\int</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222B</U> Integral (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="589">\iota</indexterm>\iota</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B9</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="592" mergedindex="cp">\iota</indexterm>\iota</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B9</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="590">\Join</indexterm>\Join</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="593" mergedindex="cp">\Join</indexterm>\Join</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A1D</U> Condensed bowtie symbol (relation).  Not available in Plain
 &tex;.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="591">\kappa</indexterm>\kappa</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BA</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="594" mergedindex="cp">\jmath</indexterm>\jmath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="496">dotless j, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="592">\Lambda</indexterm>\Lambda</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039B</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="595" mergedindex="cp">\kappa</indexterm>\kappa</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BA</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="593">\lambda</indexterm>\lambda</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BB</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="596" mergedindex="cp">\Lambda</indexterm>\Lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039B</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="594">\land</indexterm>\land</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="597" mergedindex="cp">\lambda</indexterm>\lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BB</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="598" mergedindex="cp">\land</indexterm>\land</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2227</U> Logical and (binary).  This is a synonym for <code>\wedge</code>.
 See also logical or <code>\lor</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="595">\langle</indexterm>\langle</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="599" mergedindex="cp">\langle</indexterm>\langle</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27E8</U> Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening).  Similar:
 less-than <code><</code>. Matches <code>\rangle</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="596">\lbrace</indexterm>\lbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="600" mergedindex="cp">\lbrace</indexterm>\lbrace</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007B</U> Left curly brace
 (opening). Synonym: <code>\{</code>. Matches <code>\rbrace</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="597">\lbrack</indexterm>\lbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="601" mergedindex="cp">\lbrack</indexterm>\lbrack</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>005B</U> Left square bracket (opening).
 Synonym: <code>[</code>. Matches <code>\rbrack</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="598">\lceil</indexterm>\lceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="602" mergedindex="cp">\lceil</indexterm>\lceil</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2308</U> Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
 shaved off (opening). Matches <code>\rceil</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="599">\le</indexterm>\le</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="603" mergedindex="cp">\le</indexterm>\le</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2264</U> Less than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
 for <code>\leq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="600">\leadsto</indexterm>\leadsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="604" mergedindex="cp">\leadsto</indexterm>\leadsto</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21DD</U> Squiggly right arrow (relation).  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
 <code>\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}</code> in the
 preamble and then use <code>\Leadsto</code> instead.
 <!-- c bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="601">\Leftarrow</indexterm>\Leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="605" mergedindex="cp">\Leftarrow</indexterm>\Leftarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D0</U> Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation).  Similar:
 single-line left arrow <code>\leftarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="602">\leftarrow</indexterm>\leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="606" mergedindex="cp">\leftarrow</indexterm>\leftarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2190</U> Single-line left arrow (relation).
 Synonym: <code>\gets</code>. Similar: double-line left
 arrow <code>\Leftarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="603">\leftharpoondown</indexterm>\leftharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="607" mergedindex="cp">\leftharpoondown</indexterm>\leftharpoondown</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BD</U> Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="604">\leftharpoonup</indexterm>\leftharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="608" mergedindex="cp">\leftharpoonup</indexterm>\leftharpoonup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BC</U> Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="605">\Leftrightarrow</indexterm>\Leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="609" mergedindex="cp">\Leftrightarrow</indexterm>\Leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D4</U> Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
 Similar: single-line double headed arrow <code>\leftrightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="606">\leftrightarrow</indexterm>\leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="610" mergedindex="cp">\leftrightarrow</indexterm>\leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2194</U> Single-line double-headed arrow (relation).  Similar:
 double-line double headed arrow <code>\Leftrightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="607">\leq</indexterm>\leq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="611" mergedindex="cp">\leq</indexterm>\leq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2264</U> Less than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
 for <code>\le</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="608">\lfloor</indexterm>\lfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="612" mergedindex="cp">\lfloor</indexterm>\lfloor</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>230A</U> Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: <code>\floor</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="609">\lhd</indexterm>\lhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="613" mergedindex="cp">\lhd</indexterm>\lhd</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
 Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
 <file>amssymb</file> and use <code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which is a relation
 and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="610">\ll</indexterm>\ll</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="614" mergedindex="cp">\ll</indexterm>\ll</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>226A</U> Much less than (relation).  Similar: much greater
 than <code>\gg</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="611">\lnot</indexterm>\lnot</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="615" mergedindex="cp">\lnot</indexterm>\lnot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00AC</U> Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: <code>\neg</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="612">\longleftarrow</indexterm>\longleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="616" mergedindex="cp">\longleftarrow</indexterm>\longleftarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F5</U> Long single-line left arrow (relation).  Similar: long
 double-line left arrow <code>\Longleftarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="613">\longleftrightarrow</indexterm>\longleftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="617" mergedindex="cp">\longleftrightarrow</indexterm>\longleftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F7</U> Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation).  Similar: long
 double-line double-headed arrow <code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="614">\longmapsto</indexterm>\longmapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="618" mergedindex="cp">\longmapsto</indexterm>\longmapsto</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27FC</U> Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
 (relation).  Similar: shorter version <code>\mapsto</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="615">\longrightarrow</indexterm>\longrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="619" mergedindex="cp">\longrightarrow</indexterm>\longrightarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F6</U> Long single-line right arrow (relation).  Similar: long
 double-line right arrow <code>\Longrightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="616">\lor</indexterm>\lor</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="620" mergedindex="cp">\lor</indexterm>\lor</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2228</U> Logical or (binary).  Synonym: wedge <code>\wedge</code>. 
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="617">\mapsto</indexterm>\mapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="621" mergedindex="cp">\mapsto</indexterm>\mapsto</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21A6</U> Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
 Similar: longer version <code>\longmapsto</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="618">\mho</indexterm>\mho</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="622" mergedindex="cp">\mho</indexterm>\mho</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2127</U> Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
 Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="619">\mid</indexterm>\mid</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="623" mergedindex="cp">\mid</indexterm>\mid</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2223</U> Single-line vertical bar (relation).  A typical use of
 <code>\mid</code> is for a set <code>\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}</code>.
 </para>
@@ -8571,125 +11336,126 @@
 ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols.  For absolute value, see the entry
 for <code>\vert</code> and for norm see the entry for <code>\Vert</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="620">\models</indexterm>\models</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="624" mergedindex="cp">\models</indexterm>\models</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A8</U> Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
 (relation).  Similar: long double dash <code>\vDash</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="621">\mp</indexterm>\mp</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="625" mergedindex="cp">\mp</indexterm>\mp</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2213</U> Minus or plus (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="622">\mu</indexterm>\mu</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BC</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="626" mergedindex="cp">\mu</indexterm>\mu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BC</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="623">\nabla</indexterm>\nabla</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="627" mergedindex="cp">\nabla</indexterm>\nabla</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2207</U> Hamilton&textrsquo;s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="624">\natural</indexterm>\natural</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="628" mergedindex="cp">\natural</indexterm>\natural</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266E</U> Musical natural notation (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="625">\ne</indexterm>\ne</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="629" mergedindex="cp">\ne</indexterm>\ne</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2260</U> Not equal (relation). Synonym: <code>\neq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="626">\nearrow</indexterm>\nearrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="630" mergedindex="cp">\nearrow</indexterm>\nearrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2197</U> North-east arrow (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="627">\neg</indexterm>\neg</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="631" mergedindex="cp">\neg</indexterm>\neg</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00AC</U> Logical negation (ordinary).
 Synonym: <code>\lnot</code>. Sometimes instead used for
 negation: <code>\sim</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="628">\neq</indexterm>\neq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="632" mergedindex="cp">\neq</indexterm>\neq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2260</U> Not equal (relation). Synonym: <code>\ne</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="629">\ni</indexterm>\ni</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="633" mergedindex="cp">\ni</indexterm>\ni</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220B</U> Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
 (relation). Synonym: <code>\owns</code>. Similar: is a member
 of <code>\in</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="630">\not</indexterm>\not</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0020</U><U>00A0</U><U>0338</U> Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="634" mergedindex="cp">\not</indexterm>\not</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><!-- c the "@ "s put in spaces so the not slash doesn't hit the next char. -->
+<para><U>0020</U><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/>Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
 following operator (relation).
-<!-- c Need blank space for it to overstrike -->
 </para>
-<para>Many negated operators that don&textrsquo;t require <code>\not</code> are available,
+<para>Many negated operators are available that don&textrsquo;t require <code>\not</code>,
 particularly with the <file>amssymb</file> package. For example, <code>\notin</code>
-is probably typographically preferable to <code>\not\in</code>.
+is typographically preferable to <code>\not\in</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="631">\notin</indexterm>\notin</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="635" mergedindex="cp">\notin</indexterm>\notin</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2209</U> Not an element of (relation).  Similar: not subset
 of <code>\nsubseteq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="632">\nu</indexterm>\nu</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BD</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="636" mergedindex="cp">\nu</indexterm>\nu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BD</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="633">\nwarrow</indexterm>\nwarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="637" mergedindex="cp">\nwarrow</indexterm>\nwarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2196</U> North-west arrow (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="634">\odot</indexterm>\odot</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="638" mergedindex="cp">\odot</indexterm>\odot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2299</U> Dot inside a circle (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigodot</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="635">\oint</indexterm>\oint</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222E</U> Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="639" mergedindex="cp">\oint</indexterm>\oint</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222E</U> Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="636">\Omega</indexterm>\Omega</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A9</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="640" mergedindex="cp">\Omega</indexterm>\Omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A9</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="637">\omega</indexterm>\omega</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C9</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="641" mergedindex="cp">\omega</indexterm>\omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C9</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="638">\ominus</indexterm>\ominus</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="642" mergedindex="cp">\ominus</indexterm>\ominus</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2296</U> Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="639">\oplus</indexterm>\oplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="643" mergedindex="cp">\oplus</indexterm>\oplus</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2295</U> Plus sign inside a circle (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigoplus</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="640">\oslash</indexterm>\oslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="644" mergedindex="cp">\oslash</indexterm>\oslash</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2298</U> Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="641">\otimes</indexterm>\otimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="645" mergedindex="cp">\otimes</indexterm>\otimes</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2297</U> Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary).  Similar:
 variable-sized operator <code>\bigotimes</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="642">\owns</indexterm>\owns</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="646" mergedindex="cp">\owns</indexterm>\owns</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220B</U> Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
 (relation). Synonym: <code>\ni</code>. Similar: is a member
 of <code>\in</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="643">\parallel</indexterm>\parallel</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="647" mergedindex="cp">\parallel</indexterm>\parallel</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2225</U> Parallel (relation). Synonym: <code>\|</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="644">\partial</indexterm>\partial</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="648" mergedindex="cp">\partial</indexterm>\partial</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2202</U> Partial differential (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="645">\perp</indexterm>\perp</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="649" mergedindex="cp">\perp</indexterm>\perp</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27C2</U> Perpendicular (relation).  Similar: <code>\bot</code> uses the
 same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
 ordinary.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="646">\phi</indexterm>\phi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D5</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="650" mergedindex="cp">\phi</indexterm>\phi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D5</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <code>\varphi</code> <U>03C6</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="647">\Pi</indexterm>\Pi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A0</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="651" mergedindex="cp">\Pi</indexterm>\Pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A0</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="648">\pi</indexterm>\pi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C0</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="652" mergedindex="cp">\pi</indexterm>\pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C0</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <code>\varpi</code> <U>03D6</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="649">\pm</indexterm>\pm</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="653" mergedindex="cp">\pm</indexterm>\pm</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00B1</U> Plus or minus (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="650">\prec</indexterm>\prec</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="654" mergedindex="cp">\prec</indexterm>\prec</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>227A</U> Precedes (relation). Similar: less than <code><</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="651">\preceq</indexterm>\preceq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="655" mergedindex="cp">\preceq</indexterm>\preceq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2AAF</U> Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
 equals <code>\leq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="652">\prime</indexterm>\prime</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="656" mergedindex="cp">\prime</indexterm>\prime</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2032</U> Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
 Typically used as a superscript: <code>$f^\prime$</code>; <code>$f^\prime$</code>
 and <code>$f'$</code> produce the same result.  An advantage of the second
@@ -8699,775 +11465,1233 @@
 single quote <code>'</code> in text mode produces a different character
 (apostrophe).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="653">\prod</indexterm>\prod</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="657" mergedindex="cp">\prod</indexterm>\prod</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220F</U> Product (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="654">\propto</indexterm>\propto</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="658" mergedindex="cp">\propto</indexterm>\propto</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221D</U> Is proportional to (relation)
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="655">\Psi</indexterm>\Psi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A8</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="659" mergedindex="cp">\Psi</indexterm>\Psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A8</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="656">\psi</indexterm>\psi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C8</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="660" mergedindex="cp">\psi</indexterm>\psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C8</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="657">\rangle</indexterm>\rangle</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27E9</U> Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
-than <code>></code>.  Matches:<code>\langle</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="661" mergedindex="cp">\rangle</indexterm>\rangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27E9</U> Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than <code>></code>. Matches:<code>\langle</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="658">\rbrace</indexterm>\rbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="662" mergedindex="cp">\rbrace</indexterm>\rbrace</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007D</U> Right curly brace
 (closing). Synonym: <code>\}</code>. Matches <code>\lbrace</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="659">\rbrack</indexterm>\rbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="663" mergedindex="cp">\rbrack</indexterm>\rbrack</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>005D</U> Right square bracket
 (closing). Synonym: <code>]</code>. Matches <code>\lbrack</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="660">\rceil</indexterm>\rceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="664" mergedindex="cp">\rceil</indexterm>\rceil</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2309</U> Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches <code>\lceil</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="661">\Re</indexterm>\Re</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="665" mergedindex="cp">\Re</indexterm>\Re</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>211C</U> Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
 double-line, or blackboard bold, R <code>\mathbb{R}</code>; to access
 this, load the <file>amsfonts</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="662">\restriction</indexterm>\restriction</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BE</U> Restriction of a function
-(relation). Synonym: <code>\upharpoonright</code>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="666" mergedindex="cp">\restriction</indexterm>\restriction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BE</U> Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+<code>\upharpoonright</code>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="663">\revemptyset</indexterm>\revemptyset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="667" mergedindex="cp">\revemptyset</indexterm>\revemptyset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>29B0</U> Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary).  Related:
 <code>\varnothing</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>stix</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="664">\rfloor</indexterm>\rfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="668" mergedindex="cp">\rfloor</indexterm>\rfloor</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>230B</U> Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
 off (closing). Matches <code>\lfloor</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="665">\rhd</indexterm>\rhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="669" mergedindex="cp">\rhd</indexterm>\rhd</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
 Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
-load <file>amssymb</file> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which
-is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+load <file>amssymb</file> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="666">\rho</indexterm>\rho</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C1</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="670" mergedindex="cp">\rho</indexterm>\rho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C1</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
 <code>\varrho</code> <U>03F1</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="667">\Rightarrow</indexterm>\Rightarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D2</U> Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar:
-right single-line arrow <code>\rightarrow</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="671" mergedindex="cp">\Rightarrow</indexterm>\Rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D2</U> Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow <code>\rightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="668">\rightarrow</indexterm>\rightarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2192</U> Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: <code>\to</code>. Similar: right double line arrow <code>\Rightarrow</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="672" mergedindex="cp">\rightarrow</indexterm>\rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2192</U> Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym: <code>\to</code>. Similar: right double line
+arrow <code>\Rightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="669">\rightharpoondown</indexterm>\rightharpoondown</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C1</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="673" mergedindex="cp">\rightharpoondown</indexterm>\rightharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C1</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation). 
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="670">\rightharpoonup</indexterm>\rightharpoonup</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C0</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="674" mergedindex="cp">\rightharpoonup</indexterm>\rightharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C0</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="671">\rightleftharpoons</indexterm>\rightleftharpoons</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21CC</U> Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="675" mergedindex="cp">\rightleftharpoons</indexterm>\rightleftharpoons</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21CC</U> Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="672">\searrow</indexterm>\searrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="676" mergedindex="cp">\searrow</indexterm>\searrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2198</U> Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="673">\setminus</indexterm>\setminus</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>29F5</U> Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \
-(binary). Similar: backslash <code>\backslash</code> and also
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="677" mergedindex="cp">\setminus</indexterm>\setminus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>29F5</U> Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash <code>\backslash</code> and also
 <code>\textbackslash</code> outside of math mode.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="674">\sharp</indexterm>\sharp</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="678" mergedindex="cp">\sharp</indexterm>\sharp</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266F</U> Musical sharp (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="675">\Sigma</indexterm>\Sigma</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A3</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="679" mergedindex="cp">\Sigma</indexterm>\Sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A3</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="676">\sigma</indexterm>\sigma</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C3</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="680" mergedindex="cp">\sigma</indexterm>\sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C3</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
 <code>\varsigma</code> <U>03C2</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="677">\sim</indexterm>\sim</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="681" mergedindex="cp">\sim</indexterm>\sim</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>223C</U> Similar, in a relation (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="678">\simeq</indexterm>\simeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="682" mergedindex="cp">\simeq</indexterm>\simeq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2243</U> Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="679">\smallint</indexterm>\smallint</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="683" mergedindex="cp">\smallint</indexterm>\smallint</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222B</U> Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
 display (operator).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="680">\smile</indexterm>\smile</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="684" mergedindex="cp">\smile</indexterm>\smile</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2323</U> Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="681">\spadesuit</indexterm>\spadesuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="685" mergedindex="cp">\spadesuit</indexterm>\spadesuit</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2660</U> Spade card suit (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="682">\sqcap</indexterm>\sqcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="686" mergedindex="cp">\sqcap</indexterm>\sqcap</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2293</U> Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
 intersection <code>cap</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="683">\sqcup</indexterm>\sqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="687" mergedindex="cp">\sqcup</indexterm>\sqcup</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2294</U> Square union symbol (binary). Similar:
 union <code>cup</code>. Related: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigsqcup</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="684">\sqsubset</indexterm>\sqsubset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="688" mergedindex="cp">\sqsubset</indexterm>\sqsubset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>228F</U> Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
 subset <code>\subset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="685">\sqsubseteq</indexterm>\sqsubseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="689" mergedindex="cp">\sqsubseteq</indexterm>\sqsubseteq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2291</U> Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
 equal to <code>\subseteq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="686">\sqsupset</indexterm>\sqsupset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="690" mergedindex="cp">\sqsupset</indexterm>\sqsupset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2290</U> Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
 superset <code>\supset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="687">\sqsupseteq</indexterm>\sqsupseteq</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2292</U> Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
-equal <code>\supseteq</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="691" mergedindex="cp">\sqsupseteq</indexterm>\sqsupseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2292</U> Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal <code>\supseteq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="688">\star</indexterm>\star</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C6</U> Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation
-but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar: the
-synonyms asterisk <code>*</code> and <code>\ast</code>, which are six-pointed,
-and more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene
-star.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="692" mergedindex="cp">\star</indexterm>\star</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C6</U> Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk <code>*</code> and <code>\ast</code>, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="689">\subset</indexterm>\subset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="693" mergedindex="cp">\subset</indexterm>\subset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2282</U> Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="690">\subseteq</indexterm>\subseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="694" mergedindex="cp">\subseteq</indexterm>\subseteq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2286</U> Subset or equal to (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="691">\succ</indexterm>\succ</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="695" mergedindex="cp">\succ</indexterm>\succ</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>227B</U> Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
 than <code>></code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="692">\succeq</indexterm>\succeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="696" mergedindex="cp">\succeq</indexterm>\succeq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2AB0</U> Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less
 than or equal to <code>\leq</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="693">\sum</indexterm>\sum</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="697" mergedindex="cp">\sum</indexterm>\sum</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2211</U> Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
 sigma <code>\Sigma</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="694">\supset</indexterm>\supset</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="698" mergedindex="cp">\supset</indexterm>\supset</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2283</U> Superset (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="695">\supseteq</indexterm>\supseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="699" mergedindex="cp">\supseteq</indexterm>\supseteq</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2287</U> Superset or equal to (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="696">\surd</indexterm>\surd</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="700" mergedindex="cp">\surd</indexterm>\surd</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221A</U> Radical symbol (ordinary).  The &latex; command
 <code>\sqrt{...}</code> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
 that extends to cover the argument.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="697">\swarrow</indexterm>\swarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="701" mergedindex="cp">\swarrow</indexterm>\swarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2199</U> Southwest-pointing  arrow (relation).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="698">\tau</indexterm>\tau</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C4</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="702" mergedindex="cp">\tau</indexterm>\tau</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C4</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="699">\theta</indexterm>\theta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B8</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="703" mergedindex="cp">\theta</indexterm>\theta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B8</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
 <code>\vartheta</code> <U>03D1</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="700">\times</indexterm>\times</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="704" mergedindex="cp">\times</indexterm>\times</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00D7</U> Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
 also <code>\cdot</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="701">\to</indexterm>\to</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="705" mergedindex="cp">\to</indexterm>\to</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2192</U> Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
 Synonym: <code>\rightarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="702">\top</indexterm>\top</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="706" mergedindex="cp">\top</indexterm>\top</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A4</U> Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
 (ordinary). See also <code>\bot</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="703">\triangle</indexterm>\triangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="707" mergedindex="cp">\triangle</indexterm>\triangle</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B3</U> Triangle (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="704">\triangleleft</indexterm>\triangleleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="708" mergedindex="cp">\triangleleft</indexterm>\triangleleft</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Not-filled triangle pointing left
 (binary). Similar: <code>\lhd</code>. For the normal subgroup symbol you
 should load <file>amssymb</file> and use <code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which
 is a relation and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="705">\triangleright</indexterm>\triangleright</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="709" mergedindex="cp">\triangleright</indexterm>\triangleright</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B7</U> Not-filled triangle pointing right
 (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
 <file>amssymb</file> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
 relation and so gives better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="706">\unlhd</indexterm>\unlhd</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B4</U> Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
-is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.  For
-the normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="710" mergedindex="cp">\unlhd</indexterm>\unlhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B4</U> Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
 use <code>\vartrianglelefteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
 better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="707">\unrhd</indexterm>\unrhd</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B5</U> Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
-is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.  For
-the normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="711" mergedindex="cp">\unrhd</indexterm>\unrhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B5</U> Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
 use <code>\vartrianglerighteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
 better spacing).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="708">\Uparrow</indexterm>\Uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="712" mergedindex="cp">\Uparrow</indexterm>\Uparrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D1</U> Double-line upward-pointing arrow
 (relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
 arrow <code>\uparrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="709">\uparrow</indexterm>\uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="713" mergedindex="cp">\uparrow</indexterm>\uparrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2191</U> Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
 (relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
 arrow <code>\Uparrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="710">\Updownarrow</indexterm>\Updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="714" mergedindex="cp">\Updownarrow</indexterm>\Updownarrow</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D5</U> Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
 (relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
 arrow <code>\updownarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="711">\updownarrow</indexterm>\updownarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2195</U> Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow <code>\Updownarrow</code>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="715" mergedindex="cp">\updownarrow</indexterm>\updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2195</U> Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow <code>\Updownarrow</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="712">\upharpoonright</indexterm>\upharpoonright</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="716" mergedindex="cp">\upharpoonright</indexterm>\upharpoonright</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BE</U> Up harpoon, with barb on right side
-(relation). Synonym: <code>&backslashchar;restriction</code>.  Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <code>&backslashchar;restriction</code>.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="713">\uplus</indexterm>\uplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="717" mergedindex="cp">\uplus</indexterm>\uplus</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>228E</U> Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
 the middle (binary). Similar: union <code>\cup</code>. Related:
 variable-sized operator <code>\biguplus</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="714">\Upsilon</indexterm>\Upsilon</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A5</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="718" mergedindex="cp">\Upsilon</indexterm>\Upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A5</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="715">\upsilon</indexterm>\upsilon</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C5</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="719" mergedindex="cp">\upsilon</indexterm>\upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C5</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="716">\varepsilon</indexterm>\varepsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="720" mergedindex="cp">\varepsilon</indexterm>\varepsilon</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B5</U> Small letter script epsilon (ordinary).  This is
 more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
 <code>\epsilon</code> <U>03F5</U>. Related: set
 membership <code>\in</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="717">\vanothing</indexterm>\vanothing</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2205</U> Empty set symbol. Similar:
-<code>\emptyset</code>. Related: <code>\revemptyset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="721" mergedindex="cp">\vanothing</indexterm>\vanothing</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2205</U> Empty set symbol. Similar: <code>\emptyset</code>. Related:
+<code>\revemptyset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="718">\varphi</indexterm>\varphi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C6</U> Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="722" mergedindex="cp">\varphi</indexterm>\varphi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C6</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <code>\phi</code> <U>03D5</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="719">\varpi</indexterm>\varpi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D6</U> Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="723" mergedindex="cp">\varpi</indexterm>\varpi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D6</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <code>\pi</code> <U>03C0</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="720">\varrho</indexterm>\varrho</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F1</U> Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="724" mergedindex="cp">\varrho</indexterm>\varrho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F1</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 The non-variant form is <code>\rho</code> <U>03C1</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="721">\varsigma</indexterm>\varsigma</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C2</U> Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="725" mergedindex="cp">\varsigma</indexterm>\varsigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C2</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
 (ordinary).  The non-variant form is
 <code>\sigma</code> <U>03C3</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="722">\vartheta</indexterm>\vartheta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D1</U> Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="726" mergedindex="cp">\vartheta</indexterm>\vartheta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D1</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
 (ordinary).  The non-variant form is
 <code>\theta</code> <U>03B8</U>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="723">\vdash</indexterm>\vdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="727" mergedindex="cp">\vdash</indexterm>\vdash</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A2</U> Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
 (relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
 half-circle <code>\dashv</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="724">\vee</indexterm>\vee</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="728" mergedindex="cp">\vee</indexterm>\vee</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2228</U> Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
 logical and <code>\wedge</code>. Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigvee</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="725">\Vert</indexterm>\Vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="729" mergedindex="cp">\Vert</indexterm>\Vert</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2016</U> Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
 bar <code>\vert</code>.
 </para>
-<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and add
-<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</code> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line
-vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the
-document body you write the starred version <code>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</code>
-then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the
-argument, whereas with <code>\norm{M^\perp}</code> the bars do not grow
-with the height of the argument but instead are the default height,
-and <code>\norm[<var>size command</var>]{M^\perp}</code> also gives bars that
-do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size command</var>,
-e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and put in
+your preamble
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</code> then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\norm{M^\perp}</code> the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and <code>\norm[<var>size
+command</var>]{M^\perp}</code> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the <var>size command</var>, e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="726">\vert</indexterm>\vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="730" mergedindex="cp">\vert</indexterm>\vert</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007C</U> Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
 vertical bar <code>\Vert</code>. For such that, as in the definition of a 
 set, use <code>\mid</code> because it is a relation.  
 </para>
-<para>For absolute value you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and add
-<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</code> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical
-bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
-write the starred version <code>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</code> then the
-height of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument,
-whereas with <code>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</code> the bars do not grow with
-the height of the argument but instead are the default height, and
-<code>\abs[<var>size command</var>]{\frac{22}{7}}</code> also gives bars
-that do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size
-command</var>, e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+<para>For absolute value you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and in your
+preamble put
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</code> then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</code> the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+<code>\abs[<var>size command</var>]{\frac{22}{7}}</code> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size command</var>,
+e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="727">\wedge</indexterm>\wedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="731" mergedindex="cp">\wedge</indexterm>\wedge</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2227</U> Logical and (binary).  Synonym: <code>\land</code>.  See also
 logical or <code>\vee</code>. Similar: variable-sized
 operator <code>\bigwedge</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="728">\wp</indexterm>\wp</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="732" mergedindex="cp">\wp</indexterm>\wp</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2118</U> Weierstrass p (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="729">\wr</indexterm>\wr</itemformat></item>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="733" mergedindex="cp">\wr</indexterm>\wr</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2240</U> Wreath product (binary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="730">\Xi</indexterm>\Xi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039E</U> Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="734" mergedindex="cp">\Xi</indexterm>\Xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039E</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="731">\xi</indexterm>\xi</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BE</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="735" mergedindex="cp">\xi</indexterm>\xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BE</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="732">\zeta</indexterm>\zeta</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B6</U> Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="736" mergedindex="cp">\zeta</indexterm>\zeta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B6</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<para>The following symbols are most often used in plain text but &latex;
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="737" mergedindex="cp">\mathdollar</indexterm>\mathdollar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="738" mergedindex="cp">\mathparagraph</indexterm>\mathparagraph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, <U>00B6</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="739" mergedindex="cp">\mathsection</indexterm>\mathsection</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Section sign in math mode <U>00A7</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="740" mergedindex="cp">\mathsterling</indexterm>\mathsterling</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="741" mergedindex="cp">\mathunderscore</indexterm>\mathunderscore</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">Blackboard bold</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Doublestruck characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">Calligraphic</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cursive characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\boldmath & \unboldmath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Symbols in boldface.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                       ">Dots</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ellipses, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Blackboard-bold" spaces=" "><nodename>Blackboard bold</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Calligraphic</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Blackboard bold</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="497">blackboard bold</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="498">doublestruck</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{amssymb}   % in preamble
+  ... 
+\mathbb{<var>uppercase-letter</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here 
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the <code>\mathbb{N}</code> gives blackboard bold symbol <U>2115</U>
+representing the natural numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+</para>
+<para>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Calligraphic" spaces=" "><nodename>Calligraphic</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\boldmath & \unboldmath</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Blackboard bold</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Calligraphic</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="499">calligraphic fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="500">script fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="501">fonts, script</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\mathcal{<var>uppercase-letters</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use a script-like font.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error.  Instead you get unexpected output.  For instance,
+<code>\mathcal{g}</code> outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+<code>\mathcal{+}</code> outputs a plus sign.  
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath" spaces=" "><nodename>\boldmath & \unboldmath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Dots</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Calligraphic</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\boldmath</code> & <code>\unboldmath</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="502">boldface mathematics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="503">symbols, boldface</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="742" mergedindex="cp">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="743" mergedindex="cp">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\boldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\unboldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="744" mergedindex="cp">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="745" mergedindex="cp">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <var>math</var> to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example each <code>\boldmath</code> command takes place inside an
+<code>\mbox</code>,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which means <code>\boldmath</code> is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set <code>v</code>
+and <code>u</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <code>Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)</code>, then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</samp> and <samp>LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="504"><r>package</r>, <code>bm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="505"><code>bm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many issues with <code>\boldmath</code>.  New documents should use
+the <file>bm</file> package provided by the &latex; Project team.  A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>shows that it is an improvement over <code>\boldmath</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Dots" spaces=" "><nodename>Dots</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\boldmath & \unboldmath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Dots, horizontal or vertical</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="506">ellipses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="507">dots</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{array}{cccc}
+  a_{0,0}    &a_{0,1}   &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\
+  a_{1,0}    &\ddots                     \\
+  \vdots
+\end{array}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; provides these.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="ellipses-cdots">ellipses cdots</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="746" mergedindex="cp">\cdots</indexterm>\cdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in <U>22EF</U>.  Used as: <code>\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1}
+\)</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-ddots">ellipses ddots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="747" mergedindex="cp">\ddots</indexterm>\ddots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Diagonal ellipsis, <U>22F1</U>.  See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-ldots">ellipses ldots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="748" mergedindex="cp">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, <U>2026</U>.  Used as: <code>\(
+x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</code>.  Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is <code>\mathellipsis</code>.  A synonym from the <file>amsmath</file>
+package is <code>\hdots</code>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+<code>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</code>.  (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for <code>\ldots</code> is <code>\dots</code>.)
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-vdots">ellipses vdots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="749" mergedindex="cp">\vdots</indexterm>\vdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical ellipsis, <U>22EE</U>.  See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="508"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="509"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <file>amsmath</file> package has the command <code>\dots</code> to semantically
+mark up ellipses.  This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the <code>\dots</code> command.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{amsmath}  % in preamble
+  ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+  multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following <code>\dots</code> to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline.  The second
+line has a <code>\cdot</code> following <code>\dots</code> so &latex; outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered.  However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell &latex; what
+to do.  You can use one of the commands: <code>\dotsc</code> if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, <code>\dotsb</code> if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, <code>\dotsi</code> for dots with integrals, or
+<code>\dotso</code> for others.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
 </section>
 <node name="Math-functions" spaces=" "><nodename>Math functions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math accents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math functions</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="386">math functions</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="387">functions, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="510">math functions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="511">functions, math</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
 spacing.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="733">\arccos</indexterm>\arccos</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arccos</math>
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="750" mergedindex="cp">\arccos</indexterm>\arccos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse cosine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="734">\arcsin</indexterm>\arcsin</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arcsin</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="751" mergedindex="cp">\arcsin</indexterm>\arcsin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse sine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="735">\arctan</indexterm>\arctan</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arctan</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="752" mergedindex="cp">\arctan</indexterm>\arctan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse tangent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="736">\arg</indexterm>\arg</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arg</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="753" mergedindex="cp">\arg</indexterm>\arg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="737">\bmod</indexterm>\bmod</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Binary modulo operator (<math>x \bmod y</math>)
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="754" mergedindex="cp">\bmod</indexterm>\bmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Binary modulo operator, used as in <code>\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)</code>
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="738">\cos</indexterm>\cos</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cos</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="755" mergedindex="cp">\cos</indexterm>\cos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cosine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="739">\cosh</indexterm>\cosh</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cosh</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="756" mergedindex="cp">\cosh</indexterm>\cosh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic cosine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="740">\cot</indexterm>\cot</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cot</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="757" mergedindex="cp">\cot</indexterm>\cot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cotangent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="741">\coth</indexterm>\coth</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\coth</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="758" mergedindex="cp">\coth</indexterm>\coth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic cotangent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="742">\csc</indexterm>\csc</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\csc</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="759" mergedindex="cp">\csc</indexterm>\csc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cosecant
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="743">\deg</indexterm>\deg</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\deg</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="760" mergedindex="cp">\deg</indexterm>\deg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Degrees
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="744">\det</indexterm>\det</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\det</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="761" mergedindex="cp">\det</indexterm>\det</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Determinant
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="745">\dim</indexterm>\dim</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\dim</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="762" mergedindex="cp">\dim</indexterm>\dim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dimension
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="746">\exp</indexterm>\exp</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\exp</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="763" mergedindex="cp">\exp</indexterm>\exp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Exponential
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="747">\gcd</indexterm>\gcd</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\gcd</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="764" mergedindex="cp">\gcd</indexterm>\gcd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Greatest common divisor
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="748">\hom</indexterm>\hom</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\hom</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="765" mergedindex="cp">\hom</indexterm>\hom</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Homomorphism
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="749">\inf</indexterm>\inf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\inf</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="766" mergedindex="cp">\inf</indexterm>\inf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Infinum
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="750">\ker</indexterm>\ker</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ker</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="767" mergedindex="cp">\ker</indexterm>\ker</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Kernel
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="751">\lg</indexterm>\lg</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lg</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="768" mergedindex="cp">\lg</indexterm>\lg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Base 2 logarithm
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="752">\lim</indexterm>\lim</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lim</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="769" mergedindex="cp">\lim</indexterm>\lim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="753">\liminf</indexterm>\liminf</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\liminf</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="770" mergedindex="cp">\liminf</indexterm>\liminf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit inferior
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="754">\limsup</indexterm>\limsup</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\limsup</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="771" mergedindex="cp">\limsup</indexterm>\limsup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit superior
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="755">\ln</indexterm>\ln</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ln</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="772" mergedindex="cp">\ln</indexterm>\ln</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Natural logarithm
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="756">\log</indexterm>\log</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\log</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="773" mergedindex="cp">\log</indexterm>\log</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Logarithm
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="757">\max</indexterm>\max</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\max</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="774" mergedindex="cp">\max</indexterm>\max</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Maximum
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="758">\min</indexterm>\min</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\min</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="775" mergedindex="cp">\min</indexterm>\min</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Minimum
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="759">\pmod</indexterm>\pmod</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>parenthesized modulus, as in (<math>\pmod 2^n - 1</math>)
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="776" mergedindex="cp">\pmod</indexterm>\pmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Parenthesized modulus, as used in <code>\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)</code>
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="760">\Pr</indexterm>\Pr</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Pr</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="777" mergedindex="cp">\Pr</indexterm>\Pr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Probability
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="761">\sec</indexterm>\sec</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sec</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="778" mergedindex="cp">\sec</indexterm>\sec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Secant
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="762">\sin</indexterm>\sin</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sin</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="779" mergedindex="cp">\sin</indexterm>\sin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="763">\sinh</indexterm>\sinh</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sinh</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="780" mergedindex="cp">\sinh</indexterm>\sinh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic sine
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="764">\sup</indexterm>\sup</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sup</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="781" mergedindex="cp">\sup</indexterm>\sup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>sup
 <!-- c don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
 <!-- c Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
 <!-- c when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="765">\tan</indexterm>\tan</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\tan</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="782" mergedindex="cp">\tan</indexterm>\tan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Tangent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="766">\tanh</indexterm>\tanh</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\tanh</math>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="783" mergedindex="cp">\tanh</indexterm>\tanh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic tangent
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="512"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="513"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>The <file>amsmath</file> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own.  The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</code> that is like the ones
+above but prints as <samp>id</samp>.  The starred form
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</code> sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with <code>\lim</code>, <code>\sup</code>, or <code>\max</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="Math-accents" spaces=" "><nodename>Math accents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math functions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Math-accents" spaces=" "><nodename>Math accents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Over- and Underlining</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math functions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math accents</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="388">math accents</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="389">accents, mathematical</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="514">math accents</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="515">accents, mathematical</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
 in math.  These are different from accents in normal text
 (<pxref label="Accents"><xrefnodename>Accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="767">\acute</indexterm>\acute</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="390">acute accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math acute accent: <math>\acute{x}</math>.
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="784" mergedindex="cp">\acute</indexterm>\acute</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="516">acute accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math acute accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="768">\bar</indexterm>\bar</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="391">bar-over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="392">macron accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math bar-over accent: <math>\bar{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="785" mergedindex="cp">\bar</indexterm>\bar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="517">bar-over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="518">macron accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math bar-over accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="769">\breve</indexterm>\breve</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="393">breve accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math breve accent: <math>\breve{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="786" mergedindex="cp">\breve</indexterm>\breve</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="519">breve accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math breve accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="770">\check</indexterm>\check</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="394">check accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="395">h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check) accent: <math>\check{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="787" mergedindex="cp">\check</indexterm>\check</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="520">check accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="521">h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check) accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="771">\ddot</indexterm>\ddot</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="396">double dot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math dieresis accent: <math>\ddot{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="788" mergedindex="cp">\ddot</indexterm>\ddot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="522">double dot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math dieresis accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="772">\dot</indexterm>\dot</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="397">overdot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="398">dot over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math dot accent: <math>\dot{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="789" mergedindex="cp">\dot</indexterm>\dot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="523">overdot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="524">dot over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math dot accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="773">\grave</indexterm>\grave</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="399">grave accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math grave accent: <math>\grave{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="790" mergedindex="cp">\grave</indexterm>\grave</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="525">grave accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math grave accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="774">\hat</indexterm>\hat</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="400">hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="401">circumflex accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent: <math>\hat{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="791" mergedindex="cp">\hat</indexterm>\hat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="526">hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="527">circumflex accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="775">\imath</indexterm>\imath</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="402">dotless i, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math dotless i.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="792" mergedindex="cp">\mathring</indexterm>\mathring</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="528">ring accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math ring accent  <!-- c don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="776">\jmath</indexterm>\jmath</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="403">dotless j, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math dotless j.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="793" mergedindex="cp">\tilde</indexterm>\tilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="529">tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math tilde accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="777">\mathring</indexterm>\mathring</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="404">ring accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math ring accent: <accent type="ring">x</accent>.  <!-- c don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="794" mergedindex="cp">\vec</indexterm>\vec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="530">vector symbol, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math vector symbol
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="778">\tilde</indexterm>\tilde</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="405">tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math tilde accent: <math>\tilde{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="795" mergedindex="cp">\widehat</indexterm>\widehat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="531">wide hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math wide hat accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="779">\vec</indexterm>\vec</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="406">vector symbol, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math vector symbol: <math>\vec{x}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="796" mergedindex="cp">\widetilde</indexterm>\widetilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="532">wide tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math wide tilde accent
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="780">\widehat</indexterm>\widehat</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="407">wide hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math wide hat accent: <math>\widehat{x+y}</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, <code>\imath</code> or <code>jmath</code> (<pxref label="Math-symbols"><xrefnodename>Math symbols</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="781">\widetilde</indexterm>\widetilde</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="408">wide tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Math wide tilde accent: <math>\widetilde{x+y}</math>.
+
+</section>
+<node name="Over_002d-and-Underlining" spaces=" "><nodename>Over- and Underlining</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math accents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Over- and Underlining</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="533">overlining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="534">underlining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
 </para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="797" mergedindex="cp">\underline{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\underline{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Underline <var>text</var>.  Works inside math mode, and outside.
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in <code>\(\underline{y}\)</code> the line is lower than in
+<code>\(\underline{x}\)</code>.  This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="535"><r>package</r>, <code>ulem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="536"><code>ulem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Note that the package <file>ulem</file> does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features.  See the
+documentation on CTAN.  See also <ref label="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill"><xrefnodename>\hrulefill & \dotfill</xrefnodename></ref> for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+</para>        
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="798" mergedindex="cp">\overline{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\overline{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a horizontal line over <var>text</var>.  Works inside math mode, and
+outside.  For example, <code>\overline{x+y}</code>.
+Note that this differs from the command <code>\bar</code> (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="799" mergedindex="cp">\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</indexterm>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a brace under <var>math</var>. For example, this
+<code>(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)</code> emphasizes the telescoping part.
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <code>_</code>, or superscript,
+<code>^</code>, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{displaymath}
+  1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
+       \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="800" mergedindex="cp">\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</indexterm>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a brace over <var>math</var>, as with
+<code>\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}</code>.  See also
+<code>\underbrace</code>.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="537"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="538"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>The package <file>mathtools</file> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces.  See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="Spacing-in-math-mode" spaces=" "><nodename>Spacing in math mode</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math accents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Spacing-in-math-mode" spaces=" "><nodename>Spacing in math mode</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Over- and Underlining</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Spacing in math mode</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="409">spacing within math mode</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="410">math mode, spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="539">spacing within math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="540">math mode, spacing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>In a <code>math</code> environment, &latex; ignores the spaces that you use
-in the source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal
-rules for mathematics texts.  
+<para>When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts.  If you enter <code>y=m x</code> then
+&latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as <math>y=mx</math>.
 </para>
-<para>Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
-<dfn>mu</dfn> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>).
-&latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode:
+<para>But &latex;&textrsquo;s rules sometimes need tweaking.  For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+<code>f(x)</code> and the <code>dx</code>, here done with the <code>\,</code> command.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; provides the commands that follow for use in math mode.  Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<dfn>mu</dfn>.  It is defined as 1/18<dmn>em</dmn>, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Thus, a
+<code>\thickspace</code> is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a <samp>M</samp>.
+</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\;</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="782">\;</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="783">\thickspace</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Normally <code>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</code>.  The longer name is
-<code>\thickspace</code>.  Math mode only.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="801" mergedindex="cp">\;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="802" mergedindex="cp">\thickspace</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace">spacing in math mode thickspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\thickspace</code>.  Normally <code>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</code>.  Math
+mode only.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\:</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\></itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="784">\:</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="785">\></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="786">\medspace</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Normally <code>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</code>.  The longer name is
-<code>\medspace</code>.  Math mode only.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="803" mergedindex="cp">\:</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="804" mergedindex="cp">\></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="805" mergedindex="cp">\medspace</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace">spacing in math mode medspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\medspace</code>.  Normally <code>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</code>.
+Math mode only.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\,</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="787">\,</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="788">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Normally <code>3mu</code>.  The longer name is <code>\thinspace</code>.  This can
-be used in both math mode and text mode. <xref label="_005cthinspace"><xrefnodename>\thinspace</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="806" mergedindex="cp">\,</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="807" mergedindex="cp">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="541">thin space</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace">Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</anchor>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-thinspace">spacing in math mode thinspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\thinspace</code>.  Normally <code>3mu</code>, which is 1/6<dmn>em</dmn>.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (<pxref label="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace"><xrefnodename>\thinspace &
+\negthinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral <code>\int f(x)\,dx</code> and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The antiderivative is
+\begin{equation}
+  3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+\end{equation}
+</pre></example>
+
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\!</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="789">\!</indexterm></findex>
-<para>A negative thin space. Normally <code>-3mu</code>.  Math mode only.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="808" mergedindex="cp">\!</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="809" mergedindex="cp">\negthinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="542">thin space, negative</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace">spacing in math mode negthinspace</anchor>
+<para>A negative thin space. Normally <code>-3mu</code>.  The <code>\!</code> command is
+math mode only but the <code>\negthinspace</code> command is available for
+text mode (<pxref label="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace"><xrefnodename>\thinspace & \negthinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\quad</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="411">quad</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="790">\quad</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="543">quad</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="810" mergedindex="cp">\quad</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-quad">spacing in math mode quad</anchor>
 <para>This is 18<dmn>mu</dmn>, that is, 1<dmn>em</dmn>. This is often used for space
 surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
 two equations inside a <code>displaymath</code> environment.  It is available
 in both text and math mode.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\qquad</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="791">\qquad</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="811" mergedindex="cp">\qquad</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-qquad">spacing in math mode qquad</anchor>
 <para>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36<dmn>mu</dmn> = 2<dmn>em</dmn>.  It is available in
 both text and math mode.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<para>In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
-infinitesimal.
-</para>
-<example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
-</pre></example>
 
-
 </section>
 <node name="Math-miscellany" spaces=" "><nodename>Math miscellany</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math miscellany</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="412">math miscellany</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="544">math miscellany</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="792">\*</indexterm>\*</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="413">discretionary multiplication</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="414">multiplication symbol, discretionary line break</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>A <dfn>discretionary</dfn> multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a
-space, while in the case of a break a <U>00D7</U> symbol is
-printed immediately before the break. So
+<para>&latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities.  Here are
+some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories.
 </para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">Colon character & \colon</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Colon.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                            ">\*</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Discretionary multiplication.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                         ">\frac</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fraction.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\left & \right</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Paired delimiters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                         ">\sqrt</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Radicals.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">\stackrel</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Text over a relation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces="  ">Colon character & \colon</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\*</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colon character <code>:</code> & <code>\colon</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="545">:</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="546">colon character</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="812" mergedindex="cp">:</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="813" mergedindex="cp">\colon</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
-\begin{document}
-Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\) 
-through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is 
-equal to zero.
-\end{document}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">:
+\colon
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>will make that sort of output<!-- c -->
-<w> </w>(the ellipsis <samp>[&dots;]</samp> is here to show the line break at
-the same place as in a &tex; output)<!-- c -->
-:
+<para>In mathematics, the colon character, <code>:</code>, is a relation.
 </para>
-<indentedblock endspaces=" ">
-<para>Now <math>A_3 = 0</math>,
-[&dots;]
-<math>A_1</math>
-through <math>A_4</math>, that is <math>A_1 A_2 \times</math>&linebreak;<math>A_3 A_4</math>, is
-equal to zero.
-</para></indentedblock>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+</pre></example>
 
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="793">\cdots</indexterm>\cdots</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
-<tex endspaces=" ">
-</tex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="547"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="548"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Ordinary &latex; defines <code>\colon</code> to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+<code>\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="794">\ddots</indexterm>\ddots</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>A diagonal ellipsis: <math>\ddots</math>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="549"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="550"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>But the widely-used <file>amsmath</file> package defines <code>\colon</code> for use
+in the definition of functions <code>f\colon D\to C</code>.  So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use <code>\mathpunct{:}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="795">\frac{<var>num</var>}{<var>den</var>}</indexterm>\frac{<var>num</var>}{<var>den</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="796">\frac</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Produces the fraction <var>num</var> divided by <var>den</var>.
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005c_002a" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\*</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frac</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Colon character & \colon</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\*</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="551">multiplication, discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="552">breaks, multiplication discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="553">line breaks, multiplication discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="554">discretionary breaks, multiplication</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="814" mergedindex="cp">\*</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\*
+</pre></example>
 
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="797">\left <var>delim1</var> ... \right <var>delim2</var></indexterm>\left <var>delim1</var> ... \right <var>delim2</var></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="798">\right</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="415">null delimiter</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The two delimiters need not match; <samp>.</samp> acts as a <dfn>null delimiter</dfn>,
-producing no output.  The delimiters are sized according to the math
-in between.  Example: <code>\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]</code>.
+<para>A multiplication symbol that allows a line break.  If there is a break
+then &latex; puts a <code>\times</code> symbol, <U>00D7</U>, before
+that break.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="799">\mathdollar</indexterm>\mathdollar</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+<para>In <code>\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)</code>, if there is no line break then
+&latex; outputs it as though it were <code>\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)</code>.  If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+&latex; sets it like <code>\( A_1 A_2 \times \)</code>, followed by the
+break, followed by <code>\( A_3 A_4 \)</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="800">\mathellipsis</indexterm>\mathellipsis</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: &dots;.
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cfrac" spaces=" "><nodename>\frac</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\left & \right</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\*</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frac</code> </sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="555">fraction</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="815" mergedindex="cp">\frac</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="801">\mathparagraph</indexterm>\mathparagraph</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: <U>00B6</U>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frac{<var>numerator</var>}{<var>denominator</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces the fraction.  Used as: <code>\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}</code>.  In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of <code>\displaystyle</code>
+(<pxref label="Math-formulas"><xrefnodename>Math formulas</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="802">\mathsection</indexterm>\mathsection</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Section sign in math mode.
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright" spaces=" "><nodename>\left & \right</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sqrt</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\frac</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\left</code> & <code>\right</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="556">delimiters, paired</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="557">paired delimiters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="558">matching parentheses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="559">matching brackets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="560">null delimiter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="816" mergedindex="cp">\left</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="817" mergedindex="cp">\right</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="803">\mathsterling</indexterm>\mathsterling</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\left <var>delimiter1</var> ... \right <var>delimiter2</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters.  The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose.  This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="804">\mathunderscore</indexterm>\mathunderscore</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
+  \left(\begin{array}{c}
+    1   \\
+    0   \\
+  \end{array}\right)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Every <code>\left</code> must have a matching <code>\right</code>.  Leaving out the
+<code>\left(</code> in the above gets <samp>Extra \right</samp>.  Leaving off the
+<code>\right)</code> gets <samp>You can't use `\eqno' in math mode</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="805">\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</indexterm>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Generates a brace over <var>math</var>.
-For example, <code>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}</code>.
-</para>        
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="806">\overline{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\overline{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Generates a horizontal line over <var>tex</var>.
-For example, <code>\overline{x+y}</code>.
+<para>However, the two delimiters <var>delimiter1</var> and <var>delimiter2</var> need
+not match.  A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, <samp>.</samp>, as a null delimiter.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="807">\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{<var>arg</var>}</indexterm>\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{<var>arg</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produces the representation of the square root of <var>arg</var>.  The
-optional argument <var>root</var> determines what root to produce.  For
-example, the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as
-<code>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</code>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
+  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
+       \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, <code>\{</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="808">\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}</indexterm>\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Puts <var>text</var> above <var>relation</var>.  For example,
-<code>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</code>.
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005csqrt" spaces=" "><nodename>\sqrt</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stackrel</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\left & \right</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sqrt</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="561">square root</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="562">roots</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="563">radical</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="818" mergedindex="cp">\sqrt</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="809">\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</indexterm>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Generates <var>math</var> with a brace underneath. For example, <code>\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}</code>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\sqrt{<var>arg</var>}
+\sqrt[<var>root-number</var>]{<var>arg</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <var>arg</var>.  The optional
+argument <var>root-number</var> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+<code>x+y</code> as <code>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</code>.
+The radical grows with the size of <var>arg</var> (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough <code>arg</code>, it is vertical).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="810">\underline{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\underline{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Causes <var>text</var>, which may be either math mode or not, to be
-underlined.  The line is always below the text, taking account of
-descenders.
+<para>&latex; has a separate <code>\surd</code> character (<pxref label="Math-symbols"><xrefnodename>Math symbols</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="811">\vdots</indexterm>\vdots</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cstackrel" spaces=" "><nodename>\stackrel</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\sqrt</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stackrel</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="564">stack math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="565">relation, text above</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="819" mergedindex="cp">\stackrel</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Put <var>text</var> above <var>relation</var>.  To put a function name above an
+arrow enter <code>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</code>.
+</para>
 
+</subsection>
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Modes" spaces=" "><nodename>Modes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page styles</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Modes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="416">modes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="417">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="418">math mode</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="419">left-to-right mode</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="420">LR mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="566">modes</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
+<para>As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes.  They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
 </para>
-<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" endspaces=" ">
 <listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>Paragraph mode
-</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>Math mode
-</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
-<para>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-</para></listitem></itemize>
-
-<para>Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
-&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
+<anchor name="modes-paragraph-mode">modes paragraph mode</anchor>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="567">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><dfn>Paragraph mode</dfn> is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary
+text.  It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages.  This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time.
 </para>
-<para><dfn>Paragraph mode</dfn> is the most common; it&textrsquo;s the one &latex; is in
-when processing ordinary text.  In this mode, &latex; breaks the
-input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="568">left-to-right mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="569">LR mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-lr-mode">modes lr mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>LR mode</dfn> (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called
+<dfn>restricted horizontal mode</dfn>) is in effect when &latex; starts
+making a box with an <code>\mbox</code> command.  As in paragraph mode,
+&latex;&textrsquo;s output is a string of words with spaces between them.  Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right.  (Although &latex; will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won&textrsquo;t fit there.)
 </para>
-<para>&latex; is in <dfn>math mode</dfn> when it&textrsquo;s generating a mathematical
-formula, either displayed math or within a line.
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="570">math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-math-mode">modes math mode</anchor> <para><dfn>Math mode</dfn> is when &latex; is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="812">\mbox<r>, and LR mode</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>In <dfn>LR mode</dfn>, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output
-that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them.
-However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to
-right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.  Even if you put a
-hundred words into an <code>\mbox</code>, &latex; would keep typesetting
-them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely
-complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line).
-&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
-<code>\mbox</code> command.  You can get it to enter a different mode inside
-the box&textmdash;for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
-formula in the box.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="571">display math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><dfn>Display math mode</dfn> is when &latex; is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula.  (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones.  One example is that the placement of the subscript on <code>\int</code>
+differs in the two situations.)
 </para>
-<para>There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put &latex; into paragraph mode.  The box made by
-one of these commands or environments will be called a <code>parbox</code>.
-When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to
-be in &textldquo;inner paragraph mode&textrdquo; (no page breaks).  Its normal paragraph
-mode, which it starts out in, is called &textldquo;outer paragraph mode&textrdquo;.
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="572">vertical mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-vertical-mode">modes vertical mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>Vertical mode</dfn> is when &latex; is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page.  This is the mode &latex; is in
+when it starts a document.
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="573">internal vertical mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-internal-vertical-mode">modes internal vertical mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>Internal vertical mode</dfn> is in effect when &latex; starts making a
+<code>\vbox</code>.  This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemize>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with <samp>Let \( x \) be
+...</samp> then these are the modes: first &latex; starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the <samp>L</samp> and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the <samp>\(</samp> where &latex;
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="574">inner paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="575">outer paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-inner-paragraph-mode">modes inner paragraph mode</anchor>
+<anchor name="modes-outer-paragraph-mode">modes outer paragraph mode</anchor>
+<para>Paragraph mode has two subcases.  If you use a <code>\parbox</code> command or
+or a <code>minipage</code> then &latex; is put into paragraph mode.  But it
+will not put a page break here.  Inside one of these boxes, called a
+<dfn>parbox</dfn>, &latex; is in <dfn>inner paragraph mode</dfn>.  Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is <dfn>outer paragraph mode</dfn>
+(<pxref label="Page-breaking"><xrefnodename>Page breaking</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ensuremath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ensure that math mode is active
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -9481,49 +12705,48 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\ensuremath{<var>formula</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\ensuremath</code> command ensures that <var>formula</var> is typeset in
-math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+<para>Ensure that <var>formula</var> is typeset in math mode.
 </para>
-<para>For instance:
+<para>For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{report}
-\newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
-\begin{document}
-Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
-\end{document}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
-they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
-<code>\leadsto</code>:
+<para>Caution: the <code>\ensuremath</code> command is useful but not a panacea.
 </para>
-<!-- c Vincent 2 Karl : "Tous les chemins mènent à Rome" is a French saying -->
-<!-- c meaning that there are many different ways to get the same result. I -->
-<!-- c am not sure whether in English the given example is also funny. -->
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{report}
-\usepackage{amssymb}
-\newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
-\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
-\renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
-\begin{document}
-All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
-\end{document}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Page-styles" spaces=" "><nodename>Page styles</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Spaces</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Modes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page styles</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="421">styles, page</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="422">page styles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="576">styles, page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="577">page styles</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\documentclass</code> command determines the size and position of
-the page&textrsquo;s head and foot.  The page style determines what goes in them.
+<para>The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body.  This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="578"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyhdr</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="579"><code>fancyhdr</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <file>fancyhdr</file> is very helpful for constructing page
+styles.  See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\maketitle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate a title page.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\pagenumbering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the style used for page numbers.
@@ -9535,88 +12758,173 @@
 <node name="_005cmaketitle" spaces=" "><nodename>\maketitle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\maketitle</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="423">titles, making</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="813">\maketitle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="580">titles, making</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="820" mergedindex="cp">\maketitle</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\maketitle</code> command generates a title on a separate title
-page&textmdash;except in the <code>article</code> class, where the title is placed
-at the top of the first page.  Information used to produce the title
-is obtained from the following declarations:
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\maketitle
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Generate a title.  In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the <code>article</code> class where it is at the top
+of the first page.  (<xref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></xref> for information about
+the <code>titlepage</code> document class option.)
+</para>
+<para>This example shows <code>\maketitle</code> appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after <code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
+\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+\author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+    With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+  Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+  \and
+  Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+    Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+    and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.}           \\
+  Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+  }
+\date{1964-Sep-26}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You tell &latex; the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations.  These must come before the
+<code>\maketitle</code>, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+</para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="814">\author{<var>name</var> \and <var>name2</var>}</indexterm>\author{<var>name</var> \and <var>name2</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="424">author, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="815">\\ <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="816">\and <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\author</code> command declares the document author(s), where the
-argument is a list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands.  Use
-<code>\\</code> to separate lines within a single author&textrsquo;s entry&textmdash;for
-example, to give the author&textrsquo;s institution or address.
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="821" mergedindex="cp">\author{<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...}</indexterm>\author{<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="581">author, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="822" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="823" mergedindex="cp">\and <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Required.  Declare the document author or authors.  The argument is a
+list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands.  To separate lines
+within a single author&textrsquo;s entry, for instance to give the author&textrsquo;s
+institution or address, use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.  If you omit
+the <code>\author</code> declaration then you get <samp>LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given</samp>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="817">\date{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\date{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="425">date, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\date</code> command declares <var>text</var> to be the document&textrsquo;s
-date.  With no <code>\date</code> command, the current date (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>)
-is used.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="824" mergedindex="cp">\date{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\date{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="582">date, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Optional.  Declare <var>text</var> to be the document&textrsquo;s date.  The <var>text</var>
+doesn&textrsquo;t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all.  If you
+omit <code>\date</code> then &latex; uses the current date (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+To have no date, instead use <code>\date{}</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="818">\thanks{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\thanks{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="426">thanks, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="427">credit footnote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\thanks</code> command produces a <code>\footnote</code> to the title,
-usually used for credit acknowledgements.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="825" mergedindex="cp">\thanks{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\thanks{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="583">thanks, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="584">credit footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Optional.  Produce a footnote.  You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements, as illustrated below, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense.  It can be any text so
+you can use it to print an email address, or for any purpose.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="819">\title{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\title{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="428">title, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="820">\\ <r>for <code>\title</code></r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The <code>\title</code> command declares <var>text</var> to be the title of the
-document.  Use <code>\\</code> to force a line break, as usual.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="826" mergedindex="cp">\title{<var>text</var>}</indexterm>\title{<var>text</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="585">title, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="827" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>\title</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Required.  Declare <var>text</var> to be the title of the document.  Get line
+breaks inside <var>text</var> with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.  If you
+omit the <code>\title</code> declaration then you get <samp>LaTeX Error: No
+\title given</samp>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<para>Many publishers will provide a class to use in place of <code>article</code>
+in that example, that formats the title according to their house
+requirements.  To make your own, see <ref label="titlepage"><xrefnodename>titlepage</xrefnodename></ref>. You can
+either create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a
+renewed <code>\maketitle</code> command.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cpagenumbering" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagenumbering</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\maketitle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagenumbering</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="821">\pagenumbering</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="429">page numbering style</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="828" mergedindex="cp">\pagenumbering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="586">page numbering style</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagenumbering{<var>style</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagenumbering{<var>number-style</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, according to <var>style</var>; also
-resets the page number to 1.  The <var>style</var> argument is one of
-the following:
+<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number.  The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references.  This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
 </para>
+<para>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+<samp>a</samp>, etc.  Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered <samp>1</samp>, etc.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+  ...
+\section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The argument <var>number-style</var> is one of the following (see
+also <ref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">arabic</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>arabic numerals
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>arabic numerals: 1, 2, &dots; 
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">roman</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, &dots;
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Roman</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, &dots;
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alph</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase letters
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase letters: a, b, &dots; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Alph</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase letters
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase letters: A, B, &dots; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">gobble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="587"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="588"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>&latex; does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset.  References to that page also are blank.  (This does not
+work with the popular package <file>hyperref</file> so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use <code>\pagestyle{empty}</code> or
+<code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code>.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
+<para>Traditionally, if a document has front matter&textmdash;preface, table of
+contents, etc.&textmdash;then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic.  <xref label="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"><xrefnodename>\frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see <ref label="_005cpagestyle"><xrefnodename>\pagestyle</xrefnodename></ref>.  If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the <code>page</code> counter
+(<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cpagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagestyle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thispagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagestyle</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="822">\pagestyle</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="430">header style</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="431">footer style</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="432">running header and footer style</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="829" mergedindex="cp">\pagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="589">header style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="590">footer style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="591">running header and footer style</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -9624,19 +12932,30 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\pagestyle{<var>style</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\pagestyle</code> command specifies how the headers and footers
-are typeset from the current page onwards.  Values for <var>style</var>:
+<para>Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="592"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyhdr</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="593"><code>fancyhdr</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A discussion with an example is below.  Note first that the package
+<file>fancyhdr</file> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers.  New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package.  See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>Values for <var>style</var>:
+</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Just a plain page number.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The header is empty.  The footer contains only a page number, centered.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">empty</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The header and footer is empty.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">headings</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put running headers on each page.  The document style specifies what
-goes in the headers.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put running headers and footers on each page.  The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">myheadings</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Custom headers, specified via the <code>\markboth</code> or the
@@ -9644,116 +12963,326 @@
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
+<para>Some discussion of the motivation for &latex;&textrsquo;s mechanism will help you
+work with the options <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>.  The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+<code>headings</code>.  On this document&textrsquo;s left hand pages, &latex; wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section.  On its
+right hand pages &latex; wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, &latex; gets this information from the
+commands <code>\leftmark</code> and <code>\rightmark</code>.  So it is up to
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\subsection</code> to store that information there.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[twoside]{article}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+  ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+\section{Section 2}
+  ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+  ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Suppose that the second section falls on a left page.  Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, &latex; will put
+<samp>Section 2</samp> in the left page header.  As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then &latex;
+blanks the right hand header.  If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases.  If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then &latex; will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page.  If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, &dots;, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then &latex; puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+</para>
+<para>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has <code>\section</code>
+issue a command <code>\markboth</code>, setting <code>\leftmark</code>
+to <samp>Section 2</samp> and setting <code>\rightmark</code> to blank.
+And, &latex; has <code>\subsection</code> issue a command <code>\markright</code>,
+setting <code>\rightmark</code> to <samp>Subsection 2.1</samp>, etc.
+</para>
 <para>Here are the descriptions of <code>\markboth</code> and <code>\markright</code>:
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="823">\markboth{<var>left</var>}{<var>right</var>}</indexterm>\markboth{<var>left</var>}{<var>right</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets both the left and the right heading.  A &textldquo;left-hand heading&textrdquo;
-(<var>left</var>) is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before
-the end of the page, while a &textldquo;right-hand heading&textrdquo; (<var>right</var>) is
-generated by the first <code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that
-comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before
-the page.
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="830" mergedindex="cp">\markboth{<var>left-head</var>}{<var>right-head</var>}</indexterm>\markboth{<var>left-head</var>}{<var>right-head</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>.  A left hand page
+heading <var>left-head</var> is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code>
+command before the end of the page.  A right hand page heading
+<var>right-head</var> is generated by the first <code>\markboth</code> or
+<code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="824">\markright{<var>right</var>}</indexterm>\markright{<var>right</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="831" mergedindex="cp">\markright{<var>right</var>}</indexterm>\markright{<var>right</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005cthispagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\thispagestyle</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thispagestyle</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="825">\thispagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="832" mergedindex="cp">\thispagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="594">page style, this page</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\thispagestyle</code> command works in the same manner as the
-<code>\pagestyle</code> command (see previous section) except that it
-changes to <var>style</var> for the current page only.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Works in the same way as the <code>\pagestyle</code> (<pxref label="_005cpagestyle"><xrefnodename>\pagestyle</xrefnodename></pxref>),
+except that it changes to <var>style</var> for the current page only.  This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+</para>
+<para>Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.  For
+example, this &latex; book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in in <code>plain</code> style, as is the default (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page
+styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{First chapter}
+  ...
+\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>plain</code> style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+<code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> immediately follows the second
+<code>\chapter</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Spaces" spaces=" "><nodename>Spaces</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Boxes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Page styles</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Spaces</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="433">spaces</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="434">white space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="595">spaces</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="596">white space</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
+<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.  Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see <ref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in
+math mode</xrefnodename></ref>.  Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal space 
-</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\hspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fixed horizontal space.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\hfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal space.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\spacefactor</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchability of following space
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\(SPACE) after control sequence</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Space (gobbling) after a control sequence.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\thinspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">One-sixth of an em.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                   ">\/</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert italic correction.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\hrulefill \dotfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\enspace & \quad & \qquad</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Traditional horizontal spaces.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\hspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Any horizontal space.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\hfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal space.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                  ">\hss</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::          ">\spacefactor</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchability of following space
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\(SPACE)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">~</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tie, an unbreakable space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\thinspace & \negthinspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                    ">\/</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Italic correction.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hrulefill & \dotfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">
 Vertical space
-</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                    ">\addvspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fixed vertical spaces.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                        ">\vfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                       ">\vspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add arbitrary vertical space.
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inter-paragraph vertical spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inter-paragraph space and page breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                            ">\strut</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ensure height of a line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                           ">\vspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Vertical space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                            ">\vfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable vertical space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                        ">\addvspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005chspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\hspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hfill</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad" spaces=" "><nodename>\enspace & \quad & \qquad</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hspace</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\enspace</code> & <code>\quad</code> & <code>\qquad</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="833" mergedindex="cp">\enspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="834" mergedindex="cp">\quad</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="835" mergedindex="cp">\qquad</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Insert a horizontal space of 1/2<dmn>em</dmn>, 1<dmn>em</dmn>, or 2<dmn>em</dmn>. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital M.  One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (<pxref label="Lengths_002fem"><xrefnodename>Lengths/em</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
+  \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+  \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><xref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode</xrefnodename></xref> for <code>\quad</code> and <code>\qquad</code>.  These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+<code>\hspace</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\hspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\enspace & \quad & \qquad</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hspace</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="826">\hspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="836" mergedindex="cp">\hspace</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\hspace{<var>length</var>}
 \hspace*{<var>length</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Add the horizontal space given by <var>length</var>.  The <var>length</var> is a
-rubber length, that is, it may contain a <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code>
-component, in any unit that &latex; understands (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Insert the horizontal space <var>length</var>.  The <var>length</var> can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <code>plus</code> or
+<code>minus</code> component, or both (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <dfn>glue</dfn>.
 </para>
-<para>This command can add both positive and negative space; adding negative
-space is like backspacing.
+<para>This makes a line with <samp>Name:</samp> an inch from the right margin.
 </para>
-<para>Normally when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
-space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
-get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This
-command&textrsquo;s starred version <code>\hspace*{...}</code> puts a non-discardable
-invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
-output.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>*</code>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space&textmdash;glues and kerns&textmdash;that come at a line break are discarded.  The
+<code>*</code>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
 </para>
-<para>This example make a one-line paragraph that puts <samp>Name:</samp> an inch
-from the right margin.
+<para>In this example
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+  Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+  fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+  conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+  that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the 1 inch blank following <samp>conceived in</samp> falls at the start
+of a line.  If you erase the <code>*</code> then &latex; discards the blank.
+</para>
+<para>Here, the <code>\hspace</code> separates the three graphics.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
+  \includegraphics{lion.png}%   comment keeps out extra space
+  \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+  \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Because the argument to each <code>\hspace</code> has <code>minus 0.25cm</code>,
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide.  But each
+space won&textrsquo;t shrink more than 0.25<dmn>cm</dmn> (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005chfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005chfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hss</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hfill</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="827">\hfill</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="837" mergedindex="cp">\hfill</indexterm></findex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="435">stretch, infinite horizontal</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="436">infinite horizontal stretch</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produce a rubber length which has
-no natural space but can stretch horizontally as far as
-needed (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="597">stretch, infinite horizontal</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="598">infinite horizontal stretch</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="828">\fill</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The command <code>\hfill</code> is equivalent to <code>\hspace{\fill}</code>.  For
-space that does not disappear at line breaks use
-<code>\hspace*{\fill}</code> instead (<pxref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hfill
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This creates a one-line paragraph with <samp>Name:</samp> on the left side
+of the page and <samp>Quiz One</samp> on the right.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+</pre></example>
 
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="838" mergedindex="cp">\fill</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The <code>\hfill</code> command is equivalent to <code>\hspace{\fill}</code> and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks.  To avoid that instead use
+<code>\hspace*{\fill}</code> (<pxref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{&arobase;{}c&arobase;{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+  ...
+\begin{figure}
+  \hspace*{\fill}%
+  \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+    \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+  \hspace*{\fill}%
+  \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note the <code>\hspace*</code>&textrsquo;s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cspacefactor" spaces=" "><nodename>\spacefactor</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\(SPACE) after control sequence</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005chss" spaces=" "><nodename>\hss</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hss</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="839" mergedindex="cp">\hss</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="599">horizontal space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="600">horizontal space, stretchable</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="601">space, inserting horizontal</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hss
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a &tex; primitive).  &latex;
+authors should reach first for the <code>\makebox</code> command to get the
+effects of <code>\hss</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here, the first line&textrsquo;s <code>\hss</code> makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y.  In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Without the <code>\hss</code> you get something like <samp>Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cspacefactor" spaces=" "><nodename>\spacefactor</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\(SPACE)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hss</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\spacefactor</code></sectiontitle>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
@@ -9762,26 +13291,28 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\spacefactor=<var>integer</var>
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="829">\spacefactor</indexterm></findex>
-<para>While &latex; is making the page, to give the lines the best appearance
-it may stretch or shrink the gaps between words.  The
-<code>\spacefactor</code> command (from Plain &tex;) allows you to
-change the &latex;&textrsquo;s default behavior.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="840" mergedindex="cp">\spacefactor</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Influence &latex;&textrsquo;s glue stretch and shrink behavior.  Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
 </para>
+<para>While &latex; is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words.  (This space is not a character; it is called the
+<dfn>interword glue</dfn>; <pxref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The <code>\spacefactor</code> command
+(from Plain &tex;) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+</para>
 <para>After &latex; places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
 parameter called the <dfn>space factor</dfn>.  If the next thing in the input
-is a space then this parameter affects how much of a horizontal gap
-&latex; will have it span.  (This gap is not a character; it is called
-<dfn>interword glue</dfn>.)  A larger space factor means that the glue gap
-can stretch more and shrink less.
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen.  A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less.  Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula.  But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.  Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
 </para>
-<para>Normally, the space factor is 1000; this value is in effect following
-most characters, and any non-character box or math formula.  But it is
-3000 after a period, exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000
-after a colon, 1500 after a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a
-right parenthesis or bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.
-Finally, it is 999 after a capital letter.
-</para>
 <para>If the space factor <var>f</var> is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
 font&textrsquo;s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
 3.3333 points).  Otherwise, if the space factor <var>f</var> is greater
@@ -9789,322 +13320,699 @@
 Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font&textrsquo;s
 normal stretch value is multiplied by <math>f /1000</math> and the normal
 shrink value is multiplied by <math>1000/f</math> (for Computer Modern Roman
-10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points).  In short, compared
-to a normal space, such as the space following a word ending in a
-lowercase letter, inter-sentence spacing has a fixed extra space added
-and then the space can stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much.
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points).
 </para>
-<para>The rules for how &tex; uses space factors are even more complex
-because they play two more roles.  In practice, there are two
-consequences.  First, if a period or other punctuation is followed by a
-close parenthesis or close double quote then its effect is still in
-place, that is, the following glue will have increased stretch and
-shrink.  Second, conversely, if punctuation comes after a capital letter
-then its effect is not in place so you get an ordinary space.  For how
-to adjust to this second case, for instance if an abbreviation does not
-end in a capital letter, <pxref label="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\(SPACE) and \&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+<para>For example, consider the period ending <code>A man's best friend is his
+dog.</code>  After it, &tex; puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after <code>friend</code>, which does not end in a period.
 </para>
+<para>The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles.  In practice, there are two consequences.  First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink).  Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space.  This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>You can only use <code>\spacefactor</code> in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  You can see the current value with
+<code>\the\spacefactor</code> or <code>\showthe\spacefactor</code>.
+</para>
+<para>(Comment, not really related to <code>\spacefactor</code>: if you get errors
+like <samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode</samp>, or <samp>You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.</samp>, or <samp>Improper \spacefactor</samp>
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+<xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter & \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>.)
+</para>
 
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">\(SPACE) and \&arobase;</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Space after a period.  
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\frenchspacing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">\normalsfcodes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Restore space factor settings to the default.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\&arobase;</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.  
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\frenchspacing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\normalsfcodes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Restore space factor settings to the default.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\(SPACE) and \&arobase;</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frenchspacing</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
-<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\(SPACE)</code> and <code>\&arobase;</code>  </sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005c_0040" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\&arobase;</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frenchspacing</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;</code>  </sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="830">\(SPACE)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="831">\TAB</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="832">\NEWLINE</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="833">\&arobase;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="841" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="842" mergedindex="cp">at-sign</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="602">period, sentence-ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="603">period, abbreviation-ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="604">period, spacing after</indexterm></cindex>
 <anchor name="_005cAT">\AT</anchor><!-- c old name -->
 
-<para>Here, <code>\(SPACE)</code> means a backslash followed by a space.  These
-commands mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either
-ending a sentence or as ending an abbreviation.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>By default, in justifying a line &latex; adjusts the space after a
-sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
-colon) more than the space between words.  <xref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></xref>. As
-described there, &latex; assumes that the period ends a sentence unless
-it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it takes that period
-for part of an abbreviation.  Note that if a sentence-ending period is
-immediately followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single
-or double quote, then the space effect of that period follows through
-that parenthesis or quote.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>capital-letter</var>\&arobase;.    
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Treat a period as sentence-ending, where &latex; would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation.  &latex; thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence.  By default, in justifying a line
+&latex; adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>So: if you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not
-a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
-sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space (<code>\ </code>) or
-a tie (<code>~</code>) or a <code>\&arobase;</code>.  Examples are <code>Nat.\ Acad.\
-Science</code>, and <code>Mr.~Bean</code>, and <code>(manure, etc.\&arobase;) for sale</code>
-(note that in the last the <code>\&arobase;</code> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+<para>This example shows the two cases to remember.
 </para>
-<para>In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that does end the sentence, then put <code>\&arobase;</code> before the
-period.  For example, <code>book by the MAA\&arobase;.</code> will have correct
-inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\&arobase;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital.  We tell &latex; that it ends the sentence by putting
+<code>\&arobase;</code> before it.  The first period ends the abbreviation
+<samp>etc.</samp> but not the sentence.  The backslash-space, <code>\ </code>,
+produces a mid-sentence space.
 </para>
-<para>For another use of <code>\(SPACE)</code>, <pxref label="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence"><xrefnodename>\(SPACE) after control sequence</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+<para>So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put <code>\&arobase;</code> before the period.  This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters.  For example, this
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+(a book by the MAA)\&arobase;.
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\&arobase;</code> command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get <samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode</samp> (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence.  For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (<code>\ </code>), or a tie, (<code>~</code>), or <code>\&arobase;</code>.
+Examples are <code>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</code>, and <code>Mr.~Bean</code>, and
+<code>(manure, etc.\&arobase;) for sale</code> (note in the last one that the
+<code>\&arobase;</code> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005cfrenchspacing" spaces=" "><nodename>\frenchspacing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\normalsfcodes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\(SPACE) and \&arobase;</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cfrenchspacing" spaces=" "><nodename>\frenchspacing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\normalsfcodes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\&arobase;</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frenchspacing</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="834">\frenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="835">\nonfrenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="437">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="843" mergedindex="cp">\frenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="844" mergedindex="cp">\nonfrenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="605">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>This declaration (from Plain &tex;) causes &latex; to treat
-inter-sentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions, including
-English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or after other
-punctuation marks) more than the space between words.  Following this
-declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>); this is the default.
 </para>
-<para>Revert to the default behavior by declaring <code>\nonfrenchspacing</code>.
+<para>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence.  Declaring <code>\frenchspacing</code>
+(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
 </para>
 
 </subsection>
 <node name="_005cnormalsfcodes" spaces=" "><nodename>\normalsfcodes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frenchspacing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\normalsfcodes</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="836">\normalsfcodes</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="438">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="845" mergedindex="cp">\normalsfcodes</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="606">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\normalsfcodes
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default
+(<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
 </subsection>
 </section>
-<node name="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence" spaces=" "><nodename>\(SPACE) after control sequence</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ </code> after control sequence</sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005c_0028SPACE_0029" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\(SPACE)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">~</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></sectiontitle>
 
-<para>The <code>\ </code> command is often used after control sequences to keep
-them from gobbling the space that follows, as in <samp>\TeX\ is nice</samp>.
-And, under normal circumstances, <code>\</code><key>tab</key> and
-<code>\</code><key>newline</key> are equivalent to <code>\ </code>. For another use of
-<code>\ </code>, see also <ref label="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\(SPACE) and \&arobase;</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="607">\NEWLINE</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="608">\SPACE</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="609">\TAB</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Some people prefer to use <code>{}</code> for the same purpose, as in
-<code>\TeX{} is nice</code>. This has the advantage that you can always
-write it the same way, namely <code>\TeX{}</code>, whether it is followed
-by a space or by a punctuation mark. Compare:
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\    
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333<dmn>pt</dmn> plus 1.66666<dmn>pt</dmn> minus 1.11111<dmn>pt</dmn>.
 </para>
+<para>A blank is not a space.  When you type a blank between words, &latex;
+produces white space.  That&textrsquo;s different from an explicit space.  This
+illustrates.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.&linebreak;
-\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{l}
+Three blanks:   in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end{tabular}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="439"><r>package</r>, <code>xspace</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="440"><code>xspace</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>On the first line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace (it would be the same with a single blank or, for instance,
+with a blank and an tab and a blank, or a blank and a newline and a
+blank). But the second line asks for three spaces so the white area is
+wider.  Thus, the backslash-space command will create some horizontal
+space.  (But the best way to create horizontal space is with
+<code>\hspace</code>; <xref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></xref>.)
+</para>
+<para>The backslash-space command has two main uses.  First, it is often used
+after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
+follows, as in <code>\TeX\ is nice</code>.  (But the approach of using curly
+parentheses, as in <code>\TeX{} is nice</code>, has the advantage of still
+working if the next character is a period.)
+</para>
+<para>The second common use is that
+it mark  a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending
+a sentence, as in <code>So says Prof.\ Smith</code> (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Under normal circumstances, <code>\</code><key>tab</key> and <code>\</code><key>newline</key>
+are equivalent to backslash-space, <code>\ </code>.
+</para>
+<!-- c @PkgIndex{xspace} -->
+<!-- c Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace}, -->
+<!-- c package do not follow the standard behavior. -->
 
-<para>Some individual commands, notably those defined with the <code>xspace</code>,
-package do not follow the standard behavior.
+
+</section>
+<node name="_007e" spaces=" "><nodename>~</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinspace & \negthinspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\(SPACE)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>~</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="846" mergedindex="cp">~</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="610">tie</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="611">space, hard</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="612">space, unbreakable</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="613">NBSP</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>before</var>~<var>after</var>
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>The tie character, <code>~</code>, produces a space between <var>before</var> and
+<var>after</var> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333<dmn>pt</dmn> plus 1.66666<dmn>pt</dmn> minus
+1.11111<dmn>pt</dmn> (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce &latex;&textrsquo;s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book.
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<code>Chapter~12</code>, or <code>Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}</code>, or
+<code>Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}</code>. When cases are enumerated inline:
+<code>(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="614"><r>package</r>, <code>siunitx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="615"><code>siunitx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>Between a number and its unit: <code>$745.7.8$~watts</code> (the
+<file>siunitx</file> package has a special facility for this) or
+<code>144~eggs</code>. This includes between a month and a date:
+<code>October~12</code> or <code>12~Oct</code>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<code>AD~565</code>, or <code>2:50~pm</code>, or <code>Boeing~747</code>, or
+<code>268~Plains Road</code>, or <code>\$$1.4$~billion</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: <code>equals~$n$</code>, or
+<code>less than~$\epsilon$</code>, or <code>given~$X$</code>, or <code>modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$</code> (but compare <code>is~$15$</code> with <code>is $15$~times
+the height</code>). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+<code>dimension~$d$</code> or <code>function~$f(x)$</code> (but compare <code>with
+length $l$~or more</code>). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: <code>of~$x$</code>, or <code>from $0$ to~$1$</code>, or <code>in
+common with~$m$</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>Between symbols in series: <code>$1$,~$2$, or~$3$</code> or <code>$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>Between a person&textrsquo;s forenames and between multiple surnames:
+<code>Donald~E. Knuth</code>, or <code>Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo</code>, or
+<code>Charles~XII</code> (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do <code>Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin</code>).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>•</prepend>
+<para>Before a dash: <code>pages 12~--14</code> or <code>it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemize>
+
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cthinspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\/</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\(SPACE) after control sequence</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinspace</code>: Insert 1/6<dmn>em</dmn></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinspace & \negthinspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\/</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">~</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinspace</code> & <code>\negthinspace</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="837">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="847" mergedindex="cp">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="848" mergedindex="cp">\negthinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="616">thin space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="617">space, thin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="618">thin space, negative</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="619">space, negative thin</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para><code>\thinspace</code> produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that
-is 1/6 of an em.  This is the proper space to use between nested
-quotes, as in &textrsquo;<dmn></dmn>&textrdquo;.<!-- c Abuse @dmn, which is a thin space in Texinfo. -->
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6<dmn>em</dmn> and
+-1/6<dmn>em</dmn>.  These are the text mode equivalents of <code>\,</code> and
+<code>\!</code> (<pxref label="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).  You can use
+<code>\,</code> as a synonym for <code>\thinspace</code> in text mode.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\negthinspace</code> command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces.  One common use of <code>\thinspace</code> is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Another use is that some style guides call for a <code>\thinspace</code>
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already).  Still another
+use is between initials, as in <code>D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth</code>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005c_002f" spaces=" "><nodename>\/</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hrulefill \dotfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\/</code>: Insert italic correction</sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005c_002f" spaces=" "><nodename>\/</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hrulefill & \dotfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinspace & \negthinspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\/</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="838">\/</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="441">italic correction</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="849" mergedindex="cp">\/</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="620">italic correction</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\/</code> command produces an <dfn>italic correction</dfn>.  This is a
-small space defined by the font designer for a given character,
-to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows.  The italic
-<i>f</i> character typically has a large italic correction value.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>If the following character is a period or comma, it&textrsquo;s not necessary to
-insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
-very small height.  However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
-normal letters, it can help. Compare
-<tex endspaces=" ">
-</tex>
-<i>f: f;</i> (in the &tex; output, the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;s are nicely separated)
-with <i>f: f;</i>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>before-character</var>\/<var>after-character</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Insert an <dfn>italic correction</dfn>, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use <code>\/</code>, &latex; takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
 </para>
-<para>When changing fonts with commands such as <code>\textit{italic
-text}</code> or <code>{\itshape italic text}</code>, &latex; will
-automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (<pxref label="Font-styles"><xrefnodename>Font
-styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Here, were it not for the <code>\/</code>, the <var>before-character</var>
+italic f would hit the <var>after-character</var> roman H
 </para>
-<para>Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
-correction.  Compare
-<tex endspaces=" ">
-</tex>
-pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;)
-with pdf&tex;.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent> 
+<para>because the italic letter leans far to the right.
 </para>
+<para>If <var>after-character</var> is a period or comma then don&textrsquo;t insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height.  However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+</para>
+<para>When you use commands such as <code>\textit</code> or <code>\itshape</code> to
+change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (<pxref label="Font-styles"><xrefnodename>Font styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Roman characters can also have an italic correction.  An example is in
+the name <code>pdf\/\TeX</code>.
+</para>
 <para>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
 in a different way.
 </para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005chrulefill-_005cdotfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hrulefill \dotfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addvspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\/</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hrulefill \dotfill</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hrulefill & \dotfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\/</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hrulefill</code> & <code>\dotfill</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="839">\hrulefill</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="840">\dotfill</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="850" mergedindex="cp">\hrulefill</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="851" mergedindex="cp">\dotfill</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Produce an infinite rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) filled with a
-horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
-space.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that is
-left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled with
-evenly spaced dots.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) that
+&latex; fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
 </para>
+<para>This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+</pre></example>
+
 <para>To make the rule or dots go to the line&textrsquo;s end use <code>\null</code> at the
 start or end.  
 </para>
 <para>To change the rule&textrsquo;s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
-with <code>\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
-1pt\hfill\kern\z&arobase;}</code>, which changes the default thickness of
-0.4<dmn>pt</dmn> to 1<dmn>pt</dmn>.  Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
-<code>\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb&arobase;xt&arobase;
-1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z&arobase;}</code>, which changes the default
-length of 0.33<dmn>em</dmn> to 1.00<dmn>em</dmn>.
+here
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z&arobase;}
+</pre></example>
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005caddvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\addvspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hrulefill \dotfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addvspace</code></sectiontitle>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which changes the default thickness of 0.4<dmn>pt</dmn> to 1<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+  \leavevmode\cleaders\hb&arobase;xt&arobase;1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z&arobase;}
+</pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="841">\addvspace</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="442">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="443">space, inserting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which changes the default length of 0.33<dmn>em</dmn> to 1.00<dmn>em</dmn>.
+</para>
+<para>This example produces a line for a signature.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{minipage}{4cm}
+  \centering
+  \hrulefill\\
+  Signed
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para><code>\addvspace{<var>length</var>}</code>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The line is 4<dmn>cm</dmn> long.
 </para>
-<para>Add a vertical space of height <var>length</var>, which is a rubber length
-(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  However, if vertical space has already been added to
-the same point in the output by a previous <code>\addvspace</code> command
-then this command will not add more space than what is needed to make
-the natural length of the total vertical space equal to <var>length</var>.
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hrulefill & \dotfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigskip</code> & <code>\medskip</code> & <code>\smallskip</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end with <code>\addvspace{...}</code>
-so that two consecutive Theorem&textrsquo;s are separated by one vertical space,
-not two.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from <i>The Golden Ocean</i> by
+O&textrsquo;Brian).
 </para>
-<para>The error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp> means that
-you were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
-change that is to precede this command with a <code>\par</code> command.
-</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addvspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code></sectiontitle>
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the
-document class.
+<para>Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="842">\bigskip</indexterm>\bigskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="843">\bigskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="bigskip">bigskip</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="852" mergedindex="cp">\bigskip</indexterm>\bigskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="853" mergedindex="cp">\bigskipamount</indexterm></findex>
 <para>The same as <code>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about one line
-space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <code>book</code> and
-<code>article</code> classes is <code>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</code>).
+space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the <code>book</code> and
+<code>article</code> classes is <code>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="844">\medskip</indexterm>\medskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="845">\medskipamount</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The same as <code>\vspace{\medskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about half of
-a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <code>book</code>
-and <code>article</code> classes is <code>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</code>).
+<anchor name="medskip">medskip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="854" mergedindex="cp">\medskip</indexterm>\medskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="855" mergedindex="cp">\medskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The same as <code>\vspace{\medskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the <code>book</code>
+and <code>article</code> classes is <code>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</code>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="846">\smallskip</indexterm>\smallskip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="847">\smallskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="smallskip">smallskip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="856" mergedindex="cp">\smallskip</indexterm>\smallskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="857" mergedindex="cp">\smallskipamount</indexterm></findex>
 <para>The same as <code>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about a
-quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
-<code>book</code> and <code>article</code> classes is <code>3pt plus 1pt minus
-1pt</code>).
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink.  The default for the
+<code>book</code> and <code>article</code> classes is <code>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
+<para>Because each command is a <code>\vspace</code>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it.  So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <code>\bigbreak</code>, <code>\medbreak</code>, and <code>\smallbreak</code>
+are similar but also suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to
+put a page break (<pxref label="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak"><xrefnodename>\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005cvfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\vfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vfill</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\strut</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigbreak</code> & <code>\medbreak</code> & <code>\smallbreak</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="848">\vfill</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+</pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="444">stretch, infinite vertical</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="445">infinite vertical stretch</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page.  (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+</para>
+<para><xref label="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip"><xrefnodename>\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</xrefnodename></xref>, for more.  These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with <code>\addvspace</code>).  In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">abc\bigbreak def ghi
 
-<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length
-(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far
-as needed.
+jkl mno pqr
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will output three paragraphs, the first ending in <samp>abc</samp> and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with <samp>def</samp>.
 </para>
-<para>It is often used in the same way as <code>\vspace{\fill}</code>, except that
-<code>\vfill</code> ends the current paragraph, whereas
-<code>\vspace{\fill}</code> adds the infinite vertical space below its line
-irrespective of the paragraph structure.  In both cases that space will
-disappear at a page boundary; to circumvent this see <ref label="_005cvspace"><xrefnodename>\vspace</xrefnodename></ref>.
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstrut" spaces=" "><nodename>\strut</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\strut</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="858" mergedindex="cp">\strut</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="621">strut</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
-the text <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> and the third <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> is exactly
-halfway between them.
-</para> 
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{document}
-Lost Dog!
-\vfill
-Lost Dog!
-\vfill
-Lost Dog!
-\end{document}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\strut
 </pre></example>
 
+<para>Ensure that the current line has height at least <code>0.7\baselineskip</code>
+and depth at least <code>0.3\baselineskip</code>.  Essentially, &latex;
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+<code>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}</code> (<pxref label="_005crule"><xrefnodename>\rule</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The <code>\baselineskip</code> changes with the current font and fontsize.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <code>\strut</code> keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
+</pre></example>
 
+<para>This example has four lists.  In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2.
+The second list fixes that with a <code>\strut</code> at the end of its first
+item&textrsquo;s second line.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+  \item test
+  \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+  \item test
+  \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+  \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The final two lists use <code>fbox</code> to show what&textrsquo;s happening.  The third
+list&textrsquo;s <code>\parbox</code> goes only to the bottom of its second <samp>test</samp>,
+which happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline.
+The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra
+below-baseline space.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="622"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="623"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="624"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="625"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <code>\strut</code> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+<file>TikZ</file> or <file>Asymptote</file>.  For instance, you may have a command
+such as <code>\graphnode{<var>node-name</var>}</code> that fits a circle around
+<var>node-name</var>.  However, unless you are careful the <var>node-name</var>&textrsquo;s
+<samp>x</samp> and <samp>y</samp> will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes.  A careful <code>\graphnode</code> might
+insert a <code>\strut</code>, then <var>node-name</var>, and then draw the circle.
+</para>
+<para>The general approach of using a zero width <code>\rule</code> is useful in
+many circumstances.  In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the <code>\hline</code>.  Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{tabular}{rl}
+  \textsc{Integral}   &\textsc{Value}           \\
+  \hline
+  $\int_0^x t\, dt$   &$x^2/2$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\  
+  $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$  \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won&textrsquo;t work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like <code>\\[2.5ex]</code>
+will put the room between the header line and the <code>\hline</code>, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\vspace</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\vfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\vspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\strut</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vspace</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="849">\vspace</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="446">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="447">space, vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="859" mergedindex="cp">\vspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="626">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="627">space, vertical</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Synopsis, one of these two:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\vspace{<var>length</var>}
 \vspace*{<var>length</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Add the vertical space <var>length</var>.  This can be negative or positive,
-and is a rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Add the vertical space <var>length</var>.  The <var>length</var> can be positive,
+negative, or zero.  It is a rubber length&textmdash;it may contain a <code>plus</code>
+or <code>minus</code> component (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>&latex; removes the vertical space from <code>\vspace</code> at a page
-break, that is, at the top or bottom of a page.  The starred version
-<code>\vspace*{...}</code> causes the space to stay.
+<para>This puts space between the two paragraphs.
 </para>
-<para>If <code>\vspace</code> is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
-horizontal mode), the space is inserted <emph>after</emph> the line with
-the <code>\vspace</code> command.  A new paragraph is not started.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">And I slept.
+
+\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+The new day dawned cold.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(<xref label="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip"><xrefnodename>\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</xrefnodename></xref> for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
 </para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable.  More
+precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the
+<code>*</code>-version causes the space to stay.  This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+</para>
+<para>If you use <code>\vspace</code> in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the <code>\vspace</code> command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+<code>\vspace</code> command.
+</para>
 <para>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
 the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
 </para>
@@ -10120,255 +14028,632 @@
 
 
 </section>
+<node name="_005cvfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\vfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addvspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="860" mergedindex="cp">\vfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="628">stretch, infinite vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="629">infinite vertical stretch</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vfill
+</pre></example> 
+
+<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in the same way as <code>\vspace{\fill}</code>, except that
+<code>\vfill</code> ends the current paragraph whereas <code>\vspace{\fill}</code>
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure.  In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in <ref label="_005cvspace"><xrefnodename>\vspace</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> and the second <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> is exactly
+halfway between them.
+</para> 
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{document}
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!  % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\addvspace</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\vfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addvspace</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="861" mergedindex="cp">\addvspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="630">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="631">space, inserting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addvspace{<var>vert-length</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add a vertical space of <var>vert-length</var>.  However, if there are two or
+more <code>\addvspace</code>&textrsquo;s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+<var>vert-length</var>&textrsquo;s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The <var>vert-length</var> is a rubber length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates.  The <code>picture</code> draws a scale.  In a
+standard &latex; article the length <code>\baselineskip</code> is 12<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+The two rules here are 22<dmn>pt</dmn> apart: the sum of the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> and the 10<dmn>pt</dmn> from the first <code>addvspace</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{color}
+\begin{document}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+\noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+  \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+\end{picture}%
+\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}% 
+\par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Now uncomment the second <code>\addvspace</code>.  It does not make the gap
+20<dmn>pt</dmn> longer; instead the gap is the sum of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+and 20<dmn>pt</dmn>.  So <code>\addvspace</code> in a sense does the opposite of
+its name &textmdash; it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a
+<code>theorem</code> environment begins and ends with <code>\addvspace</code> so
+that two consecutive <code>theorem</code>&textrsquo;s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+</para>
+<para>A error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp> pointing to an
+<code>\addvspace</code> means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede <code>\addvspace</code>
+with a <code>\par</code> command (<pxref label="_005cpar"><xrefnodename>\par</xrefnodename></pxref>), as in the above example.
+</para>
+
+</section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Boxes" spaces=" "><nodename>Boxes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Color</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Spaces</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Boxes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="448">boxes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="632">boxes</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>All the predefined length parameters (<pxref label="Predefined-lengths"><xrefnodename>Predefined lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
+<para>At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page.  So these commands are central.
 </para>
+<para>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <file>adjustbox</file>.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\mbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal boxes.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\fbox and \framebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put a frame around a box.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">lrbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">An environment like <code>\sbox</code>.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\makebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Box, adjustable position.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\mbox & \makebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal boxes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\fbox & \framebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put a frame around a box.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\parbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Box with text in paragraph mode.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::           ">\raisebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Raise or lower text.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\savebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Like <code>\makebox</code>, but save the text for later use.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\sbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Like <code>\mbox</code>, but save the text for later use.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\sbox & \savebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Like <code>\makebox</code> but save the text for later.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">lrbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Environment version of <code>\sbox</code>.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\usebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Print saved text.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005cmbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\mbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fbox and \framebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\mbox{<var>text}</var></code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\mbox & \makebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fbox & \framebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\mbox</code> & <code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="850">\mbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="862" mergedindex="cp">\mbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="863" mergedindex="cp">\makebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="633">box</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="634">make a box</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="635">hyphenation, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="449">hyphenation, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\mbox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
-text created by its argument.  The <var>text</var> is not broken into
-lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\mbox{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></example>
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005cfbox-and-_005cframebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\fbox and \framebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">lrbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\mbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fbox</code> and <code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<para>Create a box, a container for material.  The <var>text</var> is is typeset in
+LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so it is not broken into lines.  The
+<code>\mbox</code> command is robust, while <code>\makebox</code> is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Because <code>text</code> is not broken into lines, you can use <code>\mbox</code>
+to prevent hyphenation.  In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate
+the table name, <samp>T-4</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+</pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="851">\fbox</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="852">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The first two command versions, <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, are
+roughly equivalent.  They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+<var>text</var>.  (They are like plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\hbox</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>In the third version the optional argument <var>width</var> specifies the
+width of the box.  Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box.  For one thing, <var>text</var> can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>Synopses:
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>with <samp>Chapter Exam</samp> centered.  But <var>text</var> can also be too wide
+for <var>width</var>.  See the example below of zero-width boxes.
 </para>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-depth">mbox makebox depth</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-height">mbox makebox height</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-width">mbox makebox width</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-totalheight">mbox makebox totalheight</anchor>
+<para>In the <var>width</var> argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that &latex; gets on typesetting
+<var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>, <code>\width</code>,
+<code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&textrsquo;s height plus its depth).  For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox{<var>text</var>}
-\framebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\fbox</code> and <code>\framebox</code> commands are like <code>\mbox</code>,
-except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
+<para>For the fourth command version the optional argument <var>position</var>
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
 </para>
-<para>In addition, the <code>\framebox</code> command allows for explicit
-specification of the box width with the optional <var>width</var> argument
-(a dimension), and positioning with the optional <var>position</var>
-argument. <!-- c xxref -->
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The <var>text</var> is centered (default).
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="853">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="854">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Both commands produce a rule of thickness <code>\fboxrule</code> (default
-<code>0.4pt</code>), and leave a space of <code>\fboxsep</code> (default <code>3pt</code>)
-between the rule and the contents of the box.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The <var>text</var> is flush left.
 </para>
-<para><xref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox (picture)</xrefnodename></xref>, for the <code>\framebox</code> command in the
-<code>picture</code> environment.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Flush right.
 </para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stretch the interword space in <var>text</var> across the entire <var>width</var>.
+The <var>text</var> must contain stretchable space for this to work.  For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+<code>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil}</code>
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
+<para>A common use of <code>\makebox</code> is to make zero-width text boxes.  This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+\pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="636"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="637"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="638"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="639"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The right edge of the output <samp>10 points </samp> (note the ending space)
+will be just before the <samp>What</samp> (note the space after
+<samp>points</samp>).  You can use <code>\makebox</code> similarly when making
+graphics, such as in <file>TikZ</file> or <file>Asymptote</file>, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+</para>
+<para>For boxes with frames see <ref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox & \framebox</xrefnodename></ref>. For colors
+see <ref label="Colored-boxes"><xrefnodename>Colored boxes</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>There is a related version of <code>\makebox</code> that is used within the
+<code>picture</code> environment, where the length is given in terms of
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you put a double-backslash into <var>text</var> then &latex; will not
+give you a new line; for instance <code>\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}</code>
+outputs <samp>abc defghi</samp> while <code>\makebox{abc def \par ghi}</code>
+outputs <samp>abc def ghi</samp>, but neither go to a second line.  To get
+multiple lines see <ref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="lrbox" spaces=" "><nodename>lrbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fbox and \framebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>lrbox</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\fbox & \framebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\mbox & \makebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fbox</code> & <code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="855">lrbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="864" mergedindex="cp">\fbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="865" mergedindex="cp">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{lrbox}{\<var>cmd</var>} 
-  <var>text </var>
-\end{lrbox}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This is the environment form of <ref label="_005csbox"><xrefnodename>\sbox</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><code>\sbox</code></xrefinfoname></ref>.
+<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code> except
+for the frame (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <code>\fbox</code> command is
+robust, the <code>\framebox</code> command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The <var>text</var> inside the environment is saved in the box <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>,
-which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
 </para>
+<para>The first two command invocations, <code>\fbox{...}</code> and
+<code>\framebox{...}</code>, are roughly the same.  As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as <var>width</var> and the position of the text inside that box as
+<var>position</var>.  <xref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4<dmn>in</dmn> wide.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+</pre></example>
 
-</section>
-<node name="_005cmakebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">lrbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>\strut</code> inserts a vertical height of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>These parameters determine the frame layout.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="fbox-framebox-fboxrule">fbox framebox fboxrule</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="866" mergedindex="cp">\fboxrule</indexterm>\fboxrule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="867" mergedindex="cp">frame, line width</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="868" mergedindex="cp">frame rule width</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="640">\fboxrule</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box.  The default is
+0.2<dmn>pt</dmn>.  Change it with a command such as
+<code>\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}</code> (<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<anchor name="fbox-framebox-fboxsep">fbox framebox fboxsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="869" mergedindex="cp">\fboxsep</indexterm>\fboxsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="870" mergedindex="cp">frame, separation from contents</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="641">\fboxsep</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+Change it with a command such as <code>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Setting it to 0<dmn>pt</dmn> is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+   \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+</pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="856">\makebox</indexterm></findex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The extra curly braces keep the effect of the <code>\setlength</code> local.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>As with <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, &latex; will not break lines
+in <var>text</var>.  But this example has &latex; break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox{%
+  \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+    My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+    And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+  \end{minipage}}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\makebox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to contain
-the <var>text</var> specified.  The width of the box can be overridden by the
-optional <var>width</var> argument.  The position of the text within the box
-is determined by the optional <var>position</var> argument, which may take
-the following values:
+<para><xref label="Colored-boxes"><xrefnodename>Colored boxes</xrefnodename></xref> for colors other than black and white.
 </para>
-<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Centered (default).
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Flush left.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Flush right.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stretch (justify) across entire <var>width</var>; <var>text</var> must contain
-stretchable space for this to work.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
-
-<para><code>\makebox</code> is also used within the <code>picture</code> environment
-<pxref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on <code>picture</code>&textrsquo;s <code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox
+(picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005cparbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\parbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raisebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cparbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\parbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raisebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fbox & \framebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parbox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="857">\parbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="871" mergedindex="cp">\parbox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="642">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="643">paragraph, in a box</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopses, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="450">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\parbox</code> command produces a box whose contents are created
-in <dfn>paragraph mode</dfn>.  It should be used to make a box small
-pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside.  In particular, you
-shouldn&textrsquo;t use any paragraph-making environments inside a
-<code>\parbox</code> argument.  For larger pieces of text, including ones
-containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a
-<code>minipage</code> environment (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Produce a box of text that is <var>width</var> wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph.  This command is
+fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para><code>\parbox</code> has two mandatory arguments:
-</para>
-<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">width</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>the width of the parbox;
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">text</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>the text that goes inside the parbox.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{picture}(0,0)
+  ...
+  \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+                         this semilog paper, the relationship is
+                         exponential.}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>By default &latex; will position vertically a parbox so its center
-lines up with the center of the surrounding text line.  When the
-optional <var>position</var> argument is present and equal either to <samp>t</samp>
-or <samp>b</samp>, this allows you respectively to align either the top or
-bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You
-may also specify <samp>m</samp> for <var>position</var> to get the default
-behaviour.
+<para>The <var>contents</var> are processed in a text mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so
+&latex; will break lines to make a paragraph.  But it won&textrsquo;t make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a <code>minipage</code> environment
+(<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<para>The optional <var>height</var> argument overrides the natural height of the box.
+<para>The options for <code>\parbox</code> (except for <var>contents</var>) are the same
+as those for <code>minipage</code>.  For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see <ref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></ref> for a complete description.
 </para>
-<para>The <var>inner-pos</var> argument controls the placement of the text inside
-the box, as follows; if it is not specified, <var>position</var> is used.
+<para>There are two required arguments.  The <var>width</var> is a rigid length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  It sets the width of the box into which &latex;
+typesets <var>contents</var>.  The <var>contents</var> is the text that is placed
+in that box.  It should not have any paragraph-making components.
 </para>
-<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>text is placed at the top of the box.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>text is centered in the box.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space
-for this to work.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
-
-
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>.  The <var>position</var> gives the vertical alignment of the
+<code>parbox</code> with respect to the surrounding material.  The possible
+values are <code>c</code> or <code>m</code> to make the vertical center of the
+<code>parbox</code> lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or <code>t</code> to match the top line of the <code>parbox</code> with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or <code>b</code> to match the
+bottom line.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>height</var> overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the <code>parbox</code>. Its default is the value of
+<var>position</var>.  Its possible values are: <code>t</code> to put the
+<var>content</var> at the top of the box, <code>c</code> to put it in the vertical
+center, <code>b</code> to put it at the bottom of the box, and <code>s</code> to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+</para>
 </section>
-<node name="_005craisebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\raisebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\savebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\parbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005craisebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\raisebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sbox & \savebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\parbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raisebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="858">\raisebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="872" mergedindex="cp">\raisebox</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\raisebox</code> command raises or lowers <var>text</var>.  The first
-mandatory argument specifies how high <var>text</var> is to be raised (or
-lowered if it is a negative amount).  <var>text</var> itself is processed
-in LR mode.
+<para>Raise or lower <var>text</var>. This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/278631/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+$f\restricted{A}$
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first mandatory argument <var>distance</var> specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument <var>text</var>. This is a rigid length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If it is negative then it lowers <var>text</var>.  The
+<var>text</var> is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
 <para>The optional arguments <var>height</var> and <var>depth</var> are dimensions.  If
-they are specified, &latex; treats <var>text</var> as extending a certain
-distance above the baseline (<var>height</var>) or below (<var>depth</var>),
-ignoring its natural height and depth.
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box &latex; gets by typesetting <var>text</var>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="raisebox-depth">raisebox depth</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-height">raisebox height</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-width">raisebox width</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-totalheight">raisebox totalheight</anchor>
+<para>In the arguments <var>distance</var>, <var>height</var>, and <var>depth</var> you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+&latex; gets on typesetting <var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>,
+<code>\width</code>, <code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&textrsquo;s height plus its
+depth).
+</para>
+<para>This will align two graphics on their top (<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: FAQ https://texfaq.org/FAQ-topgraph -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc}  % in preamble
+   ...
+\begin{center}
+  \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+    \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+  \qquad
+  \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+    \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+\end{center}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first <code>\height</code> is the height of <file>lion.png</file> while the
+second is the height of <file>meta.png</file>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005csavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\savebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raisebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\savebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\sbox & \savebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">lrbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raisebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sbox</code> & <code>\savebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="859">\savebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="873" mergedindex="cp">\sbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="874" mergedindex="cp">\savebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="644">box, save</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\savebox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}[<var>width</var>][<var>pos</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\sbox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}[<var>width</var>][<var>pos</var>]{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This command typeset <var>text</var> in a box just as with <code>\makebox</code>
-(<pxref label="_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>), except that instead of printing the resulting box,
-it saves it in the box labeled <var>\boxcmd</var>, which must have been
-declared with <code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Typeset <var>text</var> just as with <code>\makebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &
+\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named <var>box-cmd</var>.  The bin name <var>box-cmd</var> begins
+with a backslash, <code>\</code>.  You must have previously allocated the bin
+<var>box-cmd</var> with <code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).The
+<code>\sbox</code> command is robust while <code>\savebox</code> is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
+<para>This creates and uses a bin.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{\fullname}
+\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+  ...
+\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a <code>\newcommand</code> is
+efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations,
+<code>\sbox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> and
+<code>\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code>, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as <var>width</var>, and the position of the text inside that
+box as <var>position</var>.  <xref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox & \makebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full
+description.
+</para>
+<para>In the <code>\sbox</code> and <code>\savebox</code> commands the <var>text</var> is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If
+you use these then &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter <code>\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}</code> and
+<code>\usebox{\newbin}</code> then you get <samp>testtest</samp>, while if you
+enter <code>\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}</code> and
+<code>\usebox{\newbin}</code> then you get <samp>test test</samp>, but no error or
+warning.  To fix this use a <code>\parbox</code> or <code>minipage</code> as here.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\savebox{\abin}{%
+  \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+    \begin{enumerate}
+      \item First item
+      \item Second item
+    \end{enumerate}
+  \end{minipage}}
+  ...
+\usebox{\abin}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin&textrsquo;s contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header.  &latex; only typesets it once.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{graphicx}  % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox{\sealbin}
+\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+  \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+  \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+     \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+       \begin{tabular}{c}
+          \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+          Office of the President
+       \end{tabular}}
+  \end{picture}%
+}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+</para>
+<para>If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005csbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\sbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\savebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sbox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="lrbox" spaces=" "><nodename>lrbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\sbox & \savebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>lrbox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="860">\sbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="875" mergedindex="cp">lrbox</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\sbox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{lrbox}{<var>box-cmd</var>} 
+  <var>text</var>
+\end{lrbox}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para><code>\sbox</code> types <var>text</var> in a box just as with <code>\mbox</code>
-(<pxref label="_005cmbox"><xrefnodename>\mbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) except that instead of the resulting box being
-included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled
-<var>\boxcmd</var>.  <var>\boxcmd</var> must have been previously declared with
-<code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>The <var>text</var> inside the environment is saved in the bin
+<code><var>box-cmd</var></code>.  The <var>box-cmd</var> must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with <code>\newsavebox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).  This is the environment form of the <code>\sbox</code>
+and <code>\savebox</code> commands, and is equivalent to them. <xref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox &
+\savebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full information.
 </para>
+<para>In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+<code>tabular</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox{\jhbin}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+  \begin{tabular}{c}
+    \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+    Jim Hef{}feron
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{lrbox}    
+  ...
+\usebox{\jhbin}
+</pre></example>
 
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cusebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\usebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\sbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usebox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cusebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\usebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">lrbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="861">\usebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="876" mergedindex="cp">\usebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="645">box, use saved box</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\usebox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para><code>\usebox</code> produces the box most recently saved in the bin
-<var>\boxcmd</var> by a <code>\savebox</code> command (<pxref label="_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\savebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<para>Produce the box most recently saved in the bin <var>box-cmd</var> by the
+commands <code>\sbox</code> or <code>\savebox</code>, or the <code>lrbox</code>
+environment. <xref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox & \savebox</xrefnodename></xref> for more information and examples.
+(Note that <var>box-cmd</var> starts with a backslash.)  This command is
+robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 
 </section>
@@ -10376,7 +14661,7 @@
 <node name="Color" spaces=" "><nodename>Color</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Graphics</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Boxes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Color</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="451">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="646">color</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>You can add color to text, rules, etc.  You can also have color in a box
 or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
@@ -10398,10 +14683,10 @@
 
 
 <node name="Color-package-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Color package options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Color models</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Color package options</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>color</code> package options</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="452">color package options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="453">options, color package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="647">color package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="648">options, color package</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
 </para>
@@ -10451,7 +14736,7 @@
 <node name="Color-models" spaces=" "><nodename>Color models</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Commands for color</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Color package options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Color models</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="454">color models</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="649">color models</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>A <dfn>color model</dfn> is a way of representing colors.  &latex;&textrsquo;s
 capabilities depend on the printer driver.  However, the <file>pdftex</file>,
@@ -10467,17 +14752,20 @@
 and yellow makes black.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cmyk</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="color-models-cmyk">color models cmyk</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cmyk</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
 inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
 magenta, and the others are yellow and black.  A number value of 0 means
 minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity.  This model is often
 used in color printing.  It is a subtractive model.
 </para>
+<anchor name="color-models-gray">color models gray</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">gray</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive.  The colors are shades
 of grey.  The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
 </para>
+<anchor name="color-models-rgb">color models rgb</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">rgb</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
 inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
@@ -10485,6 +14773,7 @@
 none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
 This is an additive model.
 </para>
+<anchor name="color-models-RGB">color models RGB</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">RGB</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>(<file>pdftex</file>, <file>xetex</file>, <file>luatex</file> drivers) A comma-separated
 list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive.  This model is a
@@ -10493,6 +14782,7 @@
 The values entered here are converted to the <code>rgb</code> model by
 dividing by 255.
 </para>
+<anchor name="color-models-named">color models named</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">named</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Colors are accessed by name, such as <samp>PrussianBlue</samp>.  The list of
 names depends on the driver, but all support the names <samp>black</samp>,
@@ -10507,7 +14797,7 @@
 <node name="Commands-for-color" spaces=" "><nodename>Commands for color</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Color models</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Commands for color</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="455">color package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="650">color package commands</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These are the commands available with the <file>color</file> package.
 </para>
@@ -10522,9 +14812,9 @@
 <node name="Define-colors" spaces=" "><nodename>Define colors</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored text</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Define colors</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="456">color</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="457">define color</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="458">color, define</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="651">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="652">define color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="653">color, define</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -10532,10 +14822,16 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor{<var>name</var>}{<var>model</var>}{<var>specification</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Give the name <var>name</var> to the color.  For example, after
-<code>\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}</code> you can use that
-color name with <code>Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</code>.
+<para>Give the name <var>name</var> to the color.  For example, after this
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>you can use that color name with <code>Hi ho,
+\textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</code>.
+</para>
 <para>This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
 not be misleading.
 </para>
@@ -10552,8 +14848,8 @@
 <node name="Colored-text" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored text</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored boxes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Define colors</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored text</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="459">color</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="460">colored text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="654">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="655">colored text</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -10562,6 +14858,7 @@
 \textcolor[<var>color model</var>]{<var>color specification</var>}{...}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -10572,9 +14869,11 @@
 <para>The affected text gets the color.  This line
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black.  You
 can use a color declared with <code>\definecolor</code> in exactly the same
 way that we just used the builtin color <samp>magenta</samp>.
@@ -10602,11 +14901,17 @@
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>You can use color in equations.  A document might have
-<code>\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}</code> in the
-preamble, and then contain this equation.
+<para>You can use color in equations.  A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and then contain this equation.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{equation}
   \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
 \end{equation}
@@ -10617,7 +14922,8 @@
 synopses.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>The format of <var>color specification </var> depends on the color model
@@ -10634,6 +14940,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
 </para>
 <!-- c xx address coloring a line of a table? -->
@@ -10643,22 +14950,23 @@
 <node name="Colored-boxes" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored boxes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored pages</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Colored text</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored boxes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="461">color</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="462">colored boxes</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="463">box, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="656">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="657">colored boxes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="658">box, colored</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\colorbox{<var>name</var>}{...}
-\colorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>box background color specification</var>}{...}
+\colorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\fcolorbox{<var>frame color</var>}{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
-\fcolorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>frame color specification</var>}{<var>box background color specification</var>}{...}
+\fcolorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>frame color</var>}{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>Make a box with the stated background color.  The <code>\fcolorbox</code>
@@ -10668,6 +14976,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
 depth and height from the <code>\strut</code> (so the depth is
 <code>-.3\baselineskip</code> and the height is <code>\baselineskip</code>).  This
@@ -10678,7 +14987,7 @@
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>The <code>\fcolorbox</code> commands use the same parameters as <code>\fbox</code>
-(<pxref label="_005cfbox-and-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox and \framebox</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\fboxrule</code> and <code>\fboxsep</code>, to
+(<pxref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox & \framebox</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\fboxrule</code> and <code>\fboxsep</code>, to
 set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
 and the surrounding rule.  &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults are <code>0.4pt</code> and
 <code>3pt</code>, respectively.
@@ -10697,10 +15006,10 @@
 <node name="Colored-pages" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored pages</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Colored boxes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored pages</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="464">color</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="465">colored page</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="466">page, colored</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="467">background, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="659">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="660">colored page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="661">page, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="662">background, colored</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -10731,8 +15040,8 @@
 <node name="Graphics" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Special insertions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Color</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Graphics</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="468">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="469">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="663">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="664">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your &latex; document.
 You need an additional package, which comes standard with &latex;.
@@ -10769,7 +15078,7 @@
 commands of this chapter.  Two that use a programming language are
 Asymptote and MetaPost.  One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
 Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
-see their documentation.
+see their documentation on CTAN.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">Graphics package options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Options when you load the package.
@@ -10779,10 +15088,10 @@
 
 
 <node name="Graphics-package-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics package options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Graphics package options</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>graphics</code> package options</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="470">graphics package options</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="471">options, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="665">graphics package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="666">options, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
 </para>
@@ -10790,6 +15099,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]{graphics}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>or
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
@@ -10859,28 +15169,28 @@
 
 </section>
 <node name="Graphics-package-configuration" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics package configuration</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics package options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces="  "><sectiontitle>Graphics package configuration</sectiontitle>
+<section spaces="  "><sectiontitle><code>graphics</code> package configuration</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="472">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="473">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="474">configuration, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="475">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="476">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="477">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="478">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="479">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="667">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="668">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="669">configuration, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="670">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="671">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="672">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="673">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="674">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These commands configure the way &latex; searches the file system for
 the graphic.
 </para>
 <para>The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
-dependent.  In this document we cover Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+dependent.  In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
 those systems are typically configured.  For other situations consult
 the documentation in <file>grfguide.pdf</file>, or the &latex; source, or your
 &tex; distribution&textrsquo;s documentation.
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\graphicspath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Directories to search.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">\graphicspath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Directories to search.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">File types, such as JPG or EPS.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::         ">\DeclareGraphicsRule</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How to handle file types.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -10889,7 +15199,7 @@
 <node name="_005cgraphicspath" spaces=" "><nodename>\graphicspath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\graphicspath</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="862">\graphicspath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="877" mergedindex="cp">\graphicspath</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -10936,6 +15246,7 @@
 \usepackage{lion.png}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>for each of the listed directories, &latex; concatenates it with the
 file name and searches for the result, checking for <file>pix/lion.png</file>
 and then <file>../pix/lion.png</file>.  This algorithm means that the
@@ -10949,9 +15260,9 @@
 portability by adjusting your &tex; system settings configuration file
 parameter <code>TEXINPUTS</code>; see the documentation of your system.)
 </para>
-<para>You can use <code>\graphicspath</code> in the preamble or in the document
-body.  You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value
-with <code>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput&arobase;path}\makeatother</code>.
+<para>You can use <code>\graphicspath</code> anywhere in the document.  You can use
+it more than once.  Show its value with
+<code>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput&arobase;path}\makeatother</code>.
 </para>
 <para>The directories are taken with respect to the base file.  That is,
 suppose that you are working on a document based on <file>book/book.tex</file>
@@ -10965,7 +15276,7 @@
 <node name="_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions" spaces=" "><nodename>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsRule</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\graphicspath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="863">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="878" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -10987,6 +15298,7 @@
 \includegraphics{lion}   % will find <file>lion.png</file> before <file>lion.pdf</file> 
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>Because the file name <file>lion</file> does not have a period, &latex; uses
 the extension list.  For each directory in the graphics path
 (<pxref label="_005cgraphicspath"><xrefnodename>\graphicspath</xrefnodename></pxref>), &latex; will try the extensions in the order
@@ -10995,17 +15307,20 @@
 not found</samp>.  Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
 extensions.
 </para>
-<para>Because Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+<para>Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
 file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms.  The Windows
 platform is not case sensitive.
 </para>
 <para>You are not required to include <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code> in
 your document; the printer driver has a sensible default.  For example,
-the most recent <file>pdftex.def</file> has the extension list
-<samp><code>.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2</code></samp>.
+the most recent <file>pdftex.def</file> has this extension list.
 </para>
-<para>You can use this command in the preamble or in the document body.  You
-can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You can use this command anywhere in the document.  You can use it more
+than once.  Show its value with
 <code>\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin&arobase;extensions}\makeatother</code>.
 </para>
 
@@ -11013,7 +15328,7 @@
 <node name="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule" spaces=" "><nodename>\DeclareGraphicsRule</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="864">\DeclareGraphicsRule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="879" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareGraphicsRule</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -11038,6 +15353,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>tells &latex; that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
 extension not covered by another rule, so it covers <file>filename.1</file>,
 <file>filename.2</file>, etc.
@@ -11098,8 +15414,8 @@
 <node name="Commands-for-graphics" spaces=" "><nodename>Commands for graphics</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Commands for graphics</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="480">graphics package commands</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="481">commands, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="675">graphics package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="676">commands, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>These are the commands available with the <file>graphics</file> and
 <file>graphicx</file> packages.
@@ -11115,16 +15431,16 @@
 <node name="_005cincludegraphics" spaces=" "><nodename>\includegraphics</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\rotatebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\includegraphics</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="482">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="483">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="484">including graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="485">importing graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="486">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="487">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="488">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="489">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="490">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="865">\includegraphics</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="677">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="678">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="679">including graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="680">importing graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="681">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="682">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="683">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="684">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="685">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="880" mergedindex="cp">\includegraphics</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopses for <file>graphics</file> package:
 </para>
@@ -11161,13 +15477,14 @@
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>will incorporate into the document the graphic in <file>plot.pdf</file>,
 centered and at its nominal size.  You can also give a path to the file,
 as with <code>\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}</code>.  To specify a list
 of locations to search for the file, <pxref label="_005cgraphicspath"><xrefnodename>\graphicspath</xrefnodename></pxref>.
 </para>
-<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes, as with
-<code>\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}</code>.
+<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is <code>\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}</code>.
 </para>
 <para>The <code>\includegraphics{<var>filename</var>}</code> command decides on the
 type of graphic by splitting <var>filename</var> on the first dot.  You can
@@ -11205,7 +15522,7 @@
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
-  \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix}  % if you want a caption  
+  \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -11213,8 +15530,7 @@
 text, with the two vertically centered.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begingroup
-                                \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\parbox{\wd0}{\box0}\endgroup}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{&arobase;{}c&arobase;{}}#1\end{tabular}}
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
@@ -11251,6 +15567,7 @@
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
 <para>The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
 one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
 made one inch wide.  Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
@@ -11266,7 +15583,8 @@
 graphic.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">width</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-width">includegraphics width</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">width</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width.  An example
 is <code>\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}</code>.  You can use the standard
 &tex; dimensions (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>) and also convenient is
@@ -11277,37 +15595,44 @@
 <code>\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}</code>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">height</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You can
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-height">includegraphics height</anchor>
+<para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You can
 use the standard &tex; dimensions (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>), and also
 convenient are <code>\pageheight</code> and <code>\textheight</code> (<pxref label="Page-layout-parameters"><xrefnodename>Page
-layout parameters</xrefnodename></pxref>).  For instance,
+layout parameters</xrefnodename></pxref>).  For instance, the command
 <code>\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}</code> will make the
-graphic be a quarter of the height of the text area.
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">totalheight</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-totalheght">includegraphics totalheght</anchor>
+<para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
 depth.  This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
 instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
 but a large depth.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">keepaspectratio</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as with
-<code>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</code> and you give as
-options both <code>width</code> and <code>height</code> (or <code>totalheight</code>),
-then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as possible without
-distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither is the graphic
-wider than <code>width</code> nor taller than <code>height</code> (or
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-keepaspectratio">includegraphics keepaspectratio</anchor>
+<para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</code>
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and you give as options both <code>width</code> and <code>height</code> (or
+<code>totalheight</code>), then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than <code>width</code> nor taller than <code>height</code> (or
 <code>totalheight</code>).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">scale</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic.  Specifying
-<code>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</code> makes the graphic twice its
-nominal size.  This number may be any value; a number between 1
-and 0 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect
-it.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic.  To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter <code>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</code>.  This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">angle</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Rotate the picture.  The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Rotate the graphic.  The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
 The graphic is rotated about its <code>origin</code>; see that option.  For a
 complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
 <pxref label="_005crotatebox"><xrefnodename>\rotatebox</xrefnodename></pxref>.
@@ -11316,9 +15641,9 @@
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.  Possible
 values are any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for left,
 <code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center, <code>t</code>
-for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline.  Thus,
+for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline.  Thus, entering the command
 <code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</code> will turn the
-picture upside down from the center, while
+picture upside down about that picture&textrsquo;s center, while the command
 <code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</code> will turn its
 picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character <code>c</code>
 gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code>, but gives the
@@ -11331,7 +15656,8 @@
 <para>These are lesser-used options.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">viewport</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-viewport">includegraphics viewport</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">viewport</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show.  Takes four arguments,
 separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with
 <code>\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</code>.  The
@@ -11339,6 +15665,7 @@
 relative to the origin specified by the bounding box.  See also the
 <code>trim</code> option.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-trim">includegraphics trim</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">trim</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Gives parts of the graphic to not show.  Takes four arguments, separated
 by spaces, that are given in &tex; dimensions, as with
@@ -11348,17 +15675,25 @@
 the bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the
 top.  See also the <code>viewport</code> option.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-clip">includegraphics clip</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">clip</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as with
-<code>\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}</code>, then the graphic is
-cropped to the bounding box.  You can get this effect by instead using
-the starred form of the command, as
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box.  This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
 <code>\includegraphics*[...]{...}</code>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-page">includegraphics page</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">page</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file.  The default is
 <code>page=1</code>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-pagebox">includegraphics pagebox</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pagebox</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
 <code>mediabox</code>, <code>cropbox</code>, <code>bleedbox</code>, <code>trimbox</code>, or
@@ -11373,23 +15708,34 @@
 present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
 driver-defined order of preference.  MediaBox is always present.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-interpolate">includegraphics interpolate</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">interpolate</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.  Can be
-set with <code>interpolate=true</code> or just specified as with
-<code>\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}</code>.
+set with <code>interpolate=true</code> or just specified as here.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+</pre></example>
+
+<anchor name="includegraphics-quiet">includegraphics quiet</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">quiet</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Do not write information to the log.  You can set it with
 <code>quiet=true</code> or just specified it with
 <code>\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}</code>,
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-draft">includegraphics draft</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>If you set it with <code>draft=true</code> or just specified it with
-<code>\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}</code>, then the graphic will not
-appear in the document, possibly saving color printer ink.  Instead,
-&latex; will put an empty box of the correct size with the filename
-printed in it.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If you set it with <code>draft=true</code> or just specify it with
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink.  Instead, &latex; will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 <para>These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
@@ -11403,7 +15749,8 @@
 60/72 inch tall.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bb</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-bb">includegraphics bb</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bb</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the bounding box of the displayed region.  The argument is four
 dimensions separated by spaces, as with <code>\includegraphics[.., bb=
 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</code>.  Usually <code>\includegraphics</code> reads the
@@ -11411,24 +15758,41 @@
 only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
 to change it.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bbllx">includegraphics bbllx</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bblly">includegraphics bblly</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bburx">includegraphics bburx</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bbury">includegraphics bbury</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Set the bounding box.  These four are obsolete, but are retained for
 compatibility with old packages.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-natwidth">includegraphics natwidth</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-natheight">includegraphics natheight</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">natwidth, natheight</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>An alternative for <code>bb</code>.  Setting
-<code>\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}</code>
-is the same as setting <code>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>is the same as setting <code>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</code>.
 </para> 
+<anchor name="includegraphics-hiresbb">includegraphics hiresbb</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">hiresbb</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as with
-<code>\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}</code>, then &latex; will look
-for <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines instead of <code>%%BoundingBox</code>
-lines.  (The <code>BoundingBox</code> lines use only natural numbers while the
-<code>HiResBoundingBox</code> lines use decimals; both use units equivalent to
-&tex;&textrsquo;s big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a prior setting of
-<code>true</code>, you can set it to <code>false</code>.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then &latex; will look for <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines instead of
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> lines.  (The <code>BoundingBox</code> lines use only
+natural numbers while the <code>HiResBoundingBox</code> lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to &tex;&textrsquo;s big points, 1/72 inch.) To
+override a prior setting of <code>true</code>, you can set it to <code>false</code>.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 <para>These following options allow a user to override &latex;&textrsquo;s method of
@@ -11438,21 +15802,26 @@
 <file>lion.png</file>. For more on these, <pxref label="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule"><xrefnodename>\DeclareGraphicsRule</xrefnodename></pxref>.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">type</itemformat></item>
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-type">includegraphics type</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">type</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the graphics type.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-ext">includegraphics ext</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ext</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the graphics extension.
 Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-read">includegraphics read</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">read</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the file extension of the read file.
 Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
 </para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-command">includegraphics command</anchor>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">command</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file.
-Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
-<!-- c write18 and restricted execution. -->
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file.  Only use this in
+conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.  <xref label="Command-line-options"><xrefnodename>Command line options</xrefnodename></xref>
+for a discussion of enabling the <code>\write18</code> functionality to run
+external commands.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
@@ -11461,10 +15830,10 @@
 <node name="_005crotatebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\rotatebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\scalebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\includegraphics</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\rotatebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="491">rotation</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="492">rotating graphics</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="493">rotating text</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="866">\rotatebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="686">rotation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="687">rotating graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="688">rotating text</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="881" mergedindex="cp">\rotatebox</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis for <file>graphics</file> package:
 </para>
@@ -11479,7 +15848,8 @@
 \rotatebox[<var>key-value list</var>]{<var>angle</var>}{<var>material</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Put <var>material</var> in a box and rotate it <var>angle</var> degrees counterclockwise. 
+<para>Put <var>material</var> in a box and rotate it <var>angle</var> degrees
+counterclockwise.
 </para>
 <para>This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
 </para>
@@ -11516,16 +15886,22 @@
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">origin</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>The point of the <var>material</var>&textrsquo;s box about which the rotation happens.
-Possible values are any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for
 left, <code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center,
-<code>t</code> for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline.  Thus,
-<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</code> will turn the
-picture upside down from the center, while
-<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</code> will turn its
-picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character <code>c</code>
-gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code> but gives the
-vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>.)  The default is <code>lB</code>.
+<code>t</code> for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline.  Thus, the first line here
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}
+\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character
+<code>c</code> gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code> but gives
+the vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>.)  The default is
+<code>lB</code>.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">x, y</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
 <code>\rotatebox[x=<var>&tex; dimension</var>,y=<var>&tex;
@@ -11544,14 +15920,14 @@
 <node name="_005cscalebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\scalebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\resizebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\rotatebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\scalebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="494">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="495">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="496">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="497">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="498">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="499">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="867">\scalebox</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="868">\reflectbox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="689">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="690">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="691">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="692">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="693">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="694">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="882" mergedindex="cp">\scalebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="883" mergedindex="cp">\reflectbox</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -11573,10 +15949,15 @@
 <para>If you do not specify the optional <var>vertical factor</var> then it
 defaults to the same value as the <var>horizontal factor</var>.
 </para>
-<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as with
-<code>\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}</code>.  If you use the
-<file>graphicx</file> package then you can accomplish the same thing with
-optional arguments to <code>\includegraphics</code>
+<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If you use the <file>graphicx</file> package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to <code>\includegraphics</code>
 (<pxref label="_005cincludegraphics"><xrefnodename>\includegraphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
 <para>The <code>\reflectbox</code> command abbreviates
@@ -11589,13 +15970,13 @@
 <node name="_005cresizebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\resizebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\scalebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\resizebox</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="500">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="501">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="502">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="503">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="504">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="505">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="869">\resizebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="695">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="696">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="697">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="698">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="699">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="700">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="884" mergedindex="cp">\resizebox</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopses:
 </para>
@@ -11634,8 +16015,8 @@
 <node name="Special-insertions" spaces=" "><nodename>Special insertions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Special insertions</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="506">special insertions</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="507">insertions of special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="701">special insertions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="702">insertions of special characters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a
 special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
@@ -11646,7 +16027,7 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">Symbols by font position</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting font symbols by number.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                ">Text symbols</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">Accents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting accents.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">Additional Latin letters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting other non-English characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">Additional Latin letters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting other non-English characters.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                       ">\rule</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting lines and rectangles.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                      ">\today</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting today&textrsquo;s date.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
@@ -11655,41 +16036,42 @@
 <node name="Reserved-characters" spaces=" "><nodename>Reserved characters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Upper and lower case</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Reserved characters</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="508">reserved characters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="509">characters, reserved</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="510">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="511">characters, special</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
-example, the percent sign <code>%</code> is for comments) so they are
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="703">reserved characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="704">characters, reserved</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="705">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="706">characters, special</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign <code>%</code> is for comments.  They are
 called <dfn>reserved characters</dfn> or <dfn>special characters</dfn>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve"># $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ 
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="870">\#</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="871">\$</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="872">\%</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="873">\&</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="874">\_</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="875">\{</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="876">\}</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="885" mergedindex="cp">\#</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="886" mergedindex="cp">\$</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="887" mergedindex="cp">\%</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="888" mergedindex="cp">\&</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="889" mergedindex="cp">\_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="890" mergedindex="cp">\{</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="891" mergedindex="cp">\}</indexterm></findex>
 <para>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
 body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
 put a backslash <code>\</code> in front of the character.  Thus,
-<code>\$1.23</code> will produce <code>$1.23</code> in your output.
+typing <code>\$1.23</code> will produce <code>$1.23</code> in your output.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="877">\~</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="878">\^</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="879">\textbackslash</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="892" mergedindex="cp">\~</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="893" mergedindex="cp">\^</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="894" mergedindex="cp">\textbackslash</indexterm></findex>
 <para>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
 use <code>\~{}</code> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
 character receiving a tilde accent).  Similarly, to get a get a text
-body font circumflex use <code>\^{}</code>.  A text body font backslash
-results from <code>\textbackslash{}</code>.
+body font circumflex use <code>\^{}</code>.  To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter <code>\textbackslash{}</code>.
 </para>
 <para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
-<code>\verb!!</code>, as below.
+<code>\verb!!</code> as below (the double backslash <code>\\</code> is only
+there to split the lines).
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\begin{center}
@@ -11698,17 +16080,14 @@
 \end{center}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>In that example the double backslash <code>\\</code> is only there to
-split the lines.
-</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="Upper-and-lower-case" spaces=" "><nodename>Upper and lower case</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Symbols by font position</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Reserved characters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Upper and lower case</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="512">Upper case</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="513">Lower case</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="514">characters, case</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="707">uppercase</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="708">lowercase</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="709">characters, case of</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -11751,15 +16130,15 @@
 <w>                           </w>\expandafter{\schoolname}}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="515"><r>package</r>, <code>textcase</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="516"><code>textcase</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="710"><r>package</r>, <code>textcase</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="711"><code>textcase</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>The <file>textcase</file> package brings some of the missing feature of the
 standard &latex; commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
 <code>\MakeLowerCase</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="517"><r>package</r>, <code>mfirstuc</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="518"><code>mfirstuc</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="712"><r>package</r>, <code>mfirstuc</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="713"><code>mfirstuc</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
  
 <para>To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
 <file>mfirstuc</file>.
@@ -11769,9 +16148,9 @@
 <node name="Symbols-by-font-position" spaces=" "><nodename>Symbols by font position</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Text symbols</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Upper and lower case</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Symbols by font position</sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="880">\symbol</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="519">accessing any character of a font</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="520">font symbols, by number</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="895" mergedindex="cp">\symbol</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="714">accessing any character of a font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="715">font symbols, by number</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
 the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the visible space character
@@ -11788,288 +16167,300 @@
 <node name="Text-symbols" spaces=" "><nodename>Text symbols</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Accents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Symbols by font position</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Text symbols</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="521">text symbols</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="522">symbols, text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="716">text symbols</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="717">symbols, text</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="881">textcomp <r>package</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols
-in running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are
-not available in OT1; you may need to load the <code>textcomp</code> package.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="896" mergedindex="cp">textcomp <r>package</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then
+you may need to load the <code>textcomp</code> package.
 </para>
 <ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="882">\copyright</indexterm>\copyright</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="883">\textcopyright</indexterm>\textcopyright</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="523">copyright symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The copyright symbol, ©right;.
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="897" mergedindex="cp">\copyright</indexterm>\copyright</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="898" mergedindex="cp">\textcopyright</indexterm>\textcopyright</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="718">copyright symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>©right; The copyright symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="884">\dag</indexterm>\dag</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="524">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The dagger symbol (in text).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="899" mergedindex="cp">\dag</indexterm>\dag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="719">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2020</U> The dagger symbol (in text).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="885">\ddag</indexterm>\ddag</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="525">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The double dagger symbol (in text).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="900" mergedindex="cp">\ddag</indexterm>\ddag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="720">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2021</U> The double dagger symbol (in text).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="886">\LaTeX</indexterm>\LaTeX</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="526">&latex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="527">logo, &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="901" mergedindex="cp">\LaTeX</indexterm>\LaTeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="721">&latex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="722">logo, &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The &latex; logo.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="887">\LaTeXe</indexterm>\LaTeXe</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="528">&latex;2e logo</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="529">logo, &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="902" mergedindex="cp">\LaTeXe</indexterm>\LaTeXe</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="723">&latex;2e logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="724">logo, &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The &latex;2e logo.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="888">\guillemotleft <r>(«)</r></indexterm>\guillemotleft <r>(«)</r></itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="889">\guillemotright <r>(»)</r></indexterm>\guillemotright <r>(»)</r></itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="890">\guilsinglleft <r>(‹)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglleft <r>(‹)</r></itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="891">\guilsinglright <r>(›)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglright <r>(›)</r></itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="530">double guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="531">single guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="532">left angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="533">right angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="534">double angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="535">single angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="536">French quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="537">quotation marks, French</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
-«, », ‹, ›.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="903" mergedindex="cp">\guillemotleft <r>(«)</r></indexterm>\guillemotleft <r>(«)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="904" mergedindex="cp">\guillemotright <r>(»)</r></indexterm>\guillemotright <r>(»)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="905" mergedindex="cp">\guilsinglleft <r>(‹)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglleft <r>(‹)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="906" mergedindex="cp">\guilsinglright <r>(›)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglright <r>(›)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="725">double guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="726">single guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="727">left angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="728">right angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="729">double angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="730">single angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="731">French quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="732">quotation marks, French</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>«, », ‹, ›
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="892">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="893">\dots</indexterm>\dots</itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="894">\textellipsis</indexterm>\textellipsis</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="538">ellipsis</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): &textlsquo;&dots;&textrsquo;.  <code>\ldots</code>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="907" mergedindex="cp">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="908" mergedindex="cp">\dots</indexterm>\dots</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="909" mergedindex="cp">\textellipsis</indexterm>\textellipsis</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="733">ellipsis</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&dots;  An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline):  <code>\ldots</code>
 and <code>\dots</code> also work in math mode.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="895">\lq</indexterm>\lq</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="539">left quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="540">opening quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Left (opening) quote: &textlsquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="910" mergedindex="cp">\lq</indexterm>\lq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="734">left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="735">opening quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textlsquo; Left (opening) quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="896">\P</indexterm>\P</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="897">\textparagraph</indexterm>\textparagraph</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="541">paragraph symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="542">pilcrow</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow): <U>00B6</U>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="911" mergedindex="cp">\P</indexterm>\P</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="912" mergedindex="cp">\textparagraph</indexterm>\textparagraph</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="736">paragraph symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="737">pilcrow</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00B6</U> Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="898">\pounds</indexterm>\pounds</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="899">\textsterling</indexterm>\textsterling</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="543">pounds symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="544">sterling symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>English pounds sterling: £.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="913" mergedindex="cp">\pounds</indexterm>\pounds</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="914" mergedindex="cp">\textsterling</indexterm>\textsterling</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="738">pounds symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="739">sterling symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>£ English pounds sterling.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="900">\quotedblbase <r>(„)</r></indexterm>\quotedblbase <r>(„)</r></itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="901">\quotesinglbase <r>(‚)</r></indexterm>\quotesinglbase <r>(‚)</r></itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="545">double low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="546">single low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="547">low-9 quotation marks, single and double</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double and single quotation marks on the baseline:
-„ and ‚.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="915" mergedindex="cp">\quotedblbase <r>(„)</r></indexterm>\quotedblbase <r>(„)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="916" mergedindex="cp">\quotesinglbase <r>(‚)</r></indexterm>\quotesinglbase <r>(‚)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="740">double low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="741">single low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="742">low-9 quotation marks, single and double</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>„ and ‚
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="902">\rq</indexterm>\rq</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="548">right quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="549">closing quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Right (closing) quote: &textrsquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="917" mergedindex="cp">\rq</indexterm>\rq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="743">right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="744">closing quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrsquo; Right (closing) quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="903">\S</indexterm>\S</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>\itemx \textsection
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="550">section symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-Section sign: <U>00A7</U>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="918" mergedindex="cp">\S</indexterm>\S</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="919" mergedindex="cp">\textsection</indexterm>\textsection</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="745">section symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00A7</U> Section sign.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="904">\TeX</indexterm>\TeX</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="551">&tex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="552">logo, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="920" mergedindex="cp">\TeX</indexterm>\TeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="746">&tex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="747">logo, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>The &tex; logo.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="905">\textasciicircum</indexterm>\textasciicircum</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="553">circumflex, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="554">ASCII circumflex, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>ASCII circumflex: ^.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="921" mergedindex="cp">\textasciicircum</indexterm>\textasciicircum</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="748">circumflex, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="749">ASCII circumflex, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>^ ASCII circumflex.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="906">\textasciitilde</indexterm>\textasciitilde</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="555">tilde, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="556">ASCII tilde, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>ASCII tilde: ~.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="922" mergedindex="cp">\textasciitilde</indexterm>\textasciitilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="750">tilde, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="751">ASCII tilde, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>~ ASCII tilde.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="907">\textasteriskcentered</indexterm>\textasteriskcentered</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="557">asterisk, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="558">centered asterisk, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Centered asterisk: *.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="923" mergedindex="cp">\textasteriskcentered</indexterm>\textasteriskcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="752">asterisk, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="753">centered asterisk, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>* Centered asterisk.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="908">\textbackslash</indexterm>\textbackslash</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="559">backslash, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Backslash: \.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="924" mergedindex="cp">\textbackslash</indexterm>\textbackslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="754">backslash, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>\ Backslash.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="909">\textbar</indexterm>\textbar</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="560">vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="561">bar, vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Vertical bar: |.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="925" mergedindex="cp">\textbar</indexterm>\textbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="755">vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="756">bar, vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>| Vertical bar.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="910">\textbardbl</indexterm>\textbardbl</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="562">vertical bar, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="563">bar, double vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="564">double vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double vertical bar.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="926" mergedindex="cp">\textbardbl</indexterm>\textbardbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="757">vertical bar, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="758">bar, double vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="759">double vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>23F8</U> Double vertical bar.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="911">\textbigcircle</indexterm>\textbigcircle</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="565">big circle symbols, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="566">circle symbol, big, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Big circle symbol.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="927" mergedindex="cp">\textbigcircle</indexterm>\textbigcircle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="760">big circle symbols, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="761">circle symbol, big, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>25EF</U> Big circle symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="912">\textbraceleft</indexterm>\textbraceleft</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="567">left brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="568">brace, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Left brace: {.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="928" mergedindex="cp">\textbraceleft</indexterm>\textbraceleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="762">left brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="763">brace, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>{ Left brace.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="913">\textbraceright</indexterm>\textbraceright</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="569">right brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="570">brace, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Right brace: }.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="929" mergedindex="cp">\textbraceright</indexterm>\textbraceright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="764">right brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="765">brace, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>} Right brace.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="914">\textbullet</indexterm>\textbullet</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="571">bullet, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Bullet: •.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="930" mergedindex="cp">\textbullet</indexterm>\textbullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="766">bullet, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>• Bullet.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="915">\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</indexterm>\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="572">circled letter, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para><var>letter</var> in a circle, as in ®istered;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="931" mergedindex="cp">\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</indexterm>\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="767">circled letter, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>24B6</U> Circle around <var>letter</var>.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="916">\textcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcompwordmark</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="917">\textcapitalcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcapitalcompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="918">\textascendercompwordmark</indexterm>\textascendercompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="573">composite word mark, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="574">cap height</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="575">ascender height</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Composite word mark (invisible).  The <code>\textcapital...</code> form
-has the cap height of the font, while the <code>\textascender...</code> form
-has the ascender height.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="932" mergedindex="cp">\textcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcompwordmark</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="933" mergedindex="cp">\textcapitalcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcapitalcompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="934" mergedindex="cp">\textascendercompwordmark</indexterm>\textascendercompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="768">composite word mark, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="769">cap height</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="770">ascender height</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+<code>f\textcompwordmark i</code> produces <samp>fi</samp> without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages.  The
+<code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code> form has the cap height of the font
+while the <code>\textascendercompwordmark</code> form has the ascender height.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="919">\textdagger</indexterm>\textdagger</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="576">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Dagger: <math>\dag</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="935" mergedindex="cp">\textdagger</indexterm>\textdagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="771">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2020</U> Dagger.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="920">\textdaggerdbl</indexterm>\textdaggerdbl</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="577">dagger, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="578">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double dagger: <math>\ddag</math>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="936" mergedindex="cp">\textdaggerdbl</indexterm>\textdaggerdbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="772">dagger, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="773">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2021</U> Double dagger.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="921">\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></indexterm>\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="579">dollar sign</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="580">currency, dollar</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Dollar sign: $.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="937" mergedindex="cp">\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></indexterm>\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="774">dollar sign</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="775">currency, dollar</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>$ Dollar sign.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="922">\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></indexterm>\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="581">em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Em-dash: &textmdash; (for punctuation).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="938" mergedindex="cp">\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></indexterm>\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="776">em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textmdash; Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+<code>The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.</code>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="923">\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></indexterm>\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="582">e-dash</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>En-dash: &textndash; (for ranges).
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="939" mergedindex="cp">\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></indexterm>\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="777">e-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textndash; En-dash (used for ranges, as in <code>See pages 12--14</code>).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="924">\texteuro</indexterm>\texteuro</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="583">euro symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="584">currency, euro</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The Euro symbol: €.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="940" mergedindex="cp">\texteuro</indexterm>\texteuro</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="778">euro symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="779">currency, euro</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="780"><r>package</r>, <code>eurosym</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="781"><code>eurosym</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+<file>eurosym</file> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="925">\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="585">exclamation point, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Upside down exclamation point: ¡.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="941" mergedindex="cp">\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="782">exclamation point, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>¡ Upside down exclamation point.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="926">\textgreater</indexterm>\textgreater</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="586">greater than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Greater than: >.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="942" mergedindex="cp">\textgreater</indexterm>\textgreater</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="783">greater than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>> Greater than symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="927">\textless</indexterm>\textless</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="587">less than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Less than: <.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="943" mergedindex="cp">\textless</indexterm>\textless</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="784">less than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>< Less than symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="928">\textleftarrow</indexterm>\textleftarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="588">arrow, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="589">left arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Left arrow.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="944" mergedindex="cp">\textleftarrow</indexterm>\textleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="785">arrow, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="786">left arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2190</U> Left arrow.   
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="929">\textordfeminine</indexterm>\textordfeminine</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="930">\textordmasculine</indexterm>\textordmasculine</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="590">feminine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="591">masculine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="592">ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="593">Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="945" mergedindex="cp">\textordfeminine</indexterm>\textordfeminine</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="946" mergedindex="cp">\textordmasculine</indexterm>\textordmasculine</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="787">feminine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="788">masculine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="789">ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="790">Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="931">\textperiodcentered</indexterm>\textperiodcentered</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="594">period, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="595">centered period, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Centered period: <U>00B7</U>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="947" mergedindex="cp">\textperiodcentered</indexterm>\textperiodcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="791">period, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="792">centered period, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00B7</U> Centered period.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="932">\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="596">question mark, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Upside down question mark: ¿.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="948" mergedindex="cp">\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="793">question mark, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>¿ Upside down question mark.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="933">\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="597">left quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="598">double left quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double left quote: &textldquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="949" mergedindex="cp">\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="794">left quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="795">double left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textldquo; Double left quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="934">\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="599">right quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="600">double right quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Double right quote: &textrdquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="950" mergedindex="cp">\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="796">right quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="797">double right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrdquo; Double right quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="935">\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="601">left quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="602">single left quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Single left quote: &textlsquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="951" mergedindex="cp">\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="798">left quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="799">single left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textlsquo; Single left quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="936">\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="603">right quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="604">single right quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Single right quote: &textrsquo;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="952" mergedindex="cp">\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="800">right quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="801">single right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrsquo; Single right quote.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="937">\textquotesingle</indexterm>\textquotesingle</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="605">quote, single straight</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="606">straight single quote</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="607">single quote, straight</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="953" mergedindex="cp">\textquotesingle</indexterm>\textquotesingle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="802">quote, single straight</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="803">straight single quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="804">single quote, straight</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>0027</U> Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)  
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="938">\textquotestraightbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightbase</itemformat></item>
-<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="939">\textquotestraightdblbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightdblbase</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="608">quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="609">straight quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="610">double quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="611">straight double quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="954" mergedindex="cp">\textquotestraightbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightbase</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="955" mergedindex="cp">\textquotestraightdblbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightdblbase</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="805">quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="806">straight quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="807">double quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="808">straight double quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<!-- c Unicode doesn't have these https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark -->
 <para>Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="940">\textregistered</indexterm>\textregistered</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="612">registered symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Registered symbol: ®istered;.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="956" mergedindex="cp">\textregistered</indexterm>\textregistered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="809">registered symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>®istered; Registered symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="941">\textrightarrow</indexterm>\textrightarrow</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="613">arrow, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="614">right arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Right arrow.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="957" mergedindex="cp">\textrightarrow</indexterm>\textrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="810">arrow, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="811">right arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2192</U> Right arrow.  
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="942">\textthreequartersemdash</indexterm>\textthreequartersemdash</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="615">three-quarters em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="616">em-dash, three-quarters</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>&textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="958" mergedindex="cp">\textthreequartersemdash</indexterm>\textthreequartersemdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="812">three-quarters em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="813">em-dash, three-quarters</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>FE58</U> &textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="943">\texttrademark</indexterm>\texttrademark</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="617">trademark symbol</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Trademark symbol: <U>2122</U>.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="959" mergedindex="cp">\texttrademark</indexterm>\texttrademark</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="814">trademark symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2122</U> Trademark symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="944">\texttwelveudash</indexterm>\texttwelveudash</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="618">two-thirds em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="619">em-dash, two-thirds</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>&textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+<!-- c ?? Diff from \textthreequartersemdash?  In Unicode? -->
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="960" mergedindex="cp">\texttwelveudash</indexterm>\texttwelveudash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="815">two-thirds em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="816">em-dash, two-thirds</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>FE58</U> &textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.   
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="945">\textunderscore</indexterm>\textunderscore</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="620">underscore, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Underscore: _.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="961" mergedindex="cp">\textunderscore</indexterm>\textunderscore</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="817">underscore, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>_ Underscore.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="946">\textvisiblespace</indexterm>\textvisiblespace</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="621">visible space symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Visible space symbol.
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="962" mergedindex="cp">\textvisiblespace</indexterm>\textvisiblespace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="818">visible space symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2423</U> Visible space symbol.  
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
 
@@ -12078,167 +16469,167 @@
 <node name="Accents" spaces=" "><nodename>Accents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Additional Latin letters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Text symbols</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Accents</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="622">accents</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="623">characters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="624">letters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="819">accents</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="820">characters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="821">letters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="625"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="626"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="822"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="823"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="627">multilingual support</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and
-languages, through the <code>babel</code> package and related support.  This
-section does not attempt to cover all that support.  It merely lists
-the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="824"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="825"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="826">multilingual support</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and languages,
+through the <code>babel</code> package and related support if you are using
+pdf&latex;, or <file>polyglossia</file> if you are using Xe&latex; or
+Lua&latex;.  This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.  The
+<code>\capital...</code> commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.
 </para>
-<para>The <code>\capital...</code> commands produce alternative forms for use with
-capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.
+<para>Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase <samp>o</samp>.
 </para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="963" mergedindex="cp">\i <r>(dotless i)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="827">dotless i</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Note that <code>\i</code> produces a dotless i,
+<!-- c @dotless{i}, -->
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="964" mergedindex="cp">\j <r>(dotless j)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="828">dotless j</indexterm></cindex>
+and <code>\j</code> produces a dotless j.
+<!-- c @dotless{j}. -->
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+</para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\"</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldieresis</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="947">\" <r>(umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="948">\capitaldieresis</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="628">umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="629">dieresis accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in <accent type="uml">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="965" mergedindex="cp">\" <r>(umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="966" mergedindex="cp">\capitaldieresis</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="829">umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="830">dieresis accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="uml">o</accent> Umlaut (dieresis).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\'</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalacute</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="949">\' <r>(acute accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="950">\capitalacute</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="630">acute accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces an acute accent, as in <accent type="acute">o</accent>.  In the <code>tabbing</code>
-environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column
-(<pxref label="tabbing"><xrefnodename>tabbing</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="967" mergedindex="cp">\' <r>(acute accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="968" mergedindex="cp">\capitalacute</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="831">acute accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="acute">o</accent> Acute accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\.</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="951">\. <r>(dot-over accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="631">dot accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="632">dot-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a dot accent over the following, as in <accent type="dotaccent">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="969" mergedindex="cp">\. <r>(dot-over accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="832">dot accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="833">dot-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="dotaccent">o</accent>  Dot accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\=</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalmacron</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="952">\= <r>(macron accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="953">\capitalmacron</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="633">macron accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="634">overbar accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="635">bar-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in <accent type="macr">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="970" mergedindex="cp">\= <r>(macron accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="971" mergedindex="cp">\capitalmacron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="834">macron accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="835">overbar accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="836">bar-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="macr">o</accent> Macron (overbar) accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\^</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcircumflex</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="954">\^ <r>(circumflex accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="955">\capitalcircumflex</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="636">circumflex accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="637">hat accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in <accent type="circ">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="972" mergedindex="cp">\^ <r>(circumflex accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="973" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcircumflex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="837">circumflex accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="838">hat accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="circ">o</accent> Circumflex (hat) accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\`</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalgrave</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="956">\` <r>(grave accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="957">\capitalgrave</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="638">grave accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a grave accent over the following, as in <accent type="grave">o</accent>.  In the
-<code>tabbing</code> environment, move following text to the right margin
-(<pxref label="tabbing"><xrefnodename>tabbing</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="974" mergedindex="cp">\` <r>(grave accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="975" mergedindex="cp">\capitalgrave</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="839">grave accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="grave">o</accent> Grave accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\~</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltilde</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="958">\~ <r>(tilde accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="959">\capitaltilde</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="639">tilde accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in <accent type="tilde">n</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="976" mergedindex="cp">\~ <r>(tilde accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="977" mergedindex="cp">\capitaltilde</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="840">tilde accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="tilde">n</accent> Tilde accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\b</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="960">\b <r>(bar-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="640">bar-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a bar accent under the following, as in <accent type="ubaraccent">o</accent>. See
-also <code>\underbar</code> hereinafter.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="978" mergedindex="cp">\b <r>(bar-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="841">bar-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ubaraccent">o</accent> Bar accent underneath.
 </para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="979" mergedindex="cp">\underbar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="842">underbar</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Related to this, <code>\underbar{<var>text</var>}</code> produces a bar under
+<var>text</var>.  The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders.  See also <code>\underline</code> in
+<ref label="Math-miscellany"><xrefnodename>Math miscellany</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\c</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcedilla</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="961">\c <r>(cedilla accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="962">\capitalcedilla</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="641">cedilla accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in <accent type="cedil">c</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="980" mergedindex="cp">\c <r>(cedilla accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="981" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcedilla</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="843">cedilla accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="cedil">c</accent> Cedilla accent underneath.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\d</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldotaccent</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="963">\d <r>(dot-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="964">\capitaldotaccent</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="642">dot-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a dot accent under the following, as in <accent type="udotaccent">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="982" mergedindex="cp">\d <r>(dot-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="983" mergedindex="cp">\capitaldotaccent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="844">dot-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="udotaccent">o</accent> Dot accent underneath.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\H</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalhungarumlaut</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="965">\H <r>(Hungarian umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="966">\capitalhungarumlaut</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="643">hungarian umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in <accent type="doubleacute">o</accent>.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="984" mergedindex="cp">\H <r>(Hungarian umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="985" mergedindex="cp">\capitalhungarumlaut</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="845">hungarian umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="doubleacute">o</accent> Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\i</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="967">\i <r>(dotless i)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="644">dotless i</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a dotless i, as in &textlsquo;<dotless>i</dotless>&textrsquo;.
-</para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\j</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="968">\j <r>(dotless j)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="645">dotless j</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a dotless j, as in &textlsquo;<dotless>j</dotless>&textrsquo;.
-</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\k</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalogonek</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="969">\k <r>(ogonek)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="970">\capitalogonek</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="646">ogonek</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a letter with ogonek, as in &textlsquo;<accent type="ogon">o</accent>&textrsquo;.  Not available in
-the OT1 encoding.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="986" mergedindex="cp">\k <r>(ogonek)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="987" mergedindex="cp">\capitalogonek</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="846">ogonek</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ogon">o</accent> Ogonek.  Not available in the OT1 encoding.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\r</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalring</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="971">\r <r>(ring accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="972">\capitalring</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="647">ring accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a ring accent, as in &textlsquo;<accent type="ring">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="988" mergedindex="cp">\r <r>(ring accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="989" mergedindex="cp">\capitalring</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="847">ring accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ring">o</accent> Ring accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\t</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltie</itemformat></itemx>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\newtie</itemformat></itemx>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalnewtie</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="973">\t <r>(tie-after accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="974">\capitaltie</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="975">\newtie</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="976">\capitalnewtie</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="648">tie-after accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a tie-after accent, as in &textlsquo;<accent type="tieaccent">oo</accent>&textrsquo;.  The
-<code>\newtie</code> form is centered in its box.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="990" mergedindex="cp">\t <r>(tie-after accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="991" mergedindex="cp">\capitaltie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="992" mergedindex="cp">\newtie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="993" mergedindex="cp">\capitalnewtie</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="848">tie-after accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="tieaccent">oo</accent> Tie-after accent.  The <code>\newtie</code> form is centered in
+its box.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\u</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalbreve</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="977">\u <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="978">\capitalbreve</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="649">breve accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a breve accent, as in &textlsquo;<accent type="breve">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="994" mergedindex="cp">\u <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="995" mergedindex="cp">\capitalbreve</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="849">breve accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="breve">o</accent> Breve accent.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\underbar</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="979">\underbar</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="650">underbar</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
-The argument is always processed in horizontal mode.  The bar is
-always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
-descenders.  See also <code>\underline</code> in <ref label="Math-miscellany"><xrefnodename>Math miscellany</xrefnodename></ref>.
-See also <code>\b</code> above.
-</para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\v</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcaron</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="980">\v <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="981">\capitalcaron</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="651">hacek accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="652">check accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="653">caron accent</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>Produces a h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check, caron) accent, as in &textlsquo;<accent type="caron">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="996" mergedindex="cp">\v <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="997" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcaron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="850">hacek accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="851">check accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="852">caron accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="caron">o</accent>  H<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check, caron) accent.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
@@ -12248,98 +16639,98 @@
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Additional Latin letters</sectiontitle>
 
 <anchor name="Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</anchor>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="654">Latin letters, additional</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="655">letters, additional Latin</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="656">extended Latin</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="657">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="658">non-English characters</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="659">characters, non-English</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="853">Latin letters, additional</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="854">letters, additional Latin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="855">extended Latin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="856">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="857">non-English characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="858">characters, non-English</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters (beyond
-A&textndash;Z) extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond
+A&textndash;Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
 than English.
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\aa</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AA</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="982">\aa (å)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="983">\AA (Å)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="660">aring</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="998" mergedindex="cp">\aa (å)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="999" mergedindex="cp">\AA (Å)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="859">aring</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>å and Å.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ae</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AE</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="984">\ae (æ)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="985">\AE (Æ)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="661">ae ligature</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1000" mergedindex="cp">\ae (æ)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1001" mergedindex="cp">\AE (Æ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="860">ae ligature</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>æ and Æ.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dh</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DH</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="986">\dh (ð)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="987">\DH (Ð)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="662">Icelandic eth</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="663">eth, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1002" mergedindex="cp">\dh (ð)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1003" mergedindex="cp">\DH (Ð)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="861">Icelandic eth</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="862">eth, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with <sc>OT1</sc>
 encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to select an alternate
 font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dj</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DJ</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="988">\dj</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="989">\DJ</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1004" mergedindex="cp">\dj</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1005" mergedindex="cp">\DJ</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Crossed d and D, a.k.a.&noeos; capital and small letter d with stroke.  Not
 available with <sc>OT1</sc> encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to
 select an alternate font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ij</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\IJ</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="990">\ij (ij)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="991">\IJ (IJ)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="664">ij letter, Dutch</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1006" mergedindex="cp">\ij (ij)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1007" mergedindex="cp">\IJ (IJ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="863">ij letter, Dutch</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\l</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\L</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="992">\l (&lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="993">\L (&Lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="665">polish l</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1008" mergedindex="cp">\l (&lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1009" mergedindex="cp">\L (&Lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="864">polish l</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>&lslash; and &Lslash;.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ng</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\NG</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="994">\ng</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="995">\NG</indexterm></findex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1010" mergedindex="cp">\ng</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1011" mergedindex="cp">\NG</indexterm></findex>
 <para>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\o</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\O</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="996">\o (ø)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="997">\O (Ø)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="666">oslash</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1012" mergedindex="cp">\o (ø)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1013" mergedindex="cp">\O (Ø)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="865">oslash</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>ø and Ø.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\oe</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\OE</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="998">\oe (œ)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="999">\OE (Œ)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="667">oe ligature</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1014" mergedindex="cp">\oe (œ)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1015" mergedindex="cp">\OE (Œ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="866">oe ligature</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>œ and Œ.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ss</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\SS</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1000">\ss (ß)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1001">\SS (SS)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="668">es-zet German letter</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="669">sharp S letters</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1016" mergedindex="cp">\ss (ß)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1017" mergedindex="cp">\SS (SS)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="867">es-zet German letter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="868">sharp S letters</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>ß and SS.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\th</itemformat></item>
 <itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\TH</itemformat></itemx>
-</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1002">\th (þ)</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1003">\TH (Þ)</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="670">Icelandic thorn</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="671">thorn, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1018" mergedindex="cp">\th (þ)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1019" mergedindex="cp">\TH (Þ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="869">Icelandic thorn</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="870">thorn, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
 <para>Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with <sc>OT1</sc>
 encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to select an alternate
 font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
@@ -12351,46 +16742,82 @@
 <node name="_005crule" spaces=" "><nodename>\rule</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\today</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Additional Latin letters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\rule</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1004">\rule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1020" mergedindex="cp">\rule</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\rule[<var>raise</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>thickness</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rule{<var>width</var>}{<var>thickness</var>}
+\rule[<var>raise</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>thickness</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\rule</code> command produces <dfn>rules</dfn>, that is, lines or
-rectangles.  The arguments are:
+<para>Produce a <dfn>rule</dfn>, a filled-in rectangle.
 </para>
-<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
-<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">raise</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>How high to raise the rule (optional).
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="871">Halmos symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="872">tombstone</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">width</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The length of the rule (mandatory).
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="873"><r>package</r>, <code>amsthm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="874"><code>amsthm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <file>amsthm</file> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
 </para>
-</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">thickness</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
-</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+<para>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <var>width</var> and vertical
+<var>thickness</var> of the rectangle.  They are rigid lengths
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The optional argument <var>raise</var> is also a rigid
+length, and tells &latex; how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall.  This line
+thickness is common in &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it.
+<xref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></xref> for examples.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005ctoday" spaces=" "><nodename>\today</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\rule</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\today</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1005">\today</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="672">date, today&textrsquo;s</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1021" mergedindex="cp">\today</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="875">date, today&textrsquo;s</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="876">today&textrsquo;s date</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>\today</code> command produces today&textrsquo;s date, in the format
-<samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>, <var>yyyy</var></samp>; for example, <samp>July 4, 1976</samp>.
-It uses the predefined counters <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, and
-<code>\year</code> (<pxref label="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear"><xrefnodename>\day \month \year</xrefnodename></pxref>) to do this.  It is not
-updated as the program runs.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<para>Multilingual packages like <file>babel</file> or classes like <file>lettre</file>,
-among others, will localize <code>\today</code>. For example, the following
-will output <samp>4 juillet 1976</samp>:
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\today
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce today&textrsquo;s date in the format <samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>,
+<var>yyyy</var></samp>.  An example of a date in that format is <samp>July 4,
+1976</samp>.
 </para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="877"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="878"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="879"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="880"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Multilingual packages such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>, or
+classes such as <file>lettre</file>, will localize <code>\today</code>. For example,
+the following will output <samp>4 juillet 1976</samp>:
+</para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
 \documentclass{minimal}
@@ -12400,161 +16827,468 @@
 \end{document}
 </pre></example>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="673"><r>package</r>, <code>datetime</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="674"><code>datetime</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><code>\today</code> uses the counters <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, and
+<code>\year</code> (<pxref label="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear"><xrefnodename>\day & \month & \year</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="881"><r>package</r>, <code>datetime</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="882"><code>datetime</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>datetime</code> package, among others, can produce a wide variety
-of other date formats.
+<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates.  One is <file>datetime</file> package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
 </para>
+<para>The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+</para>
 
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Splitting-the-input" spaces=" "><nodename>Splitting the input</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Splitting the input</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="675">splitting the input file</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="676">input file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="883">splitting the input file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="884">input file</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>A large document requires a lot of input.  Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it&textrsquo;s more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones.  Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="677">root file</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="678">file, root</indexterm></cindex>
-<dfn>root file</dfn>; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run &latex;.
+<para>&latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document.  It can also speed processing.
 </para>
-<para><xref label="filecontents"><xrefnodename>filecontents</xrefnodename></xref>, for an environment that allows bundling an
-external file to be created with the main document.
+<para>Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="885">root file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="886">file, root</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>root file</dfn>, on which &latex; compilation starts.  This shows such
+a file with five included files.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{  % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+  pref,
+  chap1,
+  chap2,
+  append,
+  bib
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{pref} 
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1} 
+\include{chap2}
+\appendix
+\include{append}
+\backmatter
+\include{bib} 
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This will bring in material from <file>pref.tex</file>, <file>chap1.tex</file>,
+<file>chap2.tex</file>, <file>append.tex</file>, and <file>bib.tex</file>.  If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+<code>\includeonly{...}</code> except for <code>chap1,</code> and compile again,
+then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the <code>\includeonly</code> command is that
+&latex; will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for another example of <code>\includeonly</code>.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\include</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Conditionally include a file.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">\includeonly</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Determine which files are included.
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::              ">\input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Unconditionally include a file.
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                 ">\endinput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stop including material from a file.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\include & \includeonly</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Conditionally include files.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                    ">\input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Unconditionally include a file.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005cinclude" spaces=" "><nodename>\include</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\includeonly</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\include</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1006">\include</indexterm></findex>
+<node name="_005cendinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\endinput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\include & \includeonly</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\endinput</code></sectiontitle>
 
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1022" mergedindex="cp">\endinput</indexterm></findex>
+
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\include{<var>file</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\endinput
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>If no <code>\includeonly</code> command is present, the <code>\include</code>
-command executes <code>\clearpage</code> to start a new page
-(<pxref label="_005cclearpage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage</xrefnodename></pxref>), then reads <var>file</var>, then does another
-<code>\clearpage</code>.
+<para>When you <code>\include{filename}</code>, inside <file>filename.tex</file> the
+material after <code>\endinput</code> will not be included.  This command is
+optional; if <file>filename.tex</file> has no <code>\endinput</code> then &latex;
+will read all of the file.
 </para>
-<para>Given an <code>\includeonly</code> command, the <code>\include</code> actions are
-only run if <var>file</var> is listed as an argument to
-<code>\includeonly</code>.  See <ref label="_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\includeonly</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<para>For example, suppose that a document&textrsquo;s root file has
+<code>\input{chap1}</code> and this is <file>chap1.tex</file>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="679">nested <code>\include</code>, not allowed</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another <code>\include</code> command.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{One}
+This material will appear in the document. 
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put <code>\endinput</code> halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears.  Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+<code>\endinput</code> to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
 </para>
+<para>After reading <code>\endinput</code>, &latex; continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an <code>\if...</code> with a
+<code>\fi</code>.
+</para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="_005cincludeonly" spaces=" "><nodename>\includeonly</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\include</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\includeonly</code></sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly" spaces=" "><nodename>\include & \includeonly</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\endinput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\include</code> & <code>\includeonly</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1007">\includeonly</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1023" mergedindex="cp">\include</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1024" mergedindex="cp">\includeonly</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\includeonly{<var>file1</var>,<var>file2</var>,...}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includeonly{  % in document preamble
+  ...
+  <var>filename</var>,
+  ...
+  }
+  ...
+\include{<var>filename</var>}  % in document body 
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read by
-subsequent <code>\include</code> commands.  The list of filenames is
-comma-separated. Each element <var>file1</var>, <var>file2</var>, &dots; must
-exactly match a filename specified in a <code>\include</code> command for the
-selection to be effective.
+<para>Bring material from the external file <file><var>filename</var>.tex</file> into a
+&latex; document.
 </para>
-<para>This command can only appear in the preamble.
+<para>The <code>\include</code> command does three things: it executes
+<code>\clearpage</code> (<pxref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage & \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></pxref>), then it
+inputs the material from <file><var>filename</var>.tex</file> into the document,
+and then it does another <code>\clearpage</code>.  This command can only
+appear in the document body.  The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls
+which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent <code>\include</code>
+commands.  Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
 </para>
+<para>This example root document, <file>constitution.tex</file>, brings in
+three files, <file>preamble.tex</file>, <file>articles.tex</file>, and
+<file>amendments.tex</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  preamble,
+  articles,
+  amendments
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{preamble}
+\include{articles}
+\include{amendments}
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The file <file>preamble.tex</file> contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from <file>consitution.tex</file> and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter{Preamble}
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Running &latex; on <file>constitution.tex</file> makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files <file>preamble.aux</file>, <file>articles.aux</file>, and
+<file>amendments.tex</file>. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross references</xrefnodename></pxref>).  If you now comment out
+<code>\includeonly</code>&textrsquo;s lines with <code>preamble</code> and <code>amendments</code>
+and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from <file>articles.tex</file>, not the material from
+<file>preamble.tex</file> or <file>amendments.tex</file>.  Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+</para>
+<para>If the document preamble does not have <code>\includeonly</code> then
+&latex; will include all the files you call for with <code>\include</code>
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\include</code> command makes a new page.  To avoid that, see
+<ref label="_005cinput"><xrefnodename>\input</xrefnodename></ref> (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for another example using <code>\include</code>
+and <code>\includeonly</code>.  That example also uses <code>\input</code> for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+</para>
+<para>File names can involve paths.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  chapters/chap1,
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{chapters/chap1}
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name <samp>amo amas amat</samp>,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  "amo\space amas\space amat"
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+  {"amo amas amat"}
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\include{{"amo amas amat"}}
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="887">nested <code>\include</code>, not allowed</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>You cannot use <code>\include</code> inside a file that is being included or
+you get <samp>LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.</samp>  The
+<code>\include</code> command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Missing \begin{document}</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If a file that you <code>\include</code> does not exist, for instance if you
+<code>\include{athiesm}</code> but you meant <code>\include{atheism}</code>,
+then &latex; does not give you an error but will warn you <samp>No file
+athiesm.tex.</samp>  (It will also create <file>athiesm.aux</file>.)
+</para>
+<para>If you <code>\include</code> the root file in itself then you first get
+<samp>LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.</samp>  Later runs get
+<samp>TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]</samp>.  To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion <code>\include{root}</code> but also
+delete the file <file><var>root</var>.aux</file> and rerun &latex;.
+</para>
+
 </section>
-<node name="_005cinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\input</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\includeonly</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005cinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\input</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\include & \includeonly</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\input</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1008">\input</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1025" mergedindex="cp">\input</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\input{<var>file</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input{<var>filename</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\input</code> command causes the specified <var>file</var> to be read
-and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current
-file at that point.
+<para>&latex; processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file.  For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+<ref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include & \includeonly</xrefnodename></ref>.
 </para>
-<para>If <var>file</var> does not end in <samp>.tex</samp> (e.g., <samp>foo</samp> or
-<samp>foo.bar</samp>), it is first tried with that extension (<samp>foo.tex</samp>
-or <samp>foo.bar.tex</samp>).  If that is not found, the original <var>file</var>
-is tried (<samp>foo</samp> or <samp>foo.bar</samp>).
+<para>If <var>filename</var> does not end in <samp>.tex</samp> then &latex; first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case.  If
+<var>filename</var> ends with <samp>.tex</samp> then &latex; looks for the
+filename as it is.
 </para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input{macros}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will cause &latex; to first look for <file>macros.tex</file>. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in.  If there is no file of the name <file>macros.tex</file> then
+&latex; tries the name <file>macros</file>, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+</para>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores.  Nevertheless, for the name <samp>amo amas amat</samp>,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input{{"amo amas amat"}}
+</pre></example>
+
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Front_002fback-matter" spaces=" "><nodename>Front/back matter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Letters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Front/back matter</sectiontitle>
 
 <menu endspaces=" ">
-<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Tables of contents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Glossaries</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
-</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Indexes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">Table of contents etc.</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                  ">Indexes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate an index.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">Glossaries</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate a glossary.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="Tables-of-contents" spaces=" "><nodename>Tables of contents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Glossaries</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Tables of contents</sectiontitle>
+<node name="Table-of-contents-etc_002e" spaces=" "><nodename>Table of contents etc.</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Indexes</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Table of contents etc.</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="680">table of contents, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="888">table of contents, creating</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1009">\tableofcontents</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1010">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>A table of contents is produced with the <code>\tableofcontents</code>
-command.  You put the command right where you want the table of
-contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you.  A previous run must
-have generated a <file>.toc</file> file.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1026" mergedindex="cp">\tableofcontents</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1027" mergedindex="cp">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1028" mergedindex="cp">\listoffigures</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1029" mergedindex="cp">\listoftables</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1030" mergedindex="cp">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1031" mergedindex="cp">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
-<para>The <code>\tableofcontents</code> command produces a heading, but it does
-not automatically start a new page.  If you want a new page after the
-table of contents, write a <code>\newpage</code> command after the
-<code>\tableofcontents</code> command.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables.  Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands <code>\chapter</code>, etc.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1011">\listoffigures</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1012">\listoftables</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1013">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1014">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The analogous commands <code>\listoffigures</code> and <code>\listoftables</code>
-produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from <file>.lof</file> and
-<file>.lot</file> files), respectively.  Everything works exactly the same
-as for the table of contents.
+<para>This example illustrates the first command, <code>\tableofcontents</code>.
+&latex; will produce a table of contents on the book&textrsquo;s first page.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1015">\nofiles</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The command <code>\nofiles</code> overrides these commands, and
-<emph>prevents</emph> any of these lists from being generated.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+  ...
+\chapter{...}
+  ...
+\section{...}
+  ...
+\subsection{...}
+  ...
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+<code>\section</code> command has level 1.  <xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref> for level
+numbers of the sectioning units.  For more on the <code>tocdepth</code>
+<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>.
 </para>
+<para>Another example of the use of <code>\tableofcontents</code> is in <ref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger
+book template</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+<code>\newpage</code> command after the <code>\tableofcontents</code> command, as
+above.
+</para>
+<para>To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named <file><var>root-file</var>.toc</file> (<pxref label="Splitting-the-input"><xrefnodename>Splitting the
+input</xrefnodename></pxref>).  For example, this &latex; file <file>test.tex</file>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section{First section}
+\subsection{First subsection}
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>writes the following line to <file>test.toc</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>section</code> or <code>subsection</code> is the sectioning unit.  The
+hook <code>\numberline</code> lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents.  Of its two arguments, <code>1</code> or <code>1.1</code>
+is the sectioning unit number and <code>First section</code> or <code>First
+subsection</code> is the title.  Finally, <code>2</code> is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+</para>
+<para>One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it.  In particular, the first time that you
+run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its <samp>Contents</samp> header.  Just run it again.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <code>\listoffigures</code> and <code>\listoftables</code> produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables.  They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+<file>.lof</file> and <file>.lot</file> files.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="889"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="890"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="891"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="892"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="893"><r>package</r>, <code>tocloft</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="894"><code>tocloft</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="895"><r>package</r>, <code>tocbibbind</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="896"><code>tocbibbind</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables.  One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is <file>tocloft</file>.  And, <file>tocbibbind</file>
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+</para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::    ">\addcontentsline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::      ">\addtocontents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::            ">\nofiles</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="_005caddcontentsline" spaces=" "><nodename>\addcontentsline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Tables of contents</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005caddcontentsline" spaces=" "><nodename>\addcontentsline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addcontentsline</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1016">\addcontentsline</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="681">table of contents entry, manually adding</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1032" mergedindex="cp">\addcontentsline</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="897">table of contents entry, manually adding</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -12562,170 +17296,824 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline{<var>ext</var>}{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list
-or table where:
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1033" mergedindex="cp">\contentsline</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Add an entry to the file specified by <var>ext</var>.  Usually <var>ext</var> is
+one of <code>toc</code> for the table of contents, <code>lof</code> for the list of
+figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of tables.
 </para>
+<para>The following will result in an <samp>Appendices</samp> line in the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command writes information to the file
+<file><var>root-name</var>.<var>ext</var></file>.  It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+<code>\contentsline{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}{<var>num</var>}</code>, where
+<code><var>num</var></code> is the current value of counter <code><var>unit</var></code>.  The
+most common case is the table of contents and there <var>num</var> is the
+page number of the first page of <var>unit</var>.
+</para>
+<para>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <code>\chapter</code>,
+etc., and also by <code>\caption</code> inside a float environment.  But it is
+also used by authors.  For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred <code>\chapter*</code>.  But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter*{Preface}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the <file>.toc</file> file &latex; will put the line <code>\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</code>; note the page number
+<samp>3</samp>.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx how hardwired are these values?  other unit names? -->
+
+<para>All of the arguments for <code>\addcontentsline</code> are required.
+</para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ext</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The filename extension of the file on which information is to be written,
-typically one of: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of
-figures), or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Typically one of the strings <code>toc</code> for the table of contents,
+<code>lof</code> for the list of figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">unit</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
-following, matching the value of the <var>ext</var> argument:
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <var>ext</var> argument:
 </para>
 <table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">toc</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The name of the sectional unit: <code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>,
-<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, <code>subsubsection</code>.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lof</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+<code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>, <code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, etc.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lof</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>For the list of figures: <code>figure</code>.
-</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lot</itemformat></item>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lot</itemformat></item>
 </tableterm><tableitem><para>For the list of tables: <code>table</code>.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">text</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text of the entry.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text of the entry.  You must <code>\protect</code> any commands that are
+fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1017">\contentsline</indexterm></findex>
-<para>What is written to the <file>.<var>ext</var></file> file is the command
-<code>\contentsline{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}{<var>num</var>}</code>, where
-<code><var>num</var></code> is the current value of counter <code><var>unit</var></code>.
+<para>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (<pxref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include & \includeonly</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}</code> then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution
+is to move <code>\addcontentsline</code> into the file being included.
 </para>
-<!-- c xx how hardwired are these values?  other unit names? -->
+<para>If you use a <var>unit</var> that &latex; does not recognize, as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then you don&textrsquo;t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
-<node name="_005caddtocontents" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocontents</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\addcontentsline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Tables of contents</nodeup></node>
+<node name="_005caddtocontents" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocontents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\nofiles</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addcontentsline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
 <subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocontents</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1018">\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1034" mergedindex="cp">\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>The <code>\addtocontents</code>{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>} command adds text
-(or formatting commands) directly to the <file>.<var>ext</var></file> file that
-generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add <var>text</var>, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension <var>ext</var>.  This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+<samp>Contents</samp> header.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has two arguments.  Both are
+required.
+</para>
 <table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
 <tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ext</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
-typically one of: <file>toc</file> (table of contents), <file>lof</file> (list of
-figures), or <file>lot</file> (list of tables).
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Typically one of: <file>toc</file> for the table of contents, <file>lof</file> for
+the list of figures, or <file>lot</file> for the list of tables.  The
+extension of the file holding the information.
 </para>
 </tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">text</itemformat></item>
-</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text to be written.
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
 </para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
 
+<para>The sectioning commands such as <code>\chapter</code> use the
+<code>\addcontentsline</code> command to store information.  This command
+creates lines in the <file>.toc</file> auxiliary file containing the
+<code>\contentsline</code> command (<pxref label="_005caddcontentsline"><xrefnodename>\addcontentsline</xrefnodename></pxref>).  In contrast,
+the command <code>\addtocontents</code> puts material directly in that file.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (<pxref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include & \includeonly</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}</code> then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order.  The solution is to
+move <code>\addtocontents</code> into the file being included.
+</para>
 
 </subsection>
-</section>
-<node name="Glossaries" spaces=" "><nodename>Glossaries</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Indexes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Tables of contents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Glossaries</sectiontitle>
+<node name="_005cnofiles" spaces=" "><nodename>\nofiles</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\nofiles</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="682">glossaries</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1035" mergedindex="cp">\nofiles</indexterm></findex>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1019">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The command <code>\makeglossary</code> enables creating glossaries.
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1020">\glossary</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="683"><file>.glo</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The command <code>\glossary{<var>text</var>}</code> writes a glossary entry for
-<var>text</var> to an auxiliary file with the <file>.glo</file> extension.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nofiles
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Prevent &latex; from writing any auxiliary files.  The only output will
+be the <file>.log</file> and <file>.pdf</file> (or <file>.dvi</file>) files.  This command
+must go in the preamble.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1021">\glossaryentry</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Specifically, what gets written is the command
-<code>\glossaryentry{<var>text</var>}{<var>pageno</var>}</code>, where
-<var>pageno</var> is the current <code>\thepage</code> value.
+<para>Because of the <code>\nofiles</code> command this example will not produce a
+<file>.toc</file> file.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="684">glossary <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The <code>glossary</code> package on CTAN provides support for fancier
-glossaries.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{book}
+\nofiles
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter{...}
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>&latex; will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the <code>\nofiles</code> command after you have run the file and gotten
+a <file>.toc</file> then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
 </para>
 
+</subsection>
 </section>
-<node name="Indexes" spaces=" "><nodename>Indexes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Glossaries</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Indexes" spaces=" "><nodename>Indexes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Glossaries</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Indexes</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="685">indexes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="898">indexes</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1022">\makeindex</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The command <code>\makeindex</code> enables creating indexes.  Put this in
-the preamble.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1036" mergedindex="cp">\makeindex</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1037" mergedindex="cp">\index</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="899"><file>.idx</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This document has an index.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1023">\index</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="686"><file>.idx</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The command <code>\index{<var>text</var>}</code> writes an index entry for
-<var>text</var> to an auxiliary file named with the <file>.idx</file> extension.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+  ...
+\begin{document}
+  ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+  ...
+\printindex
+  ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>\usepackage{makeidx}</code> and <code>\makeindex</code> in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1024">\indexentry</indexterm></findex>
-<para>Specifically, what gets written is the command
-<code>\indexentry{<var>text</var>}{<var>pageno</var>}</code>, where <var>pageno</var>
-is the current <code>\thepage</code> value.
+<para>Producing an index is a three stage process.  First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the <code>\index</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005cindex"><xrefnodename>\index</xrefnodename></pxref>).  When you run &latex;, the <code>\index</code> writes its
+information to an auxiliary file <file><var>root-name</var>.idx</file>.  Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically <command>makeindex</command> or <command>xindy</command> (<pxref label="makeindex"><xrefnodename>makeindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+These output a file <file><var>root-name</var>.ind</file>.  Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+<code>\printindex</code> command (<pxref label="_005cprintindex"><xrefnodename>\printindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="687">&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces="  "><indexterm index="cp" number="688">index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo;</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>To generate a index entry for &textlsquo;bar&textrsquo; that says &textlsquo;See foo&textrsquo;, use a
-vertical bar: <code>\index{bar|see{foo}}</code>.  Use <code>seealso</code>
-instead of <code>see</code> to make a &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; entry.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="900"><r>package</r>, <code>showidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="901"><code>showidx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="902"><r>package</r>, <code>multind</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="903"><code>multind</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many packages that apply to indexing commands.  The
+<code>showidx</code> package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in preparing
+the index.  The <code>multind</code> package supports multiple indexes.  See
+also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</urefurl></url>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1025">\seename</indexterm></findex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1026">\alsoname</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The text &textlsquo;See&textrsquo; is defined by the macro <code>\seename</code>, and &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo;
-by the macro <code>\alsoname</code>.  These can be redefined for other
-languages.
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::        ">\index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declare an index entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">makeindex</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Alphabetize index entries.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">\printindex</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put the index here.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cindex" spaces=" "><nodename>\index</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">makeindex</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\index</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="904">index entry</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1038" mergedindex="cp">\index</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="689"><command>makeindex</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="690"><command>xindy</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="691"><file>.ind</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
-<para>The generated <file>.idx</file> file is then sorted with an external
-command, usually either <command>makeindex</command>
-(<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex</urefurl></url>) or (the
-multi-lingual) <command>xindy</command> (<url><urefurl>http://xindy.sourceforge.net</urefurl></url>).
-This results in a <file>.ind</file> file, which can then be read to typeset
-the index.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\index{<var>index-entry-string</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare an entry in the index.  This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1027">\printindex</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="692"><r>package</r>, <code>makeidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="693"><code>makeidx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>For example, as described in <ref label="Indexes"><xrefnodename>Indexes</xrefnodename></ref>, one way to get an index from
+what&textrsquo;s below is to compile the document with <code>pdflatex test</code>, then
+process the index entries with <code>makeindex test</code>, and then compile
+again with <code>pdflatex test</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+  ...
+Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+  ...
+rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>The index is usually generated with the <code>\printindex</code> command.
-This is defined in the <code>makeidx</code> package, so
-<code>\usepackage{makeidx}</code> needs to be in the preamble.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>All three index entries will get a page number, such as <samp>Ackermann,
+22</samp>.  &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries.  (If you add
+<code>\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}</code> then
+<command>makeindex</command> says <samp>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</samp> and nothing appears in the index).
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1028">\indexspace</indexterm></findex>
-<para>The rubber length <code>\indexspace</code> is inserted before each new
-letter in the printed index; its default value is <samp>10pt plus5pt
-minus3pt</samp>.
+<para>If you enter a second <code>\index</code> with the same
+<var>index-entry-string</var> then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page).  Thus,
+adding <code>as for Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}</code> later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like <samp>Ackermann, 22,
+151</samp>.  Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance <code>\index{Ackermann!function}</code> could come before
+<code>\index{Ackermann}</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="694"><r>package</r>, <code>showidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="695"><code>showidx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="905">index, page range</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Get a page range in the output, like <samp>Hilbert, 23--27</samp>, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+  ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+  ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+</pre></example>
 
-<para>The <code>showidx</code> package causes each index entries to be shown in
-the margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in
-preparing the index.
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="696"><r>package</r>, <code>multind</code></indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="697"><code>multind</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+<code>\index{Jones!program}</code> and <code>\index{Jones!results}</code>, then
+the output is the item <samp>Jones</samp> with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like <samp>program, 50</samp> and <samp>results,
+51</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="906">&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces="  "><indexterm index="cp" number="907">index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1039" mergedindex="cp">\seename</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1040" mergedindex="cp">\alsoname</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="908"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="909"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="910"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="911"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
 
-<para>The <code>multind</code> package supports multiple indexes.  See also the
-&tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
-<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</urefurl></url>.
+
+<para>Generate a index entry that says <samp>See</samp> by using a vertical bar
+character: <code>\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's
+function}}</code>.  You can instead get <samp>See also</samp> with <code>seealso</code>.
+(The text <samp>See</samp> is defined by <code>\seename</code>, and <samp>See also</samp>
+by <code>\alsoname</code>.  You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>,
+or directly as with <code>\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}</code>.)
 </para>
+<para>The <samp>See</samp> feature is part of a more general functionality.  After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+<code>\index{group|textit}</code> (note the missing backslash on the
+<code>\textit</code> command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like <code>\textit{7}</code>.  You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+<code>\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}</code> and then
+<code>\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}</code> will give a blue page
+number (<pxref label="Color"><xrefnodename>Color</xrefnodename></pxref>).  Another, less practical, example is this,
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Ian Thompson https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/272572/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+  ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+</para>
+<para>The two functions just described combine, as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+  ...
+\index{Ackermann!function|)}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which outputs an index entry like <samp>function, 23--27</samp> where the page
+number range is in blue.
+</para>
+<para>Consider an index entry such as <samp><U>03B1</U>-ring</samp>.  Entering
+it as <code>$\alpha$-ring</code> will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+<code>\index{alpha-ring&arobase;$\alpha$-ring}</code>.  If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, <code><var>pos</var>&arobase;<var>text</var></code>,
+then <var>pos</var> gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+<var>text</var> produces the text of the entry.  Another example is that
+<code>\index{Saint Michael's College&arobase;SMC}</code> produces an index entry
+<samp>SMC</samp> alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+</para>
+<para>To put a <code>!</code>, or <code>&arobase;</code>, or <code>|</code> character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, <code>"</code>.  (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="912"><r>package</r>, <code>index</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="913"><code>index</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by <file>makeidx</file>.  One is <file>index</file>, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+<code>\index*{<var>index-entry-string</var>}</code> that prints the
+<var>index-entry-string</var> as well as indexing it.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1041" mergedindex="cp">\indexentry</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="914">idx file</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>\index</code> command writes the indexing information to the file
+<file><var>root-name</var>.idx</file> file.  Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+<code>\indexentry{<var>index-entry-string</var>}{<var>page-num</var>}</code>, where
+where <var>page-num</var> is the value of the <code>\thepage</code> counter.  On
+occasion, when the <code>\printindex</code> command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+</para>
+<para>If you omit the closing brace of an <code>\index</code> command then you get a
+message like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Runaway argument?  {Ackermann!function
+!  Paragraph ended before \&arobase;wrindex was complete.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="makeindex" spaces=" "><nodename>makeindex</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\printindex</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\index</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><command>makeindex</command></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="915">index, processing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1042" mergedindex="cp">makeindex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="916"><command>makeindex</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="917"><file>.ind</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="918"><file>.idx</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">makeindex <var>filename</var>
+makeindex -s <var>style-file</var> <var>filename</var>
+makeindex <var>options</var> <var>filename0</var> ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+<var>filename</var>.  This is a command line program.  It takes one or more
+raw index files, <file><var>filename</var>.idx</file> files, and produces the
+actual index file, the <file><var>filename</var>.ind</file> file that is input by
+<code>\printindex</code> (<pxref label="_005cprintindex"><xrefnodename>\printindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="919"><file>.isty</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1043" mergedindex="cp">index, style file</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1044" mergedindex="cp">makeindex, style file</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The first form of the command suffices for many uses.  The second allows
+you to format the index by using an <dfn>index style file</dfn>, a
+<file>.isty</file> file.  The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This is a simple <file>.isty</file> file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">% book.isty 
+%   $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page. 
+preamble
+"\\pagestyle{empty}
+\\small
+\\begin{theindex}
+\\thispagestyle{empty}"
+
+postamble
+"\n
+\\end{theindex}"
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in <var>style-file</var>. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <var>specifier</var> and
+<var>attribute</var>.  These can appear in the file in any order.  All of the
+<var>attributes</var> are strings, except where noted.  Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, <code>"</code>, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters.  The <code>\n</code> is for a newline and <code>\t</code>
+is for a tab.  Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+<code>\\</code>.  If a line begins with a percent sign, <code>%</code>, then it is a
+comment.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="makeindex-preamble">makeindex preamble</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1045" mergedindex="cp">preamble</indexterm>preamble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted.  Default: <code>"\\begin{theindex}\n"</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-postamble">makeindex postamble</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1046" mergedindex="cp">postamble</indexterm>postamble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Postamble of the output file.  Default: <code>"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-group-skip">makeindex group skip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1047" mergedindex="cp">group_skip</indexterm>group_skip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1048" mergedindex="cp">\indexspace</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with <samp>a</samp>, etc.  This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins.  Default: <code>"\n\n \\indexspace\n"</code>
+(<code>\indexspace</code> is a rubber length with default value <code>10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt</code>).
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-letheadflag">makeindex letheadflag</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1049" mergedindex="cp">lethead_flag</indexterm>lethead_flag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>An integer.  It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.  If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than <code>group_skip</code> nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is is positive then at a new
+letter the <code>lethead_prefix</code> and <code>lethead_suffix</code> will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them.  If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.  The default
+is 0.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-lethead-prefix">makeindex lethead prefix</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1050" mergedindex="cp">lethead_prefix</indexterm>lethead_prefix</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header.  Default: <code>""</code>
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-lethead-suffix">makeindex lethead suffix</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1051" mergedindex="cp">lethead_suffix</indexterm>lethead_suffix</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header.  Default: <code>""</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-0">makeindex item 0</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1052" mergedindex="cp">item_0</indexterm>item_0 </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between two level 0 items.  Default: <code>"\n \\item
+"</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-1">makeindex item 1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1053" mergedindex="cp">item_1</indexterm>item_1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put between two level 1 items.  Default: <code>"\n \\subitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-2">makeindex item 2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1054" mergedindex="cp">item_2</indexterm>item_2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>put between two level 2 items.  Default: <code>"\n \\subsubitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-01">makeindex item 01</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1055" mergedindex="cp">item_01</indexterm>item_01</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item.
+Default: <code>"\n \\subitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-x1">makeindex item x1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1056" mergedindex="cp">item_x1</indexterm>item_x1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the
+case that the level 0 item doesn&textrsquo;t have any page numbers (as in
+<code>\index{aaa|see{bbb}}</code>).  Default: <code>"\n \\subitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-12">makeindex item 12</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1057" mergedindex="cp">item_12</indexterm>item_12</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item.
+Default: <code>"\n \\subsubitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-x2">makeindex item x2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1058" mergedindex="cp">item_x2</indexterm>item_x2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
+level 1 item doesn&textrsquo;t have page numbers.  Default: <code>"\n
+\\subsubitem "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-0">makeindex delim 0</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1059" mergedindex="cp">delim_0</indexterm>delim_0</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>", "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-1">makeindex delim 1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1060" mergedindex="cp">delim_1</indexterm>delim_1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>", "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-2">makeindex delim 2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1061" mergedindex="cp">delim_2</indexterm>delim_2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, <code>", "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-n">makeindex delim n</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1062" mergedindex="cp">delim_n</indexterm>delim_n</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>", "</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-r">makeindex delim r</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1063" mergedindex="cp">delim_r</indexterm>delim_r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: <code>"--"</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-line-max">makeindex line max</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1064" mergedindex="cp">line_max</indexterm>line_max</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>An integer.  Maximum length of an index entry&textrsquo;s line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps.  Default: <code>72</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-indent-space">makeindex indent space</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1065" mergedindex="cp">indent_space</indexterm>indent_space</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line.  Default:
+<code>"\t\t"</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-indent-length">makeindex indent length</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1066" mergedindex="cp">indent_length</indexterm>indent_length</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A number.  The length of the wrapped line indentation.  The default
+<code>indent_space</code> is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is <code>16</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-page-precedence">makeindex page precedence</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1067" mergedindex="cp">page_precedence</indexterm>page_precedence</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A document may have pages numbered in different ways.  For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic.  This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index.  The <command>makeindex</command> command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman <code>r</code>, and numeric
+or arabic <code>n</code>, and lowercase alphabetic <code>a</code>, and uppercase
+roman <code>R</code>, and uppercase alphabetic <code>A</code>.  Default:
+<code>"rnaRA"</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1068" mergedindex="cp">xindy</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="920"><command>xindy</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>There are a number of other programs that do the job <command>makeindex</command>
+does.  One is <command>xindy</command>, which does internationalization and can
+process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of
+other languages.  It is is highly configurable, both in markup terms and
+in terms of the collating order of the text.  See the documentation on
+CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cprintindex" spaces=" "><nodename>\printindex</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">makeindex</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><command>\printindex</command></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="921">index, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1069" mergedindex="cp">\printindex</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\printindex
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1070" mergedindex="cp">\printindex</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Place the index into the output.
+</para>
+<para>To get an index you must first include
+<code>\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex</code> in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command <command>makeindex</command>,
+and then compile the document again.  <xref label="Indexes"><xrefnodename>Indexes</xrefnodename></xref> for further
+discussion and an example of the use of <code>\printindex</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
 </section>
+<node name="Glossaries" spaces=" "><nodename>Glossaries</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Indexes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Glossaries</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="922">glossary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="923">glossaries</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="924">acronyms, list of</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1071" mergedindex="cp">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1072" mergedindex="cp">\printglossaries</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+  ...
+\newglossaryentry{<var>label</var>}{<var>settings</var>}  
+  ...
+\gls{<var>label</var>}.  
+  ...
+\printglossaries
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <file>glossaries</file> package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+</para>
+<para>To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with <code>pdflatex filename</code>), then run the command line command
+<code>makeglossaries filename</code>, and then compile the document again.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{...}  
+\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+  name={Turing machine},
+  description={A model of a machine that computes.  The model is simple
+               but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+               It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+  }  
+\begin{document}  
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.  
+  ...
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That gives two things.  In the main text it outputs <samp>... definition
+of a Turing machine</samp>.  In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+<samp>Glossary</samp> there appears a description list.  In boldface it says
+<samp>Turing machine</samp> and the rest of the item says in normal type
+<samp>A model of a machine &dots; Computer Science</samp>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1073" mergedindex="cp">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1074" mergedindex="cp">\printglossaries</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="925"><file>.glo</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The command <code>\makeglossary</code> opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, <file><var>root-file</var>.glo</file>.  Put the
+<code>\printglossaries</code> command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+</para>
+<para>The <file>glossaries</file> package is very powerful.  For instance, besides
+the commands <code>\newglossaryentry</code> and <code>\gls</code>, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms.  See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::  ">\newglossaryentry</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declare the content of a glossary entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::               ">\gls</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Give a page reference for a glossary entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cnewglossaryentry" spaces=" "><nodename>\newglossaryentry</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\gls</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Glossaries</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newglossaryentry</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="926">glossary, entries</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1075" mergedindex="cp">\newglossaryentry</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of: 
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry{<var>label</var>} 
+{ 
+  name={<var>name</var>}, 
+  description={<var>description</var>}, 
+  <var>other options</var>, ... 
+}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\longnewglossaryentry{<var>label</var>} 
+{ 
+  name={<var>name</var>}, 
+  <var>other options</var> ..., 
+} 
+{<var>description</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare a new entry for a glossary.  The <var>label</var> must be unique for
+the document.  The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+<code><var>key</var>=<var>value</var></code>.
+</para>
+<para>This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers <U>211D</U> in the
+glossary.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry{R}  
+{  
+  name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},  
+  description={the real numbers},  
+}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use the second command form if the <var>description</var> spans more than one
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>For a full list of <var>key</var>s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1076" mergedindex="cp">name</indexterm>name</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1077" mergedindex="cp">description</indexterm>description</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1078" mergedindex="cp">plural</indexterm>plural</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The plural form of <var>name</var>.  Refer to the plural form using
+<code>\glspl</code> or <code>\Glspl</code> (<pxref label="_005cgls"><xrefnodename>\gls</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1079" mergedindex="cp">sort</indexterm>sort</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1080" mergedindex="cp">symbol</indexterm>symbol</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cgls" spaces=" "><nodename>\gls</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\newglossaryentry</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Glossaries</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\gls</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="927">glossary, entry reference</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1081" mergedindex="cp">\gls</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of: 
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\gls{<var>label</var>}
+\glspl{<var>label</var>}
+\Gls{<var>label</var>}
+\Glspl{<var>label</var>}
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Refer to a glossary entry.  The entries are declared with
+<code>\newglossaryentry</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewglossaryentry"><xrefnodename>\newglossaryentry</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry{N}{%
+  name={the natural numbers},
+  description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\&arobase;},
+  symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+  }  
+  ...
+Consider \gls{N}.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives the output <samp>Consider the natural numbers</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The second command form <code>\glspl{<var>label</var>}</code> produces the plural
+of <var>name</var> (by default it tries adding an <samp>s</samp>).  The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of <var>name</var>, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Letters" spaces=" "><nodename>Letters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Letters</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="698">letters, writing</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="699">writing letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="928">letters, writing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="929">writing letters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis: 
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{letter}
-\address{<var>sender address</var>}
+\address{<var>senders address</var>}   % return address
 \signature{<var>sender name</var>}
 \begin{document}
 \begin{letter}{<var>recipient address</var>}
@@ -12733,7 +18121,7 @@
   <var>letter body</var>
 \closing{<var>closing text</var>}
 \end{letter}
-...  more letters ...
+   ...
 \end{document}
 </pre></example>
 
@@ -12741,12 +18129,11 @@
 </para>
 <para>Each letter is in a separate <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument
 <var>recipient address</var> often contains multiple lines separated with a
-double backslash (<code>\\</code>).  For example, you might have:
+double backslash, (<code>\\</code>).  For example, you might have:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve"> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\ 
-      2345 Princess St. \\ 
-      Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+                l'h\^otel Sagonne}
    ...
  \end{letter}
 </pre></example>
@@ -12760,29 +18147,29 @@
 contains multiple lines separated by a double
 backslash (<code>\\</code>).  &latex; will put the <var>sender name</var>
 under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
-hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
+hand-written signature.
 </para>
-<para>Each <code>letter</code> environment body begins with a required <code>\opening</code> command
-such as <code>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</code>.  The <var>letter body</var>
-text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain everything from
-enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands such as
-<code>\chapter</code> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.  Each
-<code>letter</code> environment body typically ends with a <code>\closing</code>
-command such as <code>\closing{Yours,}</code>.
+<para>Each <code>letter</code> environment body begins with a required
+<code>\opening</code> command such as <code>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</code>.
+The <var>letter body</var> text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as <code>\chapter</code> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each <code>letter</code> environment body typically ends with a
+<code>\closing</code> command such as <code>\closing{Yours,}</code>.
 </para>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1029">\\ <r>for letters</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1082" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for letters</r></indexterm></findex>
 <para>Additional material may come after the <code>\closing</code>.  You can say who
 is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like <code>\cc{the
 Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}</code>.  There&textrsquo;s a similar <code>\encl</code> command for
 a list of enclosures.  And, you can add a postscript with <code>\ps</code>.
 </para>
-<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default is to indent the signature and the <code>\closing</code>
-above it by a length of <code>\longindentation</code>.  By default this is
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of <code>\longindentation</code>.  By default this is
 <code>0.5\textwidth</code>. To make them flush left, put
 <code>\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}</code> in your preamble.
 </para>
 <para>To set a fixed date use something like
-<code>\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}</code>.  If put in your preamble
+<code>\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}</code>.  If put in your preamble
 then it will apply to all the letters.
 </para>
 <para>This example shows only one <code>letter</code> environment.  The three lines
@@ -12817,7 +18204,6 @@
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                       ">\opening</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Saying hello.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                            ">\ps</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Adding a postscript.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">\signature</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s signature.
-<!-- c ?Not user-level? * \stopbreaks and \startbreaks::   Disallow and allow page breaks. -->
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::                     ">\telephone</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s phone number.
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
@@ -12825,7 +18211,7 @@
 <node name="_005caddress" spaces=" "><nodename>\address</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cc</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\address</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1030">\address</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1083" mergedindex="cp">\address</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis: 
 </para>
@@ -12833,19 +18219,18 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\address{<var>senders address</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
+<para>Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
 envelope.  Separate multiple lines in <var>senders address</var> with a
-double backslash <code>\\</code>.
+double backslash, <code>\\</code>.
 </para>
 <para>Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
 in the preamble.  However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
 individual <code>letter</code> environment.
 </para>
-<para>This command is optional: without the <code>\address</code> declaration the
-letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
-pre-printed letterhead paper.  (<xref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></xref>, for details on your
-local implementation.)  With the <code>\address</code> declaration, it is
-formatted as a personal letter.
+<para>This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper.  If you do use the <code>\address</code> declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
 </para>
 <para>Here is an example.
 </para>
@@ -12859,20 +18244,20 @@
 <node name="_005ccc" spaces=" "><nodename>\cc</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\closing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\address</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cc</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1031">\cc</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="700">cc list, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1084" mergedindex="cp">\cc</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="930">cc list, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\cc{<var>first name</var> \\ 
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cc{<var>name0</var> \\ 
      ... }
 </pre></example>
 
 <para>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.  This
 command is optional.  If it appears then typically it comes after
-<code>\closing</code>.  Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <code>\\</code>, as in:
+<code>\closing</code>.  Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>, as in:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\cc{President \\
@@ -12884,9 +18269,9 @@
 <node name="_005cclosing" spaces=" "><nodename>\closing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\encl</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cc</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\closing</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1032">\closing</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="701">letters, ending</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="702">closing letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1085" mergedindex="cp">\closing</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="931">letters, ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="932">closing letters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -12894,8 +18279,8 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\closing{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature, there
-is a <code>\closing</code> (although this command is optional).  For example,
+<para>Produce the letter&textrsquo;s closing.  This is optional, but usual.  It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature.  For example:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\closing{Regards,}
@@ -12906,8 +18291,8 @@
 <node name="_005cencl" spaces=" "><nodename>\encl</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\location</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\closing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\encl</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1033">\encl</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="703">enclosure list</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1086" mergedindex="cp">\encl</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="933">enclosure list</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -12918,11 +18303,11 @@
 
 <para>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
 optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <code>\closing</code>.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash <code>\\</code>.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\encl{License \\
-       Passport }
+      Passport}
 </pre></example>
 
 
@@ -12930,7 +18315,7 @@
 <node name="_005clocation" spaces=" "><nodename>\location</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makelabels</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\encl</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\location</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1034">\location</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1087" mergedindex="cp">\location</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -12938,7 +18323,7 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\location{<var>text</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>The <var>text</var> appears centered at the bottom of the each page.  It only
+<para>The <var>text</var> appears centered at the bottom of the page.  It only
 appears if the page style is <code>firstpage</code>.
 </para>
 
@@ -12946,37 +18331,77 @@
 <node name="_005cmakelabels" spaces=" "><nodename>\makelabels</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\name</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\location</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makelabels</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1035">\makelabels</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1088" mergedindex="cp">\makelabels</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\makelabels
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makelabels   % in preamble
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one for
-each letter. This sheet will be output before the letters, with the idea
-that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels.  This command goes
-in the preamble.
+<para>Optional, for a document that contains <code>letter</code> environments.  If
+you just put <code>\makelabels</code> in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
 </para>
 <para>Customize the labels by redefining the commands <code>\startlabels</code>,
-<code>\mlabel</code>, and <code>\returnaddress</code> in the preamble.  The command
-<code>\startlabels</code> sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of
-the page onto which the labels are printed.  The command
-<code>\mlabel{<var>sender address</var>}{<var>recipient address</var>}</code>
-produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the <var>sender
-address</var>). The <var>sender address</var> is the value returned by the macro
-<code>\returnaddress</code> while <var>recipient address</var> is the value passed
-in the argument to the <code>letter</code> environment.  By default
-<code>\mlabel</code> ignores the first argument, the <var>sender address</var>.
+<code>\mlabel</code>, and <code>\returnaddress</code> (and perhaps <code>\name</code>) in
+the preamble.  The command <code>\startlabels</code> sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command <code>\mlabel{<var>return address</var>}{<var>recipient
+address</var>}</code> produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+<var>return address</var>) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+<var>return address</var>, is the value returned by the macro
+<code>\returnaddress</code>.  The second argument, <var>recipient address</var>, is
+the value passed in the argument to the <code>letter</code> environment.  By
+default <code>\mlabel</code> ignores the first argument, the <var>return
+address</var>, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
 </para>
-<!-- c xxx TODO, align on latex2e-fr.texi, see https://mail.gna.org/public/latexrefman-discuss/2015-10/msg00000.html -->
+<para>This illustrates customization.  Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass{letter}
+\renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+                               Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+\makelabels
+  ...
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+               112 Mercer Street \\
+               Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+  ...
+\end{letter}
+\begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\
+               145 Linden Lane \\
+               Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+  ...
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first column contains the return address twice.  The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="934"><r>package</r>, <code>envlab</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="935"><code>envlab</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <code>envlab</code> makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided.  The preamble lines
+<code>\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}</code> and <code>\makelabels</code>
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005cname" spaces=" "><nodename>\name</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\opening</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makelabels</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\name</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1036">\name</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1089" mergedindex="cp">\name</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -12984,26 +18409,25 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\name{<var>name</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Sender&textrsquo;s name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
-return address.
+<para>Optional.  Sender&textrsquo;s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
 </para>
 
 </section>
 <node name="_005copening" spaces=" "><nodename>\opening</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ps</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\name</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\opening</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1037">\opening</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="704">letters, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1090" mergedindex="cp">\opening</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="936">letters, starting</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening{<var>text</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening{<var>salutation</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>This command is required.  It starts a letter, following the
-<code>\begin{letter}{...}</code>. The mandatory argument <var>text</var> is the
-text that starts your letter.  For instance:
+<para>Required.  Follows the <code>\begin{letter}{...}</code>. The argument
+<var>salutation</var> is mandatory.  For instance:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\opening{Dear John:}
@@ -13013,8 +18437,8 @@
 </section>
 <node name="_005cps" spaces=" "><nodename>\ps</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\signature</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\opening</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ps</code></sectiontitle>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1038">\ps</indexterm></findex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="705">postscript, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1091" mergedindex="cp">\ps</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="937">postscript, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -13041,15 +18465,15 @@
             ... }
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1039">\signature</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1092" mergedindex="cp">\signature</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>The sender&textrsquo;s name.  This command is optional, although its inclusion is
 usual.
 </para>
-<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
-and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written
+<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+&latex; leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
 signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <code>\\</code>.  For example:
+backslash, <code>\\</code>.  For example:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
@@ -13058,18 +18482,26 @@
 
 <para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default for the vertical space from the <code>\closing</code> text
 down to the <code>\signature</code> text is <code>6\medskipamount</code>, which is
-six times 0.7<dmn>em</dmn>.
+six times <code>\medskipamount</code> (where <code>\medskipamount</code> is equal to
+a <code>\parskip</code>, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7<dmn>em</dmn>).
 </para>
 <para>This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
 the document.  To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
 <code>letter</code> environment and before the <code>\closing</code>.
 </para>
-<para>You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
-<code>\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
-My name}</code> (this requires writing <code>\usepackage{graphicx}</code> in the
-preamble).
+<para>You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
 </para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+             My name}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For this you must put <code>\usepackage{graphicx}</code> in the preamble
+(<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
 <!-- c I think this is not a user-level command; it is used to keep from breaking -->
 <!-- c the page between the closing and the signature -->
 <!-- c @node \stopbreaks and \startbreaks -->
@@ -13092,7 +18524,7 @@
 <node name="_005ctelephone" spaces=" "><nodename>\telephone</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\signature</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\telephone</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1040">\telephone</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1093" mergedindex="cp">\telephone</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -13111,8 +18543,8 @@
 <node name="Terminal-input_002foutput" spaces=" "><nodename>Terminal input/output</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Command line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Letters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Terminal input/output</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="706">input/output, to terminal</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="707">terminal input/output</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="938">input/output, to terminal</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="939">terminal input/output</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::             ">\typein</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Read text from the terminal.
@@ -13121,30 +18553,72 @@
 
 
 <node name="_005ctypein" spaces=" "><nodename>\typein</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\typeout</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typein</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1041">\typein</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1094" mergedindex="cp">\typein</indexterm></findex>
 
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein[\<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein{<var>prompt-msg</var>}
+\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>prompt-msg</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para><code>\typein</code> prints <var>msg</var> on the terminal and causes &latex; to
-stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return.  If
-the optional <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> argument is omitted, the typed input is
-processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the
-<code>\typein</code> command.  If the <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> argument is present, it
-must be a command name.  This command name is then defined or
-redefined to be the typed input.
+<para>Print <var>prompt-msg</var> on the terminal and cause &latex; to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input.  This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
 </para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>coupled with this command line interaction
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Enter student name:
+
+\&arobase;typein=Aphra Behn
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives the output <samp>... never forget Aphra Behn</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The first command version, <code>\typein{<var>prompt-msg</var>}</code>, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>In the second command version the optional argument <code><var>cmd</var></code>
+argument must be a command name &textmdash; it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed.  For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives this output on the command line,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>where the user has entered <samp>John Dee.</samp>
+</para>
+
 </section>
 <node name="_005ctypeout" spaces=" "><nodename>\typeout</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\typein</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeup></node>
-<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typeout{<var>msg</var>}</code></sectiontitle>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typeout</code></sectiontitle>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1042">\typeout</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1095" mergedindex="cp">\typeout</indexterm></findex>
 
 <para>Synopsis:
 </para>
@@ -13152,58 +18626,336 @@
 <pre xml:space="preserve">\typeout{<var>msg</var>}
 </pre></example>
 
-<para>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file.
-Commands in <code>msg</code> that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
+<para>Print <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>outputs <samp>Recommendation for John Dee</samp>.  Like what happens here with
+<code>\student</code>, commands that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
 <code>\renewcommand</code> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
 before being printed.
 </para>
 <para>&latex;&textrsquo;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <code>msg</code>.  A
-<code>\space</code> command in <code>msg</code> causes a single space to be
-printed, independent of surrounding spaces.  A <code>^^J</code> in
-<code>msg</code> prints a newline.
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <code>msg</code>.  As above,
+use the command <code>\space</code> to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces.  Use <code>^^J</code> to get a newline.  Get a percent
+character with <code>\csname &arobase;percentchar\endcsname</code>.
 </para>
+<para>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength{\jhlength}
+\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+</pre></example>
 
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces on the command line <samp>The length is 5.0pt</samp>.
+</para>
+
 </section>
 </chapter>
 <node name="Command-line" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Document templates</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="708">command line</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="940">command line</indexterm></cindex>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1043">.tex, <r>default extension</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
-&tex; uses <file>.tex</file> as a default file extension.  If you omit the
-input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal.  You can
-also specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting with a backslash.
-For example, this processes <file>foo.tex</file> without pausing after every
-error:
+<para>Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
 </para>
 <example endspaces=" ">
-<pre xml:space="preserve">latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex <var>options</var> <var>argument</var>
 </pre></example>
 
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1044">--help <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
-<para>With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also
-be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with <samp>-</samp> or
-<samp>--</samp>.  For a list of those options, try <samp>latex --help</samp>.
+<para>Run &latex; on <var>argument</var>.  In place of <command>pdflatex</command> you can
+also use <command>xelatex</command>, or <code>lualatex</code>, or <code>dviluatex</code>, or
+<code>latex</code>.
 </para>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="709"><samp>*</samp> prompt</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="710">prompt, <samp>*</samp></indexterm></cindex>
-<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1045">\stop</indexterm></findex>
-<para>If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a
-<samp>*</samp> prompt, it is waiting for input.  You can type <code>\stop</code>
-(and return) and it will prematurely end the document.
+<para>For example, this will run &latex; on the file <file>thesis.tex</file>,
+creating the output <file>thesis.pdf</file>.
 </para>
-<para><xref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></xref>, for other system commands invoking &latex;.
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex thesis
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1096" mergedindex="cp">.tex, <r>default extension</r></indexterm></findex>
+Note that <file>.tex</file> is the default file extension.
 </para>
+<para>pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are
+Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>).  They are completely
+backward compatible.  But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF.  This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs.  In short, if you run <command>pdflatex</command> or
+<command>xelatex</command> or <command>lualatex</command> then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features.  If you run <command>latex</command>,
+or <code>dvilualatex</code>, then you will get DVI.  The description here
+assumes pdf&latex;.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Command-line-options"><xrefnodename>Command line options</xrefnodename></xref>, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to <var>argument</var>, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If <var>argument</var> begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of &latex;
+input, which can be used for special effects (<pxref label="Command-line-input"><xrefnodename>Command line
+input</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you gave no arguments or options then <command>pdflatex</command> prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+<code><control>-D</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it.  <xref label="Recovering-from-errors"><xrefnodename>Recovering from errors</xrefnodename></xref> for an outline of what
+to do.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::     ">Command line options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Read text from the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::       ">Command line input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Write text to the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::   ">Recovering from errors</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">When something goes wrong.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
+
+<node name="Command-line-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Command line input</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line options</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="941">options, command line</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running <samp>latex --help</samp> from the
+command line.
+</para>
+<para>With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with <samp>-</samp> or <samp>--</samp>.  This is the case for
+both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;.  We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1097" mergedindex="cp">--version <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-version</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Show the current version, like <samp>pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)</samp> along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1098" mergedindex="cp">--help <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-help</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1099" mergedindex="cp">--interaction <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-interaction=<var>mode</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+<code>batchmode</code>, <code>nonstopmode</code>, <code>scrollmode</code>,
+<code>errorstopmode</code>. In <dfn>errorstop mode</dfn> (the default), &tex;
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In <dfn>batch
+mode</dfn> it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit <code><return></code> at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In <dfn>nonstop mode</dfn>, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+<dfn>scroll mode</dfn>, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, starting &latex; with this command line
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -interaction=batchmode <var>filename</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>eliminates most terminal output.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1100" mergedindex="cp">--jobname <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-jobname=<var>string</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Set the value of &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>jobname</code> to the string.  The log file
+and output file will then be named <file><var>string</var>.log</file> and
+<file><var>string</var>.pdf</file>.
+</para>
+<para>When you run <code><command>pdflatex</command> <var>options</var> <var>argument</var></code>, if
+<var>argument</var> does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+<code>\input</code> instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file.  This option
+overrides that process and directly specifies the name.  <xref label="Command-line-input"><xrefnodename>Command
+line input</xrefnodename></xref> for an example of its use.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1101" mergedindex="cp">--output-directory <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-output-directory=<var>directory</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Write files in the directory <var>directory</var>.  It must already exist.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1102" mergedindex="cp">--shell-escape <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1103" mergedindex="cp">--no-shell-escape <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1104" mergedindex="cp">--enable-write18 <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1105" mergedindex="cp">--disable-write18 <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">shell-escape</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">no-shell-escape</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">enable-write18</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">disable-write18</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable <code>\write18{<var>shell command</var>}</code>.  The first two
+options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are
+for MiK&tex;.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="942"><r>package</r>, <code>sagetex</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="943"><code>sagetex</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+&latex; file. For instance the package <file>sagetex</file> allows you to
+have the mathematics software system <i>Sage</i> do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document.  For this
+&tex; provides the <code>\write18</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a &latex; file from the Internet.  By default <code>\write18</code>
+is disabled.  (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and
+MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+</para>
+<para>If you invoke &latex; with the option <code>no-shell-escape</code>, and in
+your document you call <code>\write18{ls -l}</code>, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says <samp>runsystem(ls -l)...disabled</samp>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1106" mergedindex="cp">--halt-on-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-halt-on-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stop processing at the first error.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1107" mergedindex="cp">--file-line-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1108" mergedindex="cp">--no-file-line-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-file-line-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-no-file-line-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable <code><var>filename</var>:<var>lineno</var>:<var>error</var></code>-style
+error messages.  These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Command-line-input" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line input</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Recovering from errors</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line input</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="944">input, on command line</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>As part of the command line invocation <code>pdflatex <var>options</var>
+<var>argument</var></code> you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting
+<var>argument</var> with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="945"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="946"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For example, this file (which uses the <file>hyperref</file> package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ifdefined\paperversion        % in preamble
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+\else
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+  ...
+\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN}  % in body
+  ...
+</pre></example> 
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Compiling this document <file>book.tex</file> with the command line
+<code>pdflatex test</code> will give the <samp>CTAN</samp> link in blue.  But
+compiling it with <code>pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input test.tex"</code>
+has the link in black.  (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+</para>
+<para>In a similar way, from the single file <file>main.tex</file> you can compile
+two different versions.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Paul Gaborit: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/220101/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>jobname</code> option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called <file>main.pdf</file> and the second would overwrite the first.
+</para>
+<para>A final example.  This loads the package <file>graphicx</file> with the option
+<code>draft</code>
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Herbert Voss: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/17236/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF.  (The <code>jobname</code> option is needed because
+otherwise the output file would be <file>graphicx.pdf</file>, as
+<code>\RequirePackage</code> does an <code>\input</code> of its own.)
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Recovering-from-errors" spaces=" "><nodename>Recovering from errors</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line input</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Recovering from errors</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, <code>?</code>.  For instance,
+running &latex; on this file
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>causes it show this, and wait for input.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+           {} problem is a million dollar one.
+? 
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <samp>x</samp> and <code><return></code> and fix the
+typo.  You could instead enter <samp>?</samp> and <code><return></code> to see other
+options.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="947"><samp>*</samp> prompt</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="948">prompt, <samp>*</samp></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1109" mergedindex="cp">\stop</indexterm></findex>
+<para>There are two other error scenarios.  The first is that you forgot to
+include the <code>\end{document}</code> or misspelled it.  In this case
+&latex; gives you a <samp>*</samp> prompt.  You can get back to the command
+line by typing <code>\stop</code> and <code><return></code>.
+</para>
+<para>The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name.  For instance,
+instead of <code>pdflatex test</code> you might type <code>pdflatex tste</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">! I can't find file `tste'.
+<*> tste
+        
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <code><Contol></code> and <samp>d</samp> (holding
+them down at the same time), and just fix the command line.
+</para>
+
+</section>
 </chapter>
-<node name="Document-templates" spaces=" "><nodename>Document templates</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Concept Index</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Document-templates" spaces=" "><nodename>Document templates</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Index</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
 <appendix spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document templates</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="711">document templates</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="712">templates, document</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="949">document templates</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="950">templates, document</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
 be useful.  Additional template resources are listed at
@@ -13211,16 +18963,18 @@
 </para>
 <menu endspaces=" ">
 <menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">beamer template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">article template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">book template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Larger book template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">tugboat template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
 </pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
 
 
-<node name="beamer-template" spaces=" "><nodename>beamer template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">book template</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<node name="beamer-template" spaces=" "><nodename>beamer template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">article template</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>beamer</code> template</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="713"><code>beamer</code> template and class</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="714">template, <code>beamer</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="951"><code>beamer</code> template and class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="952">template, <code>beamer</code></indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para>The <code>beamer</code> class creates presentation slides.  It has a vast
 array of features, but here is a basic template:
@@ -13254,11 +19008,40 @@
 </para>
 
 </section>
-<node name="book-template" spaces=" "><nodename>book template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tugboat template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">beamer template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<node name="article-template" spaces=" "><nodename>article template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">book template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">beamer template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>article</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="953">template, <code>article</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="book-template" spaces=" "><nodename>book template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Larger book template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">article template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>book</code> template</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="715">template, <code>book</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="954">template, <code>book</code></indexterm></cindex>
 
+<para>This is a straightforward template for a book.  See <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book
+template</xrefnodename></xref> for a more elaborate one.
+</para>
 <verbatim xml:space="preserve">
 \documentclass{book}
 \title{Book Class Template}
@@ -13280,12 +19063,69 @@
 
 
 </section>
-<node name="tugboat-template" spaces=" "><nodename>tugboat template</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">book template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<node name="Larger-book-template" spaces=" "><nodename>Larger book template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tugboat template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">book template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Larger <code>book</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="955">template, <code>book</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This is a more elaborate template for a book.  It has
+<code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, and <code>\backmatter</code> to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(<pxref label="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"><xrefnodename>\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter</xrefnodename></pxref>).  The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+</para>
+<para>Notable is that it uses <code>\include</code> and <code>\includeonly</code>
+(<pxref label="Splitting-the-input"><xrefnodename>Splitting the input</xrefnodename></pxref>).  While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+<code>\includeonly</code>.  That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references.  (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with <code>\input</code> instead of
+<code>\include</code>.  You don&textrsquo;t get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+  frontcover,
+  preface,
+  chap1,
+  ...
+  }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+  % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="tugboat-template" spaces=" "><nodename>tugboat template</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Larger book template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
 <section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tugboat</code> template</sectiontitle>
 
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="716">template, TUGboat</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="717">TUGboat template</indexterm></cindex>
-<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="718"><code>ltugboat</code> class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="956">template, TUGboat</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="957">TUGboat template</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="958"><code>ltugboat</code> class</indexterm></cindex>
 
 <para><cite>TUGboat</cite> is the journal of the &tex; Users Group,
 <url><urefurl>http://tug.org/TUGboat</urefurl></url>.
@@ -13375,18 +19215,14 @@
 
 </section>
 </appendix>
-<node name="Concept-Index" spaces=" "><nodename>Concept Index</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Command Index</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Document templates</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
-<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Concept Index</sectiontitle>
+<node name="Index" spaces=" "><nodename>Index</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Document templates</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Index</sectiontitle>
 
+<!-- c Keep `Command Index' working for ltx-help.el. -->
+<anchor name="Command-Index">Command Index</anchor>
+
 <printindex value="cp" line=" cp"></printindex>
 
-<!-- c The name of the `Command Index' node must NOT be altered for ltx-help.el. -->
 </unnumbered>
-<node name="Command-Index" spaces=" "><nodename>Command Index</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Concept Index</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
-<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command Index</sectiontitle>
-
-<printindex value="fn" line=" fn"></printindex>
-
-</unnumbered>
 <bye></bye>
 </texinfo>